*n x ~ ~ r T~" = : ——^Z : 7 ^mufwwfmmm^ 
 
 i'llllTEB STATES OF AMERICA..! % 
 
FIBST BOOK IN SPANISH; 
 
 A PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY 
 
 SPANISH LANGUAGE: 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 FULL INSTRUCTIONS IN PRONUNCIATION, A GRAMMAR; EXER- 
 CISES ON THE OLLENDORFF METHOD OF CONSTANT 
 DIITATION AND REPETITION; READING 
 LESSONS; AND A VOCABULARY. 
 
 THE WHOLE ADAPTED FOR THE USE OF PRIVATE LEARNERS, OR FOR 
 CLASSES UNDER AN INSTRUCTOR. 
 
 BY JOSEPH SALKELD, A.M., 
 
 Author of " A Compendium of Classical Antiquities," etc. 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 HARPER AND BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 82 CLIFF STREET. 
 
 ^848. 
 

 Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1848, by 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern District 
 
 of New York. 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The Spanish Language has never been so extensively taught or studi- 
 ed in our country, as some other foreign languages : this lack of interest 
 in Spanish cannot be occasioned by any intrinsic defect in the language 
 or literature itself; for whether we regard its metrical or prose romances, 
 its ballads, lyrics, dramatic poetry, or its historical works, there is every 
 inducement to become acquainted with its rich literary treasures. 
 
 There is no other European language which can be so readily acquired 
 by an Anglo-American, as the Spanish. It contains but one sound that 
 has not almost, if not quite, its exact equivalent in English ; and this 
 one can be very easily learned. Unlike English and French, it is not en- 
 cumbered with silent letters (one of the greatest obstacles in acquiring 
 the right pronunciation of those languages) ; nor are its vowels or con- 
 sonants liable to any variation in the quality of their sound. As to the 
 proper syllable of a word to be accented in pronunciation, Spanish pre- 
 sents to the learner no difficulty whatever ; and this renders it far more 
 easy of acquirement than the Italian. Indeed, we can hardly conceive of 
 a language more simple and philosophical in the principles of its orthoepy. 
 In the departments of etymology and syntax, no modern language is 
 more regular. The exceptions to the general principles are few ; and 
 many of these will be found to correspond to similar exceptions in the 
 grammar of our own language, so that they present, of course, less diffi- 
 culty to the English learner. 
 
 Perhaps one chief reason why Spanish has not received as much atten- 
 tion as some other modern tongues, is to be found in the fact that there 
 has been a want of proper inducements in the shape of an elementary 
 instruction-book, to introduce, as it were, the learner to the language. It 
 has hitherto been a fault of most English Grammars of the Spanish lan- 
 guage that they were either close translations of French-Spanish Gram- 
 mars, and, of course, not adapted to the wants of English learners, or 
 written by Spanish instructors, who however well acquainted with the 
 principles of their own language, have not understood critically the pe- 
 culiarities of English idioms and forms of construction.* Grammar, too, 
 has formerly consisted of a dry set of etymological forms and syntactical 
 
 * We feel bound to remark here that most of these Spanish grammarians do not 
 seem, in all respects, acquainted with their own language. To prove this assertion, 
 we need only refer the learned inquirer to the unauthorized manner in which 
 they pronounce the particles porque, aunque, sino ; and to the practice of some of 
 them of using the conjunction é before y when a consonant ; thus, tú é yo. 
 
IV PREFACE. 
 
 rules, a tedious detail of abstract principles, which the pupil was expected 
 first of all to commit to memory. The system, now known as the 
 method of Professsor Ollendorff, in which the language is taught before 
 the grammatical principles, is not only a far more pleasant, but also a 
 far more thorough method of acquiring a practical knowledge of any 
 foreign tongue. 
 
 We think, however, that Ollendorff adheres too closely to this latter 
 method. To one who wishes merely to learn to converse in a foreign 
 language, " Ollendorff's New Methods" furnish all that is necessary for 
 this end ; but to those who wish to acquire the knowledge of a language 
 both for practical and literary purposes, a work uniting both systems will 
 be found most advantageous.* And such a work, it is hoped, will be 
 found in the t! First Book in Spanish," now first presented to. the pub- 
 lic. It is divided into six parts : 
 
 I. Orthoepy and Orthography ; containing, in a very few pages, 
 full directions for the right pronunciation and syllabication of the words 
 of the language, adapted especially to those who are their own instruct- 
 ors. 
 
 II. General Principles of Etymology and Syntax, in which are 
 taught the most general and important principles of the language. 
 
 III. A full exposition of Etymology and Syntax, in which the 
 more minute rules and exceptions are clearly explained. To Part III. 
 there is an Appendix which treats of Spanish Prosody; Gender of Span- 
 ish Nouns ; Idiomatic Phrases ; Spanish Abbreviations ; Money, Weights 
 and Measures ; Spanish Proper Names, etc. 
 
 IV. Progressive Exercises in translating from Spanish into Eng- 
 lish, and from English into Spanish (according to the Method of " con- 
 stant imitation and repetition"), which the learner commences simulta- 
 neously with Part II. ; thus he gradually, and almost imperceptibly, 
 becomes familiar with the general rules of Etymology and Syntax, being 
 able, after his first and second lessons, to form sentences, and in a limited 
 manner, " to read, write and speak" in the Castilian tongue 
 
 V. Reading Lessons in Spanish, beginning with very simple sen- 
 tences and progressively introducing the peculiarities of the idioms and 
 construction, by interesting extracts from the writings of Spaniards. 
 The marginal notes gradually clear away all difficulties, either by direct 
 explanation, or by reference to some rule or remark in a previous part of 
 the work. 
 
 VI. A Vocabulary of words used in the Reading Lessons, alphabeti- 
 cally arranged, properly accented, and clearly defined. 
 
 It will thus be seen that this single volume supplies all that the begin- 
 ner needs : a treatise on pronunciation, a grammar, exercises for transla- 
 tion from one language into the other, a reading-book, and dictionary. 
 
 .* Tbe editors of the American edition of Ollendorff ; s Method seem to have dis- 
 covered this ; as two of them have appended a Synopsis of Grammar to the work. 
 
PREFACE, V 
 
 It is hoped, therefore, that any who have a desire to become acquainted 
 with Spanish may be induced to enter upon the study of this delightful 
 language, especially a3 any one acquainted with English Grammar, by 
 following the directions, may, in a comparatively short time, be able to 
 speak and read Castilian, without any other instructor than this " First 
 Book in Spanish." After having carefully studied this work, he will be 
 prepared, with the aid of a larger dictionary, to enter upon the perusal of 
 any Spanish writer. 
 
 As the portion of our volume which contains the Grammar of the lan- 
 guage may seem more limited in size than works on grammar in general, 
 we deem it proper to state that not a single established rule (or exception 
 to a rule) of Spanish Etymology or Syntax noticed in other English- 
 Spanish Grammars, is here omitted : on the contrary, much will be found 
 in the present work that is not contained in any other Spanish Grammar. 
 Let any one compare the full and minute explanations of the syntax of 
 the verb, (to which about thirty pages are devoted in Part III.,) with what 
 is said of the verb in any other grammar, and he will be able to decide 
 which grammar has been most explicit. The manner of using certain 
 conjunctions (pages 175 — 178), observations on the use of prepositions 
 (pages 178 — 184), the distinction between the verbs ser and estar (pages 
 163 — 167), and the summary of the rules of gender of Spanish nouns with 
 a list of exceptions (pages 191 — 193), are portions of the work which will 
 be found to be unusually full, and, we trust, satisfactory. The rules we have 
 adopted for distinguishing the gender of Spanish nouns, so far as they 
 regard the terminations ie, umbre, and is, have never before, to our know- 
 ledge, appeared in any grammar of the language. In our readings of 
 Spanish authors we long since noticed that nouns terminating in wmbre 
 and ie (except pic and its compounds) are feminine ; and from an actual 
 examination of all the nouns ending in is, we find more than two-thirds of 
 these are also feminine. We here saw (what seems to have been overlook- 
 ed by others) how the rules for distinguishing gender might be greatly 
 simplified : accordingly we have stated it as a general rule (see page 191) 
 that " all nouns ending in a, d, ie, umbre, ion, is, or ez, (unless they may 
 be the names of male beings,) are feminine," and that all that do not thus 
 terminate, are masculine. Then follows a complete list of exceptions to 
 these rules. In giving this list we have not adopted the common plan 
 of grammarians, of copying such exceptions as they could readily 
 remember, and then adding — "and many others which the pupilicill learn 
 by noticing the usage of the best writers;" but we have taken the toilsome 
 course of examining carefully every noun in the "Diccionario de la 
 Academia Española," and placing in the list all such as were not com- 
 prehended in the general rules. If any other similar list has been pub 
 lished, it is unknown to us. 
 
 The Reading Lessons are chiefly specimens from living Spanish wri- 
 ters. It is doubtless better that the learner should at first thus enter upon 
 1* 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 the reading of modern Spanish, leaving the older Castilian classical wri- 
 ters for a more advanced stage of his course. Extracts from recent 
 " Manifiestos" of General Santa-Anna, have been given, as specimens of 
 Mexican-Spanish. In order that the learner may become familiar with 
 the different methods of spelling adopted by different writers, we have in 
 general followed the orthography of the respective authors from whom 
 the extracts are made. 
 
 It is a matter of regret that former Grammars, and even Seoane's edition 
 of Neuman and Baretti's Spanish Dictionary, have approved of the erro- 
 neous practice of accenting the particlespor^ue (when it means " because"), 
 aunque, and sino, on the last syllable. This practice is not sanctioned by 
 any respectable Castilian writer of prose or poetry, nor by any of the late 
 editions of the Dictionary of the Royal Spanish Academy. Porque has the 
 last syllable long only when it is used as an interrogative adverb or in the 
 sense of "why;" thus: ¿Porqué (pronounced pore-kay') no bebe V.? 
 Porque (pronounced pore-kay) no tengo sed: — " Why do you not drink 1 
 Because I am not thirsty." Aunque and sino (whatever Spanish Gram- 
 mars and Spanish instructors may say to the contrary) ought never to be 
 written aunque and sino.* 
 
 The present work has been submitted to the examination of native 
 Spanish professors ; and it may not be improper to insert here the opinion 
 of our friend Señor Molina, for many years an instructor in Spanish. 
 
 " I have carefully examined the MSS. of the ' First Book in Spayiish' 
 which you are about publishing, and it has afforded me extreme pleasure 
 to find that the Spanish language in your country is to have such a valu- 
 able auxiliary. I can with truth say that I have never met with a work 
 professing to teach any foreign language which combines so many excel- 
 ■ lent qualities, and is so well adapted for all classes of learners. It con- 
 tains all that the pupil needs, and in a very convenient compass. The 
 judicious arrangement of your work especially pleases me ; it is the pre- 
 cise manner in which I have been giving instruction to classes of pupils 
 in English, French, and Spanish for many years in the cities of Paris, 
 London, and Madrid, teaching what is most important to know, both of 
 etymology and syntax, first (without separating ihese departments as is 
 commonly done), and then taking up the more particular rules, and ex- 
 ceptions to general rules, afterwards. Your first part, on Pronunciation, 
 is so lucid and simple, that even a private learner, by following your 
 directions, could learn to speak Castilian with more elegance than one- 
 half of the natives of Spain. Your plan of placing the pupil to reading 
 Spanish as he progresses with the grammar, and especially your mode 
 of constant reference for the application of the rules of grammar, while it 
 is all the more agreeable to the pupil, will be the means of thoroughly 
 making him acquainted with the rules of Spanish etymology and syntax, 
 without any very laborious effort on his part. 
 
 " Hitherto there has been but little done in your country to promote 
 
 * We are glad to learn that Professor Velasquez, of Columbia College, New York, 
 has in course of preparation a new Dictionary of the Spanish Language. From his 
 known scholarship, we are led to expect a dictionary in which the immense num- 
 ber of errors of previous lexicographers will be corrected — a dictionary in ail 
 respects worthy of this noble language. 
 
PREFACE. Vil 
 
 the knowledge of the Spanish literature, and this has, without doubt, 
 resulted from a want of proper books. There will no longer be any 
 reason for such an excuse. You have provided a book which, for its 
 simplicity, distinctness, and completeness, in that which it professes to 
 teach, could hardly be excelled. You deserve and will receive the warm- 
 est thanks of every admirer of elegant Castilian : a language, in the 
 opinion of the best critics, of more sweetness, music, elegance, and ex- 
 pression than any other European tongue." 
 
 To all native Spanish gentlemen who have, in any way, encouraged us 
 in our work, we take this opportunity of making our grateful acknow- 
 ledgments. 
 
 In conclusion, we will say that as we have endeavored to perform our 
 task faithfully, we trust that our work may contribute towards increas- 
 ing the study of the classic language of Castile. 
 July, 1848. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. Page 
 
 71ie Spanish Alphabet. — Sound of Simple Vowels, - - 13 
 
 Sound of the Consonants, - 13 — 16 
 
 Different Methods of Spelling Spanish Words, - - 17 
 
 Sound of Diphthongs and Triphthongs, - - - 18 
 
 List of Diphthongs and Triphthongs, 19 
 
 Syllabication, -------- 20 
 
 Accentuation, ------- 21 — 23 
 
 Punctuation, - - - - - - - -23 
 
 Lessons for Pronunciation, - 24 — 27 
 
 Additional remarks on the Pronunciation of Spanish-Mexi- 
 can — Manner of sounding c, z and ZZ, - 27 
 
 PART II. 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. 
 Parts of Speech. — Their subdivisions defined, - 28 — 30 
 
 Of the Article, definite and indefinite. — Rules for their use, 30 — 33 
 
 Of the Noun. — Rules for distinguishing the gender of Nouns, - 33 
 
 Rules for forming the plural number of Nouns, - - 34 
 
 ■ ' Cases of Nouns. — The English possessive case, how ren- 
 dered in Spanish, •• - - - - - 35 
 
 Of the Adjective. — Formation of the plural and feminine termina- 
 tions, -------- 36 
 
 Adjectives used as Nouns, ----- 37 
 
 Degrees of Comparison of Adjectives. — Rules for forming 
 the Comparative and Superlative, - 38 — 40 
 
 Of the Pronoun. — Personal Pronouns. — Use of Usted and its con- 
 tractions, V., Vm., etc. — Direct and indirect objective 
 case of Personal Pronouns, 40 
 
 Declension of Personal Pronouns. — Rules for their use, 41 — 44 
 Possessive Pronouns. — Their declension, - - - - 44 
 
 Rules for the use of Possessive Pronouns, - - 45 — 47 
 
 Relative Pronouns. — Their declension, - - - - 47 
 
 Rules for the use of Relative Pronouns, - - - 48, 49 
 
 Interrogative Pronouns. — Rules for their use, - - - 49 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns. — Their declension. — Rules for their use, 50 — 52 
 Indefinite Pronouns. — Manner of employing them, - - 52 — 54 
 
 Of the Verb. — Active-transitive, Active-intransitive, Reflective, 
 
 Passive, Neuter, - - - - - - 55 
 
 Moods.— Infinitive, Indicative, Imperative, Subjunctive, 56 
 
 Tenses.— Present, Imperfect, Perfect- Definite, Perfect-In- 
 
IX TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 definite, First and Second Pluperfect, First and Second 
 Future, - -- - - - - 57 
 
 Participles and Gerunds. — Conjugation. — Regular, Irregu- 
 lar, and Auxiliary Verbs, - 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, Haber, 
 
 Conjugation of the " Verb, Ser, 
 
 Conjugation of the " Verb, Estar, 
 
 Conjugation of the " Verb, Tener, - 
 
 Conjugation of Regular Verbs. — Tabular View of Verb- 
 endings, - - - - - 
 
 Changes in the Verb-ending. — Changes in Verb-root, 
 
 Paradigm of the First, Second and Third Conjugations, 
 
 Conjugation of Reflective Verbs, 
 
 Conjugation of Passive Verbs, - s 
 
 Pronoun se used instead of the passive voice, 
 
 Verbs conjugated interrogatively and negatively, 
 
 Irregular Verbs, - 
 
 Conjugation of Irregular Verbs Andar, Contar, etc., 
 
 Defective Verbs. — Impersonal Verbs, 
 
 Haber and hacer used impersonally, - 
 
 List of Irregular, Defective and Impersonal Verbs, 
 
 List of Verbs having irregular Past-Participles, 
 Of the Adverb. — Of the Conjunction, - 
 Of the Preposition. — Of the Interjection, 
 
 PART III. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX MORE FULLY EXPLAINED. 
 
 Of the Article. — Rules for the use of the Definite Article, - 124, 125 
 Omission of the Definite Article, - - 125, 126 
 
 Omission of the Indefinite Article, ... 126 — 128 
 
 Other uses and omissions of Articles, - - 128 
 
 Of the Noun. — Augmentatives, Diminutives, Titles of Respect, 129 — 131 
 
 Of the Adjective. — Agreement and position of Adjectives, - 131 — 133 
 Rules for the use of Comparatives, Superlatives, etc., 133 — 135 
 List of Numerals, cardinal and ordinal, - - 135 — 137 
 
 Rules for the use of Numeral Adjectives, - - 137, 138 
 
 Of the Pronoun. — Personal Pronouns and Rules for their use, 138—142 
 Peculiar use of other Pronouns, - 142 
 
 Of the Verb. — Rules for the agreement of the Verb with its sub- 
 ject, ------ 142—144 
 
 Mood and Tenses of Verbs. — Rules for the use of the In- 
 finitive, Gerund, and Participle, ... 144 — 146 
 Tenses of the Indicative Mood. — Rules for their use, 146— 150 
 The Imperative Mood. — Rules for its use, - - 150, 151 
 The Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood. — Rules for their use, 151—157 
 The Passive V^erb, and rules for its use, - 157, 158 
 
 - 
 
 58 
 
 - 59- 
 
 -62 
 
 62- 
 
 -65 
 
 - 65- 
 
 -67 
 
 67- 
 
 -70 
 
 3rb- 
 - 70- 
 
 -72 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 74- 
 
 -81 
 
 - 
 
 61 
 
 82 
 
 83 
 
 - 
 
 84 
 
 - 
 
 85 
 
 - 
 
 86 
 
 87- 
 
 110 
 
 - 
 
 111 
 
 
 112 
 
 113- 
 
 120 
 
 
 121 
 
 - 
 
 122 
 
 
 123 
 
 
- 161- 
 
 -163 
 
 163- 
 
 -166 
 
 - 166- 
 
 -169 
 
 169- 
 
 -171 
 
 - 172, 
 
 173 
 
 
 174 
 
 - 174, 
 
 175 
 
 175- 
 
 -178 
 
 - 178- 
 
 -184 
 
 
 184 
 
 _ 
 
 185 
 
 
 186 
 
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. x 
 
 Page 
 
 The Regimen of Verbs.— Rules for the Regimen of Verbs, 158—161 
 
 Verbs followed by certain Prepositions, 
 
 On the use of the Verbs ser and estar, 
 
 Idiomatic use of certain Verbs, - 
 Of the Adverb. — Rules for the use of Adverbs, 
 
 List and explanation of certain Adverbial Phrases, 
 
 Classification of Adverbs, - 
 Of the Conjunction. — Classification of Conjunctions, - 
 
 Rules for the use of certain Conjunctions, 
 Of the Preposition. — Observations on their use, 
 Of the Interjection. — Observations on its use, 
 
 APPENDIX TO PART III. 
 
 Number I. Of Prosody. — Pronunciation, - 
 
 Of Diphthongs and Triphthongs, - 
 Of Verse and Rhyme.— Examples for scanning, 187—190 
 Number II. A Summary of the Rules of Gender of Spanish 
 
 Nouns, - 191 
 
 List of Exceptions to the general rules of Gender, 192 — 197 
 Number III. Idiomatic use of certain Adjectives and Verbs, 
 
 with Prepositions.— A list of them, - 198—203 
 
 Number IV. A List of the most common Idiomatic Phrases, 204—218 
 Number V. A List of the most common Abbreviations, - 219 — 221 
 Number VI. Spanish Money, Weights and Measures, - 222—224 
 
 Number VII. Spanish Proper Names. — Geographical Names, 225 — 227 
 Names applied to persons from the place of 
 
 nativity, ----- 227, 228 
 Christian Names of Men, - - 228—230 
 
 Christian Names of Women, - - - 230 
 
 PART IV. 
 
 SPANISH AND ENGLISH EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 Section First to Section Seventeenth, with Rules and Remarks 
 to illustrate various Idioms and peculiarities of construc- 
 tion, - - - - " - - - 231—301 
 
 PART Y. 
 
 SPANISH READING LESSONS, WITH NOTES IN ENGLISH. 
 
 First Section. — Easy Sentences, - - - .. - . 302 
 
 I. Short Sentences, - - - - - 303 
 
 II. Spanish and English.— III. The Weather, - 304 
 
 IV. The Seasons.— V The Country, - - - 305 
 
 VI. A Journey.— VII. Miscellaneous Sentences, - 306 
 
 Second Sectio7i. — Short and Simple Anecdotes, etc., - - 307 
 
 VIII. Gaining and Losing.— IX. A good Reason for 
 
XI TABLE OF CONTENTS. ^ 
 
 Page 
 
 writing a long Letter. — X. Rewarding a dull 
 writer.— XI. Early Rising, 303 
 XII. A Singular Edict.— XIII. Periodicals in the Uni- 
 ted States.— XI V. Sagacity of a Dog, - - 309 
 XV. Thales' Sage Answers.— XVI. Simplicity of a Child, 310 
 XVII. The Kings of Former Times.— XVIII. An Irish- 
 man's Conjecture, - - - - 311 
 
 XIX. The Force of Shame. — XX. An Accommodating 
 Wife. — XXI. An Invention of questionable 
 
 Utility, ...... 212 
 
 Third Section. — Lessons taken from " Deberes de los Hombres," 313 
 
 XXII. Filial Affection, 313 
 
 XXIII. Respect for Old Age. An Anecdote, - - - 315 
 
 XXIV. Friendship.— XXV. Reading and Study, - 316 
 XXVI. Selecting a Profession, ... - 317 
 
 XXVII. Ambition to be Restrained. —XX VIII. Repenting 
 
 of our Faults, - - ... 318 
 
 XXIX. Gratitude, 319 
 
 XXX. Pardon to Enemies, ... - 320 
 
 Fourth Section, - - - - - - - 321 
 
 XXXI. No Hereditary Titles in the United States, - 321 
 
 XXXII. Increase of Population of the united States, - 322 
 
 XXXIII. The Magnetic Telegraph the Invention of a Spaniard, 323 
 
 XXXIV. The First Steamboat (at Barcelona, A. D. 1543), 324 
 XXXV. Washington. By E. J. Gomez, 324 
 
 XXXVI. Pedro Lopez de Ayala. By M. Galo de Cuendas, 326 
 
 XXXVII. Miguel de Cervantes. By M. Galo de Cuendas, 326 
 
 XXXVIII. Epitome of the History of Spain. By José de Cadalso, 328 
 
 XXXIX. Critics. By José de Cadalso, 331 
 
 XL. American Independence. By E. J. Gomez, 333 
 
 XLI. A Visit to the Tomb of Washington. " " 335 
 
 Fifth Section, ....... 337 
 
 XLII. The Maiden of Narni. A Tale, 337 
 XLIII. Extracts from a "Manifiesto" of General Santa- An- 
 na (Sept. 16th, 1847), - - - - 341 
 
 XLIV. Extracts from another " Mcmifiesto" of Santa- Anna 
 
 (Oct. 22d, 1847), 343 
 
 XLV. Ingratitude. By Teodoro de Almeyda, - - 346 
 
 XL VI. The Bear, Monkey, and Hog.— A Poetic Fable. By 
 
 T. de Liarte, 347 
 
 PART VI. 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 Abbreviations used in Vocabulary, - - - - 350 
 
 Vocabulary of Words used in the Reading Lessons, - - 351' 
 
PART I. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 THE SPANISH ALPHABET. 
 
 1. The Spanish Alphabet contains twenty-eight charac- 
 ters or letters ; a, ¿, c, ch, d, e, /, g, h, i, j?, k, I, 11, m, n, ñ, o, 
 P,cl r, s, t, u, v, x, y, z. 
 
 z¿. Of these letters, a, e, i, o, u, are always vowels ; y is 
 also a vowel when it ends a syllable or word, or when it 
 stands alone : the other letters are consonants, as also y 
 when it begins a syllable or word. The consonants are 
 divided into semi-vowels and mutes ; the semi-vowels being, 
 /, h, I, U, m, n, ñ, r, s, x ; and the mutes, b, c, ch, d, g, j, Jc, 
 
 SOUND OF THE SIMPLE VOWELS. 
 
 3. A, in Spanish, has the sound of a in the English word 
 far. 
 
 13^" This sound it retains in every position, not varying as in the 
 English words, fare, fat, far, fall, swallow, many, courage, mustard, in no 
 two of which the a has precisely the same sound. 
 
 4. E, has the sound of a in made or e in they. 
 
 5. I, has the sound of ee in see or i in machine. Y, when 
 vowel, has the same sound. 
 
 6. 0, has the sound of o in go. 
 
 7. U, has the sound of oo in mood or u in rude. 
 
 SOUND OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 8. B, F, K, L, M, N, P, sound as in English. 
 
 9. C, before a, o, or u, or before a consonant, sounds like 
 k ; that is, like c, in the English word, cart ; as, carne, poco, 
 cuna, creo ; pronounced kar'-ney. p6-ko,kod-nah, kray'-o. 
 
 2 (13) 
 
14 SPANISH ALPHABET. 
 
 10. C, before e, or i, sounds like th in the English word 
 think ; as, cecina, cima ; pronounced thay-theé '-nah, thee-mah. 
 
 11. CH, is considered as one letter in Spanish, and is 
 always sounded like ch in the English word church ; as, 
 noche, chapa ; pronounced nd-chay, chah'-pah. 
 
 12. D, has not exactly the same sound in Spanish that 
 it has in English. In the latter, it is formed by touching 
 the tongue to the roof of the mouth : in Spanish, the end 
 of the tongue strikes the upper teeth : it has then a sound 
 nearly like th in the English words than, though. 
 
 !3*" A person can hardly fail to utter the Spanish sound of the d, if he 
 pronounce it as here explained, by touching the tongue to the lower part 
 of the upper teeth, instead of the roof of the mouth. • 
 
 13. Gr, before a, o, u, or a consonant, sounds hard, as in 
 the English words gate, go, goose, grow ; as, goce, greba, 
 gula; pronounced gd-thay, gray' -bah, god-lah. (See 14.) 
 
 L4. GrU, in the syllables gue and gui, unless there be a 
 diseresis (see 60) over the n, is always sounded like the 
 simple g hard, as in the English words guest, guilt ; as, 
 gueta, guita, pronounced gay'-tah, gee-tah. When the diee- 
 resis is over the u, it is not mute, but has its proper sound ; 
 as, agüelo ; pronounced ah- goo-ail -o, or ah-gway'-lo. 
 
 1 5. G, before e or i, has always the guttural sound of the 
 Spanish/ (See 17.) 
 
 16. H, is never pronounced, but is always a silent letter ; 
 as, hace, higo ; pronounced ah'-thay, ee'-go. 
 
 17. J, has always a guttural sound, somewhat like the 
 English h in alcohol, strongly aspirated. But this is not 
 an exact equivalent to the Spanish sound which is produced 
 by breathing strongly (as when one would give additional 
 force to the h in host), and, by an effort of the palate, mak- 
 ing the air gently strike the roof of the mouth. 
 
 £3P* It is the guttural sound of the ch in the German words nacht and 
 nicht, and of the ch in the Scotch words loch, cloch, and can therefore be 
 learned from any German or Scotchman. If we bend the tongue so as to 
 form an arch which presses against the roof of the mouth, and produce a 
 
SPANISH ALPHABET. 15 
 
 sound by breathing and lowering the tongue, this sound will be that of 
 hard g, as it is called in English. If, again, we press the tongue against 
 the roof of the mouth in the same way, and breathe forcibly without 
 changing its position, we produce the exact guttural sound of the Span- 
 ish J. The learner must keep in mind that the sound of the Spanish g 
 before e, or i, is the same guttural sound. 
 
 1 8. K, is not used in Spanish, being found only in for- 
 eign words when it is sounded like the same letter in 
 English. 
 
 19. LL, sounds like li in pavilion, or Hi in million ; as, 
 silla, lloro ; pronounced seel' -yah, lyo'-ro. 
 
 £3?" As this sound seldom occurs in English, and never at the beginning 
 of words, it requires some practice, for one accustomed to speak English 
 only, to proriounce it readily in such Spanish words as llaga, llana, lleno, 
 lloro. 
 
 20. Ñ, sounds like ni in the English words union, pinion ; 
 as, ñoña, ñoño ; pronounced non -yah, nyon'-yo. 
 
 I2P* 3 This sound requires considerable practice, before an English 
 learner can pronounce it readily at the beginning of Spanish words, 
 such as ñoclos, ñoño. 
 
 21. Q, which is always immediately followed by u, is 
 sounded as in English ; as, quanto, quota ; pronounced 
 kwan'-to, kico'-tah, (See 31.) 
 
 22. QU, in the syllables que and qui, is sounded like k 
 (that is, the u is silent) ; as, que, quiso ; pronounced kay, 
 kee'-so. If, however, a diaeresis is over the u, the « has its 
 proper Spanish sound ; as, qiiesta ; pronounced koo-ais -tah, 
 or kwais'-tah. (See 31.) 
 
 23. R. is sometimes sounded smooth as in English, and 
 sometimes rough or trilling, as with natives of Ireland. 
 The rough sound is heard in Spanish when r begins a 
 word ; when doubled : and when it comes after I, n, or s ; as, 
 rabo, carro, alrota ; pronounced r-rah'-bo, kar-r'-ro, al-r-rd- 
 tah. In every other position it has the English, smooth 
 sound. 
 
 ¡y The rough sound of the r is made by vibrating the end of the 
 tongue against the roof of the mouth near the fore-teeth ; it is seldom heard 
 in English, though very easily acquired. The smooth (common English) 
 
16 SPANISH ALPHABET. 
 
 sound is caused by a vibration of the tongue near the root, against the 
 inward part of the palate, near the entrance of the throat. 
 
 24. S, is always sounded as in the English words soon, 
 this ; as, sedes ; pronounced say' -dace. 
 
 lijT" The s in Spanish never has the sound of z as in English, in the 
 words has, tubs. 
 
 25. T, has nearly the same sound as in English. The only 
 difference between the two languages, in pronouncing the 
 t, is, that in English the end of the tongue touches the roof 
 of the mouth, and in Spanish it touches the upper. teeth. 
 In Spanish, therefore, t has a somewhat softer sound than 
 in English. 
 
 26. V, is pronounced as in English, with the sole excep- 
 tion that the upper teeth are not pressed so strongly to 
 the lower lip in enouncing this letter in Spanish. 
 
 £3F* It is a great mistake, which some grammarians have made, to sup- 
 pose that the Spanish sounds of b and v are alike. 
 
 27. X, has the sound of the x in English, in the word 
 tax ; as, éxito, extremo, exacto ; pronounced aiks-ee'-to, aiks- 
 tray'-mo, aiks-ac'-to. (See 32.) 
 
 (a.) X, in Spanish, had formerly two very different sounds : the one the 
 same as above given ; the other a guttural sound, the same exactly as the 
 Spanish j. (See 17.) To distinguish these sounds, the vowel following 
 the x, when not guttural, had a circumflex accent over it ; as, exacto, éxito. 
 The guttuftl sound of the x is not at present used, or at least very sel- 
 dom, in Spanish, as the letters j (before any vowel) and g (before e and i) 
 have the same sound, and are now employed instead of the guttural x. 
 Thus, the words Mexico, Méjico, or Mégico, would, in Spanish, all be 
 pronounced alike ; though Méjico is the common spelling. It is of course 
 no longer necessary to put a circumflex accent over the vowel following 
 the x, when the letter has the English sound of ks, as it now has nearly 
 always in recent Spanish writings. 
 
 28. Y, when a consonant, has the same sound in Spanish 
 that it has in English in such words as young, year. 
 
 §3F* Y, when it stands alone, used as a copulative (meaning and), is 
 pronounced like ee in see. 
 
 29. Z, has always the sound of th in the English word 
 think, as zuzo ; pronounced thoo-tho. (See 32, a.) 
 
DIFFERENT METHODS OF SPELLING WORDS. 17 
 
 Remark. — There will be no difficulty on the part of the learner who is 
 his own instructor, in acquiring the sounds of the Spanish vowels and con- 
 sonants, except the guttural sound of the j (which is also the sound of g 
 before eori); and this sound can be learned from any German, by hear- 
 ing him pronounce ch in the words nacht and nicht ; from an Irishman 
 by noticing the sound he gives ch in the word oich, or from a Scotchman, 
 in the word loch. 
 
 DIFFERENT METHODS OF SPELLING. 
 
 30. By the best Spanish writers, i is used instead of y 
 when this last letter is a vowel, and not at the end of a 
 word. Thus reyno, reyna, arraygar, are now spelled reino, 
 reina, arraigar. 
 
 31. Q is now used, by the best writers, only in the sylla- 
 bles que and qui ; as, queja, quince. The syllables qua, que, 
 qui, and quo, are to be spelled with c. Thus qua/ulo, qüesto, 
 quota, are now spelled cuando, cuesto, cuota. 
 
 32. X is, by many of the best writers, never used before 
 a consonant, its place being supplied by the letter s. Thus 
 extenso, experto, are now often found spelled estenso, esperto. 
 
 (a.) In addition to the above remarks, it is proper to state that, by 
 the best writers, z is never employed before e or i, its place being sup- 
 plied with c : thus cero and cinco, for zero and zinco. X, too, is, by some 
 few writers, always changed into cs, when it comes before a vowel ; thus 
 secso, for sexo. The guttural sound of x, as has been already mentioned, 
 is now seldom used ; g or j (see 27, a) being substituted for it. 
 
 Remark. — It is necessary to remember that the above variations in spel- 
 ling produce no variations in pronunciation, except only when x before a 
 consonant is changed into s, in which case s has its own regular sound : 
 thus, estenso is pronounced ais-ten'-so. 
 
 A very little attention to the above directions will remove every diffi- 
 culty which might otherwise occur in reading Spanish authors who do 
 not adopt the same method of spelling. Thus, if the learner meet with 
 such words as celo, jéneros, rejistro, cuando, jabón, esceso, ecsactor, reina, 
 buitre, etc., and can not find them in his dictionary, he must look for them 
 under the other form : zelo, géneros, registro, quando, xabon, exceso, ex- 
 actor, reyna, buytre. 
 
18 SOUND OF DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 SOUND OF DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 33. The diphthongs and triphthongs in Spanish never 
 contain any vowel sound different from those we have already 
 given. When two or three vowels come together, they 
 may be pronounced by a single effort or emission of the 
 voice ; but each vowel in Spanish continues to retain al- 
 ways its own particular sound, though the sounds glide into 
 each other by being pronounced in the time of a single 
 vowel. In the word rejoice, in English, the diphthong oi 
 contains the sound of each of the letters (o like o in not, 
 and i like i in miss), yet, these being pronounced rapidly 
 and with a single impulse of voice, the two vowel sounds 
 glide into each other. It is thus that the Spanish diph- 
 thongs and triphthongs are sounded. Two vowels are 
 never mingled into one and made to represent a sound 
 foreign to each of them, as ou in the English word found; 
 or a sound in which only one is heard, as oa in boat. The 
 diphthong ua in the English word suavity, retains the 
 sound of both vowels, being pronounced as if written 
 sooa-vi-ty. The learner can judge from this example and 
 the last syllable of the word rejoice, what is meant by each 
 vowel retaining its own particular sound in diphthongs and 
 triphthongs, though such a combination forms, of course, 
 but one syllable. Thus in the Spanish word causa, the 
 letters cau compose but one syllable, and the diphthong au 
 is pronounced like a in bar and u in rude (the regular 
 Spanish sounds of a and u) ; and being uttered quickly, 
 by a single impulse of the voice, the sound of au is similar 
 to that of ow in the English word how, though not exactly 
 the same. 
 
 Remark. — In order that the learner who has no instructor to teach 
 him the sounds of the Spanish diphthongs, may not fail to acquire the 
 right pronunciation, we again state that all the vowels of a diphthong or 
 triphthong, in Spanish, must be pronounced with the regular sound of 
 each, without any perceptible space between the different sounds which 
 
LIST OF DIPHTHONGS AND TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 19 
 
 compose such diphthong or triphthong. Thus, in the diphthong of ea, the 
 learner has already been taught that the sound of e is like that of e in 
 the English word they, and the sound of a, like a in are; all, therefore, 
 that he has to do to form the diphthongal sound, is to unite these two 
 sounds into one breathing or emission of voice. This he can learn to 
 do by pronouncing quickly the words they-are so as to form only one 
 syllable, and the ey-a will be the exact sound of the Spanish diphthong 
 ea. The letters ai or ay are to be pronounced together, as a in far and 
 e in me ; that is, as ay in bay would sound if the a had the sound of a in 
 bar, and the y the sound of y in toy (not the mute y as in hay). And so 
 with all the diphthongs and triphthongs. 
 
 34. 
 
 35. 
 
 39. 
 40. 
 41. 
 
 42. 
 43. 
 44. 
 45. 
 46. 
 47. 
 48. 
 49. 
 
 LIST OF DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 , or ay, has the sound 
 
 d of a in bar, 
 
 and ee in eel : 
 
 a-i. 
 
 " a in bar, 
 
 and oo in mood . 
 
 a-u. 
 
 " e in they, 
 
 and a in bar : 
 
 e-a. 
 
 " e in they, 
 
 and ee in eel : 
 
 e-i. 
 
 " e in they, 
 
 and o in go : 
 
 e-o. 
 
 " e in they, 
 
 and oo in mood 
 
 e-u. 
 
 " e in he, 
 
 and a in oar : 
 
 i-a. 
 
 " e in he, 
 
 and e in ¿/¡ey : 
 
 i-e. 
 
 " e in he, 
 
 and o in ¿"o : 
 
 i-o. 
 
 " e in he, 
 
 and oo in mood 
 
 i-u. 
 
 " o in go, 
 
 and e in ¿Aey : 
 
 o-e. 
 
 " o in go, 
 
 and ee in ee/ : 
 
 o-i. 
 
 " oo in mood 
 
 and a in 6ar : 
 
 u-a. 
 
 " oo in mood 
 
 and e in ¿Aey : 
 
 u-e. 
 
 " oo in mood 
 
 and ee in eel : 
 
 u-i. 
 
 " oo in mood 
 
 and o in ¿fo : 
 
 u-o. 
 
 TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 50. iai has the sonnd of ee in eel, a in bar, and e in he : i-a-i. 
 
 51. iei " " ee in eel, e in they, and e in Ae : i-e-i. 
 
 52. wax " ". oo in mood, a in oar, and e in he: u-a-i. 
 
 53. «¿i, or ucy " oo in mood, e in í/íey, and e in Ae : tt-e-z. 
 
 Remark.— Some of the diphthongs ending in i, will be found in some 
 Spanish writings ending in y, as reina, reyna ; buitre, buytre. The pro- 
 nunciation in both cases is the same, and we have not increased the list 
 by distinguishing those ending in i from those ending in y. 
 
 (¡2^°* Two vowels, when they come together, do not always form one 
 syllable (a diphthong). Thus the word idea, in Spanish and English, 
 forms three syllables. In Spanish it is pronounced ee-dáy-ah. 
 
-20 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 54. The rules of Spanish syllabication are very simple. 
 They are the following : 
 
 (a.) When a consonant comes between two vowels, it is 
 articulated with the vowel which comes after it; asfó-so, 
 a-ño, má-yo, hu-má-no, si-llón ; except x ; as, ex-ém-plo. 
 
 (b.) When two consonants come between two vowels, the 
 former is spelled with the preceding vowel, and the latter 
 with the succeeding vowel; as, por-tál, cuér-po, és-te, in- 
 viér-no. This rule is subject to the following exception : 
 
 (c.) If the first of two consonants coming between two 
 vowels be /, or any one of the mutes (see 2), and the 
 second I or r, then both consonants are joined to the vowel 
 by which they are succeeded ; as, sí-glo, sué-gro, co-bre, vi- 
 drié-ro. 
 
 (d.) When two vowels of the same name come together, 
 or two which do not form a diphthong, they are to be divid- 
 ed ; as, le-ér, co-or-di-nár, ca-nó-a. 
 
 (e.) Compound words are to be divided into their deriva- 
 tives ; as, pre-po-nér, ad-jún-to, con-flíc-to. 
 
 (f.) When any one of the letters ¿, I, m, n, or r ? is fol- 
 lowed by s and another consonant, or when s is preceded 
 by any consonant, and succeeded by one or more, in com- 
 pound words, the s is to be connected with the consonant 
 which comes before it ; as, Cons-tán-za, cons-tre-nír, ins-pi- 
 rár. 
 
 (g.) In Spanish there are as many syllables in a word 
 as there are vowels or diphthongs ; as, quin-ce, nor-le, pa- 
 rien-te. 
 
 I^jr* I n English, the word quince forms only one syllable; in Spanish, 
 it is pronounced keen'-thay. Hom-bre is pronounced om'-brey, and not 
 om-bur, as it would be in English. Every letter in Spanish is pro- 
 nounced except the h, and the u in the syllables gue, gui, and que, qui 
 (see 14 and 22). There are no silent vowels or consonants, as in the 
 English words thumb, throne, psalm. 
 
21 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 55. In Spanish, the voice never rests or prolongs itself 
 on any other letter of a syllable than a vowel. When we 
 speak of an accented syllable, we always mean thereby the 
 vowel-sound of that syllable. In the case of diphthongs and 
 triphthongs, when in accented syllables, the accent or stress 
 of voice is generally placed on that vowel which we have 
 marked in the list of diphthongs and triphthongs. Thus, 
 tie-ne, having the accent on the first syllable, has the stress 
 of the voice on the e of the diphthong, though the accent is 
 not written over the vowel. 
 
 £3F* in words ending in cion, the accent is on the o and not on the i 
 of the diphthong, as marked in the list ; as, re-sur-rec-ción. 
 
 56. The rules of Spanish accentuation are few and sim- 
 ple, and as follows : 
 
 (a.) Words that end in a consonant are accented on the 
 last syllable, without any marked accent over it ; as, caliz, 
 cup ; capaz, able ; virtud, virtue ; jardín, garden ; saber, to 
 know ; comer, to eat ; amor, to love ; rigor, rigor ; facilidad, 
 facility. These are accented as if written ca-líz. vir-túd, 
 co-mér, fa-ci-li-dád, etc. 
 
 (b.) Words that end in a vowel are accented on the syl- 
 lable next to the last, without any marked accent over it ; 
 as, rastro, track ; hoja, leaf: buitre, vulture ; temperamento, 
 temperature ; ente, being ; accented as if written rás-tro, 
 búi-tre, tcm-pe-ra-mén-to, én-te, etc. 
 
 Remark. — Words that end in two vowels, whether their vowels form 
 a diphthong or two separate syllables, come under the above rule ; as, 
 estudio, study ; odio, hatred ; opulencia, opulence ; canoa, canoe ; idea, 
 idea ; accented as if written 6-dio, o-pu-Un-cia, ca-nó-a, i-dé-a. 
 
 (c.) Wdrds that end in a consonant and are accented on 
 any other syllable than the last, or that end in a vowel (or 
 diphthong), and are accented on any other than the syllable 
 next to the last, have the accent marked to show the excep- 
 tion from the general rules (a and b above) : as, cárcel, 
 
22 ACCENT. 
 
 prison ; carácter, character ; viernes, Friday ; virgen, vir- 
 gin ; or café, coffee ; lástima, pity ; sólido, solid : mate- 
 mático, mathematician ; clausula, clause ; accented on the 
 syllable marked. 
 
 Remark. — Words that end in two vowels, which are commonly known 
 as diphthongs, usually have the accent marked if it falls on one of these 
 vowels ; as, fantasía, poesía, señorío, minué. Words which end with y 
 have the accent on the last syllable, without being marked. 
 
 |QF° In compound words there are a few exceptions to the above gene- 
 ral rules. In adverbs of quality or manner ending in mente, some follow 
 the regular rule (56, 6), and others retain the accent on the first part of 
 the word, on the same syllable on which it would be if mente were not 
 affixed ; as, su-cin-ta-mén-te, succinctly ; li-be-ral-men-te, liberally ; bas- 
 tán-te-men-te, sufficiently ; ciér-ta-men-te, certainly. 
 
 (d.) The plurals of words retain the accent on the same 
 syllable (whether marked or not) as in the singular ; as, 
 jar din, jardines ; cáliz, cálices ; virgen, vírgenes ; clausula, 
 clausulas. There are two exceptions to this remark, carác- 
 ter and régimen ; their plurals being accented caracteres 
 and regímenes. 
 
 57. The above rules are applicable to all parts of speech 
 except the persons of verbs ; these are accented according 
 to the following rules: 
 
 (a.) The persons of verbs, whether they end in a conso- 
 nant or a vowel, whether they are singular or plural, or to 
 whatever mood or tense they belong, are accented on the 
 syllable next to the last, without being marked ; as, hablo, 
 I speak ; beben, they drink ; hiciera, he would make. In- 
 finitives, having no person, are not included in this rule, 
 but are always accented on the last syllable. (See 56, a.) 
 
 b.) In the case of the persons of- verbs, whenever the 
 accent does not fall on the syllable next to the last (as 
 mentioned in the preceding rule), it is marked ; as, está, he 
 is ; hablaré, I shall speak ; hablarán, they shall speak ; 
 amé, I loved ; hablábamos, we were speaking ; hablaríamos, 
 we would speak. The only exception to this rule is the 
 second person plural of the imperative mood, and words 
 
PUNCTUATION. 23 
 
 ending in ay or oy, which are always accented on the last 
 syllable, without the accent in general being marked ; as, 
 hablad, speak ye ; haced, make ye ; estoy, I am. Some 
 writers, however, place the accent over the last syllable, as, 
 hablad, haced. 
 
 58. The accent is by many writers marked on certain 
 monosyllables, to distinguish them from others of similar 
 orthography and pronunciation but of different meaning ; 
 as, el, the, and el, he ; se, himself, and sé, I know, and sé, be 
 thou ; si, if, and si, to himself. The letters á, to ; é, and ; 
 6, or ; íí, or ; are also generally used with a marked accent, 
 though some writers omit it. 
 
 £2F° Throughout this work, every word which does not eome under 
 the three general rules of accentuation (see 56, a ; 56, b ; and 57, a), will 
 have the accent marked over the vowel upon which the stress of voice 
 is to be laid. The learner must therefore keep in mind that every word 
 which has not a marked accent over some vowel in it, is to be accented 
 in pronouncing it, if it end in a consonant, on the last syllable ; if it 
 end in a vowel, on the syllable next the last. If the word be a verb, it is 
 to be accented on the syllable next to the last, whether it end in a conso- 
 nant or a vowel, except when it has a written accent over it, is in the 
 infinitive mood, or in the second person plural of the imperative, or ends 
 iny.* 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 59. The comma, semicolon, colon, period, etc., are the 
 same, and are employed in the same manner as those in 
 English. The marks of interrogation and exclamation are 
 placed in Spanish both before and after interrogative and 
 ejaculatory phrases or sentences ;f as, ¿ Este canapé no es 
 nuevo 1 Is not this sofa new ? ; Que ceguedad ! ¡ Pobre 
 España ! "What blindness ! Poor Spain ! 
 
 60. The diaeresis ■■ is used over the u in the syllables 
 
 * The learner will now be able to pronounce the names of the Spanish 
 letters of the alphabet, giving to each letter its true Spanish sound, 
 according to the preceding directions : — a, be, ce, che, de, e, efe, ge, ache, i, 
 jota, ka, ele, elle, eme, ene, eñe, o, pe, cu, erre, ese, te, u, ve, equis, igriega, 
 zeta. 
 
 t The interrogation or exclamation mark coming first, being inverted. 
 
24 LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 gue, gui, que and qui (see 31), when the u is to be sounded, 
 as agüero ; and also over the last of two vowels, which 
 usually form a diphthong, to show that they are to be divid- 
 ed into two syllables ; as heroicidad^ pronounced e-ro-ee-thee- 
 ddd. 
 
 61. The tilde ~ is used over the n when this letter has 
 the sound of ni in union ; as, daño. 
 
 62. The acute accent ' is placed over vowels, not to alter 
 their sound, but to indicate the syllable on which the stress 
 of voice is laid in pronouncing certain words ; as, orden. 
 
 63. The circumflex accent A was formerly used over a 
 vowel following x, when this letter had not its guttural 
 sound ; as, sexo ; and over a vowel following ch, when the 
 latter was pronounced as k ; as, chilo. But the alterations 
 in orthography no longer require this mark. 
 
 LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Remark. — The learner should thoroughly examine the preceding direc- 
 tions in orthography and orthoepy, before attempting to read the follow- 
 ing lessons. He must not forget to pronounce every letter except h* 
 and also u, in certain cases (see 14 and 22). Every vowel especially 
 must be sounded distinctly, even more so than the consonants, if any 
 difference be made. Monosyllables, such as le, me, mí, sí, se, que, are 
 not to be hurried over, like the, to, me, etc., are in English ; but they 
 must be pronounced fully and clearly. 
 
 Such words as the learner will be most liable to mispronounce, are, in 
 the first of the following reading lessons, followed by the number of the 
 paragraph which will be found to contain the proper directions for their 
 right pronunciation. 
 
 I. Words of one syllable : 
 
 Me (4) ; mi (5) ; la (3) ; no; el; su (7) ; ha (16) ; mas 
 (24) ; qui (22) ; que (22) ; yo ; cruz (7, 29) ; luz ; cal ; un 
 (7); ce (10, 4); bol; fil (5); ci (10, 5); cha (11); por; 
 gran; va (26); muy (48); rey (23, 37); ten (25); voy 
 (45) ; ved (12) ; de 1 ; los (6) ; fin (5) ; mes (24) ; san ; buey 
 
 * Ch, it must be kept in mind, is in Spanish a single letter. (See 11.) 
 
LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 25 
 
 (53) ; dé ; sé ; soy ; ser ; vez (29) ; es ; en ; con ; f é ; tu ; 
 ley: son; té; tres; mil; hay (34) ; tal; he (16); ir; vanj 
 ve; id; di; ven; pon; haz; doy; hoy; sed. 
 
 II. Words accented on the syllable next to the last : 
 Man-to ; ina-ña (20) • a-ro-ma ; ar-nia ; tem-plo ; jo-ya 
 
 (17) ; ta-bla; jun-ta (17, 7) ; yu-go ; su-yo ; hi-jo (16, 17) ; 
 gen-te (15) ; cor-to ; co-sa ; ca-lle (19) ; bol-sa ; bo-llo (19) ; 
 su-je-to ; za-pa-to (29); lla-ma (19); la-go; lla-nu-ra ; no- 
 ble; sobre;* fa-ti-ga ; in-vier-no (41) ; hue-so (47) ; do-lo; 
 don-de; don-ce-lla (19); no-che (11); o-bra ; cuo-ta (49) ; 
 len-gua (46) ; ma-yo ; e-le-va-do ; fuer-za ; pre-sen-ta-do ; 
 pe-cho; jó-ven ; fér-til ; fácil; ór-den ; ár-bol; es-té-ril ; 
 már-gen ; vír-gen ; es-car-la-ta ; ig-no-rán-cia (40) ; mu-da ; 
 mo-zo ; ca-ba-lle-ro ; ci-vi-li-za-do ; en-sor-de-ci-do ; cer-ni- 
 mien-to ; pun-to ; en-e-mi-go ; mu-cho ; na-tu-ra-lis-ta ; bri- 
 lla ; mo-men-to ; tra-ba-jo ; her-ma-no. 
 
 III. Words accented on the last syllable : 
 
 Ver-dad ; frutal; vul-gar (7); ar-dor ; tro-pel ; to-tal ; 
 ba-jar ; ga-chon ; si-llon ; ho-nor ; ja-mon ; sa-lud ; man- 
 tel : se-nal ; bal-con ; ra-zon ; mo-ral ; que-ru-bin (22) ; se- 
 ra-fin; te-me-ri-dad ; ne-ce-si-dad ; es-cla-vi-tud ; mo-de-rar ; 
 mag-na-ni-mi-dad ; in-ca-paz ; vo-lun-tad ; me-di-tar ; de-bi- 
 li-dad; co-ra-zon ; hu-ma-ni-dad ; as-pi-rar; ven-cer ; va-lor; 
 vir-tud ; juz-gar ; a-qui (22) ; ca-fé ; ca-na-pé ; per-do-na- 
 ré ; e-jer-ce-rá ; ri-di-cu-li-za-rá ; ma-yor ; a-sí. 
 
 IV. Words accented on tie syllable marked : 
 Lás-ti-ma ; es-pí-ri cu ; nú-me-ro ; cá-ma-ra ; úl-ti-mo ; 
 
 in-vá-li-do ; ge-ne-^a-lí-si-mo (15); bár-ba-ro ; pu-rí-si-ma ; 
 gé-ne-ro (15); tér-mi-no ; cré-di-to ; ma-lé-vo-lo ; re-pú-bli- 
 ca ; ré-gi-nien (15); en-ér-gi-co (15); di-fi-ci-lí-si-nia ; me- 
 ta-fí-si-co ; ma-te-má-ti-co ; fi-ló-so-fo ; ló-gi-ca ; ri-dí-cu-la ; 
 crí-ti-co ; a-ná-li-sis ; do-més-ti-ca ; obs-tá-eu-lo. 
 
 * Noble and sobre are pronounced no-bley, so-brey, and not no-bul^ 
 so-bur, as in English. 
 
 3 
 
26 LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 fé¡T We must again remind the learner to give the vowels and conso- 
 nants their true Spanish sounds, and not those he has been accustomed 
 to give in English words, except in those sounds which are the same in 
 both languages. Thus, vulgar in Spanish is pronounced vool-gár ; es } 
 ais; tres, trace; sillón, seel-yón; ñoña, nón-yah; cizalla, thee-thál-yah. 
 
 Y. All the sounds of Spanish letters : 
 
 $¿¡¡T We give, in the following few words, all the sounds known in 
 pronouncing Spanish : the learner who is able to pronounce them, will 
 therefore be able to utter every consonant, vowel, diphthongal or triph- 
 thongal sound which he will find in the Spanish language : 
 
 G-ente ; ñoño ; cholla ; dijo ; buey ; voy ; muy ; hay ; 
 cuota ; línea ; julio ; reo ; ciudad ; social ; zuzo ; yugo ; 
 gueta ; agüelo ; qüesto ; sexo ; fixa ; qui ; que ; cuanto ; 
 héroe; puerto ; deuda ; causáis ; variéis ; preciáis ; santi- 
 guáis ; bien ; rey. 
 
 VI. Lesson for reading :* 
 
 El hijo sabio es la doctrina del padre : el que es burlador, 
 no oye cuando le corrigen. 
 
 El hombre se saciará de bienes, fruto de su boca ; mas 
 el alma de los prevaricadores es inicua. 
 
 Quien guarda su boca, guarda su alma : mas el que es 
 inconsiderado para hablar sentirá males. 
 
 Quiere y no quiere el perezoso : mas el alma de los labo- 
 riosos será engrosada. 
 
 El justo detestará la palabra de mentira ; mas el impío 
 avergüenza, y será avergonzado. 
 
 La justicia guarda el camino del inocente : mas la impi- 
 edad echa por tierra al pecador 
 
 Hay quien parece rico, no tenie-ado nada ; y hay quien 
 parece pobre, teniendo muchas riquezas. 
 
 El rescate de la vida del hombre son sus riquezas ; mas 
 el que' es pobre, no aguanta la amenaza. 
 
 La luz de los justos da alegría : mas la lámpara de los 
 impíos se apagará. 
 
 * From Proverbs, xiii. 1—13. The verbs are in italics. The plurals 
 have the marked accent. • 
 
LESSONS FOR PRONUNCIATION. 27 
 
 Entre los soberbios siempre hay contiendas : mas los que 
 todas las cosas hacen con consejo, se rigen por la sabiduría. 
 
 La riqueza hecha de prisa se menoscabará : mas la que 
 se recoge poco á poco con la mano, se aumentará. 
 
 La esperanza, que se retarda, affLige al alma : árbol de 
 vida el deseo, que se cumple. 
 
 ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF SPANISH. 
 
 Each of the Spanish vowels is invariable in the quality of its sound, 
 there being no other variation than that of quantity, or length of time 
 required in pronouncing it. 
 
 In Spanish, the vowel of that syllable of a word on which the accent 
 falls, is called long ; the other vowels of the word, short : thus in the 
 word veces, the former e is long, as it requires the stress of voice or 
 accent, and the latter e is short, as it is pronounced more rapidly. In 
 the English words essence and present, the first and second e of each 
 word have the same sound, but the first being accented, requires more 
 time for pronouncing it ; and in Spanish the e of the first syllable of these 
 words would be called long, and the second e short £ljF* The above 
 observations will serve to explain why e in Spanish often sounds like e 
 in the English word men ; i like i in the English word pin; and o more 
 open, nearly like u in up. 
 
 The sound of d (see 12) is so nearly like the English sound of the 
 same letter, that it is hardly worth while for the private learner to make 
 any effort to give any different sound to this letter from that which he 
 has been accustomed to give it. The same may be said of the letters t 
 (see 25) and v (see 26). All the consonants are pronounced a little more 
 softly in Spanish than in English — so that b seems to sound almost like 
 v ; and y (when a consonant) almost like j, as this letter is pronounced 
 in English. 
 
 pp^ In certain provinces of Spain, the c before e and i, and the zare 
 sounded like s and z in English ; and in the Spanish States of America 
 (originally colonized from those provinces), the same peculiarity of pro- 
 nunciation is quite common. In Mexico, the liquid sound of 11 is, by the 
 great mass of the people, pronounced like the modern French sound of 
 the same liquid : thus, Saltillo would be pronounced by a Castilian 
 Sal-teel'-yo ; by a Mexican, Sal-tee'-yo. Pure Castilian, however, re- 
 quires the c, z, and Ü to be sounded as we have directed. 
 
PART II. 
 
 GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF 
 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX. 
 
 PxVRTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 64. There are in the Spanish language nine different 
 Parts of Speech, viz., the Article, Noun, Adjective, Pro- 
 noun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, and Inter- 
 jection. 
 
 |^* The names of these Parts of Speech in Spanish are Articulo, 
 Nombre, Adjetivo, Pronombre, Verbo, Adverbio, Preposición, Conjunción, 
 Interjección. 
 
 65. The Article is placed before a noun to enlarge or 
 limit the extent of its signification ; as, el hombre, the man ; 
 la muger, the woman ; las casas, the houses ; un hijo, a son ; 
 una hija, a daughter. 
 
 (a.) The Article is generally divided into the definite and indefinite 
 kinds : the word the (and its corresponding words in other languages) 
 being called the definite; and the word a or an (and its corresponding 
 words in other languages) being called the indefinite. 
 
 66. The Noun is the name of a thing ; as, hombre, man ; 
 muger, woman ; casa, house ; Juan, John ; Londres, Lon- 
 don. 
 
 (a.) Nouns are of two kinds, common and proper. A common noun 
 is the name of a whole class of objects : as, árbol, tree ; perro, dog. A 
 proper noun is the individual name applied to a particular person or 
 thing ; as, Juan, John ; Inglaterra, England. 
 
 (6.) Nouns have two numbers, the singular and the plural. The sin- 
 gular number denotes but one object; as, sombrero, hat. The plural 
 signifies more objects than one; as, sombreros, hats. 
 
 (c.) In Spanish nouns have two genders, the masculine and the femin- 
 ine. The masculine includes all nouns that belong to the male kind, and 
 all that take the masculine article before them ; as, hombre, man ; hijo, 
 
 (28) 
 
PARTS OF SPEECH. 29 
 
 son ; el sombrero, the hat ; un libro, a book. The feminine includes all 
 nouns of the female kind, and all that take the feminine article before 
 them; as, muger, woman; hija, daughter; la silla, the chair; una casa- 
 ca, a coat. 
 
 £!|F" The distinctions of gender have, through imitation, been extended 
 to all nouns in Spanish ; that is, all nouns are considered either mascu- 
 line or feminine in gender. Thus, as may be seen above, libro, a book, 
 is masculine, and silla, a chair, is feminine. 
 
 (d.) The cases of nouns express the different relations of one thing to 
 another. The nominative case is the word which is the subject of the 
 verb ; as, el agua hierve, the water boils ; el Frances habla, the French- 
 man talks. The objective case is the word which is the object of an action 
 expressed by a verb, or of a relation expressed by a preposition ; as, el 
 muchacho ama la verdad, the boy loves the truth ; nadie está sin pecado, 
 nobody is without sin. 
 
 67. The Adjective is a word that expresses the quality 
 of a noun, or determines its number or signification ; as, 
 buen hombre, good man ; muchos hombres, many men ; dos 
 duros, two dollars. 
 
 j^rp^ In Spanish, the adjective takes the gender and number of the 
 noun to which it relates. 
 
 68. The Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun to 
 avoid the too frequent repetition of the latter ; as, Juan 
 está en casa, él está bueno ; John is at home, he is well. 
 
 (a.) Personal pronouns are used for the names of persons or things; 
 as, el, ella, ello ; he, she, it. 
 
 pp^ There are three persons for nouns and pronouns : the first person 
 denoting the person speaking; as, yo, I: the second, the person or thing 
 spoken to; as, tú, thou : the third, the person or thing spoken of; as, él, 
 he. 
 
 (b.) Possessive pronouns show the possession of the persons or things 
 which they represent. Some relate to one person, others to more than 
 one ; as, mi libro, my book ; nuestra casa, our house. 
 
 (c) Relative pronouns are those which relate to a preceding noun or 
 pronoun, called the antecedent ; as, el hombre que enseña, the man who 
 teaches. Here hombre is the antecedent to the relative pronoun que. 
 
 (d.) Interrogative pronouns are relative pronouns used in asking ques- 
 tions ; they have no antecedent, but relate to the answer of the question 
 for their subsequent ; as, ¿Quien está allí 1 Pedro ; Who is there 1 Peter. 
 Here quien is the interrogative pronoun, and the answer, Pedro, the sub- - 
 sequent. 
 
 (e.) Demonstrative pronouns are those that point out, in a definite 
 
30 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 manner, the persons or things which they represent or to which they 
 belong ; as, este hombre, this man ; aquella mesa, that table. 
 
 (./*.) Indefinite pronouns are those that express, in an indefinite or 
 general manner, the persons or things which they represent ; as, algunos 
 de nosotros, some of us. 
 
 69. The Verb is a word that expresses an affirmation of 
 the subject ; as, el hombre es sabio, the man is wise ; ella 
 habla, she speaks. 
 
 fj2f The different kinds of verbs, their moods, tenses, numbers, per- 
 sons, participles, and gerunds, will be found explained in a subsequent 
 part of this work. (See 135 — 156.) 
 
 70. The Adverb modifies the meaning of a verb, adjec- 
 tive, or other adverb ; as, Pedro escribe bien, Peter writes 
 well ; María es muy amable, Mary is very amiable ; Juan 
 lee muy bien, John reads very well. 
 
 71. The Preposition serves to express the relation of 
 things ; as, el hermano de Diego, the brother of James ; 
 viajó por España, he traveled through Spain. 
 
 72. The Conjunction connects words and sentences ; as, 
 José y María serán felices, pero no serán ricos, Joseph 
 and Mary will be happy, but they will not be rich. 
 
 73. The Interjection expresses passion or emotion ; as, 
 / O hombre ! O man ! 
 
 74. The inflection of a word means the changes which it undergoes to 
 express different numbers, persons, cases, moods, tenses, etc. 
 
 75. The inflection of articles, nouns, adjectives, and pronouns, is 
 called declension ; as, caballo, horse ; caballos, horses. 
 
 76. The inflection of verbs is called conjugation; as, yo avio, I love; 
 tú amas, thou lovest ; él ama, he loves. 
 
 77. Of the parts of speech, the article, noun, adjective, pronoun and 
 verb are inflected ; and the adverb, preposition, conjunction, and inter- 
 jection, not inflected. 
 
 78. The participle is not regarded as a distinct part of speech in Span- 
 ish, but as belonging to the verb and partaking of the nature of the 
 adjective. It is often inflected like the latter. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 79. The definite article, which in English is always the, 
 is rendered in Spanish by different words, according to 
 
OF THE ARTICLE. 31 
 
 the gender and number of the nouns "before which it is 
 used. 
 
 80. Before a noun masculine of the singular number, 
 
 el is used ; as, 
 
 El hombre, the man. J El hijo, the son. 
 
 El rey, the king. j El plato, the plate* 
 
 81. Before a noun feminine of the singular number, la 
 is used ; as, 
 
 La muger. the woman. | La hija, the daughter. 
 
 La reina, the queen. | La cuchara, the spoon. 
 
 82. Before a noun masculine of the plural number, los 
 is used ; as, 
 
 Los reyes, the kings. \ Los platos, the plates. 
 
 83. Before a noun feminine of the plural number, las is 
 used ; as, 
 
 Las reinas, the queens. \ Las cucharas, the spoons. 
 
 84. Before an adjective used as a noun of the singular 
 number, lo is employed when it has the meaning of that 
 which is ; as, 
 
 Lo bueno, the good, or, that which I Lo justo, that which is just. 
 
 is good. Lo rojo, the red, or, that which is 
 
 Lo pasado, the past, or, that which \ red. 
 
 is past. 
 
 £3P* Lo has no plural. It is called the neuter article. 
 
 85. The Spanish indefinite article corresponding to a or 
 an in English is uno (always contracted into un\ before a 
 noun masculine ; as, 
 
 Un médico, a physician. J Un sombrero, a hat. 
 
 86. Before a noun feminine, una is used ; as, 
 
 Una hermana, a sister. | Una silla, a chair. 
 
 (a.) When the plural form of uno and una is used, these words are 
 indefinite pronouns; as, unos hombres or unas mugeres, some men or 
 some women. 
 
 87. The masculine articles el and un are always used 
 before feminine singular nouns when they begin with a or 
 
 * In Spanish, all nouns are either masculine or feminine. (See 91.) 
 
3*2 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 ha, accented on the first syllable* (whether the accent is 
 marked or not) ; as, 
 
 El ama. the mistress. J El hambre 7 the hunger. 
 
 Un area, a chest. | El agua, the water. 
 
 (a.) In the plural, such nouns take the regular feminine article; as, 
 Las- areas, the chests. j Las aguas, the waters. 
 
 (b.) If an adjective intervene between the article and feminine noun 
 (even though the adjective begin with a or ha accented),, the feminine 
 article is always used ; as, 
 La ancha arca, the broad chest. ¡ Una buena ama, a good mistress. 
 
 Remark. — There are very few feminine nouns in Spanish which begin 
 with a or ha accented ; so that the exceptions to the general use of la 
 and una (see 87) are very few. 
 
 88. When the preposition á (to) or de (of) comes imme- 
 diately before the masculine article el, a contraction takes 
 place, and both words are united. Thus, instead of á el 
 and de el [to the and of the), al and del are used ; as, 
 Al padre, to the father. I Del muchacho, of the boy. 
 
 Al ama, to the mistress. \ Del hambre, of the hunger. 
 
 (a.) Before the other articles, la, los, las, lo, un, and una, the preposi- 
 tions á and de, as well as the articles, remain unchanged ; as, 
 
 De los hombres, of the men. 
 De lo futuro, of the future. 
 De una noche, of a night. 
 
 A' la muger, to the woman. 
 A' las hermanas, to the sisters. 
 De un dia, of the day. 
 
 (6.) De el is sometimes used before the surnames of persons ; as, 
 De el César, | Of the Caesar. 
 
 89. The Spanish articles should not always be translated 
 into English : and sometimes they are not expressed in 
 Spanish when they would be in English ; as, 
 
 La humilidad y la mansedumbre 
 
 brillan menos que el orgullo. 
 La vida no es un sueño. 
 Con todos los hombres ten paz. 
 El capitán Smith tiene memoria. 
 Ella tiene marido. 
 
 Humility and meekness glitter less 
 
 than pride. 
 Life is not a dream. 
 With all men have peace. 
 Captain Smith has a memory. 
 She has a husband. 
 
 * Before feminine nouns singular beginning with a or ha, not accented 
 on the first svllable, this rule does not apply ; and, of course, la or una is 
 used. 
 
OF THE NOUN. 33 
 
 90. Sometimes the Spanish definite article should be 
 rendered by the indefinite in English ; as, 
 
 El paño se pueda comprar á tres 
 
 duros la vara. 
 La harina se vende á seis duros el 
 
 barril. 
 
 The cloth can be bought for three 
 dollars a yard. 
 
 Flour is sold at six dollars a bar- 
 rel. 
 
 Jg^* The learner must now turn to Part IV., and translate and write 
 the Exercises in Section First. 
 
 OF THE NOUN. 
 
 Nouns are divided into proper and common, as in Eng- 
 lish ; and to them belong gender, number, person, and 
 case. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 91. In Spanish Grammar, every noun is considered as 
 either masculine or feminine, whether it really has any 
 gender or not ; thus, pan, bread ; sombrero, hat ; plato, 
 plate ; papel, paper ; azúcar, sugar ; are masculine ; while 
 casaca, coat ; manteca, butter ; agua, water ; mesa, table ; 
 are feminine. 
 
 92. The following are the rules for distinguishing the 
 gender : 
 
 (a.) Nouns which are the names of males, as well as 
 those which denote the ranks, offices, professions or em- 
 ployments of males, are masculine ; as, hombre, man ; perro, 
 dog ; rey, king ; cura, rector ; pintor, painter ; zapatero, 
 shoemaker. 
 
 (b.) Nouns which are the names of females, as well as 
 those which denote the ranks, offices, professions or em- 
 ployments of females, are feminine ; as, muger, woman ; 
 vaca, cow ; reina, queen ; costurera, seamstress ; zapatera, 
 shoemaker' s-wife. 
 
 (c.) Nouns which end in a, d, ion, is, and ez (unless com- 
 prehended in rule 92, a), are feminine ; as, marca, mark ; 
 locura, folly; soledad, solitude ; religion, religion ; hipótesis, 
 hypothesis ; timidez, timidity. (See 421.) 
 
34 OF THE NOUN. 
 
 (d.) Nouns which do not end in a, d, ion, is, and ez 
 (unless comprehended in rule 92, b), are masculine; as, 
 zapato, shoe; honor, honor; té, tea ; jabon, soap. (See 422.) 
 
 (e.) Nouns used only in the plural are of the gender to which they 
 would belong, from their termination, if they had a singular form. Thus, 
 calzones, breeches, is masculine, and grevas, greaves, is feminine, because 
 calzón and grcva would be of these respective genders, from their termi- 
 nation. Llares, fasces, and fauces, are exceptions to this rule, they being 
 feminine. 
 
 Remark. — There are some few masculine nouns having feminine end- 
 ings ; and some few feminine nouns which end otherwise than in a, d, 
 ion, is, and ez. A list of these will be found in the Appendix to Part III. 
 
 [¡2§F* The gender of the noun can always be distinguished by the arti- 
 cle used before it, except in the case of feminine nouns singular, begin- 
 ning with a or ha, accented on the first syllable (see 87). These, 
 however, are very few in number. 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 93. The plural number is formed from the singular by 
 adding es to all nouns ending with a consonant, with the 
 letter y, or with any accented vowel ; as, 
 
 Muger, woman. Mugeres, women. 
 
 Rey, king. Reyes, kings. 
 
 Alelí, gillyflower. Alelíes, gillyflowers. 
 
 94. Nouns ending with a vowel not accented, form their 
 plural by adding s to the singular ; as, 
 
 Villa, town. Villas, towns. 
 
 Amigo, friend. | Amigos, friends. 
 
 95. There are a few exceptions to the above general rules 
 for the formation of the plural of nouns ; they are as fol- 
 lows : 
 
 (a.) If the noun end with z, this letter is changed into 
 ces to form the plural ; as, 
 
 Juez, judge. Jueces, judges, 
 
 (b.) If the noun end with é accented, the plural is 
 formed by adding s ; as, 
 
 Puntapié, kick. Puntapiés, kicks. 
 
 (c.) If the noun end with s immediately preceded by a 
 
OF THE NOTJN. 35 
 
 vowel not accented, no change takes place to form the 
 plural ; as, 
 
 HipOtesis, hypothesis. | Hipótesis, hypotheses. 
 
 (d.) The following nouns are irregular in the formation of the plural; 
 sofá, sofa; papá, pope, father; mamá, mamma; dux, duke; their plu- 
 rals being sofas, papas, mamas, duces. 
 
 96. In Spanish, nouns have but two cases, the nomina- 
 tive and objective, the former being the agent or subject of 
 the verb ; the latter the object of an action expressed by 
 the verb, or of a relation expressed by a preposition. 
 
 97. There is no possessive case in Spanish : property or 
 possession is expressed by means of the preposition de ; as, 
 
 El hijo de Juan . 
 La casa de la muger. 
 
 La conciencia del hombre. 
 
 El libro es de María. 
 
 La pluma es del escribiente. 
 
 The son of John, i. e. John's son. 
 The house of the woman, i. e. the 
 
 woman's house. 
 The conscience of the man, i. e. 
 
 the man's conscience. 
 The book is of Mary, i. e. the book 
 
 is Mary's. 
 The pen is of the clerk, i. e. the 
 
 pen is the clerk's. 
 
 (a.) One noun can not serve as an adjective for another 
 noun, as in English ; thus, such phrases as, the New- York 
 road ; a paper hat ; an ivory spoon ; are in Spanish to be 
 rendered el camino de Nueva- York ; un sombrero de papel ; 
 una cuchara de marfil ; i. e. the road of {to or from) New- 
 York ; a hat of paper ; a spoon of ivory. In Spanish, the 
 sentence " he went to his brother's," would be fully ex- 
 pressed thus : '•'■fué, á casa de su hermano" he went to (the) 
 house of his brother. 
 
 £y The learner must now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Sec- 
 tion Second, as there directed. 
 
36 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 98. Adjectives in Spanish have both a singular and 
 a plural form, according as they are used with singular or 
 plural nouns ; as, 
 
 Grande hombre, large man. \ Grandes hombres, large men. 
 
 99. The rules for the formation of the plural of adjec- 
 tives are the same as those for forming the plural of nouns. 
 (See 93, 94, and 95.) 
 
 100. Adjectives which end with an, on, or o, and such 
 as are derived from the names of nations, change not only 
 from the singular to the plural, but also from the mascu- 
 line to the feminine, to agree with the noun (expressed or 
 understood) to which they belong ; as, 
 
 Hombre generoso. 
 Muger generosa. 
 Olgazan. Olgazana. 
 Fanfarrón. Fanfarrona. 
 
 Español. Española. 
 Ingles. Inglesa. 
 
 Generous man. 
 Generous woman. 
 Idle (man). Idle (woman). 
 Bragging (man). Bragging (wo- 
 man). 
 Spanish (man). Spanish (woman). 
 English (man). English (woman). 
 
 (a.) From the examples just given, it will be seen that 
 adjectives ending with o, change o into a to form the femi- 
 nine ; and that those ending with an or o», as well as those 
 derived from the names of nations, form their feminine by 
 adding a to the masculine. 
 
 (b.) In forming the plural of adjectives which are modi- 
 fied by gender, the gender must be taken into considera- 
 tion first, and then the plural ending added ; as, 
 El manso caballo. 
 Los mansos caballos. 
 La tímida vaca. 
 
 Las tímidas vacas. 
 
 El Inarles. La Inglesa. 
 
 Los Ingleses. Las Inglesas. 
 
 The tame horse. 
 
 The tame horses. 
 
 The timid cow. 
 
 The timid cows. 
 
 The English (man). The English 
 
 (woman). 
 The English (men). The English 
 
 (women). 
 
 (c.) Adjectives in Spanish are generally placed after the 
 nouns which they qualify : though some generally come 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 37 
 
 before the noun ; and some can precede or succeed the noun, 
 according to the taste of the writer or speaker. Thus, 
 
 Un hombre respetable. i A respectable man. 
 
 Una felicidad aparente. An apparent felicity. 
 
 Malas obras, (or) obras malas. I Bad works. 
 
 Remark. — In English, an adjective sometimes is allowed to come 
 after the noun ; as when we say " a verb neuter;" "a noun feminine ;" 
 " an account current ;" "life eternal." But the rule is a far more gen- 
 eral one in Spanish. 
 
 I^ 5 * Some directions for the proper position of adjectives will be given 
 in Part III. 
 
 101. Some adjectives and adjective pronouns drop the 
 final o in the masculine singular (but not in the plural), 
 when they are placed before. the noun, but never when they 
 are placed after it. These are nno, a (or one) ; alguno, 
 some ; ninguno, none ; primero, first ; postrero, last ; tercero, 
 third ; bueno, good ; malo, bad ; as, 
 
 Algún fruto. 
 Un buen gobierno. 
 Un buen hombre, Cor) un hombre 
 bueno. 
 
 Some fruit. 
 
 A good government. 
 
 A good man. 
 
 (a.) Santo, Saint, when prefixed to the name of a male person, drops 
 its last syllable; as, San Pablo, Saint Paul; San Pedro, St. Peter. 
 Ciento, hundred, when it immediately precedes a noun, masculine or 
 feminine, drops its final syllable ; as, cien árboles, hundred trees ; but 
 ciento y dos árboles, hundred and two trees. Grande, great, large, gene- 
 rally loses its final syllable when the noun to which it is prefixed begins 
 with a consonant ; as, gran poder, great power. When grande does not 
 mean size or magnitude, but good qualities gran is used if the noun 
 follow it. Thus, gran hombre, means a " great man," and grande hom- 
 bre, a " large man." 
 
 102. Adjectives are often used without the noun (the 
 latter being understood) j as, 
 
 The poor (man). The poor (wo- 
 man). 
 
 El pobre. La pobre. 
 Los pobres. Las pobres. 
 
 La derecha.* 
 Un ignorante. 
 
 The poor (men). The poor (wo- 
 men). 
 The right (hand). 
 An ignorant (man). 
 
 * Mano, " hand " (feminine) is here understood. 
 4 
 
38 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Up" The gender can be known by the article which precedes the 
 adjective. 
 
 (a.) If the adjective refer to something to which we do not apply a 
 gender, the neuter article to is used ; as, lo poco, lo mucho, the little, the 
 much, or " that which is little," " that which is much." (See 84.) 
 
 |!jF" The learner can now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Section 
 Third. 
 
 DEGREES OF COMPAPdSON. 
 
 103. When two things are compared, the one is equal, 
 inferior, or superior to the other ; hence there are three 
 sorts of comparison ; that of equality, inferiority, and supe- 
 riority. Thus we may say, John is as happy as James ; 
 John is less happy than James ; or John is more happy than 
 James. These adjectives are all properly in the compara- 
 tive degree. 
 
 104. The comparative of equality is formed by placing 
 tan (as, so) before the adjective, and como (as) after it ; as, 
 
 El Judío es tan rico como el Fran- I The Jew is as rich as the French- 
 ces. I man. 
 
 (a.) Sometimes tan is omitted, and como only used ; as, 
 Juan es fuerte como un león. | John is strong as a lion. 
 
 (6.) Cual (quat) is sometimes found instead of como. Tan used be- 
 fore an adjective without como, means so; as, tan grande, so great. 
 
 105. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing 
 menos (less) before, and que (than) after the adjective ; as, 
 
 El Judío es menos rico que el Fran- i The Jew is less rich than the French- 
 ces. I man. 
 
 106. The comparative of superiority is formed by placing 
 mas (more) before, and que (than) after the adjective ; as, 
 
 Mi madre es mas rica que el reina. I My mother is more rich (richer) 
 I than the queen. 
 
 (a.) Mayor, greater ; mejor, better ; and menor, less, are already in the 
 comparative degree, and do not require mas before them ; as, 
 Las reyes son mayores que los lores. | The kings are greater than the lords. 
 
 107. The superlative degree of the adjective expresses 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 39 
 
 the quality in a very high or very low, or in the highest or 
 lowest state : hence there are two sorts of superlatives, the 
 absolute and the relative. Thus we may say, New York is 
 a very large city, or, New York is the largest city in 
 America. 
 
 108. The superlative absolute is formed either by placing 
 muy (very) before the adjective, or by affixing the letters 
 isimo to the simple form of the adjective ; as, 
 
 U'til, useful. 1 Muy útil, or útilísimo, very useful, 
 
 I or most useful. 
 
 (a.) If the adjective end with a vowel, this vowel is dropped when isimo 
 is affixed ; as, grande, great ; grandísimo or muy grande, very great ; 
 alto, high ; altísimo or muy alto. 
 
 (b.) Adjectives that end with ble, co, go, and z, change these letters 
 respectively into bil, qu, gu, and c, before the suffix isimo; as, noble, 
 noble ; nobilísimo, very noble ; seco, dry ; sequísimo, very dry ; largo, 
 large ; larguísimo, very large ; feraz, fruitful ; feracísimo, very fruitful ; 
 or muy noble, muy seco, muy largo, muy feraz. 
 
 (c) Most adjectives can have their superlatives formed by muy pre- 
 fixed, or by the ending isimo. There are a few, however, such as those 
 ending with ial and antepenults (i. e. those accented on the last syllable 
 but two) ending with co, go, lo, which form their superlative absolute 
 always with muy; as, social, social, muy social, and not socialísimo ; mag- 
 nífico, magnificent ; muy magnífico, very magnificent ; pródigo, prodigal ; 
 muy pródigo, very prodigal ; gárrulo, garrulous ; muy gárrulo, very gar- 
 rulous. As a general rule, adjectives of many syllables form the superla- 
 tive absolute by muy and not with isimo. The superlative of mucho, 
 much, is always muchísimo. 
 
 1 09. The superlative relative is formed by placing the 
 definite article before mas (more) or menos (less), and put- 
 ting these before the adjective ; as, 
 
 El Judío es el mas rico de todos. 
 
 The Jew is the most rich (the rich- 
 est) of all. 
 The mother of the Frenchman is 
 
 the most rich of all the women. 
 My daughters are the least learned 
 of all the maidens. 
 Remark. — Some adjectives have, besides the regular superlative abso- 
 lute, also an irregular one, derived from some ancient form of the adjec- 
 tive ; as, fidelísimo, very faithful ; bonísimo, very good. The regular 
 superlative of these adjectives is fielisimo and buenisimo, from fiel. faith- 
 
 La madre del Frances es la mas rica 
 
 de todas las mugeres. 
 Mis hijas son las menos doctas de 
 
 todas las doncellas. 
 
40 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 ful, and bueno, good. The irregular forms in general use are few, and are 
 all to be found in Spanish dictionaries ; therefore they offer no impedi- 
 ment to the student. 
 
 The cardinal and ordinal numbers will be found in Part III. 
 
 £21^ The Exercises in Part TV., Section Fourth, must now be trans- 
 lated. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 There are six sorts of pronouns : personal, possessive, 
 relative, interrogative, demonstrative, and indefinite. Posses- 
 sive, demonstrative, and indefinite pronouns are a species of 
 defining adjectives. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 110. The personal pronouns are yo, I; tú, thou; usted, 
 you ; él, ella, ello, he, she, it ; nosotros (masculine), nosotras 
 (feminine), we ; vosotros (mase), vosotros (fern.), ye ; ustedes, 
 you ; ellos (mase), ellas (fern.), they; se, himself. 
 
 (a.) Nos is sometimes used in the nominative for nosotros, but only 
 when a nation or body of men issue some proclamation or law; as, " we 
 (nos) the representatives of Mexico." 
 
 (b.) Vos was anciently used in the nominative for vosotros, but it is 
 now used only in addressing the -Deity and celestial beings, or persons 
 of very superior rank. 
 
 (c.) Usted is the only word with which persons address and are ad- 
 dressed in ordinary conversation in Spanish. It is a contraction oí vues- 
 tra merced (your worship) ; and though it is always to be translated by 
 the second person (you) in English, it is of course of the third person, 
 and requires its corresponding possessive pronoun and the verb to which 
 it may be the nominative, to be in the third person. In writing, usted is 
 nearly always abbreviated into v., vm., vmd., vd., V., Vm.,VM., Vtra., or 
 Md. ; and the plural (ustedes) into vs., vms., vmds., VV., Vms., Vmds. ;* 
 as, ¿Como está vmd. ? ¿Como va su salud ? literally, How is your worship 7 
 how goes his health 1 or as we should render it in English, How are 
 you ? how is your health 1 
 
 111. The personal pronouns have two forms of the 
 objective case, the direct and the indirect ; the first govern- 
 
 * These contractions are always pronounced usted and ustedes, just as 
 in English the contractions Mr. and Messrs. are pronounced as if writ- 
 ten in full. 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 41 
 
 td by the verb or the preposition to, understood, and the 
 second always governed by a preposition before it, ex- 
 pressed; as, 
 
 First. Juan me dio un libro. I John (to) me gave a book. 
 
 Second. Juan vino por mí. I John came for me. 
 
 1 12. The personal pronouns are declined as exhibited in 
 the annexed paradigms:* 
 
 I. 
 
 CASE. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 SEC. PERSON. THIRD PERSON. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Nomina. 
 
 ,. 
 
 Fa, I. 
 
 Tú, thou. 
 
 El, he. 
 
 Ella, she. 
 
 First Obj. 
 
 -2- 
 
 ??i.e, me, to me. 
 
 Ze, thee, to thee. 
 
 le, him, to 
 
 la, le, her, to 
 
 
 H 1 
 
 
 
 him. 
 
 her. 
 
 Sec. Obj. 
 
 02 
 
 á ml, to me. 
 
 á tí, to thee. 
 
 á él, to him. 
 
 á ella, to 
 her. 
 
 Nomina. 
 
 
 nosotros-as, we. 
 
 vosotros-as, ye 
 or you. 
 
 ellos, they. 
 
 ellas, they. 
 
 First Obj. 
 
 
 nos, us, to us. 
 
 os, you, to you. 
 
 /os, Zes, them, 
 
 las, les, them, 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 to them. 
 
 to them. 
 
 Sec. Obj. 
 
 
 á nosotros-as, to 
 
 á rosotros-as,to 
 
 á ellos, to 
 
 á ellas, to 
 
 
 
 us. 
 
 you. 
 
 them. 
 
 them. 
 
 II. 
 
 | CASE. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 Nomina. 
 
 Ü 
 
 Ello, it. 
 
 Find., your worship, 
 you. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 First Obj. 
 
 3 
 
 Zbj it. 
 
 le, your worship, to 
 
 se, himself, herself,' 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 you. 
 
 itself. 
 
 Sec. Obj. 
 
 OQ 
 
 a e/Zo, to it. 
 
 á vmd., to your wor- 
 
 á sí, to himself, to 
 
 
 
 
 ship, to you. 
 
 herself, to itself. 
 
 Nomina. 
 
 
 wanting 
 
 vmds., your wor- 
 ships, you. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 First Obj. 
 
 s 
 
 in the 
 
 les, your worships, 
 you. 
 
 se, themselves. 
 
 Sec. Obj. 
 
 
 plural. 
 
 ó rmds.,to your wor- 
 ships, to you. 
 
 á sí, to themselves. 
 
 I 
 
 113. A pronoun of the first objective case is placed be- 
 fore the verb which governs it, except before infinitives, 
 imperatives, and gerunds ; as, 
 
 El hombre me dijo. 
 La muger le halló. 
 Los perros los siguieron. 
 El médico Zes dijo. 
 
 The man said to me. 
 The woman found him. 
 The dogs followed them. 
 The doctor said to them. 
 
 * In these paradigms, we have used only the preposition « before the 
 indirect or second objective, though any other preposition would require 
 the same case ; as, de él ; por ellos ; para mí. 
 
 4* 
 
Pablo me mandó. 
 
 La criada me trajo un pañuelo. 
 
 Juan te dio un libro. 
 
 El sastre nos vio. 
 
 Los pastores nos hablaron. 
 
 42 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (a. ) If the sentence begin with a verb, the pronoun is 
 allowed to come after it ; in other words, a pronoun of the 
 first-objective case may or may not begin a sentence. When 
 the pronoun comes after the verb, it is joined to it, and 
 both form one word ; as, 
 Nególes el cielo este gozo. | Denied-í^em heaven this pleasure.* 
 
 114. The first-objective case is employed in Spanish, 
 when in English either the verb or the preposition to, ex- 
 pressed or understood, governs the personal pronouns ; as, 
 
 Paul commanded me. 
 
 The maid-servant brought (to) me 
 
 a handkerchief. 
 John gave (to) thee a book. 
 The tailor saw us. 
 The shepherds spoke (to) us. 
 
 (a.) When in English the personal pronouns of the third 
 person are governed by the verb, in Spanish le and los, for 
 the masculine, and la, las, for the feminine, are used ; as, 
 
 La muger le vio. I The woman saw him. 
 
 El viajante los halló. I The traveler found them. 
 
 (b.) When in English the personal pronouns of the third 
 person are governed by the preposition to, expressed or 
 understood, in Spanish, le and les are used for both gen- 
 ders ; as, 
 
 El juez le dijo. I The judge said to-him (or to-her). 
 
 Los libreros les dieron libros. I The booksellers gave them books. 
 
 115. A personal pronoun of the second-objective case is 
 placed after a preposition ; as, 
 
 Fear fell upon him. 
 
 Fear came upon all the neighbors 
 of them. 
 
 The painter made it for me. 
 
 I will accept the favor of your wor- 
 ship, t 
 
 Cayó temor sobre él. 
 
 Vino temor sobre todos los vecinos 
 
 de ellos. 
 El pintor lo hizo para mí. 
 Yo aceptaré el favor de vmd. 
 
 * That is, as it would be properly expressed in English, heaven denied 
 them this pleasure. 
 
 t That is, / will accept your favor. 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 43 
 
 (a.) If in English two objective cases of personal pro- 
 nouns are in the same sentence, one of them governed by 
 the preposition to, understood, and the other by a verb, the 
 one governed by the preposition is placed first ; as, 
 
 María me lo dio. Mary (to) me it gave (or, Mary gave 
 
 it to me). 
 Pedro se la llevó. Peter (to) them her brought (or, 
 
 brought her to them). 
 
 (b.) If the pronoun be reflective, that is, if the nomina- 
 tive and objective cases each refer to the same person, the 
 reflective pronoun must come before the other, if another 
 be used in the same sentence ; as, 
 El cura se me dirigió. | The rector addressed himself to me. 
 
 (c.) When in the second-objective case, any one of the 
 pronouns mí, tí, sí, is preceded by the preposition con 
 (with), this preposition is prefixed to the pronoun, and the 
 syllable go affixed, the whole forming one word ; as, 
 Juan vino conmigo. I John came with-me. 
 
 Ella vino consigo. I She came with-him. 
 
 116. The first-objective case of the personal pronouns 
 comes after infinitives, imperatives, and gerunds* of the 
 verb, forming one word with the verb ; as, 
 
 The lad came to see-them. 
 Bring-me-him, i. e. bring him to-me. 
 Glve-us money. 
 
 Make-??ie, your worship, a coat. 
 Then Peter, taking-/¡im apart, be- 
 gan to chide-Aiw. 
 
 El muchacho vino por verlos. 
 
 Traédmele. 
 
 Danos dinero. 
 
 Hágame vmd.t una casaca. 
 
 Entonces Pedro tomando/e aparte, 
 
 comenzó á reñirZ¿. 
 
 (a.) When one verb governs another in the infinitive, the objective 
 pronoun may come before the first or after the second verb ; as, 
 El Alemán la va á ver, or I The German her goes to see, or, 
 
 El Alemán va á ver/a. I The German goes to see-her. 
 
 (6.) The first or second person plural of the imperative drops its final 
 letter when nos or os is joined to it ; as, 
 
 * A gerund is used in Spanish as the present participle in English 5 
 as, amando, loving. 
 
 t Vmd., though always used in such cases, is not to be rendered in 
 English ; thus the above means, make me a coat. 
 
44 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Sentémonos, and not sentémosnos. 
 Guardaos, and not guardados. 
 
 L et-us- seat-ourselves. 
 Guard-yourselves. 
 
 117. Ello, and its objective case to, are properly used for 
 a noun to which we can not assign any gender ; thus if we 
 should tell a man " I am ill," and he should reply, " I am 
 sorry for it" we perceive that the word it can not be con- 
 sidered masculine or feminine, and in such a case in Span- 
 ish lo (not le nor la) would be used. Though not strictly 
 correct, the practice is allowed of using lo for the mascu- 
 line le, if this pronoun be directly governed by a verb. 
 
 Remark. — We will here, once for all, say to the learner that he must 
 not allow himself to become discouraged on account of the apparent 
 difficulty arising from some words in Spanish being spelled alike, and 
 yet having different significations and belonging to different parts of 
 speech ; for a little attention on his part will teach him how to distin- 
 guish these words. Thus, el, la, lo, los, las, are used as articles and as 
 personal pronouns, but the article never comes immediately before nor is 
 affixed to the persons of verbs, while the objective pronouns always are 
 thus placed. The el as an article is generally followed by an adjective or 
 noun, and can not stand by itself like the pronoun el. Many writers use 
 the accent over él when a pronoun ; but there is no necessity for this, as 
 the sense and position of the word will readily show its office of article 
 or pronoun. The accent will serve to distinguish some words spelled 
 alike, and the student should be careful to notice it ; thus, se, itself, sé, I 
 know, and sé, be thou ; esta, this (feminine), and está, is ; de, of, and dé, 
 let him give; te, thee, and té, tea; si, if, and si, himself; porque, because, 
 and porqué, why ; como, as, and como, how ; etc. 
 
 £3F° The learner can now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Section 
 Fifth. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PE.ONOTJNS. 
 
 118. The possessive pronouns are mio,m.j] tuyo, thy ; 
 suyo, his, her, its, or their ; nuestro, our ; vuestro, your. 
 They are declined as in the following paradigm : 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 MASC. | 
 
 FEM. 
 
 MASC. 
 
 FEM. 1 MASC. | FEM. 
 
 Singular. 
 Plural. 
 
 Mia. 
 
 Mios. 
 
 Mia. 
 Mias. 
 
 Tuyo. 
 Tuyos. 
 
 Tuya. 
 Tuyas. 
 
 Suyo. Suya. 
 Suyos. Suyas. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 MASC. 
 
 FEM. 
 
 MASC. FEM. 
 
 Singular. 
 Plural. 
 
 Nuestro. 
 Nuestros. 
 
 Nuestra. 
 Nuestras. 
 
 Vuestro. Vuestra. 
 Vuestros. Vuestras. 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 45 
 
 1 19. The possessive pronouns mio, tuyo, and suyo, with, 
 their feminines, drop their last syllable when they precede 
 the noun to which they belong ; as, 
 
 Mi padre, mi madre. 
 
 Tu hijo, tu hija. 
 
 Su hermano, su hermana. 
 
 Mis tios, vús tias. 
 
 Sus caballos. 
 
 My father, my mother. 
 Thy son, thy daughter. 
 His brother, his sister. 
 My uncles, my aunts. 
 His (her or their) horses. 
 
 (a.) If mio, tuyo, or suyo come after the noun to which 
 they belong, the last syllable is retained ; as, 
 
 ¡ Padre mio ! ¡ madre mia ! My father ! my mother ! 
 
 Este libro es suyo. This book is his (or hers, or theirs). 
 
 Esta gallina es suya. This hen is his (or hers, or theirs). 
 
 Estos libros son suyos. These books are his (hers, or theirs). 
 
 120. The possessive pronouns agree in gender and num- 
 ber with the object possessed, and not with the person or 
 thing possessing. Thus sit- libro may mean kis book, her 
 book, or their book ; sus libros may mean his books, her books, 
 or their books. If we are speaking of a woman, and wish 
 to say, " this hen is hers," it would be in Spanish, esta gal- 
 lina es suya ; if we wish to say, " this horse is hers," it 
 would be, este caballo es suyo ; if we wish to say, ' : these 
 houses are hers," it would be, estas casas son suyas ; and 
 " these oxen are hers," would be, estos bueyes son suyos. 
 Instead of " hers" the possessive pronoun in each of these 
 sentences, without any alteration, might be rendered " his " 
 if we were speaking of a male person. This is a very im- 
 portant rule, and should be remembered, since it is so unlike 
 the English rule for the agreement of possessive pronouns. 
 
 (a.) The context will generally show whether suyo 
 should be rendered his, her, or their ; otherwise, to prevent 
 ambiguity, de él, of him ; ele ella, of her : de ellos, of them 
 (masculine), de ellas, of them (feminine), etc., is added; as, 
 
 Este libro es suyo de el. This book is his. 
 
 Este libro es suyo de ella. This book is hers. 
 
 Estos libros son suyos de vmd. These books are yours. 
 
 Estos übros son suyos de ellas. These books are theirs (feminine). 
 
46 
 
 OF THE PK.ONOUN. 
 
 121. The absolute possessive pronouns, mine, thine, his 
 own, her own, its own, ours, yours, theirs, are formed by 
 placing the definite article before the possessive pronouns ; 
 thus, el mió, la mia, los mios, las mias, mine ; el nuestro, la 
 nuestra, los nuestros^ las nuestras, ours ; as. 
 
 Su hermano y el mió. 
 Tu madre y la mia. 
 Vuestras hermanas y las mias. 
 Sus cabellos y los nuestros. 
 
 His brother and mine. 
 Thy mother and mine. 
 Your sisters and mine. 
 His (her or their) horses and ours. 
 
 (a.) If a verb which indicates possession come before 
 the pronoun, the article (see 120) is omitted ; as, 
 
 Este hombre es sobrino mió y suyo | This man is my nephew and hers, 
 de ella. 
 
 (b.) When in English the preposition of comes before 
 the absolute possessive pronoun, as in such phrases as, " a 
 horse of ours," " a dog of mine" etc., the preposition is not 
 used in Spanish ; as, 
 
 Un hijo mió es capitán. I A son of mine (or, one of my sons) 
 
 I is captain. 
 
 122. Instead of the personal pronouns, the definite arti- 
 cle is used in Spanish when any member or part of the 
 human body is described as being acted upon, or as being 
 in a certain state, in such a manner as to make it evident 
 that it refers to the person himself to whom the member 
 or part belongs ; as, 
 
 El la tomó por la mano. 
 
 Ella levantó los ojos. 
 
 El publicano hería el pecho. 
 
 He took her by her (the) hand. 
 She raised her (the) eyes. 
 The publican was-smiting his (the) 
 breast. 
 
 (a.) If, however, any member or part of the human body, 
 or parts of dress, be described as acting, or the object of 
 an action, and the article alone would not leave it evident 
 to whom such member or part belongs, then (instead of a 
 possessive pronoun) a personal pronoun and the definite 
 article are both used ; as, 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 47 
 
 El le tocó la mano. 
 La mano le tiembla. 
 El te tomo las botas. 
 
 He touched the hand to-him. 
 The hand to-him trembles. 
 He lo-thee took the boots. 
 
 IJg*" In these examples the learner will perceive that in English the 
 possessive pronoun alone would have been used ; thus, " He touched his 
 hand ;" " His hand trembles ;" " He took thy boots." 
 
 123. It has already been mentioned that in ordinary 
 conversation vmd. (usted) and vmds. (ustedes) are used in- 
 stead of the second person tu and vosotros ; and that vmd. 
 being of the third person, requires its possessive pronouns 
 to be of the third person also, though rendered in English 
 by the second person (see 110, c) ; as, 
 l Está vmd. bueno ? ¿ como va su 
 
 salud ? 
 I Está vmd. buena ? ¿ como va su 
 
 salud ? 
 
 Yo iba á su casa para hacer/e una 
 visita. 
 
 Are you well 7 how is your health ? 
 Are you well? how is your health? 
 
 I was going to your house to make 
 you a visit. 
 
 g^F* These examples, rendered into English literally, would be, "Is 
 your worship well? how is his health?" — "Is your (her) worship well? 
 how is her health?" — " I was going to his (or her) house to make him 
 (or her) a visit." 
 
 (a.) To prevent ambiguity, vmd. or vmds. (your worship or your wor- 
 ships) is often used in addition to the possessive pronoun, or the definite 
 article; as, "yo le doy á vmd. muchas gracias," "I to him give to your 
 worship many thanks ;" that is, " I give you many thanks ;" " sus or los 
 hijos de vmd., señor, son amables;" "his or the sons of your worship, 
 sir, are amiable," that is, " your sons, sir, are amiable ;" " mis hijas y las 
 suyas de vmd. son jóvenes," "my daughters and yours (his of your wor- 
 ship) are young." 
 
 UST" The Exercises in Part IV., Section Sixth, must now be trans- 
 lated. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 124. The relative pronouns are guien, who ; el cual, who, 
 which, that ; que, who, which, that ; cuyo, whose, or, of 
 which. They are thus declined : 
 
 GENDER. MAS., FEM. 
 
 MASC. | 
 
 MASC. | FEM. 
 
 Sing' lar. \ Quien. 
 Plural. Quienes. 
 
 El cual.* La cual. 
 Los cuales.Las cuales. 
 
 Que. 
 Que. 
 
 Cuyo. Cuya. 
 Cuyos. Cuyas. 
 
 * Lo cual is sometimes used instead of el cual. (See 117.) 
 
48 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (a.) Quien always relates to persons, and agrees with its 
 antecedent in gender and number ; as, 
 
 El general es quien los vio. I The general is (he) who saw them. 
 
 Las reinas son quienes le maldi- The queens are (they) who reviled 
 jeron. him. . 
 
 (b.) When quien (or quienes) is governed by a verb, it is 
 always preceded by the preposition á ; as, 
 La dama á quien vmd. teme. j The lady whom you fear. 
 
 (c.) El cual and que, like the relative pronoun that in 
 English, relate both to persons and things, agreeing with 
 their antecedent in gender and number. El cual is gener- 
 ally to be used to prevent the repetition of quien or 
 que ; as, 
 
 La vaca que vio, y de la cual habla, I The cow which he saw, and of which 
 es tímida. ■ I he speaks, is timid. 
 
 (d.) Cuyo is the possessive relative pronoun, answering 
 to whose, which, or of which, in English, and agrees with 
 the noun which comes after it ; as, 
 
 El hombre cuya madre es buena. 
 
 La casa cuyos cuartos son espaci- 
 osos. 
 
 El centurion los envió á Joppe, en 
 cuya ciudad moraba Simon. 
 
 The man whose mother is good. 
 The house of which the rooms are 
 
 spacious. 
 The centurion sent them to Joppa, 
 
 imchich city was-d welling Simon. 
 
 125. When the relative pronoun refers to persons, que is 
 generally used for quien, in the nominative case ; but in 
 the objective case, á quien (see 124, b) or que is used (gen- 
 erally the former) ; as, 
 
 El hombre que habla. 
 Yo que hablo. 
 
 La muger á quien Juan vio. 
 La muger que Juan vio. 
 
 The man who speaks. 
 I who speak. 
 
 The woman whom John saw. 
 
 (a.) If a preposition come before whom, quien is always 
 used in Spanish ; as, 
 
 El muchacho para quien él lo hizo. 
 Un hombre en quien el rey tiene 
 mucha confianza. 
 
 The boy for whom he did it. 
 A man in whom the king has much 
 confidence. 
 
Lo que á algunos gusta á otros dis- 
 gusta. 
 El dijo, yo no sé que. 
 Yo no sé que libros leer^ } 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 49 
 
 {b.) What, when it means that which, is, in Spanish, lo 
 que ; when it means what thing, it is que ; and when used 
 before a noun, what or which is que or cual ; as, 
 
 What to some is-pleasant, to others 
 
 is-disgusting. 
 He said, I know not what. 
 
 I know not what (or which) books 
 Yo no sé cuales libros leer. J 
 
 (c.) He who, or he that, is in Spanish el que ; she who, la 
 que; they or those who, los que (masculine), las que (femi- 
 nine). There is also the neuter form, lo que. 
 
 126. In Spanish, a preposition is always placed before 
 the relative pronoun which it governs ; as, 
 
 La ciudad en que yo moro. J The city in which I dwell. 
 
 S^* We can not say, " the city which I dwell in," in Spanish, for this 
 would be worse grammar than it is in English. 
 
 (a.) The relative pronoun can never be suppressed in Spanish as in 
 English; thus, u the man I saw" would be expressed in full, "the man 
 whom I saw." 
 
 ft3F" The Exercises in Part IV., Section Seventh, can be translated. 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS, 
 
 127. The interrogative pronouns are the same as the 
 relative, except cual is used without being preceded by the 
 article. They are not used in precisely the same manner ; 
 for in interrogations, quién always means who ; cual, which ; 
 qué, what ; cuyo, whose ; as, 
 
 ¿Quién* tiene hambre It 
 ¿Quienes tienen sed? 
 ¿Cual de los hijos está allí? 
 ¿Qué dijo el médico ? 
 ¿Qué sombrero tiene vmd. ? 
 ¿Cuyos libros son estos ? 
 ¿De quién son estos libros ? 
 
 Who is hungry ? 
 Who are thirsty ? 
 Which of the sons is there ? 
 What said the doctor ? 
 What hat have you ? 
 Whose books are these? 
 Of whom (or whose) are these 
 books ? 
 
 * Quién and qué, when interrogative, generally have the marked 
 accent. 
 
 t Literally this is, "who has hunger?" In Spanish, in interrogations 
 and exclamations, the interrogation and exclamation marks are placed 
 at the beginning (inverted) as well as at the end of the phrase or sentence. 
 5 
 
50 OF THE PRONOUN 
 
 (a.) When the interrogative pronoun is governed by a preposition, the 
 answer to the question must always be preceded by the same preposi- 
 tion; as, 
 ¿De quién son aquellas niños! De Whose are those children? JohvUs. 
 
 Juan. 
 ¿Para quién lo hizo 1 Para el mti- 
 
 ger. 
 
 (b.) When what is used in ejaculatory interrogations, as "what a fine 
 day !" l( what a man !" the indefinite article is omitted in Spanish ; as, 
 
 For whom did-he-do it 1 For the 
 woman. 
 
 \ Qué hermosa mañana ! 
 I Qué desgracia ! 
 ¡ Qué modrego ! 
 
 What a fine morning ! 
 What a disgrace ! 
 What a blockhead ! 
 
 ft^P 5 * The Exercises in Part IV., Section Eighth, can now be trans- 
 lated. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 128. The demonstrative pronouns are este, this; ese, 
 that ; aquel, that. They are thus declined : 
 
 |gend. 
 
 MASC. j FEM. [MAS. | FEM. 
 
 MASC. 
 
 | FEM. 
 
 Sins'. 
 \Ptu. 
 
 Este, Esta, this. 
 Estos, Estas, these. 
 
 Ese, Esa, that. 
 Esos, Esas, those. 
 
 Aquel, 
 Aquellos 
 
 Aquella, that. 
 Aquellas, those. 
 
 (a.) There is also, in the singular number of each of 
 these demonstrative pronouns, a neuter form, used when 
 we can not ascribe a gender to it ; esto, eso, aquello (see 84). 
 In such a sentence as, " he ought to be honest, for this is 
 the duty of every man," it is evident that no gender can 
 properly be applied to the demonstrative this, and in such 
 a case esto would be used in Spanish. 
 
 (b.) Este is used with what is near at hand ; as, este hom- 
 bre, this man (here) : ese, with what is somewhat distant ; 
 as, ese hombre, that man (there) : and aquel, with what is 
 still more distant ; as, aquel hombre, that man (off there, 
 yonder). When relating to time, este is used with time 
 present ; ese, with the past ; and aquel, with time still more 
 distant ; as, " this (este) book which I now have ; that (ese) 
 book which I had last week ; and that (aquel) book which 
 I had last summer, are valuable." 
 
 (c.) Este refers to the last mentioned of two things, and 
 ese (or aquel) to the first ; as, 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 51 
 
 El general y el capitán vinieron ; l The general and the captain came ; 
 ese (or aquel) es prudente, este es | the-former is prudent, the-latter is 
 fatuo. stupid. 
 
 (d.) When este or ese comes before the indefinite pronoun otro (other) 
 the former drops its final letter, and the two are joined, forming one 
 word ; as, estotro or estotra, this other ; estotros or estotras, these others ; 
 esotro or esotra, that other ; esotros or esotras, those others. 
 
 129. If the objective case of the relative pronoun quien 
 (whom) is used in such phrases as he vihom, she whom, him 
 whom, etc., aquel must come before it ; as. aquel á quien* 
 he whom ; aquella á quien, she whom ; aquellos or aquellas 
 á quienes, they whom ; as, 
 
 Aquellos contra quienes pelearon. | Those against whom they-fought. 
 
 (a.) When the relative pronoun of the objective case is 
 not preceded by a preposition, the definite article is gener- 
 ally used instead of aquel, and is followed by the relative 
 pronoun que (see 1 25, c) ; as, el que, he whom ; la que, she 
 whom ; los or las que, they whom. Thus it will be perceiv- 
 ed that he whom may be rendered either aquel á quien, or el 
 que ; she whom, by either aquella á quien, or la que ; they 
 whom or those whom, by either aquellos or aquellas á quienes, 
 or los or las que. The latter mode is most generally em- 
 ployed. 
 
 (b.) When the objective case of the personal pronouns 
 him, her, or them, precedes the nominative of the relative 
 who, either aquel or the definite article may be used ; as, 
 
 Juan dio pan á aquella que tiene > John ^^ tQ ^ ^ y hun . 
 
 hambre; or, y 
 
 Juan diu pan á la que tiene hambre. J 
 
 (c.) When in English the demonstrative pronoun that is 
 followed by the preposition of, and refers to a noun already 
 expressed, the definite article is employed in Spanish ; as, 
 
 * It may be proper to mention again, that quien (whom) is never em- 
 ployed in the objective case, even if governed by a verb, without being 
 preceded by a preposition. 
 
52 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Por su prudencia y por la del juez. I Through his prudence and through 
 I that of-ihe judge. 
 
 ¡¡2ÍP The Exercises in Part IV., Section Ninth, can now be trans- 
 lated. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The indefinite pronouns, or more properly, the indefinite 
 adjective pronouns, are cada, each ; uno, one ; todo, every 
 one, all ; nadie, nobody ; alguien, somebody ; ninguno, 
 none ; alguno, some ; algo, something ; nada, nothing ; 
 otro, other ; tal, such ; ambos, both ; entrambos, both. 
 
 130. Of these, uno* todo, ninguno* alguno* otro, and 
 tal, are declined like adjectives, both in the masculine and 
 feminine Cada, nadie, alguien, algo, nada, are used only 
 in the singular, and do not change. Ambos and entrambos 
 are already in the plural, but have their feminine, ambas 
 and entrambas. 
 
 (a.) There are also some indefinite relative pronouns, 
 quienquiera, cualquiera, cualesquiera, whoever, whosoever, 
 whichever, whichsoever. 
 
 f^* We subjoin a list of these indefinite pronouns, simple and com- 
 bined, with examples of the manner in which they are employed in 
 Spanish. 
 
 131. The following are always used as nouns, that is, 
 are never joined to a noun : 
 
 ' Los cuatro animales, cada uno de ellos tenía 
 
 seis alas. 
 The four animals, each one of them had six 
 Cada uno, (everyone. . wings. 
 
 Cada cual, I each one. ] Todos serán premiados cada cual según sus 
 obras. 
 AH will-be rewarded, each one according-to his 
 deeds. 
 
 r Juan y Diego se aman uno á otro. 
 Uno otro, each other. <( John and James love each other (love themselves 
 I one to the-other). 
 
 * The learner must remember (see 101) thattmo, alguno, and ninguno, 
 drop the final o when they precede a masculine noun. 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 53 
 
 __ .. c Orad los unos por los otros. 
 
 Unos otros, one another, i „ ,, ... _ , . 
 
 ¿ Pray for one another (the some for the others). 
 
 ( nobody. C A' nódte ama el avaro. 
 
 1 ' c no one. ( The miser loves nobody (to nobody loves the miser). 
 
 . r somebody, c j, Le ha visto alguien ? 
 
 ° ' l any body. ( Has any oody seen him 1 
 
 c one and the other, c Uno y otro son amables. 
 Uno y otro. J both J ¿^ ^ ^^ &re amiable> 
 
 c something, c Yo tengo algo que comer. 
 ° ' if anything. ( I have something which to eat. 
 
 f nothing. c Nada tengo con que mantenerme. 
 
 ( not anything. ( I have nothing with which to maintain myself. 
 
 {all that which, r Esta echó todo lo que tenía, 
 everything. < This-woman cast-in all that (or every- 
 whatever. I thing) she-had. 
 
 # C Quienquiera que el sea. 
 
 Quienquiera que. j whoever. I ^ ocr/jr he may . be> 
 
 Cualquiera que. 1 Zh^WpT I Cual 9 uiera ? ue se humillare. 
 1 mcnever - I Whoever may-humble himself. 
 
 132. The following are never used alone, but always with 
 a noun : 
 
 ( each. ( Cada vez. Each time. 
 
 ( every. ( Cada palabra. Every word. 
 
 Cualquier, c . , c Cualquier criatura. Whatever creature. 
 
 < whatever. < 
 Cualesquicr. \ ( Cualesquier criaturas. Whatever creatures. 
 
 133. These following may be used alone as nouns, or 
 joined to nouns as adjectives : 
 
 C everything, f En todo dad gracias. Todos tienen temor. 
 
 Todo. > all. j In everything give thanks. All were afraid. 
 
 Todos, j everybody. > Todo árbol. Todos los hombres. 
 
 [ every. [ Every tree. All men. 
 
 ' Tengo libros : ¿tiene vmd. algunos? 
 
 I-have books : have you any ? 
 
 ( any, anybody. Alguno me ha tocado. 
 
 ] ... , Sam ebody has touched me. 
 
 Alguno. < some, somebody. ¿ ., _ J ._ 
 
 ° | Algún fruto. Algunas cosas. 
 
 [ some one. Some fruit. Some things. 
 
 Creyeron algunos de ellos. 
 
 Some of them believed. 
 
 f Z7n dia. ?7na de las hermanas. 
 
 c one. j One day. One of the sisters. 
 
 n0, ¿ a person, j No sabe uno que hacer. 
 
 I One (or a person) knows not what to do. 
 
 5* 
 
\ some. 
 
 I certain ones. 
 
 Ni 
 
 54 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 Unos hombres. 
 
 Some certain men. 
 
 ¿Dio libros á algunos de estos niños? Dí6 
 
 libros á unos. 
 Gave-he books to any of these children 1 He- 
 gave books to some. 
 
 { Ninguno le vio. A ninguno dio libros, 
 nobody. i jy 000( jy saw him. To no-one gave-he 
 
 I not any one. J bookg 
 
 1 none ' not any ' Ninguna persona. Ningunos de los hijos. 
 [ no one. (^ No person> jsf one f the sons> 
 
 f Una cosa es prometer y otro cumplir. 
 
 _, , ».ü'- One thing it-is to promise and another to per- 
 
 Otro. c other, another. J f 
 
 Otros. I others, other, i , i f ° rn1 ' . . 
 
 Al fin las oims mugeres vinieron. 
 
 [ At length the other women came. 
 
 c De los tales es el estado. En tal tiempo. 
 Tal, such. J Qf guc/i ig the gtate In such a üme _ 
 
 C Ambos me gustan bien. Ambos sexos. 
 Ambos. ( , , j #o¿/i please me well. i?o¿/i sexes. 
 
 Entrambos. ( ' . Entrambos caen en el hoyo. 
 
 [ Z?o¿/i fall into the pit. 
 
 134. Alguien and nadie can not be followed by the pre- 
 position de, of ; but alguno and ninguno must be used ; as. 
 
 Alguno de los muchachos. l Some-one of the boys. 
 
 Ninguna de las hijas. | No-one of the daughters. 
 
 (a.) AZg'u no is never placed after the noun, except in negative sen- 
 tences, and then it has the same meaning as ninguno placed before the 
 noun ; thus we can say, Yo no hallo en él ninguno causa; or, Yono hallo 
 en él causa alguna, I find no fault* in him. 
 
 (6.) Algo and nada can admit of an adjective joined to them, or the 
 preposition de may come between ; thus, it can be said, algo nuevo, 
 or, algo de nuevo, something new ; nada de natural, nothing natural. 
 
 (c) When by another's we mean the opposite of ones own, it is 
 expressed in Spanish, not by otro, but by ageno (or ajeno) ; as, lo ageno, 
 that which is another's, or that which is the property of another ; los 
 bienes ágenos, another's goods or wealth. 
 
 f¡!^* The Exercises in Part IV., Section Tenth, may now be trans- 
 lated. 
 
 * Or rather, " cause of accusation " in him. In Spanish, two nega- 
 tives strengthen the negation. 
 
OF THE VERB. 55 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Verbs are classed, as in English, into active, passive, 
 and neuter ; active-transitive, active-intransitive, reflective, 
 regular, irregular, impersonal, and defective. They are 
 also varied by person and number, mood and tense. 
 
 135. An active verb expresses an action affirmed of the 
 agent or nominative ; as 
 
 Claudio escribe. | Claudius writes. 
 
 {a.) When the aetion is affirmed of the agent as being 
 transmitted to a direct object, the verb is called active- 
 transitive ; as, 
 
 Claudio escribe una carta. j Claudius writes a letter. 
 
 (b.) When the verb expresses aetion, but has no direct 
 object, it is called active-intransitive ; as, 
 
 El esclamó. l He exclaimed. 
 
 El mocito saltó. The lad jumped. 
 
 136. A reflective verb is one which affirms that the action 
 is conveyed to the same person or thing which is the 
 agent ; as, 
 
 Tu te ceñes. j Thou girdest thyself. 
 
 Nosotros nos alabamos. We commend ourselves. 
 
 El se tiene por hombre grande. I He holds himself for a great man. 
 
 137. A passive verb affirms that an action has been 
 received or suffered by the agent ; as, 
 
 Ellosjfaeron postrados. | They were overthrown. 
 
 1 38. A neuter verb affirms merely the condition o* state 
 of existence of its agent, without any reference to a direct 
 object ; as, 
 
 El hombre existe. I The man exists. 
 
 Yo vivo. | I live. 
 
 139. Verbs have three persons and two numbers, as in 
 English ; that is, they vary their endings to agree with 
 the person and number of their nominative ; as, 
 
56 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 ' Nosotros hablamos, we speak. 
 Vosotros habláis, you speak. 
 Ellos hablan, they speak. 
 
 First Person. Yo hablo, I 
 
 speak. 
 Second Person. Tú hablas, thou 
 
 spéakest. 
 Third Person. El habla, he 
 
 speaks. 
 
 (a.) In Spanish, it is not necessary to use the personal pronouns of the 
 nominative case with the verb (unless for the sake of emphasis or pers- 
 picuity), as the ending of the verb indicates the person of its nomina- 
 tive. Thus, hablo means I-speak ; hablas, thou-speakest ; habla, he- 
 speaks or she-speaks ; hablamos, we-speak, etc 
 
 MOODS. 
 Mood is the form which the verb takes to show in what 
 manner the action or being is represented. In Spanish 
 there are four moods ; the infinitive, the indicative, the 
 imperative, and the subjunctive. 
 
 140. The infinitive mood expresses action or being in an 
 indefinite manner, without reference to person or time ; as, 
 
 Hablar, to speak. | Comer, to eat. 
 
 141. The indicative mood represents the affirmation in 
 a positive manner ; as, 
 
 Hablamos, we-speak. Comeré, I-shall-eat. 
 
 142. The imperative mood expresses an order, entreaty, 
 or command ; as, 
 
 Hablad, speak ye. 
 
 i Coman, let-them-eat, or, may-they- 
 eat. 
 
 143. The subjunctive mood represents the affirmation in 
 a conditional manner ; as, 
 Aunque hablen, though they-may- t Yo comería, I would-eat. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 Tense is the form which the verb takes to show the time 
 of the action, being, or passion which is affirmed. There 
 are properly three tenses, the past, the present, and the 
 future. These are subdivided into eight tenses, one for 
 the present, five for the past, and two for the future : the 
 present ; imperfect, perfect-definite, perfect-indefinite, the 
 
OF THE VERB. 57 
 
 first-pluperfect, second-pluperfect ; the first-future, and 
 future-perfect or second-future. 
 
 144. The present tense represents whatever is affirmed 
 as taking place at the present time ; as, 
 
 Hablan, they-speak. | Están comiendo, they-are eating. 
 
 145. The imperfect tense represents as relatively present 
 something which is affirmed as past, though, for all we 
 know to the contrary, not yet completed ; as, 
 
 Hablaban cuando los vio. I They were-speaking when he-saw 
 
 I them. 
 
 146. The 'perfect-definite tense represents what is affirmed 
 as being completely past and finished ; as, 
 
 Les habló ayer. I He-spoke to them yesterday. 
 
 147. The perfect-indefinite tense represents what is affirm- 
 ed as having taken place during a time not entirely 
 elapsed ; as, 
 
 Les he hablado hoy. | I-have spoken to them to-day. 
 
 148. The first-pluperfect tense expresses what is past and 
 was finished before another action, also past, took place : 
 that is, an event which occurred prior to some other past 
 event; as, 
 
 Habla hablado cuando llego. | 1-had spoken when he-arrived. 
 
 149. The second-pluperfect expresses that what is affirmed 
 had taken place immediately before a time which is past ; 
 and is always employed after adverbs of time ; as, 
 
 Cuando les hubo hablado, se mar- I When he-Aad spoken to-them, they- 
 charon. I went away. 
 
 150. The first-future tense refers to some action or event 
 which is yet to take place ; as, 
 
 Hablará esta noche. | He-wül- speak to-night. 
 
 151. The second-future or future-perfect tense refers to 
 some future action or event that will have taken place at 
 or before some certain future time ; as, 
 
 Habré acabado á las ocho. | I-shall-haveJinished at eight o'clock. 
 
58 OF THE VERB. 
 
 PARTICIPLES AND GERUNDS. 
 
 152. Verbs in Spanish have two participles, the present 
 and the past. There are, however, but few present partici- 
 ples in use, and these few are, almost without exception, 
 employed only as adjectives or nouns ; as, semejante, simi- 
 lar ; obediente, obedient ; viajante, traveler. The ending 
 of the present participle of verbs that have their infinitive 
 in ar, is ante ; of those that have their infinitive in er or 
 ir, it is iente. 
 
 153. The past-participle denotes action or being perfected 
 or finished, and when derived from a regular verb, is gen- 
 erally formed by changing the final letters of the infinitive 
 ar into ado, and er or ir into ido ; as, 
 
 Hablado, spoken. Comido, eaten. 
 
 154. The gerund in Spanish is equivalent to the present 
 participle in English ; and is formed by changing the final 
 letters of the infinitive ar into ando, and er and ir into 
 iendo ; as, 
 
 Hablando, speaking. Comiendo, eating. 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 155. In Spanish, the infinitive mood of all verbs ends 
 in ar, er, or ir, and these terminations serve to distinguish 
 the three conjugations ; the first conjugation comprehend- 
 ing all verbs ending in ar ; the second, those ending in er ; 
 and the third, those ending in ir. 
 
 (a.) Regular verbs are those which are conjugated through all the 
 moods and tenses without deviating in their orthography from the cor- 
 responding orthography of the model verbs. 
 
 (6.) Irregular verbs are those which do not conform in every respect 
 to the regular standard or model verbs. 
 
 (c.) Auxiliary or helping verbs are those by the aid of which others 
 are conjugated in the compound tenses and in the passive voice. The 
 auxiliary verbs are haber, to have ; ser, to be ; and estar, to be. Those 
 tenses of the active voice in which an auxiliary verb is used, are called 
 compound tenses. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 59 
 
 Remark. — The learner must keep in mind the rules for accenting the 
 verb in all its varieties of termination (see 57, «, and b) ; and he will thus 
 know that all persons of the verbs (of whatever mood or tense) which 
 have no accent over some syllable are to be accented on the syllable 
 next to the last.* In some of the first conjugations following, the ac- 
 cent is placed over all the words, in order to aid the learner in pro- 
 nouncing them. 
 
 £^* As the auxiliary verbs are required to form the compound tenses 
 of every other verb, we first give the conjugation of them. 
 
 156. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb, haber. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Haber, To have. 
 
 PAST-PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PAST-INFINITIVE. 
 
 Habido, Had. 
 
 Haber habido, To have had. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PAST. 
 
 Habiendo, Having. 
 
 Habiendo habido, Having had. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 Yo he, I have. 
 
 Yo he habido, / have had. 
 
 Tú has, Thou hast. 
 
 Tú has habido, Thou hast had. 
 
 El ha, He has. 
 
 El ha habido, He has had. 
 
 Nosotros hemos, We have. 
 
 Nosotros hemos 
 
 
 habido, We have liad. 
 
 Vosotros habéis, Ye have. 
 
 Vosotros habéis 
 
 
 habido, Ye have had. 
 
 Ellos han, They have. 
 
 Ellos han habido, They have had. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 FIRST-PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Yo había, J had. 
 
 Yo había habido, I had had. 
 
 Tú habías, Thou hadst. 
 
 Tú habías habido, Thou hadst had. 
 
 El había, He had. 
 
 El había habido, He had had. 
 
 Nosotros había- 
 
 Nosotros había- 
 
 mos, We had. 
 
 mos habido, We had had. 
 
 Vosotros habíais, Ye had. 
 
 Vosotros habíais 
 
 
 habido, Ye had had. 
 
 Ellos habían, They had. 
 
 Ellos habían ha- 
 
 
 bido, They had had. 
 
 Except the second person plural of the imperative mood. 
 
60 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 PERFECT-DEFINITE. 
 
 SECOND-PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Yo hube, I had. 
 
 Yo hube habido, / had had. 
 
 Tú hubiste, Thou hadst. 
 
 Tú* hubiste habí- 
 
 
 do, Thou hadst had. 
 
 El hubo, He had. 
 
 El hubo habido, He had had. 
 
 Nosotros hubi- 
 
 Nosotros hubí- j 
 
 mos, We had. 
 
 mos habido^ We- had had. 
 
 Vosotros hubis- 
 
 Vosotros hubis- 
 
 teis, You had. 
 
 teis habido, You had had. 
 
 Ellos hubieron, They had. 
 
 Ellos hubieron 
 
 
 habido, They had had. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE^ 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE- 
 
 Yo habré, / shall' or will 
 
 Yo habré habido,/ shall or will have 
 
 have. 
 
 had. 
 
 Tú habrás, Thou shall or wilt 
 
 Tú habrás habí- Thou shalt or wilt 
 
 have. 
 
 do, have had. 
 
 El habrá, He shall or wül 
 
 El habrá habido, He shall or will 
 
 have. 
 
 have had. 
 
 Nosotros habré- We shall or trill 
 
 Nosotros habré- We shall or will 
 
 mos, have. 
 
 mos habido, have had. 
 
 Vosotros habréis, You shall or will 
 
 Vosotros habréis You shall or will 
 
 have. 
 
 habido, have had. 
 
 Ellos habrán, They shall or will 
 
 Ellos habrán ha- They shall or will 
 
 have. 
 
 bido, have had. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Haya 70,* Let me have, or, may I have. 
 
 Ha tú, Have thou. 
 
 Haya él, Let him have, or, may he have* 
 
 Hayamos nosotros, Let us have, or, may we have. 
 
 Habed vosotros, Have you. 
 
 Hayan elíos, Let them have, or, may they have. 
 
 * The first person singular of the imperative mood is not in use in 
 Spanish, and is inserted here only to exhibit the full form of the conju- 
 gation. 
 
OP THE VERB. 
 
 61 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 Yo haya, / may have. 
 
 Tú hayas, Thou mayest have 
 
 El haya, He may have. 
 Nosotros haya- 
 mos, We may have. 
 Vosotros hayáis, You may have. 
 
 Ellos hayan, They may have. 
 
 Yo haya habido, I may have had. 
 
 Tú hayas habido, Thou mayest have 
 had. 
 
 El haya habido, He may have had. 
 
 Nosotros haya- 
 mos habido, We may have had. 
 
 Vosotros hayáis You may have 
 habido, had. 
 
 Ellos hayan ha- They may have 
 bido, had. 
 
 IMPERFECT.* 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Yo hubiera, ha- / would, should, 
 bría,or hubiese, or might have. 
 
 Tú hubieras, ha- Thou wouldst, 
 brías, or hübié- shouldst, or 
 ses, mightst have. 
 
 El hubiera, ha- He would, should, 
 bria, or hubiese, or might have. 
 
 Nosotros hubiér- We would, should, 
 amos, habría- or might have. 
 mos, or hubié- 
 semos, 
 
 Vosotros hubié- You would, 
 rais, habríais, should, ox might 
 or hubieseis, have. 
 
 Ellos hubieran, They would, 
 habrían, or hu- should, ox might, 
 biésen, have. 
 
 Yo- hubiera, ha- / would, should, 
 
 bria, or hubi- or might have 
 
 ése habido, had. 
 Tu hubieras, ha- Thou wouldst, 
 
 brías, or hubié- shouldst, or 
 
 ses habido, mightst have had. 
 El hubiera, ha- He would, should, 
 
 bria, or hubiese or might have 
 
 habido, had. 
 Nosotros hubiér- We icould, should, 
 
 amos, habría- or might hare 
 
 mos, or hubie- had. 
 
 sernos habido, 
 Vosotros hubié- You would, 
 
 rais, habríais, should, or might 
 
 or hubieseis have had. 
 
 habido, 
 Ellos hubieran, They would, 
 
 habrían, or hu- should, or migh I 
 
 biésen habido, have had. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Si yo hubiere, If I should have. 
 
 Si tú hubieres, If thou shouldst 
 have. 
 
 Si yo hubiere ha- If I should have 
 
 bido, had. 
 Si tú hubieres If thou shouldst 
 
 habido, have had. 
 
 * The three forms of the imperfect subjunctive (ending in ra, ría, and 
 se), will be explained in Part III. (See 313—317.) 
 6 
 
62 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 first-future. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Si él hubiere, If he should have. 
 
 Si él hubiere ha- If he should havel 
 
 
 bido, had. 
 
 Si nosotros hu- If we should have. 
 
 Si nosotros hubi- If we should havel 
 
 triáremos, 
 
 eremos habido, had. 
 
 Si vosotros hubi- If you should 
 
 Si vosotros hu- If you should havel 
 
 éreis, have. 
 
 biéreis habido, had. 
 
 Si ellos hubieren, if they should 
 
 Si ellos hubié- If they shouldl 
 
 have. 
 
 ren habido, have had. 
 
 157. By examining the above conjugation, it will be 
 seen that, after having learned the simple tenses, the com- 
 pound ones are also known, as these latter are always 
 formed by placing the past participle after the persons of 
 the simple tenses of the auxiliary verb.* 
 
 (a.) The personal pronouns of the nominative case are seldom used 
 with the verb (see 139, a), as the ending of the person of each tense gen- 
 erally indicates the person and number of its nominative. Thus, the 
 first person plural of every tense has its ending in mos : when, therefore, 
 the learner sees any tense of a verb having for its final letters mos, he 
 may know that its nominative is to be rendered in English by the pro- 
 noun we. In the conjugations which follow, the pronouns will be 
 omitted in Spanish. 
 
 ¡p^* The distinctions between some of the tenses (distinctions not 
 known in English Grammar) will be explained in Part III. 
 
 158. Conjugation of the verb ser. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. ! 
 
 Ser, Tobe. 
 
 PAST-PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PAST-INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sido, Been. 
 
 Haber sido, To have been. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PAST. 
 
 Siendo, Being. 
 
 Habiendo sido, Having been. 
 
 * Perhaps one of the easiest methods of learning the conjugations of 
 the verbs is to copy and re*eopy each tense till it can be done without 
 referring to the Grammar. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 63 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 1 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT- 
 
 INDEFINITE. 
 
 Soy, 
 
 I am. 
 
 He sido, 
 
 I have been. 
 
 E'res, 
 
 Thou art. 
 
 Has sido, 
 
 Thou hast been. 
 
 Es, 
 
 He is. 
 
 Ha sido, 
 
 He has been. 
 
 Somos, 
 
 We are. 
 
 Hemos sido, 
 
 We have been. 
 
 Sois, 
 
 You are. S 
 
 Habéis sido, 
 
 You have been. 
 
 Son, 
 
 They are. 
 
 Han sido, 
 
 They have been. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 FIRST-PLUPERFECT. 
 
 E'ra, 
 
 I was. 
 
 Había sido, 
 
 I had been. 
 
 E'ras, 
 
 Thou wast. 
 
 Habías sido, 
 
 Thou hadst been. 
 
 E'ra, 
 
 He was. 
 
 Había sido, 
 
 He had been. 
 
 E'ramos, 
 
 We were. 
 
 Habíamos sido, 
 
 We had been. 
 
 E'rais, 
 
 You were. 
 
 Habíais sido, 
 
 You had been. 
 
 E'ran, 
 
 They were. 
 
 Habían sido, 
 
 They had been. \ 
 
 PERFECT-DEFINITE. 
 
 SECOND- 
 
 3 LUPERFECT. 
 
 Fui, 
 
 I was. 
 
 Húbe sido, 
 
 / liad been. 
 
 Fuiste, 
 
 Thou wast. 
 
 Hubiste sido, 
 
 Thou hadst been. 
 
 Fué, 
 
 He was. 
 
 Hubo sido, 
 
 He had been. 
 
 Fuimos, 
 
 We were. 
 
 Hubimos sido, 
 
 We had been. 
 
 Fuisteis, 
 
 You were. 
 
 Hubisteis sido, 
 
 You had been. 
 
 Fueron, 
 
 They were. 
 
 Hubieron sido, 
 
 They had been. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Seré, 
 
 J shall or will be. 
 
 Habré sido, 
 
 I shall or will have 
 been. 
 
 Serás, 
 
 Thou shalt or wilt 
 
 Habrás sido, 
 
 TIlou shalt or will 
 
 
 be. 
 
 
 have been. 
 
 Será, 
 
 He sliall or will be. 
 
 Habrá sido, 
 
 He shall or will 
 have been. 
 
 Seremos, 
 
 We shall or will 
 
 Habremos sido, 
 
 We shall or will 
 
 
 be. 
 
 
 have been. 
 
 Seréis, 
 
 You shall or will 
 
 Habréis sido, 
 
 You shall or will 
 
 
 be. 
 
 
 have been. 
 
 Serán, 
 
 They shall or will 
 
 Habrán sido, 
 
 They shall or will 
 
 
 be. 
 
 
 have been. 
 
64 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Sea, Let me be, or, may I be. 
 
 Sé, Be thou. 
 
 Sea, Let him be, or, may he be. 
 
 Seamos, Let us be, or, may we be. 
 
 Sed, Be you. 
 
 Sean, Let them be, or, may they I 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 Sea, 
 
 I may be. 
 
 Haya sido, i" may have been. 
 
 Seas, 
 
 Thou mayest be. 
 
 Hayas sido, Tliou mayest have 
 been. 
 
 Sea, 
 
 He may be. 
 
 Haya sido, He may have been. 
 
 Seamos, 
 
 We may be. 
 
 Hayamos sido, We may have 
 been. 
 
 Seáis, 
 
 You may be. 
 
 Hayáis sido, You may have 
 been. 
 
 Sean, 
 
 They may be. 
 
 Hayan sido, They may have 
 been. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Fuera, 
 
 sería, I would, should, or 
 
 Hubiera, habría, / would, should, 
 
 or fuese, might be. 
 
 or hubiese si- or might have 
 
 
 
 do, been. 
 
 Fueras, 
 
 serlas, Thou wouldst, 
 
 Hubieras, habrí- Thou wouldst, 
 
 or fueses, shouldst, or 
 
 as, or hubieses shouldst, or 
 
 
 mightst be. 
 
 sido, mightst have 
 been. 
 
 Fuera, 
 
 sería, He would, should, 
 
 Hubiera, habría, He would, should, 
 
 or fueses, or might be. 
 
 or hubiese or might have 
 
 
 
 sido, been. 
 
 Fuéramos, serla- We would, should, 
 
 Hubiéramos, ha- We would, should, 
 
 mos, or fuese- or might be. 
 
 briamos, or or might have 
 
 mos, 
 
 
 hubiésemos been. 
 sido, 
 
 Fuerais, 
 
 seríais, You would, 
 
 Hubierais, ha- You would, 
 
 or fueseis, should, or might 
 
 briais, or hubi- should,ox might 
 
 
 be. 
 
 éseis sido, have been. 
 
 Fueran, 
 
 serían, They would, 
 
 Hubieran, habrí- They would, 
 
 or fuesen, should, or might 
 
 an, or hubié- should, or might 
 
 
 be. 
 
 sen sido, have been. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 65 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD— Continued. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Si fuere, 
 
 If I should be. 
 
 Si hubiere sido, If I should have 
 been. 
 
 Si fueres, 
 
 If thou shouldst 
 
 Si hubieres sido, If thou shouldst 
 
 
 be. 
 
 have been. 
 
 Si fuere, 
 
 If he should be. 
 
 Si hubiere sido, If he should have 
 been. 
 
 Si fuéremos, 
 
 If we should be. 
 
 Si hubiéremos If we should have 
 sido. been. 
 
 Si fuereis, 
 
 If you should be. 
 
 Si hubiereis sido, If you should have 
 been. 
 
 Si fueren, 
 
 If they should be. 
 
 Si hubieren sido, If they should 
 have been. 
 
 'The Exercises in Part IV., Section Eleventh, can now be trans- 
 
 159. Conjugation of the verb estar. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Estar, To be. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PAST INFINITIVE. 
 
 Estado, Been. 
 
 Haber estado, To have been. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PAST. 
 
 Estando, Being. 
 
 Habiendo estado, Having been. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT- 
 
 NDEFINITE. 
 
 Estoy, 
 Estás, 
 
 I am. 
 Thou art. 
 
 He -j 
 
 Has >estádo, 
 
 i" have "j 
 Thou hast >been. 
 
 Está, 
 
 He is. 
 
 Ha J 
 
 He has J 
 
 Estamos, 
 Estáis, 
 
 We are. 
 You are. 
 
 Hemos i 
 Habéis gestado 
 
 We have > 
 You have >been. 
 
 Están, 
 
 They are. 
 
 Han J 
 
 They have J 
 
66 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD— Continued. | 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 FIRST-PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Estaba, 
 
 I was. 
 
 Había 
 
 
 I had 
 
 
 Estabas, 
 
 Thou wast. 
 
 Habías 
 
 
 Thou hadst 
 
 
 Estaba, 
 
 He was. 
 
 Había 
 
 o 
 ~a 
 
 He had 
 
 4 
 
 Estábamos, 
 
 We were. 
 
 Habíamos 
 
 ' i 
 
 We had 
 
 Estabais, 
 
 You were. 
 
 Habíais 
 
 ^ 
 
 You had 
 
 
 Estaban, 
 
 They were. 
 
 Habían 
 
 
 They had . 
 
 
 PERFECT 
 
 -DEFINITE.* 
 
 SECOND-PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Estuve, 
 
 I was. 
 
 Hube -j 
 
 I had 
 
 
 Estuviste, 
 
 Thou wast. 
 
 Hubiste 
 
 
 Thou hadst 
 
 
 Estuvo, 
 Estuvimos, 
 
 He was. 
 We were. 
 
 Hubo 
 Hubimos 
 
 o 
 
 XI 
 
 y. t 
 
 He had 
 
 We had 
 
 
 Estuvisteis, 
 
 You were. 
 
 Hubisteis 
 
 OJ 
 
 You had 
 
 
 Estuvieron, 
 
 They xcere. 
 
 Hubieron J 
 
 They had 
 
 
 FIRST 
 
 -FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Estaré. 
 
 I shall or will be. 
 
 Habré ) 
 
 
 I shall or will I 
 
 
 Estarás, 
 
 Thou shali or wilt 
 
 be. 
 He shall or will be. 
 
 Habrás 
 
 
 Thou wilt 
 
 
 Estará, 
 
 Habrá 
 
 o" 
 
 He will 
 
 £ 
 
 Estaremos, 
 
 We shall, or will be. 
 
 Habremos 
 
 >"i 
 
 We shall 
 
 M* 
 
 Estaréis, 
 
 You shall or will 
 
 be 
 They shall or will 
 
 be. 
 
 Habréis 
 
 o 
 
 You will 
 
 C3 
 
 Estarán, 
 
 Habrán 
 
 
 They will 
 
 | 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 Esté, 
 
 Let me be, or 
 
 may I be.i 
 
 Está, 
 
 Be thou. 
 
 
 Esté, 
 
 Let him be, or may he be. 
 
 Estemos 
 
 Let us be, or 
 
 may we be. 
 
 Estad, 
 
 Be you. 
 
 
 Estén, 
 
 Let them be, 
 
 3r may they be. 
 
 * The persons of the perfect-definite and those of the imperfect of the 
 indicative mood, in Spanish, are both rendered by the English imperfect 
 tense, but they can not be used indiscriminately in Spanish. The 
 proper manner of employing them will be found in Part III. (See 
 302—304.) 
 
 t See the remark in the margin, at page 60. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 67 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 Esté, I may be. 
 
 Haya 
 
 I may 
 
 
 Estés, Thou mayest be. 
 
 Hayas 
 
 Thou mayest 
 
 s 
 
 Esté, He may be. 
 
 Haya 
 
 •a He muy 
 m We may 
 
 >"= 
 
 Estemos, We may be. 
 
 Hayamos 
 
 Estéis, You may be. 
 
 Hayáis 
 
 You may 
 
 < 
 
 Estén, They may be. 
 
 Hayan J 
 
 They may 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Estuviera, estaría, estuviese, / would, should, might be. 
 
 Estuvieras, estarías, estuvieses, Thou wouldst, shouldst, mightst be. 
 
 Estuviera, estaría, estuviese, He would, shoidd, might be. 
 
 Estuviéramos, estaríamos, estuvi- We would, should, might be. 
 
 ésemos, 
 
 Estuvierais, estarías, estuvieseis, You would, should, might be. 
 
 Estuvieran, estarían, estuviesen, They would, should, might be. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Hubiera, habría, hubiese 
 
 I would, should, might ■> 
 
 
 Hubieras, habrías, hubieses 
 
 Thou wouldst, shouldst, might 
 
 
 Hubiera, habría, hubiese 
 
 c He would, should, might 
 
 fi 
 
 Hubiéramos, habríamos, hubi- 
 
 >\d We would, should, might 
 
 >"° 
 
 ésemos 
 
 2 
 
 f- 
 
 Hubierais, habríais, hubieseis 
 
 You would, should, might 
 
 "~~ 
 
 Hubieran, habrían, hubiesen J 
 
 They would, should, might J 
 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Si estuviere, If I should be. 
 
 Si hubiere 1 
 
 If I should 1 
 
 
 Si estuvieres, If thou shouldst be. 
 
 Si hubieres 
 
 If thou shouldst 
 
 ¿ 
 
 Si estuviere, If he should be. 
 
 Si hubiere 
 
 ®, If he should 
 
 
 Si estuviéremos, If we should be. 
 
 Si hubiéremos 
 
 **¿If ire should 
 
 ;~ 
 
 Si estuviereis, If you should be. 
 
 Si hubiereis 
 
 ° If you should 
 
 a 
 
 Si estuvieren, If they should be. 
 
 Si hubieren j 
 
 If they should _ 
 
 
 £^" The learner will now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Section 
 Twelfth. 
 
 160. Conjugation of the verb ten-cr.* 
 
 * Tener is seldom used as an auxiliary verb, and haber seldom used 
 as a transitive verb. Thus, "I have money," would be, Tengo dinero: 
 and, " I have spoken," He hablado. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 Tener, To have. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PAST INFINITIVE. 
 
 Tenido, Had. 
 
 Haber tenido, To have had. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PAST. 
 
 Teniendo, Having. 
 
 Habiendo tenido, Having had. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 - PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 Tengo, 
 Tienes, 
 Tiene, 
 
 Tenemos, 
 
 Tenéis, 
 
 Tienen, 
 
 / have. 
 Thou hast. 
 He has. 
 We have. 
 You have. 
 They have. 
 
 He 
 
 Has 
 
 Ha 
 
 Hemos 
 
 Habéis 
 
 Han 
 
 i I have 
 
 Thou hast 
 4 He has 
 g We have 
 You have 
 They have 
 
 >| 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 FIRST-PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Tenía, 
 
 Tenías, 
 
 Tenía, 
 
 Teníamos, 
 
 Teníais, 
 
 Tenían, 
 
 J had. 
 
 Thouhadst. 
 He had. 
 We had. 
 You had. 
 They had. 
 
 Había ~* 
 
 Habías 
 
 Había 
 
 Habíamos 
 
 Habíais 
 
 Habían 
 
 Ihad 
 
 Thou hadst 
 4 He had 
 " g We had 
 *" You had 
 
 They had > 
 
 *" 9 
 
 PERFECT-DEFINITE. 
 
 SECOND-PLUPEEFECT. 
 
 Tuve, 
 
 Tuviste, 
 Tuvo, 
 
 Tuvimos, 
 Tuvisteis, 
 Tuvieron, 
 
 I had. 
 Thou hadst. 
 He had. 
 We had. 
 You had. 
 They had. 
 
 Hube 
 
 Hubiste 
 
 Hubo 
 
 Hubimos 
 
 Hubiste 
 
 Hubieron 
 
 Ihad 
 
 Thou hadst 
 4 He had 
 > g We had 
 ** You had 
 
 They had _ 
 
 -is 
 
 FIRST-FUTUEE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Tendré, 
 
 Tendrás, 
 
 Tendrá, 
 
 Tendremos, 
 
 Tendréis, 
 
 Tendrán, 
 
 I shall or will have. 
 Thou unit have. 
 He will have. 
 We shall have. 
 You will have. 
 They will have. 
 
 Habré 
 
 Habrás 
 
 Habrá 
 
 Habremos 
 
 Habréis 
 
 Habrán 
 
 I shall or will , 
 Thou wilt 
 
 4 He will 
 >S B We shall 
 
 ** You will 
 They will 
 
 T3 
 
 ¡3 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 69 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 Tenga, 
 
 Let me have, or may I have. 
 
 Ten, 
 
 Have thou. 
 
 
 Tenga, 
 
 Let him have, 
 
 or may he have. 
 
 Tengamos, Let us have, or may we have. 
 
 Tened, 
 
 Have you. 
 
 
 Tengan, 
 
 Let them have, 
 
 or may they have. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 Tenga, I may have. 
 
 Haya 
 
 I may 
 
 
 Tengas, Thou mayest have. 
 
 Hayas 
 
 Thou mayest 
 
 "H 
 
 Tenga, He may have. 
 
 Haya 
 
 -§ He may 
 § We may 
 
 
 Tengamos, We may have. 
 
 Hayamos 
 
 Tengáis, You may have. 
 
 Hayáis 
 
 You may 
 
 
 Tengan, They may have. 
 
 Hayan J 
 
 They may 
 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 Tuviera, tendría, tuviese, / would, should, might have. 
 
 Tuvieras, tendrías, tuvieses, Thou wouldst,shouldst,mightst have. 
 
 Tuviera, tendría, tuviese, He would, should, might have. 
 
 Tuviéramos, tendríamos, tuviese- We would, should, might have. 
 
 mos, 
 Tuvierais, tendríais, tuvieseis, You would, should, might have. 
 
 Tuvieran, tendrían, tuviesen, They would, should, might have. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Hubiera, habría, hubiese 
 
 I would, should, might , 
 
 
 Hubieras, habrías, hubieses 
 
 Thou wouldst, shouldst, mightst 
 
 
 Hubiera, habría, hubiese 
 
 - He would, should, might 
 
 "1 
 
 Hubiéramos, habríamos, hubi- 
 
 y£ We would, should, might 
 
 ^ 
 
 ésemos 
 
 3 
 
 § 
 
 Hubierais, habríais, hubieseis 
 
 You would, should, might 
 
 "~~ 
 
 Hubieran, habrían, hubiesen J 
 
 Tliey would, should, might J 
 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 SECOND-FUTURE. 
 
 Si tuviere, If I should have. 
 
 Si hubiere 
 
 If I should 
 
 
 Si tuvieres, Ifthoushouldsthave. 
 
 Si hubieres 
 
 If thou shouldst 
 
 1 
 
 Si tuviere, If he should have. 
 
 Si hubiere 
 
 °. If he should 
 
 Si tuviéremos, If we should have. 
 
 Si hubiéremos 
 
 c If we should 
 
 » 
 
 Si tuviereis, If you should have. 
 
 Si hubiereis 
 
 *" If you should 
 
 J 
 
 Si tuvieren, -ffthey should have. 
 
 Si hubieren 
 
 If 'they should^ 
 
 
70 OF THE VERB. 
 
 161. In ordinary conversation, instead of the second 
 person singular and plural, vmd. with the third person sin- 
 gular, and vmds. with the third person plural of the verb, 
 are used (see 110, c ; 123) ; as, 
 
 Vmd. es, You are. i Vmd. ha tenido, You have had. 
 
 Vmds. son, You are. \ Vmds. han tenido, You have had. 
 
 (a.) The pronoun you in English is used in both num- 
 bers and both genders without any change : in Spanish, 
 vmd. {usted) has its plural vmds. (ustedes), but does not 
 undergo any change to distinguish the gender to which it 
 may be applied. Thus, " what say you, sir ?" ¿ qué dice 
 vmd., señor? "what say you, madam ?" ¿ qué dice vmd., 
 señora ? " what say you, sirs V ¿ qué dicen vmds., señores ? 
 " what say you, ladies V ¿ qué dicen vmds., señoras ? 
 
 $^¡T The Exercises in Part IV., Section Thirteenth, can now be 
 translated. 
 
 OF THE CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 162. It has been already mentioned that there are in 
 Spanish three conjugations : the first comprehending verbs 
 whose infinitive ends in ar ; the second, those ending in 
 er ; and the third, those ending in ir. 
 
 163. Every verb consists of two parts — the root and the 
 termination, or the verb-root and the verb-ending. The verb- 
 root consists of those letters which are not changed by 
 inflection ; as, am in am-ár, am-o, am-aba, am-é, am-aré. 
 Those letters, which may be changed by inflection, to show 
 the different moods, tenses, persons, and numbers, consti- 
 tute the verb-endings. Thus, in the preceding examples, 
 the letters ár, o, aba, é, aré, are the verb-endings. 
 
 164. The following is a tabular view of the verb-endings 
 of all the conjugations. The figures 1,2, 3. denote the 
 first, second, and third conjugations respectively. 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -ár. 
 -ér. 
 -ir. 
 
 -ádo. 
 -ído. 
 -ido. 
 
 -ando, 
 -iéndo. 
 -iéndo. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 71 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD.* 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 CONJUGA- 
 TION. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 First Per. Sec.Per. Third Per. 
 
 First Per. 
 
 Sec.Per. Third Per. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -0, 
 -0, 
 -0, 
 
 -as, 
 -es, 
 -es, 
 
 -a, 
 
 -e, 
 -e, 
 
 -amos, 
 -émos, 
 -ímos, 
 
 -ais, 
 -éis, 
 
 -ís, 
 
 -an. 
 -en. 
 -en. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -aba, 
 
 -ia, 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -abas, 
 
 -ías, 
 
 -ías, 
 
 -aba, 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -ía, 
 
 -abamos, 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -íamos, 
 
 -ábais, 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -íais, 
 
 -aban. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 -ían. 
 
 PERFECT-DEFINITE. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 -é, 
 -í, 
 
 -áste, 
 -íste, 
 
 -íste, 
 
 -ó, 
 -io, 
 -i6, 
 
 -amos, 
 -ímos, 
 -ímos, 
 
 -ásteis, 
 -ísteis, 
 -ísteis, 
 
 -áron. 
 -iéron. 
 -iéron. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -aré, 
 
 -eré, 
 -iré, 
 
 -aras, 
 -eras, 
 -irás, 
 
 -ara, 
 -era, 
 -irá, 
 
 -aremos, 
 -eremos, 
 -iremos, 
 
 -aréis, 
 -eréis, 
 -iréis, 
 
 -aran, 
 -eran, 
 -irán. 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -e, 
 -a, 
 -a, 
 
 -a, 
 -e, 
 
 -e, 
 
 -e, 
 -a, 
 -a, 
 
 -émos, 
 -amos, 
 -amos, 
 
 -ád, 
 -éd, 
 -id, 
 
 -en. 
 -an. 
 -an. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 W 
 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 -e, 
 
 -a, 
 
 -a, 
 
 -es, 
 -as, 
 -as, 
 
 -e, 
 -a, 
 -a, 
 
 -émos, 
 -amos, 
 -amos, 
 
 -éis, 
 -ais, 
 -ais, 
 
 -en. 
 -an. 
 -an. 
 
 * The compound tenses, being always formed by the various persons 
 of the tenses of the verb haber (see 156) and the past-participle, are not 
 of course to be included in this tabular view of the verb-endings. 
 
72 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD— Continued, 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 CONJUGA- 
 TION. 
 
 /S'wjg'uZar. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 First Per. Sec.Per. Third Per. 
 
 First Per. 
 
 Sec.Per. Third Per. 
 
 f 
 
 -ara, 
 
 -aras, 
 
 -ara, 
 
 -aramos, 
 
 -árais, 
 
 -aran. 
 
 M 
 
 -aria, 
 
 -arias, 
 
 -aria, 
 
 -aríamos, 
 
 -aríais, 
 
 -arían. 
 
 I 
 
 -ase, 
 
 -ases, 
 
 -ase, 
 
 -asemos, 
 
 -áseis, 
 
 -asen. 
 
 r 
 
 -iéra, 
 
 -iéras, 
 
 -iéra, 
 
 -iéramos, 
 
 -iérais, 
 
 -iéran. 
 
 2.J 
 
 -ería, 
 
 -erías, 
 
 -ería, 
 
 -eríamos, 
 
 -eríais, 
 
 erían. 
 
 I 
 
 -iése, 
 
 -iéses, 
 
 -iése, 
 
 -iésemos, 
 
 -iéseis, 
 
 -iésen. 
 
 r 
 
 -iéra, 
 
 -iéras, 
 
 -iéra, 
 
 -iéramos, 
 
 -iérais, 
 
 -iéran. 
 
 3 J 
 
 -iría, 
 
 -irías, 
 
 -iría, 
 
 -iríamos, 
 
 -iríais, 
 
 -irían. 
 
 I 
 
 -iése, 
 
 -íeses, 
 
 -iése, 
 
 -iésemos, 
 
 -iéseis, 
 
 -iésen. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 1- 
 
 -are, 
 
 -ares, 
 
 -are, 
 
 -aremos, 
 
 -áreis, 
 
 -aren. 
 
 2. 
 
 -iére, 
 
 -íeres. 
 
 -iére, 
 
 -iéremos, 
 
 -iéreis, 
 
 -iéren. 
 
 3. 
 
 -íere, 
 
 -iéres, 
 
 -íere, 
 
 -iéremos, 
 
 -iéreis, 
 
 -iéren. 
 
 CHANGES IN THE VERB-ENDING. 
 
 165. A change takes place in the first letter of the verb- 
 ending in the gerund, third person singular and plural of 
 the perfect-definite in the indicative, and in all the persons 
 of the first and third forms of the imperfect subjunctive, 
 and in the first-future of the same mood, in the second or 
 third conjugation, when the verb-root ends in a, e, or u. 
 This change is merely the substitution of y for i ; as, ca-er, 
 ca-yéndo, ca-yó, ca-yéron, ca-yére, ca-yése, etc. ; cre-ér, cre- 
 yendo, cre-yó, cre-yéron, cre-yére, cre-yéres, etc. j argü-ír : 
 argu-yéndo, argu-yó, etc. 
 
 (a.) If the last letter of the verb-root be a silent u (see 14 and 21) the 
 change in the verb-ending does not take place ; as, persegu-ír, persigu- 
 iendo, etc., and not persigu-yéndo. 
 
 CHANGES IN THE VERB-ROOT. 
 
 166. In order that the last letter of the verb-root may- 
 retain, in all the tenses, the same sound which it has in the 
 infinitive, a change of letters is sometimes required. This 
 
OF THE VERB. 73 
 
 change can only take place when the verb-root ends in c, 
 g, gu, or qu. 
 
 (a.) In such cases, there is changed, in the first conjugation, 
 
 c of the verb-root into qu before e of the verb-ending; as, toc-úr ; 
 tóqu-e. 
 
 g of the verb-root into gu before e of the verb-ending; as, pág-ar ; 
 págu-es. 
 
 (b.) Iñ the second conjugation, 
 
 c of the verb-root into z before ooro; as, vene-er ; vénz-as, vénz-o. 
 
 g intoj before a or o; as, converg-ér ; convérj-a, convcrj-o. 
 (c.) In the third conjugation, 
 
 c of the verb-root into z before ooro: as, unc-ír ; únz-as, únz-o. 
 
 g * " ,/ " a or o ; as, ung-ír ; únj-a, únj-o. 
 
 gu into g before a or o; as, consegu-tr ; consig-an, consig-o. 
 
 qu into c before a or o ; as, delinqu-ir ; delinc-as, delinc-o. 
 
 (d.) The reason for these changes will at once he per- 
 ceived by the learner by referring to " Sound of the Con- 
 sonants " (see Part I., 9 — 29) : thus c is sounded like k 
 before a or u, and like th before e or i ; while qu before e or 
 i has the sound of k. If, then, in conjugating tocar (in 
 the present tense of the subjunctive mood, for example), 
 we retain the c of the verb-root, the pronunciation would 
 be altered from the sound of k to that of th ; thus, to-cár, 
 pronounced to-kár, and tó-ce pronounced tó-thai/. But by 
 changing c into qu, the hard sound of c is retained : thus, 
 tó-qu-e, pronounced to-kay. And so before a or o, by chang- 
 ing c, g, gu, and qu of the verb-root of the second and 
 third conjugations into z, j, g, and c respectively : and g 
 of the first conjugation into gu before e of the verb-ending. 
 
 167. The compound tenses are always formed by the 
 different persons of the tenses of the verb haber (see 156) 
 and the past-participle of the verb to be conjugated. 
 
 E^fp" The compound tenses are the past-infinitive, the gerund of the 
 past, the perfect-indefinite, the first-pluperfect, the second-pluperfect, and 
 second-future of the indicative; the perfect-indefinite, pluperfect, and 
 second-future of the subjunctive. If the learner has committed to 
 memory the simple tenses of the verb haber, he is able to conjugate the 
 compound tenses of any verb in Spanish. 
 
74 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 P 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 w 
 >¡ 
 
 jj* 
 
 g 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 75 
 
 
 
 
 
 ji 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■1 
 
 
 
 
 
 <a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ~s 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 8 
 N 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 o _ 
 
 
 to~ 2" c 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 - 2 " _ S .2 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 5 5 ~~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 >>>£;>.> 
 
 
 
 £>>>>.> 
 
 
 
 >>>>>;> 
 
 
 > ¡> >. ¡> > F» 
 
 
 fe- £ £ j> £ £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 "a 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 "s 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 N 
 
 ¡5 
 
 s 
 
 H 
 
 h 
 
 X 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 i. 
 
 
 > 
 
 DD 
 
 
 
 
 Ó 
 
 
 H 
 
 a 
 
 
 H 
 
 a. 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 «1 
 
 c- 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 Q 
 ft 
 
 
 o _ 
 
 - » - E .2 c 
 
 O O Oí 0) M) <u 
 
 
 ía, 
 
 ías, 
 
 ía, 
 
 íamos 
 
 íais, 
 
 ían, 
 
 « 
 « 
 CU 
 
 í, 
 
 iste, 
 
 ió, 
 
 irnos, 
 
 ísteis, 
 
 ieron, 
 
 
 
 SESEES 
 o o o o o o 
 ü ü ü O ü O 
 
 
 S S S S S E 
 o o o o o o 
 Q O ü O O ü 
 
 
 E S E £ £ E 
 o o o o o o 
 O ü ü O O ü 
 
 
 
 « -i I I i i 
 
 
 Hfll-i 
 
 lili ¿ É 
 § g | 8 S » 
 
 
 ou lovedst. 
 loved. 
 
 ey loved. 
 
 
 
 >x ^ < § >>^ 
 
 
 S^^ 8^^ 
 
 
 -.^^ 9 ^^ 
 
 
 
 « .T . E .2 c 
 
 
 . úT . S .2" c 
 
 
 nos, 
 
 atéis 
 
 ron, 
 
 
 
 O cs es cu vi ca 
 
 
 cS cs es \-3 V :S cs 
 
 
 
 
 
 SESEES 
 
 
 S S S s s s 
 
 
 S E E £ S £ 
 
 
 
 <j << <- <5 <J <5 
 
 
 <! <5 <í << «j -s- 
 
 
 -< «*< <J <3 <¡ <í 
 
 
 
 -< O» « -H N M 
 
 
 — C^ CV5 — h C^ fO 
 
 
 ~ ~i 00 ^ -i PQ 
 
76 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 -tí 
 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 •ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 -tí 
 
 
 ^a 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 ►<a 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 o* o" o" 
 
 
 
 o o 
 -a -x3 
 -- o - > '> o 
 
 
 -o" _ > £ o 
 o -a o r 3 "S 
 3 *> 12 £'*£ 
 
 
 do, 
 
 ivido, 
 
 do, 
 
 vivid 
 
 vivid 
 
 vivid 
 
 
 
 O -o ° '> -^ ^ 
 
 
 .£ ■> .£; o > '> 
 
 
 > > V «o .2 a 
 
 
 
 > h t ai «i .h 
 
 
 - « - £ ■ c 
 
 
 V -1 ' ? i i § 
 
 
 
 .5 > .5' o ;rj > 
 
 
 es es eS es es es 
 
 
 ^j 3 -o 2 2 2 
 
 
 
 * s * s 2 c 
 
 
 S Süa 2S S 
 
 
 
 
 a> tí tí cu es ra 
 
 
 es td td- (5 tí rt 
 
 
 ¡3 3 E3 tí =3 3 
 
 
 
 ffi w íií ffi a tu 
 
 
 W h W 33 S ffi 
 
 
 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 
 
 "§' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 é 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 "S 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 § 
 
 í3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^3 
 a 
 
 o 
 
 "§ 
 
 I 
 
 £ 
 
 -e: 
 
 o 
 
 
 w 
 
 ►c; 
 
 Q 
 
 E 
 
 S 
 
 w 
 
 **H 
 
 « 
 
 S 
 
 C 
 
 w 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 Q 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 « 
 
 mido, 
 omido, 
 mido, 
 s comido, 
 s comido, 
 omido, 
 
 w 
 
 £> 
 ►J 
 
 « 
 
 comido, 
 s comido, 
 
 comido, 
 mos comido 
 is comido, 
 n comido, 
 
 ¿ 
 fe 
 o 
 ü 
 w 
 
 be comido, 
 biste comido, 
 bo comido, 
 bimos comido, 
 bísteis comido, 
 bieron comido, 
 
 <5 
 O 
 
 
 O o O o ;g o 
 ° ro " c ,o c 
 
 
 d « tí s s s 
 
 3 S 22 2 S 
 
 
 
 
 cu es tí <u es cí 
 
 
 
 
 ¡3 3 tí ¡3 3 s 
 
 
 
 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 
 
 
 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 
 
 
 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "¥» 
 
 
 
 ve Zovecí. 
 Aas¿ toree? 
 
 '.ave loved, 
 have loved, 
 have loved 
 
 
 I had loved, 
 thou hadst love 
 he had loved, 
 we had loved, 
 you had loved, 
 they had bved. 
 
 
 acZ loved, 
 ■ad loved, 
 had loved, 
 had loved. 
 
 
 
 Iha 
 thou 
 he h 
 we h 
 you 
 they 
 
 
 
 Iha 
 thou 
 heh 
 we h 
 you 
 they 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o o o 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 -T - 
 
 
 rC -O T3 -O 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 t ¡jfl fi S Cl 
 
 
 mado, 
 amado 
 mado, 
 os ama 
 amadc 
 amado 
 
 
 nado, 
 amad* 
 nado, 
 s ama 
 is ama 
 n ama 
 
 
 
 d c s „ „ e 
 
 S § S § S i 
 
 
 tí M es e m c 
 
 tí tí ed 3 'tí tí 
 
 
 SSS22g¡ 
 <u 2 o 5 v2 .2 
 
 
 
 1 « * £ S e 
 
 
 2 2 2222 
 
 
 _q 2 ^j 2 ^3 2 
 
 
 
 cd tí tí a> cd rt 
 
 
 tí tí es cd tí « 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 S3 W S3 S3 S3 
 
 
 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 
 
 
 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 S3 ¡ 
 
 
 
 ¿5 W PÓ, r-J CÍ _CQ | 
 
 ¿i o¿ iyi — < oí có 
 
 r-< oí co — <' oí PÓ : 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 7 y I 
 
 
 
 
 
 "tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 á 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 
 
 
 <u" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -£S 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 o, Is 
 
 do, 
 
 ivido, 
 do, 
 
 do, 
 
 
 let 
 
 sotros, 
 •os, 
 
 
 
 
 
 ivid 
 
 vivi 
 ivid 
 
 IS V 
 
 viv 
 vivi 
 
 
 O *3 r JT 
 
 2 v s J 
 
 
 
 „ «r _ £ .2 c 
 
 
 > » > £ .2 c 
 
 
 o >g _r o > ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "a 
 
 
 ££>>:>:>: ^ 
 
 
 cj rt c3 cd rt cd 
 K E K ffi E W 
 
 
 > > > > v > > 
 
 t> i> t> £ > £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 <0 
 
 - 
 
 
 U 
 
 1 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 § 
 
 c 
 c 
 
 "a 
 
 Q 
 
 w 
 
 ^ 
 
 « 
 
 53 
 
 
 £ 
 
 I 
 
 O 
 O 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 S 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 Q 
 Ü5 
 O 
 
 W 
 
 ido, 
 mido, 
 ido, 
 
 comido, 
 mido, 
 mido, 
 
 É 1 
 Pi 
 
 nosotros, 
 otros, 
 
 < 
 Ü 
 
 Q 
 
 
 eré, 
 
 eras, 
 
 era, 
 
 eremo 
 
 eréis, 
 
 eran. 
 
 
 ré com 
 •as co 
 rá corr 
 remos 
 réis co 
 rán co 
 
 2 
 
 a yo, 
 e td, 
 a él, 
 amos 
 éd vos 
 an ello 
 
 K 
 
 
 £ E E E E £ 
 
 
 J=> ,0 ¿3 -O X> £> 
 
 
 E E S £ E £ 
 
 
 
 o o o o o o 
 ü ü O ü ü O 
 
 
 33 ffi K ffi ffi W 
 
 
 o o o o o o 
 O O O O ü O 
 
 / shall or iíiZZ love, 
 thou wilt love, 
 he will love, 
 we shall love, 
 you will love, 
 they will love. 
 
 do, / s/ia/Z /tare Zoyed. 
 ado, ¿/ioi¿ ici7¿ have loved. 
 do, /ie iotVZ have loved. 
 mado,ice shall have loved. 
 ado, you will have loved. 
 ado, they icill have loved. 
 
 let me love (or, may I love). 
 
 love thou. 
 
 let him love. 
 sótros,7e¿ us love. 
 ros, lové you. 
 
 let them love. 
 
 
 
 o „ 
 
 
 « £ « rt S £ 
 £ § £ § « es 
 
 
 c v i « 
 
 
 
 „ m _ £ .2 C 
 
 
 d m * e 2 e 
 
 "2 ^ *£ § ÍS *£ 
 
 
 cT -g" _r o > "S 
 
 
 
 V E v £ ^ 2 *2 *2 
 
 
 
 ^ 2 ^ £ 3 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O rt O <D ''rf <L> 
 
 
 
 ££££££ 
 
 
 « 3 S - C! a 
 
 
 £ E £ E £ £ 
 
 
 
 «< <j <¡ ^ <i <í 
 
 
 HH — Mh k ÍC — 
 
 
 <j <} <j <3 << << 
 
 
 
 - w m -I n m 
 
 
 H N « -N M 
 
 . 1 
 
 — < C^ <>í »-* <M* ÍO 
 
78 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 ed « es es "jfl rt 
 
 £ £ £ > £ £ 
 
 - af _ E .2 c 
 
 e! tí tí tí \S * 
 
 SEEESS 
 o o o o o o 
 O OOP ü Ü 
 
 w *" & 5 
 
 >>S 
 
 9 2 S P 
 F S a §> 
 
 S £ E E S E 
 
 <g < *t¡ <J <? <¡ 
 
 era, ■} 
 ría, L 
 ese, J 
 eras, ^ 
 rías, S- 
 eses, J 
 era, •> 
 ría, i- 
 ese, J 
 éramos, -j 
 riamos, > 
 ésemos, J 
 
 'i | 1 
 
 «« V C >m 
 
 # > > _> > > > > > m > t > t* > 
 
 > > > 
 
 ¡>¡>¡>¡>^¡>;>¡>í>t>í> t> j> > > 
 
 . . E E S .2 .2 .2 
 
 ! O» C3 « m £ a m 
 
 > .a .S a> .S •£ <u .S 
 
 ¡ £ E E £ E E £ 
 
 wOOOOOOOOOO 
 
 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOO 
 
 o o o o o 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 79 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 w 
 c 
 
 ► I > £ .2 c 
 
 c3 d a fl a d 
 
 a a a v s \d es 
 
 EC EC EC EC SI EC 
 
 s ec a £ : 
 
 J •« "§ 
 
 s £ 
 
 3 g § 
 
 2 -*s ^ 
 
 -it 
 
 3 §» 
 
 <^H5 
 
 
 ■a ■« 
 
 E £ 
 
 ESS 
 
 EC EC EC 
 
 — i <>t CO — ■ ( 
 
 i o « a 
 
 M.-i.g 
 
 EC EC EC ! 
 
 d" -a , 
 
 2 o"^2^2^ 
 
 o -a 
 
 .2 "C .2 -2 "• .2 .2 ^ 2 
 3 jz 3 3 3 3 IS 3 3 
 4'3 1 S s s ? 5 « a 
 ECECECECECECECECEC 
 
 _. o -3 -~ no ■ 
 
 b 3 3 E ; S 
 
 c a 5 ° c 
 
 c i K o o o 
 
 hh — ffi EC ffi . 
 
 í -° -£ 
 
 •pdio¡ 
 
 ■p90O¡ 
 92Dl{ 
 
 5 -^ 
 
 rt 2 ° ^ ^ Q rt 
 .2 v 5 2 2 ^ .2 .2 v " .2 
 'JE JE 'JE 'JE JE 2 JE JE- 3« 
 
 = r=3=!-3 = cS = 
 
 ECECECECECECECECEC 
 
80 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 F 
 
 
 •psffijZ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 1! 
 
 
 
 zxvy 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 , — A — « 
 
 
 <ó 
 
 
 
 
 
 § ^ 
 
 
 
 tfS"^ 
 
 
 "Ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 HI 
 
 
 3 
 
 o. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■s 
 
 S^ ■-••©" 
 
 
 
 971 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 ^p cr"^ r^-; 
 
 
 a?* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 3 vivido 
 
 vivido, 
 
 3 vivido 
 
 ivido, 
 
 ido, 
 
 ivido, 
 
 vido, 
 
 ido, 
 
 vido, 
 
 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 
 iere viv 
 ieres vi 
 iere viv 
 iéremo 
 iéreis v 
 i eren vi 
 
 
 
 o m o > •£ > "> .£; > 
 B 2 : S .2 £ J8 c • *-a 
 
 
 p ■» 
 
 s" 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 J í fl J í ;; 
 2 Z P 2 2 Zi i 
 
 j=, jz A x; x x i 
 
 
 
 ■<3 -5 -o -a> £ --o fe \5 o 
 
 
 > > 
 
 "£> 
 
 > ¡> 
 
 > 
 
 
 X X X) X co X | 
 
 
 
 
 
 v v 
 
 x x 
 
 > 
 
 X 
 
 > > 
 
 x x 
 
 X 
 
 
 -I '"I 
 
 "3 ,°7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~í 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 aa2?i/ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 « 
 E-i 
 
 ■1 
 
 g 
 
 ,1-1 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 comido, J/I 
 b comido, 
 
 comido, 
 mos comido, 
 is comido, 
 n comido, 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 -■- 
 
 W 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 fe 2 .2 ^2 "2 i 
 
 3 3 3 3 3 -c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ S3 3 3 P 
 
 r ~- ~ 
 
 8l.8.E.|-B-1:2 : e 
 
 pj 
 
 
 
 o „ 
 
 
 w 
 
 ■ja jz x. -= x: j= 
 
 
 Hubiéramos 
 Habríamos c 
 Hubiésemos 
 Hubierais eo 
 Habríais cor 
 Hubieseis co 
 Hubieran eo 
 Habrían con 
 Hubiesen co 
 
 
 of cj 
 
 .2 -2 
 o o 
 
 X X 
 
 .2 
 
 o 
 
 u 
 
 X 
 
 1 1 
 
 -O "O 
 
 £ 2 
 c o 
 
 X X 
 
 c 
 
 0) 
 
 S 
 
 £ 
 o 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 
 X X X CO X X 
 
 - 
 
 X 
 
 h 
 
 we loved, 
 st have loved. 
 rave loved, 
 have loved. 
 Iiave loved. 
 1 have loved. 
 
 
 
 •p9.io¡ -pdíoi -p9aoj 
 
 
 » 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9Xny 9dvy gavy 
 
 3 1" 5"í^^ -s S -a 
 
 11 íill-IJi 
 
 
 -2 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 o -2 
 5 J 
 
 o 
 
 
 1 should h 
 thou should 
 he should 1 
 we should 
 you should 
 they shoulc 
 
 
 
 
 -c: 3 
 
 ^ 
 
 "* z 
 
 
 
 ¡4 S 5fe -V. S. ^ 
 
 
 
 .___ noíi foyj 
 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 o" 
 
 
 
 °" o" -2" 
 
 
 SJ^*. 
 
 v^ 
 
 V ^ 
 
 v3> 
 
 
 o -c o c - t; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt-OrtO - O ~ _ ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X) a T3 c= « cr 
 
 
 
 is I *-*g | ?'^§1 
 
 
 
 
 o? 
 
 
 
 S 1 1 2 " ? - 
 
 
 
 O" T» O .* S -.0 es S cS 
 
 
 „ 
 
 
 o „ 
 
 - 
 
 
 z i 1 1 -1 g 
 
 
 
 £ 2-2 .|-|.| ó- J :t? - 
 
 
 p~ p 
 
 CD 
 
 P £ 
 
 :. 
 
 
 5 S G¿ x ív ^o c 
 
 
 
 ?2 v c ^2* "^2 V S "2 .22 ^ 2 
 
 (tí « 
 
 i 
 
 c 5 
 
 3 Ci 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿ ¿. ¿' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _____ — ___" 
 
 x X 
 
 y. 
 
 X Xl 
 
 7. 
 
 
 X X X X X X 
 
 — i Oí CO 
 
 -5 oí 
 
 co 
 
 — i Oí 
 
 co 
 
 
 -; o? co -H o? co j 
 
31 OF THE VERB. 
 
 |3P" The learner must now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Section 
 Fourteenth. 
 
 REFLECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 169. Those verbs are called reflective or reciprocal which 
 reflect the action they express, on their nominative (see 
 136); as, Yo me desnudo, or me desnudo, "I undress my- 
 self ; : ' El se ahorcó, or se ahorcó, " he hung himself;" nosotros 
 nos amamos, " we love ourselves," " or " we love each other." 
 
 (a.) The reflective verbs are inflected in the same man- 
 ner as the verb would be conjugated if it were employed 
 without the reflective pronouns. The verb ahorcar is 
 thus conjugated reflectively : 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ahorcarse, to hang one's self. 
 
 PAST-PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PAST-INFINITIVE. 
 
 Ahorcado, hung one's self. 
 
 Haberse ahorca- to have hung one's 
 do, self. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PAST. 
 
 Ahorcándose, hanging one's self. 
 
 Habiéndose ahor- having hung one's 
 cado, self. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT. PERFECT-INDEFINITE. 
 
 ]l. Me ahorco, I hang myself. Me he ahorcado, I have hung my- 
 
 self. 
 
 2. Te ahorcas, thou hangest thy- Te has ahorcado, thou hast hung 
 
 self. 
 
 thyself. 
 
 3. Se ahorca, he hangs himself. 
 
 Se ha ahorcado, he has hung him- 
 
 
 self 
 
 1 . Nos ahorca- we hang ourselves. 
 
 Nos hemos ahor- ice have hung our- 
 
 mos, 
 
 cado, selves. 
 
 2. Os ahorcáis, you hang your- 
 
 Os habéis ahor- you have hung 
 
 selves. 
 
 cado, yourselves. 
 
 3. Se ahorcan, they hang them- 
 
 Se han ahorcado,/Aey have hung 
 
 selves. 
 
 tliemselves. 
 
 And thus through all the moods and tenses. 
 
82 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 (b.) It must not be forgotten that the reflective pronouns are always 
 in the objective case, and governed by the verb which comes after them 
 or to which they are joined (for they are always joined to infinitives, 
 gerunds, and imperatives. See 116 ; 116, a; 116, b; also 113, a.) The 
 nominative personal pronouns are not generally used. 
 
 OF THE PASSIVE VERB. 
 
 170. A passive verb is conjugated by adding to the 
 auxiliary verb ser, through all its moods and tenses (see 
 158), the past participle of the verb to be conjugated. The 
 participle in such a case is inflected by gender and number 
 like an adjective ; thus to say " he is loved ;" u she is loved ;" 
 " they are loved " (mase.) ; u they are loved" (fern.) ; would be, 
 
 El es amado. Ellos son amados. 
 
 Ella es amada. I Ellas son amadas. 
 
 (a.) The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish 
 in the present and imperfect tenses of the indicative 
 mood only when a mental act or state of the emotions 
 is spoken of : thus we can say ella es amada, u she is loved," 
 but we can not say ella es hallada, " she is found," since in 
 the latter case no state of the mind or feelings is described, 
 and the perfect-indefinite tense must be employed ; thus, 
 ella ha sido hallada, " she has been found." For the im- 
 perfect tense of the indicative, when no state or act of the 
 mind is spoken of, the perfect-definite must be used, as 
 la casa fué (not era) quemada, " the house was burnt." 
 
 171. Conjugation of the passive verb, ser hallado: 
 
 INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 Ser hallado, to be found. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 
 PAST INFINITIVE. 
 
 Sido hallado,* been found. 
 
 Haber sido halla- to have been 
 do, found. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 GERUND OF THE PAST. 
 
 Siendo hallado, being found. 
 
 Habiendo sido having been 
 hallado, found. 
 
 * Hallado means " been found," as well as "found" so that sido is 
 not used in forming the passive past participle. (See 300, c.) 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 83 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 ~* j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •a 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 c 
 — 
 
 
 «3 
 
 ■o 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 03" 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 -o 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 Ed 
 
 
 
 
 Js 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 73 
 
 
 — 
 53 
 
 
 =J 
 
 
 jS 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 "9 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 ¿ 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 ^a 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 VO 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 » c" c 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 *ed 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 (3 
 
 
 
 
 ^5 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 ¡0 
 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 .3 
 
 
 
 
 Q) 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 CO 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 so 
 
 
 
 
 
 r ^ 
 
 
 C to Vi 
 
 
 E0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 -a 
 
 C3 
 
 
 O 
 
 -0 
 
 _ca 
 
 
 
 
 
 (D 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "a 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 C3 
 
 43 
 
 
 "3 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 _r: 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 — 
 
 2 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 43 
 
 Í 
 
 > 03 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 
 2 '3 '| 
 
 
 ^09 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 T3 
 
 
 
 v3 
 
 
 vu V C xo 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 «09 
 
 
 
 
 
 .3. p> _3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vflj 
 
 
 «** 
 
 
 80 
 
 '<-_ 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 ^ 
 
 = 
 
 <« 8! 1h 
 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¿ 
 
 
 s" 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 03 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 O 
 
 -c 
 
 - 
 
 O 
 
 •a 
 
 t? 
 
 S 
 
 O 
 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 . 
 
 O 
 
 
 71 I. 
 
 =3 O 
 
 
 tí 
 
 O 
 
 jd 
 
 d 
 
 S3 
 
 03 
 
 ¿a 
 
 % 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 43 
 O 
 
 i 
 
 ~ 
 
 a 
 
 Q 
 
 C 
 
 u . 
 
 = 
 
 T, 
 
 T^ 
 
 1 
 
 43 
 O 
 
 8* 
 
 a 
 5 
 o 
 
 1 
 5 
 '< 
 
 8" 
 
 •~ 
 
 •». 
 1 
 
 E- 
 
 H 
 U 
 OS 
 M 
 ft, 
 S 
 
 43 
 
 00 
 O 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 w 
 h 
 
 s 
 
 43 « 
 
 1! 
 
 i 
 
 o 
 
 TO '° 
 09 
 
 g 
 
 > 
 
 e 
 
 ■1 
 
 -5 
 
 >, 
 s 
 
 1 
 
 43 
 O 
 
 1 
 
 'i 
 
 1 
 
 I fuéramos 
 
 o. seríamos 
 
 fuésemos 
 
 -0 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 XO 
 
 < 
 
 1 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 E 
 g 
 
 W 
 
 W 
 
 B 
 
 P. 
 
 o 
 
 o" 
 
 K 
 
 C 
 
 Ü 
 H 
 
 o" 
 
 1 
 
 K 
 B 
 
 3 
 
 -a 
 
 1 
 - 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 - 
 — . 
 
 X 
 
 1 
 
 p" 
 
 1 
 
 ü 
 
 -o 
 
 "5 
 43 
 
 a 
 
 B 
 3 
 E- 
 3 
 6. 
 
 "3 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc a 
 
 
 
 
 
 P< 
 
 *5 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 43 
 
 03 
 
 O 
 
 
 43 
 
 ca 
 
 ft 
 
 w 
 p. 
 
 4= 
 
 fr- 
 eí 
 fa 
 
 12 
 
 03 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 — 
 
 ■r. 
 
 
 
 va 
 
 03 
 
 IS 
 
 « 
 
 
 03 
 
 B 
 fe 
 
 ¿3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¿ 
 
 
 „ 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 — 
 
 "a 
 
 43 
 
 
 — 
 "3 
 
 
 P 
 
 — 
 
 *3 
 43 
 
 o 
 
 
 o" 
 
 ~Z 
 43 
 
 pw 
 
 13 
 
 jd 
 
 43 
 
 3 
 
 V33 
 DO 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 J: 
 
 
 1 
 
 "3 
 
 43 
 
 03" of J? 
 
 a a m 
 
 
 P 
 _B 
 
 43 
 09 
 
 09 
 
 
 
 OB 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 03 
 2 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 \d 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 09 
 
 
 C9 ^ 09 
 
 
 3 
 '03 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o" 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 "9 
 
 
 O" 
 
 -c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 1 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 o" 
 
 — 
 
 "3 
 
 — 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 o" 
 
 1 
 
 43 
 
 
 O 
 
 -a 
 
 
 cd 
 1 
 
 
 
 P" 
 
 -= 
 
 
 "3 
 
 43 
 
 
 09 
 
 49 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 v 3 
 
 
 >a> 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 VB 
 
 
 2 'C « 
 
 
 V. 
 
 
 X 
 
 K 
 
 
 fe 
 
 x 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 fe CQ^fe 
 
 
 X 
 
84 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 172. The compound tenses of the passive verb are 
 formed by the several simple tenses of haber, and the pas- 
 sive past participle of the verb to be conjugated ; as, 
 
 JHe sido hallado, 
 Había sido hallado, 
 Habré sido hallado, 
 Si hubiere sido hallado, 
 
 I have been found. 
 
 I had been found. 
 
 I shall have been found. 
 
 If I should have been found. 
 
 §2^ The Exercises in Part IV., Section Fifteen, can now be trans- 
 lated. 
 
 173. Instead of employing the auxiliary verb ser, to be, 
 and the participle of the verb agreeing with its nomina- 
 tive, the personal reflective pronoun se is often used in the 
 third person singular and plural with the proper tense of 
 the active verb. Thus, we can say, el libro ha sido hallado, 
 or el libro se ha hallado* and both forms are to be rendered 
 in English, '• the book has been found." This is a very 
 important rule of Spanish Grammar, and must be kept in 
 mind by the learner. The following will serve as exam- 
 ples of this method of placing se before the verb, which in 
 such a case corresponds to the same tense conjugated pas- 
 sively. 
 
 El libro se ha hallado, 
 
 El übro se abre, 
 
 El se llamaba Caifas. 
 
 La voz se repitió, 
 
 Las aguas se tornaron amaTgaSj 
 
 Su gloria se verá, 
 
 La casa se quemo, 
 
 Aquí se habla Español, 
 
 Se dice, 
 
 Se publicó, 
 
 The book has been found. 
 
 The book is opened. 
 
 He was called Caiaphas. 
 
 The voice teas repeated. 
 
 The waters were turned, bitter. 
 
 His glory shall be seen. 
 
 The house was burnt. 
 
 Spanish is spoken here. 
 
 It is said. 
 
 It was published. 
 
 (a.) The above examples rendered literally mean, " the book has found 
 itself;" "the book opens itself;" "he called himself Caiaphas ;" "the 
 voice repeated itself;" "the waters turned themselves bitter;" "his 
 glory shall see itself;" " here speaks itself Spanish ;" " the house burnt 
 itself;" "it says itself;" " it published itself." We can say in English, 
 "the voice prolongs itself," or, "the voice is ' prolonged ;" "the man 
 
 * Literally, " the book has found itself." 
 
OF THE VERB. 85 
 
 deceives himself," or, " the man is deceived ;" so that the only difference 
 between the Spanish and English syntax in this matter is, that the rule is 
 applied far more extensively in Spanish than in English. Thus we can 
 say in both languages, " the voice repeats itself," " la voz se repite," 
 meaning, " the voice is repeated ;" but we can not say in English, " the 
 sound hears itself," for the " sound is heard." In Spanish, however, 
 we can say, la voz se oyó, or, la voz fué oída, " the voice was heard." 
 
 !3P" The Exercises in Part IV., Section Sixteenth, can now be trans- 
 
 174. The passive verb is sometimes formed by the auxil- 
 iary verb estar, instead of ser ; as el caballo está lastimado^ 
 " the horse is injured ; :J la casa está mal construida, " the 
 house is badly constructed." 
 
 [¡3F° Rules for the use of ser and estar will be found in Part III.* 
 
 175. Yerbs are conjugated interrogatively by placing the 
 pronoun after the verb ; and negatively, by placing the ad- 
 
 verb no before the verb ; 
 
 l Amo yo 7 
 
 I Come él 7 
 
 l Escribirían ellos 7 
 
 Yo no amo, 
 
 El no come, 
 
 Ellos no escribirían, 
 
 ¿ No aprenderás tú ? 
 
 Love 17 or do I love 7 
 Does he eat 7 
 Would they write 7 
 I do not love. 
 He does not eat. 
 They would not write. 
 Wilt thou not learn 7 
 
 (a.) If an objective pronoun come before the verb, the negative no is 
 then placed immediately before such pronoun ; as, 
 
 I No lo habéis oido 7 | Have ye not heard it 7 
 
 Yo no le vi, I I saw him not. 
 
 (b.) It is not the general practice to use the nominative personal pro- 
 nouns in asking questions : thus ¿ Amo ? ¿ come ? mean the same as 
 ¿amo yo? ¿come tú? Nor is it absolutely necessary to place the nomi- 
 native pronoun or noun after the verb, as the interrogation-mark shows 
 the sentence to be interrogatory : thus, ¿ Yo amo? ¿amo yo? or ¿amo? 
 each means, " do I love 7" 
 
 §^T The learner may now translate the Exercises in Part IV., Sec- 
 tion Seventeenth. 
 
 * See 333— 336. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 176. The irregular verbs in Spanish are such as do not 
 conform exactly in their manner of conjugation to the 
 model-verbs (amar, comer, vivir). The deviations of each 
 irregular verb are in most cases but slight, yet important 
 to be known, as most of the irregular verbs are in general 
 
 (a.) There are thirty-nine of the different irregular verbs : seven of the 
 first conjugation, seventeen of the second, and fifteen of the third. Many 
 of these differ but very slightly from each other. All the irregular verbs 
 are conjugated like some one of these thirty-nine forms. Four of these, 
 haber, ser, estar, and tener, have already been conjugated. 
 
 (b.) Those verbs which undergo slight changes in the verb-roots or 
 verb-endings of certain tenses or persons of tenses (see 165 ; 166 ; and 
 166, a, b, c), are not on that account deemed irregular, since these 
 changes take place solely to preserve regularity and uniformity of sound, 
 which would be dissimilar in some cases if these changes did not take 
 place. Thus, as before mentioned, buscar, pronounced boos-kár, would, 
 in the present tense of the subjunctive mood, if no change of letters 
 should occur, be busce, pronounced bovs'-thay (c before e and i being 
 sounded like th in thin), and to preserve the hard sound of c, this latter 
 is changed into qu (see 22) ; thus, busque, pronounced boós'-kay. Both 
 regular and irregular verbs undergo such changes when required by the 
 rules of pronunciation. 
 
 gy The learner, while gradually committing to memory the irregular 
 verbs, can also begin to translate the Reading Lessons in Part V., as 
 there directed; and also review the first seventeen Sections of Part 
 IV. 
 
 Remark.— In the following conjugations of the irregular verbs, those 
 persons of the moods and tenses only which deviate from the regular con- 
 jugation are given. Thus, in the first verb, andar, no tense of the indi- 
 cative mood except the perfect-definite is given, because this verb is con- 
 jugated regularly in the other tenses of this mood. In the second verb, 
 contar, the first and second persons plural of the present indicative are 
 not given, because these persons are regular. The learner is therefore to 
 remember that all moods, tenses, and persons, not included in the con- 
 jugation are regular. We have, however, in all cases given the participle 
 and gerund, whether formed regularly or not. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 87 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 c c 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 C3 S 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 ® 
 
 
 
 
 *> 
 
 
 '> '? 
 
 '£ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 53 -O 
 
 73 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 sa 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 ~"~ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 73 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 .2 .2 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 '3 "53 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 MU *JJ 
 
 o 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 "> *> 
 
 "> 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 73 73 
 
 73 
 
 W 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 C C 
 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 
 CS 
 
 
 es O 
 
 si 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 Q 
 
 
 5 
 
 m 03 
 
 O O 
 
 O 
 
 
 O 
 
 W 
 
 « 
 
 of 
 
 £ 
 
 E S 
 
 s 
 
 
 O 
 
 g 
 
 g 
 
 T 
 
 2 1 
 
 '2 "2 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 a 
 
 á 
 c 
 
 3 3 
 
 -a -a 
 
 6 -5 
 
 
 1 
 
 a 
 
 s c 
 
 P c 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 C3 C3 
 
 B ¡S 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 ¡3 
 
 
 H 
 
 PS 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ¡3 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 8 
 
 tí of 
 
 af 
 
 
 P 
 
 > 
 
 ~ 
 
 .2 .2 
 
 .2 
 
 
 g 
 
 73 
 
 C 
 
 pq 
 
 !> > 
 3 3 
 73 -a 
 
 "£ 
 
 73 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 ¡3 
 71 
 
 c c 
 a a 
 
 c 
 
 CS 
 
 "tí 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 of as" 
 
 t£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 <U 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 53 S 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >■ 
 
 < 
 p. 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 T3 -3 
 
 73 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 C C 
 
 c 
 
 H 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 CS C3 
 
 CS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 £ sf 
 
 oT 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 "> V 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 73 73 
 
 73 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 C C 
 
 
 
 
 «j 
 
 
 < «JJ 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ef 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 « 
 
 
 w 
 
 « 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 u 
 es 
 cu 
 
 1 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 ~ 
 
 &3 
 < 
 pi 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 < 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 £h 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 i-> 
 
 
 ¡g 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p - 
 
 
 
 cs 
 
 
 CD 
 
 05 S 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 o 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 o 
 
 ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 erf 
 
 
 
 to" 
 
 
 
 
 
 ó? 
 
 <u . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <; 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 <x> 
 
 43 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 Ü 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 <D 
 
 of | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 z. 
 
 
 3 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 CD | 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 tz 
 
 
 q 
 
 Ü 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 Q 
 
 h a a 
 
 ■ B — 
 
 u 
 
 »-» 
 
 W 
 la 
 
 (DO <D 
 
 S 2 I 5 
 
 «5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P. 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 o 
 
 á 
 
 CD 
 
 s 
 be 
 
 «C3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¡a 
 
 
 
 
 "o > 
 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jg 
 
 T3 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o. 
 
 Sq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o« 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 
 ?á> o 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 P- 
 
 ^ 2 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 td 
 
 9, g. 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 <Ü 
 
 
 
 ¡> — 
 
 O CD 
 
 
 ¡> 
 
 
 té 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 E-i 
 
 o 
 
 
 ft 
 3 
 
 
 
 C5 ja 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 (3 ? 
 
 fH O 
 
 CU O 
 
 
 3 
 g 
 
 1 
 
 
 of 
 
 Cfj 
 
 5 
 p „ 
 
 lar 
 
 verb 
 
 tive. 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 
 HZ 
 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 i 3 CD ° 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bjo S g 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ©•13 P 
 
 i-j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U (H ,5* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Sh O £ 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '« ^ 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of th 
 
 before 
 presen 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 S3 
 
 bJD 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 ^S 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 •_3 ,M " 
 
 •5) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rf 5 gT 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ?-«£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a > o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O as Qi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OSS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . H « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 „ 
 
 zk% 
 
 
 
 4» 
 
 
 of 
 
 bib 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 tea £ 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 •B 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 l ~- 
 
 ^ 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 89 
 
 I 
 
 . H - 
 
 £ 
 
 «I 
 O 
 
 Q 
 
 IS 
 
 H 
 
 EH 
 
 • <! — 
 tí 
 
 ¡> — 
 Ü 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 fj 
 
 c 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 >. 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 I 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 ' O 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 cf 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 fc -. 
 
 
 S5 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 w 
 
 05 
 
 H 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 ft 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 H _ 
 
 < 
 
 
 ► — 
 
 
 £ 
 
 tf 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 £ 
 
 s 
 
 
 EH 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 
 «2 _ 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 >» 
 
 
 >-> 
 
 >> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■2 
 
 
 
 
 
 w' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co" 
 
 <! 
 
 rt 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 ¡>> 
 
 
 £. 
 
 <a 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p" 
 
 
 JÍ 
 
 £" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 « 
 
 
 >< 
 
 
 > 
 
 
90 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c . c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 « 
 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 
 i 
 
 2 c £ 
 
 g « » 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 .£ 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 p- 
 
 "3. ¿i "S, 
 
 
 'ft 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 cs 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 " 
 
 
 D< 
 
 
 & 
 
 Ü w t> 
 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 oT . oT 
 
 
 of 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 "o 
 
 oT 
 
 
 
 
 nT 
 
 'c} ,«g" '3 
 
 
 "S 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 "5 
 
 *3 
 
 
 
 
 ^c0 
 
 ?2 v ~ '2 
 
 
 NU 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 .n 
 
 
 
 
 
 'S. ,a ft 
 
 
 "ft 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 eo 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 O" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o of O 
 
 
 of 
 O 
 
 
 W 
 
 w 
 
 of 
 
 o 
 
 
 O 
 
 W 
 
 O 
 
 :t. 
 
 piéram 
 bríamo 
 piésem 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 H 
 Pi 
 Pi 
 | 
 
 jjj 
 
 O 
 
 I 
 
 ft 
 
 1 8 
 
 > 
 
 s 
 
 ed 
 
 a 
 
 B 
 
 P4 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 CO 
 
 ft 
 
 w 
 
 B 
 H 
 
 CU 
 
 v 2 
 "S, 
 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 3 
 U 
 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 g g g g 
 
 3 
 
 
 > — 
 
 h 
 
 
 u, 
 
 tí 
 
 
 £ 
 
 — 
 
 « 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 Ei 
 
 «1 
 
 o 
 w 
 
 fa 
 s 
 
 
 to 
 S 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 w 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 i— 4 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 BJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 »-* 
 
 
 6" 
 ft 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 CD 
 
 CO 
 
 ft 
 
 2" «r -8Í 
 
 .2 <§ .a 
 
 "ft ¡Q ft 
 
 
 <D 
 "ft 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 rt 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 cfl 3 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 cr 
 
 
 o" 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ' w" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 «f 
 
 
 
 
 oS 
 
 09 
 
 ft 
 
 tn ^ to 
 
 P » S 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 'S, 
 
 ja 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 "S. ¿ 'ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 ej 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 CO 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 sr 
 
 O o o 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of -. oT 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 o 
 ft 
 
 
 oT 
 
 ^T 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 ft 
 
 m eS on 
 
 .2 V H .2 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 (U 
 
 
 & 
 
 \a 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 o 
 
 ft J2 "ft 
 
 
 "ft 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 cO 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 <3 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 Of 
 
 O U O 
 
 
 o ! 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 91 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 .1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 -o 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .-; 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 of 
 
 ta 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 be 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 "a 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 b 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 w of 
 
 
 
 . o 
 
 W o 
 
 
 W 
 1 
 
 H 6 
 
 p. c 
 
 
 | 
 
 > & 
 
 1 ? 
 
 1 bC 
 
 
 
 > — 
 
 Hi 
 PS 
 
 w 1 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 3 
 g 
 
 
 •-> 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 CO . 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 .£P 
 
 bt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 ó 
 
 
 u 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 •J 
 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 .1 
 
 05 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 <; 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 es' 
 
 eT 
 
 
 be 
 
 .bo 
 
 fac 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 i 
 
 
 O 
 
 Ü 
 
 o 1 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 n 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 .8 <cd 
 
 eo 
 
 
 
 
 
 he 
 
 
 
 
 !§ «8 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 f_ 
 
 ja 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m í3 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 8 «8 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 2 f 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ ' 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 H 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 W _ 
 
 •ERFECT-DEFINITE. 
 
 | hicimos, 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE. 
 
 | haremos, 
 
 of 
 
 r| 
 
 in be 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 _5> 
 
 
 - 
 
 m 
 
 
 'ts 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 <a 
 
 
 
 
 
 <J" 
 
 
 
 O ?f 
 
 es" 
 
 be 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 .2 «8 
 
 
 e 
 
 o 
 
 
 JS J= 
 
 X 
 
 g 
 
 ~ 
 
 — 
 
 — ~~ 
 
 — 
 
 es 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 ■iS 
 
 ¡a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 w" 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 eu 
 
 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 § 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ¿f of 
 
 „ 
 
 1 
 
 B 
 
 CO 
 
 
 .8 « 
 
 .a - 
 
 
 
 Í 
 
 
 
 
 ta 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 fco 
 
 
 
 
 
 SS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 6 
 
 bo 
 
 cf mT 
 .8 c3 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 S3 
 
 X 
 
92 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 a v £ :§ 
 
 A A A 
 
 £ o S 
 
 _o £ .2 
 '3 j; '3 
 
 2¿2 
 
 1 o > 
 
 
 : Is» £¡ f§ 
 
 
 G 
 
 c 
 
 C 
 
 
 <u 
 
 C3 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 ¡3 
 
 
 6 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 cf 
 
 
 
 
 S5 
 
 
 
 
 !=> 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 K 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 PS 
 
 K 
 
 t* 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 >; 
 
 | 
 
 
 1. 
 
 H 
 
 w 
 
 
 > 
 
 tí — 
 
 m 
 
 Ph 
 
 g 
 
 > _ 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 H " 1 «J* 
 
 cT 
 
 CQ « 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 '> 
 
 
 
 
 1 o 
 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 w" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 <! 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 CS 
 
 
 
 0) 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 <! 
 
 E 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 cf 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 
 o 
 
 O) 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 [' 
 
 s 
 
 g 
 
 s i 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 93 
 
 
 ¡"I 
 
 -2 ■» 
 
 fc .S 
 
 1 a - 
 
 .ESS 
 
 ?! M v * 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ctí 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <o 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ff 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cf 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 'A 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 £>_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 ft 
 
 H - 
 W O 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 CO g 
 
 
 
 
 K 
 
 tí 
 
 U 
 
 « 8 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 <u 
 
 1 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 ft 
 
 w o. ! 
 
 
 
 
 <J 
 
 
 í> — 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 tf 
 
 
 ü 
 
 P 
 
 >-> 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 Pú 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 es" 
 
 ffl 
 
 & « 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 50 i 
 
 O 
 
 73, 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ¿ 
 
 'o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 P¡ 
 
 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 CS | 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ft 
 
 Oh 
 
94 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 .2 ^ 
 
 T 
 
 a 
 
 si 
 
 g 5, 
 
 w 
 
 cs 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 o. 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 Cm 
 
 1 
 
 H 
 
 > - 
 
 
 
 
 < _ 
 
 - t> 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 E-« 
 
 < 
 
 i 
 
 a 
 
 
 Oh 
 
 O 
 
 u 
 
 s 
 
 « 
 
 W 
 
 h 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 ¡g 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 'S'g'S 
 
 O. Cu o. 
 
 £ i £ 
 
 3 vS $5 
 
 -o -o -3 
 
 ¡3 O 3 
 
 es ~ © 
 fe %2 © 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 95 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 5 
 
 Í 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 <1 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 K 
 
 
 H 
 
 Oi 
 
 
 U 
 
 g 
 
 
 P 
 
 P 
 
 
 ps 
 
 QQ 
 
 £ «ja n 
 
 o, a o. p a. 
 
 0B~ «f «T 
 
 2t B 
 
96 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 H 
 
 « 
 
 > 
 
 \' 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 N 
 
 
 _ !> 
 
 w - 
 
 H 
 
 ft 
 
 U 
 
 s 
 
 fc 
 
 
 i-> 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 > 
 
 .S CD .S 
 
 g S3 2 
 
 <$ cá cá 
 
OF THE VERB, 
 
 97 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C . (3 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «CO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 CO 
 
 ci 
 
 
 B 
 
 C3 
 
 a 
 
 
 C 
 
 ci 
 
 a, 
 
 
 _o •£ # o 
 'a Jo 'a 
 
 
 *a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Jp 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VI 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .ST - .2* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *s 
 
 ^3 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 
 
 «f 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 3 v ^ S* 
 
 "a J5 "a 
 
 
 "a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Í 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 O nf o 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 H 
 Pi 
 
 | 
 
 W 
 
 o 
 
 "a. 
 
 O 
 
 h £ 
 3 p 
 3 j3 
 
 Ú 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 B 
 
 T 
 
 o 
 
 g 
 
 Eh 
 U 
 
 s ° a 
 
 £ § g 
 S3 x .- S3 
 0.^0 "a 
 
 H 
 3 
 
 Eh 
 
 3 
 H 
 PS 
 
 1 
 "a 
 
 
 H 
 
 H 
 
 Ü 
 
 W 
 _ O 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 fa 
 K 
 
 3 
 
 f- ci 
 
 E- 
 «! 
 
 W 
 
 PL, 
 
 2 
 
 
 Ü 
 P 
 
 
 w 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 g 
 
 o 
 
 ■„ 
 
 
 
 n 
 P 
 
 «2 
 
 of 
 
 
 eJ* „ « 
 
 
 oT 
 
 
 
 
 D, 
 
 ¿J 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 "ft _Q "Si 
 
 
 'a 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 ci 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 x¡ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ci 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 if 
 
 „ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of .. of 
 
 cs a o 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 
 
 >s 
 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 
 ® H J 
 
 
 
 p, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D. 
 
 J=> 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a „S a 
 
 
 a 
 
 ¿ 
 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 3 c3 3 
 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 a. 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 o \2 o 
 
 
 'a 
 
 
 >o 
 
 
 Ci 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 3 Ci = 
 
 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 X 
 
 m 
 
 
 OQ 
 
 
 DC 
 
 
 mxnm 
 
 
 DO | 
 
98 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 
 G G 
 
 ri 
 
 
 O tí 
 
 CÍ 
 
 
 *a -a 
 
 
 
 g g 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ _^_ 
 
 ~ 1 "' 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 a 
 b 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 ¡H 
 
 1 
 
 
 TIVE. 
 
 PERA 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 < S 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 o 5 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 Q 
 
 i-s 
 
 
 £ 
 
 cq 
 
 
 ►— i oT eB 
 
 ¡3 « 
 
 
 T3 T3 
 
 G G 
 
 50 "g 
 
 
 CD O 
 
 
 o 
 
 T3 
 
 •a *s 
 
 +3 
 
 
 
 
 -o 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 w 
 
 B 
 
 <! 
 
 -a T3 
 
 T3 
 
 a g 
 
 
 H 
 
 '•£ +3 
 
 "1? 
 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 o" cT 
 
 
 
 ■3D T3 
 
 -a 
 
 
 G G 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ÉH H 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 C « ri 
 
 O G G 
 
 G G* 
 
 s' 
 
 
 
 S Bj C3 
 
 •2, J-f ,5P 
 
 £ m 
 
 
 
 
 2* "^ *2 
 
 jri 
 
 'c? 
 
 
 
 
 — — — 
 
 . — 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 É 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 CD OQ 
 
 
 
 'A 
 
 
 to \3 
 
 2 w 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 >G, bj] 
 
 g '3 
 
 >0> J03 
 
 '1? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 ¡z¡ 
 
 
 
 
 
 of W - 
 „• oT Oho 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 o o 
 
 O 
 
 
 B 
 
 XITF 
 
 imo 
 VE. 
 
 gam 
 
 -PR 
 
 gam 
 
 G S 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 ¿ ^CD >CU 
 
 i 1 
 
 — 
 
 > 
 
 o— i— r>r. 
 6 S £ 
 
 B 
 
 W 
 
 B 
 
 It 
 
 ¡3 *" 
 B 
 
 
 o 
 
 ERFE 
 
 IMP 
 
 UNC 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 fe 
 
 B >-l 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt m tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 p bb U) 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 c? "tí "tí 
 
 
 'ra 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 -o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 É 
 
 
 
 
 
 h" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■2 g~ 
 
 .2 §3 
 
 of of 
 
 CD 
 
 
 -Í3 H 
 
 'jri* 
 
 *3' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «j 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 „ « cT 
 
 of «T 
 
 oT 
 
 
 bp 
 
 _ Qj jap bj) 
 
 
 
 
 '3 
 
 'S 5 '3 *3 
 
 '3 1 'S 5 
 
 'a' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 £ 
 
 E* E* ._£ 
 
 H H 
 
 & 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 99 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 \rf 
 
 c c 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 « C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 xj 
 
 bD be 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 Ctf « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — . . — , 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sd 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vd 
 
 
 PS 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 tm 
 
 22 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 ca 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 E^ 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ¡Z¡ 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 „ W 
 
 
 
 W 
 M 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 1 CÍ 
 
 O w O 
 
 i a I 
 
 o 
 I 
 
 
 CM 
 
 ■s > 
 
 to 1 be 
 
 h" -O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 u. 
 
 Is 
 
 P5 
 
 — > — 
 
 « 
 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 £ 
 E 
 
 Ph 
 
 o 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 g 
 
 
 'sir 
 
 pq 
 & 
 
 -GO - 
 ca " J a 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 bfl bfl 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 PÍ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 .2 
 
 Cm 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 S 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 > 
 
 <, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 a cT 
 
 
 
 ¿p 
 
 
 
 be M 
 
 
 
 "a 
 
 
 "n 
 
 C3 C3 
 
 "3 
 
 
 i> 
 
 
 P> 
 
 > > 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 c3 
 
 á § 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 0) <u 
 > > 
 
 
 
 
 — — 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¿> 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 ü¡ 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ea 
 
 \3 
 
 o 
 
 
 £ 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 Eh' 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 
 pa 
 
 1 w 
 
 C « O 
 
 
 CM 
 
 
 S Í £ 
 
 
 1 
 
 | vea 
 TIVE.- 
 
 | vea 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 B E3 
 
 CM — 
 
 
 S PL. 
 
 P 
 
 
 M s 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 ¡=> 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 ca" 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 s 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 > > 
 
 o 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 — — 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 Cm 
 
 
 m" 
 
 no" 
 
 ca 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 (U 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 
 Ch 
 
 
 
 
 
 ó 
 
 tí 
 
 ca" ca" 
 
 
 
 ^s 
 
 
 
 s> 
 
 t> 
 
 > > 
 
100 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Ü 
 
 fe 
 
 &< 
 
 
 1? 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 W 
 
 H 
 
 A. 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 g 
 
 t3 
 
 Q 
 
 
 >-> 
 
 g 
 
 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 101 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 
 B B* 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 B* 
 
 
 B 
 
 o o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .£? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 *3 
 
 tj -a 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 B 
 
 E B 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü CD 
 
 
 
 
 ¿a 
 
 
 ,fi 
 
 
 
 
 ,a 
 
 £> ,0 
 
 -Q 
 
 o 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 .zT 
 
 
 
 
 
 cc" Otf 
 
 to" 
 
 PQ 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 Yd 
 
 VB -K3J 
 
 Js 
 
 Q 
 
 1 £5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -c 
 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 -Q -O 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 E E 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .0 
 
 
 
 
 -Q 
 
 ,Q X> 
 
 ,Q 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 H 
 
 fe 
 
 - 
 
 of aT 
 O o 
 
 O 
 
 
 ¡z; 
 
 
 
 ro~ 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 s s 
 
 i 
 
 
 w 
 
 CO 
 
 w 
 « 
 
 r 
 
 w 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 Q 
 H 
 
 1 
 B 
 
 > 
 
 < 
 PÍ 
 
 a 
 tp 
 'a 
 
 B 
 ¿3 
 
 « 
 K 
 Ph 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 i 'S 
 
 -3 • -a t3 
 B |? B B 
 o £ cd a> 
 
 (3 
 
 ¿3 E? 
 
 5 Í 
 
 
 
 
 fa 
 « 
 
 
 PU 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 c 
 
 p 
 
 
 i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 s" 
 
 
 _o" 
 
 
 a 
 
 -' 
 p 
 
 ¿72 
 
 _fcc 
 
 
 _CD 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 •a 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 a 
 
 E E 
 
 E 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 ¿3 
 
 
 Xi 
 
 
 .O 
 
 
 x> 
 
 rf3 -O 
 
 x> 
 
 '5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 af 
 
 
 w 
 
 1 i 
 
 OS 
 
 H 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 •S 
 
 
 j| 
 
 :zr- :z? 
 
 •.E 5 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 'S "E 
 
 -a 
 
 <; 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 B 
 
 E E 
 
 E 
 
 04 
 
 
 Ja 
 
 
 
 
 .c 
 
 
 o 
 .O 
 
 o o 
 
 -O -O 
 
 .O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 kT o" 
 
 cd" 
 
 
 
 á 
 
 
 _cr 
 
 
 §> 
 
 
 1 
 
 _ffl _o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 t3 
 
 -a -a . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 B 
 
 E E 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 CI 
 
 
 
 
 
 pq 
 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 PQ 
 
 PC 22 
 
 PC 
 
102 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 <0 \£ .« 
 
 'S -3 -3 
 
 I 
 
 H 
 !> 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 Q 5 Q 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 103 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c S 
 
 ri 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 c 
 
 CO 
 
 £ tO 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 ¡ 
 
 
 I 
 
 E £ 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 TD 
 
 -a 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 -a 
 
 13 t3 
 
 T3 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 "s °s 
 
 '3 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 vs 
 
 XII) MU 
 
 "ffl 
 
 
 'A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 l l 
 
 "I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 " 
 
 H 
 
 T3 
 
 z 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 Ei 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O O 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 ó 
 
 i 
 
 O 
 
 £ ¡ 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 H 
 
 w 
 
 s 
 
 a 
 
 w 
 
 C 
 
 3 
 
 
 .^2 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 g 
 
 j> 
 
 E 
 
 i 
 
 E 
 
 ¿ 1 1 
 
 K E 
 
 
 — 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 _ 
 
 E 
 W 
 
 O 
 
 < 
 tí 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 3 
 
 « 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 s 
 
 
 s? 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 P4 
 
 1—1 
 
 
 p 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 Ü- 
 
 \D~ 
 
 
 aT 
 
 pq 
 P 
 
 « 
 
 Í 1" 
 
 of 
 
 .2 
 
 g,. 
 
 6 
 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 
 £ 
 0) 
 
 99 
 
 £ 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 "= 
 
 
 
 -3 TJ 
 
 X! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > ^ I 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 Í 
 
 fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 ■«J 
 
 P4 
 
 
 6 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 Í 
 
 
 1 
 
 ¡~ CD 
 
 1 1 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 El 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 3 
 
 O 
 
 <! 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 Xt 
 
 T3 T3 
 
 -3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 eS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 £ 
 
 
 a 
 
 E 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 1 1 
 3 3 
 
 g a 
 
 if 
 
 s 
 1 
 
 3 
 
 c 
 
 
 1 
 
 c 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 3 
 bo 
 
 2 s 
 
 
 
 
 3 »- 
 
 
 
 
 HP •- 
 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 IH. * 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 .-'■' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 q" 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 ¡ 
 
 w 
 tí 
 
 tí 
 
 1 wg 
 
 Í5 > « 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 K t--3 
 O < 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 H tí 
 
 
 
 
 g a 
 
 r W Oh 
 
 « 2 
 
 
 
 
 p< " 
 
 ;o 
 
 
 Q 
 
 "3 
 
 
 go 
 
 •Í § 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 P? ■- 
 
 "*s 
 
 2 
 
 J3 
 
 .= J3 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 pr 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 «4-1 
 
 £ 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 <! 
 
 & 
 
 bil 
 
 S3 
 
 Pi 
 
 .2 
 
 .2 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 2 
 
 'Z. 
 
 < 
 
 — 
 
 — — 
 
 «3 
 
 en 
 
 
 
 fcJ3 
 
 
 o" 
 
 ea" 
 
 3 
 
 
 bo 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 >> 
 
 >> 
 
 :_ 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 ó 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OÍ 
 
 
 o 
 
 bo 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 Oí 
 
 
 
 <L) 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 S i 
 
104 
 
 OF THE VERB, 
 
 
 
 
 
 3.- tu 
 
 2 .2 
 "3 '3 
 
 be bXi 
 
 of & 
 "°* "w 
 
 "2 "2 
 "3 '3 
 
 
 e 
 
 "3 
 
 bx 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 tuo bX) 
 
 
 cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 - - 
 
 
 «T 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 ° 2 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 1 
 
 O 
 
 
 c3 o 
 
 
 t 
 
 
 1 
 
 s 
 
 
 O VD 
 
 
 ?2 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 : > 
 
 &B 
 
 O 
 
 bio bu 
 
 
 bX 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 E-¡ 
 
 
 pi 
 
 
 fa 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >-i 
 
 
 
 
 fa 
 
 
 
 PQ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J» 
 
 
 
 f'í 
 
 ti b£ 
 
 
 Í 
 •AD 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 .S :H 
 
 
 .ít 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <=> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 of of 
 
 
 r/ - 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 CD 
 
 
 
 £> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 bJ3 
 
 
 .2 .2 
 
 
 .2 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 "3 *3 
 
 
 = 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 te ti, 
 
 
 bX 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ca 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C3 O 
 
 
 © 
 
 c 
 
 
 fcJD 
 
 
 .2 .2 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 _o 
 
 
 '3 '3 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 cjj bD 
 
 
 cr 
 
 
 
 hH 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | — i l— ' 
 
 
 ~ ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c g 
 
 C* 
 
 
 
 ¿ 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 d 
 
 £ oa 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >, 
 
 
 x 
 
 
 >. 
 
 >, >, 
 
 ¡£, t 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 ,3 
 
 
 _2 
 
 ■3 ,3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O O 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 c 
 
 ,3 .3 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 í 
 
 
 ~z 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 üá 
 
 ->CD M) 
 
 tJ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >, 
 
 >■> >> 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _2 3 
 
 •2 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *o 
 
 "o 
 
 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 (3 
 
 C C 
 
 C - 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tt> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 ó 
 
 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 
 g 
 
 S W 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 . "S-- 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 >, 
 
 
 w >^ 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 > 
 
 = 
 
 1 
 
 
 Ü "S ~ 
 
 & "S 
 
 
 _ 
 
 H _ 
 > 
 
 p* 
 
 a 
 
 
 .2 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 g 
 
 
 É- 
 o 
 fe 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 
 <^3 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 ¿3 
 
 
 ef 
 
 of 
 
 !^3 
 
 
 1— < o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 t>, 
 
 
 "3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 ■3 
 
 5 .3 
 
 3 
 
 Si 
 
 
 .5 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 c 
 
 .3 .3 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «a 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 p 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ►J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o. 
 
 P< 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2: 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 a> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 g 
 
 o 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 a 
 
 S3 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 V- 
 
 
 
 >. 
 
 
 >, 
 
 >, >> 
 
 >> 
 
 o 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 £3 
 
 
 
 s 3 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 Pi 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 .3 
 
 c c 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sS 
 
 < 
 Pi 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P! 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Pf 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ca" cd~ 
 
 CD" 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO* 
 
 
 
 
 £. 
 
 
 >> 
 
 >, >» 
 
 >> 
 
 o 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 7? 
 
 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 >s 
 
 
 a 
 
 £ £ 
 
 ►2 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 105 
 
106 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 
 
 
 d d 
 
 
 
 
 ctf eS 
 
 
 
 
 O o 
 
 
 
 
 N N 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 -o 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 ffl - 
 
 tí- 
 
 
 
 ; 3 
 
 os 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 15 
 
 
 S3 
 
 W 
 
 
 o w o 
 
 
 H 
 
 tí 
 
 W 
 
 s « s 
 
 
 tí 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 £ 
 
 | luzca 
 IVE.—i 
 
 | luzca 
 
 — 
 
 
 <1 
 
 
 £ 
 
 < 
 £ 
 
 w 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 c 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 g 
 
 ¡3 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 f-i 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 uzea, 
 
 SUB 
 uzea, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 C3 
 O 
 N 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 J2 
 
 << 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 e? a 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 o o 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 N N 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 
 J , 
 
 J J 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 C G C 
 
 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 d 
 
 eS cd cu 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 cu o fe 
 
 
 
 
 
 te 
 
 
 Ja? 
 
 >> >. >> 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 ■o 
 
 
 'o 
 
 O O O 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 ¡z¡ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 „? 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "ñ "m "t 
 
 
 tí 
 w 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 O O o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 
 
 
 eJ 
 
 
 
 y, 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¡ZJ 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 O O o 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 > 
 tí 
 
 o 
 | 
 
 tí. 
 '3 
 
 T 
 
 > 
 
 H 
 'o 
 
 PRFECT. 
 
 1 oyéram 
 1 oyésem 
 
 -FUTURE. 
 
 | oyérem 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 &H 
 
 
 £ &" 
 
 
 
 E-i 
 
 
 ü 
 
 
 a « 
 
 
 
 <1 
 ü 
 
 § 
 
 
 fe 
 
 ¡3 
 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 3 
 g 
 
 
 
 ¡3Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 feo O 
 
 
 
 o 
 >> 
 
 
 _tn 
 
 
 ü 
 
 >-. í>» >> 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 'o 
 
 
 'o 
 
 O O O 
 
 Sr^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 PÍ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 H 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 en 
 O 
 
 - 
 
 < 
 tí 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 te 
 
 yeras 
 
 yeses 
 
 yeres 
 
 c 
 
 tí 
 
 O 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 'o 
 
 o o o 
 
 •j3 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 d¡ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 tí.. 
 
 
 tío 
 
 yera, 
 
 yese, 
 
 yere, 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 Q 
 
 O O o 
 
OF THE VEEB. 
 
 107 
 
 s s 
 
 I 
 
 w 
 j> 
 
 H 
 «1 
 O 
 
 Q 
 
 
 O 
 
 T3 T3 
 O O 
 O, O, 
 
108 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 w 
 
 w | 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 = 
 
 
 ^3 
 
 Í 
 
 1 — 
 
 > 
 
 <=n 
 
 1 ?n 
 
 » £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 CO 
 
 a s 
 
 H re 
 
 H 
 
 fe 
 
 <i 
 
 > 
 
 ft, to 
 
 ¡> 
 
 H 
 
 ni 
 
 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 Ü 
 
 tí 
 
 ft 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 O 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 pq 
 La 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 O 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 cu 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 _Ü 
 
 w 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 02 
 
 
 
 
 
 q" 
 
 
 
 
 
 !í 
 
 
 
 
 
 Í3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w- 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 . o 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 E 
 
 w s 
 
 
 
 
 - tí 
 1 
 
 W — 
 
 w 
 
 Q _ 
 
 >5 
 §1 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 ü 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 Cm 
 
 
 
 *í 
 
 P3 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 o - 
 
 H 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 .!— < qj 
 
 \C 
 
 -2 
 
 
 
 "5 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 '*§ 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 O 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 71 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 ¡5 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 tH 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 O 
 
 < 
 
 tí 
 
 
 C 
 
 tí 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 •1 
 
 
 "I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -t-=> 
 
 
 
 
 
 nS 
 
 P4 
 
 
 
 
 fc/J 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 SJ3 
 
 
 o" 
 
 
 «£ 
 
 O 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 c 
 
 CM 
 
 
 XCL 
 
 
 m 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 109 
 
 
 
 
 
 d d 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 2 ro 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 .2 .2 
 
 
 _3 
 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 c c 
 
 
 .£ 
 
 
 
 "S 
 
 
 '53 '53 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w oT 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "re '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; 3 
 
 
 «5 ^o) 
 
 
 -3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c c 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 "53 
 
 
 '53 '53 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Z 
 
 
 
 O c 
 
 
 oT 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 § 
 
 
 re o 
 
 w 
 
 = 
 
 
 fe 
 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 
 
 | 
 
 c 
 
 
 .s .s 
 
 ¡3 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 fa 
 
 c 
 
 °"' 
 
 S3 
 fa 
 
 '53 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 r -¿ 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 fa 
 
 
 
 
 Eh 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pq 
 
 a 
 
 
 í Í 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 x 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c c 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *§ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 .£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 H 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 1 1 
 
 
 <D 
 
 ¡z¡ 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 c c 
 
 
 .s 
 
 7) 
 «4-4 
 
 
 21 
 
 
 '•?& 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 D3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 OC 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 F3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a o 
 
 
 iT 
 
 o 
 
 
 c* 
 
 
 .2 ¡S 
 
 
 t 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 .s s 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 d 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 
 
 
 
 (B .-. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .b 1 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 £ fe 
 
 "> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 00 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — — 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 
 
 
 
 .2 .2" 
 
 .2" 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 of 
 
 £ w 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ; ? 
 
 MU ^ 
 
 ^2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 l l 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 '53 
 
 
 '53 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ~~ 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 z 
 
 
 O o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ATIVE.— pre 
 
 CT-DEFINITE. 
 
 ERATIVE. 
 
 o 
 ¡ 
 
 "53 
 
 1 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 s 
 
 tí 
 
 > 
 'S3 
 
 s s 
 
 re o 
 
 u, '53 '53 
 
 tí 
 
 w 
 
 E 
 
 CD 
 
 fa — 
 
 
 
 
 
 DIG 
 
 ERFE 
 
 IMP 
 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 S 
 
 fa 
 
 
 
 5 * 
 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ci <a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s> 
 
 
 6 'H 
 
 fc 
 
 
 > 
 
 t t 
 
 'E 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *5 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <a 
 
 > 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a" 
 
 «2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 « I 
 
 £ 
 
 «4H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 = 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 > 
 
 C 
 
 53 
 
 
 > 
 
 '53 
 
 "E £ 
 
 'S 
 
 
 ■< 
 
 — — 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 
 ts 
 
 P4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tí 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 sT a 
 
 af 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 C3 
 
 
 
 (N 
 
 
 > 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 > > 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 
 GQ 
 
 w m 
 
 Kfl 
 
 10 
 
110 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Ü 
 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 G 
 
 
 i 
 
 c 
 2 
 
 
 i 
 
 05 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 ti 
 2 
 
 !s 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 es 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 2" 
 
 
 ■T 
 
 
 
 
 
 «f .2" off 
 
 
 BO- 
 
 
 
 
 
 *S 
 
 
 ; S 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 $$Ü 
 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *S 
 
 
 
 
 feo 
 
 S3 'a :s 
 
 
 *2 
 
 tí 
 
 H 
 O 
 
 fH 
 
 - 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 C 
 
 > 
 
 .S § .5 
 
 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 off °f bT 
 
 o © o 
 
 i i 1 
 
 v» ra «J 
 
 I § '.s 
 
 > i> > 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 
 W 
 Q 
 
 c 
 
 s 
 
 3 
 
 H 
 CU 
 
 O 
 
 g' 
 
 c 
 
 05 
 
 < 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 > 
 
 w 
 
 tí 
 
 K 
 
 O 
 S 
 es 
 
 bJD h 
 C O 
 °¿ H 
 •> fe 
 — tí 
 W 
 
 i 
 
 w 
 K 
 & 
 
 T 
 
 i 
 's 
 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 id 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 «1 
 O 
 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 tí 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 fe 
 
 
 fe 
 fe 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 g 
 
 
 fc 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pq 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 „ 
 
 
 
 
 vi 
 
 
 cT 
 
 % 
 
 ccT 
 
 cT v2 oT 
 
 
 £¡ 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 o" 
 
 
 
 
 te 
 
 
 bu 
 
 .2 "^ 2 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .S 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 O) 
 
 
 c 
 
 E £ 5 
 
 
 !s 
 
 O 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 ~i> 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 r* 
 
 '£ > > 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 'S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ►J. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 04 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 P5 
 
 
 aT 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 >T3 
 
 
 
 
 ca 
 
 
 
 
 «, 
 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 TJ 
 
 
 
 
 Sua 
 
 2 "P .2 
 
 
 .2 
 
 P, 
 
 
 
 'c 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 'c g "c 
 
 
 *c 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 t-i 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 '? 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 ► 
 
 > > '£ 
 
 
 '> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o"' 
 be 
 
 
 
 
 "SÍ 
 
 -5 
 
 
 bJO 
 
 
 £ 
 
 £4: s 
 
 .2 -o .2 
 
 
 í 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 g 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 g 
 
 c g c 
 
 
 "S i 
 
 
 
 O) 
 
 
 
 
 <u 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 ¡> 
 
 £ > > 
 
 
 f> 
 
OF THE VERB. Ill 
 
 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 212. Defective verbs are those which are not employed 
 in all the tenses or persons. 
 
 213. Soler, to be accustomed, is irregular, and seldom used except in 
 the following tenses : 
 
 Suelo, 
 Solía, 
 
 | sueles, 
 ( solías, 
 
 INDICATIVE.— PRESENT. 
 
 | suele, | solemos, | soléis, 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 1 solía, 1 solíamos, | solíais, 
 
 | suelen. 
 | solían. 
 
 214. Yacer, to lie, is not often used in any other persons than the 
 third persons singular and plural of the present indicative, chiefly at the 
 beginning of epitaphs. 
 
 INDICATIVE.— PRESENT. 
 
 Yags, | | yace, | | 
 
 215. Podrir, to rot, is seldom used except in the following tenses and 
 persons : 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 [ | | | podrid. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE.— IMPERFECT. 
 
 I podriría. | 
 
 (a.) When podrir is figuratively used in any other moods or tenses, 
 it is to be conjugated irregularly in the same tenses and persons as servir 
 (see 210), by changing o of the verb-root into u ; as, pudriendo, rotting. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 216. Impersonal verbs (or unipersonal verbs) are those 
 which are employed only in the third person singular, and 
 having no subject, take it or there with them in English ; 
 as, llueve, it rains ; tronará, it will thunder ; nieve, let it 
 snow ; hay, there is, or there are ; habrá, there will be. 
 
112 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 217. Llover, to rain, is thus conjugated impersonally. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE, Llovido. 
 
 gerund, Lloviendo. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 llueve, 
 
 it rains. 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 
 llovía, 
 
 it was raining. 
 
 PERFECT-DEFINITE, 
 
 llovió, 
 
 it rained. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE, 
 
 lloverá, 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 it will rain. 
 
 
 llueva, 
 
 let it rain. 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ¡ PRESENT, 
 
 llueva, 
 
 it may rain. 
 
 
 r lloviera, 
 <{ llovería, 
 
 ( would rain. 
 
 Í IMPERFECT, 
 
 it<! should rain. 
 1 might rain. . 
 
 
 < lloviese, 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE, 
 
 si lloviere, 
 
 if it slwuld rain. 
 
 (a.) All the impersonal verbs are conjugated like some of the verbs 
 whose conjugation has been already given : thus, Hover, it will be seen, is 
 irregular, and is conjugated like mover (see 1S6) in the third person singu- 
 lar of each tense. 
 
 218. Haber and hacer are often used as impersonal verbs, and are, in 
 such cases, to be rendered in English by the tenses of the verb to be; 
 as, hay, there is, or there are ; hace, it is. 
 
 (a.) Conjugation of haber, to be, as used impersonally. 
 
 PAST PARTICIPLE, 
 
 Habido. GERUND, 
 
 Habiendo, there being. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 hay, or, ha, 
 
 there is, or there are. 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 
 había, 
 
 there was, or there were. 
 
 PERFECT-DEFINITE, 
 
 hubo, 
 
 there was, or there were. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE, 
 
 habrá, 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 there will be. 
 
 
 haya, 
 
 let there be. 
 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE 
 
 
 i PRESENT, 
 
 haya, 
 
 there may be. 
 
 
 C hubiera, 
 
 r would be. 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 
 < habría, there^ should be. 
 
 
 1 hubiese, 
 
 1 might be. 
 
 ' FIRST-FUTURE, 
 
 si hubiere, 
 
 ■if there should be. 
 
 (b.) Hay, habia, and hubo are rendered in English sometimes in the 
 singular and sometimes in the plural, according as a singular or plural 
 
OF THE VERB. 113 
 
 noun follows ; thus,- hay una muger que tiene calentura, there is a woman 
 who has a fever ; hay mugeres que no la tienen, there are women who 
 have it not. 
 
 (c.) Hacer, when employed impersonally, is to be rendered in English 
 by the verb to he ; as, hace, it is ; hacía, it was ; hizo, it was ; hará, it will 
 be; haga, it may be, etc.; thus, hace frío, it is cold; hace mucho aire, 
 there is much wind; hace luna, there is a moon; hace buen tiempo, it is 
 good weather; hace diez meses que ella murió, it is ten months since she 
 died. 
 
 219. Placer, to please, is used impersonally in the following tenses only : 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 place, 
 
 it pleases. 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 PERFECT-INDEFINITE 
 
 placía, 
 plugo, 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 it teas pleasing, 
 it pleased. 
 
 PRESENT, 
 
 plegué, 
 
 it may please. 
 
 IMPERFECT, 
 
 c plugiera, 
 ( plugiese, 
 
 it would please, 
 it might please. 
 
 FIRST-FUTURE, 
 
 si plugiere, 
 
 if it should please. 
 
 (a.) The persons of placer in the subjunctive, are used only in these ex- 
 pressions — plegué, plugiere, or plugiese á Dios; may it, should it, or 
 might it please God; si me plugiere, if it should please me. 
 
 220. There are some verbs that can be used in all the persons of the 
 tenses, and also, at times, impersonally; as, es muy tarde, it is very late; 
 es preciso, it is necessary ; es menester, there is necessity ; parece, it 
 seems; conviene, it suits; basta, it is sufficient. 
 
 LIST OF IRREGULAR, DEFECTIVE, AND IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 221. The following list contains all the irregular verbs in the .Spanish 
 language. Each verb is to be conjugated in its irregular tenses like the 
 verb to which reference is made in the last column ; that is, each one is 
 irregular in the same tenses and persons, and in the same manner, as the 
 verb which is opposite to it. In the tenses and persons which are not ir- 
 regular, each verb is to be conjugated like the regular verb of the same 
 conjugation ; those ending in ar like amar (168, a), those in cr like co- 
 mer (168, b), and those in ir like vivir (168, c). The figures indicate the 
 number of the paragraph in which either the verb itself or a verb similar 
 in its irregularities is conjugated. The verbs marked § are impersonal, 
 and, of course, to be used only in the third person singular of each mood 
 and tense. 
 
 £l|p* Every verb not included in this list is regular and must be conju- 
 gated like the model-verbs amar, comer, or vivir, according as it ends in 
 ar, cr, or ir. 
 
 10* 
 
114 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 
 
 
 (o.) A. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 ' Amortecerse, 
 
 like 
 
 parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Acertar, 
 
 like tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Anochecer, 
 
 '•' 
 
 parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Acordar, 
 
 " contar , 
 
 178 
 
 Anteponer, 
 
 " 
 
 poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Acostar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Antever, 
 
 " 
 
 ver, 
 
 196 
 
 Acrecentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Aparecer, 
 
 " 
 
 parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Adestrar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Apetecer, 
 
 " 
 
 parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Agorar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Ascender, 
 
 " 
 
 tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Alentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Atender, 
 
 <( 
 
 tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Almorzar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Atenerse, 
 
 " 
 
 tener, 
 
 160 
 
 Amolar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Atraer, 
 
 « 
 
 traer, 
 
 194 
 
 Andar, 
 
 
 177 
 
 
 
 
 
 Apacentar, 
 
 ** tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 A. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Aporcar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Adherir, 
 
 like 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Aportar, 
 
 c< contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Adquerir, 
 
 " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Apostar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Adquirir, 
 
 " 
 
 
 197 
 
 Apretar, 
 
 u tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Advertir, 
 
 " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Aprobar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Apercibir, 
 
 " 
 
 servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Arrendar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Argüir, 
 
 " 
 
 incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Asentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Arrecirse, 
 
 " 
 
 servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Aserrar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Arrepentirse, 
 
 " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Asestar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Asentir, 
 
 " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Asolar, 
 
 '* contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Asir, 
 
 " 
 
 
 198 
 
 Asoldar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Aterirse, 
 
 " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Asonar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Atribuir, 
 
 " 
 
 incluir, 
 
 210 
 
 Atentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 481 
 
 Avenirse, 
 
 " 
 
 venir, 
 
 211 
 
 Aterrar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 B. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Atestar,* 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Bregar, 
 
 like 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Atravesar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 
 
 
 Atronar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 B. (Second Conjugation. 
 
 
 Aventar, 
 
 11 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Bermejecer 
 
 like 
 
 parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Avergonzarse, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 B. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 A. (Second Conjugation.] 
 
 
 Bendecir, 
 
 like 
 
 
 199 
 
 Abastecer, 
 
 like parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 C. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Aborrecer, 
 
 t£ parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Calentar, 
 
 like 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Absolver, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Cegar, 
 
 " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Abstraer, 
 
 u traer, 
 
 194 
 
 Cerrar, 
 
 " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Acaecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Cimentar, 
 
 " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Acontecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Colar, 
 
 if 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Adolecer, 
 
 u parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Colgar, 
 
 ." 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Adormecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 - 188 
 
 Comenzar, 
 
 t( 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Agradecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Comprobar, 
 
 " 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Amanecer, 
 
 u parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Concertar, 
 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 * When atestar means to Jill, to cram, it is irregular ; when to attest, it 
 is regular. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 115 
 
 Concordar, like contar, 178 
 
 Confesar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Consolar, " contar, 178 
 
 Consonar, " contar, 178 
 
 Constar,! " amar, 168, a 
 
 Contar, " 178 
 
 Costar, " contar, 178 
 
 C. (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 Caber, 
 
 Caer, ' 
 
 Canecer, ' 
 
 Carecer, ' 
 
 Cerner, " 
 
 Cocer, " 
 
 Compadecerse, ' 
 
 Comparecer, " 
 
 Complacer, " 
 
 Componer, ' 
 
 Condescender, ' 
 
 Condoler, " 
 
 Conmover, ' 
 
 Conocer, " 
 
 Contender, " 
 
 Contener, " 
 
 Contraer, " 
 
 Contrahacer, " 
 
 Convalecer, ' 
 
 Crecer, " 
 
 like 
 
 parecer, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 tender, 
 
 mover, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 poner, 
 
 tender, 
 
 mover, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 tender, 
 
 tener, 
 
 traer, 
 
 hacer, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 parecer, 
 
 C. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 Contribuir, like incluir, 203 
 
 Controvertir, " sentir, 209 
 
 Corregir, " servir, 210 
 
 D. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 Ceñir, 
 
 Colegir, 
 
 Comedirse, 
 
 Competir, 
 
 Concebir, 
 
 Concernir,! 
 
 Concluir, 
 
 Conducir, 
 
 Conferir, 
 
 Conseguir, 
 
 Consentir, 
 
 Constituir, 
 
 Constreñir, 
 
 Construir, 
 
 Contradecir, 
 
 Contravenir, 
 
 like servir, 
 servir 
 
 servir, 
 
 vivir, 
 
 incluir, 
 
 producir, 
 
 sentir, 
 
 servir, 
 
 sentir, 
 
 incluir, 
 
 servir, 
 
 incluir, 
 
 decir, 
 
 venir, 
 
 210 
 210 
 210 
 210 
 210 
 
 168, c 
 203 
 207 
 209 
 210 
 209 
 203 
 210 
 203 
 
 200, a 
 211 
 
 Dar, h 
 
 Decentar, 
 
 Decimentar, 
 
 Degollar, 
 
 Demostrar, 
 
 Denegar, 
 
 Denostar, 
 
 Derrengar, 
 
 Desacertar, 
 
 Desacordar, 
 
 Desalentar, 
 
 Desapretar, 
 
 Desaprobar, 
 
 Desasosegar, 
 
 Desatentar, 
 
 Descolgar, 
 
 Descollar, 
 
 Desconcertar, 
 
 Desconsolar, 
 
 Descontar, 
 
 Desempedrar, 
 
 Desencerrar, 
 
 Desengrosar, 
 j Desenterrar, 
 I Desflocar, 
 i Desforgarse, 
 
 Deshelar, 
 
 Desherrar, 
 
 Desmembrar, 
 i Desolar, 
 ¡ Desollar, 
 ,' Desovar, 
 i Despedrar, 
 j Despernar, 
 i Despertar, 
 j Desplegar, 
 
 Despoblar, 
 
 Desterrar, 
 
 Destrocar, 
 
 Desvergonzarse, 
 i Dezmar, 
 
 i&e 
 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 tentar, 
 cantar, 
 tentar, 
 contar, 
 contar, 
 tentar, 
 
116 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 D. (Second Conjugation 
 
 ) 
 
 j Desmentir, 
 
 like sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Decaer, 
 
 like caer, 
 
 184 
 
 Despedir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Defender, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Desteñir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Demoler, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Destruir, 
 
 " incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Deponer, 
 
 " poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Diferir, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Desabastecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Digerir, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Desadormecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 ' 188 
 
 Disminuir, 
 
 " incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Desaparecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 7188 
 
 Distribuir, 
 
 " incluir, 
 
 2Ü3 
 
 Desatender, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Diverter, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Desatraer, 
 
 " traer, 
 
 194 
 
 Dormir, 
 
 " 
 
 201 
 
 Descaecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 E. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Descender, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Emendar, 
 
 like tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Descomponer, 
 
 " poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Empedrar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desconocer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Empezar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desentenderse, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Emporcar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Desentorpecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Encensar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desenvolver, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Encerrar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desfallecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Encomendar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desflaquecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Encontrar, 
 
 t: contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Desguarnecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Encordar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 173 
 
 Deshacer, 
 
 " hacer, 
 
 185 
 
 Encubertar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desobedecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Engrosar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Desplacer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Enrodar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Destorcer, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Ensangrentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Desvanecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Enterrar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Detener, 
 
 " íe??.er, 
 
 160 
 
 Errar, 
 
 « 
 
 182 
 
 Detraer, 
 
 " ¿raer, 
 
 194 
 
 Escalentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Devolver, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Escarchar,! 
 
 " amar, 168, a 
 
 Disolver, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Escarmentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Disponer, 
 
 " poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Esforzarse, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Distraer, 
 
 " ¿raer, 
 
 194 
 
 Espresar, 
 
 1 ' tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Doler, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Estar, 
 
 « 
 
 159 
 
 D. (Third 
 
 Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Estercolar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Decir, 
 
 ííAe 
 
 200 
 
 Estregar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Deducir, 
 
 " producir, 
 
 207 
 
 E. (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Deferir, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Embebecerse, 
 
 like parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Derretir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Embravecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Desavenir, 
 
 " venir, 
 
 211 
 
 Embrutecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Desceñir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Emplumecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Descomedirse, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 i 
 
 Empobrecer, . 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Desconsentir, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 i 
 
 Encabellecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Desdecirse, 
 
 " cZecir, 200, a 
 
 Encalvecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Deservir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 ! 
 
 Encallecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Desleír, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Encanecer, 
 
 !! parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Deslucir, 
 
 " Zt/cir, 
 
 205 | 
 
 Encarecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 138 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 117 
 
 Encender, 
 
 like tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Entrelucir, ¿¿fce Zucir, 
 
 205 
 
 Encrudecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 138 
 
 Entreoír, " oír, 
 
 206 
 
 Encruelecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Envestir, " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Endentecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 1SS 
 
 Erguir, " 
 
 202 
 
 Endurecer, 
 
 '" parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Estreñir, " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Enflaquecer, 
 
 <! parecer, 
 
 18S 
 
 Escluir, " incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Enfurecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Espedir, " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Engrandecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 . F. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Enloquecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 
 
 Enmocecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Forzar, Z££<s contar, 
 
 173 
 
 Enmohecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 1S8 
 
 Fregar, " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Enmudecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Frezar, " tentar, 
 
 131 
 
 Ennegrecer, 
 
 ' ' parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 F. (Second Conjugation. ^ 
 
 
 Ennoblecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Fallecer, like parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Enrarecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Favorecer, " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Enriquecer, 
 
 ÍS parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Fenecer, " parecer, 
 
 133 
 
 Ensoberbecerse," parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Fortalecer, " parecer, 
 
 1S8 
 
 Entallecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 
 
 Entender, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 F. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Enternecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 138 
 
 Fluir, like incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Entomecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 1S8 
 
 Freir, " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Entontecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 G. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Entorpecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 1S3 
 
 Gobernar, like tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Entretener, 
 
 " tener, 
 
 160 
 
 Granizar,! " amar, 168, a 
 
 Entristecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 
 
 Entullecer, 
 
 11 parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 G. (Second Conjugation/ 
 
 
 Entumecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Guarnecer, like parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Envejecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 G. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Enverdecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Gemir, like servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Envolver, 
 Equivaler, 
 Escarnecer, 
 Esclarecer, 
 
 " morer, 
 " roZer, 
 " parecer, 
 " parecer, 
 
 186 
 195 
 
 183 
 188 
 
 H. (First Conjugation.) 
 Helar, like tentar, 
 Herrar, " tentar, 
 Holgar, " contar, 
 
 131 
 181 
 
 178 
 
 Escocer, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Hollar, " contar, 
 
 173 
 
 Espavorecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 
 
 Esponer, 
 
 " poner, 
 
 190 
 
 H. (Second Conjugation. 
 
 ) 
 
 Establecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Haber, like 
 
 156 
 
 Estender, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Hacer, " 
 
 185 
 
 Estraer, 
 
 " ¿raer, 
 
 194 
 
 Heder, " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Estremecerse, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Hender, " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 E. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Humedecer, " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Elegir, 
 
 like servir, 
 
 210 
 
 H. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Embestir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Herir, ike sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Engreírse, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Hervir, " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Enlucir, 
 
 " lucir, 
 
 205 
 
 Huir, " incluir, 
 
 203 
 
118 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 I. (First Conjugation.) 
 Importar,§ like amar, 168, a 
 
 Infernar, 
 Insertar, 
 Invernar, 
 
 tentar, 181 
 
 tentar, 181 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 I. (Second Conjugation.) 
 Imponer, like poner, 
 
 Indisponer, " poner, 
 
 I. (Third Conjugation.) 
 Imbuir, like incluir, 
 
 Impedir, 
 
 In advertir, 
 
 Incluir, 
 
 Inducir, 
 
 Inferir, 
 
 Ingerir, 
 
 Instituir, 
 
 Instruir, 
 
 Intervenir, 
 
 Introducir, 
 
 Invertir, 
 
 Investir, 
 
 Ir, 
 
 servir, 
 sentir, 
 
 producir, 
 
 sentir, 
 
 sentir, 
 
 incluir, 
 
 incluir, 
 
 venir, 
 
 producir, 
 
 sentir, 
 
 sentir, 
 
 J. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 Jugar, 130 
 
 L. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 Lucir, like lucir, 205 
 
 Luir, " incluir, 203 
 
 LL. (First Conjugation.) 
 Lloviznar,§ like amar, 168, a 
 
 LL. (Second Conjugation.) 
 Llover,§ 217 
 
 M. (First Conjugation.) 
 Manifestar, like tentar, 181 
 
 Mentar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Merendar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Mostrar, " contar, 178 
 
 M. (Second Conjugation.) 
 Magrecer, like parecer, 
 
 Mantener, 
 
 160 
 
 Mecer, like parecer, 
 
 Merecer, " parecer, 
 
 Mohecerse, " parecer, 
 
 Moler. " mover, 
 
 Mollecer, " parecer, 
 
 Morder, " mover, 
 
 Mover, " 
 
 M. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 Maldecir, like bendecir, 199 
 
 Medir, " servir, 210 
 
 Mentir, " sentir, 209 
 
 Morir, " dormir, 201 
 
 Muir, " incluir, 203 
 
 N. (First Conjugation,) 
 Negar, like tentar, 181 
 
 Nevar,§ " tentar, 181 
 
 N. (Second Conjugation.) 
 Nacer, like parecer, 188 
 
 Negrecer, " parecer, 188 
 
 O. (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 Obedecer, like parecer, 188 
 
 Obscurecer, " parecer, 188 
 
 Obtener, " tener, 160 
 
 Ofrecer, " parecer, 188 
 
 Oler, " 187 
 
 Oponer, " poner, 190 
 
 O. (Third Conjugation.) 
 Obstruir, like incluir, 203 
 
 Oir, " 206 
 
 P. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 Pensar, like tentar, 181 
 
 Perniquebrar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Plegar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Poblar, '' contar, 178 
 
 Probar, " contar, 178 
 
 P. (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 Pacer, like parecer, 188 
 
 Padecer, " parecer, 188 
 
 Parecer, " 188 
 
 Perder, " tender, 193 
 
 Perecer, " parecer, 188 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 119 
 
 Pertenecer, like 
 
 parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Resollar, 
 
 like contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Placer, " 
 
 
 219 
 
 Resonar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Poder, " 
 
 
 189 
 
 , Retemblar, 
 
 11 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Poner, " 
 
 
 190 
 
 i Retentar, 
 
 " tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Preponer, " 
 
 poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Reventar, 
 
 '• tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Presuponer, " 
 
 poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Revolar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Prevalecer, " 
 
 parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Revolcarse, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Prever, " 
 
 ver, 
 
 196 
 
 Rodar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Promover, " 
 
 mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Rogar, 
 
 " contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Proponer, " 
 
 poner, 
 
 190 
 
 R. (Second Conjugation. 
 
 ) 
 
 P. (Third Conjugation. 
 
 ) 
 
 Recaer, 
 
 like caer, 
 
 184 
 
 Pedir, like 
 
 servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Recocer, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Perseguir, " 
 
 servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Reconocer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Pervertir, M 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Reconvalecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Podrir, " 
 
 
 215 
 
 Recrecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Predecir, " 
 
 decir, 
 
 200, a 
 
 Reflorecer, 
 
 K parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Preferir, " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Rehacer, 
 
 '" hacer, 
 
 185 
 
 Presentir, " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Remanecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 1S8 
 
 Prevenir, " 
 
 reñir, 
 
 211 
 
 Remecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 1S8 
 
 Producir, " 
 
 
 207 
 
 Remorder, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Proferir, " 
 
 sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Remover, 
 
 11 mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Proseguir, " 
 
 sei~vir, 
 
 210 
 
 Renacer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 Prostituir, " 
 
 incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Reponer, 
 
 " poner, 
 
 190 
 
 Provenir, ' 
 
 venir, 
 
 211 
 
 Resolver, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Q,. (First Conjugation. 
 
 ) 
 
 Restablecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 188 
 
 
 
 
 Retener, 
 
 " tener, 
 
 160 
 
 Quebrar, like 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Retorcer, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Q,. (Second Conjugation 
 
 •) 
 
 Retraer, 
 
 " traer, 
 
 194 
 
 Querer, 
 
 
 191 
 
 Retrotraer, 
 
 " traer, 
 
 194 
 
 
 
 
 Rever, 
 
 " ver, 
 
 196 
 
 R. (First Conjugation. 
 
 ) 
 
 Reverdecer, 
 
 " parecer, 
 
 183 
 
 Recomendar, like 
 
 tentar, 
 
 1S1 
 
 Reverter, 
 
 " tender, 
 
 M3 
 
 Recordar, " 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Revolver, 
 
 " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Recostar, " 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 
 
 
 Reforzar, " 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 R. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Regar, " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Recluir, 
 
 like incluir, 
 
 203 
 
 Regoldar, " 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Reducir, 
 
 " producir, 
 
 207 
 
 Relampaguear! " 
 
 amar, 
 
 168, a 
 
 Referir, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
 Remendar, " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Regir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Renegar, (( 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Reir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Renovar, " 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Relucir, 
 
 " lucir, 
 
 205 
 
 Replegar, " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Rendir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Reprobar, ct 
 
 contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Reñir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Requebrar, " 
 
 tentar, 
 
 181 
 
 Repetir, 
 
 " servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Rescontrar, " 
 
 contar, 
 
 179 
 
 Requerir, 
 
 " sentir, 
 
 209 
 
120 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Resentirse, like sentir, 209 
 
 Restituir, " incluir, 203 
 
 Reteñir, " servir, 210 
 
 Retribuir, í{ incluir, 203 
 
 Revenir, " venir, 211 
 
 Revestir, " servir, 210 
 
 S. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 Segar, like tentar, 181 
 
 Sembrar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Sentarse, " tentar, 181 
 
 Serrar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Solar, " contar, 178 
 
 Soldar, " contar, 178 
 
 Soltar, " contar, 178 
 
 Sonar, " contar, 178 
 
 Soñar, " contar, 178 
 
 Sosegarse, " tentar, 181 
 
 Soterrar. " tentar, 181 
 
 S, (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 Saber, Z¿té 192 
 
 Satisfacer, " hacer, 185, a 
 
 Ser, « 153 
 
 Sobreponer, " poner, 190 
 
 Soler, « 213 
 
 Solver, " mover, 186 
 
 Sostener, " tener, 160 
 
 Sustraer, " traer, 194 
 
 Suponer, " poner, 190 
 
 S. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 Salir, like 203 
 
 Seducir, " producir, 207 
 
 Seguir, " servir, 210 
 
 Sentir, " 209 
 
 Servir, " 210 
 
 Sobresalir, " salir, 203 
 
 Sobrevenir, " venir, 211 
 
 Sonreírse, " servir, 210 
 
 Sustituir, " incluir, 203 
 
 Sugerir, " sentir, 209 
 
 T. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 Temblar, like tentar, 181 
 
 Tentar, " 181 
 
 Tostar, " contar, 178 
 
 ! Trascolar, " contar, 178 
 
 j Trascordarse, " contar, 178 
 
 Trasegar, " tentar, 181 
 
 Trasoñar, " contar, 178 
 
 I Trocar. " contar, 178 
 
 Tronar, " contar, 178 
 
 Tropezar, " tentar, 181 
 
 T. (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 Tender, like 
 
 193 
 
 Tener, " 
 
 160 
 
 Torcer, " mover, 
 
 186 
 
 Traer, " 
 
 194 
 
 Trascender, " tender, 
 
 193 
 
 Trasponer, " poner, 
 
 190 
 
 T. (Third Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Teñir, lilce servir, 
 
 210 
 
 Traducir, " producir, 
 
 207 
 
 V. (First Conjugation.) 
 
 
 Volar, like contar, 
 
 178 
 
 Volcar, " contar, 
 
 173 
 
 V. (Second Conjugation.) 
 
 Valer, like 195 
 
 Ver, " 196 
 
 Verter, " tender, 193 
 
 Volver, " mover, 186 
 
 V. (Third Conjugation.) 
 Venir, like 211 
 
 Vestir, " servir, 21 G 
 
 Y. (Second Conjugation.) 
 Yacer, 214 
 
 Z. (Third Conjugation.) 
 Zaherir, like sentir, 209 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 121 
 
 LIST OF VERBS WITH IRREGULAR PAST-PAETICIPLES. 
 
 222. Some verbs of those in the preceding list of irregular verbs, and 
 some which are otherwise regular, have the past participle irregularly- 
 formed. The following list contains all these verbs with the irregular 
 participle. Those marked R have also their past participle regularly- 
 formed. Thus ingerir, has both ingerto and ingerido. 
 
 (a.) 
 
 Abrir, 
 
 abierto. 
 
 Ingerir, R 
 
 ingerto. 
 
 Absolver, 
 
 absuelto. 
 
 Morir, 
 
 muerto. 
 
 Anteponer, 
 
 antepuesto. 
 
 Oprimir, R 
 
 apreso. 
 
 Antever, 
 
 antevisto. 
 
 Poner, 
 
 puesto. 
 
 Componer, 
 
 compuest-o. 
 
 Predecir, 
 
 predicho. 
 
 Contradecir, 
 
 contradicho. 
 
 Prender, R 
 
 preso. 
 
 Contrahacer, 
 
 contrahecho. 
 
 Preponer, 
 
 prepuesto. 
 
 Cubrir, 
 
 cubierto. 
 
 Presuponer 
 
 presupuesti 
 
 Decir, 
 
 dicho. 
 
 Prever, 
 
 previsto. 
 
 Deponer, 
 
 depuesto. 
 
 Proponer, 
 
 propuesto. 
 
 Descomponer. 
 
 descompuesto. 
 
 Proscribir, 
 
 proscrito. 
 
 Descubrir, 
 
 descubierto. 
 
 Proveer, R. 
 
 provisto. 
 
 Desdecirse, 
 
 desdicho. 
 
 Rehacer, 
 
 rehecho. 
 
 Desenvolver, 
 
 desenvuelto. 
 
 Reponer, 
 
 repuesta 
 
 Deshacer, 
 
 desliedlo. 
 
 Resolver, 
 
 resuelto. 
 
 Disolver, 
 
 disuelto. 
 
 Rever, 
 
 revisto. 
 
 Disponer, 
 
 dispuesto. 
 
 Revolver, 
 
 revuelto. 
 
 Elegir, 
 
 eligido. 
 
 Romper, R. 
 
 roto. 
 
 Encubrir, 
 
 encubierto. 
 
 Satisfacer, 
 
 satisfecho. 
 
 Envolver, 
 
 envuelto. 
 
 Sobreponer, 
 
 sobrepuesto. 
 
 Escribir, 
 
 escrito. 
 
 Suponer, 
 
 supuesto. 
 
 Esponer, 
 
 espuesto. 
 
 Suprimir, R. 
 
 supreso. 
 
 Hacer, 
 
 hecho. 
 
 Trasponer, 
 
 traspuesto. 
 
 Imponer, 
 
 impuesto. 
 
 Ver, 
 
 visto. 
 
 Imprimer, 
 
 impreso. 
 
 Volver, 
 
 vuelto. 
 
 Indisponer, 
 
 indispuesto. 
 
 
 
 223. Some participles are used sometimes as verbal adjectives ; thus 
 mirado means, as a participle, beheld, and as an adjective, considerate ; 
 Icido means, as a participle, read, and as an adjective, book-learned; 
 partido means divided, and liberal ; sabido means known, and well-inform- 
 ed. In all such cases, the learner will find the word in his Spanish dic- 
 tionary, defined as an adjective. He will be able, from the sense of the 
 context, to determine whether to employ it as a participle or adjective, 
 just as in English he would know which is the adjective and which the 
 participle in the sentences " a known event," and " a person whom he 
 has known." 
 
 11 
 
122 OF THE ADVERB THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 224. Some changes have taken place in the verb-ending of the second 
 person plural in all the tenses and conjugations. This anciently had its 
 termination in des ; as, amades, amábades, amástedes, amarcdes, amides, 
 etc., for amáis, amabais, amasteis, amaréis, améis. 
 
 (a.) Soy, doy, voy, sois, caigo, oigo, valgo, cupo, hubo, puso, etc., were 
 formerly so, do, vo, sudes, cayo, oyó, valo, copo, ovo, poso. 
 
 (b.) With all modern Spanish writers the guttural x is changed into 
 j ; as, dijo, dijeron, dijera, produjo, produjeron, instead of dixo, dixeron, 
 dixera, produxo, produxeron. The pronunciation is the same in both 
 cases. 
 
 §3^" More specific rules concerning the verb will be found in Part III. 
 
 OF THE ADVEKB. 
 
 225. Adverbs are either primitive or derivative: the 
 primitive "being those which are simple or uncompounded 
 of any other word, such as no, not ; ya, already ; hoy, to- 
 day ; allá, yonder ; and the derivative, those that are form- 
 ed from .other words (chiefly adjectives, participles, or other 
 adverbs) by the addition of mente ; as, brevemente, confusa- 
 mente, ciertamente. 
 
 (a.) The Spanish language, like the English, contains numerous 
 terms composed of more than one word, and used adverbially, hence 
 called adverbial phrases ; as, por cierto, for certain ; por lo común, in 
 general ; de un modo, in such manner. 
 
 ^^* A list of some of the different classes of adverbs will be found 
 in Part III. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 226. Conjunctions are simple ; as, y, and ; 6, or ; que, 
 that ; si, if • ni, nor ; porque, because ; como, as ; mas, but ; 
 pero, but : or conjunctive phrases ; as, con tal de que, provided 
 that ; pues que, since ; para que, in order that ; áfin de que, 
 to the end that. 
 
 (a.) The conjunction y is changed into c when it comes before a word 
 beginning with i or hi; as, las lenguas Española é Inglesa, the Spanish 
 and English languages : madre é hija, mother and daughter. 
 
OF THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 123 
 
 (6.) The conjunction 6 is changed into ú when it comes before a word 
 beginning with o ; as. lacre ú oblea, sealing-wax or wafer. 
 
 E5F" See tne different kinds of conjunctions, in Part III. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 227. Prepositions are simple ; as, con, with ; de, of ; and 
 compound; as. á pesar de, in spite of; cosa de, about, the 
 matter of ; para con, as to ; por entre, through. 
 
 (a.) The following list comprehends the principal simple prepositions 
 in Spanish : 
 
 A', to, at, for. 
 
 Ante, in presence of, before. 
 A'ntes, before, before/iand of. 
 Con, with. 
 
 Contra, against, opposite to. 
 De, off rom- 
 Desde, from. 
 Detrás, behind. 
 En, in, into, on. 
 
 Entre, between, among. 
 
 Hacia, towards. 
 
 Hasta, unto, till. 
 
 Para, for. 
 
 Por, by, through, for. 
 
 Segun, according to. 
 
 Sin, without. 
 
 Sobre, upon, over. 
 
 Tras, behind. 
 
 (b.) Prepositions do not always correspond in Spanish and in Eng- 
 ish ; that is, de is not always to be translated of, or á by to, etc. ; as, 
 
 Los valles abundan de trigo, 
 Ella pide perdón á Dios, 
 
 I The valleys abound with wheat. 
 I She asks pardon/rom. God. 
 
 OF THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 228. The interjections are simple and compound ; as, ah ! 
 oh ; ; chito ! hush ; and / pobre de mi madre ! O my poor 
 mother ! 
 
 (a.) The following list comprehends the principal simple interjec- 
 tions : 
 
 Ah, ah ! 
 
 Fu, pshaw ! fie! tush! 
 
 Ay, ah! alas! 
 
 Ha, ah! oh! 
 
 Ce, here! go on! 
 
 He, eh! hist! hark! 
 
 Chito, > _ , 
 
 Chiton, \ hush!ínleru;e! 
 
 Hola, halloo, ho there ! 
 O, oh! ho! 
 
 Ea, hah ! go on ! good ! 
 
 Ta, } 7 
 
 Tate Í ta ^ e care ' siop "' 
 
 Ete, see ! behold ! lo ! 
 
part ni. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY AND SYNTAX MORE FULLY EXPLAINED. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 229. The articles are not always employed in Spanish in 
 the same manner as they are in English. The following 
 rules will illustrate this observation. 
 
 USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 230. The definite article is to be used before all common 
 nouns taken in a general sense, and in the whole extent of 
 their signification ; as, 
 
 El Cdio levanta rencillas. 
 La caridad es paciente. 
 Los hombres son mortales. 
 
 Hatred excites strifes. 
 Charity is patient. 
 Men are mortal. 
 
 £2^** Here odio, caridad, and hombres are taken in a general sense, 
 meaning all hatred, all charity, all men. 
 
 (a.) If the noun be not taken in a general sense, that is, if the whole 
 of it be not meant, the article is not used ; as, 
 
 Hace buen tiempo. I It-is good weather. 
 
 Tiene envidia. I He-has envy. 
 
 §3P Here tiempo and envidia are designed to express only some portion 
 of weather and envy, meaning some good weather, some envy. (See 254.) 
 
 231. The definite article is used before proper names 
 of countries, states, and days of the week ; as, 
 
 La Francia es un hermoso pais. I France is a beautiful country. 
 Juan volverá el Martes. I John will-return Tuesday. 
 
 (a.) If the name of the country, state, or region be preceded by a pre- 
 position, or take its name from its capital city, the article is generally 
 omitted; as, 
 
 Venecia daba leyes á los monarcas I Venice gave laws to the monarchs 
 de Europa. I of Europe. 
 
El sei3 de Enero. 
 A' las tres de la tarde. 
 
 GF THE ARTICLE. 125 
 
 232. The definite article is to be used before numerals 
 indicating the day of the month or the hour of the 
 day; as, 
 
 The sixth (six) of January. 
 At three o'clock in (of) the after- 
 noon. 
 
 233. The definite article is used before nouns indicating 
 the rank, office, profession, or titles of persons when they 
 are spoken of (but not when they are addressed) ; as, 
 
 El General Taylor es valiente. I General Taylor is brave. 
 
 El Señor De Forest tiene dos hijas. Mr. De Forest has two daughters. 
 
 ha Señora Tranor no es prudente. I Mrs. Tranor is not prudent. 
 
 234. The definite article (and not the indefinite, as in 
 English) is used before nouns signifying a certain weight, 
 measure, size, quantity or number, when preceded by the 
 price ; as, 
 
 A tres duros la libra. 
 A dos pesos la vara. 
 A razón de diez duros el mes. 
 
 A siete pesos el tomo. 
 A tres reales la pieza. 
 A cuatro pesos el par. 
 
 At three dollars a (the) pound. 
 
 At two dollars a (the) yard. 
 
 At (the) rate of ten dollars a (the) 
 
 month. 
 At seven dollars a (the) volume. 
 At three reals a (the) piece. 
 At four dollars a (the) pair. 
 
 (a.) Instead of the definite article, the preposition por may be used 
 after the price ; thus we can say, á tres duros la libra, "at three dollars 
 the yard," or á tres duros por libra, " at three dollars per yard." 
 
 OMISSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 235. The definite article is omitted sometimes in Spanish 
 where it would not be omitted in English, as in the follow- 
 ing cases. 
 
 236., The definite article is not used before a noun which 
 denotes relationship or kindred of another noun, when a 
 verb comes between them ; as, 
 
 María es hermana de Juana. I Mary is the sister of Jane. 
 
 Pablo es hijo del juez. I Paul is the son of-the judge. 
 
 11* 
 
126 OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 237, The definite article is not used before nouns in 
 apposition ; as, 
 
 Pablo, apóstol de los Gentiles. 1 Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles. 
 
 Ellos pecaron al Señor, esperanza They sinned against-the Lord, the 
 de sus padres. | hope of their fathers. 
 
 (a.) Sometimes the article is used before nouns in apposition, when 
 employed in a definite or determinative sense ; as, 
 
 En tiempo de Herodes el rey. 
 
 El autor del " Espíritu de las 
 
 Leyes," el célebre Montesquieu, 
 
 dice. 
 
 In time of Herod the king. 
 
 The author of the " Spirit of 
 Laws," the celebrated Montes- 
 quieu, says." 
 
 238. The definite article is not used before numerical 
 adjectives when they denote order or succession ; as, 
 
 Tomo segundo, página sexto. I Volume the second, page the sixth. 
 
 Enrique octavo. | Henry the Eighth. 
 
 (a.) The cardinal numbers (and not the ordinal) are generally used 
 when the number expressing the order or succession exceeds nine ; thus, 
 Carlos doce, "Charles the Tenth" (literally "Charles Ten"), and not 
 Carlos duodécimo ; tomo trece, " volume thirteen," and not tomo décimo- 
 tercio, "volume thirteenth." 
 
 239. The titles of books, essays, chapters or extracts, 
 and the names of periodicals, do not generally take the 
 definite article before them (except when spoken of) ; as, 
 Historia de España. 1 The History of Spain. 
 
 Gaceta de Londres. | The London Gazette. 
 
 240. The definite article is not used before the word casa (house) when 
 it means home, nor before nouns or adjectives employed adverbially ; as, 
 Está en casa. I He is at home (or in the house). 
 
 En verdad. En oculto. | Truly. Secretly. 
 
 OMISSION OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 241. The indefinite article is omitted in some cases in 
 Spanish in which it would not be in English, as in the fol- 
 lowing cases. 
 
 242. When some portion of a thing only is meant, and 
 when the adverb no is used in the sense of " not a " (that 
 is, - not any" or " no "), the indefinite article is not gener- 
 ally used ; as, 
 
OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 127 
 
 Tiene calentura. 
 Ella tiene idea de comer. 
 Juan hace ruido. 
 El es de genio benigno. 
 Ella no tiene marido. 
 Jorge no tiene flauto. 
 No tenemos cochero. 
 No tengo piano. 
 
 He has a fever. 
 
 She has an idea of eating (to eat). 
 
 John makes a noise. 
 
 He is of a benign disposition. 
 
 She has not a husband. 
 
 George has not a flute. 
 
 We-have not a coachman. 
 
 I-have not a (no) piano. 
 
 ¡¡^¡f 1° these cases is meant some fever, some idea, some noise, and 
 someportion of a benign disposition 1 ; and the article is not used in Span- 
 ish. 
 
 243. The indefinite article is not used before two nouns, 
 one of which, being connected by a verb to the other, 
 shows the nation, relationship, rank, office, profession or 
 vocation of the latter ; as, 
 
 Juan es Frances. 
 Señor Kent es juez. 
 Carlos es impresor. 
 Halló en él padre y madre. 
 
 John is a Frenchman. 
 Mr. Kent is a judge. 
 Charles is a printer. 
 He-found in him a father and a 
 mother. 
 
 244. The indefinite article is not used before a noun in 
 apposition with another ; as, 
 
 Esteban, hombre lleno de fé. | Stephen, a man full of faith. 
 
 245. The indefinite article is not used in the title of a 
 book, chapter, or essay ; as, 
 
 Colección de los mejores Autores I A Selection of the best Spanish 
 Españoles. I Authors. 
 
 24G. The indefinite article is not used before a noun in 
 an ejaculatory phrase ; as, 
 j Q,ue idea ! ¡ Q,ue desgracia ! | What an idea ! What a misfortune ! 
 
 247. The indefinite article is not used between an ad- 
 jective and its noun ; as, 
 
 Half a dollar. 
 
 Medio peso. 
 Tan hermosa hija. 
 En tal tiempo. 
 
 So beautiful a daughter. 
 In such a time. 
 
 248. The indefinite article is not used before the words medio, a half; 
 cien or ciento, a hundred ; and mil, a thousand ; as, 
 
OF THE ARTICLE. 128 
 
 Three years and a half. 
 A hundred men. 
 A day and a half. 
 
 Tres años y medio. 
 Cien hombres. 
 Dia y medio. 
 
 249. The indefinite article is not used after algo, something, or nada, 
 nothing, followed by the preposition de; as, 
 
 Pedro tiene algo de poeta. j Peter is something of a poet. 
 
 OTHER USES AND OMTSSIONS OF ARTICLES. 
 
 250. The indefinite article can be used before (but not after) tal, 
 " such ;" as, 
 
 Tenemos un tal Pontífice. | We-have a such High-Priest. 
 
 251. The infinitive mood, being used in Spanish as a noun or with a 
 preposition before it, In the same manner that the present participle is in 
 English, can take the masculine definite article before it ; as, 
 
 El murmurar de las fuentes. I The murmuring of the fountains. 
 
 Al ver el árbol. I On seeing thé tree. 
 
 252. The definite article is used before the adverbs mas, "more," 
 and menos, " less," to express the superlative degree of comparison 
 (see 109) ; as, 
 
 María es la mas hermosa de las I Mary is the most beautiful of the 
 mugeres. I women. 
 
 253. The article is generally to be repeated before nouns which imme- 
 diately follow each other, especially if they do not agree in gender ; as, 
 
 La prudencia y el valor del rey. j The prudence and the valor of-the 
 I king, 
 (a.) The learner will find many exceptions to the above rule in the 
 best Spanish writers. The article must always be repeated in such 
 cases w r hen each noun is designed to be emphatic. When the word 
 todo, " all," sums up the several nouns, the article is not generally used 
 before any of the nouns ; as, Españoles, Franceses, Ingleses, y America- 
 nos., todos son mortales, " Spaniards, Frenchmen, Englishmen, and 
 Americans, all are mortal." 
 
 254. The article is omitted in Spanish, as in English, before nouns 
 taken in a partitive sense ; as, 
 
 El carpintero tiene dinero. | The carpenter has money. 
 
 (a.) In the above example, it is meant that " the carpenter has a -por- 
 tion of money," or some money. When the word some is to be expressed, 
 alguno in the singular, and algunos or unos in the plural, is used; as, 
 algun idea, "some idea;" alguna caverna, "some cavern;" algunos 
 libros, " some books ;" unas señoras, " some ladies." 
 
OF THE NOUN. 129 
 
 (b.) Before a singular noun, denoting something to eat or drink, the 
 word some is expressed in Spanish by un poco de, " a little of;" as, déme 
 un poco de leche, " give me some milk." 
 
 (c.) When in English some or any is used before a singular noun in an 
 interrogative or negative sentence, in Spanish it is usually omitted, 
 especially before nouns meaning something to eat or drink ; as, ¿ toma 
 vmd. azúcar? "do you take any sugar 1 ¿tiene vmd. tazas! "have you 
 any cups ?" ¿ tiene vmd. algunos platillos ? " have you any saucers ?" no 
 tengo Jlauta, "I-havenot any flute;" no tiene hacha, "he-has not any 
 axe." 
 
 OF THE NOUN. 
 
 AUGMENTATIVES, DIMDÍUTIVES, AND COMMON TITLES OF 
 RESPECT. 
 
 255. Augmentative nouns are such" as are increased, in 
 the extent of their signification, by the terminations on, 
 ona, azo, aza, ote ; thus the words daga, dagger ; cuchara, 
 spoon ; fraile, friar ; gato, cat ; manga, sleeve ; muger, wo- 
 man ; frente, forehead ; can be rendered augmentative ; 
 as, dagon, large dagger ; cucharon, large spoon, i. e. a ladle ; 
 frailon, large friar : gatazo, large cat ; mangote, large 
 sleeve ; mugerona, large woman ; frentaza, broad forehead. 
 
 256. Diminutive nouns are such as are decreased, in the 
 signification of their primitives, by the terminations ico, 
 ica, ejo, eja, ito, ita, eto, eta, illo, ilia, uelo, uela ; thus, fraile, 
 friar ; capilla, chapel ; cuchara, spoon ; batel, boat ; can be 
 rendered diminutive; as, frailecico, frailecito, frailezuelo, a 
 little friar ; cajpilleja, capillila, capilleta, small chapel ; cu- 
 charica, cucharita, cuchareta, cucharillo, small spoon : bateli- 
 co, batelejo, batelito, batelillo, little boat. The terminations 
 uelo generally, and illo also sometimes, express contempt ; 
 as hombre, man ; hombrezuelo or hombrecillo, an insignificant 
 or contemptible little fellow. 
 
 (a.) Adjectives are also frequently found used in a diminutive sense; 
 as, poco, little ; poquülo, poquitico, poquito, very little. 
 
 257. There is also a kind of nouns composed of the name of some 
 instrument or object, and one of the terminations azo, aza, ada, the 
 
130 OF THE NOUN. 
 
 compound word including in its meaning both the instrument and some 
 effect produced by it ; as, dardo, a dart ; dardada, a blow given with a 
 dart ; cuchara, a spoon, cucharazo, a blow with a spoon ; pluma, a pen, 
 plumada, a dash or stroke with a pen ; mano, the hand, manotazo or 
 vianotada, a blow with the hand ; aldaba, a knocker, aldabada, a rap 
 with the knocker, and aldabazo, a violent rap with the knocker. 
 
 258. When a noun with a singular termination denotes 
 several persons or things, it is called a collective noun, or 
 noun of multitude ; as, turba, a crowd ; vacada, a drove 
 of cows. 
 
 259. The ordinary titles of respect corresponding to Mr. or Esq. in 
 English, are in Spanish Señor and Don ; and those corresponding to 
 Madam and Mrs., are Señora and Doña; and Miss, Señorita. Don and 
 Doña never take the article before them, and can be used before Chris- 
 tian names only. Señor and Don are often used together before the 
 Christian name. The following examples will show the manner in 
 which these words are used : 
 
 El Señor Blake es Americano. 
 
 Don Diego Ticknor, me alegro mu- 
 cho de verle. 
 
 El Señor Ray. La Señora Ray. 
 
 El Señor Carlos Mason. 
 
 La Señorita Mason. 
 
 Al Señor Don Diego Harper. 
 
 Al Señor Juan Harper. 
 
 Los Señores Don Juan Millón y 
 Don Pablo Surret. 
 
 Los Señores Riggs y Tiggs. 
 
 Da una silla á Doña Sara Ray. 
 
 Mr. Blake is an American. 
 
 Mr. James Ticknor, I am very glad 
 to see you. 
 
 Mr. Ray. Mrs. Ray. 
 
 Master Charles Mason. 
 
 Miss Mason. 
 
 To James Harper, Esq. 
 
 To Mr. John Harper. 
 
 Messrs. John Millón and Paul Sur- 
 ret. 
 
 Messrs. Riggs and Tiggs. 
 
 Give a chair to Mrs. Sarah Ray. 
 
 (a.) The article is never used before these titles except when the per- 
 sons are spoken of; of course, when persons are addressed, the proper 
 title only is used ; as, 
 Buenas tardes tenga vmd., Señorita j I wish you a good evening, Miss 
 
 Wilson. I Wilson. 
 
 (b.) Señor, señora, señorita, señores, señoras, señoritas, also arc used 
 for sir, madam, miss, gentlemen, ladies, young ladies, respectively; as, 
 Buenos dias, señor. I Good morning, sir. 
 
 Buenas noches, señores. I Good night, gentlemen. 
 
 (c.) Señor and señora are used as an additional mark of respect before 
 the name of a relative in such cases as the following : 
 l Como está su señor hermano ? I How is your brother ? 
 i Como está su señora madre 1 I How is your mother ? 
 
OP THE ADJECTIVE. 131 
 
 $^* A list of nouns which form an exception to the general rules of 
 gender will be found in the Appendix, Number II. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 AGREEMENT AND POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 . 260. The adjective always must agree in gender and 
 number with the noun to which it belongs ; as, 
 
 El hombre sabio. 
 La muger sabia. 
 Los hombres sabios. 
 
 The wise man. 
 The wise woman. 
 The wise men. 
 The wise women. 
 
 Las mugeres sabias. 
 
 (a.) Participles used as adjectives agree in gender and number with 
 the noun to which they belong ; as. 
 
 El engañado rey. 
 La engañada reina. 
 Las engañadas criadas. 
 
 The deluded king. 
 
 The deluded queen. 
 
 The deluded female-servants. 
 
 (b.) An adjective does not agree with the gender of the title of a per- 
 son, but with the gender of the person to whom it is applied ; as, 
 
 Su majestad está enfermo. J His majesty is ill. 
 
 Su majestad está tnftrma. I Her majesty is ill. 
 
 (c.) Nada, "nothing," requires a masculine adjective; as, 
 
 Nada hay limpio. I There-is nothing pure. 
 
 (d.) Two or more nouns in the singular require the adjective which 
 belongs to them to be in the plural, and if the nouns are of different 
 genders, the adjective must be in the masculine ; as, 
 
 Juana y María están calladas. I Jane and Mary are silent. 
 
 Lucía y Carlos están cansados. I Lucy and Charles are tired. 
 
 (<?.) When an adjective comes before or after two or more plural nouns 
 of different genders, it must agree in gender with the noun nearest to 
 it; as, 
 
 Buenos diccionarios y gramáticas. I Good dictionaries and grammars. 
 Diccionarios y gramáticas buenas. I Good dictionaries and grammars. 
 
 E2F" The Spanish Academy recommends that, in cases in which an 
 adjective is to be used with two or more nouns differing in gender and 
 number, it would be better to use a different adjective of similar mean- 
 ing for every noun, or an adjective which does not change its ending to 
 form its feminine (see 100) for the plural. 
 
132 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 261. The material of which a thing is made, as well as 
 the country in which it is made or produced, are seldom 
 used as adjectives, but as a noun preceded by the preposi- 
 tion de ; thus, 
 
 Hoja de plata. 
 Paño de laña. 
 Cueros de Méjico. 
 Cerveza de Londres. 
 
 Silver leaf. 
 Woolen cloth. 
 Mexican hides. 
 London beer. 
 
 262. The profession or dignity of a person may be 
 qualified by an adjective derived from the name of a 
 nation, or by the name of the nation preceded by the pre- 
 position, as above ; thus, 
 
 General Mejicano. j Mexican General. 
 
 General de España. 1 Spanish General (general of Spain). 
 
 («.) The title of the chief ruler of a country is not qualified by an ad- 
 jective expressing ihe nation, but by the name of the country, preceded 
 by the preposition j as,. 
 
 El rey de España. The king of Spain. 
 
 La reina de Inglaterra. The queen of England. 
 
 El presidente de los Eslados-Unídos. The president of the United States. 
 
 263. Adjectives of both numbers and genders are often 
 used as nouns, being in such cases preceded by the arti- 
 cle : as, 
 
 Un rico. Una rica. i A rich (man). A rich (woman). 
 
 Los ricos. Las ricas. j The rich (men). The rich (women). 
 
 Los doctos. f The learned. 
 
 (a.) The neuter article (as it is called) lo, precedes adjec- 
 tives in the singular number, used as nouns, when taken 
 in a general sense, without reference to either gender ; as, 
 Lo escrito. 
 
 Lo malo. 
 Lo sis^iente, 
 
 The written, i, e. that which is 
 written. 
 
 The bad, i. e. that which is bad. 
 
 The following, *'. e. that which fol- 
 lows. 
 
 264. Adjectives and participial adjectives are much 
 oftener placed after the noun to which they belong than 
 before it ; as, 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 133 
 
 Hombre sabio. I A wise man. 
 
 Furor poético. Poetical fury. 
 
 Guardia avanzada. I Advanced guard. 
 
 (a.) In many cases it is left entirely to the taste of the writer to place 
 the adjective before or after the noun to which it belongs. But cardinal 
 numbers, adjectives expressing some inherent or peculiar quality, habit, 
 or practice of the noun to which they belong, and adjectives employed 
 as particular epithets with a proper name, are generally placed before the 
 noun : so likewise adjectives accented on the antepenult ; as, 
 
 Una dulce frescura. A pleasant coolness. 
 
 Cristalina agua. Crystaline water. 
 
 La blanca nieve. The white snow. 
 
 La tímida oveja. The timid sheep. 
 
 El ambicioso Jefferson. The ambitious Jefferson. 
 
 f^g** The above rule is liable to many exceptions. Indeed, no certain 
 rules can be given for the position of adjectives. Attention on the part 
 of the pupil to the practice of the best Castilian writers will prove the 
 best means of teaching him the most proper arrangement for adjec- 
 tives.* 
 
 (6.) Tanio, as much ; cuanto, so much ; mucho, much; todo, all; poco, 
 little ; are always placed before the noun. 
 
 (c) In some few cases the same adjective has a different meaning, 
 according as it is placed before or after the noun ; as, 
 
 Cierta señora. I A certain lady. 
 
 Cuenta cierta. I A true (certain) narrative. 
 
 COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES, ETC. 
 
 265. There are some irregular comparatives ; as, mayor, greater ; 
 mejor, better ; menor, smaller ; peor, worse. 
 
 (a.) As the superlative-relative is formed by placing the article before 
 the comparative, of course el mayor means "the greatest;" el mejor, .. 
 " the best ;" el menor, "the least;" el peor, " the worst." 
 
 266. There are some irregular superlatives; as, máximo, greatest; 
 óptimo, best ; mínimo, least ; pésimo, worst ; ínfimo, lowest. 
 
 (a.) There are some superlatives in istmo not regularly formed ; as, 
 bonísimo, very good ; novísimo, very new ; fortisimo, very strong ; fidel- 
 ísimo, very faithful ; sapientísimo, very wise ; these being the superlatives 
 of the adjectives bueno, nuevo, fuerte, fiel, sabio. 
 
 (6.) There are a few superlatives otherwise irregular ; as, paupérrimo, 
 
 * The adjective is sometimes used after the noun in English ; as, an 
 account current ; the tie matrimonial; life everlasting ; a noun common; 
 a verb active ; page thirtieth. 
 
 12 
 
134 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 very poor ; misérrimo, very miserable ; integérrimo, very honest ; cele- 
 bérrimo, very celebrated; salubérrimo, very salubrious; libérrimo, very 
 free. 
 
 (c) The superlative of the above adjectives can also be formed with 
 muy; as, muy grande, very great; muy pobre, very poor; muy bueno, 
 very good, etc. And such as do not already end in ísimo or érrimo, can 
 have their regular form in ísimo ; as, malísimo, veiy bad ; poquísimo, 
 very small, etc. 
 
 267. With political or other titles of dignity, muy before an adjective 
 expresses somewhat less than the termination isimo affixed to it ; thus, 
 muy ilustre, very illustrious, is less than ilustrisimo, most illustrious. 
 
 268. When a superlative relative follows the noun to which it refers 
 it is sufficient that the article be used before the noun, and not repeated 
 before the superlative ; as, 
 
 Los Catalanes son los pueblos mas I The Catalanians are the people 
 industriosos de España. I most industrious of Spain. 
 
 ¡¡^T In English we should render the latter clause of the above exam- 
 ple, "the most industrious people in Spain." 
 
 269. One noun can be compared with another in the same manner as 
 adjectives ; as, 
 
 Juan es mas niño que su nieto. | John is more (of a) child than his 
 I grandson. 
 
 270. In forming a comparison, in affirmative sentences, de is used 
 instead of que before an adjective of quantity or number, or before the 
 pronouns what or that which, expressed or understood ; as, 
 
 Mi hijo tiene mas de seis años. I My son is more than six years old. 
 
 Juan tiene mas de lo que necesita. I John has more than what he needs. 
 
 ^^p^ These sentences rendered literally would be, " my son has more 
 of six years ;" and "John has more of what he needs." 
 
 (a.) If the sentence be negative, de or que may either of them be used 
 before an adjective of quantity or number, or the pronouns what or that 
 which; as, 
 Mi hijo no tiene mas que (or de) I My son is not more than six years 
 
 seis años. I old. 
 
 271. When the adjective is placed after a proper name, asa distin- 
 guishing epithet, such as " Tarquin the Proud," the article precedes it 
 in Spanish as in English ; as, 
 
 Alexandra el Magno. j Alexander the Great. 
 
 Guzman el Bueno. I Guzman the Good. 
 
 (a.) Numeral adjectives of order form an exception to the above 
 rule ; as. 
 
 Carlos Doce. 1 Charles the twelfth. 
 
 Francisco Primero. I Francis the first. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 135 
 
 272. The preposition de is generally used after an adjective or partici- 
 ple which is followed by a noun expressive of the cause, manner, means, 
 or instrument, and also after adjectives denoting distance ; as, 
 
 Sharp in intellect. 
 
 Exhausted in means. 
 
 Foreign to truth. Low in stature. 
 
 Blunt at the point. 
 
 Tanned by the sun. 
 
 Endowed with learning. 
 
 Limited in means. 
 
 Impelled by necessity. 
 
 Fatigued with walking. 
 
 Deaf with one ear. Pale with fear. 
 
 Faults common to his youth. 
 
 Wide in the mouth (wide-mouthed). 
 
 Narrow in the sleeve (narrow- 
 sleeved). 
 
 White in skin (white-complexion- 
 ed). 
 
 Pale in the face (pale-faced). 
 
 Approved as a surgeon. 
 
 Agudo de ingenio. 
 
 Apurado de medios. 
 
 Ageno de verdad. Bajo de cuerpo. 
 
 Boto de punto. 
 
 Curtido del sol. 
 
 Dotado de ciencia. 
 
 Escaso de medios. 
 
 Impelido de la necessidad. 
 
 Molido de andar. 
 
 Sordo de un oido. Pálido de miedo. 
 
 Defectos comunes d&su juventud. 
 
 Ancho de boca. 
 
 Angosto de manga. 
 
 Blanco de cutis. 
 
 Pálido de semblante. 
 Aprobado de cirujano. 
 
 (a.) The preposition in after a superlative is to be rendered into Span- 
 ish by de ; as, 
 
 Los mas sabios hombres del mun- J The wisest men in the,world. 
 
 do. I 
 
 273. Tanto, and not tan, is used before a noun in comparisons of 
 equality (see 104) ; as, 
 
 María tiene tanta prudencia como | Mary has as much prudence as 
 Juana. Jane. 
 
 [2F* For the idiomatic use of some prepositions after certain adjec- 
 tives, see Appendix, Number III. 
 
 LIST OF NUMERALS. 
 
 274. The numeral adjectives are divided into cardinal 
 and ordinal. The cardinal numerals express numbers ; 
 as, one, two. three ; and the ordinal numerals express order 
 or rank ; as, first, second, third. 
 
 (a.) There are also some numeral nouns, such as the collective num- 
 bers, una docena, a dozen ; una veintena, a score ; and the fractional 
 numbers, la mitad, the half; un cuarto, a fourth. 
 
i3'6 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 275. The following is a list of the cardinal and ordinal 
 numeral adjectives : 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 ORDINAL 
 
 . 
 
 NUMBERS. 
 
 Uno, una, 
 
 One. 
 
 Primero, 
 
 First. 
 
 Dos, 
 
 Two. 
 
 Segundo, 
 
 Second. 
 
 Tres, 
 
 Three. 
 
 Tercero, 
 
 Third. 
 
 Cuatro, 
 
 Four. 
 
 Cuarto, 
 
 Fourth. 
 
 Cinco, 
 
 Five. 
 
 Quinto, 
 
 Fifth. 
 
 Seis, 
 
 Six. 
 
 Sexto, or, sesto, 
 
 Sixth. 
 
 Siete, 
 
 Seven. 
 
 Séptimo, 
 
 Seventh. 
 
 Ocho, 
 
 Eight. 
 
 Octavo, 
 
 Eighth. 
 
 Nueve, 
 
 Nine. 
 
 Noveno, or, Nono, Ninth. 
 
 Diez, 
 
 Ten. 
 
 Décimo, 
 
 Tenth. 
 
 Once, 
 
 Eleven. 
 
 Undécimo, 
 
 Eleventh. 
 
 Doce, 
 
 Ticelve. 
 
 Duodécimo, 
 
 Twelfth. - 
 
 Trece, 
 
 Thirteen. 
 
 Décimo tercio, 
 
 Thirteenth. 
 
 Catorce, 
 
 Fourteen. 
 
 Décimo cuarto, 
 
 Fourteenth. 
 
 ¡Quince, 
 
 Fifteen. 
 
 Décimo quinto, 
 
 Fifteenth. 
 
 ÍDiez y seis, 
 
 Sixteen. 
 
 Décimo sesto, 
 
 Sixteenth. 
 
 'Diez y siete, 
 
 Seventeen. 
 
 Décimo séptimo 
 
 Seventeenth. 
 
 Diez y ocho, 
 
 Eighteen. 
 
 Décimo octavo, 
 
 Eighteenth. 
 
 Diez y nueve, 
 
 Nineteen. 
 
 Décimo nono, 
 
 Nineteenth. 
 
 Veinte, 
 
 Twenty. 
 
 Vigésimo, 
 
 Twentieth. 
 
 Veinte y uno,* 
 
 Twenty-one. 
 
 Vigésimo primo, 
 
 Twenty-first. 
 
 Veinte y dos, 
 
 Twenty-two. 
 
 Vigésimo segundo Twenty- second. 
 
 Veinte y tres, 
 
 Ticenty-three. 
 
 Vigésimo tercio, 
 
 Twenty-third. 
 
 Veinte y cuatro 
 
 , Twenty-four. 
 
 Vigésimo cuarto, 
 
 Twenty -fourth. 
 
 Veinte y cinco, 
 
 Twenty-Jive. 
 
 Vigésimo quinto, 
 
 Twenty-fifth. 
 
 Veinte y seis, 
 
 Twenty-six. 
 
 Vigésimo sesto, 
 
 Twenty-sixth. 
 
 Veinte y siete, 
 
 Twenty-seven. 
 
 Vigésimo séptimo Twenty-seventh. ; 
 
 Veinte y ocho, 
 
 Twenty-eight. 
 
 Vigésimo octavo, 
 
 Twenty-eighth, i 
 
 Veinte y nueve, 
 
 Twenty-nine. 
 
 Vigésimo nono, 
 
 Twenty-ninth. 
 
 Treinta, 
 
 Thirty. 
 
 Trigésimo, 
 
 Thirtieth. 
 
 Cuarenta, 
 
 Forty. 
 
 Cuadragésimo, 
 
 Fortieths 
 
 Cincuenta, 
 
 Fifty. 
 
 Quincuagésimo, 
 
 Fiftieth. 
 
 Sesenta, 
 
 Sixty. 
 
 Sexagésimo, 
 
 Sixtieth. 
 
 .Setenta, 
 
 Seventy. 
 
 Septuagésimo, 
 
 Seventieth. 
 
 Ochenta, 
 
 Eighty. 
 
 Octogésimo, 
 
 Eightieth. 
 
 Noventa, 
 
 Ninety. 
 
 Nonagésimo, 
 
 Ninetieth. 
 
 Ciento, 
 
 A hundred. 
 
 Centesimo, 
 
 Hundredth. 
 
 Sometimes found written as one word, as veintiuno, veintidós, etc. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 137 
 
 CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 Docientos, 
 
 Tico hundred. 
 
 Docentésimo, Tico hundredth. 
 
 Trecientos, 
 
 Three hundred. 
 
 Trecentésimo, Three hundredth 
 
 Cuatrocientos, 
 
 Four hundred. 
 
 Cuadragéntesimo, Four hundredth. 
 
 Quinientos, 
 
 Five hundred. 
 
 Quingentésimo, Five hundredth. 
 
 Seiscientos, 
 
 Six hundred. 
 
 Sexentésimo, Six hundredth. 
 
 Setecientos, 
 
 Seven hundred. 
 
 Septengentésimo, Seven hundredth. 
 
 Ochocientos, 
 
 Eight hundred. 
 
 Octogentésimo, Eight hundredth. 
 
 Novecientos, 
 
 Nine hundred. 
 
 Nonagentésimo, Nine hundredth. 
 
 Mil, 
 
 A Thousand. 
 
 Milésimo, Thousandth. 
 
 276. The cardinal numbers for eleven hundred, twelve hundred, two 
 thousand, three thousand, etc., are mil y ciento, mil y docientos, dos mil, 
 tres mil; for a hundred thousand, two hundred thousand, etc., cien mil, 
 docientos mil ; for a million, two millions, etc., un millón, dos millones. 
 Millón is not an adjective, but a noun. 
 
 277. Uno is declinable, changing the final o into a whenever it refers 
 to a feminine noun. All of the cardinal numbers ending in ientos form 
 their feminine in as ; as, docientas mugeres, two hundred women. The 
 rest are undeclinable. 
 
 (a.) All the ordinal numbers change the last o into a to form their 
 feminine. 
 I (b.) Uno drops the last letter when it comes before a noun. (See 101.) 
 
 (c.) Ciento drops its last syllable when it comes immediately before a 
 noun (see 101, a), but not when any other word comes between it and 
 the noun; thus, cien soldados, a hundred soldiers; and ciento y tres sol- 
 dados, a hundred and three soldiers. 
 
 (d.) Primero and tercero, among the ordinals, drop the final o before a 
 noun. (See 101.) 
 
 278. The cardinal numbers (and not the ordinal) are generally used in 
 Spanish to express order or rank, ic hen the number exceeds nine ; when 
 under nine, the ordinals are employed ; thus, 
 
 Enrique Octavo. 
 Carlos Doce. 
 Tomo diez y ocho. 
 Página séptima. 
 
 279. In mentioning the 
 nal adjectives and not the 
 in which primero and not 
 
 El primero de Enero. 
 El dos de Febrero. 
 El tres de Marzo. 
 El diez y seis de Mayo. 
 
 Henry Eighth (the Eighth). 
 Charles Twelve (the Twelfth). 
 Volume eighteen (the eighteenth). 
 Page seventh (the seventh). 
 
 days of the month, the Spanish use the cardi- 
 ordinal, as in English, except in the first day, 
 un is used ; thus, 
 
 I The first of January. 
 
 The two (second) of February. 
 
 The three (third) of March. 
 I The sixteen (sixteenth) of May. 
 
138 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 (a.) In dates where figures are used, the article is omitted, and except 
 the first day of a month, the cardinal numbers are used ; as, 
 Madrid, I o de Junio de 1845. i Madrid, June 1st, 1845. 
 
 Paris, 4 de Julio de 1846. Paris, July 4th, 1846. 
 
 Londres, 27 de Agosto de 1847. I London, August 27th, 1847. 
 
 280. The hour of the day is expressed by the ordinal numbers preced- 
 ed by the definite article, which must in such a case agree with horas, 
 hours, understood (unless the hour be one, when it agrees with the sin- 
 gular hora) ; thus, 
 
 I Que hora es 7 \ What o'clock is it 1 
 
 Es la una. 
 Son las dos. 
 Son las diez. 
 
 Son las tres menos diez minutos. 
 Son las ocho y veinte minutos. 
 
 It is one o'clock. 
 
 It is two o'clock. 
 
 It is ten. 
 
 It is ten minutes before three. 
 
 It is twenty minutes after eight. 
 
 £^"* Literally, the above expressions mean, " What hour is itT,' "It 
 is the one" — " they are the two"—" they are the ten" — "they are the 
 three less ten minutes" — " they are the eight and twenty minutes." 
 
 281. In speaking of the age of persons or things, the verb tener is em- 
 ployed in Spanish ; as, 
 
 Carlos tiene doce años. i Charles is twelve years old. 
 
 El Señor Tournay no tiene cin- Mr. Tournay is not fifty years of 
 
 cuenta años. I age. 
 
 ^^" Literally, "Charles has twelve years," and "Mr. Tournay has 
 not fifty years." 
 
 282. In Spanish it is not said, in expressing measurement, " twenty 
 feet high," or " ten feet long ;" but " twenty feet of high," or " of 
 height," " ten feet of long," or " of length ;" as, 
 
 La casa tenía sesenta codos de i The house was (had) sixty cubits 
 largo, y veinte codos de ancho, y long, and twenty cubits wide, and 
 treinta codos de altura. I thirty cubits in height, 
 
 (a.) In comparative sentences, to express difference, in English it may 
 be said, " she is taller than her sister by the whole head." In Spanish, 
 this sentence would be, "ella es mas alta que su hermana de toda la ca- 
 beza," i. e. " she is more tall than her sister of all the head." 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 PERSONAL PE.ONOUNS. 
 
 283. The personal pronouns of the nominative case, 
 when used, may come either before or after the verb, 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 139 
 
 except the latter be in the imperative mood, or the sen- 
 tence be interrogative, in which cases the nominative gen- 
 erally follows the verb ; as, viva ella, " may she live ;" ^ha 
 hablado él ? u has he spoken V 
 
 (a.) As the verb-ending generally indicates of itself the person and 
 number that its nominative must be, the nominative personal pronouns 
 are seldom expressed in Spanish, unless when necessary to distinguish 
 the persons or genders, or to be emphatic, or when a relative pronoun is 
 to follow ; as, 
 
 El y ella son prudentes. He and she are prudent. 
 
 Nosotros seramos castigados, y no We shall-be punished, and not 
 
 vosotros. you. 
 
 El que tiene dinero, tiene cuidados. He who has money, has cares. 
 
 284. The pronoun se " oneself," is sometimes used with a reflective or 
 reciprocal verb (see 136 and 169), and then it is to be rendered in English 
 by himself, herself, itself, themselves, or one another, as the sense may 
 require; as, 
 
 Ellas se aman. j They love themselves (or, they love 
 
 I one another). 
 (a.) The first objective case of all the personal pronouns is also em- 
 ployed with reflective or reciprocal verbs ; as. 
 
 Nosotros nos aman. i We love ourselves (or, each other). 
 
 Yo me alabo. I praise myself. 
 
 Yo no quero alabarme. I I wish not to-praise myself. 
 
 (b.) The pronoun se is also frequently used with a verb in the active 
 voice, of the third person singular or plural, to express the passive voice 
 (see 173) ; as. 
 
 La casa se quemu. 1 The house was burned (the house 
 
 I burnt itself). 
 
 (c.) The first- objective case of all the personal pronouns is sometimes 
 used with a reflective verb in a passive sense ; as, 
 
 Yo me admiro. i I am surprised (I surprise myself). 
 
 Vosotros os alegráis. You are rejoiced (you rejoice your- 
 
 I selves). 
 
 (d.) Strictly speaking, se can not be used in the nominative case, and 
 should therefore always be considered as governed by a verb. Thus, in 
 such sentences as se dice, se cree, se piensa, the literal rendering is, "it- 
 says itself," "it-believes itself," "it-thinks itself," or (see 284, b) "it is 
 said," "it is believed," "it is thought." Still, in translating, it is often 
 more convenient to imagine se as an indefinite pronoun of the nomina- 
 
140 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 tivecase, used in the sense of they ; as, se dice, " they say," that is, "peo- 
 ple say" se piensa, " they think." 
 
 (e.) Se and other pronouns of the first-objective case are often used in 
 Spanish with neuter and active-intransitive verbs reflectively, and in 
 such cases seem redundant in English ; as, 
 De allí se paso á la ciudad. I Thence he-passed (himself) to the 
 
 city. 
 Yo me arrepiento. Se arrepiente. I repent (myself). He-repents (him- 
 self). 
 
 (f.) Se is sometimes used in the sense of to-him, to-her, to-them, to-you 
 (i. e. to your worship). This use of se takes place only when another 
 personal pronoun of the objective case and of the third person immedi- 
 ately follows it ; as, 
 
 Tengo una cuchara ; se la daré.* I I-have a spoon; I-will-give it to- 
 1 him. 
 
 (g.) When, in cases coming under the above rule, the pronoun se does 
 not denote with clearness the number or gender of the noun for which 
 it is employed, the second-objective is also used ; as, 
 Se lo daré á ella, á ellos, á vmd. i I-will-give it to-her, to-them, to-you. 
 Se la mando dar á ellos. He-commanded it to-be-given to- 
 
 I them. 
 
 285. The first-objective case of the Spanish personal 
 pronouns is very often to be rendered in English by the 
 preposition u to " and the pronoun ; as, to-me, to-you, to-him, 
 to-her, to-them, etc. (see 114, and 114, b), and it is then 
 equivalent to the second-objective, á mí, á vosotros, á él, á 
 ella, á ellos, etc. ; and in some cases some other preposition 
 than a to v is used in rendering the first-objective into 
 English ; as, 
 
 Juan me dijo. J John said to-me. 
 
 Te lo pido. I-ask it qf-thee (or, from- thee). 
 
 Se lo agradezco. I-thank him for-it. 
 
 Nos lo suplica. I He-beseeches usjbr-it. 
 
 (a.) The second-objective with the preposition á is not used, except 
 when the same verb governs two or more pronouns in the objective 
 case, or when it is designed to be distinct or particularly emphatic ; as, 
 Juan dio dinero á él, á ella, y á tí. I John gave money to him, to her, 
 
 and to thee. 
 Yo vi á vosotros y á ellos. I saw you and them. 
 
 Juan viva, dijeron ellos á ella. | John lives, said they to her. 
 
 * We can not say le la daré, " I-will-give it to-him," but se la daré. 
 
OF THE PRONOUN. 141 
 
 (&.) To add more clearness or strength to a sentence, both objective 
 cases of pronouns are often employed ; the second-objective case then 
 being placed either before the first-objective or else after the verb, except 
 the first objective comes after the verb (as in the case of infinitives, 
 gerunds, and imperatives; see 116), when the second-objective must 
 come after the first ; as, 
 
 A mí me dijeron, ) 
 Me dijeron á mí. ) 
 Decirme á mí. 
 Dicien dole á ella. 
 Dime á mí. 
 
 They told me. 
 
 To-tell me. 
 Telling her. 
 Tell me. 
 
 (c.) When the sentence may contain a noun in the objective case gov- 
 erned by the preposition a, a pronoun of the second-objective case is 
 often used in Spanish, and is not to be translated in English ; as, 
 
 A Dios nadie le vio jamas. | God no-man saw (him) ever ; i. e. 
 
 I no-one ever saw God. 
 
 286. Mismo, meaning same or self, is often used with the 
 nominative personal pronouns ; thus, y o mismo, I myself ; 
 nosotros mismos, we ourselves, etc. ; and also with the 
 second-objective ; and must always agree in gender and 
 number with the noun to which the pronoun refers ; as, 
 
 l Qué dices de tí mismo 1 I What sayest-thou of thyself? 
 
 La muger hablará por sí misma. I The woman will speak for herself. 
 
 (a.) Mismo is often used with nouns also ; as, la misma Maria, " Mary 
 herself;" los mismos soldados, "the very soldiers," or, "the soldiers 
 themselves." 
 
 287. When by the pronoun it is meant any thing to 
 which we can not apply a gender, ello is used. Its first- 
 objective lo is employed by the same rule ; thus if it be 
 said, " he has been told to love his enemies, and he does 
 it," the pronoun it refers to the clause of the sentence, " to 
 love his enemies," and of course has no gender. In such a 
 case, lo (not le nor la) would be used. 
 
 (a.) Lo is used in Spanish for so in English, when the latter means 
 it; as, 
 
 Vmd. piensa que ella es rica, pero 
 
 no lo es. 
 Si lo es. 
 Diego lo hace. 
 
 You think that she is rich, but she- 
 is not so. 
 If it-be so. 
 James does so. 
 
142 OF THE VERB. 
 
 (b.) Lo is often used for le when the latter refers to a masculine noun 
 and is immediately governed by a verb (though this use of lo is not 
 grammatically correct) ; as, 
 
 Espero que lo veo en perfecta salud. I I hope that I see him in perfect 
 I health. 
 
 THE PECULIAR. USE OF OTHER PRONOUNS. 
 
 288. The demonstrative pronouns este and aquel are 
 often used without any noun, and in such a case they have 
 the sense of " this-one" and " that-one" or " the-one ;" as, 
 
 {This-one is the-one of whom I 
 said ; or, 
 This is he of whom I said. 
 (a.) Todo aquel que is used in the sense of "every one who;" as, 
 Todo aquel que bebe de esta agua. | Every one who drinks of this water 
 
 289. Quien often means he-who, she-who one-who ; and 
 quienes , they-iuho ; as, 
 
 Quien calla otorga. He-who is silent, consents. 
 
 María fué quien lo dijo. Mary was she-who said it. 
 
 Porque los enseñaba, como quien For he-taught them as one-who has 
 tiene autoridad. authority. 
 
 290. Such expressions as, "it is I" "it is thou" "it is he" "it is 
 she" " it is we" etc., are rendered in Spanish by " I am" " thou art" 
 i( heis" "she is" "we are" etc.; as, 
 
 Yo soy. Ella es. I It is I. It is she. 
 
 Ellos son. i Es vmd. % I It is they. Is it you ? 
 
 291. De él, de ella, de ello, de este, etc., were anciently written del, delta, 
 dello, deste. 
 
 (a.) De and él, and á and él, are contracted into del and at when serv- 
 ing as the antecedent of the relative pronoun que ; as, 
 
 Del que sigue. 
 
 Pedro dio el libro al que vimos. 
 
 Of-that which follows. 
 Peter gave the book to-him whom 
 we saw. 
 
 OF THE VEKB. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE VEPcB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 
 
 292. The verb agrees, in number and person, with its 
 subject or nominative, expressed or understood ; as, 
 
OF THE VERB. 143 
 
 Soy general. 
 
 Ella ama la verdad. 
 
 Los Americanos aman las riquezas. 
 
 I-ara a general. 
 
 She loves the truth. 
 
 The Americans love riches. 
 
 293. When a verb has two- or more subjects, each in the 
 singular, it is put in the plural ; as, 
 
 Mi padre y mi madre me aman. I My father and my mother love me. 
 Pedro ó Diego vendrán.* I Peter or James icill-corne. 
 
 294. When a verb has two or more subjects of different 
 persons, it is put in the plural, and agrees with the first 
 person in preference to the other two ; as, 
 
 Mi hermano y yo estamos malos. I My brother and I (i. e. we) are ill. 
 Tú y yo estamos buenos. 4- 1 Thou and I (i. e. we) are well. 
 
 (a.) If the second person should be used with the third, without any 
 first person, the verb must be in the second person plural ; as, 
 
 Tú y ella estáis buenas. | Thou and she (i. e. you) are well. 
 
 295. When a relative pronoun is the subject of the verb, 
 ;the latter must agree, in person and number, with the 
 noun or pronoun to which the relative relates ; as, 
 
 Yo soy que hablo contigo. I It is I who speak with-thee. 
 
 Vosotros que sois sabios. I Ye who are wise. 
 
 296. A collective noun, taken in a general sense, that 
 is, a noun representing the whole of the persons or things 
 mentioned, requires the verb to be of the singular num- 
 ber ; as, 
 
 El ejército de los Caldeos persiguió I The army of the Chaldeans pursued 
 al rey. I the king. 
 
 (a.) A subject which is a collective noun, taken in a par- 
 titive sense, that is, representing a part of the whole of the 
 collective noun, and conveying plurality of idea, requires 
 the verb to be in the plural ; as, 
 
 Parte creían lo que les decía, y parte I Part believedwhat he-told them, and 
 no lo creían. I part believed it not. 
 
 * This is different, as will be perceived, from the rule in English syn- 
 tax, which requires two singular nouns connected by a disjunctive con- 
 junction, to have the verb agree with them in the singular form. 
 
144 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 ¡J!^* This last rule is not always followed even by the best Spanish 
 authors. 
 
 297. In cases in which a verb appears to have two subjects, it must 
 agree with that noun "to which it seeqps more particularly to belong; as, 
 
 Los gages del pecado son muerte. ¡ The wages of sin are (is) death. 
 
 USE OF THE MOODS AND TENSES OF VERBS. 
 OF THE INFINITIVE, GERUND, AND PARTICIPLE. 
 
 298. The present .tense of the infinitive expresses affir- 
 mation in an indefinite manner, without reference to 
 number or person ; as, decir, to say ; dar, to give. 
 
 (a.) The infinitive is usedtn Spanish when in English 
 the present participle, preceded by a preposition, is used ; 
 
 Vengo de comer. I-come from dining (to-dine) i. e. 
 
 from dinner. 
 En derramar torrentes de sangre. In spilling (to-spill) torrents of 
 
 blood. 
 Trabaja sin cesar. He-labors without ceasing (to- 
 
 cease). 
 
 (b.) The infinitive is frequently used as a verbal noun 
 or present participle, by placing the masculine definite 
 article before it (see 251) ; as, 
 
 The murmuring (the to-murmur) 
 
 of the fountains. 
 At-the fall (at-the to-fall) of-the 
 day. 
 i Reading (the to-read) pleases me. 
 
 (c.) The infinitive is often rendered in English by the present partici- 
 ple, when in Spanish it is governed by another verb ; as, 
 
 La oimos cantar. 
 Le vi correr. 
 
 El murmurar de las fuentes. 
 Al caer del dia. 
 El leer me gusta. 
 
 1 We-heard her singing (to- sing). 
 I I-saw him run, or running (to-run). 
 
 299. In , Spanish, the gerund is employed in the sense 
 of the present participle in English ; as, 
 
 Estando enfermo el presidente. The president being sick. 
 
 Habiendo conspirado unos caballe- Some cavaliers having conspired. 
 
OF THE VERB. 145 
 
 Queriendo seguir dispensándolos* t Desiring to-continue dispensing- 
 
 planto árboles frutales. them, he-planted fruitful trees. 
 
 María está hablando. I Mary is speaking. 
 
 (a.) In sentences such as, " charity is increased by cultivating it," it 
 is allowed in Spanish to use either the gerund without the preposition, 
 or the infinitive mood preceded by the preposition con; as, 
 
 Nuestros deberes se hacen agrada- >, 
 
 bles cumpliéndolos ; or, I Our duties are rendered agreeable 
 
 Nuestros deberes se hacen agrada- j by performing them. 
 
 bles con cumplirlos.! J 
 
 (b.) Instead of the gerund of the past, the gerund of the present is 
 sometimes employed, preceded by the preposition en; as, 
 
 En oyendo esto, salió para Boston. 
 
 (Or) 
 Habiendo oido esto, salió para Bí 
 
 ton. 
 
 On hearing this, he set-out for Bos- 
 ton. 
 Having heard this, he set-out for 
 Boston. 
 
 (c.) The gerund in Spanish is often employed in a manner that requires 
 the adverb while to be used in translating it into English ; as, 
 
 El que vive en deleites, viviendo ! He who lives in pleasures, while 
 está muerte. I Iwing is dead. 
 
 300. The past participle is indeclinable when- used to 
 form the compound tenses (see 167) with the auxiliary 
 verb haber ; as, 
 
 Ella ha hablado. I She has spoken. 
 
 Las mugeres han hablado. I The women have spoken. 
 
 (a.) When the past participle is used with any other 
 verb than haber, it is declinable ; as, 
 
 Ella ha sido seducida. 
 
 Mis caballos están lastimados. 
 
 Mis hijas se hallan molestadas. 
 
 Mis hermanas quedan satisfeclias. 
 
 Ellas van satisfechas. 
 
 Ella anda pasmada de mis palabras. 
 
 Tiene escritas tres cartas. 
 Lleva escritas tres cartas. 
 
 She has been deceived. 
 
 My horses are injured. 
 
 My daughters find themselves mo- 
 lested. 
 
 My sisters remain satisfied. 
 
 They go satisfied. 
 
 She walks enraptured with my 
 words. 
 
 He-has three letters written. 
 
 He-carries written three letters. 
 
 (b.) These last two examples, it will be perceived, require the partici- 
 
 * See 116. t See 116. 
 
 13 
 
146 OF THE VERB. 
 
 pie to agree with the noun governed (cartas). Tener and llevar are, as 
 above, sometimes used as a kind of auxiliary verbs, and can always be 
 rendered by "have?- thus each of these examples may be translated 
 " he-has written three letters." 
 
 (c.) The past participle is in Spanish used with a noun or pronoun in 
 the case absolute ; thus, hallado means "found" and absolutely, " being 
 found;" enviado means "sent" and absolutely, "being sent;" recibido 
 means "received" and "being received." In general the participle is 
 placed before the noun of the case absolute, with which it agrees 
 (though the rules of Spanish construction admit of its being placed 
 after the noun) ; as, 
 
 Tomada Vera-Cruz, el General I Vera Cruz being taken, General 
 Scott salió para Jalapa. I Scott set-out for Jalapa. 
 
 OF THE TEXSES OF TEE INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 301. The present tense expresses an existing state or 
 an action occurring at the time in which we are speaking ; 
 
 as, 
 
 Mi hermano escribe. I My brother writes. 
 
 Estas doncellas son. amadas. I These maidens are beloved. 
 
 (a.) The verb estar can be used with the gerund in Spanish, as in 
 English the verb to be with the present participle ; as, 
 
 Juan está leyendo. | John is reading. 
 
 Ellos están cantando. I They are singing. 
 
 (b.) The verbs ir (to go) and venir (to come) do not admit of the verb 
 estar coming before their gerund as in the above rule. Thus we can not 
 say in Spanish yo estoy yendo and yo estoy viniendo, but yo voy and yo 
 vengo {"I go" and "I come"), "I am-going" and "I am-coming." 
 
 302. The imperfect tense is used to express what is 
 past, and, at the same time, present, with regard to some- 
 thing else which is past ; that is, it is a past tense which 
 was still present at the time spoken of. It may always be 
 employed in Spanish when in English the word " was " 
 can be used with the present participle, or "used to" can 
 be employed with the verb, or when we speak of habitual 
 actions ; as. 
 
 Ella escribía entonces. i She was-writing then. 
 
 Seneca razonaba bien. Seneca reasoned well. 
 
 Cervantes era un escritor elegante. I Cervantes was an elegant writer. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 147 
 
 Neron era un tirano. 
 
 Cuando fui niño, hablaba como 
 
 niño. 
 Ellos marchaban por las calles 
 
 cuando los vimos. 
 
 Nero teas a tyrant. 
 
 When I-was a child, I-spoke as a 
 
 child. 
 They were-marching through the 
 
 streets when we-saw them. 
 
 £y It is evident that " Seneca reasoned well" means « Seneca used 
 to reason (or was accustomed to reason) well." So " they walked rapidly 
 while she looked," means " they were-walking rapidly while she was- 
 looking," and of course, with this meaning, walked and looked would be 
 put in the imperfect tense in Spanish. So " I went to the opera three 
 times a week last summer ; i. e. "7 was in the habit of going," etc. 
 
 303. The perfect-definite tense shows the action or 
 being affirmed by the verb, to be completed, at a time of 
 which nothing more remains, often specified by an ad- 
 verb or some other circumstance expressed or under- 
 stood ; as, 
 
 Escribió una carta ayer. 
 
 Recibió dos cartas la semana pasa- 
 da. 
 
 El presidente no le -perdonó. 
 
 Diego vivía cuando le vi. 
 
 Luego que Juan se lo dijo, llora- 
 ron. 
 
 He-wrote a letter yesterday. 
 He-received two letters last week. 
 
 The president pardoned him not. 
 James was-living when I-saw him. 
 As soon as John told it to-them, 
 they wept. 
 
 (a.) As both the imperfect and perfect-definite in Spanish are included 
 in English in what is called the imperfect tense, it. is important that the 
 learner should be able to distinguish the use of each in Spanish. When 
 an action or event is entirely past and finished, the perfect-definite is 
 used ; but when it is meant to say that the action or event was taking 
 phce at a certain time, and that it is or may be still continued, the im- 
 perfect must be used. Thus, "los soldados marchaban por la ciudad" 
 means " the soldiers were-marching through the city," and so far as the 
 word marchaban is concerned, they may be marching still; but " los sol- 
 dados marcharon por la ciudad" means "the soldiers marched through 
 the city," and from the tense employed are marching no longer. (See 
 also 302.) 
 
 304. The perfect-indefinite is used to express an action 
 or event, which, though entirely past, has taken place dur- 
 ing a period of time (expressed or understood) of which 
 the present forms a part, or at a time designated in an 
 indeterminate manner ; as, 
 
148 OF THE VERB. 
 
 He hablado á Rodrigo esta semana, i I-have spoken to Roderick this week. 
 Han comido pan hoy. They-have eaten bread to-day. 
 
 Vmd. ha estado muy enfermo. I You have been very sick 
 
 (a.) The past actions of persons or things still in existence, if no par- 
 ticular time be mentioned, are expressed in this tense; as, 
 
 El General ha tomado varias ciuda- I The General has taken several 
 des. I cities. 
 
 (b.) The only cases in which the English perfect tense and the Spanish 
 perfect-indefinite do not correspond are suchas the following : "It has 
 been snowing these three hours;" "he has been in Mexico for these ten 
 years;" which in Spanish would be, "hace tres horas que nieva" (see 
 218, c) ; " hace diez años que estoy en Méjico," which mean literally "it- 
 is (see 218) three hours that (since) it-snows;" "it-is ten years that 
 (since) I-am in Mexico." If the sentence be negative, the perfect-inde- 
 finite is employed ; as, "hace ocho diasque no la hemos visto," "it-is 
 eight days that we-have not seen her," that is, " we have not seen her 
 for eight days." If the action or event be completed, the perfect-definite 
 must be used ; as, "hace diez años que el rey le perdonó," " it-is ten years 
 that (since) the king pardoned him." 
 
 (c.) Hay (or ha) is sometimes used instead of hace in cases like the 
 examples in the last paragraph ; as " hay pocos dias que entré en el cuarto 
 de mi amigo" "it has few days that (since) I-entered into the room of 
 my friend," that is, " a few days ago, I-entered my friend's room." Hay 
 is used at the beginning and ha at the end of a phrase; as, " hay pocos 
 dias" or, "pocas dias ha." 
 
 (d.) In some instances we may, both in Spanish and English, use 
 either the perfect-indefinite, or if we are sure that the action is com- 
 pleted, the perfect-definite; as, comí pan hoy, " I-ate bread to-day," or 
 he comido pan hoy, "I have eaten bread to-day." 
 
 305. The first-pluperfect is used to express an affirma- 
 tion of what is past and took place before some other past 
 action or event or time, expressed or understood ; as, 
 
 Juan ya había comido cuando llego I John already had dined when Rich- 
 Ricardo. I ard arrived. 
 
 (a.) Whenever the former action or event is mentioned as still con- 
 tinuing when the latter occurred, the imperfect tense is employed in 
 Spanish to denote the former ; as, 
 
 Había (218) tres horas que ella es- I It-was three hours that she was 
 taha pintando cuando llego Pedro. I painting when Peter arrived. 
 
 83P* This last example means in English " she had been painting 
 three hours when Peter arrived ;" and the use of the imperfect tense 
 
OF THE VERB. 149 
 
 shows that she was employed in painting (that is, had not finished) at 
 the time of Peter's arrival. 
 
 306. The second-pluperfect is used to express a past 
 action or event that took place immediately before another 
 action or event also past. It is never used except after 
 some of the adverbs of time ; cuando, " when ;" así que, 
 u as soon as ■" no bien, " no sooner," " but just ;" apenas, 
 " scarcely ;" luego que, " immediately after ;" después que, 
 " soon after ;" as, 
 
 Cuando hube visto al muger, dije. 
 
 Apenas hubo salido cuando se cayó 
 
 la casa. 
 No bien lo hubimos hallado, cuando 
 
 lo perdimos. 
 
 When l-had seen the woman, I 
 
 said. 
 Scarcely had-he gone-out when the 
 
 house fell. 
 No sooner had-we found it, when 
 
 (than) we-lost it. 
 
 307. The first-future tense affirms what is yet to be or 
 to take place at a future time (mentioned or not) ; as, 
 
 Seré presidente. | I-shall-be president. 
 
 Lucía redará mañana. I Lucy icill-come to-morrow. 
 
 308. The second-future tense affirms something future 
 that will have taken place before or at the time of some 
 other future action or event, or determinate time ; as, 
 
 Habré escrito esta carta antes que 
 
 Juan llegue. 
 Habrá acabado á las tres. 
 
 I shall-hare written this letter before 
 John may-arrive. 
 
 He-ic ill-have finished at three 
 o'clock. 
 
 (a.) Sometimes in Spanish the first-future is used instead of the pre- 
 sent, and the second-future instead of the perfect-indefinite, when some- 
 thing present or past is mentioned of which the speaker is not entirely 
 certain; as, "ahora nos dirá loque habrá visto," "now he-will-tell us 
 that which he-shall-have seen," meaning " now he perhaps tells us what 
 he perhaps has seen." When, however, the speaker is certain, then he 
 would express himself thus : " ahora nos dice lo que ha visto," "now he- 
 tells us what he-has-secn. , '^ 
 
 (b.) The second-future in English is sometimes rendered in Spanish 
 by the present tense in a sentence like the following: "mañana hará 
 diez años que vivo en Nueva- York," " to-morrow it-will-be ten years 
 that I-Uve in New York," meaning " I shall have lived in New York ten 
 years to-morrow. 
 
 13* 
 
150 OF THE VERB. 
 
 OF THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 309. The imperative is that mood which commands, 
 exhorts, or entreats ; as, 
 
 Hacédlo (116). i Do-it. 
 
 Veamoslos. Let-us-see-ihem. 
 
 Tráigamelos vmd. I 2?ri??g--them-to-me. 
 
 (a.) The imperative mood is not used in the first person 
 singular ; nor is it used in Spanish for forbidding, that is, 
 it is not employed with a negative adverb ', but the persons 
 of the present subjunctive are used when a negative com- 
 mand or a prohibition is expressed ; as, 
 
 No temas. i Fear not (i. e. mayest thou not 
 
 fear). 
 No temáis. I Fear not (i. e. may ye not fear). 
 
 (b.) The s of the first person plural and the d of the second are sup- 
 pressed before nos and os ; as. 
 
 Congratulémonos. I Let us congratulate ourselves. 
 
 Congratulaos. I Congratulate yourselves. 
 
 (c) The s of the first person plural of the tenses of the indicative 
 mood is suppressed when the reflective pronoun comes after it (see 113, 
 a) ; as, 
 
 Amamonos. \ We-love ourselves. 
 
 (d.) When the imperative is negative in English, as the subjunctive 
 is employed in Spanish, the pronouns of the first-objective case (see 116) 
 are not joined to it, but come before it ; as, 
 
 No lo hagas I Do (thou) it not. 
 
 No me lo traigáis. Bring (ye) it not to-me. 
 
 No lo haga ella. I Let her not do it. 
 
 (e.) Que is sometimes used before the persons of the imperative 
 mood ; as, 
 
 Q,ue uno de nosotros vaya. ¡ Let one of us go (that one of us 
 
 I may -go). 
 
 (f.) The persons of the imperative, except the second persons, singu- 
 lar and plural, are to be rendered into English by "may" or "let;" as, 
 "bendíganos el Señor," "may the Lord bless us;" " vaya Juan," "let 
 John go." But vmd., with its objective cases, although of the third 
 person, is to be rendered as the second person ; as, " venga vmd. conmi- 
 
OF THE VERB. 151 
 
 go," " come with-me " (let your-worship come with-me) ; " alábese 
 vmd." "praise yourself" (let your-worship praise himself ).* 
 
 OF THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 310. The tenses of the subjunctive mood differ in signi- 
 fication from those of the indicative only in expressing 
 what they affirm in a conditional or doubtful manner, while 
 the tenses of the indicative express certainty. Whenever, 
 therefore, there is no doubt about what we affirm, we must 
 use the tenses of the indicative. Thus, if we say " aunque 
 Hoderigo habla," " though Roderick speaks" by using the 
 indicative mood we show that there is no uncertainty about 
 Roderick's speaking. But if we say " aunque Roderigo 
 hable," " though Roderick may-speak" we show, by using 
 the subjunctive mood, that it is not certain that Roderick 
 will speak. 
 
 311. The present tense of the subjunctive affirms some 
 doubtful action or event that may take place, and is gener- 
 ally preceded by some conjunction or conjunctive phrase; as. 
 
 Though it-may-be so. 
 
 Remain there until I may-tell it to- 
 
 thee. 
 Do this in order that they-may-see 
 
 your good works. 
 Whether we-miy-live or whether 
 
 we-may-die, we are the Lord's. 
 
 (a.) As futurity is implied in the present tense of the subjunctive, the 
 first-future of the subjunctive may be used in its place; thus we may 
 say, " aunque lloremos" ''though we-may-iceep ;" or "aunque llorare- 
 mos" "though we-should-weep." The present may, therefore, be used 
 instead of the future, and the future instead of the present, unless the 
 conjunction si (if) be employed, in which case the present subjunctive 
 can not be used. 
 
 (b.) The relative pronouns are generally followed by the present or 
 some other tense of the subjunctive, when the sentence is interrogative 
 or negative, or expresses a doubt, wish, or condition ; as, 
 
 * In both Spanish and English the future is sometimes used as a com- 
 mand ; as, no matarás, '•'• thou shalt not kill," i. e. " do not kill," or " do 
 not commit murder." 
 
 Aunque sea así. 
 
 Estáte allí hasta que yo te lo diga. 
 
 Haced esto para que vean vuestras 
 
 buenas obras. 
 Que vivamos 6 que muramos, del 
 
 Señor somos. 
 
152 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 No conozco una sola nrager, cuya 
 alma sea mas sensible que la de 
 la Señora Loader. 
 
 I-know not a single woman 5 
 soul (is) may-be more sensible 
 than that of Mrs. Loader. 
 
 (c.) Words which in English are compounds of ever, such as quien- 
 quiera, "whoever;" cualquiera, " whosoever," "whichsoever;" siempre 
 que, "whenever;" por masque, " however j" por mucho que, "what- 
 ever;" in Spanish generally require the present or some of the tenses of 
 the subjunctive ; as, 
 
 Cualquier cosa que vea vmd. 
 Por grande que sea tu mérito. 
 
 Whatever thing that you may-see. 
 However great that thy merit may- 
 be. 
 
 312. The imperfect tense of the subjunctive affirms an 
 action or event of a doubtful or contingent kind as having 
 to be, or to be done, or as conceived by the mind as having 
 taken place at some time under certain conditions; as, 
 
 Juan leería, sí tuviera libros, or, } 
 Juan leería, si tuviese libros. 5 
 Quisiera que mi madre lo comiese. 
 
 John would-read, íf-he-should-have 
 (if- he had) books. 
 
 1-would-like (I- wish) that my mo- 
 ther would- eat-it. 
 
 313. There are in Spanish three forms of the imperfect 
 subjunctive, one ending with ra (in the first person singu- 
 lar), another with ría, 'and the third with se. Each of 
 these forms is generally to be rendered in English by some 
 one of the auxiliaries should, would, might or could, as the 
 sense may require. These forms of the imperfect are 
 thus used : 
 
 314. The form ending with se is employed only when a 
 conditional conjunction, or an ejaculatory expression of 
 desire, or a verb of command or permission (see also 314, 
 ¿), comes before it ; as, 
 
 Si yo tuviese libros, leería. 
 ¡Ojalá no arriesgase así su vida ! 
 
 Era preciso que espusiese mis ra^ 
 
 zones. 
 Le dije que tomase esos libros. 
 
 If I should-have books, I-would- 
 
 read. 
 O-that he-would-risk not thus his 
 
 life! 
 It-was necessary that I-should-ex- 
 
 plain my reasons. 
 I-told him that he-might-take those 
 
 books. 
 
OF THE VERB. 153 
 
 (a.) Sometimes the conjunction que is not expressed, but understood ; 
 as, 
 Encargó le enviasen mayor canti- I He ordered (that) ihey-should-send 
 
 dad. I him a greater quantity. 
 
 (b.) The form ending with se can be employed after the relative pro- 
 nouns, and after cuanto, "as much as," cuantos, "as many as," when 
 they arc preceded by a verb expressive of an action which the other part 
 of the sentence shows to depend on choice or mere contingency ; as, 
 
 Prometió que me daría todo lo que 
 le pidiese. 
 
 He-promised me that he-would- 
 give me everything which I- 
 might-ask of- him. 
 
 Prometió que me daría dos libros. 
 Le preguntó si su hijo irla allá. 
 
 315. The form ending with ría is employed (generally 
 to express a loish or condition, or what would be or might be 
 done) when no conditional conjunction comes immediately 
 before the imperfect tense ; as, 
 
 l Cual de los dos preferiría vmd. ? I Which of the two would you pre- 
 fer? 
 Si ella viniese (314), irían. ¡ If she should come, they -would- go. 
 
 (a.) This form can likewise be used when the imperfect is preceded 
 by a verb that expresses a belief trust, or promise ; and also when the 
 conjunction si (if) is used in the sense of "whether ;" as, 
 
 He-promised that he-would-give 
 
 me two books. 
 He-asked him if (whether) his son 
 
 would-go there. 
 
 316. The form of the imperfect ending with ra may in 
 general be used for either the form in se or that in ría ; 
 and is especially to be preferred to the form in rm, when 
 interrogative pronouns come before the imperfect ; as. 
 
 Si yo tuviera dinero, compraría U- If I should-have (if I had) money, 
 
 bros (314). I-would buy books. 
 
 Ojalá me hallara con ella (314). O-that I-could-find myself with her. 
 
 Yo quisiera que viniesen (315). I-should-like that they would-come. 
 
 I Q,uien lo creyera ? Who would-believe it 1 
 
 (a.) It will be seen from the foregoing rules that the form in ra can 
 generally be used instead of the forms in se and ría, for we can say, si yo 
 amara, or, si yo amase, " if I should-love ;" and we can say, él amara, or, 
 él amaría, " I would-love." But we can not use the form in ría and that 
 in se, the one for the other. 
 
154 OF THE VERB. 
 
 (5.) In English there are various forms of speaking of a contingent 
 action or event ; thus we can say, " if she were to see it," — " were she to 
 see it" — "should she see it ," — " if she see it" — " could she see it ," — "if 
 she should see it;" but in Spanish these forms must all be rendered as 
 the last example, "if she should see it;" thus, " si ella lo viese." And so 
 with all the tenses of the subjunctive mood. 
 
 (c.) Sometimes the English auxiliaries could, might, should, and would, 
 are expressed in Spanish by a separate verb, followed by the infinitive ; 
 as, 
 No podía ver. He-could not see (was not able to- 
 
 see). 
 Debía hacerlo. He-should do-it (ought to-do-it). 
 
 No quería entrar. He-icould not enter (was not willing 
 
 to-enter). 
 
 317. The perfect-indefinite tense of the subjunctive 
 mentions a doubtful or contingent action or event as being 
 completed, or that it would have been done in past time 
 under certain conditions ; as, 
 
 Me admiro que no haya llegado. \ I-am-surprised that he-may not 
 
 have arrived. 
 ¿Temes que no haya ganado en Fearest-thou that he-may not have 
 
 juego limpio 1 l won in fair play 1 
 
 Poco me importa que lo haya oido ! It-concerns me little whether he- 
 
 decir 6 no. ¡ may-have-heard it spoken or not. 
 
 318. The pluperfect tense of the subjunctive mentions 
 a doubtful or contingent action or event that would or 
 might have been completed under certain conditions ; and 
 is also used in Spanish whenever in English a conditional 
 conjunction or expression of fear, doubt, or wish, precedes 
 the pluperfect indicative ; as, 
 
 Ella habría ido ayer á la catedral, 
 si hubiese estado buena. 
 
 ¡ Ojalá hubiese yo sido estudioso ! 
 
 No era creíble que hubiese vmd. 
 abandonado á unos amigos an- 
 tiguos como nosotros. 
 
 (a.) This compound tense of the subjunctive is used with the endings 
 in ra, ría, and se of the auxiliary verb haber (hubiera, habria, and hubi- 
 ese), under the same conditions and in the same manner as these end- 
 ings are employed in the imperfect tense ; (see 314, 315, 316) ; as, 
 
 She xcould-have gone yesterday to 
 the cathedral, if she-AacZ been well. 
 
 O-that I had been studious ! 
 
 It- was not credible that you would- 
 have abandoned such old friends 
 as we. 
 
OF THE VERB. 155 
 
 If he-should not have (if he-had not) 
 > paid thee, I would-have lent thee 
 money. 
 
 Si no te hubiera pagado, yo te ha- 
 bría prestado dinero : or, 
 Si.no te hubiese pagado, yo te ha- 
 bría prestado dinero : or, 
 Si no te hubiese pagado, yo te hu- ( 
 
 biera prestado dinero : or, 
 Si no te hubiera pagado, yo te hu- 
 biera prestado dinero. 
 l^T The form of the last example, though permitted, is not to be 
 recommended, since the ending ra occurs in the conditional preposition 
 (si no te hubiera pagado), and also in the principal preposition (yo te hu- 
 biera prestado dinero). Nor could we change in any case the principal 
 proposition of the sentence, by substituting " hubiese prestado," since 
 the form in se can be employed only with conditional conjunctions or 
 exclamations, etc. (see 314 ; 314, b). 
 
 (b.) There is in Spanish a peculiar method sometimes employed for 
 expressing such a contingency of an action as is implied in the pluperfect 
 tense : this consists in prefixing the preposition á before the infinitive 
 haber, and affixing the past participle of the verb to be used ; thus, " á 
 haber venido" is to be rendered the same as " si hubiera (or hubiese) veni- 
 do," "if he-should-have come," or, as it is generally expressed in Eng- 
 lish, "if he-had come," or u had-he come." So "a haber hablado" is 
 to be rendered the same as "si hubiese hablado," "if he-had spoken. 1 ' 
 
 319. The first-future tense of the subjunctive mentions 
 a doubtful or contingent action or event as to take place 
 at a future time ; as, 
 
 Si así fuere, mis deseos quedarán ' If thus it-should-be, my desires will- 
 
 satisfechos. 
 Si yo hablare lenguas de hombres 
 y de ángeles, y no tuviera cari- 
 dad, nada soy. 
 
 remain satisfied. 
 If I should-speak languages of men 
 and of angels, and should not 
 have charity, I-am nothing. 
 
 (a.) The imperfect and first-future of the subjunctive can not be used 
 indiscriminately for each other. The contingency implied in the imper- 
 fect refers to time past ; and that implied in the first-future refers to 
 future time, reckoning from the moment in which it is said. Thus if we 
 say, " John said that the boys should remain at home," there is contin- 
 gency and even futurity denoted, but it does not necessarily go beyond 
 the present moment, for the boys ma5 r have already complied with John's 
 request. In such a case the imperfect must be used. But if we say, 
 " John says that if the boys should (or shall) not remain at home, he 
 will not reward them," then it is evident that the event of staying at 
 home is not yet supposed to have taken place, and of course the first- 
 future subjunctive is used. So, " if I have (i. e. shall have) money, they 
 
156 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Will-rob me of it," would be expressed by the first-future, and "if I had 
 {should have) money, I would be generous," would be expressed by the 
 imperfect. (See 311, a). 
 
 320. The second-future of the subjunctive mentions a 
 doubtful or contingent action or event as having taken 
 place at a future time at or before some other future action 
 or event shall occur ; as, 
 
 Si Pedro no hubiere llegado antes 
 de amanecer, le escribiré una 
 carta. 
 
 If Peter sliall not have arrived be-r 
 fore daybreak, I-shall-write him 
 a letter. 
 
 321. A verb is not necessarily in the subjunctive mood 
 because a conjunction may precede it ; for an action or 
 event, which is known to be certain, requires the verb to 
 be in the indicative mood, even though a conjunction pre- 
 cede it ; as, " though John u -as-speaking low, I heard him 
 distinctly," " aunque Juan hablaba" etc. If, however, there 
 is uncertainty or doubt expressed, the subjunctive mood is 
 required ; as, " though John loere-speaking, I would not lis- 
 ten," " aunque Juan hablara" etc. 
 
 ¡pip On account of the irregular and elliptical manner of using the 
 tenses in English, it is sometimes difficult for the learner to know which 
 to use in Spanish. But he must learn to distinguish the meaning of the 
 English tense, whether certainty or uncertainty is expressed (see 310 ; 
 311, b; 311, c; 316, b). 
 
 (a.) After the relative pronouns or the adjective cnanto, " how much," 
 or the adverb cuando, " when," if these pronouns or this adjective or 
 adverb are themselves preceded by a verb expressive of an action which 
 the other part of the sentence shows to depend on mere choice or con- 
 tingency, the subjunctive mood is used (though in English in such cases 
 the indicative is generally employed) ; as, 
 
 Elige, pues, de estas naranjas la 
 que mas te agrade (or agradare; 
 see 311, a). 
 
 Choose, then, from these oranges 
 that which most pleases thee 
 {may-please or shall-please thee). 
 
 I-shall-be rich when fortune wills, 
 (i. e. when fortune may-will or 
 shall-will). 
 
 He-promised to-givejme the money 
 that 1-wanted {might-want). 
 
 {b.) Verbs expressing will, desire, command, permission, promise, fear, 
 
 Seré rico, cuando quiera (or quisi- 
 ere) la fortuna (see 311, a). 
 
 Prometió darme el dinero que yo 
 necesitara (see 314, b). 
 
OF THE VERB. 157 
 
 doubt, probability, fitness, or necessity, followed by the conjunction que 
 (or any other conditional conjunction), generally require the verb which 
 follows the conjunction to be in the subjunctive mood (and not in the 
 indicative, as in English) ; as, 
 
 Dudo que tengas aciete. 
 No creo que tenga peras. 
 Temo aue no tengan dinero. 
 Es posible que tengan uvas. 
 Es preciso que me raya. 
 
 1-doubt whether thou-hast (mayest- 
 have) oil. 
 
 I-do not think that he-has {may- 
 have) pears. 
 
 I-fear that they-icill not have (may 
 not have) money. 
 
 It-is possible that ihey-have (may- 
 have) grapes. 
 
 It-is necessary that l-go (may-go). 
 
 (c) There are some conjunctive phrases, which, as they imply a con- 
 dition or doubt in themselves, are always followed by the subjunctive 
 mood : these are, para que, " in order that ;" dado que, " granted that ;" 
 no sea que, "lest;" a menos que, "unless;" á fin de que, "to the end 
 that ;" con tal que, " provided that ;" antes que, " before that ;" supuesto 
 que, " suppose that ;" en caso de que, " in case that ;" bien que, " al- 
 though ;" sin que, "without or unless that ;" covio quiera que, "notwith- 
 standing that;" -por mas que, "however;" siempre que, "whenever 
 that;" ojalá, "would that," or, "would to God that;" as, hablo para 
 que puedas juzcar, " I-speak in order that thou-mayest be able to 
 judge." 
 
 (d.) The conjunction ought always to be expressed in Spanish ; as, 
 "he promised us [that] he would-come," nos prometió que vendría.* 
 
 OF THE PASSIVE VERB. 
 
 322. The passive verb is generally rendered in Spanish 
 by ser (see 170), and always when the subject of the verb 
 is acted upon by an agent, that is. when in English it would 
 be accompanied with the preposition by ; as, 
 
 Este discurso fué escrito por Diego. ! This discourse was written by 
 ¡ James. 
 
 (a.) The passive verb must be rendered in Spanish by 
 estar (see 174) when the past participle is used adjectively, 
 that is, when the subject of the verb does not seem so 
 
 * The verb promdir is generally followed by the infinitive in such a 
 case; thus, prometió darme el dinero, "he-promised to-give me the 
 monev." 
 
 14 
 
158 OF THE VERB. 
 
 much to be acted upon by an agent as to have its state or 
 condition described ; as, 
 
 El discurso estuvo bien escrito. 1 The discourse teas well written. 
 
 El libro está corrcjido. I The book is corrected. 
 
 323. The passive verb formed by ser is used in Spanish 
 in the present and imperfect of the indicative mood, only 
 when it is designed to express a mental act or a state of the 
 emotions ; as, 
 María es amada de Carlos. | Mary is loved by Charles. 
 
 (a.) When a mental act or a state of the emotions is not expressed, 
 the passive verb, if it be used, must not be in the present or imperfect 
 of the indicative mood : thus we can not say, " el libro es escrito por un 
 Español" " the book is written by a Spaniard," but el libro ha sido escrito 
 por un Español, "the book has been written by a Spaniard." 
 
 (b.) When a mental act or state of the emotions is expressed, the pre- 
 positions de or por may be used after the passive verb before the agent ; 
 but when a mental act or state of the emotions is not expressed, por 
 only can be used ; as, 
 
 Mary is beloved by Charles. 
 All things were made by God. 
 
 María es amada de (or por) Carlos. 
 Todas las cosas fueron hechas por 
 Dios. 
 
 (c.) The reflective pronoun se is often used with verbs of the active 
 voice, which are required to be rendered in English by the passive. (See 
 173.) 
 
 OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 324. The object or regimen of the verb is either direct 
 or indirect. The direct regimen is that on which the 
 action immediately falls without the aid of any preposi- 
 tion ; as, 
 
 Doy una pluma. [ I give a pen. 
 
 (a.) The indirect regimen is that on which the action of the verb can 
 not fall without the aid of a preposition ; as, 
 
 Dijo á la muger. J He-said to the woman. 
 
 (p.) Sometimes both regimens are required after the verb ; as, 
 Dio una pluma á la muger. \ He-gave a pen to the woman. 
 
 325. When the object of an active verb is a person or 
 
OF THE VERB. 159 
 
 inanimate thing personified, it must be preceded by the 
 prepostion á ;* as, 
 
 Diego vio á la madre de Juan. ! James saw the mother of John. 
 
 Dios recompensará á los buenos. God will-reward the good. 
 
 La muger á quien vimos no es rica. The woman whom we saw is not 
 
 I rich. 
 Vio á la que me dio dinero. He-saw her who gave me money. 
 
 El sol alumbra á la tierra. I The sun enlightens the earth. 
 
 (a.) Sometimes the harmony of the sentence requires the á to be sup- 
 pressed, especially after the persons of the verb tener, "to have," or " to 
 possess ;" as, 
 Tengo un hijo y tres hijas. I I-have one son and three daughters. 
 
 326. One verb governs another in the infinitive mood ; as, 
 
 Quieren imitarle. | They-want to-imitate him. 
 
 (a.) Some verbs, as a general rule, require the preposition á before the 
 infinitive which they govern; such are those which mean to attempt, to 
 come, to go, to begin, to devote, to offer, to dare, to serve, to invite, to learn, 
 to teach, to urge, to assist, to call, to advise, to submit, to prepare, to compel, 
 to decide, to remain, and to accustom one's self; as, 
 
 Probó á levantarse. 1 He-attempted to raise himself. 
 
 Voy á feria. I I-am-going to see her. 
 
 (b.) Some verbs generally require the preposition de before the infini- 
 tive which they govern ; such as those which mean to cease, to be glad, 
 to be ashamed, to resolve, to deprive, to Jail, tojlnish, to abstain, to pity ; as, 
 
 Dejo de estudiar. I He-ceased to-study. 
 
 No faltaré de hacerlo. I I-will-fail not to do it. 
 
 (c.) When the preposition to in English is used before^ the infinitive in 
 the sense " in order to" (as, "he labors to acquire fame," meaning "he 
 labors in order to acquire fame"), the preposition para is used in Spanish 
 before the infinitive : as, 
 
 El hombre fué criado para aspirar \ Man was created in-order-to aspire 
 á la felicidad. i to felicity. 
 
 {d.) When the preposition to in English is used in the sense "for the 
 sake of" the preposition por is used in Spanish before the infinitive; as, 
 
 Juan lo dice, por decirlo. I John says it for-the-sake-of saying 
 
 * See No. 670, Part IV. This is a very important ride of Spanish 
 syntax. 
 
160 OF THE VERB. 
 
 (e.) Sometimes que precedes the infinitive instead of por or para; as, 
 
 Tiene algo que decirte. I He-has something (which) to-tell 
 
 I thee. 
 
 (/.) The infinitive is often used without any preposition before it, 
 especially when it is governed by verbs which mean to be able, to permit, 
 to wish, to endeavor, to make, to feign, to owe, to seem, to be wont, to know, 
 to avail, to see, to hear, to succeed, to hope, to be necessary, to think, to be- 
 lieve, to promise, to deign, to be the duty, to pretend, to judge, to prescribe, 
 to require, to suffice ; as, 
 
 No puede hacerlo. j He-is not able to-do it. 
 
 Deseo aprender. I I-wish to-learn. 
 
 327. The infinitive in Spanish, when used as a present 
 participle in English, may take any preposition before it 
 (see 298, a) ; as, 
 
 Sintió la necesidad de ponerle en 
 
 manos de la juventud. 
 Es constante en amarla. 
 
 He-felt the necessity qf-placing it 
 
 in the hands of the youth. 
 He-is constant in-loving her. 
 
 (a.) The verbs to see and to hear never govern the gerund in Span- 
 ish, but always the infinitive; thus we can not say, levió viendo, " I-saw 
 him coming" but le vio venir, "I saw him come." 
 
 (b.) " To know how" is expressed in Spanish by "to know ;" as, 
 
 Yo no sé nadar. ¡ I know not (how) to swim. 
 
 (c.) The infinitive,, when governed by another verb in Spanish, is 
 sometimes required to be rendered by another mood in English ; as, 
 
 Piensa morir de alegría. ¡ He-thinks to-die (that he will die) 
 
 | of j°y- 
 
 Creo ver á mi padre. j I-believe to-see (that I see) my fa- 
 
 * . ther. 
 
 Sabe deber su mérito á Dios solo. He-knows to-owe his merit (that 
 i his merit is owing) to God alone. 
 
 (d.) When in English a reflective verb, or a verb implying command, 
 governs an infinitive in the passive voice, in Spanish this infinitive must 
 be in the active voice ; as, 
 
 The king ordered it to-be-given to- 
 
 him. 
 Suffer not thyself to-be-overcome of 
 evil. 
 
 UP° The above examples literally would be rendered, " the king to- 
 him it ordered to-give" and "not thyself suffer to overcome of that which 
 is evil." 
 
 El rey se lo mandó dar. 
 
 No te dejes vencer de lo malo. 
 
OF THE VERB. 161 
 
 328. When a verb is governed by another in English, and can be ren- 
 dered in another mood by using the conjunction that, this latter mood 
 should be employed in Spanish ; thus, instead of. saying " I think him 
 to be learned," we can say, " I think that he is (or may be) learned ;" 
 and instead of "I requested him to go," we can say, "I requested thai ' 
 he should go ;" which latter form of construction should generally bo 
 adopted in Spanish ; as, 
 
 Espero que tendré el gusto de verle ] I-hope to have (that I-shatt-have) the 
 en breve. I pleasure of seeing him soon. 
 
 OF VERBS FOLLOWED BY CERTAIN PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 329. Verbs which signify to compare, to give, to yield, to 
 resist, to concern, to belong, to refuse, to ask, generally require 
 the preposition á before the noun to which the action of 
 the verb passes over ; as, 
 
 Ella se parece á su madre. I She resembles her mother. 
 
 Demanda sabiduría al Señor. I He asks wisdorn/rom (to-the) Lord. 
 
 (a.) Sometimes verbs having the sense to remove or to take aicay, re- 
 quire the preposition á before the noun to which the action of the verb 
 passes over ; as, 
 
 Cortaron la cabeza á Saul. I They-cut-off the head of (to) Saul. 
 
 Cain quitó la vida á su hermano J Cain took-away the life of (to) his 
 Abel. I brother Abel. 
 
 330. Verbs denoting to be abundant, to lack, to be aston- 
 ished, to blame, to repent, to pity, to make use, to absolve, to 
 make sport, to remember, to forget, indirectly govern a noun 
 by means of the preposition de ; as, 
 
 Los valles abundan de trigo. 
 
 Llenaron la casa de perros. 
 
 Los discípulos se asombraron de 
 
 The valleys abound with (of) 
 
 wheat. 
 They-filled the house with (of) 
 
 dogs. 
 The disciples were astonished at 
 sus palabras. (of) his words. 
 
 (a.) Olvidar, to forget, is followed by de only when it is used as a re- 
 flective verb ; as, 
 
 Olvidarse de lo pasado,* or, j To-forget the past. 
 
 Olvidar su nombre. i To forget his name. 
 
 * Literally, " to-forget oneself of the past." 
 14* 
 
162 OF THE VERB. 
 
 (b.) The verb ser, when used to imply property or possession, requires 
 the noun denoting the possessor to be preceded by the preposition de ; 
 as, 
 
 El libro es de mi padre. [ The book belongs to (is of) my fa- 
 
 I ther. 
 
 (c.) De generally precedes nouns which denote the causes of which 
 the verb explains the effect ; as, 
 
 He-trembles with (from) fear. 
 
 He-shivers with (of) cold. 
 
 His eyes were wet with (of) tears. 
 
 Tiembla de miedo. 
 
 Tirita de frió. 
 
 Sus ojos se bañaron de lágrimas, 
 
 331. When a noun refers to the instrument with which 
 the action of the verb is effected, it requires the preposi- 
 tion con before it ; when the noun is the name of the blow 
 and the object with which it is effected (see 257), it requires 
 the preposition de or con before it, when it is employed in 
 the singular number, and the preposition d when employed 
 in the plural ; as, 
 
 Los soldados le mataron con un 
 
 dardo. 
 Ellos le mataron de (or con) una 
 
 dardada. 
 Le mataron á dardadas. 
 
 The soldiers killed him with a dart. 
 
 They slew him with a blow-of-a- 
 
 dart. 
 They slew him by blows-of-a-dart. 
 
 (a.) Sometimes the preposition á is found preceding the name of the 
 instrument in the singular ; as, 
 
 Quien á hierro mata, á hierro I He-who with steel* kills, by steel 
 muere. I dies. 
 
 (6.) When the reflective verb meterse is used to signify to meddle, to 
 interfere, it requires the preposition con before the noun to which it 
 refers as its object, if such noun be the name of a person, and en if it be 
 the name of any thing inanimate : as, 
 
 No te metas con estas detractores. 
 
 No te metas en los negocios age- 
 nos. 
 
 Meddle not thyself with those slan- 
 derers. 
 
 Meddle not thyself in the affairs of- 
 others. 
 
 332. The preposition á (to) should not be used in Spanish when we 
 speak of motion merely directed towards a place, but hacia and 
 para; as, 
 
 * Literally, iron, meaning the sword. 
 
OF THE VERB. 163 
 
 Está caminando hacia Tolosa. I He-is journeying towards Tolosa. 
 
 Mi padre saliu para Madrid. I My father set-out^br Madrid. 
 
 (a.) Gerunds require the same prepositions as the verbs from which 
 they are derived ; as r 
 
 Acordándose de (330) sus obras. ¡ Remembering his works. 
 
 I^g^ The idiomatic use of many verbs followed by certain preposi- 
 tions will be found in the Appendix, Number III. 
 
 OF THE USE OF THE VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 
 
 333. The different parts of the verbs ser and estar are 
 generally to be rendered in English alike ; but in Spanish 
 these verbs are not used indiscriminately for each other. 
 Each predicates the existence of some property or quality 
 in an object ; but ser predicates absolute, and estar a rela- 
 tive existence. When the property or quality is essential, 
 natural, or inherent in the object, ser is to be used. When 
 the quality is not natural (that is, not produced by nature), 
 or when it is expressive of a transient state, estar is to be 
 used. Ser, then, is used to affirm what a thing is naturally 
 or by nature, or to express any permanent state or charac- 
 teristic quality or property of an object ; while estar is used 
 to affirm how a thing exists at any period of time, or where 
 any thing is or exists. Ser affirms what a thing is; estar 
 expresses how or where a thing is. Thus, el cuarto es espa- 
 cioso, " the room is spacious ;" with ser, because it tells what 
 the room is ; and el cuarto está limpio, " the room is clean ;" 
 with estar, because it tells how the room is. Juan está en 
 el campo, " John is in the country :" with estar, because it 
 tells where John is. " Mary ¿5 beautiful," affirms what 
 Mary is ; " Mary ¿5 glad," affirms how Mary is : and of 
 course es would be used in the former sentence, and está 
 in the latter. " Peter is sick," affirms how or in what state 
 Peter exists at a certain period of time, and estar must be 
 used ; thus, Pedro está enfermo ; but " Peter is sickly," 
 expresses what Peter is, namely, of a sickly or unhealthy 
 
164 OF THE VERB. 
 
 constitution, and ser must be used ; thus, Pedro es enfer- 
 mizo. 
 
 (a.) In Spanish it may be said, Carlos es ciego, or Carlos está ciego, 
 and each sentence would be rendered in English, "Charles is -blind." 
 But in ¿Spanish, the former would mean that Charles is blind by nature, 
 or permanently blind; and the latter that Charles is in a state of blind- 
 ness for the time being only, which might be the case from temporary 
 illness, or from dust thrown into his eyes. Esla muger es loca, means 
 "this woman is insane," that is, permanently destitute of reason; and 
 esta muger está loca, means " this woman is frantic;" that is, in a tem- 
 pe -rary fit or phrenzy, acting like a madman. In this latter case, está 
 might be rendered "■seems" or "appears," as, "this woman see?ns (or 
 acts like one) mad." So of a man of a generous disposition, it would 
 be said, "he is (es) generous;" but of a notorious miser, who might 
 happen on a certain occasion to exhibit a little generosity, it would be 
 said, " he is (está) generous ;" that is, he shows himself generous for 
 the time being, though generosity is no real trait in his character. Marta 
 es joven, means " Mary is young," that is, " Mary is a young woman ;" 
 youthfulness being at her period of life a natural (though not permanent) 
 state. We can also say, el viejo está joven, " the old-man is young," 
 that is, " the old-man seems young," " has a youthful appearance," or 
 " acts like a youth ;" estar being used because youthfulness is not natu- 
 ral to his years. 
 
 ^^° The right manner of using the verbs ser and estar being of great 
 importance, and yet attended with some difficulty to learners, we will 
 give a few more explicit rules, the substance of all, however, being con- 
 tained in the foregoing remarks. 
 
 334. Ser is used to affirm the existence of essential, 
 natural, permanent, or characteristic states or qualities of 
 the mind, persons or things, and to affirm what, or of what 
 a person or thing is, was, or will be ; as, 
 
 El yelo es frío. 
 El plomo es pesado. 
 Juan es bueno y sabio. 
 Soy soberbio. 
 Londres no es pequeña. 
 La miel es dulce. 
 El hombre es polvo. 
 Vmd. es rico. Es tarde. 
 Perdonar las injurias es obrar como 
 Cristianos. 
 
 Ice is cold. 
 Lead is heavy. 
 John is good and wise. 
 I-am proud. 
 London is not small. 
 Honey is sweet. 
 Man is dust. 
 
 You are rich. It is late. 
 To-forgive injuries is to act like 
 Christians. 
 
 Pedro era capitán, ahora es mayor, ! Peter was captain, now is major, 
 y será coronel. i and tcill-be colonel. 
 
OF THE VERB. 
 
 165 
 
 (a.) The natural beauties of the body, and its defects when regarded as 
 permanent, are affirmed with ser ; as, 
 Lucía es hermosa. ] Lucy is beautiful. 
 
 Ella es corcobada y ciega.* I She is hump-backed and blind. 
 
 (b.) The materials of which any thing is made are affirmed by ser ; 
 also the possession or destination of any thing ; as, 
 
 La taza es de oro. 
 La mesa es de cedro. 
 La corona es de la reina. 
 El libro es mió. 
 Cervantes es de Alcalá. 
 Este vino es de España. 
 Esta flor es para María. 
 La carta era para él. 
 Es de dia. Es de noche. 
 
 The cup is of gold. 
 The table is of cedar. 
 The crown is the queen's. 
 The book is mine. 
 Cervantes is from Alcalá. 
 This wine is from Spain. 
 This flower is for Mary. 
 The letter uas for him. 
 It-is day. It-is night. 
 
 335. Estar is used to affirm the temporary, non-natural, 
 accidental, or contingent condition or location of persons 
 or things, transient emotions of the mind ; that is, to 
 affirm how or where a thing exists, existed, or will exist, at 
 any period of time ; as, 
 
 Estoy alegre. 
 
 Está enfadado. Yo estaba ciego. t 
 
 El tiempo estará nublado. 
 
 El mar está airado. 
 
 I-am merry. 
 
 He- is angry. I-tras blind. 
 The weather will-be cloudy. 
 The sea is raging. 
 
 (a ) The physical changes, and state of the health of the animal body, 
 as also the chemical and mechanical changes of substances, are affirmed 
 by estar ; as, 
 
 Ella está enferma. 
 
 Estoy bueno. Yo estaba cojo. 
 
 La leche está agria. 
 
 El agua está caliente. 
 
 Vmd. está despierto. 
 
 La carne estaba asada. 
 
 She is unwell. 
 
 I-am well. I-íras lame. 
 
 The milk is sour. 
 
 The water is hot. 
 
 You are awake. 
 
 The meat was roasted. 
 
 (b.) In affirming any manner, situation, position, or location of per- 
 
 sons or things, estar is used ; as, 
 
 Juan está de moda. 
 Está de rodillas. 
 Estoy de prisa. 
 Estoy de tu parecer. 
 
 John is in the fashion. 
 He-is on (his) knees. 
 I-am in haste. 
 I-am of thy opinion. 
 
 ! That is, " permanently blind." t That is, " transiently blind." 
 
166 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Clara está en la iglesia 
 
 Estaba en la calle. 
 
 Están á la puerta. 
 
 La comida está en la mesa. 
 
 I Donde está mi padre 1 
 
 Está en la cama. 
 
 Estos quisantes ya están en flor. 
 
 Está entre dos .soldados. 
 
 Estaba en París. 
 
 Clara is in the church. 
 
 He-was in the, street. 
 
 They-are at the door. 
 
 The dinner is on the table. 
 
 Where is my father 1 
 
 He-is in bed. 
 
 These peas are already in blossom. 
 
 He-is between two soldiers. 
 
 He-was in Paris. 
 
 (c.) Estar (and not ser) is always employed before the gerund, since 
 this serves to show the manner of being occupied ; as, 
 
 Jorge está silbando. 
 Ella estará regañando. 
 Ellos están leyendo. 
 Estoy escribiendo. 
 
 George is whittling. 
 She will-be scolding. 
 They are reading. 
 1-am writing. 
 
 (d.) Estar is sometimes used with a preposition to form a particular 
 idiomatic phrase ; thus estar sin means " to be destitute of;" estar á, 
 "to understand ;" estar en, " to be resolved on," " to know." (See 338 ; 
 333, a.) 
 
 (e.) Ser and estar may sometimes be used with the same adjective, but 
 in such cases the meaning of the adjective can not remain the same, 
 since ser affirms what a person or thing is, and estar affirms how it is for 
 the time being ; as, 
 
 Es bueno. Está bueno. 
 Es malo. Está malo. 
 Es callado. Está callado. 
 Es cansado. Está cansado. 
 Es vivo. Está vivo. 
 Esta naranja es agria. 
 Esta naranja está agria. 
 
 ¡ He-is good. He-is well. 
 i He-is wicked. He-is ill. 
 
 He-is taciturn. He-is silent. 
 i He-is tiresome. He-is tired. 
 j He-is lively. He-is alive. 
 
 This orange is sour (of a sour kind). 
 I This orange is sour (unripe). 
 
 f^p^ The manner of using ser and estar in forming the passive voice. 
 has already been explained (see 322 and 322, a). 
 
 IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN VERBS. 
 
 336. Volver á, " to return," " to repeat," is used before an infinitive 
 when it is required to repeat the action denoted by the infinitive, in 
 which case the adverb "again" would be used in English, and the 
 infinitive be rendered in the same tense as volver ; as, 
 
 Volví á verle. 
 
 I-saw him again (literally ; I-re- 
 turned to see him). 
 
OF THE VERB. 167 
 
 Volvió á escribir la carta.* | He-re-wrote (or wrote again) the 
 
 | letter. 
 
 337. Acaber de, " to finish from," is used before an infinitive in the 
 sense of "to have just" and the infinitive is rendered in English as a 
 past participle ; as, 
 
 Juan acaba de llegar. I John has just arrived. 
 
 Acabo de verle. I 1-havejust seen him. 
 
 338. Estar para, " to be towards," is used before an infinitive in the 
 sense of "to be ready" or, "to be about to ;" as, 
 
 Estaban para acabar sus estudios. I They-were about to finish their 
 I studies. 
 
 (a.) Estar por, " to be for," is used before an infinitive to show that 
 the action implied in this infinitive is not yet performed, but that there 
 is a disposition to accomplish it; that is, in the sense of " to be not yet," 
 or, " to have a mind to;" as, 
 
 The house is to finish, i. e. the 
 house is not yet finished. 
 
 La casa está por acabar. 
 Estoy por ir á verle. 
 
 No han de hacer uso de ellos. 
 He de trabajar. 
 
 l-amfor going (or have a mind to 
 go) to see him. 
 
 (b.) Quedar por, " to remain lor," is used before an infinitive in the 
 same manner as estar por, in the sense of " to reviain yet ;" as, 
 
 La carta queda por escribir. I The letter remains yet to write (re- 
 
 I mains to be written). 
 
 339. Haber de, " to have of," is used before an infinitive in the sense 
 of "to be to," or i( must;" as, 
 
 They-are not to (must not) make 
 
 use of them. 
 I am to (I must) work (or, I have 
 
 to work). 
 
 340. Tener que, "to have what," is used before an infinitive in the 
 sense of "to have to," or '-'must;" as, 
 
 Tiene que levantarse al romper del | He-has to rise by break of day. 
 dia. 
 
 341. Llegar á, " to arrive at," is used before an infinitive in the sense 
 of "to come to" or "to succeed in ;" as, 
 
 * Literally, " he returned (or repeated) to write the letter." It must 
 be kept in mind that this is the usual mode in Spanish for expressing 
 the repetition of an action, instead of using a word corresponding to 
 "again" in English. 
 
168 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Cuando el hombre llega á gustar 
 los encantos de la virtud, la pre- 
 fiere al vicio. 
 
 When man comes to taste the de- 
 lights of virtue, he-prefers it to 
 vice. 
 
 á, "to come to," is used as llegar á, in the sense of " to 
 
 (a.) Venir 
 come to;" as, 
 
 Los dones vienen á ser perjuiciales. | Gifts come to be injurious. 
 
 342. Tener is used with the noun in such expressions as to be hot, 
 cold, hungry, thirsty, afraid, ashamed ; thus, to have heat, to have hunger, 
 to have fear, etc. ; which in English must be rendered by the verb to be 
 and the corresponding adjectives ; as, 
 
 Tiene hambre. Tiene temor. | He-is hungry. He-is afraid. 
 
 (a.) Hacer is used impersonally before nouns referring to the weather, 
 and is to be rendered by the verb to be, and sometimes with the adjec- 
 tive ; as, 
 Hace calor. Hace buen tiempo. ¡ It-is hot. It-is fair weather. 
 
 343. Tener is used in the sense of "to be," before nouns of measure- 
 ment, with the preposition de in the sense of " in;" as, 
 
 Goliáth tenía de altura seis codos ! Goliath vas in height six cubits 
 y un palmo. ! and a span. 
 
 344. Gustar, when it is to be rendered in English by " to like" has for 
 its nominative case in Spanish what is the objective in English, and its 
 objective in Spanish is the nominative in English, preceded by the pre- 
 position á, die sentence generally containing what in English would be 
 regarded as a redundant pronoun (see 235, b ; 235, c) ; as, 
 
 l Le gustan á vmd. patatas 1 I Do you like potatoes ? 
 
 Ella me gusta á mí. ! I like her. 
 
 £iy These sentences, rendered more literally, mean, "do potatoes 
 please (or suit) you?" " she -pleases me." 
 
 345. Faltar, when it is to be rendered in English by "to want," or 
 "to have need of" requires the same idiomatic construction of the sen- 
 tence as gustar (see 344) ; as, 
 
 Le faltan tres vasos. ! He wants (or needs) three tumblers. 
 
 A Pedro no le falta dinero. 1 Peter wants (or needs) not money. 
 
 B2P"* Rendered more literally, these examples mean, " three tumblers 
 are wanting to (or needed by) him ;" " to Peter money is not wanting." 
 
 (a.) Hacer f alia, " to make need," is used in the same manner as gus- 
 tar and faltar (see 344, 345), in the sense of " to have need of" "to stand 
 in need of;" as, 
 
 Me hace mucha falta el consejo de ¡ I stand in much need of your ud- 
 vmd. I vice. 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 169 
 
 f¡3F* More iiterally rendered, this example would be, "the advice of 
 your-worship makes much need to (is much needed by) me." 
 
 346. Pesar, when it is to be rendered in English by " to repent of," 
 <£ to be sorry for," is subject to the same peculiarity of construction as 
 gustar and faltar (see 344, 345), except that it is used before an infini- 
 tive with the preposition de, which infinitive would in English be used 
 as a participle ; as, 
 
 A Dios le pesa de haber hecho rey I God repents of having made Saul 
 á Saul. 1 king. 
 
 %¡¡T "It-repents God for having made Saul a king," would be a more 
 literal rendering of this last example. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 347. Adverbs are either derivative (or primitive), or ad- 
 verbial phrases. (See 225 ; 225, a.) 
 
 348. The simple adverb, when it qualifies a verb, gener- 
 ally comes after the verb ; as, 
 
 La religion expresa sublimemente | Religion expresses this truth sub- 
 esta verdad. I limely. 
 
 (a.) There can be no regular rules given for the position of the adverb ; 
 in most instances it may vary according to the taste of the writer. 
 Some adverbs generally precede the verb ; such are, cuando, when ; 
 luego, immediately ; apenas, scarcely ; cuanto, as much ; donde, where ; 
 and negative and interrogative adverbs. 
 
 349. The adverb, when it qualifies an adjective or another adverb, 
 generally comes before the word it qualifies ; as, 
 
 Ella es muy ignorante. J She is very ignorant. 
 
 He obrado muy neciamente. I I-have acted very foolishly. 
 
 350. Adverbs, like adjectives, admit of comparison ; as, 
 
 They-praise more the dead than 
 
 the living. 
 They-receive more gladly tlian 
 
 Alaban mas á los muertos que á los 
 vivos. 
 
 Reciben mas alegremente que dan. 
 
 they-give. 
 
 (a.) The adverb no is sometimes used in comparisons in a manner 
 that does not imply a negation, in which case it would be redundant in 
 English, and might be properly omitted in Spanish ; as, 
 
 Mejor es el buen nombre que no I Better is the good name than the 
 las riquezas. I riches. 
 
 15 
 
170 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 351. Muy, "very," "very much," is used to qualify adjectives, parti- 
 ciples, and other adverbs, but is never used to modify verbs. Mucho, 
 " much," "very much," is used to qualify verbs and sometimes adverbs 
 of comparison; as, 
 
 Ella es muy rica. 
 
 Lucía lee muy bien. 
 
 Para amar mucho al hombre, pre- 
 ciso es estimarle mucho. 
 
 Te has hecho mucho mas poderoso 
 que nosotros. 
 
 She is very rich. 
 
 Lucy reads very well. 
 
 In-order to-love a man "much, it-is 
 
 necessaiy to esteem him much. 
 Thou-hast made thyself much more 
 
 mighty than we. 
 
 (a.) Muy sometimes is employed to qualify nouns, especially at the 
 beginning of a note or letter addressed to any person ; as, 
 
 Muy amigo mio. Very much my friend (dear friend). 
 
 Muy caballero. Very much a gentleman (dear sir). 
 
 Muy señor mio. Very much my gentleman (dear 
 
 sir). 
 Muy señora mia. Very much my lady (dear madam). 
 
 (b.) Bien, joined to adjectives or adverbs, is equivalent to very; as, 
 bien rico, "very rich;" and to verbs, much; as, él bebió bien, "he drank 
 much." 
 
 352. Negative adverbs and all negations generally pre- 
 cede the verb ; as, 
 
 No puede escribir. I He-can not write. 
 
 A ninguno dio el libro. I To no-one gave-he the book. 
 
 (a.) If a word implying negation come after the verb, the adverb no 
 must precede the verb ; as, 
 
 No dio el libro á ninguno. I He-gave the book to no-one. 
 
 No tiene nada. I He-has nothing. 
 
 (b.) From the last two rules it will be seen that, in Spanish, it can be 
 said, nada tiene, or no tiene nada, "he-has nothing;" á ninguno habló, 
 or no habló á ninguno, "he-spoke to nobody;" ella nunca ha hablado, or 
 ella no ha hablado nunca, " she has never spoken." 
 
 (c.) Nunca, "never," and jamas, "never," are sometimes both used 
 in a sentence to give additional force to the negation ; as, 
 
 Nunca jamas tendrá sed. | Never, never will- he-be thirsty. 
 
 (d.) Jamas, "never," is used with siempre, "always," in the sense of 
 " ever and ever ;" as, 
 Dios reina por siempre jamas. \ God reigns for ever and ever. 
 
 (e.) In interrogative sentences, jamas is rendered by ever in English ; 
 as, i ha jamas hablado 1 " has he ever spoken 7" 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 171 
 
 353. Si, "yes," and no, "no," when used after verbs in such sentences 
 as, "he replied no," "they answered yes." "I believe not" take que be- 
 fore them in Spanish ; as, 
 
 Me dijeron que no. I They-told me no. 
 
 Respondió que si. Creo que no. I He replied yes. I-think not. 
 
 (a.) Si, " 3 r es," and no, "no," serve to affirm or deny what is predi- 
 cated in a preceding verb without repeating the verb ; as, 
 
 Yo no sé nadar, y Juan si. I I know not how to swim and John 
 
 does (yes). 
 Ella pueda cantar, pero yo no. | She can sing but I can not (no). 
 
 354. Derivative adverbs are nearly all formed from 
 adjectives, by suffixing mente, which in Spanish corres- 
 ponds to ly added to adjectives in English ; as, 
 
 Cierto ; ciertamente. j Certain ; certainly. 
 
 Bastante ; bastantemente. I Sufficient ; sufficiently. 
 
 (a.) When more adverbs than one ending with mente qualify the same 
 verb, the suffix mente, for the purpose of preventing a disagreeable repe- 
 tition of sound, is placed to the last adverb only ; as, 
 
 Mi ánimo es explicar lisa y llana- I My intention is to explain clearly 
 mente. I and plainly. 
 
 £2^ It would not be more correct to say in Spanish explicar lisa- 
 mente y llanamente, than it would to say in English (what the Spanish 
 idiom literally requires), " to explain clear and plainly." 
 
 355. Two or more words used in connection to qualify a 
 verb or adjective, are called an adverbial phrase or adverbial 
 locution : such are por cierto, " for certain ;" alo menos, " at 
 least j" por lo común, £< in general." 
 
 Remark. — In all languages there are certain phrases used adverbially, 
 the words of which, taken collectively, have an idiomatic meaning, but 
 taken separately, would make no sense. Thus in English the adverbial 
 locutions " by and by" " at least," "none at all," would signify nothing 
 intelligible if taken literally, word by word ; but as adverbial phrases, 
 they are very expressive. It is often thus in Spanish : a mere literal 
 translation of the words will do little or nothing toward assisting us to 
 comprehend the meaning. Such phrases will generally be found explain- 
 ed in their adverbial sense in dictionaries. Some of the most common 
 are given in the list on the next two pages. 
 
172 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 356. Explanation of certain Adverbial Phrases : 
 
 ADVERBIAL LOCU- 
 
 MEANING IN 1 ADVERBIAL LOCU- 
 
 ENGLISH. TIONS. 
 
 MEANING IN 
 
 TIONS. 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 ¡A conciencia, 
 
 conscientiously, j A saltos y cúrco- 
 
 A la verdad, 
 
 truly. j| vos, by Jits and starts. 
 
 A vista de ojos, 
 
 evidently ; at a' A la corta 6 á la 
 
 
 glance. 
 
 larga, sooner or later. 
 
 A sabiendas, 
 
 knowingly. 
 
 A ojos cerrados, without reflection ; 
 
 Al seguro, 
 
 securely. 
 
 rashly. 
 
 A' buen seguro, 
 
 certainly. 
 
 ! Al ojo, at sight. 
 
 Antes con antes, 
 
 is soo7i as possible. 
 
 Al punto, instantly. 
 
 Ahora, ahora, just now. 
 
 Atientas, in a groping man- 
 
 A cuestas, 
 
 on one's shoulder 
 
 ner. 
 
 
 or back. 
 
 A mas tirar, to the utmost. 
 
 A porfía, 
 
 zmulously. 
 
 A tuerto ó á dere- right or wrong ; 
 
 A gatas, 
 
 on all fours. 
 
 cho, hit or miss. j 
 
 A coces, 
 
 by dint of kicking; 
 
 A secas y sin without prepara-, 
 
 
 by kicks. 
 
 Hover, tion or advice. 
 
 A mas correr, 
 
 with the utmost 
 
 A solas, by one's self; in' 
 
 
 speed. 
 
 private. 
 
 A mas tardar, 
 
 after great delay. 
 
 A buena luz, carefully; with 
 
 A la improvista, 
 
 unexpectedly. 
 
 due examination. 
 
 A trechos, 
 
 at intervals. 
 
 A dos luces, ambiguously. 
 
 A una, 
 
 agether; in com- 
 
 A trompa y tale- helter-skelter; con- 
 
 
 pany. 
 
 ga, fusedly. 
 
 A la continua, continually. 
 
 Baxo mano, in an underhand- \ 
 
 A hecho, 
 
 indiscriminately. 
 
 ed manner. 
 
 Al paso que, 
 
 In proportion as. 
 
 Bien como, just as. 
 
 A pié, 
 
 onfoot. 
 
 Casi casi, very nearly. 
 
 A buen hora, 
 
 zarly ; seasonably. 
 
 Cuanto antes, as soon as possible . 
 
 A la hora, at the nick of time. 
 
 Cuanto tiempo, how long. 
 
 Algún tiempo 
 
 
 Cuando menos, at least. 
 
 hace, some time since. 
 
 Cuando mucho, at most. 
 
 Al revés, wrong side out- 
 
 De contado, readily ; immedi- 
 
 
 wards; on the 
 
 ately. 
 
 
 contrary way. 
 
 De seguro, of course. 
 
 A mas no poder, with all one's 
 
 De cuando en from time to time;] 
 
 
 might. 
 
 cuando, now and then, j 
 
 A la sordina, noiselessly ; slyly. 
 
 De improviso, unexpectedly ; on 
 
 A escondidas, > secretly. 
 
 a sudden. 
 
 A escondidillas, ) stealthily. 
 
 De aquí para allí, to and fro ; here 
 
 Al buen punto, pointedly ; oppor- 
 
 and there. 
 
 
 tunely. 
 
 De antes, of old ; of yore. 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 173 
 
 ADVERBIAL LOCU- 
 
 MEANING IN 
 
 ADVERBIAL LOCU- 
 
 MEANING IN 
 
 TIONS. 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 TIONS. 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 De continuo, continually. 
 
 La semana pasada, last week. 
 
 De intento, purposely. 
 
 La semana que 
 
 
 De proposito, on purpose. 
 
 viene, 
 
 xext week» 
 
 De hecho, in fact; actually. 
 
 Mucho tiempo ha,long time ago. 
 
 De noche, by night. 
 
 Mañana á la 
 
 
 ¡De dia, by day. 
 
 noche, 
 
 to-morrow night. 
 
 De salto, suddenly. 
 
 No bien, no sooner; scarcely. 
 
 De por sí, by one' 1 s self ; apart. 
 
 No mucho ha, 
 
 not long since ; a 
 
 De silla á silla, face to face. 
 
 
 short time ago. 
 
 De tropel, in confusion ; pell- 
 
 Por atrás, 
 
 behind. 
 
 mell. 
 
 Poco ha, 
 
 of late ; lately. 
 
 De lance, cheaply ; second- 
 
 Poco á poco, 
 
 by degrees. 
 
 hand. 
 
 Por el tanto, 
 
 on tluit ground; 
 
 De repente, suddenly. 
 
 
 for the reason. 
 
 De rodillas, on one's knees. 
 
 Por entonces, 
 
 at that time. 
 
 De consiguiente, consequently. 
 
 Por supuesto, 
 
 of course. 
 
 De veras; de verdad, truly. 
 
 Por puntos, from one moment 
 
 En conciencia, in good earnest. 
 
 
 to another. 
 
 En especial, especially. 
 
 Por salto, 
 
 on a sudden. 
 
 En seguida, afterward. 
 
 Por lo largo, 
 
 along. 
 
 En tanto, ) in the mean time ; 
 Entre tanto, > whilst. 
 
 Por razón, 
 
 zonsequently. 
 
 Por fin, finally. 
 
 En alguna parte, somewhere. 
 
 Por instantes, 
 
 incessantly. 
 
 En ninguna parte, nowhere. 
 
 Por poco, 
 
 hut little ; nearly. 
 
 ¡En otra parte, elsewhere. 
 
 Por acá ó por allá,/iere or there. 
 
 En alguna otra parte } someichere else. 
 
 Por encima, 
 
 superficially. 
 
 En ninguna otra 
 
 Pocas veces, 
 
 seldom. 
 
 ¡ parte, noichere else. 
 
 Rara vez, 
 
 not often; seldom. 
 
 En cualquiera parte, any where. 
 
 Rato ha, 
 
 9I10H time ago. 
 
 En adelante, forward ; in the 
 
 Sin suelo, 
 
 without bounds; 
 
 future. 
 
 
 to excess. 
 
 En lo sucesivo, afterward ; here- 
 
 Sobre seguro, 
 
 confidently : se- 
 
 after. 
 
 
 curely. 
 
 El año que viene,near/ year. 
 
 Sin ton y sin son, 
 
 without rhyme or 
 
 En derechura, by the most direct way. 
 
 
 reason. 
 
 En piernas, bare-legged. 
 
 Sobre manera, 
 
 excessively. 
 
 En resumen, in short; briefly. 
 
 Sobre sí, 
 
 separately ; sel- 
 
 Hasta no mas, to the highest pitch. 
 
 
 fishly. 
 
 Hasta que, as far as. 
 
 Tal vez, 
 
 oerhaps ; once at 
 
 H °y dia > I now-a-days. 
 ¡Hoy en dia, ) 
 
 
 a time. 
 
 ¡Una vez, 
 
 once. 
 
 Hoy por hoy, this very day. 
 
 Ya ha rato, 
 
 some time ago. 
 
174 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 §3T* Very few adverbial phrases can be literally translated from one 
 language to another so as to give a correct idea of their meaning : thus, 
 of those in the above list, á mas correr literally means, " to more to 
 run;" algún tiempo hace, "some time it makes ;" avias no poder, "to 
 more not to be able ;" de cuando en cuando, " of when in when ;" en lo 
 sucesivo, "in that which is successive." Occasionally such a phrase 
 may be found of which a literal translation will furnish a sufficient expla- 
 nation of its meaning; as, en alguna otra parte, "in some other part;" 
 en ninguna parte, " in no part ;" la semana pasada, " the week past ;" la 
 semana que viene, " the week which comes ;" pocas veces, "few times." 
 
 357. Adverbs are variously classified according to' their 
 signification, as follows : 
 
 I. Adverbs of time; present, past, future, and indefinite, 
 (a.) Adverbs of time present ; as. ahora, now ; hoy, to-day. 
 (6.) Adverbs of time past; as, ayer, yesterday; entonces, then, 
 (c.) Adverbs of time future ; as, mañana, to-morrow. 
 
 (d.) Adverbs of time indefinite; as, cuando, when; siempre, always; 
 temprano, early. 
 
 II. Adverbs of place ; in a place, to a place, toward a place, and from 
 a place. 
 
 (a.) In a place; as, donde, where; aquí, here; allá, yonder; dentro, 
 within. 
 
 (b.) To a place; as, ¿adonde? whither? acá, hither, 
 (c.) Toward a place ; as, ¿ hacia donde ? whitherward 1 
 (d.) From a place ; as, de allí, thence ; de donde, whence. 
 
 III. Adverbs of order ; as, primero, first; finalmente, finally. 
 
 IV. Adverbs of quality; as, confusamente, confusedly; bien, well. 
 V. Adverbs of quantity; as, poco, little; bastantemente, sufficiently. 
 
 VI. Adverbs of affirmation and certainty; as, si, yes; ciertamente, 
 certainly. 
 
 VII. Adverbs of negation and uncertainty ; as, no, no ; dudosamente, 
 doubtfully ; acaso, quizá, perhaps. 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 358. Conjunctions are simple, that is, such as consist of a 
 single word, or conjunctive phrases, such as consist of more 
 than one word. They may be divided according to their 
 meaning into the following classes : 
 
 I. Copulative, which simply unite words or sentences together ; as, 
 y, and (see 226, a) ; también, also. 
 
OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 175 
 
 II. Disjunctive, which connect words or sentences at the same time 
 that they disjoin the sense ; as, 6, or (see 226, b). 
 
 III. Adversative, which express opposition of meaning while they con- 
 
 nect ; as, mas, but ; pero, but ; sin embargo, notwithstanding. 
 
 IV. Comparative, which serve to compare words or propositions ; as, 
 
 como, as ; así, so ; como si, as if. 
 V. Conditional, which express a condition; as, si, if; con tal que, 
 provided that. 
 VI. Concessive, which serve to express something granted; as, aunque, 
 even if; dado que, granted that. 
 VII. Conclusive, which express a conclusion or inference ; as, de aquí, 
 hence ; por esto, therefore. 
 Casual, which express a cause or reason ; as, porque, because ; 
 
 pues que, since. 
 Temporal, which serve to express a relation of time; as, antes 
 que, before ; después que, after. 
 X. Final, which express an end or purpose ; as, para que, that, in 
 order that ; ájin de que, to the end that. 
 
 VIII 
 
 IX. 
 
 MANNER OF USING CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS. 
 359. Sino, meaning "but," is used after a negative, unless the verb be 
 repeated ; and pero or mas, also meaning " but," is used when no nega- 
 tive precedes ; as, 
 
 El reino de Dios no está en pala- 
 bras, sino en virtud. 
 
 Ella es hermosa, pero (or mas) no 
 es prudente. 
 
 The kingdom of God is not in 
 words, but in power. 
 
 She is beautiful, but she is not pru- 
 dent. 
 
 (a.) If after a negative the verb be repeated, pero or mas is to be used 
 instead of sino; as, 
 Ella no lo dijo á Juan, pero (or mas) I She did not tell it to John, but she 
 
 lo dijo á Pedro. I told it to Peter. 
 
 360. Sino, meaning " except," is used after an interrogation or after a 
 negative ; and menos, also meaning " except," is used when no interro- 
 gation or negative precedes ; both words being rendered in English by 
 "but;" as, 
 
 ¿Quién lo hizo sino el carpintero? 
 Ninguno hay bueno, sino solo 
 
 Dios. 
 Vinieron todos menos el juez. 
 
 Who did it but the carpenter 1 
 There-is no one good, but God 
 
 alone. 
 They all came but the judge. 
 
 361. The conjunction " but " is used in English with such a variety 
 of meanings that it is necessary, before rendering it into Spanish, to find 
 what other word or words it really represents, as this latter word or 
 phrase is generally that which is used to represent it in Spanish ; thus, 
 
176 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 (a.) I am-distant from death but 
 
 [only] one step. 
 (6.) We have but [no more than] 
 
 five loaves and two fishes, 
 (c.) He-arrived but [not till] yester- 
 day. 
 (d.) I can not but [do less than] go. 
 (e.) He has but [done no more than] 
 
 gone (i. e. he has but just gone). 
 (./".) But [if it were not] for me, he- 
 
 would-perish. 
 {g.) There-is no-one of them but 
 
 [who is nut] is a general. 
 (h.) He-went no day to-the village 
 
 but [that not] he-returned drunk. 
 
 Ün solo paso disto yo de la muerte. 
 
 No tenemos mas de (270, a) cinco 
 
 panes y dos peces. 
 No llegó hasta ayer. 
 
 Yo no puedo menos de ir. 
 El no ha hecho mas que irse. 
 
 Si no fuese por mí, él perecería. 
 
 No hay ninguno de ellos que no sea 
 general. 
 
 Ningún dia fué al lugar que no vol- 
 vió borracho. 
 
 12^ It will at once be perceived that the irregularity in the use of the 
 word " but" is chargeable to the English, not the Spanish language. In 
 the latter, "but" is not used with ten different meanings as in English. 
 
 362. The conjunction "unless" is to be rendered in Spanish by d 
 menos de que, or bythe word or words which it really represents; as, 
 
 Nada hará, á menos de que vmd. le 
 hable 
 
 Ninguno puede hacer estos mila- 
 gros, si Dios no estuviere con él. 
 
 (a.) He-will-do nothing unless you 
 
 speak (may-speak) to him. 
 (b.) No-one can do these miracles 
 
 unless [if not] God be (should-be) 
 
 with him. 
 
 363. The conjunction "except" when it means the same as "unless," 
 is rendered in Spanish in the same manner (362) ; and when it means 
 privation, as, for instance, in the sentence, " I bought all his books 
 except the histories," it is rendered by menos, "less," "minus." (See 
 360.) 
 
 364. The conjunction "whether" is to be rendered in Spanish by si or 
 que, and sometimes by the subjunctive of the verb ser : as, 
 
 (a.) I doubt whether [that] thou- 
 
 hast any oil. 
 (b.) I asked him whether [if] his 
 
 Dudo que tengas aceite. 
 
 Le pregunté si su madre vendría. 
 
 mother would come, 
 (c.) Whether he-may have grapes 
 
 or not, is nothing to me. 
 (d.) Whether it rains, or whether it 
 
 rains not. 
 (e.) Whether or not we-may-be {let 
 
 us be or not) worthy of such an 
 
 honor. 
 
 365. The conjunction "as" is rendered by "como" when used by way 
 
 Que tenga uvas 6 no, nada me im- 
 porta. 
 Que llueva ó que no llueva. 
 
 Seamos 6 no dignos de tal honra. 
 
OP THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 177 
 
 of comparison; by así como, when followed by "so;" by cuando, when 
 it means " when;" and after mismo by que ; as, 
 
 (a.) John is as* strong as a lion. 
 
 (6.) As modesty attracts, so disso- 
 luteness repels. 
 
 (c) He-saw her as [when] he-was- 
 going home. 
 
 (d.) It-is not the same to-promise 
 as to-fulfil. 
 
 Juan es tan fuerte como un león. 
 Así como la modestia atrae, así 
 
 huye la disolución. 
 La vio cuando iba á casa. 
 
 No es L 
 plir. 
 
 mismo prometer que cum- 
 
 366. The conjunction " neither" followed by " nor" is rendered in 
 Spanish by ni; and "nor" also by the same word ; as, 
 
 Swear not, neither by heaven, nor I No juréis, ni por el cielo, ni por la 
 by the earth, nor any other oath. I tierra, ni otro juramento alguno. 
 
 (a.) At the end of a sentence, "neither," and also "either," if preceded 
 by a negative, are rendered by tampoco ; as, 
 
 She will not do it, nor he either (or I Ella no quiero hacerlo, ni él tam- 
 neither). I poco. 
 
 367. The conjunction "either," followed by "or," is rendered in both 
 cases by 6 (see 226, b) ; as, 
 
 Either he-is a knave or he-is a fool. | O' es picaro 6 es tonto. 
 
 368. The conjunction "both," followed by "and" is rendered by así 
 or tanto, and the " and" by como; as, 
 
 (a.) Both John and James will-be Así Juan como Diego estarán aquí. 
 
 here. 
 
 (b.) Both in time of peace and in Tanto en tiempo de paz, como en 
 
 time of war. tiempo de guerra. 
 
 E2F* These examples might be rendered by " as well as;" thus, "John 
 as well as James will be here ;" " in time of peace as well as in time of 
 war." 
 
 369. The conjunction "lest," when it means "for fear that," is ren- 
 dered by no ser que; when it means " in order that not," by para que no; 
 and when it means simply "that not," by que no; as, 
 
 (a.) Thou wilt-accompany him to 
 his house directly, lest any acci- 
 dent may-happen to-him. 
 
 (6.) Love not sleep, lest want may- 
 oppress thee. 
 
 (c.) We were-careful lest you should 
 awake. 
 
 Tú le acompañarás á su casa al 
 instante, no sea que le suceda 
 algún fracaso. 
 
 No ames el sueño, para que no te 
 oprima la indigencia. 
 
 Cuidábamos de que no se desper- 
 tase vmd. 
 
 * The first "as" is here an adverb, qualifying the adjective "strong ;" 
 
178 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 370. The conjunction "rather" when used in the sense of "but," is 
 rendered by antes or antes bien ; as, 
 I do not owe him anything ; rather I Yo no le debe nada, antes bien él 
 
 he owes me something. I me debe algo. 
 
 83T The manner of using other conjunctions will be found in other 
 parts of the work. 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 371. The prepositions are employed in such a variety 
 of ways in Spanish and in English, especially in the latter 
 language, that each one is not always to be rendered from 
 one language to the other by the same word. Thus de is 
 not always to be translated into English by of; nor of into 
 Spanish always by de. . The following observations will 
 Serve to show the manner in which the prepositions are to 
 be used. 
 
 372. About, when it means "through," is rendered by por; when it 
 means " on," by sobre; when it means " within," by en; when it means 
 " of," by de ; as, 
 
 Ella iba cantando por el lugar. 
 
 Locke escribió sobre el Cristian- 
 ismo. 
 Ellos están en el palacio. 
 No habla de política en público. 
 
 (a.) She went singing about the 
 village. 
 
 (6.) Locke wrote about Christian- 
 ity. 
 
 (c.) They are about the palace. 
 
 (d.) He does not talk about poli- 
 tics in public. 
 
 373. Above is rendered by sobre; as, 
 
 The bird flies above the earth. ] El ave vuela sobre la tierra. 
 
 374. Against, meaning "in opposition to," or "contrary to," is render- 
 ed by contra ; as, 
 
 (a.) They fought against the Mexi- 
 cans. 
 (6.) Against the law. 
 
 375. After, meaning " later in time," is rendered by después de ; when 
 it means "according to," by á¡ or segun ; and when it means "immedi- 
 ately behind," by tras ; as, 
 
 (a.) After six o'clock. | Después de las seis. 
 
 Ellos pelearon contra los Mejicanos. 
 Contra la ley. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 179 
 
 A' la moda francesa. 
 
 Según este modo. 
 
 Echa la soga tras el caldero. 
 
 (6.) After the French fashion, 
 (c.) After this manner. 
 (d.) He throws the rope after the 
 bucket. 
 
 376. According to is rendered by segun, and sometimes by para 
 con; as, 
 
 (a.) According to the orders of your- Segun los ordenes de vmd. 
 
 worship. 
 (6.) According to him it-is-worth 
 
 nothing. 
 
 377. Among, when it means " of the number of" is rendered by entre 
 or para entre; when it means "in the midst of" by en medio de; and 
 when it means "in" by en; as, 
 
 Para con él no vale nada. 
 
 (a.) Among the men there-is not 
 one that is upright. 
 
 (b.) Among friends compliments 
 are unnecessary. 
 
 (c.) I send you as lambs among 
 wolves. 
 
 (d.) Among many nations there- 
 was not a king like him. 
 
 Entre los hombres no hay uno, 
 que sea recto. 
 
 Para entre amigos los cumplimien- 
 tos son escusados. 
 
 Yo os envió como corderos en 
 medio de .lobos. 
 
 En muchas naciones no había rey 
 semejante á él. 
 
 378. At, when it denotes "in" or "on," is rendered by en; when it 
 denotes proximity, precedes the price of any thing or the time of day, or 
 means "in readiness for," it is rendered by á; as, 
 
 (a.) They are at home. 
 
 They are at peace. 
 (6.) John is at Rome, 
 (c.) They are at sea. 
 (d.) At the bridge. At hand, 
 (e.) At six dollars a bushel. 
 
 At four o'clock. 
 (/.) He-is at my command. 
 
 At work. 
 
 Ellos están en casa. 
 Ellos están en paz. 
 Juan está en Roma. 
 Ellos están en la mar. 
 Al puente. A la mano 
 A seis pesos la fanega. 
 A las cuatro. 
 Está á mi mando. 
 Al trabajo. 
 
 379. Before, meaning "in the presence of," is rendered by ante; mean- 
 ing "in front of" or the opposite of behind, by delante de; meaning 
 precedence in rank, or previous in time (that is, the opposite of after), by 
 antes de ; as, 
 
 (a.) The cause will-be brought be- 
 fore the judges. 
 
 (6.) He-went before them to point- 
 out the way. 
 
 (c.) Prostrated on the earth before- 
 the ark of- the Lord. 
 
 La causa se llevará ante los jueces. 
 
 Iba delante de ellos para monstrar 
 
 el camino. 
 Prostrado en tierra delante del arca 
 
 del Señor. 
 
180 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 A'ntes de los Marqueses van los 
 
 Duques. 
 A'ntes de anochecer. A'ntes del día. 
 
 Detras de ellos, 
 
 (d.) The Dukes take-rank before 
 
 the Marquises, 
 (e.) Before night-fall. Before day. 
 
 380. Behind is rendered by tras-, or detras de ; as, 
 Behind the door. Behind them. [ Tras la puerta, 
 
 381. Below is rendered by debajo de; as, 
 
 Below the lip. J Debajo del labio. 
 
 382. Between is rendered by entre; as^ 
 
 To-discern between the good and I Discernir eníre lo bueno y lo malo, 
 the evil. I 
 
 383. Z?y, meaning "at" or "in," is rendered by de (see also 299, a; 
 323; 323, 6/ 331); meaning future time when, by para; meaning 
 "close to" or " along side of" by junto á ; and meaning "through" by 
 por; as, 
 
 (a.) By day. i?y night. 
 
 (6.) I shall-need it all by Saturday. 
 
 (c.) Please to seat yourself by the 
 
 window. 
 (d.) He-has made himself rich by 
 
 wicked means. 
 
 De día. De noche. 
 
 V'o lo necesitaré todo para el sábado. 
 
 Sírvase vmd. sentarse junto á la 
 ventana. 
 
 Se ha hecho rico por malos me- 
 dios. 
 
 Tocante á esta pendencia. 
 
 384. Concerning, meaning "about" or "in regard to," is rendered by 
 acerca de or tocante á ; as, 
 
 (a.) Concerning that which we- Acerca de lo que hemos hablado. 
 
 have spoken. 
 (&.) Concerning (or touching) this 
 
 affair. 
 
 385. For, meaning " during f "on account of ]" "for the sake of " or 
 "in. behalf of ;" "in exchange for f* "for the purpose of getting f 
 1 as ;" " by" (per) ; is rendered by por ; and when it means "for the use 
 of" or " with the intention of going to," it is rendered by para ; as, 
 
 (a.) Can you give me a room for 
 this night 1 
 
 (b.) They-think that for much 
 speaking they-will be heard. 
 
 (c.) They-died,/ór their country. 
 
 (d.) I will give him my ñute for his 
 violin. 
 
 (e.) To-gofor money. 
 
 (/.) She received him for a hus- 
 band. 
 
 ¿Puede vmd. darme un cuarto por 
 esta noche ? 
 
 Piensan que por mucho hablar se- 
 rán oídos. 
 
 Murieron por su patria. 
 
 Le daré mi flauta por su violin. 
 
 Ir por dinero. 
 
 Ella le recibió por esposo. 
 
OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 181 
 
 For a beginner he has done it 
 well. 
 (g.) How much for a day 1 
 (h.) I-have-bought it for my wife, 
 (i.) He set out for Spain. 
 
 Para un principiante lo ha hecho 
 
 bien. 
 ¿Cuánto por día? 
 Lo he comprado para mi muger. 
 Saliu para España. 
 
 (j.) For is sometimes used in English when it would not be in Span- 
 ish ; thus, " I want to alight for a moment," necesito bajar un momento. 
 Por is sometimes used in Spanish when it would be redundant in Eng- 
 lish ; as, uno vale por muchos, "one is- worth many." 
 
 386. From, when it means "since" or "from the time of" and "of 
 distance from" is generally rendered by desde; in other cases, by de; as, 
 
 (a.) From childhood thou-hast- 
 known the holy Scriptures. 
 
 Desde la niñez aprendiste las sagra- 
 das letras. 
 
 Hay cincuenta millas desde Vera- 
 Cruz á Jalapa. 
 
 ¿Cuando ha vuelto vmd. del cam- 
 po? 
 
 387. In, meaning "in the time of" "within" and "into," is rendered 
 by en; when it means "through the course of" or "during," by por ; 
 and when, after superlatives or other adjectives, it means " of" by 
 de; as, 
 
 (o.) It-is fifty miles from Vera 
 
 Cruz to Jalapa, 
 (c.) When did you return from-the 
 
 country ? 
 
 (a.) In the winter. In Spain. 
 
 (6.) In the morning. 
 
 (c.) This ward is one of the best in 
 
 the city. 
 (d.) Austere in disposition. 
 
 En el invierno. En España. 
 
 Por la mañana. 
 
 Este barrio es de los mejores de la 
 
 ciudad. 
 Acre de genio. 
 
 3S8. Instead of is rendered by por; and by en lugar de, when it means 
 " in the place of;" as, 
 
 (a.) He-came instead of his father. 
 
 (b.) Archelaus was-reigning in Ju- 
 
 dea instead of Herod his father. 
 
 Vino él por su padre. 
 Arque! ás reinaba en Judéa en lugar 
 de Herodes su padre. 
 
 389. Into, when it comes after the verb "enter," and when it means 
 " inside of ," is rendered by en; but after all verbs of motion (to enter 
 excepted) it is rendered by á; as, 
 
 •a.) Let-us-enter into this grove. Entremos en este bosque. 
 
 (b.) Pour oil into the lamp. Eche vmd. aciete en la lámpara, 
 
 (c.) Let-us-go into-the dining- Vamos al comedor, 
 room. 
 
 390. Of is rendered by de ; as, 
 
 A friend of the king. | Un amigo del rey. 
 
 391. On or upon, meaning "along," is rendered by en; meaning 
 
 16 
 
182 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITION. 
 
 "through" by por; meaning "by," it is rendered byde; and meaning 
 "in contact with the upper surface of any thing" by sobre; as, 
 
 (a.) Is-there danger on (or upon) i Hay peligro en el camino 1 
 
 the road 1 
 (&.) Nothing ought to be affirmed 
 
 upon mere probability, 
 (c.) Man lives not on bread alone. 
 (d.) It is on (or upon) the chair. 
 
 Nada debe afirmarse por una mera 
 
 probabiüdad. 
 El hombre no vive de solo pan. 
 Está sobre la silla. 
 
 (e.) Sometimes on is rendered by á; as, á caballo, "on horseback;" á 
 pié, " on foot ;" á bordo, " on board." Upon, after the verbs, to count, rely, 
 etc., is rendered by con; as, contó con la amistad de Diego, " I rely upon 
 the friendship of James." 
 
 (/.) When on in English is used before the days of the week or month, 
 it is not rendered in Spanish ; thus, ella llegó allí el sábado, " she arrived, 
 there on Saturday." 
 
 392. Out of, meaning " removed from," "beyond," and " outside of " 
 is rendered by fuera de; meaning "on account of" by por ; meaning 
 "from," by de ; as, 
 
 (a.) Out of danger. 
 
 (b.) Out of my power. 
 
 (c.) I have beans that are out of the 
 
 ground. 
 id.) Out of friendship, 
 (e,) He-drinks out of a tumbler. 
 
 Fuera de peligro. 
 
 Fuera de mis alcances. 
 
 Tengo habas que están fuera de 
 
 tierra. 
 Por amistad. 
 Bebe de un vaso. 
 
 393. Over is rendered by encima de when it means "above;" and 
 otherwise by sobre; as, 
 
 (a.) Over the window. I Encima de la ventana. 
 
 (b.) He- wept over the city. I Lloro sobre la ciudad. 
 
 394. Through, meaning "from one end or side to another," or "on 
 account of," is rendered by por; when it means "by reason of" by 
 
 (a.) He-traveled through Spain. 
 (b.) Through the fear of death they 
 
 were in bondage all their fife, 
 (c.) She trembles through fear. 
 
 395. Till is rendered by hasta; as, 
 
 The office is open till ten o'clock at j 
 night. 
 
 396. To, when preceded by from, in such phrases as "from bad to 
 worse," "from time to time," is rendered by en; when it means "of" 
 by de ; and in other cases generally by a ; as, 
 
 Viajo por España. 
 
 Por el temor de la muerte estaban 
 
 en servidumbre toda la vida. 
 Ella tiembla de temor. 
 
 La oficina está abierta hasta las 
 diez de la noche. 
 
OF THE PÍIEPOSITION. 183 
 
 (a.) From day to day. De dia en dia. 
 
 (&.) A friend to his country. Un amigo de su patria. 
 
 An uncle to John. Un tio de Juan, 
 
 (c) He-gave the inkstand to Mary. Dio el tintero á María. 
 
 397. Towards is rendered by hacia ; as, 
 
 Here comes towards us the lady of I Aquí viene hacia nosotros la señora 
 the house. I de la casa. 
 
 398. Under is rendered by debajo de or bajo ; as, 
 
 Under the bridge. Under the table. | Debajo del puente. Bajo la mesa. 
 
 (a.) Under is rendered by so in the following phrases, so capa de, 
 "under cover of;" so colar de, "under color of," so pena de, "under 
 penalty of;" so pretexto de, "under pretext of." 
 
 399. With, when meaning "of" or "from" or "by," is rendered by 
 de ; in most other cases by con ; as, 
 
 Estamos cubiertos de polvo. 
 Nos morimos de frío. 
 Juan le mato de un sablazo. 
 
 Con permiso del capitán. 
 
 (a.) We-are covered with dust. 
 
 (b.) We are-dying with cold. 
 
 (c.) John killed him with a sabre- 
 stroke. 
 
 (d.) With permission of the cap- 
 tain. 
 
 400. Within is rendered by dentro de ; as, 
 
 I-shall-need it within three days. | Lo necesitaré dentro de tres dias. 
 
 401. Without, meaning "destitute of" "with exemption from," is ren- 
 dered by sin; and when it means " outside of " ox "beyond," by fuera 
 de; as, 
 
 (a.) Treat me without ceremony. I Tráteme vmd. sin ceremonia. 
 
 (b.) To-buy without money. Comprar sin dinero. 
 
 (c) They-cast him without the city. | Le echaron/uera de la ciudad. 
 
 (d.) Sin in Spanish is regarded as a negative preposition, and is there- 
 fore often followed by a negative conjunction ; as, 
 
 Sin otro fin ni motive I Without another end or (nor) mo- 
 
 I tive. 
 
 402. There are other prepositions in Spanish, which, as they can be 
 rendered in most cases by the corresponding English preposition, offer no 
 difficulty to the learner. Such are para con, " in respect to ;" además 
 de, "besides;" a pesar de, " in spite of," "notwithstanding;" cerca de, 
 "near to ;" frente á, or enfrente de, "opposite;" en orden a, "with 
 regard to ;" junto d, "adjoining;" por el medio de, "across;" durante, 
 "during." 
 
 403. The preposition entre, "between," when it comes before personal 
 pronouns, does not govern them in the objective case in Spanish, but is 
 
184 OF THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 followed by them in the nominative ; as, " entre tú y yo" (and not entre 
 tí y mí), "between thee and me." 
 
 404. Prepositions, as in English, are placed before the word which 
 they govern. 
 
 (a.) Care must be taken to distinguish the use of the same word in 
 English, whether employed as a preposition or an adverb or conjunction. 
 Thus in the phrases "after breakfast," "before dinner," the words 
 " after " and " before " are prepositions, and are to be rendered by des- 
 pués de and antes de, respectively; while in the phrases, "after I had 
 departed," "before I had dined," the words "after" and "before" are 
 adverbs, and are to be rendered by después que and antes que. 
 
 (b.) Scgun, when used before a verb in Spanish, is not a preposition, 
 but an adverb, meaning "according as;" as, según creo, "according as 
 I-believe ;" según pareció, " according as it-appeared." 
 
 §3F* The idiomatic use of certain prepositions connected with verbs 
 or other parts of speech will be found in the Appendix, Number III. 
 
 Behold me ! Behold him ! Behold 
 
 her! 
 Lo, they come 
 
 OF THE INTERJECTION. 
 
 405. The position of the interjection in a sentence is 
 determined by no fixed rules, but is allowed to vary, as in 
 English, according as harmony and propriety may require. 
 
 406. The interjection ete, "lo," " behold," is used with the first objec- 
 tive case of the personal pronouns only, being joined to them and form- 
 ing one word ; as, 
 
 ¡Eteme ! ¡Etele ! ¡Etela. ! 
 
 ¡Etelos que vienen! 
 
 (a.) The interjection he, " see," " behold," is prefixed to the first objec- 
 tive case of personal pronouns, and precedes adverbs, such as aquí, 
 "here," allí, "there;" as, 
 
 ¡Hele aquí ! /Hela aquí ! ! Here he is ! Here she is ! 
 
 /.Helos allí ! i There they are ! 
 
 S2^* More literally these exclamations might be rendered, "see him 
 here /" " see her here f " behold them there .'" 
 
 407. When adjectives are employed as interjections, they are followed 
 by the preposition de, if a noun or pronoun come after ; as, 
 
 ¡ Desgraciado de mi ! | Unlucky me ! (or, Unfortunate that 
 
 I I am !) 
 (a.) The interjection ay is followed by de when used before a noun or 
 pronoun ; as, 
 ¡ Ay de me ! | Alas for me ! (or, Wo to me !) 
 
APPENDIX TO PART HI. 
 
 NUMBER I, 
 
 OF PKOSODY. 
 
 408. Prosody properly includes the principles which 
 pertain to the sounds of a language, the rules of syllabica- 
 tion, accentuation, quantity of the syllables, punctuation, 
 and versification. 
 
 f£3F"* The general rules of pronunciation, syllabication, and accentua- 
 tion have been given in Part I. A few additional remarks on these 
 subjects will be made here. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 409. In Spanish prosody, words are classed according 
 to their accentuation, into agudas, llanas, and csdrújulas : 
 those are called agudas which are accented on the last 
 (ultimate) vowel ; as, amar, fiel, amó, salió : those are called 
 llanas which are accented on the vowel next to the last 
 (the penultimate) ; as, amo, corre, comía, comiendo, fortifica- 
 ron, orden : those are called csdrújulas which are accented 
 on the second vowel from the last (the antepenultimate) ; 
 as, lógico, médico, gramática, amábamos. 
 
 410. The accented vowel of any word is to be pronounced with a 
 greater stress of voice and longer duration of sound than the other 
 vowels of the same word. 
 
 (a.) When a word ends with an unaccented vowel, this final vowel is 
 to be accented rather softly ; as carme, pronounced in ordinary conversa- 
 tion as it would be in English if written cár-ny. 
 
 411. In ordinary conversation, as well as in reading prose or scanning 
 poetry, two vowels of the same name coming together, the one being at 
 the end of a word and the other at the beginning of the word following, 
 are made to glide into one sound, somewhat prolonged; as, la amiga 
 
 16* 
 
186 OF PROSODY. 
 
 ha* venido, pronounced la-amiga-a venido; Santa- Anna, pronounced 
 SanV-Anna. 
 
 OF VOWELS FORMING OR NOT FORMING DIPHTHONGS OE. 
 TRIPHTHONGS. 
 
 412. When two or three vowels come together in the 
 same word, sometimes they form a diphthong (that is, a 
 single syllable), and at other times two syllables. 
 
 413. The diphthongs and triphthongs in Spanish are ai 
 (or áy), áu, ea, éi (or éy), eo, éu, ia, ié,io, iu, oe, 6i (or 6y\ 
 ou,\ ua, ué, uí (or úy), uo ; iái, iéi, uái (or uáy), uéi (or 
 uéy). Some of these are always, and others not always 
 diphthongs, as will be seen from the following rules ; 
 
 (a.) Ae, ao, and oa are never diphthongs, but always form two sylla- 
 bles ; as, aecho, nao, canoa, pronounced a-é-cho, ná-o, ca-nó-a. 
 
 (b.) Au, ay, eu, ey, va, ou, oy, uy,% are always to be considered as diph- 
 thongs ; so also uay and uey as triphthongs. Thus, pausa, cam-bráy, 
 déu-da, vi-réy, víu-da, triún-fo, es-tóy, Pa-ra-guáy.% 
 
 (c.) Ai, ei, oi, and ia, ie, io are diphthongs in all cases except when the 
 i is accented; thus, es-táis, réi-na, sois, no-tí-cia, tié-ne, ne-ce-sá-rio^ 
 When the i is accented (whether marked or not) these vowels do not 
 form a diphthong ; thus, tra-i-do, o-i-do, por-fi-a, na-vi-o, fri-o. If io 
 terminate a verb, and either letter have the marked accent over it, a 
 diphthong is not formed ; thus, co-mi-6, te-mi-6. 
 
 (d.) Ea, eo, oe, when they are the final letters of a word, and the 
 accent (whether marked or not) is upon the preceding syllable, form a 
 diphthong; but in all other cases, two syllables; thus, Bó-reas, vir-gí- 
 neo, hé-roe ; and sé-a, a-fe-ár, i-dé-a, tro-Jé-o, po-é-ta. 
 
 (e.) Ua, ue, ui, uo, uie are diphthongs when the accent is not on the 
 u ; as, lé-gua, hué-vo, ruí-do, mú-tuo, quién. But when the accent is on 
 the u, they do not form a diphthong ; as, e-fec-tú-an, gan-zú-a, e-Jec-íú-e, 
 trú-e-no, e-fec-tú-o. 
 
 (f.) la are not a diphthong when they occur in the terminations of the 
 imperfect tenses of the indicative and subjunctive, because the i is always 
 
 * H being a silent letter, of course its intervention between two 
 vowels does not prevent their union of sound, as required by the above 
 rule. 
 
 t The diphthong ou is seldom found in Spanish writings ; never, in 
 fact, except in foreign proper names. 
 
 i This list can be readily remembered, as it comprehends all the diph- 
 thongs ending with u or y. 
 
 § All words ending with y, preceded by a vowel, it must be kept in 
 mind, are accented on the last syllable. 
 
OF PROSODY. 187 
 
 to be accented in these tenses, whether marked or not ; as, ha-M-a, ha- 
 bí-a-mos, a-ma-rí-a, a-ma-fi-ais. 
 
 (g.) The above rules are general ; yet in Spanish poetry, as in Eng- 
 lish, vowels which ought to form a diphthong are sometimes found 
 forming two syllables ; as, rü-í-do, sü-á-re, instead of rui-do, sua-ve. 
 So likewise two vowels which ought to form two syllables, are often 
 found united into one ; as, poé-ía, instead of po-é-ta. 
 
 %¿¡T Thus also in English poetry, two vowels which properly form 
 two syllables are often united into one ; as in the words power ■, period, 
 influence. 
 
 OF VERSE AND RHYME. 
 
 414. A verse is a line containing a certain number of 
 poetic feet, or syllables arranged according to certain rules 
 of prosody. There are many kinds of verse distinguished 
 by the number of syllables they contain ; this constitutes 
 the metre or measure. This measured division of sylla- 
 bles, with the musical cadence of the voice in repeating 
 them, is called rhythm. 
 
 415. Rhyme consists in the similarity of sounds at the 
 end of two or more verses. This similarity of sound may 
 exist between one, two, or three syllables of different 
 words; as, pintor and primor; vído and vestido; utilidad 
 and habilidad. Verses without rhyme are called versos 
 sueltos, or blank verses. 
 
 [a.) Rhyme in Spanish poetry is of two kinds ; that of 
 consonance [consonancia), and that of assonance (asonancia). 
 By consonancia is meant the sameness or similarity of 
 sound between certain vowels and consonants : as, canto 
 and tanto. By asonancia is meant the rhyming of the 
 vowels alone ; • thus, señora,, española, otra, toda, coma, all 
 rhyme by asonancia, since the accented vowel and final 
 vowel are alike. 
 
 416. A verse terminated with a word that is accented 
 on the last syllable is called verso agudo (see 409) ; with 
 a word accented on the penultimate, is called verso llano ; 
 and with a word accented on the antepenultimate, is called 
 verso esdrújulo. 
 
188 OF PROSODY. 
 
 (a.) In the versos llanos, the number of syllables is precisely equal to 
 that determined by the metre ; in versos agudos, the number of syllables 
 is one less than that indicated by the metre ; and in versos esdrújulos, the 
 number of syllables is one more than that belonging to the metre ; thus, 
 
 l 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 
 
 Verso llano. Ha- | cien- | do | del | lo- [ ro | mó- | fa. 
 
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 
 
 Verso agudo. La | car- | ca- | ja- ¡da | sol- | to. 
 
 1 2 3456789 
 
 Verso esdrújulo. De | to- | dos | los | es- | pe- | ci- | fi- | cos. 
 
 5P^" In these examples the metre belongs to that consisting of eight 
 syllables, and every verse is accented on the seventh syllable ; but, as 
 will be perceived, only the verse llano contains the number denoted by 
 the measure. Versos llanos are in most common use in Spanish. - 
 
 417. "When in a verse a word ends with a vowel and the 
 following word begins with a vowel or an A, the final 
 vowel forms a diphthong with the other, and both are 
 reckoned only as one syllable ; and three vowels coming 
 together in the same manner, are reckoned as one syllable, 
 the sounds of each being made to glide into one sound ; as, 
 
 Que un | tor- | do en | a- | ques- | te en- | gá- | ño. 
 
 E' hi- | cie- | se a- | Hi | su | ra- ) pi- | na. 
 
 Di- | jo á u- | na | mo- | na | tai- | má- | da. 
 
 Sa- | lió- | se | del | cor- | ro, y* | di- | jo. 
 
 (a.) This union of all the vowels sometimes does not take place ; thus 
 when the second word begins with an h, or when there is a natural 
 pause, or when the conjunction y comes between two vowels. 
 Gran- | de 3S, ¡ si es | bue- | na, \ u- | na 6- | bra. 
 Die- | tan- | la el | cie- | go | y el | man- | co. 
 
 EXAMPLES FOE. SCANNING. 
 
 Y si caigo, 4. 
 
 ¿Qué es la vida? 4. 
 
 Por perdida 4. 
 
 Ya la di, 3. 
 
 Cuando el yugo 4. 
 Del esclavo, 4. 
 
 Como un bravo 4. 
 
 Sacudí. 3. 
 
 £5^* The figures at the close of each verse indicate the number of 
 
 * Y, when a consonant, that is, when it begins a word, can not thus 
 form a diphthong with another vowel. 
 
OF PROSODY. 189 
 
 syllables which that verse contains, when scanned according to the di- 
 rections in the preceding rules. 
 
 Pescadorcita mia, 7. 
 
 Desciende á la ribera, 7. 
 
 Y escucha placentera, 7. 
 Mi cántico de amor ; 6. 
 
 Sentado en su barquilla, 7. 
 Te canta su cuidado, 7. 
 
 Cual nunca enamorado 7. 
 Tu tierno pescador. 6. 
 
 J. DE EsPRONCEDA. 
 
 Todos suave reposo 8. 
 
 En tu calma ¡ oh noche ! buscan, 8. 
 
 Y aun las lágrimas tus sueños 8. 
 Al desventurado enjugan. 8. 
 
 J. DE EsrBONCEDA. 
 
 Si querer entender de todo 9. 
 Es ridicula presunción, 8. 
 
 Servir solo para una cosa 9. 
 Suele ser falta no menor. 8. 
 
 T. de Iriarte. 
 
 De sus hijos la torpe avutarda 10. 
 El pesado volar conocía, 10. 
 
 Deseando sacar una cría 10. 
 
 Mas lijera, aunque fuese bastarda. 10. 
 
 T. de Iriarte. 
 
 Hubo un rico en Madrid (y aun dicen que era 11 
 Mas necio que rico), 6. 
 
 Cuya casa magnífica adornaban 11. 
 
 Muebles esquisitos. 6. 
 
 ¡ Lástima que en vivienda tan preciosa, 11. 
 
 Le dijo un amigo, 6. 
 
 Falte una librería! bello adorno, 11. 
 
 U'til y preciso. 6. 
 
 T. de Iriarte. 
 
 Cuando veo yo algunos que de otros escritores 14. 
 A la sombra se arriman, y piensan ser autores 14. 
 Con poner cuatro notas 6 hacer un proloquillo, 14. 
 Estoy por aplicarles lo que dijo el tomillo. 14. 
 T. de Iriarte. 
 
190 OF PE,OSODY. 
 
 Remark. — These vowel-sounds at the end of one word and beginning of 
 the succeeding word, glide into one diphthongal sound, just as in the fol- 
 lowing distich in English the vowels e and u of the words "the-un- 
 broken" run into one sound, the syllables " the" and "jm" forming in 
 the metre but a single syllable : 
 
 " With naked feelings and with aching pride, 
 He hears the zmbroken blast on every side." 
 
 S. T. Coleridge. 
 
 418. The rhyme must always begin at that vowel upon which the 
 accent is placed (whether marked or not) ; thus in versos agudos, the 
 rhyme is to begin at the vowel of the ultimate syllable ; in versos llanos, 
 at the vowel of the penultimate ; and in versos esdrújulos, at the vowel 
 of the antepenultimate ; as, 
 
 Agudo. ¡ Cuan presto se va el placer, 
 Llano. Como después de acordado, 
 Agudo. Da dolor ! 
 Agudo. ¡ Como á nuestro paracer 
 Llano. Cualquiera tiempo pasado, 
 Agudo. Fué mejor ! 
 
 Joege Manrique. 
 
 ÍEllo es que hay animales muy científicos 
 En curarse con varios específicos, 
 Y en conservar su construcción orgánica 
 Como hábiles que son en la botánica. 
 
 T. de Iriarte. 
 
APPENDIX TO PART III 
 
 NUMBER II, 
 
 A SUMMARY OF THE RULES OF GENDER i 
 OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 419. In Spanish, as in English, all nouns which from 
 their signification refer to male beings are masculine ; as 
 un hombre, & man ; un sombrerero, a hatter ; un juez, a judge ; 
 un leon, a lion : and all nouns which from their significa- 
 tion refer to female beings are feminine ; as, una muger, a 
 ivoman ; una lavandera, a laundress ; una actriz, an actress ; 
 una leona, a lioness. Such nouns are said to be masculine 
 or feminine from their signification. 
 
 420. As all nouns in Spanish (including those which in English are 
 said to be of the neuter gender) are considered as either masculine or 
 feminine, it is important to know how to distinguish the gender of such 
 nouns as are properly neither masculine nor feminine from their signifi- 
 cation. The following simple rules will show that the gender of such 
 nouns depends with but few exceptions on their terminations : 
 
 421. Nouns that terminate in a, d, ie, umbre, ion, is, or 
 ez (unless they may be masculine from their signification ; 
 see 419), are feminine ; as, una casa, a house; la pared, the 
 wall : la especia, the species ; una costumbre, a custom ; una 
 ocupación, an occupation ; una tesis, a thesis ; la tez, the 
 complexion. 
 
 (a.) Nouns that terminate in ié (that is, such as are accented on the 
 last syllable) form an exception to the above rule, being always mascu- 
 line. The only nouns which come under this class are pié and all its 
 compounds: as, él pié, the foot; el aguapié, the small-wine; un punta- 
 pié, a kick. So buscapié, hincapié, paspié, rodapié, sobrepié, traspié, etc. 
 
 422. Nouns that do not terminate in a, d, ie, umbre, ion, 
 is, or ez (unless feminine from their signification; see 419), 
 
192 
 
 RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 are masculine ; as, un camino, a road ; un buque, a ship ; el 
 alelí, the gilliflower ; el jabon, the soap ; el caliz, the chalice ; 
 un ciar in, a clarion ; un /ws¿Z, a gw& ; un £•&$, a g"&s ; un 
 huracán, a hurricane j un convoy, a convoy. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO THE GENERAL RULES OF GENDER. 
 
 423. The nouns in the following list are feminine, though 
 they do not terminate in a, d, ie, umbre, ion, is, or ez : 
 
 Aguachirle, 
 
 small-wine. 
 
 Cargazón, 
 
 cargo. 
 
 Aguamiel, 
 
 kydromel. 
 
 Cariátide, 
 
 cariatydes. 
 
 Anagalide, 
 
 pimpernel. 
 
 Caries, 
 
 cariosity. 
 
 Anemone, 
 
 anemone. 
 
 Carne, 
 
 flesh. 
 
 Anime, 
 
 a kind of resin. 
 
 Carraspique, 
 
 candy-tuft. 
 
 Apocope, 
 
 apocope. 
 
 Castrazón, 
 
 the gelding-season 
 
 Apófise, 
 
 apophysis. 
 
 Catanance, ) 
 
 the plant lion's 
 
 Apomeli, 
 
 apomcl. 
 
 Catananque, ) 
 
 foot. 
 
 Apostrofe, 
 
 apostrophe. 
 
 Castástrofe, 
 
 catastrophe. 
 
 Armazón, 
 
 carcase. 
 
 Catedral, 
 
 cathedral-church. 
 
 Ave, 
 
 a bird. 
 
 Cerachates (plu 
 
 .), wax- stones. 
 
 Base, 
 
 base. 
 
 Cerrazón, 
 
 cloudy weather. 
 
 Beladin, i 
 Beram, $ 
 
 
 Cerviz, 
 
 nape. 
 
 a sort of muslin. 
 
 Champan, 
 
 a kind of sloop. 
 
 Bezar, ^ 
 Bezoar, \ 
 
 
 Chile, 
 
 a sort of pepper. 
 
 bezoar. 
 
 Chinche, 
 
 a bug. 
 
 Binazon, 
 
 second ploughing. 
 
 Chochaperdiz, 
 
 a wood-cock. 
 
 Bocacalle, 
 
 end or opening of 
 
 Cicatriz, 
 
 a scar. 
 
 
 a street. 
 
 Cicloide, 
 
 cycloid. 
 
 Cachunde, 
 
 a kind of paste. 
 
 Clase, 
 
 class; rank. 
 
 Cal, 
 
 lime. 
 
 Clavazón, 
 
 a set of nails. 
 
 Caladre, 
 
 a species of lark. 
 
 Clave, 
 
 a key-stone ; key. 
 
 Calicut, 
 
 a sort of silk goods. 
 
 Clemátide, 
 
 clematis. 
 
 Calle, 
 
 street. 
 
 Clin, 
 
 mane. 
 
 Camedafne, 
 
 spurge-olive. 
 
 Codorniz, 
 
 a quail. 
 
 Caniquí, 
 
 a sort of muslin. 
 
 Cohechazon, 
 
 last ploughing. 
 
 Capital,* 
 
 capital-city. 
 
 Col, 
 
 cabbage. 
 
 Car, 
 
 end of the mizen- 
 
 Coliflor, 
 
 cauliflower. 
 
 
 yard. 
 
 Colzal, 
 
 colewort-seed. 
 
 Caramel, 
 
 a kind of pilchard. 
 
 Concoide, - 
 
 conchoid. 
 
 Cárcel, 
 
 prison. 
 
 Conoide, 
 
 conoid. 
 
 Cardamouri, 
 
 a kind of drug-dye 
 
 Consonante, 
 
 a consonant. 
 
 * Capital, when it means " a sum of money," is masculine. 
 
RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 193 
 
 Contraluz, 
 
 counterlight. | ¡Faringe, 
 
 pharynx. 
 
 Conventual, 
 
 convent-church. 
 
 Fasces (plural) 
 
 fasces. 
 
 Corambre, 
 
 hides of animals. 
 
 Fase, 
 
 phase. 
 
 Corriente, 
 
 current. 
 
 Fauces (plural) 
 
 , fauces. 
 
 Corte, 
 
 court. 
 
 Faz, 
 
 face. 
 
 Cose, 
 
 a kind of measure. 
 
 Fé, 
 
 faith. 
 
 Cotangente, 
 
 cotangent. 
 
 Fiebre, 
 
 fever. 
 
 Coz, 
 
 a kick. 
 
 Fieme, 
 
 fleam. 
 
 Creciente, 
 
 a rise of waters. 
 
 Flor, 
 
 flower. 
 
 Credencial, 
 
 credential. 
 
 ; Frase, 
 
 phrase. 
 
 Criazón, 
 
 breed of animals. 
 
 Frente, 
 
 forehead. 
 
 Crin, 
 
 mane. 
 
 jFretes (plural), 
 
 frets. 
 
 Cruz, 
 
 cross. 
 
 Fronte, 
 
 front. 
 
 Cúspide, 
 
 cuspis. 
 
 Fuente, 
 
 fountain. 
 
 Dendrite, 
 
 dendrites. 
 
 Fustán, 
 
 fustian. 
 
 Desazón, 
 
 disquietness. 
 
 Galactite 
 
 fuller 1 s earth. 
 
 Diócesi, 
 
 diocese. 
 
 Gente, 
 
 people. 
 
 Díplas, 
 
 a species of serpent 
 
 Goguerin, 
 
 a frill. 
 
 Doral, 
 
 fly -catcher. 
 
 ¡Granazón, 
 
 seeding. 
 
 Egílope, 
 
 a sort of wild oats. 
 
 .Grey, 
 
 flock. 
 
 Eglantine, 
 
 smooth speedicell 
 
 Hambre, 
 
 hunger. 
 
 Elipse, 
 
 ellipsis. 
 
 JHaz, 
 
 surface. 
 
 Enjambrazón, 
 
 swarming of bees. 
 
 Hélice, 
 
 helix. 
 
 Entrecanal, 
 
 space between the 
 
 Hemionite, 
 
 hart- s-tongue. 
 
 
 flutings of a 
 
 Hiél, 
 
 gall. 
 
 
 column. 
 
 Higiene, 
 
 hygiene. 
 
 Epicicloide, 
 
 epicycloid. 
 
 Hinchazón 
 
 swelling. 
 
 Epígrafe, 
 
 epigraph. 
 
 Hipérbole, 
 
 hyperbole. 
 
 Epipactide, 
 
 epipactis. 
 
 Hojaldre, 
 
 a sort of pan-cake. 
 
 Eringe, 
 
 field-eringo. 
 
 Hoz, 
 
 sickle. 
 
 Escorpiode 
 
 caterpillar. 
 
 Hueste, 
 
 host. 
 
 Esferoide, 
 
 spheroid. 
 
 Imagen, 
 
 image. 
 
 Espicanarde, 
 
 spikenard. 
 
 índole, 
 
 temper. 
 
 Estirpe, 
 
 a race. 
 
 Ingle, 
 
 groin. 
 
 Estriga, 
 
 screech-owl. 
 
 Isagoge, 
 
 introduction 
 
 Etiópide, 
 
 clary. 
 
 Labor, 
 
 labor. 
 
 Etites, 
 
 eagle-stone. 
 
 Lande, 
 
 acorn. 
 
 Extravagante, 
 
 a kind of papal 
 
 Landre, 
 
 swelling of the 
 
 
 constitution. 
 
 
 glands. 
 
 Falange, 
 
 phalanx. 
 
 Lápade, 
 
 acorn shell-fish. 
 
 Falaride, 
 
 canary-grass. 
 
 Lapislázuli, 
 
 lapis lazuli. 
 
 Falee, 
 
 sickle. 
 
 Laringe, 
 
 larynx. 
 
 Faldetes (plu.), 
 
 tassels. 
 
 Laude, 
 
 a tombstone with 
 
 Fame, 
 
 hunger. 
 
 
 an epitaph. 
 
 
 17 
 
194 
 
 RULES OF GENDER. OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 Leche, 
 
 milk. 
 
 Péplide, 
 
 pep lis. 
 
 Lente, 
 
 lens. 
 
 Perdiz, 
 
 partridge. 
 
 Ley, 
 
 laic. 
 
 Perífrase, 
 
 periphrasis. 
 
 Liebre, 
 
 hare. 
 
 Piel, 
 
 skin. 
 
 Liendre, 
 
 nit. 
 
 Pirámide, 
 
 pyramid. 
 
 Ligazón, 
 
 contexture. 
 
 Píxide, 
 
 pyx. 
 
 Lite, 
 
 law-suit. 
 
 Plebe, 
 
 common people. 
 
 Loche, 
 
 loach. 
 
 Podre, 
 
 pus. 
 
 Lombriz, 
 
 a sort of worm. 
 
 Portapaz, 
 
 portapax. 
 
 Loor, 
 
 praise. 
 
 Prole, 
 
 offspring. 
 
 Luz, 
 
 light. 
 
 Prostaféride, 
 
 prostaferis. 
 
 Llave, 
 
 key. 
 
 Puches (plural) 
 
 a sort of fritters. 
 
 Madriz, 
 
 place of a quail's 
 
 Raigambre, 
 
 collection of roots. 
 
 
 nest. 
 
 Raiz, 
 
 root. 
 
 Mano, 
 
 hand. 
 
 Rascazón, 
 
 an incitement to 
 
 Matriz, 
 
 matrix. 
 
 
 scratch. 
 
 Melindre, 
 
 sort of fritters. 
 
 Razón, 
 
 reason. 
 
 Menguante, 
 
 ebb-tide. 
 
 Res, 
 
 head of cattle. 
 
 Meninge, 
 
 meninges. 
 
 Sal, 
 
 salt. 
 
 Merey, 
 
 cashew-tree. 
 
 Salazón, 
 
 seasoning. 
 
 Metrópoli, 
 
 metropolis. 
 
 Sangre, 
 
 blood. 
 
 Miel, 
 
 honey. 
 
 Sardoniz, 
 
 sardonyx. 
 
 Mies, 
 
 harvest ; crop. 
 
 Sartén, 
 
 frying-pan. 
 
 Mole, 
 
 massiveness. 
 
 Sazón, 
 
 seasoning. 
 
 Moral, 
 
 ethics. 
 
 Sebe, 
 
 enclosure of high 
 
 Muerte, 
 
 death. 
 
 
 pales. 
 
 Nariz, 
 
 nose. 
 
 Sede, 
 
 a see. 
 
 Nave, 
 
 nave; ship. 
 
 Segazón, 
 
 harvest-season. 
 
 Nicle, 
 
 a species of agate. 
 
 Segur, 
 
 axe. 
 
 Nieve, 
 
 snow. 
 
 Selenites, 
 
 selenites. 
 
 Noche, 
 
 night. 
 
 Seleiícide, 
 
 a species of bird. 
 
 Nube, 
 
 cloud. 
 
 Senites, 
 
 serinites. 
 
 Oenate, 
 
 fallow-finch. 
 
 Serpiente, 
 
 serpent. 
 
 Palmachristi, 
 
 palmachrist. 
 
 Sien, 
 
 temple of the head. 
 
 Palude, 
 
 lake. 
 
 Sierpe, 
 
 young serpent. 
 
 Panace, 
 
 all-heal. 
 
 Simiente, 
 
 seed. 
 
 Paráfrase, 
 
 paraphrase. 
 
 Síncope, 
 
 a syncope. 
 
 Paragoge, 
 
 paragoge. 
 
 Sinrazón, 
 
 injustice. 
 
 Paral ti je, 
 
 ■parallax. 
 
 Sirte, 
 
 quicksand. 
 
 Pareselene, 
 
 mock-moon. 
 
 Sístole, 
 
 systole. 
 
 Parroquial, 
 
 parochial-church. 
 
 Sobrefaz, 
 
 superficies. 
 
 Parte, 
 
 part. 
 
 Sobrehaz, 
 
 surface. 
 
 Patente, 
 
 patent. 
 
 Sobrellave, 
 
 double key. 
 
 Paz, 
 
 "peace. 
 
 Sobrepelliz,- 
 
 surplice. 
 
RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 195 
 
 Sobretarde, 
 
 close of evening. 
 
 Trabe, 
 
 beam. 
 
 Suerte, 
 
 chance ; fate. 
 
 Tragaluz, 
 
 sky-light. 
 
 Tarde, 
 
 afternoon. 
 
 Tragazón, 
 
 gluttony. 
 
 Teamide, 
 
 a stone repelling 
 
 Trireme, 
 
 trireme. 
 
 
 iron. 
 
 Troj, j 
 i Troje, \ 
 
 
 Tüde, 
 
 the character (~) 
 
 a granary. 
 
 
 oxer n. 
 
 Ubre, 
 
 udder. 
 
 Tingle, 
 
 an instrument for 
 
 Urdiembre, 
 
 warp. 
 
 
 glaziers. 
 
 1 Várice, 
 
 varix. 
 
 Torre, 
 
 tower. 
 
 ¡Vocal, 
 
 vowel. 
 
 Tos, 
 
 cough. 
 
 Vorágine, 
 
 vortex. 
 
 Trabazón. 
 
 juncture. 
 
 ¡Voz, 
 
 voice. 
 
 424. The following nouns 
 
 are masculine, although they 
 
 have the terminations which belong in all other cases to 
 feminine nouns : 
 
 Agrión, 
 
 a species of tumor 
 
 Argiritas (plu.) 
 
 , marcasites of sil- 
 
 Agropila, 
 
 German bezoar. 
 
 
 ver mines. 
 
 Ajedrez, 
 
 chess. 
 
 Aroma, 
 
 odorant principie 
 
 Ajimez, 
 
 an arched window 
 
 
 of plants. 
 
 Alarguez, 
 
 dog-rose. 
 
 Artritis, 
 
 arthritis. 
 
 Alción, 
 
 a king-fisher. 
 
 Áspid, 
 
 a species of ser- 
 
 Alcribís, 
 
 a tube for bellows. 
 
 
 pent. 
 
 Alefris, 
 
 a mortise. 
 
 Asturión, 
 
 pony. 
 
 Alerta, 
 
 a watchword. 
 
 Ataúd, 
 
 coffin. 
 
 Aljez, 
 
 gypsum. 
 
 Avion, 
 
 martin. 
 
 Almez, 
 
 lote-tree. 
 
 Axioma, 
 
 axiom. 
 
 Almirez, 
 
 a mortar 
 
 Bastion, 
 
 bastion. 
 
 Almud, 
 
 a dry measure. 
 
 Berberis, 
 
 barberry. 
 
 Alguez, 
 
 a wine measure. 
 
 Biribis, -> 
 Bribis, 5 
 
 a sort of game. 
 
 Alumbre, 
 
 alum. 
 
 Amatíris, 
 
 a kind of linen. 
 
 Brandis, 
 
 a kind of great- 
 
 Anagrama, 
 
 anagram. 
 
 
 coat. 
 
 Análasis, 
 
 analysis. 
 
 Budion, 
 
 peacock-fish. 
 
 Anfión, 
 
 opium. 
 
 Busilis, 
 
 the point of diffi- 
 
 Anis, 
 
 anise. 
 
 
 culty. 
 
 Antípodas (plu 
 
 .),antipodes. 
 
 Calamis, > 
 Calanis, ) 
 
 
 Antuvión, 
 
 a sudden stroke. 
 
 sweet-fag. 
 
 Apocalipsis, 
 
 apocalypse. 
 
 Camedris, 
 
 wild germander. 
 
 Aporisma, 
 
 echymosis. 
 
 Carpion, 
 
 a kind offish. 
 
 Apotegma, 
 
 apothegm. 
 
 Cazumbre, 
 
 a sort of cord. 
 
 Archilaud, 
 
 a kind of lute. 
 
 Céncris, 
 
 a kind of serpent. 
 
 Ardid, 
 
 stratagem. 
 
 Cercion, 
 
 a species of mock- 
 
 JArgema, 
 
 an ulcer of the eye 
 
 
 ing bird. 
 
196 
 
 RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 Césped, 
 
 sod. 
 
 Lácris, 
 
 fruit of rosemary. 
 
 Chirrión, 
 
 a sort of cart. 
 
 Laud, 
 
 a lute. 
 
 Cicion, 
 
 intermittent fever. 
 
 Lema, 
 
 lemma. 
 
 Clarion, 
 
 crayon. 
 
 Lid, 
 
 conflict. 
 
 Clima, 
 
 climate. 
 
 Maná, 
 
 manna. 
 
 Col-pez, 
 
 isinglass. 
 
 Mapa, 
 
 map. 
 
 Cometa, 
 
 comet. 
 
 Morrión, 
 
 murrion. 
 
 Corion, 
 
 chorion. 
 
 Nao, 
 
 ship. 
 
 Crisma, 
 
 chrism. 
 
 Pais, 
 
 country. 
 
 Cuaternion, 
 
 union of Jour 
 
 Paradigma, 
 
 paradigm. 
 
 
 things. 
 
 Paréntesis, 
 
 parenthesis. 
 
 Dia, 
 
 day. 
 
 Párulis, 
 
 gum-bile. 
 
 Diafragma, 
 
 diaphragm. 
 
 Pez, 
 
 fish. 
 
 Diagrama, 
 
 diagram. 
 
 Planeta, 
 
 planet. 
 
 Dilema, 
 
 dilemma. 
 
 Poema, 
 
 poem. 
 
 Diploma, 
 
 diploma. 
 
 Postema, 
 
 aposteme. 
 
 Dogma, 
 
 dogma. 
 
 Prisma, 
 
 prism. 
 
 Drama, 
 
 drama. 
 
 Problema, 
 
 problem. 
 
 E'nfasis, 
 
 emphasis. 
 
 Progimnasma, 
 
 essay. 
 
 Enigma, 
 
 enigma. 
 
 Proís, 
 
 ship-rope. 
 
 Entimema, 
 
 enthymeme. 
 
 Relumbre, 
 
 coppery taste. 
 
 Epigrama, 
 
 epigram. 
 
 Rondís, ) 
 Rondiz, 3 
 
 face of a precious 
 
 Escorpión, 
 
 scorpion. 
 
 stone. 
 
 Esperma, 
 
 sperm. 
 
 Sarampión, 
 
 measles. 
 
 E'stasis, 
 
 ' testacy. 
 
 Síntoma, 
 
 symptom. 
 
 Estilion, 
 
 a species of lizard. 
 
 SirascGsis, 
 
 syssarcosis. 
 
 Frontis, 
 
 frontispiece. 
 
 Sistema, 
 
 system. 
 
 Gabion, ^ 
 Gavión, \ 
 
 
 Sofá, 
 
 sofa. 
 
 gabion. 
 
 Sofión, 
 
 a hoot. 
 
 Génesis, 
 
 genesis. 
 
 Sofisma, 
 
 sophism. 
 
 Gis, 
 
 crayon. 
 
 Solivión, 
 
 a sudden lifting 
 
 j Glacis, 
 
 glacis. 
 
 
 up. 
 
 Gorbion, 
 
 a kind of edging. 
 
 Sud, 
 
 south wind. 
 
 Gris, 
 
 gray. 
 
 ¡Tapaboca, 
 
 slap on the mouth. 
 
 Guión, 
 
 standard. 
 
 Tema, 
 
 theme. 
 
 Gurbión, 
 
 gum-spurge. 
 
 | Teorema, 
 
 theorem. 
 
 Historion, 
 
 a tedious story. 
 
 Torticolis, 
 
 torticollis. 
 
 Idioma, 
 
 idiom; language. 
 
 Tris, 
 
 noise of breaking 
 
 Jamis, 
 
 a kind of cotton 
 
 
 glass. 
 
 
 goods. 
 
 Turbión, 
 
 hurricane 
 
 Jibión, 
 
 cuttle-fish bone. 
 
 Viva, 
 
 a huzza. 
 
 425. The nouns in the following list are of both gen- 
 ders, and of course may be used with the masculine and 
 
RULES OF GENDER OF SPANISH NOUNS. 
 
 197 
 
 the feminine article ; thus, el puente or la puente, the 
 bridge. 
 
 Albalá, 
 
 a certificate. 
 
 Mar, 
 
 sea. 
 
 'Anatema, 
 
 anathema. 
 
 Margen, 
 
 viargin. 
 
 Arte, 
 
 art. 
 
 Nema, 
 
 seal. 
 
 Canal, 
 
 canal. 
 
 O'rden, 
 
 order. 
 
 Cisma. 
 
 schism. 
 
 Puente, ~ 
 
 bridge. 
 
 , Cutis, 
 
 skin. 
 
 Reuma, 
 
 rheum. 
 
 Dote, 
 
 dowry. 
 
 Tribu, 
 
 tribe. 
 
 Emblema, 
 
 ■emblem. 
 
 
 
 426. Some nouns are applied to male or female beings, and the article 
 in such cases will serve to distinguish the gender ; thus, el cliente, the 
 male client; la cliente, the female client. 
 
 427. Some nouns, the names of both male and female beings are 
 always used as if belonging only to one gender; thus, un caracol, a 
 snail ; una serpiente, a serpent ; un salmon, a salmon ; una trucha, a 
 trout. 
 
 428. The proper names of cities, towns, villages, and islands, etc., 
 generally take the gender of the common nouns ciudad (city), villa 
 (town), lugar, (village), isla (island), mes (month), to which they refer. 
 Thus Paris is feminine, because villa is understood ; and Fuencarrál is 
 masculine, because lugar is understood. But it must also be mentioned 
 that many proper names of countries, cities, etc., follow the rule of their 
 termination. Thus Cairo is masculine, and Habana, feminine. 
 
 (a.) The names of the letters of the alphabet are feminine; the 
 months of the year and days of the week are masculine. 
 
 17* 
 
APPENDIX TO PART III, 
 NUMBER III, 
 
 IDIOMATIC USE OF CERTAIN ADJECTIVES 
 AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 429. The idiomatic use of some adjectives and verbs 
 accompanied by prepositions will be exhibited in the fol- 
 lowing list, selected chiefly from a table in the Grammar 
 of the Spanish Academy : 
 
 Abocarse con alguno, 
 
 to confer with any one. 
 
 Aborrecido de todos, 
 
 hated by all. 
 
 Abrasarse en deseos, 
 
 to be inflamed with desires. 
 
 Abundar de o en riquezas, 
 
 to abound with or in riches. 
 
 Abusar de la amistad, 
 
 to abuse friendship. 
 
 Acabar de venir, 
 
 to have just come. 
 
 Acordarse de lo pasado, 
 
 to remember the past. 
 
 Acre de genio, 
 
 sour in disposition. 
 
 Acreditarse de necio, 
 
 to show one's self a fool. 
 
 Acreedor á la confianza, 
 
 worthy of confidence. 
 
 Afirmarse en lo dicho, 
 
 to affirm what has been said. 
 
 Ageno de verdad, 
 
 foreign to truth. 
 
 Agradecido á los beneficios, 
 
 grateful for benefits. 
 
 Agudo de ingenio, 
 
 acute in intellect. 
 
 Ahorrar de razones, 
 
 to be sparing of arguments. 
 
 Alabarse de valiente, 
 
 to brag of one's own bravery. 
 
 Alto de cuerpo, 
 
 tall in stature. 
 
 Ancho de boca, 
 
 wide-mouthed. 
 
 Andar de capa, 
 
 to go with a cloak on. 
 
 Andar á cuerpo, 
 
 to go without a cloak. 
 
 Andar á gatas, 
 
 to go on all fours. 
 
 Andar por tierra, 
 
 to go humbled to the earth. 
 
 Angosto de manga, 
 
 tight- sleeved. 
 
 Apasionarse á, de, o por alguno, 
 
 to be enamored with any one. 
 
 Apearse de su opinion, 
 
 to alter one's opinion. 
 
 Apercibirse de armas, 
 
 to prepare one's self with arms. 
 
OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 199 
 
 Apercibirse á, ó para la batalla, 
 
 to prepare for battle. 
 
 Apetecible 61 gusto, 
 
 desirable to the taste. 
 
 Apetecido de, ó por todos, 
 
 desired by all. 
 
 Apiadarse de los pobres, 
 
 to pity the poor. 
 
 Apostar á correr, 
 
 to bet on running. 
 
 Apresurarse á venir, 
 
 to hasten to come. 
 
 Aprobado de cirujano, 
 
 approved as a surgeon. 
 
 Aprovecharse de la ocasión, 
 
 to improve the occasion. 
 
 Apurado de medios, 
 
 destitute of means. 
 
 Arder en deseos, 
 
 to burn with desires. 
 
 Arderse en quimeras, 
 
 to abound in quarrels. 
 
 Arrimarse á la pared, 
 
 to lean against the wall. 
 
 Atento con sus mayores, 
 
 attentive to one's betters. 
 
 Aventajarse á otros, 
 
 to gain the adv-aniage over others. 
 
 Bajo de cuerpo, 
 
 low in stature. 
 
 Benéfico á, ó para la salud, 
 
 good for the health. 
 
 Blanco de cutis, 
 
 white-complexioned. 
 
 Blando de corteza, 
 
 soft-skinned. 
 
 Blasfemar de la virtud, 
 
 to blaspheme against virtue. 
 
 Bordar al tambor, 
 
 to embroider on a tambour frame. 
 
 Bordar de pasados, 
 
 to embroider on both sides. 
 
 Boto de punto, 
 
 blunt at tlve point. 
 
 Bramar de corage, 
 
 to roar from passion. 
 
 Brear d chasco, 
 
 to ves with joking. 
 
 Bueno de, 6 para comer 
 
 good to eat. 
 
 Caber de pies, 
 
 to have room to stand on one's feet. 
 
 Calificar de docto, 
 
 to qualify one as learned. 
 
 Calzarse á alguno, 
 
 to manage any one.* 
 
 Caminar á pié, 
 
 to journey on foot. [robas. 
 
 Capaz de cien arrobas, 
 
 capable of containing a hundred ar- 
 
 Cargarse de razón, 
 
 to maintain one's own opinion 
 
 Chico de cuerpo, 
 
 small in body. 
 
 Comerse de invídia, 
 
 to pine away from envy. 
 
 Complacerse de, u en alguna eos: 
 
 , to be pleased with any thing. 
 
 Concebir por bueno, 
 
 to conceive as good. 
 
 Conceptuar á alguno defi por sabic 
 
 , to regard any one as wise. 
 
 Concurrir o alguna parte, 
 
 to meet at some place. 
 
 Conferir con, 6 entre los amigos, 
 
 to confer withfriends. 
 
 Confesarse con alguno. 
 
 to confess to any one. 
 
 Confesarse de sus culpas, 
 
 to confess one's faults. 
 
 Conformarse con el tiempo 
 
 to conform to the times. 
 
 Congratularse de alguna cosa, 
 
 to rejoice in any thing. 
 
 * Literally, " to put on the shoes to any one ;" meaning, " to lead any 
 one by the nose." 
 
200 OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Consentir en algo. 
 Constar por escrito. 
 Contrapuntearse de palabras. 
 Contravenir á la ley ? 
 Contribuir con dinero, 
 Correrse de vergüenza, 
 Corresponder á los beneficios,. 
 
 recido de cuerpo. 
 Creerse de alguna cosa, 
 
 yimiplír con alguno. 
 Cumplir con su obligation, 
 
 umplir de. palabra. 
 Cutirse al aire, 
 Dar á alguno de palos,. 
 Dar en el blanco,, 
 Dar en manías, . 
 Dar á reir, 
 
 Dar con la entretenida, 
 Dar con uno, 
 Dar tras uno, 
 Dar por visto, 
 Dar sobre la calle, 
 
 Darse por vencido, 
 Delante de alguno, 
 Dentro de casa, 
 
 Desagradecido á alguno beneficio, 
 
 Desconfiar de alguno, 
 
 Desconocido á los beneficios, 
 
 Dividir por mitad, 
 
 Dotado de ciencia, 
 
 Dudar de alguna cosa, 
 
 Echar á alguno á patadas, 
 
 Echar de manga, 
 
 Empaparse en agua, 
 
 Emparentar con alguno, 
 
 Empeñarse en algo, 
 
 Empeñarse por alguno, 
 
 Enamorarse de alguna, 
 
 Encaramarse en,por,ó sobre la pared 
 
 Encenderse en ira, 
 
 Enfermar del pecho, 
 
 Entender de alguna cosa, 
 
 Escaso de medios, - 
 
 Espantarse de algo, 
 
 to consent to any thing. 
 to appear in writing, 
 to revile one another* 
 to violate the law. 
 to contribute money, 
 tobe ashamed. ¡benefits. 
 
 to make return, to he grateful foi 
 increased, or, large in stature. 
 to be convinced of anything, 
 to discharge one's duty to any one. 
 to discharge one's duty, 
 to perform by u~ord only, 
 to be tanned by the air. 
 to strike any one with -sticks. 
 to hit the mark, 
 to be foolish, 
 to set to laughing, 
 to put off with icords and excuses, 
 to meet a person sought for. 
 to persecute one. 
 to suppose as sien, 
 to overlook the street, 
 to own one's self as conquered, 
 before any body, 
 within the house, 
 ungrateful for any benefit, 
 to distrust any on e. 
 ungrateful for benefits, 
 to divide into halves, 
 endowed with learning, 
 to be doubtful concerning any thing. 
 to force any one out with kicks, 
 to make a cats paw of one. 
 to be soaked with water, 
 to be related to any one. 
 to take a fancy to a thing. \jpart. 
 to recommend any one, or take his 
 to be. enamored with any one. 
 , to climb up or over the wall, 
 to be enkindled with anger, 
 to be weak in the breast, 
 to understand about a thing, 
 limited in means, 
 to be frightened at any thing. 
 
OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 201 
 
 Estar á la orden de otro, 
 
 to be at the service of another. 
 
 Estar de buen humor, 
 
 to be in a good humor. 
 
 Estar de viage, 
 
 to be on a journey. 
 
 Estar de, ó en pié, 
 
 to be on foot; to stand. 
 
 Estar de por medio, 
 
 to interpose. 
 
 Estar en ánimo de, 
 
 to have an inclination to. 
 
 Estar en lo que se dice, 
 
 to understand what is said. 
 
 Estar para salir, 
 
 to be ready to start. 
 
 Estar por alguno, 
 
 to be in favor of any one. 
 
 Estar (algo) por suceder, 
 
 to be (something) near happening. 
 
 Escusarse con alguno, 
 
 to apologize to any one. 
 
 Fácil de digerer, 
 
 easy to digest. 
 
 Faltar á la palabra, 
 
 to fail in one's word. 
 
 Faltar de algo, 
 
 to be wanting in any thing. 
 
 Fastidiarse de manjares, 
 
 to loathe victuals. 
 
 Fatigarse de, en, o por alguna cosa 
 
 , to worry one's self about any thing. 
 
 Fiarse de, 6 en alguno, 
 
 to confide in any one. 
 
 Fuerte en condición, 
 
 strong in temper. 
 
 Gordo de talle, 
 
 large at the waist ; thick set. 
 
 Gozar de alguna cosa, 
 
 to enjoy any thing. 
 
 Guiado de alguno, 
 
 guided by any one. 
 
 Guiarse por alguno, 
 
 to guide one's self by any one. 
 
 Gustar de alguna cosa, 
 
 to like any thing. 
 
 Hacer á todo, 
 
 to be ready at doing any thing. 
 
 Hacer de valiente, 
 
 to act as if valiant. 
 
 Hacer de escribano, 
 
 to act as a scribe. 
 
 Hacer para, 6 por salvarse, 
 
 to endeavor to save one's self. 
 
 Hacerse con algo, 
 
 to provide one's self with any thing. 
 
 Hincarse de rodillas, 
 
 to kneel down. 
 
 Holgarse con, v de alguna cosa, 
 
 to delight in any thing. 
 
 Inapeable de su opinion, 
 
 stubborn in one's opinion. 
 
 Inductivo de error, 
 
 leading to error. 
 
 Infecto de heregías, 
 
 infected with heresies. 
 
 Ingrato á los beneficios, 
 
 ungrateful for benefits. 
 
 Ingrato con los amigos, 
 
 ungrateful to friends. 
 
 Ir con alguno, 
 
 to agree with any one. 
 
 Jugar á tal juego, 
 
 to play at such a game. 
 
 Largo de manos, 
 
 with a liberal hand. 
 
 Lastimarse de alguno, 
 
 to have compassion on any one. 
 
 Leer los pensamientos á alguno, 
 
 to read the thoughts of any one. 
 
 Limitado de talentos, 
 
 limited as to talents. 
 
 Malquistarse con alguno, 
 
 to incur the hatred of any one. 
 
 Mantenerse de yerbas, 
 
 to live upon herbs. 
 
 Maravillarse de alguna cosa, 
 
 to marvel at any thing. 
 
202 OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Mas de cien ducados, 
 
 more than a hundred ducats. 
 
 Matarse en trabajar, 
 
 to kill one's self with labor. 
 
 Mediano de cuerpo, 
 
 of middling stature. 
 
 Mejorar de empleo, 
 
 to better one's employment. 
 
 Menor de edad, 
 
 under age; minor. 
 
 ±\leterse á sabio, 
 
 to affect the sage. 
 
 Meterse con alguno, 
 
 to pick a quarrel with any one. 
 
 Meterse en todo, 
 
 to be jack of all trades. . 
 
 Meterse en los peligros, 
 
 to expose one's self to dangers. 
 
 Mirar por alguno, 
 
 to look after any one's interest. 
 
 Molido de andar, 
 
 fatigued with walking. 
 
 Montar á caballo, 
 
 to mount a horse. 
 
 Montar en muía, 
 
 to mount a mule. 
 
 Montar en celera, 
 
 to fly into a passion. 
 
 Morir de poca edad, 
 
 to die at an early age. 
 
 Morirse de frío, 
 
 to be dying with cold. 
 
 Mudar de intento. 
 
 to alter one's mind. 
 
 Murmurar de alguno, 
 
 to murmur against any one. 
 
 Nacer con fortuna, 
 
 to be born to afortune. 
 
 Nacer para trabajos, 
 
 born to labor. 
 
 Notar á alguno de hablador, 
 
 to find fault with any one as a talker. 
 
 Oblividarse de lo pasado, 
 
 to forget the past. 
 
 Optar á los empleos, 
 
 to seek for an office. 
 
 Ordenarse de sacerdote, 
 
 to be ordained, as a priest. 
 
 Pagarse de buenas razones, 
 
 to be satisfied with good reasons. 
 
 Partir por mitad, 
 
 to divide into halves. 
 
 Pasar á cuchillo, 
 
 to put to the sword. 
 
 Pasar de Sevilla, 
 
 to go beyond Seville. 
 
 Pasar por cobarde, 
 
 to pass for a coward. 
 
 Pasarse con poco, 
 
 to be satisfied with a little. 
 
 Pasarse de bueno, 
 
 to be too good. 
 
 Pecar de ignorante, 
 
 to sin through ignorance. 
 
 Pedir algo d alguno, 
 
 to ask any thing of any one. 
 
 Pedir de justicia, 
 
 to claim in law. 
 
 Pedir en justicia, 
 
 to sue at law. 
 
 Perecer de hambre, 
 
 to perish with hunger. 
 
 Persuadirse á alguna cosa, 
 
 to be persuaded of any thing. 
 
 Precedido de otro, 
 
 preceded by another. 
 
 Preciarse de valiente, 
 
 to boast of one's self as courageous. 
 
 Presumir de docto, 
 
 to make pretensions for a man of 
 
 Quedar de asiento, 
 
 to remain in a spot. [learning. 
 
 Quedar de pies, 
 
 to remain on foot. 
 
 Quedar en casa, 
 
 to remain at home. 
 
 Quedar por andar, 
 
 to have to go farther. 
 
OF ADJECTIVES AND VERBS WITH PREPOSITIONS. 203 
 
 Quedar por valiente, 
 
 to be reputed as a valiant man. 
 
 Quedar por alguno, 
 
 to go surety for any one. 
 
 Recebirse de abogado, 
 
 to be admitted as a counsellor. 
 
 Redundar en beneficio, 
 
 to redound to the benefit. 
 
 Revolver hacia, -ó sobre el 
 
 enemigo, to return to the enemy. 
 
 Saber á vino, 
 
 to taste like wine. 
 
 Saber á trabajos, 
 
 to be acquainted with labor. 
 
 Sacar en limpio, 
 
 to clear up all doubts. 
 
 Salir á alguna cosa, 
 
 to co-operate in any thing. 
 
 Salir con la pretension, 
 
 to obtain one's end. 
 
 Salir por fiador, 
 
 to act as surety. 
 
 Servir de mayor-domo, 
 
 to serve as major-domo. 
 
 Sordo de un oido, 
 
 deaf with one ear. 
 
 Suplicar de la sentencia, 
 
 to supplicate against the sentence. 
 
 Suspirar por el mando, 
 
 to aspire after the command. 
 
 Teñir de azul, 
 
 to dye in blue. 
 
 Triunfar de los enemigos, 
 
 to triumph over the enemy. 
 
 Utilizarse en ó con alguna 
 
 cosa, to reap benefit from any thing. 
 
 Vecino al trono, 
 
 near the throne. 
 
 Vencerse á alguna cosa, 
 
 to conquer one's self in any thing. 
 
 Vengarse de otro, 
 
 to revenge one's self on another. 
 
 Verse con alguno, 
 
 to meet any one (for settling differences). 
 
 Vestir á la moda, 
 
 to dress according to the fashion. 
 
 Verstirse de paño, 
 
 to be dressed in cloth. 
 
 Volver por la verdad, 
 
 to stand out for the truth. 
 
 Volver en sí, 
 
 to come to one's self. 
 
APPENDIX TO PART III, 
 NUMBER IV. 
 
 A LIST OF THE MOST COMMON IDIOMATIC 
 PHRASES. 
 
 430. The general laws of the Spanish and English 
 languages are the same ; yet there are many forms of 
 expression peculiar to each, which can not be translated 
 from one language into the other by an exactly literal 
 combination of words: such words or phrases are termed 
 idioms. 
 
 (a.) In English we speak of "playing on a flute," while in Spanish 
 the same idea is expressed by "tocando la flauta," which literally means 
 "touching the flute." One form of expression is as good as the other, 
 since those who speak either language know what is meant. In Eng- 
 lish, " what o'clock is it ?"• is a very common colloquial idiom, which in 
 Spanish is expressed by "¿qué hora es?" ("what hour is-it ?") In 
 English we say, " I am u/raid," "I am hungry;'' while according to 
 the Spanish idiom it would be said, "I have fear ;" "I /¿are hunger" 
 " Hacer gran papel" (which rendered literally would be, " to make great 
 paper"), is a Spanish idiomatic term, meaning "to make a greed dis- 
 play," or as it is often, though not very elegantly, said in English, "to 
 make a figure," or " to cut a dash." These two latter phrases rendered 
 literally into Spanish, "hacer una figure" or " cortar un choque," would 
 be as little understood as " to make a great paper " would be in English. 
 Some of the most common Spanish idioms will be given in the follow- 
 ing list : 
 
 431. A. — When in English the indefinite article a is used after the 
 price or rate of any thing, as "ten dollars a yard," in Spanish the defi- 
 nite article el or la, or the preposition por is employed; as, "at fifteen 
 crowns a volume," á quince escudos el tomo (or, por tomo). 
 
 (a.) When a, used as above, comes before a noun implying time, the 
 preposition á is used with the definite article ; as, " six hundred francs a 
 year," seiscientos francos al año. 
 
 432. Alore. — In such phrases as "above mentioned," this word is ren- 
 dered by ya; as, "the author above cited," el autor ya citado. 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 205 
 
 433. Account. — " On no account," de ninguna manera ; " on your ac- 
 count" (that is, "for your sake"), por amor de vd. — "to your account" 
 (that is, " to your charge," or " debt"), á cargo de vd. 
 
 434. Act. — " To act as," is rendered by hacer de; as, "he-acted as 
 porter," hizo de portero. 
 
 435. After. — This word in such phrases as " ten minutes after three," 
 is rendered by y ; as, it is twenty minutes after eight, son las ocho y 
 viente minutos. 
 
 436. Ago. — This word is generally rendered by the verb hace or ha (see 
 304, c) ; as, a few days ago, pocos dias ha, or, hace pocos dias ; — how 
 long ago ? i cuanto tiempo ha 1 — long ago, mucho tiempo ha ; — some time 
 ago, hace algún tiempo ; a while ago, hace ya mucho tiempo. 
 
 437. Agree. — " To agree," when referring to a climate, is rendered by 
 probar ; as, the country agreed well with me, me probó bien el pais. 
 
 (a.) " To agree," when referring to food, is rendered by sentar bien ; 
 as, coffee does not agree with me; el café no me sienta bien. 
 
 438. Ail. — " To ail" is rendered by tener or doler ; as, what ails you? 
 ¿ qué tiene vd. ? or, ¿ qué le duele á vd. ? — nothing ails me, nada tengo, 
 or nada me duele. 
 
 439. Amiss. — "It -would not be amiss if ," is rendered by no ser malo 
 que, ox \>y no ser fuer a del caso que; as, it would not be amiss if you should 
 go there, no sería malo que vd. fuese allá, or, no sería fuera del caso que 
 vd. fuese allá. 
 
 (a.) "To take amiss," is rendered by llevar á mal; as, do not take it 
 amiss, no lo lleve vd. a mnl. 
 
 440. And. — Such sentences as "go and see who it is," "go and open 
 the door," etc., would be rendered in Spanish, " gó to see who it is," 
 "go to open the door; as, vaya vd. á ver quien es ; vaya vd. á abrir la 
 puerta. 
 
 441. Answer.— "To answer," when meaning "to correspond to," is 
 rendered by corresponder á ; as, this year's crop does hot answer our 
 expectations, la cosecha de este año no corresponde á nuestras espe- 
 ranzas. 
 
 442. As. — When as is used after such in the sense of who, in Span'sh, 
 the relative pronoun is employed ; as, all such as went there, todos los 
 que fueron allí. 
 
 443. Aware. — "To be aware of" is rendered by saber; as, you are not 
 aware of such a thing, vd. no sabe tal cosa. 
 
 444. Become. — " To become," when referring to entering upon some 
 office or profession, is rendered by hacerse or meterse á; as, he became a 
 carpenter, se hizo carpintero ; he became a knight, se metió á caballero. 
 
 (a.) Before an adjective, " to become is rendered by hacerse ; as, he be- 
 came poor, se hizo pobre. 
 
 (b.) " To become," meaning " to suit" or " to be suitable to," is rendered 
 by sentar, or caer, or venir bün; as, this hat becomes you perfectly, este 
 
 13 
 
206 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 sombrero le sienta á vd. perfectamente ; that suit becomes you well, esc 
 vestido Ze cae á vd. bien; this coat becomes you well, este frac le va á vd. 
 bien. 
 
 (c.) " To become of" is rendered by ser de and hacerse de in the phrase, 
 " what has become of;" as, what will become of my brother 1 ¿ qué será 
 de mi hermano ? what has become of my shoes 1 ¿ qué se ha hecho de 
 mis zapatos? 
 
 445. Bespeak. — " To bespeak" meaning "to evince" by demostrar ; as, 
 his behavior bespeaks a composed mind, su porte demuestra un ánimo 
 tranquilo. 
 
 446. Bite. — " To bite" is rendered by quemar in such expressions as, 
 this mustard bites my mouth, este mostaza quema la boca. 
 
 447. Blow. — " To blow" a trumpet, tocar un trompeta. 
 (a.) " To blow" one's nose, sonarse las narices. 
 
 448. Break. — " To break" a horse, domar un caballo. 
 
 449. Broad. — " Broad as long," is rendered, iqual en lodo. 
 
 450. Care. — " To care " is thus rendered in such expressions as these ; 
 what care 11 ¿ qué me importa á mi? I care .nothing for his laughing, 
 no se me da nada por su reir. Will you come to walk 1 I don't care if I 
 do, ¿ quiere vd. venir á paseo ? me importa poco el hacerlo ó no hacerlo. 
 
 451. Choose. — " To choose" when meaning "to have a disposition to," 
 is rendered by dar la gana; as, why don't you tell me your age 1 because 
 I don't choose, ¿por qué no me dice vd. cuantos años tiene? porqué no me 
 da la gana. 
 
 452. Come. — " How comes that ?" is rendered, ¿como es eso? 
 
 453. Conceit — " To be out of conceit of any thing," is rendered, perder 
 el gusto por alguna cosa. 
 
 454. Confess. — "I must confess" is rendered, debo decir. 
 
 455. Confine. — " He is confined to his bed," is rendered, no puede salir 
 de la cama, or, está en cama enfermo. 
 
 456. Count. — " To count," meaning " to regard" or " hold for" is ren- 
 dered by tenerse por ; as, he counts himself a learned man, el se tiene 
 por hombre docto. 
 
 AS7. Depth. — " In the depth of winter," is rendered, en el rigor del 
 invierno. 
 
 458. Do* — " To do," meaning "to make" or "to perform," is render- 
 ed by hacer, or ejecutar, or obrar; as, do good to those who hate you, 
 haced bien á los que os aborrecen.. 
 
 (a.) " How do you do?" may be rendered, ¿ cómo le va ávd. ? or ¿ cómo 
 está vd. ? or ¿ cómo se halla vd. ? 
 
 459. Else. — " Nobody else" is rendered, ninguna otro ; ''nothing else," 
 nada mas. 
 
 * It must be kept in mind that do is not expressed in Spanish when 
 used in English as an auxiliary verb ; thus, does he know ? would be 
 rendered, ¿ sabe él 7 knows he 1 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 207 
 
 460. End. — " My hair stands on an end" is in Spanish, se me erizan 
 los cabellos. 
 
 461. Fair. — " To play fair " is rendered, jugar limpio. 
 
 462. Fare. — " To fare like" is rendered by tratarse como; as, hejftcres 
 like a king, se le trata como á rey. 
 
 463. Fault. — "To be in fault for" or "to be to blame for," is rendered 
 by tener la culpa de ; as, am I in fault for, or am I to blame for this 1 
 l tengo yo la culpa de eso ? 
 
 (a.) "To find fault with" hallar que decir; as, he finds fault with 
 every thing, en todo halla que decir. 
 
 464. Favor. — " To favor," meaning to resemble, is rendered by pare- 
 cerse; as, this gentleman favors his father, este caballero se parece á su 
 padre. 
 
 (a.) "To do a favor," hacer un favor; as, do me the favor, hágame vd. 
 el favor. 
 
 465. Feel. — " To feel," referring to the state of health," is rendered by 
 sentirse or hallarse; as, how do you feel? ¿cómo se siente vd. ? or ¿cómo 
 se halla vd. ? 
 
 (a.) " To feel thirsty," "to feel pain," etc., are rendered by tener; as, 
 I feel hungry, tengo hambre; I feel nervous spasms, tengo espasmos 
 nerviosos. 
 
 {b.) " To feel the pulse" is expressed by tomar ; as, permit me to feel 
 your pulse, permita vd. que le tome el pulso. 
 
 466. Fellow. — " Fellow," meaning something corresponding to or 
 mated with another thing, is rendered by compañero or compañera ; as, 
 my buckles are not fellows, mis hebillas no son compañeras. 
 
 467. Figure. — " To cut or make a figure," hacer papel; as, he makes a 
 figure in the world, hace papel en el mundo. 
 
 463. Find. — " To find one's self," referring to the state of health, is 
 rendered by hallarse, or sentirse, or pasar ; as, how do you find yourself? 
 ¿ cómo se halla vd. ? or ¿ cómo se siente vd. ? or ¿ cómo lo pasa vd. ? 
 
 469. Fit. — " To fit" meaning "to suit " or " to be adapted to," is ren- 
 dered by se7itar, or caer, or venir, in the same manner as "to become" 
 (see 444, 6). 
 
 (a.) " To think fit" is rendered by parecer ; as, if you thioik fit, si d 
 vd. It parece. 
 
 470. Fond. — "To be fond of" is often rendered by ser amigo de or by 
 ser amante de ; as, Santa Anna is very fond of cocks, Santa- Anna es 
 muy amigo de gallos; he was very fond of literature, era muy amante 
 de las letras. 
 
 (a.) But more frequently, "to be fond of" is rendered by gustar (see 
 344) ; as, I am fond of singing, á mí me gusta el cantar. 
 
 471. Forbear. — "Not to forbear " meaning "710/ to be able to help or 
 avoid" is rendered by no poder menos de; as, I can not forbear laughing 
 at it, no puedo menos de reírme de ello. 
 
208 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 472. Glad. — "To be glad" is rendered by alegrarse; as, I am glad to 
 see you well, me alegro de verle avd. bueno. 
 
 473. Handsome. — "To look handsome." (See look, 4S7.) 
 
 474. Happen. — " To happen to be," hollarse por casualidad, or hallarse ; 
 as, I happened to be there, por casualidad me hallaba allí ; I unfortu- 
 nately happened not to be there, por desgracia no me hallé allí. 
 
 475. Have. — "To have" employed in the sense of " to desire," is ren- 
 dered by querer or pedir; as, what would you have? ¿qué quiere vd.? 
 or ¿ qué pide vd. ? I will have it so, así lo quiero. 
 
 476. Help. — "To help to," meaning "to serve at table," is rendered by 
 servir ; as, shall I help you to a wing of this capun ? ¿ quiere vd. que Ic 
 sirva un ala de este capon ? 
 
 (a.) " To help," meaning "to avoid" or "to prevent," is rendered by 
 remediar, or dejar de hacer ; as, I can not help it, no remediar/o, or no 
 dejarZo de hacer. "Not to help," meaning "not to prevent," is rendered 
 as " not to forbear" (see 471) ; as, I can not help believing it, no puedo 
 menos de creerlo. 
 
 (b.) " There is no help for it" is rendered, no tiene remedio. 
 
 477. Hit. — "To hit the mark" is rendered by dar en el bianco. 
 
 (a.) "To hit the nail on the head," meaning "to come to the point," is 
 rendered by dar en el hito, or acertar, or dar en ; as, you hit it right, or, 
 you hit the nail on the head, vd. dio en el hito, or, vd. lo acertó, or, die vd. 
 en ello. 
 
 478. How. — "How," succeeded by "ever," used to qualify adjectives, 
 is expressed by por, and the adjective followed by the conjunction que; 
 as, how great soever your merit may be, por grande que sea vuestro mér- 
 ito : how ever amiable thou mightest be, por amable que fueses. 
 
 (a.) "How" is rendered in various ways in Spanish, according to its 
 meaning and manner of use in English ; 
 
 How is the weather ? 
 How happy I am ! 
 How can you be so wicked ? 
 How well it fits you ! 
 How do you like the symphony 7 
 How shall we spend the afternoon ? 
 How pure and healthful is the coun- 
 try air ! 
 
 ¿Qué tal tiempo hace ? 
 ¡Qué feliz soy ! 
 
 ¿Cómo puede V. ser tan malo 1 
 ¡Qué bien le sienta á V. ! 
 ¿Qué tal le parece la sinfonía 7 
 ¿En que emplearemos la tarde 7 
 ¡Cuan puro y saludable es el aire 
 del campo ' 
 
 (&.) The following examples will also serve to show the manner in 
 which " how " before an adjective or adverb in English, is used before a 
 verb or noun in Spanish ; thus, 
 
 How far is it from here to Madrid ? 
 
 How far is it to the hotel 7 
 
 How long is this street 7 
 
 How high is that pillar? 
 
 How much do you ask for this? 
 
 ¿Cuanto dista de aquí á Madrid? 
 ¿Qué distancia hay á la fonda? 
 ¿Cual es la estencion de esta calle? 
 ¿Qué altura tiene esa columna ? 
 ¿Cuanto pide V. por esto 7 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 209 
 
 Heno many miles from here to i ¿Cuantas millas hay de aquí á 
 
 Rome ? Roma ? 
 
 How often does the steamer sail 1 I ¿Con. qué frecuencia sale el vapor ? 
 
 479. In. — "Not to be in a person," signifying a want of ability, is ren- 
 dered by no poder ¡ or no ser capaz de ; as, it is not in him to do it, no 
 puede hacerlo, or no es capaz de hacerlo. 
 
 480. Instant. — "Instant" used to point out the present month, is ren- 
 dered by corriente ; as, the fifth instant, el cinco del corriente. 
 
 481. Kind. — "To be so kind as," is rendered by tener la bondad de, or 
 ser bastante bondadoso para ; as, beso kind as to repeat what you said, 
 tenga vd. la bondad de repetir lo que ha dicho vd., or, sea vd. bastante 
 bondadoso para repetir lo que ha dicho. 
 
 482. Last. — "Last week" is rendered, la semana pasada. 
 4S3. Laugh. — "To laugh in one's sleeve," reir entre si. 
 
 484. Leave. — "Leave," meaning "permission," is rendered by permiso 
 or licencia; as, by your leave, con el permiso de vd., or con licencia de 
 vd. 
 
 (a.) "To take leave of" is rendered by despedirse de; as, he took leave 
 of his friends, se despidió de los amigos. 
 
 485. Like. — "To like" meaning "to be fond of," is rendered by gustar 
 (see 344) ; as v do you like chocolate? ¿le gusta a vd. el chocolate? 
 
 (a.) "To like," meaning "to suit," is rendered by hallar ; as, how do 
 you like this beer? ¿cómo halla vd. esta cerveza ? 
 
 (b.) "To like," meaning "to wish," " to desire," "to esteem," by querer; 
 as, who likes soup? ¿quién quiere sopa? — as you may-ZiA-e it, como vd. 
 quisiere; — he likes nobody, él no quiere á nadie. 
 
 (c.) "He has not his like," no tiene igual. 
 
 4S6. Long. — "Long ago," mucho tiempo ha; — "long afterward," 
 mucho después;— "ere long," antes de mucho ;— " not long before," poco 
 antes, or poco tiempo antes ; " how long is it ?" ¿ cuanto tiempo hace ? 
 
 487. — Look. — "To look beautiful, homely," etc., is rendered by parecer, 
 or tener apariencia; as, how handsome she looks! ¡qué hermosa ella 
 parece ! or qué hermosa aparéncia tiene ella. 
 
 (a.) "To look well, ill," etc., is rendered by tener semblante, or tener 
 cara de; as, how does he look ? ¿qué semblante tiene? He looks sick, 
 tiene mal semblante, or tiene semblante de enfermo, or tiene cara de en- 
 fermo. 
 
 488. Manners. — "Good manners," buena crianza; — he has no man- 
 ners, es un mal criado, or no tiene crianza; — I shall teach you better 
 manners, yo te enseñaré á portarte mejor. 
 
 489. Matter. — "To matter," by importar ; as, what matters it? ¿qué 
 importa eso ? — it matters not, no importa. 
 
 (a.) "To be the matter with," by tener ; as, what is the matter with 
 you ? i qué tiene vd. ? When it refers to illness, doler may be used, as 
 in ail (see 43S). 
 
 18* 
 
210 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 (&.) "What is the matter?" (meaning " what is going on ?") ¿deque 
 se trata? 
 
 490. Mean. — "To mean" signifying " to wish" " to ex-press" is ren- 
 dered by querer decir ; as, what do you mean by that? ¿qué quiere vd. 
 decir con eso ? 
 
 (a.) " To mean," signifying " to intend" by estar en, or tratar de; as, I 
 mean to go to-morrow, estoy en ir mañana; — what do you mean to do? 
 I qué trata vd. de hacer ? 
 
 (b.) " He means well," tiene buenas intenciones. 
 
 491. Mind. — " To mind," meaning " to take care of" is rendered by 
 tener cuidado con ; as, mind him, ten cuidado con él. 
 
 (a.) " To have a mind," by tener gana; as, I had a mind to ask him, 
 yo tenía gana de pedirle ; I have a great mind to go, muchas ganas tengo 
 de ir. 
 
 (b.) " To call to mind," by traer á la memoria; as, I called to mind the 
 promise, me traje á la memoria la promesa. 
 
 492. Miss. — "To miss," meaning "to find missing," is rendered by 
 echar menos ; as, he missed his watch, echo menos su reloj. 
 
 (a.) "To miss," meaning " to omit," by dejar; as, we can not miss 
 finding it, no podemos dejar de hallarlo, 
 (p.) "To miss the mark," errar el bianco. 
 
 493. Mistress. — "To be mistress or master of," meaning "to under- 
 stand thoroughly" is rendered by poseer ; as, she is mistress of the Eng- 
 lish language, ella posee la lengua Inglesa. 
 
 494. Muster. — "To pass muster," meaning "to avail," is rendered by 
 valer ; as, such excuses will not pass muster with the judge, semejantes 
 disculpas no valdrán nada para con el juez. 
 
 495. Must. — "Must" is rendered by haber de, by ser preciso, by ser 
 menester, by deber, or by tener que; as, I must be there at two o'clock, 
 he de estar allí á las dos ; — I must go, es preciso que me vaya ; — I must 
 wash my hands, es menester que me lave las manos ; — I must have done 
 it, yo hubiera debido hacerlo ; it must be, debe ser ; — I must go, tengo 
 que irme. 
 
 496. Near. — "To come near or very near" doing a thing, meaning 
 " to have like to have done it," or " to be upon the point of doing it," is 
 rendered by estar á pique de, by estar en punto de, by estar para, by fal- 
 tar poco para que, or by por poco ; as, I came near being killed, estuve á 
 pique de matarme ; — I had like to have been killed, estuve á punto de 
 matarme ; — I came very near writing to thee this morning, estuve para 
 escribirte esta mañana ; — they were very near being punished, poco falto 
 para (\\xe fuesen castigados ; — I was very near falling, por poco me caí. 
 
 497. Need. — "To need," or " to stand in need of," by hacer falta á; as, 
 we need a little rain, nos hace falta un poco de agua; John stands in 
 much need of your advice ; á Juan le hace mucha falta el consejo de vd. 
 (see 345, a). "To need" is also sometimes rendered by necesitar, or by 
 haber menester. 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 211 
 
 493. Next. — "Next Sunday," el domingo que viene, or el domingo 
 próximo; — "the next house," la casa inmediata; — "next to impossible," 
 casi imposible. 
 
 499. Nothing. — "To be nothing or as nothing to any one," by nada 
 importar; as, that is nothing to me, eso nada me importa. 
 
 (a.) "To be good for nothing," by para nada servir; as, it is good for 
 nothing, para nada sirve. 
 
 (b.) "To mean or signify nothing," by nada querer decir; as, it signi- 
 fies nothing ; nada quiere decir. 
 
 500. Obligation. — "To be under obligations to" by deber favores ; as, I 
 am under many obligations to him, le debo muchos favores. 
 
 501. Oblige. — "To oblige" meaning "to do a favor to anyone and 
 bring under obligations," is rendered by estimar; as, you will greatly 
 oblige me by writing to me, le estimaré á vd. mucho que me escriba. 
 
 (a.) "To be obliged" is íendered by agradecer, by estar agradecido, or 
 by estar reconocido; as, 1 am obliged to you for your attention, It agra- 
 dezco á vd. su atención; — I am very much obliged to you, le estoy á vd. 
 muy agradecido, or le estoy á vd. muy reconocido. 
 
 502. Offer.— "Not to offer to do any thing" is rendered by guardar de; 
 as, do not offer to do it, guárdese vd. de hacerlo. 
 
 503. Old. — "Old" when referring to the age of any one, is rendered 
 by edad or año with the verb tener ; as, how old are you ? ¿ cuantos años 
 tiene vd. ? or ¿ qué edad tiene vd. ? I am twenty years old, tengo viente 
 años. 
 
 504. Opinion. — "To have a high opinion of one's self," estar muy lleno 
 de sí mismo ; as, he has a very high opinion of himself, está muy lleno de 
 sí mismo. 
 
 (a.) " This is my opinion," by esto es lo que yo pienso. 
 
 505. Ought. — "Ought" may be rendered by deber, by ser menester, or 
 by preciso es; as, you ought to remember that we must all die, vd. debe 
 acordarse que todos hemos de morir; — I ought to go, es menester que me 
 vaya. 
 
 506. Over. — "To be over," in the sense of "to be past," is rendered by 
 pasar; as, winter is already over, pasó ya el invierno; I wish that the 
 summer was already over ; quiesiera que ya hubiese pasado el verano. 
 
 507. Own. — "To own," meaning "to possess," by ser de; as, who 
 owns this house 1 John owns it, ¿ de quién es esta casa? es de Juan. 
 
 (a.) "To own," meaning " lo confess," by confesar or reconocer; as, 
 she owns it, eüa lo confiesa. 
 
 503. Part. — " To act the part of" by hacer el papel de ; as, he acted the 
 part of an emperor, hizo el papel de emperador. 
 
 (a.) "For my part" by por mi parte, or por lo que á ml toca, or en 
 cuanto á mí. 
 
 509. Pass. — "To pass compliments," by hacer or dar cumplimientos. 
 (a.) "To pass sentence," by pronunciar la sentencia. 
 
 510. Past. — "To be past" meaning "to be over" by pasar (see 506). 
 
212 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 (a.) "To be past" meaning " to be -more than" by ser mas de; as, it is 
 past four o'clock, son mas de las cuatro. 
 
 (b.) '• He is past recovery," no hay esperanzas de que se cure ; "he is 
 past cure," está incurable. 
 
 511. Piece. — " Apiece" meaning "each one" is rendered cada uno; 
 as, I gave them ten shillings apiece, les di diez chelines á cada uno. 
 
 512. Play. — " To play" referring to musical instruments, by tocar; 
 as, he plays the flute very well, toca la flauta muy bien. 
 
 (a.) " To play " meaning "to act the part of" by hacer ; as, he plays 
 the fool, el hace el tonto. 
 
 513. Please. — "To please" meaning "to gratify" or "to give plear- 
 snre" is rendered by agradar, by dar gusto, or by gustar (see 344) ; as, 
 the proposal pleases me very much, muchísimo vie agrada la propuesta ; — 
 if you please, si vd. gusta. 
 
 (a.) "To please," meaning "to be pleased," and used as a word of re- 
 quest or ceremony, is rendered by servirse; as, please to accept this 
 homage, sírvase vd. aceptar este homenage; please lend me two pens, sir- 
 vase vd. prestarme dos pluvias. 
 
 514. Pray. — "Pray," used as a request, as, "pray do it," is rendered 
 by servirse (see 513, a), or by hacer el favor de; as, pray give me my hat, 
 sirvase vd. darme el sombrero, or hágame vd. el favor de darvie el som- 
 brero. 
 
 515. Rather. — "Rather" is generally rendered in Spanish according to 
 its meaning in connection with the accompanying words in English; 
 as, I would rather go than stay, mas quisiera irme que quedarme; — this 
 work is rather dear, esta obra no deja de ser cara (literally, "this work 
 Jails not in being dear"). 
 
 516. Regard. — "With regard to," or "in regard to," or "as it re- 
 gards" by en cuanto a, or by tocante á; as, with regard to what you 
 say, en cuanto á lo que vd. dice, or tocante á lo que vd. dice. 
 
 517. Respect. — "It respects" meaning "it concerns" by toca; as, it 
 respects you directly, toca á vd. en derechura. 
 
 (a.) "With respect to" by tocante á, or by con respecto á; as, with re- 
 spect to what you say, tocante á lo que vd. dice. 
 
 (b.) "In some respect," de alguno modo ; — " in another respect," por 
 otra parte ; — " out of respect for you," por consideración á vd. 
 
 (c) " To give one's respects to," dar expresiones, or rendar respetos, or 
 dar memorias; as, give my respects to him, déle vd. mis expresiones; 
 or present my respects (or regards) to your brother, rinda vd. mis respetos 
 á su hermano. 
 
 513. Right. — "To be right ox in the right," by tener razón ; you are 
 right, vd. tiene razón ; you are not right (or you are wrong) vd. no tiene 
 razón. 
 
 519. Sake. — "For God's sake," por amor de Dios ; "for your sake," 
 por respeto á vd ; — "do it for my sake" hágalo vd. por mí. 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 213 
 
 520. Same. — "To be all the same to," by ser todo uno para; as, it is all 
 ike same to me, para mí es todo uno. 
 
 521. Short. — "Short of" meaning " not to have a supply of ," is ren- 
 dered by escaso de ; as, he finds himself short of money, se halla escaso 
 de dinero. 
 
 (a.) "To fall short or come short of" meaning " to be inferior" by no 
 llegar á, or ser inferior á; as, the translation falls short of the original, 
 la traducción no llega al original, or la traducción es inferior al original. 
 
 522. Since. — "Since," when meaning "ago," is rendered in the same 
 manner (see 436) ; as, some months since, algunos meses ha ; — long since, 
 hace mucho tiempo ; — not long since, hace poco, or hace^oco tiempo. 
 
 (a ) "Since it is so," by siendo esto así, or, pues que esto es así. 
 
 523. Smdl. — "To smell of or to smell like," by oler á; as, he smells of 
 garlic, huele á ajo. 
 
 524. So. — "So," when meaning "it" is rendered by lo or eso; as, do 
 you so? ¿hace xd. eso? you think that she is rich, but she is not so, 
 xd. piensa que ella es rica, pero no lo es. 
 
 525. Soon. — In such expressions as, " how soon will he return," mean- 
 ing " how long will he be in returning," tardar (to delay, to stay long) is 
 used : as, how soon will we arrive ? ¿ cuanto tardaremos en llegar ?— how 
 soon shall you return 7 ¿ cuanto tardará xd. en xolver ? 
 
 526. Sorry. — "To be sorry for," by sentir ; as, I am very sorry for it, 
 mucho lo siento. 
 
 527. Spare. — "To spare," meaning " to leave untried" by perdonar ; 
 as, we spare not any effort to carry out our project, no perdonamos esfu- 
 erzo alguno para llevar á cabo nuestro proyecto. 
 
 528. Spend. — "To spend," meaning "to pass," by pasar ; as, I shall 
 spend the winter with my sister, pasaré el invierno con mi hermana. 
 
 529. Stand. — " To stand," meaning "to be upon the feet," is rendered 
 by estar en pie; as, the Pharisee standing, prayed, el Fariseo estando en 
 pié, oraba; she stood warming herself, ella estaba en pié, calentándose. 
 
 530. Strike. — "To strike." referring to the sounding by percussion of 
 a clock, is rendered by dar as, the clock strVces eight, el reloj da las 
 ocho ; it has just, struck nine, las nueve acaban de dar (see 337). 
 
 (a.) "To strike the nag," meaning to haul down the colors, by 
 arriarla bandera. 
 
 531. Succeed. — "To succeed," is rendered by salir bien, or by tener 
 buen éxito, or by ser afortunado ; as, I wish that you may-succeed, desio 
 que xd. salga bien, or deseo que xd. tenga buen éxito ; — if I succeed in this 
 business, si soy afortunado en este negocio, or si salgo bien en este ne' 
 gócio. 
 
 532. Such. — " In such a time," en tal tiempo; — "Mr. Such-a-one," el 
 señor fulano de tal. 
 
 533. Suit.—" To suit." (See 437, a, and 444, b.) 
 
 534. Sure. — "To be sure not," by guardarse bien de; as, be sure not 
 to do it, guarde vd. bien de hacerlo. 
 
214 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 535. Taste. — "To taste of," by saber á; as, this honey tastes of (or 
 like) pitch, esta miel sabe á la pez. 
 
 536. Teens.—" To be in teens" by no llegar á los viente ; as, she is not 
 yet out of her teens, ella aun no llega á los viente. 
 
 537. Test. — "To stand the test" by ser de prueba; as, she stands the 
 test, ella es de prueba. 
 
 538. There. — "There," used in English before verbs in such expres- 
 sions, " there is a man in Boston," " there are some people who are 
 never satisfied," etc., is rendered in Spanish by the tenses of the verb 
 haber used impersonally (see 218), and sometimes by the third person 
 singular or plural of other verbs ; thus, there is a place in Spain, hay un 
 lugar en España; — there are many things, hay muchas cosas; — there 
 were many soldiers, hubo muchos soldados ; — there can not be, no puede 
 haber ; — there came a man from Rome, vino un hombre de Roma. 
 
 539. Thereabouts. — "Thereabouts," referring to number or quantity, 
 is rendered by poco mas ó menos ; as, my sister is eighteen years old or 
 thereabouts, mi hermana tiene diez y ocho años ó poco mas o menos. 
 
 540. To. — "To" is sometimes rendered in Spanish by de ; as, he is a 
 friend to the poor, es amigo de los pobres; — Philip the Second was suc- 
 cessor to Charles the Fifth, Felipe segundo fué sucesor de Carlos quin- 
 to ; — the road to London, el camino de Londres. 
 
 541. Upwards. — "Upwards," meaning more, is rendered by mas; as, 
 ten pounds and upwards, diez libras 6 mas. 
 
 542. Usual, — "As usual," employed in speaking of the state of the 
 health, is rendered by como siempre ; as, how is your father ? As usual, 
 su señor padre de vd., ¿ cómo está ? Como siempre. 
 
 543. Wage. — " To wage war," hacer guerra. 
 
 544. Want. — "To want," is rendered by querer and by necesitar ; as, 
 what do you want? ¿quéeslo que vd. quiere? — do you want nothing 
 else 1 i nada mas necesita vd. ? 
 
 (a.) "Tobe wanted," in such sentences as, "you are wanted," and 
 "he is wanted,"may be rendered by le llaman á vd., and le buscan. 
 
 545. Wind. — "To wind up a watch or clock," by dar cuerda al reloj. 
 
 546. Wonder. — "To wonder " is not rendered in Spanish in such sen- 
 tences as, " I wonder whether she will sing to-night? ¿si ella cantará 
 esta noche ? • 
 
 547. Worth.— " To be worth" (speaking of persons), is rendered by 
 poseer, or by tener ; as, he is worth a house, él tiene una casa. 
 
 (a.) "To be worth " (speaking of the value of things), is rendered by 
 valer ; as, how much is this watch worth ? ¿ cuanto vale este reloj ? 
 
 (b.) "To be worth while," by merecer or valer la pena de, or by haber 
 para qué; as, it is worth while to do it, vale la pena de hacerlo ; — it is 
 not xcorth while, no hay para qué. 
 
 548. Wrong. — "To be wrong," or "tobe in the wrong," by no tener 
 razón ; as, he is wrong, no tiene razón. 
 
 549. In English, a negative interrogative is frequently added to an 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 215 
 
 affirmative, and an affirmative to a negative sentence, to render them 
 more expressive; thus, "she is here, is she not?" — "they will come, 
 will they not?" — "you have studied Spanish, have you not?" — or, "she 
 is not here, is she?" — " they will not come, will they?" — "you have not 
 studied Spanish, have you?" In Spanish, this sort of interrogatory is 
 rendered after affirmative sentences by ¿ no es verdad? (" is it not true ?') 
 and after negative sentences by ¿es verdad? ("is it true?") as, "you 
 will do me the pleasure to dine with me, will you not?" me hará vd. el 
 gusto de comer conmigo, i no es verdad ? — " you have not eaten any fish, 
 have you?" no ha comido vd. pescado, ¿es verdad 1 — " the traitor would 
 have disclosed every thing, wouldn't he ?" todo lo hubiera declarado el 
 traidor, ¿ no es verdad 1 
 
 550. The particle "it," followed by a relative pronoun, is frequently 
 used in English in sentences like these : " if was John who did that ;" — 
 " it is the king who is to be blamed ;"— " it was the French who first dis- 
 covered it." In Spanish, the word "it" is not rendered, and the verb 
 which in English agrees in the singular number with " it," is in Span- 
 ish in the number of the noun to which it refers ; as, fué Juan el que lo 
 hizo;— fueron los Españoles los que conquistaron á Méjico; that is, John 
 was he who did it, — the Spaniards were they who conquered Mexico. 
 
 551. In translating English phrases into Spanish, it will generally be 
 found necessary to resolve them into their most obvious meaning ; thus, 
 " he stood up for the robbers," means, " he defended (or took the part of) 
 the robbers," and can be rendered, defendió á los ladrones. " He stood 
 (stands) godfather to the child," means, "he is godfather to the child," 
 and may be rendered, es padrino del niño. " John takes after his 
 father," may mean, " John imitates his father," or " John resembles his 
 father," and may be rendered, Juan imita á su padre, or Juan se parece 
 á su padre. " The judge look up with this bed-room," means, " the judge 
 contented himself (or was contented) with this room," and may be ren- 
 dered, el juez se contenta con esta alcoba. " To coin words," means " to 
 invent words," and is rendered, inventar palabras; — "to coin a lie," is 
 rendered, forjar una mentira. " He keeps up his usual retinue," is ren- 
 dered, mantiene su tren acostumbrado. "He eats nothing but what 
 comes up" means, " he vomits whatever he eats," and is rendered, 
 vomita cuanto come. 
 
 552. The word "que" in Spanish, like the word "that" in English, 
 is employed with various meanings, as is shown by the following exam- 
 ples : 
 
 (a.) La muger que vimos. 
 (6.) El hombre que habla, 
 (c.) Lo que es propio en ui 
 
 impropio en otro. 
 (d.) No sé que hacer. 
 (e.) No sé que pluma tomar. 
 
 The woman whom (that) we-saw. 
 The man who (that) is-speaking. 
 What (that which) is proper in one, 
 
 is improper in another. 
 I know not what to do. 
 I know which pen to take. 
 
216 
 
 IDIOMATIC PUPEASES. 
 
 {/.) Ofrecimientos es la moneda 
 
 que corre en este siglo, 
 (o-) ¡Qué desgracia! 
 (A.) Le mandó que viniese. 
 (i.) El pintor es mas docto que el 
 
 cirujano. 
 (j.) No es lo mismo prometer que 
 
 cumplir. 
 (Je?) ¡Qué enfadoso es vd. í 
 (Z.) Allí no es lícito que las lágri- . 
 
 mas lleguen á los ojos, que eso es 
 
 flagueza. 
 (m.) Que llueva, que no llueva, 
 (n.) Tarde que temprano, 
 (o.) ¿Que es del libro 1 
 (p.) Sentiría que fuesen rehusados. 
 
 (q.) Espérala que yo tuviese ver- 
 duras. 
 
 Promises are the co'n which is cur- 
 rent in this age. 
 
 What a misfortune! 
 
 I ordered that he should come. • 
 
 The painter is more learned than 
 the surgeon. 
 
 It is not the same to promise as to 
 perform. 
 
 Hoic tedious you are ! 
 
 Here it is not proper that tears 
 should-come to the eyes, for (or 
 because) this is a weakness. 
 
 Whether it may-rain, or not rain. 
 
 Late or early. 
 
 Where is the book 1 
 
 I-should-be-sorry if they-should- 
 be refused. 
 
 He-was-waiting till I should-have 
 vegetables. 
 
 553. Sometimes que is employed in Spanish when it would be redun- 
 dant in English ; as, 
 Cualquier cerveza que yo tuviese. 
 Estáte allí hasta que yo te lo diga 
 
 Antes de que estuviesen de vuelta. 
 Que sus tesoros sean cojidos. 
 Que no se engañe. 
 
 554. Que is sometimes preceded 
 
 lated in English ; as, 
 
 A fin de que yo sea rico. 
 
 Espera á que yo esté necesitado. 
 
 En caso de que seáis engañados. 
 
 Cuidábamos de que no se despár- 
 tase vd. 
 
 Whatever beér I might have. 
 Remain-thou there until I tell it 
 
 thee. 
 Before they-were returned. 
 Let his treasures be seized. 
 Let him not deceive himself. 
 
 by a preposition which is not trans- 
 
 ! In order Hurt I may-be ricn. 
 | He-is-waiting till I may-be needy. 
 j In case that you should-be deceived. 
 We-were-careful that you should 
 ! not awake. 
 
 OTHER IDIOMATIC EXPRESSIONS. 
 
 Es de dia. Es de noche. 
 El sol sale. El sol se pone. 
 Hace calor. Hace mucho frío. 
 Corre mucho viento. 
 Hace oscuro. Hace luna. 
 Hace un tiempo húmido. 
 I Que tal tiempo hace 1 
 
 i It is day. It is night. 
 
 The sun rises. The sun sets. 
 I It is hot. It is very cold. 
 
 The wind blows hard. 
 i It is dark. It is moonlight. 
 
 The weather is damp. 
 I How is the weather? 
 
IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 217 
 
 l Cuantos años tiene vd. 1 ¿ Qué 
 edad tiene vd. ? 
 
 Tengo quince años cumplidos. 
 Acabo de cumplir veinte años. 
 
 i, Qué edad le echaría vd. á mi 
 padre ? 
 
 Ya debe haber pasado de los cin- 
 cuenta. 
 
 I Quiere vd. hacerme un favor ? 
 
 I Puedo pedirle á vd. un favor ? 
 
 Cuento con vd. ¿ no es verdad ? 
 
 Llaman á la campanilla. 
 
 Oigo llamar. Es el señor S . 
 
 Vd. come dentro de media hora 
 
 corta. 
 Yo estoy hecho á todo. 
 Ese fuego está bien muerto. 
 Ya empieza á hacer llama. 
 I Qué dia del mes tenemos ? 
 Enséñeme vd. botas. Aquí tiene 
 
 vd. un par. 
 No tenga vd. cuidado. 
 El tiempo está tan cubierto que 
 
 apenas se ve. 
 Quisiera un sombrero á la moda. 
 I Se siguen haciendo sombreros 
 
 altos de forma ? 
 Algunos se ven. 
 Aquí tiene vd. uno. 
 j, Cuanto vale ? 
 
 l Cuando estará corriente ? 
 
 Me duele mucho la cabeza. 
 
 Veamos la lengua. 
 
 Todas los dias doy un paseo de tres 
 6 cuatro horas. 
 
 I Tiene vd. habitaciones que alqui- 
 lar? 
 
 I Da el cuarto sobre la calle ? 
 
 No señor, da sobre el jardin. 
 
 I Monta vd. á caballo ? 
 
 Pronto van á acabar los encantos 
 del otoño. 
 
 Ya estamos en invierno. 
 
 ¿Cómo se puede gustar del invierno 
 
 How old are you ? What is your 
 
 age? 
 I am past fifteen. I am just twenty 
 
 years old. 
 How old do you think my father 
 
 is? 
 He must be above fifty years old. 
 
 Will you do me a favor? 
 
 May I ask you a favor ? 
 
 I can rely upon you, can't I ? 
 
 Some one rings the door-bell. 
 
 I hear a knock, a ring. It is Mr. 
 
 S . 
 
 You dine in less than half an hour. 
 
 I am used to every thing. 
 This fire is almost out. 
 It just begins to blaze. 
 What day of the month is it? 
 Show me some boots. Here is a 
 
 pair. 
 Make yourself easy. 
 The weather is so cloudy that we 
 
 can scarcely see each other. 
 I want a fashionable hat. 
 Are high crowned hats still made? 
 
 Some are still seen. 
 
 Here is one (Here you have one). 
 
 What is the price of it? (how 
 
 much is it worth ?) 
 When will it be ready ? 
 My head aches very much. 
 Let me see your tongue. 
 I walk three or four hours every 
 
 day. 
 Have you any apartments to let ? 
 
 Does the room look into the street? 
 No, sir, it looks into the garden. 
 Do you ride on horseback ? 
 The pleasures of autumn are about 
 
 to disappear. 
 It is winter. (We are in winter. 
 How can any one like winter ? 
 
 19 
 
218 
 
 IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 
 
 Andaré el camino á caballo. 
 
 i Se duerme en el camino 1 
 
 Es cerca de las dos. 
 
 Han dado las tres. 
 
 I Cuanto tiempo hace que está vd. 
 
 en los Estados Unidos ? 
 Hace mas de un año. 
 Le tuve por un Ingles. 
 I Q,ué noticias tenemos 1 
 
 l Qué noticias corren 1 
 
 l Qué se dice en la ciudad ? 
 
 I No ha oido vd. hablar de la guer- 
 ra ? 
 
 No se dice nada de ella. 
 
 Se habla de un sitio. 
 
 Todos necesitan de la paz. 
 
 I Q,ué le parece á vd. de mi som- 
 brero ? 
 
 Buenos dias tenga vd. 
 
 Le diremos á vd. nuestro parecer. 
 
 Pues, ¿qué tal? 
 
 Buenas noches. 
 
 I will perform the journey on horse- 
 back. 
 
 Do we sleep on the road ? 
 
 It is nearly two o'clock. 
 
 It has struck three. 
 
 How long have you been in the 
 United States? 
 
 It is more than a year. 
 
 I took him for an Englishman. 
 
 What is the news? (What news 
 have we ?) 
 
 What news is current ? 
 
 What do they say in the city ? 
 
 Have you not heard the war 
 spoken of? 
 
 Nothing is said of it. 
 
 They talk of a siege. 
 
 Every body wishes for peace. 
 
 How does my hat appear to you ? 
 
 Good morning to you. 
 We will give you our opinion, 
 Well, how do you like it ? 
 Good night. 
 
APPENDIX TO PART III 
 
 NUMBER V. 
 
 A LIST OF THE MOST COMMON ABBRE- 
 VIATIONS. 
 
 556. The following list comprehends the most common 
 abbreviations employed by Spanish writers : 
 
 A. 
 
 Arroba, 
 
 
 T wenty-five pounds weight. 
 
 AA. 
 
 Autores, 
 
 
 Authors. 
 
 A. C. 
 
 Año Cristiano, 
 
 
 Christian year. 
 
 Agto. 
 
 Agosto, 
 
 
 August. 
 
 Art. 6 Artie. 
 
 Articulo, 
 
 
 Article. 
 
 B. 
 
 Beato, Bachiller, 
 
 
 Blessed, Bachelor of Arts. 
 
 B. L. M. 
 
 { Beso, 6 besa la mano, 
 l manos, 
 
 6 las 
 
 i I kiss the hands. 
 
 
 
 B. L. P. 
 
 Beso, ó besa los pies, 
 
 
 I kiss the feet. 
 
 Brno. P. 
 
 Beatísimo Padre, 
 
 
 Most blessed Father. 
 
 C. 6 Cap. ó Capit. Capítulo, 
 
 
 Chapter. 
 
 C. M. B. 
 
 Cuyas manos beso, ó 
 
 besa, 
 
 Whose hands I kiss. 
 
 Col. 
 
 Coluna, 
 
 
 Column. 
 
 Conoci 10 - 
 
 Conocimiento, 
 
 
 Bill of lading. 
 
 Corte- 
 
 Corriente, 
 
 
 Current. 
 
 C. P. B. 
 
 Cuyos pies beso, 6 besa, 
 
 Whose feet I kiss. 
 
 Cta. 
 
 Cuenta, 
 
 
 Account. 
 
 D. 6 Dn- 
 
 Don, 
 
 
 Mr. 
 
 D a 
 
 Doña, 
 
 
 Mrs. 
 
 •dd. 
 
 Doctores, 
 
 
 Doctors. 
 
 Dha. 
 
 Dicha, 
 
 
 Ditto or said. 
 
 Dho. 
 
 Dicho, 
 
 
 Ditto or said. 
 
 Dice. 
 
 Diciembre, 
 
 
 December. 
 
 Dr. 
 
 Doctor, 
 
 
 Doctor. 
 
 E. g. 6 E. gr. 
 
 ( Exempli gratia (por 
 ( pío), 
 
 ejem- 
 
 > For example. 
 
 En°- 
 
 Enero, 
 
 
 January. 
 
 Esmo- (, EsC mo 
 
 Escelentísimo, 
 
 
 Most excellent. 
 
 Feb»- 
 
 Febrero, 
 
 
 February. 
 
 Fha. 
 
 Fecha, 
 
 
 Dated. 
 
220 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 Fho. 
 
 Fecho, 
 
 Dated. 
 
 Fol. 
 
 Folio, 
 
 Folio. 
 
 Fr. 
 
 Fray, ti f rey, 
 
 Friar, Brother. 
 
 Ib. 
 
 Ibidem, 
 
 Same. > 
 
 UleJllmo.Jllma. 
 
 $ Ilustre, Jlustrísimo, llus- 
 t trísima, 
 
 ) Illustrious, Most Illustri- 
 v ous. 
 
 
 J. c. 
 
 Jesucristo, 
 
 -Jesus Christ. 
 
 L. 
 
 Ley, 
 
 Law. 
 
 Lib. 
 
 Libro, 
 
 Book. 
 
 Lin. 
 
 Línea, 
 
 Line. 
 
 M. P. S. 
 
 Muy poderoso señor, 
 
 Most powerful Lord. 
 
 Mr. 6 M^ 
 
 Monsieur, ó mister, 
 
 Mr. 
 
 M*- aa- 
 
 Muchos años, 
 
 Many years. 
 
 MS. 
 
 Manuscrito, 
 
 Manuscript. 
 
 MSS. 
 
 Manuscritos, 
 
 Manuscripts. 
 
 N. 
 
 Fulano, 
 
 Such a one. 
 
 N. B. 
 
 Nota bene, 
 
 Take notice. 
 
 N. S. 
 
 Nuestro Señor, 
 
 Our Lord. 
 
 N. S«- 
 
 Nuestra Señora, 
 
 Our Lady. 
 
 N. S. J. C. 
 
 Nuestro Señor Jesucristo, 
 
 Our Lord Jesus Christ. 
 
 Novb™- 
 
 Noviembre, 
 
 November. 
 
 N°- ó num. 
 
 Número, 
 
 Number. 
 
 Nro. 
 
 Nuestro, 
 
 Our. 
 
 Oct- 
 
 Octubre, 
 
 October. 
 
 Onz. 
 
 Onza, 
 
 Ounce. 
 
 Orn. 
 
 Orden, 
 
 Order. 
 
 Orns. 
 
 Ordenes, 
 
 Orders. 
 
 P. 6 Pág. 
 
 Página, 
 
 Page. 
 
 pa. 
 
 Para, 
 
 For. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Párrafo, 
 
 Paragraph. 
 
 P. D. 
 
 Postdata, 
 
 Postscript. 
 
 P° 
 
 Pero, 
 
 But. 
 
 P' 
 
 Por, 
 
 For or By. 
 
 Q,. á V. B. L. M. Que á usted besa la mano, 
 
 Who kisses your hand. 
 
 Q e 
 
 Que, 
 
 That. 
 
 R. P. M. 6 Mtro. Reverendo padre maestro, 
 
 Reverend father. 
 
 Rl. Ríes. 
 
 Real, Reales, 
 
 Royal. 
 
 RW. 
 
 Recibí, 
 
 I received. 
 
 Rdo. 
 
 Reverendo, 
 
 Reverend. 
 
 Reymo. 
 
 Reverendísimo, 
 
 Most reverend. 
 
 S. S«*> Sto, S¿- 
 
 San, ó santo, 
 
 Saint. 
 
 S. A. 
 
 Su alteza, 
 
 His highness. 
 
 S. A. A 
 
 Su afecto amigo, 
 
 Your affectionate friend. 
 
 S. M. 
 
 Su magestad, 
 
 His majesty. 
 
 Sr. S°r. 
 
 Señor, 
 
 Sir, Lord. 
 

 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 s. s*. 
 
 Su Señoría, 
 
 His lordship. 
 
 S. Sd- 
 
 Su Santidad,] 
 
 His holiness. 
 
 Setbre. 
 
 Setiembre, 
 
 September. 
 
 Seg°- ser or - 
 
 Seguro servidor, 
 
 Obedient servant. 
 
 Spre. 
 
 Siempre, 
 
 Always. 
 
 SS. 6 S'es. 
 
 Señores, 
 
 Sirs, Messrs. 
 
 ss mo- 
 
 Santísimo padre, 
 
 Most holy father. 
 
 ss. PP. 
 
 Santos padres, 
 
 Holy fathers. 
 
 s. s. s. 
 
 Su seguro servidor, 
 
 Your obedient servan 
 
 Suma te - 
 
 Sumamente, 
 
 Totally. 
 
 T. 6 torn. 
 
 Tomo, 
 
 Volume. 
 
 Tpo. 
 
 Tiempo, 
 
 Time. 
 
 V. 
 
 Véase, 
 
 See. 
 
 V. V"- 6 Ven. 
 
 Venerable, 
 
 Venerable. 
 
 V, Vd., Vm, 6 
 Vmd. 
 
 > Usted o vuesa merced, 
 
 Your worship ; you. 
 
 VV.,Vs.,Vms., 
 ó Vds. 
 
 i Ustedes, o vxiesas mercedes 
 
 , Your worships ; you, 
 
 V. A. 
 
 Vuestra alteza, 
 
 Your highness. 
 
 V. E., ó V. Esc 
 
 ■ Vuecelencia, 
 
 Your excellency. 
 
 V. G., 6 V. gr. 
 
 Verbi gracia, 
 
 For example. 
 
 Vers - 
 
 Versículo, 
 
 Versicle. 
 
 V. M. 
 
 Vuestra magestad, 
 
 Your majesty. 
 
 Vol. 
 
 Volumen, 
 
 Volume. 
 
 V. P. 
 
 Vuestra paternidad, 
 
 Your paternity. 
 
 V. S. 
 
 Vueseñoría, ó usía, 
 
 Your lordship. 
 
 V. S. 
 
 Vuestra santidad, 
 
 Your holiness. 
 
 V. S. S. 
 
 Vueseñorías, 
 
 Your lordships. 
 
 V. S. I. 
 
 Vueseñoría ilustrísima, 
 
 Your grace. 
 
 Vro. Vra. 
 
 Vuestro, vuestra, 
 
 Your. 
 
 Xmo. 
 
 Diezmo, 
 
 Tithe. 
 
 Xptno. «, 
 
 Cristiano, 
 
 Christian. 
 
 221 
 
 19* 
 
APPENDIX TO PART III. 
 
 NUMBER VI, 
 
 SPANISH MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. 
 
 557. The following table contains the names of Spanish 
 coins, with their value in Spanish and approximate value 
 in United States currency : 
 
 
 
 SPANISH 
 
 U. STATES 
 
 NAMES 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 VALUE. 
 
 VALUE. 
 
 Copper. 
 
 
 R* 
 
 m. 
 
 $ cts. m. 
 
 Maravedí, 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1.47j 
 
 2 Maravedises make one Ochavo, 
 
 
 2 
 
 2.94 
 
 2 Ochavos •' 
 
 Cuarto, 
 
 
 4 
 
 5.83 
 
 2 Cuartos " 
 
 Doble Cuarto, 
 
 F -8 
 
 1 1.76 
 
 Silver. 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 8h Cuartos " 
 
 Real de vellón, 
 
 
 34 
 
 5 
 
 ¡ H Reales " 
 
 Cuarto de Peseta, 
 
 1 
 
 84 
 
 6 2.5 
 
 2£ Reales " 
 
 Media Peseta, 
 
 2 
 
 17 
 
 12 5. 
 
 5 Reales " 
 
 Peseta,t 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 25 0. 
 
 2 Pesetas " 
 
 Escudo de vellón, 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 50 0. 
 
 2 Escudos, or ) u 
 20 Reales, ) 
 
 Peso Duro, 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 1 00 0. 
 
 Gold. 
 
 
 
 
 
 20 Reales " 
 
 Peso de oro, 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 1 00 0. 
 
 2 Pesos " 
 
 Escudo de oro, 
 
 40 
 
 
 
 2 00 0. 
 
 2 Escudos de oro " 
 
 Doblón, 
 
 80 
 
 
 
 4 00 0. 
 
 2 Doblones " 
 
 Media Onza, 
 
 160 
 
 
 
 8 00 0. 
 
 4 Doblones " 
 
 Onza, 
 
 320 
 
 
 
 16 00 0. 
 
 Upr* The value in United States currency, given in the preceding ta- 
 ble, is determined by estimating the real at its true value, five cents. 
 
 * R here is an abbreviation for reales, and m for maravedí. 
 
 t In some parts of Spain, the peseta is the name for the pistareen or 
 twenty-cent piece of money, and then the piece of five reales is called 
 peseta columnária. 
 
SPANISH MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. 
 
 223 
 
 The onza has a relative value in exchanges of a little more than sixteen 
 dollars. The cuarto de peseta has long been in circulation in the United 
 States, and valued at six and a quarter cents, and the media peseta 
 valued at twelve and a half cents. 
 
 ¡glT" In the Spanish States of America, money is reckoned by the 
 peso, real, and medio real. The peso, or dollar, is divided into cuatro 
 pesetas, four quarters of a dollar; the peseta into dos reales, two twelve 
 and a half cent coins ; and the real into dos medios, two six and a quar- 
 ter cent coins, which last is the coin of lowest value used in those 
 States. Copper coin is not known there. 
 
 558. Table of Spanish weights with their equivalent in 
 Avoirdupois and Troy weight in English : 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 SPANISH VALUE. 
 
 AVOIRDUPOIS. 
 
 TROV. 
 
 Quintal, - - - 
 Arroba, - - - 
 
 4 arrobas, - - 
 25 libras, - - - 
 
 lb. oz. dr. gr. 
 101 7 19 
 25 5 12 4.8 
 
 Ib. oz. pwt. gr. 
 123 3 4 19 
 30 9 16 4.8 
 
 Libra, - - - - 
 Marco, - - - - 
 Onza, - - - - 
 Ochava, - - - 
 
 2 marcos, - - 
 8 onzas, - - - 
 8 ochaves, - - 
 2 adarmes, - - 
 
 1 3 20 
 
 8 1 25 
 
 1 7 
 
 2 1 
 
 1 2 15 20 
 
 7 7 22 
 
 18 12 
 
 2 7 
 
 Adarme, - - - 
 
 3 tomines, - - 
 
 1 
 
 1 3 
 
 Tomin, - - - 
 Grano, - - - - 
 
 12 granos, - - - 
 
 10 
 0.83 
 
 9 
 0.75 
 
 E3P* The quintal de Castilla is equivalent to 6 arrobas, or 152 lbs. 2 
 ozs. 8 drs. 29 grs. avoirdupois. 
 
 559. Tables of Spanish measures with their equivalents 
 in English measure : 
 
 (a.) LONG MEASURE.* 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 SPAN. EQUIVALENT. 
 
 ENGL. EQUIVALENT. 
 
 Estado, 
 
 Pié, ------- 
 
 Pulgado, ------ 
 
 Línea, ------ 
 
 6 pies, - - - - 
 12 pulgados, - - - 
 12 líneas, - - - - 
 
 ft. in. 1. 
 
 5 6 9.9 
 
 11 1.66 
 
 11.14 
 
 0.92 
 
 * The ligua or league, of Spain, contains 8,000 varas or Spanish 
 yards, equivalent to 3.797 English miles, that is, somewhat more than 3| 
 English miles. Sometimes the Spaniards reckon by a legua of 5,000 
 varas, or 2\ English miles. 
 
224 
 
 SPANISH MONEY, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES 
 
 (b.) CLOTH MEASURE. 
 
 NAMES. 
 
 SPAN. EQUIVALENT. 
 
 ENGL. EQUIVALENT. 
 
 Vara, ------- 
 
 Palmo, - - - - - - 
 
 Dedo, ------- 
 
 Línea, ------ 
 
 4 palmos, - - - 
 12 dedos, - - - - 
 12 líneas, - - - - 
 
 ft. in. 1. 
 
 2 9 4.3 
 
 8 4.1 
 
 8.3 
 
 0.7 
 
 (c.) DRY MEASURE. 
 
 Cahíz, - 
 
 Fanega, ------ 
 
 Celemín, ----- 
 
 Cuartillo, 
 
 12 fanegas, - - - 
 12 celemines, - - 
 4 cuartillos, - - - 
 
 bu. pks. qts. 
 
 18 3 6.53 
 
 1 2 2.54 
 
 4.21 
 
 1.05 
 
 (d.) LIQUID MEASURE. 
 
 Moyo, - 
 
 Pipa, - - 
 
 Bota, - - 
 
 Cántaro, or > 
 Arroba mayor, ) 
 Azumbre, ----- 
 Cuartillo, ----- 
 
 16 cantaros, - - - 
 27 cantaros, - - - 
 30 cantaros, - - - 
 
 8 azumbres, - - 
 4 cuartillos, - - 
 
 gals. qts. pts. 
 56 1 1.04 
 95 1.1 
 
 105 2 1.7 
 
 3 2 0.19 
 
 1 1.52 
 
 .88 
 
 (e.) In Spanish land measure, the fanegada contains about 5,500 
 English square yards, or 1^ English acres. 
 
 
APPENDIX TO PART III, 
 
 NUMBER VIL 
 
 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 560. Many proper names are spelled alike both in Span- 
 ish and in English ; as, América, America; Arabia, Ara- 
 bia : many differ slightly in the orthography ; as, Europa, 
 Europe ; Francia, France ; Córcega, Corsica ; Vizcaya, 
 Biscay : and some names differ entirely in their orthogra- 
 phy ; as, Alemania, Germany. 
 
 561. SOME COMMON GEOGRAPHICAL PROPER NAMES.* 
 
 Alejandría, 
 
 Alexandria. 
 
 Brasil, Bazil. 
 
 Alemania, 
 
 Germany. 
 
 Brema, Bremen. 
 
 Amberes, 
 
 Antwerp. 
 
 Bretaña, Great Britain, or 
 
 Antioquía, 
 
 Aniioch. 
 
 Brittany. 
 
 Antuerpia, 
 
 Antwerp. 
 
 Brujas, Bruges. 
 
 Argel, 
 
 Algiers. 
 
 Burdeos, Bourdeaux. 
 
 Asiría, 
 
 Assyria. 
 
 Cabo de Buena Cape of Good 
 
 Atenas, 
 
 Athens. 
 
 Esperanza, Hope. 
 
 Aviñon, 
 
 Avignon. 
 
 Cabo de Hornos, Cape Horn. 
 
 Ayácio, 
 
 Ajaccio. 
 
 Caldea, Chaldea. 
 
 Babilonia, 
 
 Babylon. 
 
 Calés, Calais. 
 
 Báhia Botánica, 
 
 Botany Bay. 
 
 Canal de la Man- English Channel. 
 
 Bajo Rin, 
 
 Lower Rhine. 
 
 cha, 
 
 Barbada, 
 
 Barbadoes. 
 
 Cantórberi, Canterbury. 
 
 Berbería, 
 
 Barbary. 
 
 Cartagena, Carthagena. 
 
 Bizáncio, 
 
 Byzantium. 
 
 Cartago, Carthage. 
 
 Bolonia, 
 
 Bologna. 
 
 Castilla la IN'uevajA'ew Castile. 
 
 Boloña, 
 
 Boulogne. 
 
 Castilla la Vieja, Old Castile. 
 
 Bona, 
 
 Bonn. 
 
 Ceilan, Ceylon. 
 
 Borgoña, 
 
 Burgundy. 
 
 Cerdeña, Sardinia. 
 
 Bosforo, 
 
 Bosphorus. 
 
 Chipre, Cyprus. 
 
 * In general, those proper names which do not differ, or but slightly, 
 in the two languages, are not given, as they present no difficulty to the 
 reader. 
 
226 
 
 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 Colonia, 
 
 Cologne. 
 
 Habana, 
 
 Havanna. 
 
 Constanza, 
 
 Constance. 
 
 Habrá de Gracia, Havre de Grace. 
 
 Copenhague, 
 
 Copenhagen. 
 
 Haiti, 
 
 Hayti. 
 
 Córcega, 
 
 Corsica, 
 
 Haya, 
 
 Hague. 
 
 Corinto, 
 
 Corinth. 
 
 Henáo, 
 
 Hainault. 
 
 Delfinado, 
 
 Dauphiny. 
 
 Hungría, 
 
 Hungary. 
 
 Dinamarca, 
 
 Denmark. 
 
 Indostán, 
 
 Hindoostan. 
 
 Dresde, 
 
 Dresden. 
 
 Inglaterra, 
 
 England. 
 
 Duay, 
 
 Douay. 
 
 Irlanda, 
 
 Ireland. 
 
 Dunas, 
 
 The Downs. 
 
 Islanda, 
 
 Iceland. 
 
 Dunquérque, 
 
 Dunkirk. 
 
 Japón, 
 
 Japan. 
 
 Edinburgo, 
 
 Edinburgh. 
 
 LapOnia, 
 
 Lapland. 
 
 Efeso, 
 
 Ephesus. 
 
 Leida, 
 
 Leyden. 
 
 Egipto, 
 
 Egypt. 
 
 Leon, 
 
 Lyons. 
 
 Escafusa, 
 
 ScluLJfhausen. 
 
 Lila, 
 
 Lisle. 
 
 Escalda, 
 
 Scheldt. 
 
 Liorna, 
 
 Leghorn. 
 
 Escánia, 
 
 Scania. 
 
 Lisboa, 
 
 Lisbon. 
 
 Escío, 
 
 Scio or Chio. 
 
 Londres, 
 
 London. 
 
 Escocia, 
 
 Scotland. 
 
 Luisiana, 
 
 Louisiana. 
 
 Esmirna, 
 
 Smyrna. 
 
 Madera, 
 
 Madeira. 
 
 España, 
 
 Spain. 
 
 Maguncia, 
 
 Mayence. 
 
 Esparta, 
 
 Sparta. 
 
 Mallorca, 
 
 Majorca. 
 
 Espizberga, 
 
 Spitzbergen. 
 
 Mar Bermejo, 
 
 Red Sea. 
 
 Estados de la States of the 
 
 Mar Egéo, 
 
 JEgean Sea. 
 
 Iglesia, 
 
 Church. 
 
 Mar Glacial, 
 
 Frozen Sea. 
 
 Estados Unidos 
 
 United States. 
 
 Mar Negro, 
 
 Black Sea. 
 
 Estocolmo, 
 
 Stockholm. 
 
 Marañon, 
 
 Amazon. 
 
 Estrasburgo, 
 
 Strasburg. 
 
 Marruecos, 
 
 Morocco. 
 
 Ex, 
 
 Aix. 
 
 Marsella, 
 
 Marseilles. 
 
 Ex-la-Chapela, 
 
 Aix-la- Chap elle. 
 
 Méjico, 
 
 Mexico. 
 
 Fenicia, 
 
 Phoenicia. 
 
 Menorca, 
 
 Minorca. 
 
 Filadélfia, 
 
 Philadelphia. 
 
 Miño, 
 
 Minho. 
 
 Filipinas, 
 
 Phillipines. 
 
 Ñapóles, 
 
 Naples. 
 
 Flándes, 
 
 Flanders. 
 
 Niza, 
 
 Nice. 
 
 Flesinga, 
 
 Flushing. 
 
 Noruega, 
 
 Norway. 
 
 Francia, 
 
 France. 
 
 Nueva Bretaña, 
 
 New Britain. 
 
 Frigia, 
 
 Phrygia. 
 
 Nueva Gales, 
 
 New Wales. 
 
 Frísia, 
 
 Friesland. 
 
 Nueva Orleans, 
 
 New Orleans. 
 
 Gales, 
 
 Wales. 
 
 Nueva York, 
 
 New York. 
 
 Gália, 
 
 Gaul. 
 
 Olimpo, 
 
 Olympus. 
 
 Gascuña, 
 
 Gascony. 
 
 Otaíta, 
 
 Otaheite. [tries. 
 
 Genova, 
 
 Genoa. 
 
 Países Bajos, 
 
 The Low Coun- 
 
 Ginebra, 
 
 Geneva. 
 
 Piamonte, 
 
 Piedmont. 
 
 Gotinga, 
 
 Gottingen. 
 
 Polonia, 
 
 Poland. 
 
 Gran Bretaña, 
 
 Great Britain. 
 
 Ponto Euxino, 
 
 Black Sea. 
 
 Groenlandia, 
 
 Greenland. 
 
 Praga, 
 
 Prague. 
 
SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 227 
 
 Puerto Mahon, 
 
 Port Mahon. 
 
 Tierra Santa, 
 
 Holy Land. 
 
 Puerto Rico, 
 
 Porto Rico, 
 
 Tolon, 
 
 Toulon, 
 
 Rin, 
 
 Rhine. 
 
 Tolosa, 
 
 Toulouse. 
 
 Ródano, 
 
 Rhone. 
 
 Tornay, 
 
 Tournay. 
 
 Rúan, 
 
 Rouen, 
 
 Toscana, 
 
 Tuscany. 
 
 Rusia, 
 
 Russia. 
 
 Trento, 
 
 Trent. 
 
 Saboya, 
 
 Savoy. 
 
 Tréveris, 
 
 Treves. 
 
 Sajónia, 
 
 Saxony. 
 
 Troya, 
 
 Troy. 
 
 Salónica, 
 
 Thessalonica. 
 
 Túnez, 
 
 Tunis. 
 
 San Go tardo, 
 
 St. Gothard. 
 
 Turquía, 
 
 Turkey. 
 
 Sena, 
 
 Seine, 
 
 Turs, 
 
 Tours. 
 
 Settíbal, 
 
 St. Ubel 
 
 Ulma, 
 
 Ulm. 
 
 Severna, 
 
 Severn. 
 
 Undervald, 
 
 Unterwalden, 
 
 Suécia, 
 
 Sweden. 
 
 Valáquia, 
 
 Wallachia. 
 
 Suiza, 
 
 Switzerland. 
 
 Varsóvia, 
 
 Warsaw. 
 
 Tajo, 
 
 Tagus. 
 
 Vidin, 
 
 Widin. 
 
 Tamésis, 
 
 Thames. 
 
 Viena, 
 
 Vienne. 
 
 Tánger, 
 
 Tangier. 
 
 Virtemberg, 
 
 Wurtemburg. 
 
 Tébas, 
 
 Thebes. 
 
 Vizcaya, 
 
 Biscay. 
 
 Terranova, 
 
 Newfoundland. 
 
 Zaragoza, 
 
 Saragossa, 
 
 Tesalia, 
 
 Thessaly. 
 
 Zelanda, 
 
 Zealand. 
 
 562. The proper names applied to persons from the 
 place of their nativity, in general differ but little from the 
 orthography of the name of the place itself ; thus, Ale- 
 mania, Grermany, and Alemán, a German (or Alemana, a 
 G-erman-woman). Sometimes, however, such proper names 
 differ somewhat from the name of the place ; thus, 
 Flándes, Flanders, and Flamenco, a native of Flanders ; 
 1 Cádiz, Cadiz, and Gaditano, a native of Cadiz. 
 
 563. NAMES APPLIED TO PERSONS ACCORDING TO THEIR 
 
 COUNTRY OR TOWN. 
 
 Africano, 
 
 an African. 
 
 B avaro, 
 
 Bavarian. 
 
 Alemán, 
 
 a German. 
 
 Belga, 
 
 Belgian. 
 
 Algerino, ) 
 Argelino, » 
 
 Algerine. 
 
 Berberisco, 
 
 native of Barbary. 
 
 Brasileño, 
 
 Brazilian. 
 
 Americano, 
 
 American. 
 
 Breton, 
 
 Briton. 
 
 Andaluz, 
 
 Andalusian. 
 
 Castellano, 
 
 Castilian. 
 
 Árabe, 
 
 Arabian. 
 
 Catalan, 
 
 Catalonian. 
 
 Asiático, 
 
 Asiatic. 
 
 Chileño, 
 
 Chilian. 
 
 Ateniense, 
 
 Athenian. 
 
 Chino, 
 
 Chinese. 
 
 Austriaco, 
 
 Austrian, 
 
 Chipreño, 
 
 Cyprian. 
 
228 
 
 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 Cipayo, 
 
 Sepoy. 
 
 Malayo, 
 
 Malay. 
 
 Corso, 
 
 Corsican. 
 
 Malagueño, 
 
 native of Malaga. 
 
 Criollo, 
 
 Creole. 
 
 Manchego, 
 
 native of La Man- 
 
 Dinamarqués, 
 
 Dane. 
 
 Mejicano, 
 
 Mexican, [cha. 
 
 Escosés, 
 
 Scotchman, 
 
 Montañés, 
 
 Highlander. 
 
 Español, 
 
 Spaniard. 
 
 Moro, 
 
 Moor. 
 
 Europeo, 
 
 European. 
 
 Napolitano, 
 
 Neapolitan, 
 
 Estrameño, 
 
 Estramadurian. 
 
 Noruego, 
 
 Norwegian. 
 
 Flamenco, 
 
 Fleming. 
 
 Persa ,. 
 
 Persian. 
 
 Francés, 
 
 Frenchman. 
 
 Peruano, 
 
 Peruvian, 
 
 Frison, 
 
 Frieslander. 
 
 Polaco, 
 
 Pole. 
 
 Gaditano, 
 
 native of Cadiz. 
 
 Portugués,. 
 
 Portuguese- 
 
 Gallego, 
 
 Galician. 
 
 Porteño, 
 
 native of Port Sir 
 
 Gales, 
 
 Welchman. 
 
 Prusiano, ) 
 Pruso, > 
 
 Prussian. t Ma ^ 
 
 Ginebrés, 
 
 Genérese. 
 
 
 Genoves, 
 
 Genoese. 
 
 Ruso, 
 
 Russian. 
 
 Griego, 
 
 Greek. 
 
 Sardo, 
 
 Sardinian, 
 
 Groenlandés, 
 
 Greenlander, 
 
 Sajón, 
 
 Saxon. 
 
 Heses, 
 
 Hessian. 
 
 Sueco, 
 
 Swede. 
 
 Holandés, 
 
 Dutchman. 
 
 Suizo; 
 
 Swiss. 
 
 Indio, 
 
 Hindoo; Indian. 
 
 Sirio, 
 
 Syrian. 
 
 Inglés, 
 
 Englishman. 
 
 Tejano, 
 
 Texan. 
 
 Irlandés, 
 
 Irishman. 
 
 Toscano, 
 
 Tuscan, 
 
 Islandés, 
 
 Icelander 
 
 Tunecí* 
 
 Tunisian, 
 
 Isleño, 
 
 Islander. 
 
 Turco, 
 
 Turk. 
 
 Japón, 
 
 Japanese. 
 
 Válaco, 
 
 Wallachian, 
 
 Jerezano, 
 
 native of Xeres. 
 
 Valon, 
 
 Walloon. 
 
 Judio, 
 
 Jew. 
 
 Vizcaino, 
 
 Biscayan. 
 
 Lapon, 
 
 Laplander. 
 
 Zelandés, ) 
 Celandés, > 
 
 Zealander. 
 
 Madrileño, 
 
 native of Madrid. 
 
 
 564. 
 
 CHR.ISTIAN NI 
 
 MES OF MEN, 
 
 
 Adán, 
 
 Adam. 
 
 Balduino, 
 
 Baldwin. 
 
 Adolfo, 
 
 Adolphus. 
 
 Baltasar, 
 
 Balthasw. 
 
 Alano, 
 
 Alan, or Allen. 
 
 Bernabé, 
 
 Barnaby. 
 
 Alberto, 
 
 Alberto. 
 
 Bartolomé, 
 
 Bartholomew. 
 
 Alejandro, 
 
 Alexander. 
 
 Basilio, 
 
 Basil. 
 
 Alfredo, 
 
 Alfred. 
 
 Benito, 
 
 Benedict, 
 
 Alfonso, 
 
 Alphonsus. 
 
 Benjamin, 
 
 Benjamin. 
 
 Andrés, 
 
 Andrew. 
 
 Bernardo, 
 
 Bernard. 
 
 Anton, Antonio 
 
 Anthony. 
 
 Beltran, 
 
 Bertram. 
 
 Archibaldo, 
 
 Archibald. 
 
 Bonifacio, 
 
 Boniface. 
 
 Arturo, 
 
 Arthur. 
 
 César, 
 
 Ccesar. 
 
 Augusto, 
 
 Augustus. 
 
 Carlos, 
 
 Charles. 
 
 Agustin, 
 
 Augustin or Aus- 
 
 Christóbal, 
 
 Christopher. 
 
 Anibal, 
 
 Hannibal. [tin. 
 
 Chrisostomo, 
 
 Chrysostom. 
 
SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 229 
 
 Claudio, 
 
 Claudius. 
 
 Horacio, 
 
 Horace. 
 
 Clemente, 
 
 Clement. 
 
 Hugo, 
 
 Hugh. 
 
 Conrado, 
 
 Conrad. 
 
 Humfrédo 
 
 Humphrey. 
 
 Constantino, 
 
 Constantine. 
 
 Ignacio, 
 
 Ignatius. 
 
 Constancio, 
 
 Constantius. 
 
 Irenéo, 
 
 Ireneus. 
 
 Cornélio, 
 
 Cornelius. 
 
 Isaac, 
 
 Isaac. 
 
 Ciprián, 
 
 Cyprian. 
 
 Jacob, 
 
 Jacob. 
 
 Cirilo, 
 
 Cyril. 
 
 Jay'rne, Jacobo, ) 
 
 Daniel, 
 
 Daniel. 
 
 Diego, or San 
 
 - > James. 
 
 David, 
 
 David. 
 
 tiago, 
 
 > 
 
 Donstáno, 
 
 Dunstan. 
 
 Jeremias, 
 
 Jeremy. 
 
 Edmóndo, 
 
 Edmund. 
 
 Job, 
 
 Job. 
 
 Eduardo, 
 
 Edward. 
 
 Juan, 
 
 John. 
 
 Eleázaro, 
 
 Eleazar. 
 
 Jonatás, 
 
 Jonathan. 
 
 Elias. 
 
 Elias. 
 
 Jorge, 
 
 George. 
 
 Eliséo, 
 
 Elisha. 
 
 José, 
 
 Joseph. 
 
 Enrique, 
 
 Henry. 
 
 Josué, 
 
 Joshua. 
 
 Esteban, 
 
 Stephen. 
 
 Josias, 
 
 Josiah. 
 
 Ethelredo, 
 
 E their ed. 
 
 Judas, 
 
 Judas. 
 
 Eugenio, 
 
 Eugene. 
 
 Julio, 
 
 Julius. 
 
 Eusébio, 
 
 Eusebius. 
 
 Lorenzo, 
 
 Laurence. 
 
 Eustaquio, 
 
 Eustace. 
 
 Lázaro, 
 
 Lazarus. 
 
 Ezequías, 
 
 Ezechias. 
 
 Leopoldo, 
 
 Leopold. 
 
 Ezequiél, 
 
 Ezekiel. 
 
 Lúeas, 
 
 Luke. 
 
 Felipe, 
 
 Philip. 
 
 Luis, 
 
 Lewis. 
 
 Félix, 
 
 Felix. 
 
 Lucio, 
 
 Lucius. 
 
 Fernando, 
 
 Ferdinand. 
 
 Malaquias, 
 
 Malachy. 
 
 Francisco, 
 
 Francis. 
 
 Manuel, 
 
 Emanuel. 
 
 Frederico, 
 
 Frederick. 
 
 Marco, 
 
 Mark. 
 
 Gabriel, 
 
 Gabriel. 
 
 Martin, 
 
 Martin. 
 
 Geofredo, 
 
 Gefery. 
 
 Mateo, 
 
 Matthew. 
 
 Gedónio, 
 
 Gideon. 
 
 Matias, 
 
 Matthias. 
 
 Gerónimo, 
 
 Jerome. 
 
 Mauricio, 
 
 Maurice. 
 
 Gilberto, 
 
 Gilbert. 
 
 Maximiliano, 
 
 Maximilian. 
 
 Gil, 
 
 Giles. 
 
 Miguel, 
 
 Michael. 
 
 Godefrédo, 
 
 Godfrey. 
 
 Moisés. 
 
 Moses. 
 
 Gedevíno, 
 
 Goodwin. 
 
 Natán, 
 
 Nathan. 
 
 Gregorio, 
 
 Gregory. 
 
 Natanaél, 
 
 Nathaniel. 
 
 Guido, 
 
 Guy. 
 
 Nehemias, 
 
 Nehemiah. 
 
 Guillermo, 
 
 William. 
 
 Nicolás, 
 
 Nicholas. 
 
 Gualterio, 
 
 Walter. 
 
 Octavio, 
 
 Octavius. 
 
 Hector, 
 
 Hector. 
 
 Oliverio, 
 
 Oliver. 
 
 Henrique, 
 
 Henry. 
 
 Otón, 
 
 Otho. 
 
 Hebérto, 
 
 Herbert. 
 
 Patricio, 
 
 Patrick. 
 
 Hilario, 
 
 Hilary. 
 
 Pablo, 
 
 Paul. 
 
 Huberto, 
 
 Hubert. 
 
 'A 
 
 Pedro, 
 
 
 Peter. 
 
230 
 
 SPANISH PROPER NAMES. 
 
 Phineés, 
 
 Phineas. 
 
 Silvestre, 
 
 Silvester. 
 
 Rodolfo, 
 
 Ralph or Rolph. 
 
 Salomón, 
 
 Solomon. 
 
 Rafael, 
 
 Raphael. 
 
 Tadéo, 
 
 fhaddeus. 
 
 Raimunde, 
 
 Raymond. 
 
 Theobáldo, 
 
 Theobald. 
 
 Reinaldo, 
 
 Reynold. 
 
 Theodóro, 
 
 Theodore. 
 
 Ricardo, 
 
 Richard. 
 
 Theodorico, 
 
 Theodoric. 
 
 Roberto, 
 
 Robert or Rupert. 
 
 Theodosio, 
 
 Theodosius. 
 
 Rodrigo, 
 
 Roderic. 
 
 Theofilo, 
 
 Theophilus. 
 
 Rogério, 
 
 Roger. 
 
 Tomás, 
 
 Thomas. 
 
 Rolando, 
 
 Rowland. 
 
 Timoteo, 
 
 Timothy. 
 
 Sanson, 
 
 Sampson. 
 
 Tito, 
 
 Titus. 
 
 Samuel, 
 
 Samuel. 
 
 Tobias, 
 
 Toby. 
 
 Sebastián, 
 
 Sebastian. 
 
 Urbano, 
 
 Urban. 
 
 Sigismundo 
 
 Sigismund. 
 
 Valentin, 
 
 Valentine. 
 
 Simeun, 
 
 Simeon. 
 
 Vicente, 
 
 Vincent. 
 
 Simún, 
 
 Simon. 
 
 Zacarías, 
 
 Zachary. 
 
 Silvano, 
 
 Silvan. 
 
 
 
 565. 
 
 CHRISTIAN NAM 
 
 ES OF WOMEN 
 
 
 Abigail, 
 
 Abigail. 
 
 Flora, 
 
 Flora. 
 
 A'gatha, 
 
 Agatha. 
 
 Florencia, 
 
 Florence. 
 
 Adelaida, 
 
 Alice. 
 
 Francisca, 
 
 Frances. 
 
 Alitéa, 
 
 Alithea. 
 
 Gertrudis, 
 
 Gertrude. 
 
 Amelia, 
 
 Amelia. 
 
 Isabel, 
 
 Isabel or Eliza- 
 
 Ana, 
 
 Ann or Anne. 
 
 Juana, 
 
 Jane, [beth. 
 
 Antoneta, 
 
 Antonette. 
 
 Judit, 
 
 Judith. 
 
 Bárbara, 
 
 Barbara. 
 
 Juliana, 
 
 Julia. 
 
 Beatriz, 
 
 Beatrix, Beatrice. 
 
 Leanor, 
 
 Eleanor. 
 
 Benita, 
 
 Benedicta. 
 
 Luisa, 
 
 Louisa. 
 
 Bona, 
 
 Bona. 
 
 Lucía, 
 
 Lucy. 
 
 Brigida, 
 
 Bridget. 
 
 Lucrecia, 
 
 Lucretia. 
 
 Carolina, 
 
 Caroline. 
 
 Magdalena, 
 
 Magdalen. 
 
 Casandra, 
 
 Cassomdra. 
 
 Margarita, 
 
 Margaret. 
 
 Catalina, 
 
 Catharine. 
 
 María, 
 
 Mary. 
 
 Cecilia, 
 
 Cecily. 
 
 Matilde, 
 
 Maud or Matilda. 
 
 Carlota, 
 
 Charlotte. 
 
 Paula, 
 
 Paulina. 
 
 Cristina, 
 
 Christiana. 
 
 Penelope, 
 
 Penelope. 
 
 Clara, 
 
 Clara. 
 
 Prudencia, 
 
 Prudence. 
 
 Claudina, 
 
 Claudia. 
 
 Raquel, 
 
 Rachael. 
 
 Clotilde, . 
 
 Clotilda. 
 
 Rebeca, 
 
 Rebecca. 
 
 Constanza, 
 
 Constance. 
 
 Rosa, 
 
 Rose. 
 
 Dionísia, 
 
 Diona. 
 
 Sabina, 
 
 Sabina. 
 
 Dorotea, 
 
 Dorothy. 
 
 Sara, 
 
 Sarah. 
 
 Elena or Helena 
 
 Ellen or Helen. 
 
 Sofía, 
 
 Sophia. 
 
 Engracia, 
 
 Grace. 
 
 Susana, 
 
 Susan. 
 
 Ester, 
 
 Hester, Esther. 
 
 Teresa, 
 
 Theresa. 
 
 Eva, 
 
 Eve. 
 
 Ursula, 
 
 Ursula. 
 
PART IV. 
 
 SPANISH AND ENGLISH EXERCISES FOR 
 TRANSLATION. 
 
 SECTION FIRST. 
 
 Remark. — The exercises which follow consist of Spanish phrases and 
 sentences to be translated into English, and of English phrases and sen- 
 tences to be translated into Spanish. Such exercises, on the method of 
 " constant imitation and repetition," will be found highly useful to the 
 learner. By means of the definitions, the model sentences, the explana- 
 tions, and the references to rules and remarks, the English exercises can 
 be readily rendered into Spanish. 
 
 566. The abbreviations employed in the following exercises are those 
 generally used in grammatical works ; — thus, mase, for masculine ; fern., 
 for feminine ; sing., for singular; plur., for plural. Other abbreviations 
 will be explained as they occur. 
 
 567. When two or more words in English are connected by a hyphen, 
 they are to be rendered by one word in Spanish; thus, " a thrust-with-a- 
 sword," is rendered by una estocada; " thou-shouldst-speak," by the sin- 
 gle word hablaras; "the poor-man" by el pobre; "he-is blind-of-one- 
 eye," by es tuerto. 
 
 563. A word, abbreviation, or number, in Roman characters, inclosed 
 in a parenthesis, is designed to give some direction or reference to assist 
 the learner ; thus, ,! the brother of the (87; 88) housekeeper." Here the 
 figures 87 and 88 are designed to call attention to those respective para- 
 graphs, which will be found on pages 31 and 32. 
 
 569. A word or phrase in Italics, inclosed in a parenthesis, shows that 
 the preceding word is to be translated by the italicised word or words. 
 Thus, in the sentence, "he-is (está) in Spain," the words "he-is" are to 
 be rendered by está. So in the sentences, " you (vmd.) are rich," and, 
 " you (vms.) are poor," the word " you " in the former case is to be ren- 
 dered by vmd. and in the latter by vms. 
 
 570. A word or phrase inclosed in brackets must not be expressed in the 
 language in which the sentence is to be translated. Thus, la virtud de 
 [la] fortaleza, is to be rendered in English by, "the virtue of fortitude ;" 
 and, " [he] has [aj fever," in Spanish, by tiene calentura. 
 
 £jF" The learner must endeavor to retain the meaning of the words 
 and their manner of arrangement, as well as the rules and remarks to ' 
 which reference is made, as he will thus be the better enabled to proceed 
 
232 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 with each succeeding exercise, and when no such aids are furnished ; 
 for after a few examples and references to any particular rule, we shall 
 give him no further directions in the exercises which come under that 
 rule, except where there may be expected to be cases of considerable 
 doubt on his part. The vocabulary should be carefully read before 
 attempting to translate the exercises. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 571. Vocabulary. 
 
 Hombre, man. 
 Muger, woman, wife. 
 Marido, husband. 
 Hermano, brother. 
 Hermana, sister. 
 Hijo, son. 
 Hija, daughter. 
 Juez, judge. 
 Bello, beautiful. 
 Pasado, past. 
 
 572. Model Phrases, 
 (a.) El marido de la Francesa. 
 
 (6.) Ál hermano del médico. 
 (c.) A un Americano. 
 (d.) Lo bello. 
 
 (e.) Los maridos de las Francesas. 
 
 Médico, physician. 
 Criado, male-servant. 
 Criada, female-servant. 
 Americano, American. 
 Francesa, French-woman. 
 Alma, soul. 
 
 Ama, mistress, housekeeper. 
 Hambre, hunger, famine. 
 Cierto, true. 
 FvLturo,future. 
 
 The husband of the French-wo- 
 man. 
 
 To-the brother of-the physician. 
 
 To an American. 
 
 The beautiful, or, that-which-is 
 beautiful (84). 
 
 The husbands of the French-wo- 
 men. 
 
 573. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 El juez. El médico. La criada. Una Francesa. La 
 muger. El hermano. Un criado. El alma. Un ama. 
 El alma del (88) hombre. La hermana del Americano. 
 La hija de la Francesa. La criada de la muger. Lo (84) 
 cierto. Lo bello. Un criado del juez. Una hija del 
 médico. Lo futuro. Al (88) marido de la Francesa. A 
 la muger de juez. Al alma del ama. El hambre del 
 criado. El hijo del hermano del médico. El criado de la 
 muger. Al hermano del juez. A la hermana del Ameri- 
 cano. Al hijo de la Francesa. A una hija del America- 
 no. Lo pasado. A lo (84) bello. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 233 
 
 l^* The plural of such words in the above vocabulary as end with a 
 vowel, is formed by adding 5 to the singular ; as, hombre, man ; hom- 
 bres, men. 
 
 Los hombres. Los maridos. Las criadas. Las her- 
 manas de la Francesa. Los hijos del médico. A las hijas 
 de la muger. A los hermanos del juez. Las almas (84, a) 
 de las Francesas. Las hijas del Americano. Las criadas 
 de los médicos. Los hermanos del marido de la Francesa. 
 Las hijas de los Americanos. Los hermanos de las cria- 
 das. 
 
 574. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The (80) man. The (81) woman. The (87) soul. The 
 (82) men. The physician. The (83) daughters. A (86) 
 woman. A (85) judge. A (87) famine. A (87) mistress. 
 The brother of-the (88) physician. The son of the (88, a) 
 French-woman. The husband of the woman. The male- 
 servant of-the American. The sister of-the judge. The 
 female-servant of the woman. The wife of-the physician. 
 The son of-the American. To-the (88) brother of the 
 female-servant. To the (88, a) sister of the French- 
 woman. To-the (87; 88) soul of-the (87; 88) housekeeper. 
 The (84) beautiful. To (88, a) that-which-is (84) beauti- 
 ful. The past. That-which-is true. The future. To 
 the future. 
 
 The brothers. The sisters. The sons of-the American. 
 To the (88, a) brothers of-the physician. To the (87, a) 
 souls of the female-servants. The daughters of the 
 French-woman. The sisters of-the judge. The male- 
 servants of the sons of-the physician. The sons of the 
 sisters of-the American. The husbands of the daughters 
 of-the judge. The brothers of the female-servants. 
 
 SECTION SECOND. 
 
 Remark. — That the learner may be able to translate and to form com- 
 plete sentences, a few verbs will be placed in the vocabulary. As he is 
 20* 
 
234 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 not yet supposed to be acquainted with the form of conjugating verbs in 
 Spanish, it is necessary to mention that of the few verbs for the present 
 given in the vocabulary, those ending with n are in the third person 
 plurai, and of course are to be used when plural" nouns are nominative 
 to them: those in the vocabulary not ending with n are in the third per- 
 son singular. In English we say, " the man wrote" and " the men 
 wrote" (the verb being spelled alike in both the third persons singular 
 and plural) ; but in Spanish we would say, el hombre escribió, " the man 
 wrote" and, los hombres escribieron, " the men wrote." 
 
 575. In Spanish, the general rule of constructing sentences is to pro- 
 duce clearness and harmony. Hence it is by no means important to 
 place the nominative before the verb, as is usually the case in English. 
 Thus in. Spanish we can say, Pedro dio el libro á Marta, "Peter gave 
 the book to Mary ;" or, Pedro dio á María el libro, " Peter gave to Mary 
 the book ;" or, Pedro á María dio el libro, " Peter to Mary gave the 
 book;" or, Pedro á María el libro dio, " Peter to Mary the book gave ;" 
 or, á María dio Pedro el libro, " to Mary gave Peter the book ;" or, dio 
 Pedro á María el libro, " gave Peter to Mary the book ;" and each of these 
 positions of the words is allowed by the rules of Spanish construction, 
 that form which is most clear, forcible, and harmonious being always 
 preferred. 
 
 576. The learner will be able to distinguish the gender of nouns, either 
 from their sex, or from their termination (see 92, c ; and 92, d). Any 
 noun forming an exception to the general rules of gender, will have its 
 gender specified in the vocabulary, and should be remembered by the 
 learner. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 577. Vocabulary. 
 
 Padre, father. 
 
 Madre, mother. 
 
 Impresor, printer. 
 
 Pintor, painter. 
 
 Carpintero, carpenter. 
 
 Caballo, horse. 
 
 Navio, ship. 
 
 Buey, ox. 
 
 Hambre (fern.), hunger. 
 
 El pintor tiene, the painter has. 
 
 El pintor fué, the painter went. 
 
 El pintor dio, the painter gave. 
 
 El pintor escribió, the painter 
 wrote. 
 
 Libro, book. 
 
 Carta, letter. 
 
 Dinero, money. 
 
 Oro, gold. 
 
 Plata, silver. 
 
 Hoja, leaf. 
 
 Casa, house. 
 
 Cuchara, spoon. 
 
 Sed, thirst. 
 
 Los pintores tienen, the painters 
 have. 
 
 Los pintores fueron, the painters 
 went. 
 
 Los pintores dieron, the painters 
 gave. 
 
 Los pintores escribieron, the paint- 
 ers wrote. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 235 
 
 578. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) El pintor escribió una carta al 
 
 hijo del juez. 
 (6.) Las mugeres escribieron cartas 
 
 al carpintero de navio, 
 (c.) El juez fué á casa del médico. 
 
 id.) El Americano tiene dinero, 
 (e.) La muger tiene hambre. 
 
 The painter wrote a letter to the 
 
 judge's son (97). 
 The woman wrote letters to the 
 
 ship carpenter (97, a). 
 The judge went to the doctor's 
 
 (97, a). 
 The American has money. 
 The woman has hunger, i. e. the 
 
 woman is hungry. 
 
 579. The Spanish for "ship carpenter," as seen above (578, b), is car- 
 pintero de navio, "carpenter of ship." So "ship surgeon," "coach 
 horses," would be " surgeon of ship," " horses of coach." 
 
 580. It can not be said in Spanish, " I am hungry ," u I am thirsty," 
 " I am afraid," but, "/ hare hunger," "I have thirst," "I have fear." 
 El impresor tiene hambre, should be translated in English, <: the printer 
 is hungry," and not "the printer has hunger." So "John is thirsty," 
 should be translated in Spanish, Juan tiene sed, "John has thirst" 
 
 581. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 Los impresores (93) tienen dinero. Las mugeres (93) 
 tienen hambre (580). Los pintores tienen libros (94). 
 Los jueces (95, a) tienen sed. Las mugeres dieron libros 
 al padre de la Francesa. Los hombres dieron dinero á la 
 madre del Americano. Los carpinteros fueron á casa* del 
 pintor. Los médicos fueron á casa del juez. Los criados 
 del juez escribieron cartas á las criadas de la Francesa. 
 Los jueces escribieron cartas á la madre del pintor. Los 
 carpinteros de navio (579) tienen dinero. 
 
 La hermana del impresor escribió una carta al padre del 
 carpintero. El marido de la Francesa escribió una carta 
 á la madre del juez. El hermano de la Francesa fué á 
 casa del Americano. El pintor escribió al médico una 
 carta. El médico fué á casa del impresor. La hija del 
 carpintero tiene dinero. La hermana del médico tiene una 
 cuchara de plata (97, a). El libro tiene hojas de oro (97, 
 a). El caballo tiene hambre. Los bueyes (93) tienen 
 
 * Casa, when it means a house, as a place of residence, or home, does 
 not take the article before it, as in English. 
 
236 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 sed. El carpintero de navio tiene hojas de plata (97, a). 
 El hermano del impresor dio al pintor una cuchara de oro 
 (97, a). El hijo del carpintero dio un libro á la hermana 
 del Americano. 
 
 Al médico dio el Americano (575) una cuchara de plata. 
 Al juez la Francesa escribió una carta. A los criados dio 
 la muger (575) libros. Escribió la madre de la Francesa 
 cartas á las hijas del médico. Dio el hermano del impre- 
 sor al pintor una cuchara de oro. A las mugeres dieron 
 los jueces cucharas de plata. 
 
 582. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The painters (93) have money. The printers (93) have 
 books. The women have husbands (94). The carpenters 
 gave a (85) book to the son of the judge. The sons of the 
 American gave money to the male-servants of the physician. 
 The daughters of the French-woman wrote letters to the 
 sons of the judges (95, a). The physician wrote letters to 
 the mother of the painter. The male-servants of the phy- 
 sician wrote letters to the female-servants of the French- 
 woman. The printers went to [the] house of the judge. 
 The horses are (580) hungry. The men are (580) thirsty. 
 The oxen (93) are thirsty. 
 
 The ship carpenter (97, a) went to the physician's* (97. 
 a). The judge's son (97) went to the painter's (97, a). 
 The French-woman's daughter gave to the carpenter a sil- 
 ver spoon (97, a). The printer's brother gave to the 
 painter a gold spoon. The carpenter's son has money. 
 The physician's sister wrote a letter to the judge's daugh- 
 ter. The male-servant is hungry (580). The woman is 
 thirsty (580). The painter is hungry. The American is 
 thirsty. The judge's daughter wrote a letter to the phy- 
 sician's sister. To the judge the French-woman wrote a 
 letter. 
 
 * That is, "to [the] house of the physician." 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 237 
 
 SECTION THIRD. 
 
 583. In cases in which the position of adjectives would present any 
 difficulty to the learner, the order of the words will be numbered : thus, 
 los hombres' 2 magnánimos 1 son bienhechores del género^ humano 1 . The 
 figures here indicate that in translating into English, " magnánimos " 
 is to come before "hombres" and "humano" before "género;" as, "the 
 magnanimous men are benefactors of the human race." The order in 
 which English words must be placed in Spanish, will be indicated in the 
 same manner when deemed necessary; thus, "the 3 open 5 rebuke 4 is 2 
 better 1 than [the] secret 2 love 1 ." Here the figures show the order in 
 which the words should be arranged in translating into Spanish; as, 
 mejor es la corrección manifiesta, que el amor escondido ) that is, "better is 
 the rebuke open, than the affection hidden." 
 
 584. A sentence is rendered negative in Spanish by placing the adverb 
 tío (not) before the verb; as, Juan no es sabio, "John is not wise;" 
 Pedro no tiene dinero, "Peter has not money;" María no tiene sed, 
 " Mary is not thirsty ;" Diego no escribió cartas," James wrote not let- 
 ters " (or, *' James did not write letters "). 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 585. Vocabulary. 
 
 Sabio, wise. 
 
 Ignorante, ignorant. 
 
 Impío, impious, wicked. 
 
 Falaz, deceitful, false. 
 
 Rico, rich. 
 
 Pobre, poor. 
 
 Bueno, good. 
 
 Malo, bad, evil. 
 
 Nuevo, new. 
 
 Ingles, English. 
 
 Español, Spanish. 
 
 Frances, French. 
 
 Amigo, friend. 
 
 Lengua, tongue, language. 
 
 General, general. 
 
 Es, is. 
 
 El Español ama, the Spaniard 
 
 loves. 
 Y, and. 
 
 586. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) El Español no tiene libros 2 i The Spaniard (100) has not (584) 
 franceses. 1 I French books. 
 
 Tenebroso, dark, gloomy. 
 
 Fuerte, strong. 
 
 Robusto, robust. 
 
 Estrecho, narrow, close. 
 
 Soberbio, proud. 
 
 Viejo, old. 
 
 Espacioso, spacious, wide. 
 
 Hermosa, beaut ful, handsome. 
 
 Grande, great. 
 
 Lindo, pretty. 
 
 Dos, two. 
 
 Tres, three. 
 
 Camino, road, way. 
 
 Verdad, truth. 
 
 Ejército, army. 
 
 Son, are. 
 
 Los Españoles aman, the Spaniards 
 
 love. *» 
 E', and (before i). 
 
238 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 (b.) La Española tiene una lengua 2 
 falaz. 1 
 
 (c.) El general es fuerte y robusto. 
 
 (d.) El viejo es sabio. 
 
 (e.) Las hijas son soberbias é igno- 
 rantes. 
 
 The Spanish- woman (100, a) has a 
 deceitful tongue. 
 
 The general is strong and robust. 
 
 The old-man (102) is wise. 
 
 The daughters are proud (100, a) 
 and (587) ignorant. 
 
 587. Y is used for the conjunction "and" except before words begin- 
 ning with i or hi, when é is used ; as, el hombre y la muger, " the man 
 and the woman 5" viejo é impío" old and impious ;" hijos é hijas, " sons 
 and daughters." 
 
 588. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 El camino es estrecho. La casa es espaciosa (100, a). 
 Las mugeres son soberbias (99, and 100, b). Los Ingleses 
 (102) no (584) tienen dinero. Las Inglesas (100, b) no 
 tienen hambre. Los Españoles (99 and 100, b) no tienen 
 sed. Las Americanas (100, b, and 102) son hermosas. 
 Los libros son nuevas. Un buen (101) general es el (87) 
 alma de un ejército. El Frances (102) es pobre y sober- 
 bio. El amigo del médico es ignorante. El juez es sabio 
 y rico. La lengua 2 falaz 1 no ama la verdad. Los Ameri- 
 canos aman dinero. Los hijos del pintor son fuertes y 
 robustos. Los pobres tienen hambre. 
 
 El camino de los impíos (102) es tenebroso. El her- 
 mano del carpintero dio un libro 2 francés 1 á la hermana 
 del Ingles. El padre de la Francesa es viejo y pobre. El 
 criado del pintor tiene dos libros 2 malos 1 . Las hijas del 
 impresor tienen tres cucharas 2 nuevas 1 . Los jueces escri- 
 bieron cartas 2 inglesas 1 á las hermanas del general. El 
 caballo es fuerte. Los hijos del médico son malos é igno- 
 rantes. Las mugeres 2 falaces 1 (95, a) no aman la verdad. 
 Las hijas del amigo del impresor dieron al criado tres 
 libros nuevas y hermosas. El general del ejército <r 
 un gran (101, a) hombre. Los grandes generales del eje 
 cito son amigos del juez. Los caminos de los impíos son 
 malos. Las Francesas no son lindas. Los pobres y los 
 ricos son soberbios. La hija del Español es linda y rica. 
 El Americano es soberbio é ignorante. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 239 
 
 589. English to he translated into Spanish. 
 
 The Frenchman (100) wrote letters to the Spanish- 
 woman (100). The Americans are friends of the English 
 {Ingleses). The way of the wicked (102) is dark. The 
 daughters of the Spaniard (Español) are pretty. The 
 hooks are new. The house of the physician is spacious, 
 The horses of the Englishman are strong. The sons of 
 the judge are poor and proud. The daughter of thel 
 French-woman is proud and (587) ignorant. The sisters 
 of the painter are rich and handsome. A good (101) man 
 loves the truth. A false 2 tongue 1 loves not (584) the 
 truth. The Spaniards and the Americans love money. 
 The silver spoons (cucharas de plata) are new. The road 
 is narrow. The judge's son (97) is bad and (587) igno- 
 rant. The printers are rich. The physician's male-ser- 
 vant is robust. 
 
 The physician's horse is old. The poor-man (102) 
 wrote a letter to the rich-man's (102) sons. The carpen- 
 ter gave three books to the friend of the painter. The 
 father of the French-woman gave two French 2 books 1 to 
 the mother of the printer. The judge's father gave three 
 English 2 books 1 to the general's mother. The sisters of 
 the American are not (584) wise. The house is not (584) 
 spacious. The general of the army wrote not letters to 
 the father of the judge. The Frenchmen are hungry 
 (tienen hambre). The Englishmen are thirsty. The judge 
 is not hungry. The women are not thirsty. The general 
 gave a great (101, a) sum (suma) of money to the poor- 
 men. The road is wide. The road is not narrow. The 
 sisters of the Englishman are not beautiful. The male- 
 servant has not money. The American is proud and 
 ignorant. The Spaniard's father is old and poor. 
 
 590. In Spanish, proper names employed as adjectives are not gener- 
 ally written with a capital initial letter ; thus, we write, libros españoles, 
 " Spanish books," and not libros Españoles. 
 
 i 
 
240 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 SECTION FOURTH. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 591. Vocabulary. 
 
 Alto, high, lofty. 
 
 Culpable, culpable. 
 
 amable, amiable. 
 
 Bello, fine, elegant. 
 
 Escrupuloso, scrupulous. 
 
 Todo, every, all 
 
 Sol, sun. 
 
 Luna, moon. 
 
 Estrella, star. 
 
 Planeta (mase), planet. 
 
 Prudencia, prudence. 
 
 Tesoro, treasure. 
 
 El médico hallo, the doctor found. 
 
 592. Model sentences, 
 (a.) El médico hallo un libro ale- 
 man en el camino. 
 
 (b.) La Alemana es de muy gran 
 prudencia. 
 
 (c.) María es una muger muy ama- 
 ble. 
 
 (d.) Los montes son altísimos. 
 
 (e.) El caballo es mas útil que el 
 buey. 
 
 (/.) El sol es el mas brillante de 
 todos los planetas. 
 
 593. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 La muger es muy (108) amableGU El juez es muy (108) 
 viejo. La Francesa es muy vieja. El criado es muy cul- 
 pable. La lengua 2 española 1 es bella y muy armoniosa. 
 La luna es muy brillante. Las estrellas son muy brillan- 
 tes. Las torres son altísimas (108). Las Españoles son 
 muy soberbios. El juez es muy escrupuloso. La casa es 
 altísima (108). El bueyes tan (104) fuerte como (104) el 
 caballo. El caballo es tan viejo como el buey. El pintor 
 es mas (106) robusto que (106) el impresor. Las criadas 
 
 Brillante, brilliant. 
 
 Gárrulo, garrulous, talkative. 
 
 Armonioso, harmonious. 
 
 Benigno, benign. 
 
 Alemán, German. 
 
 Sombrero, hat. 
 
 Leon, lion. 
 
 Bestia, beast. 
 
 Torre, (fern.), tower. 
 
 Monte, mountain. 
 
 Genio, genius, disposition. 
 
 En, in, on. [found. 
 
 Los médicos hallaron, the doctors 
 
 The physician found a German 
 
 book in the road. 
 The German- woman (100, a) is of 
 
 very great prudence. 
 Mary is a woman very amiable. 
 
 The mountains are most high. 
 The horse is more useful than the 
 
 ox. 
 The sun is the most brilliant of all 
 
 the planets. 
 
EXERCISES EOÍt TRANSLATION. 241 
 
 de la Española (100, a) son mas gárrulas que los criados 
 del Alemán. El sol es mas brillante que la luna. La 
 luna es menos (105) brillante que (105) el sol. La hija 
 dei médico es menos (105) hermosa que la hija del juez. 
 Las casas no son tan altas como las torres. 
 
 El sol es un planeta brillantísimo. La Francesa es la 
 mas (109) hermosa de todas las mugeres. Los Inglesas 
 son mas (106) soberbios que los Alemanes. Los pintores 
 son los mas (109) ricos de todos los hombres. Las her- 
 manas del impresor son las menos (109) gárrulas de todas 
 las mugeres. La Española es de muy gran prudencia. El 
 marido de la Inglesa es un hombre soberbio y muy igno- 
 rante. El león es el mas fuerte de las bestias. El juez 
 es de genio benignísimo. El amigo del general dio al 
 Frances tres libros' 2 alemanes 1 . 
 
 El viejo halló un tesoro en el camino. Los hijos del 
 pintor hallaron un sombrero -2 nuevo 1 en el camino. Los 
 hermanas del carpintero escribieron cartas á los jueces 2 es- 
 crupulosos 1 . Los generales del ejercito son culpables. La 
 madre del impresor es muy viejo. Las hijas del carpin- 
 tero tienen hambre. Los buenos (102) aman la verdad. 
 La muger halló dos cucharas de oro en el camino. El 
 médico tiene tres libros 2 franceses 1 . El juez ama lo (84) 
 bueno. 
 
 594. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The mountain is very (108) high. The male-servant is 
 very ( 1 08) old. The Spanish 2 language 1 is elegant and 
 very harmonious. The sun is most (108) brilliant. The 
 stars are very brilliant. The painter is as (104) proud as 
 (104) the judge. The horse is as (104) strong as (104) 
 the ox. The carpenter is as rich as the printer. The 
 daughters of the German-woman (Alemana) are less (105) 
 culpable than (105) the daughters of the Spanish-woman 
 (Española). The stars are less (105) brilliant than the 
 moon. The moon is less brilliant than the sun. The 
 
242 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 carpenter is more (106) ignorant than (106) the painter. 
 The lion is stronger* than the horse. The judge is wiser 
 than the physician. 
 
 The sister of the printer is the most talkative (109) of 
 all the women. The mother of the German is the most 
 (109) proud of all the women. The general is a man of 
 very great (101, a) prudence. The physician is the least 
 (109) ignorant of the judged friends. The lion is the 
 strongest (most strong) of all the beasts. The judge is 
 the wisest of the men. The German is of [a] disposition 
 most (108) benign. The English 2 language 1 is not as har- 
 monious as the Spanish 2 language 1 . The hat is newer than 
 the book. The book is less new than the hat. 
 
 The printers are hungry. The male-servant is thirsty. 
 The carpenter found a new 2 spoon 1 of silver in the road. 
 The judge's daughters found a treasure in the road. The 
 painter's sons love the truth. The (84) good is preferable 
 (preferible) to the (84) beautiful. The mountains are very 
 high. The Englishman gave to the German two French 2 
 books 1 . The sister of the painter wrote not; letters to the 
 sons of the carpenter. The (87) housekeeper is proud and 
 ignorant. 
 
 SECTION FIFTH. 
 
 595. Personal pronouns must always agree with the nouns for which 
 they are substituted, in gender, person, and number. Thus, if it is said, 
 " John lost his pen {pluma) and Peter found it" the pronoun " it " must 
 be rendered, in Spanish, by la, because pluvia is feminine. 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 596. Vocabulary. 
 
 Confianza, confidence. 
 Alguno, some, any. 
 Hablo, (he) spoke. 
 Vio, (he) saw. 
 Vino, (he) came. 
 
 T* am, for. 
 
 Mucho, much, many. 
 Hablaron, (they) spoke. 
 Hizo, (he) made, (he) did. 
 Vinieron, (they) came. 
 
 : That is, as it would be expressed in Spanish, "more strong.' 1 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 243 
 
 Tú eres, thou art. 
 Yo voy, I go, I am- going 
 Comprar, (to) buy. 
 Hablar, (to) speak. 
 Pedro, Peter. 
 
 The judges brought him to-you. 
 
 I am-going to see her. 
 Bring it to-me (Bring-me-it). 
 Peter saw me. 
 The Frenchman spoke to-me. 
 
 Yo* soy, lam. 
 Nosotros somos, we arc. 
 Traed, bring (ye). 
 Dar, (to) give. 
 Ver, (to) see. 
 
 597. Model sentences, 
 (a.) Los jueces os le llevaron (115, 
 
 a). 
 (b.) Yo voy á verla (116). 
 (c.) Traédmelo (116). 
 (d.) Pedro me viú (113). 
 (e.) El Frances me habló (114). 
 
 598. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 [The personal pronouns are in Italics.] 
 Pedro me (113. and 114) escribió dos cartas. Ella le 
 (113, and 114. b) dio un libro. El los (i i 4, a) halló. Ella 
 les (114, b) escribió algunas cartas. El médico les (114, 
 b) habló. Yo soy pobre y viejo. T>ú eres muy sabio. El 
 es ignorante. Nosotros somas fuertes y ricos. El pintor 
 te (114) dio una cuchara de plata. La muger nos (114) 
 vio. El carpintero ncs habló. Los Españoles le hablaron. 
 El juez le vio. La Francesa los (114, a) vio. La Inglesa 
 las vio. El carpintero lo hizo para (1 lo) él, El impresor 
 tiene mucha confianza en ella (lió). Los pintores tienen 
 confianza en él. El Alemán lo hizo para mí. El médico 
 tiene mucha confianza en ellos. El padre del impresor 
 tiene confianza en nosotros. El Frances la vio. El juez 
 las vio. 
 
 El Americano halló un sombrero en el camino, y le] dio 
 al hermano del juez. La muger halló una cuchara en el 
 camino, y la dio á la hija de Pedro. Pedro halló tres 
 cucharas, y me las (lio, a) dio. La Española halló dos 
 sombreros, y nos los (115, a) dio. Ellos nos escribieron 
 
 * For the present, we shall use the nominative personal pronouns 
 with the verb, though it is not in general required. (See 139, a.) 
 
 t " Le" here means "#," and refers to sombrero, being of the same 
 gender. (See 595.) 
 
244 EXERCISES FOE. TRANSLATION. 
 
 algunas cartas. Yo voy á hablara (116). Yo voy á ver/e 
 (116). Yo la (116, a) voy á ver. Pedro tiene muchos 
 libros, y me dio algunos de ellos (1 15). El médico vino 
 consigo (115, c). La Inglesa vino contigo (115, c). Los 
 pintores vinieron conmigo. Traédmelos (116). Tr&dmele 
 (116). Traed.me (116) una cuchara. Traeos ( 1 1 6, b) algu- 
 nas cucharas. Yo voy á darles (116) tres sombreros. Ella 
 tiene algunos libros : yo voy á comprar/os. La muger 
 tiene muchas cucharas de oro ; yo voy á comprar/as. Pe- 
 dro os dio dos sombreros ; yo los voy á comprar. 
 
 599. In forming a negative sentence, the adverb no must come not 
 only before the verb, but also before personal pronouns of the first-objec- 
 tive case; as, Juan no me lo dijo, "John not to-me it said," i. e., " John 
 said it not to-me," or as it would be commonly expressed in English, 
 " John did not say it to me." 
 
 600. Vmd. (pronounced usted) is generally used in common conversa- 
 tion, and though of the third person, is equivalent to the English word 
 "you" (see 110, c) : thus the sentence, "you are rich," if addressed to 
 one person, would be vmd. es rico (" your-worship is rich ") ; if address- 
 ed to more than one person, vms. son ricos ("your- worships are rich"). 
 When females are referred to, the feminine form of the adjective must 
 be used. 
 
 Vmd. es muy sabio. Vmd. tiene hambre. Vd. (110, c) 
 me dio un libro. Vm. tiene una casa. Vms. tienen sed. 
 Vms. aman la verdad. Vms. no son soberbios. El juez 
 tiene mucha confianza en vd. Pedro le (see 112, II.) dio 
 el libro. El Alemán no le dio dinero. La Alemana no le 
 habló. La muger no me habló. El pintor no te vio. El 
 carpintero no los halló. Yo voy á dar/e un libro. V. 
 (110, c) es rico. VV. (110, c) son pobres. Yds. son so- 
 berbios. 
 
 601. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 Peter wrote me (113 and 114) two letters. The painter 
 gave him (113 and 114, b) a book. She found them (114, 
 a). He wrote to-them (114,b) some letters. I am old 
 and poor. The judge spoke to-them (114, b). Thou art 
 very rich. He is wise. We are ignorant. They are 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 245 
 
 strong and rich. The painter gave thee (114) a silver 
 spoon. The woman saw us (114). The carpenter spoke 
 to us (114). The Spanish-women spoke to him (114, b). 
 The-physician saw him (114, a). The French-woman saw 
 them (mase). The German-woman saw them (fern.). The 
 carpenter made it (lo) for him (115). The painter has 
 confidence in her (115). The printers have much confi- 
 dence in him (115). The American made it for me (1 15). 
 The physician has much confidence in them (maso). The 
 mother of the painter has much confidence in us. The 
 Spaniard saw her. The Frenchman saw them. Peter 
 saw him. They spoke to-me (114). 
 
 The French-woman found two hats, and gave them to 
 Peter. The woman found a book in the road, and gave it 
 (595) to the physician. The American found a spoon in 
 the road, and gave it (595) to the judge's daughter. Peter 
 found three spoons, and gave them to-me (115, a). They 
 wrote us some letters. They (fem.) spoke to-us (114). I 
 am-going to speak to him (116, and 116, a). I am going to 
 see her (116, and 116. a). I her (116, a) am-going to see. 
 The physician came with-him (115, c). Peter has many 
 books, and he-gave (dio) me some of them (115). The 
 Frenchman came with-thee (1 15, c). The carpenters came 
 with-me. Bring me (116) a book. Bring him-to-me (116). 
 Bring-me-them (116) Bring (116, b) yourselves (os) some 
 spoons. I am-going to give-him (116) three books. Iam- 
 going to give them (1 16) three hats. She has some books ; 
 I am-going to buy them (116). The judge has many gold 
 spoons (97, a) ; I am-going to buy them. Peter gave you 
 three books ; I them ( 1 1 6, a) am-going to buy. I am-going 
 to see them (mase). I am-going to see them (fem.). 
 
 PIT* The remaining exercises in this section are to be rendered by 
 vmd. and its objective cases, when the second person "you" occurs in 
 English (see 600). Instead of vmd., any of the other abbreviations, V., 
 Vd., Via. (all pronounced usted), may be used ; and instead of vmdes., 
 the other abbreviations in the plural, VV. y Vs., Vms., Vds., may be used. 
 (See 110, c). 
 
 2l # 
 
246 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 You gave me a book. You are very wise. You are 
 hungry. You have a house. You (plur.) are thirsty. 
 You (plur.) are not proud. You (plur.) love the truth. 
 The physician has much confidence in you (115). The 
 judge gave you the book. The American gave you (le) not 
 money. The painter spoke not to-you (le). The woman 
 spoke not to-you (plur.). She spoke not to-me. The paint- 
 er saw thee not. The carpenter found them not. I am- 
 going to give you (le) a book. Peter saw you (le). 
 
 ^^" Every sentence in the preceding English exercises should be 
 carefully written, and the rules for the position of the pronouns well 
 studied. By examining the Spanish exercises, the private learner will 
 be able to know whether or not he renders the personal pronouns in the 
 English sentences correctly in the Spanish. We would recommend to 
 the learner to write and re-write these exercises, as well as the preceding 
 ones, till he becomes perfectly familiar with the rules referred to in trans- 
 lating from one language to the other. 
 
 SECTION SIXTH. 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 692. Vocabulary. 
 
 Calle (fern.), streeU 
 Mano (fem.), hand. 
 Sobrino, nephew. 
 LevantO, (he) raised. 
 Duele, (it) pains, (it) aches. 
 
 603. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) Las casas son suy as (119, a; 
 
 120). 
 (b.) Los sombreros son svyos de él 
 
 (120, a). 
 (c.) Tu (119) hermana y la mía 
 
 (121) tienen hambre y sed. 
 (d.) Pedro es amigo mió (121, b). 
 (e.) La muger levanto los ojos (122). 
 (/.) Le duele la garganta de Pedro 
 
 (122, a). 
 
 Cabeza, head. 
 Garganta, throat. 
 Ojo, eye. 
 Tomo, (he) took. 
 Por, by, through. 
 
 The houses are his (or hers, or 
 
 theirs). 
 The hats are his. 
 
 Thy sister and mine are hungry 
 
 and thirsty. 
 Peter is a friend of mine. 
 The woman raised her (the) eyes. 
 The throat of Peter pains him,* i. 
 
 e.. Peter's throat is sore. 
 
 * Literally, " to-him pains the throat of Peter." 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 247 
 
 604. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 Mis (119) amigos hallaron un tesoro en el camino. Un 
 amigo mío (119, a) halló un sombrero. Tu (119) hijo vio 
 un libro en la calle. El juez habló á sus (119) amigos. 
 Mi madre tiene hambre. Su (120) criado tiene sed. Su 
 (120) hija tiene tres cucharas. Todos mis libros son tuyos 
 (119, a). Yo voy á su casa. Nuestras criadas son culpa- 
 bles. El libro es mió (1 19, a). La cuchara es tuya (119, 
 a). Los sombreros son nuestros. Mi padre me vio. Las 
 casas son suyas de él (120, a). Los caballos son suyos de 
 ella (120, a). Las cucharas son suyas de ellos. Las casas 
 son mias. 
 
 Tu (119) madre y la mia (121) tienen prudencia. Tus 
 hermanos y los mios (121) son muy pobres. Sus (120) 
 hermanas y las nuestras son soberbias. Pedro es sobrino 
 mió y suyo de ella (121, a). El médico es amigo mió y 
 suyo de él (121, a). Una criada mia (121, b) halló un 
 sombrero en la calle. El dio el libro á un amigo nuestro 
 (121, b). El levantó las (122) manos. Ella levantólos 
 (122) ojos. Pedro levantó la cabeza. El criado tiene un 
 sombrero en la (122) mano. Ella le tomó por la (122) 
 mano. El la tomó por la (122) mano. La (122, a) cabe- 
 za me (122, a) duele. Te (122, a) duele la (122, a) cabe- 
 za.* La cabeza les (122, a) duele. Me (122. a) duele la 
 garganta. La cabeza nos (122, a) duele. La garganta 
 le (122, a) duele. La garganta les duele. El pintor le 
 (122, a) tomó el (122, a) sombrero, y fué á casa del médi- 
 co. La muger les (122, a) tomó los (122^ a) sombreros. 
 Mi sobrino levantó la (122) cabeza. 
 
 Ymd. tiene su (123) dinero. La muger tiene su (123) 
 libro. Vind. escribió algunas cartas a sus (123) amigos. 
 Vms. dieron tres libros á sus criadas. El médico le (123, 
 a) dio á vmd (123, a) muchos libros. Su (123, a) hijo de 
 
 difference in construction not altering the meaning 
 
 \btgji te du 
 (iSec; 575.) 
 
248 EXERCISES FOE. TRANSLATION, 
 
 vmd. (123, a) cs muy amable. Sus (Í23, a) hijas de vssdes, 
 son muy hermosas. Las casas son suyas de Y. (120, a). 
 Los eahallos son suyos de VV. (120, a). Sus hermaaas 
 de Yd. son amabilísimos, Sus libros de Yins. son buenos. 
 Ym. halló su (123) dinero, 
 
 605. English tobe troMslateci intff Spanish, 
 My (119) friend is rick My (119) mother is poor, 
 My (1 19) friends found a treasure in the road. Thy (1 19) 
 sister saw a book in the street. A friend of mine (121, b) 
 found a hat. The physician spoke to his (119) friends. 
 My brother is hungry. His (120) horse is strong. All 
 jnj books are thine (119, a). His (120) female-servant is 
 thirsty. I am-going to his (or her) house. Our (118) 
 female-servants are talkative. The book is mine (1 19, a). 
 The spoon is thine (119, a). The hats are mine (119, a). 
 The houses are mine (119, a), The books are ours. My 
 father saw me (113). The houses are his (suyas de él). 
 The spoons are hers (120, a). The horses are theirs (fern. : 
 120, a). 
 
 Thy (119) house and mine (la mia ; 121) are beautiful. 
 Thy mother and mine (121) have prudence. Thy brothers 
 and mine (J 21) are very poor. Thy sisters and ours (121) 
 are proud. Peter is [a] nephew of mine (121, b) and 
 hers (12 1, a). The painter is a friend of mine (120, b) and 
 his (120. a: 121, a). A female-servant of mine (121, b) 
 found a hat in the street. He gave the book to a friend 
 of ours (121, b). She raised her (122) hands. He raised 
 his (122) eyes. Peter raised his (122) head. She raised 
 her (122) eyes. The male-servant has a hat on (en) his 
 (la; 122) head. He took her by her (122) hand. She 
 took him by his (122) hand. My (122, a) head aches (the 
 head to-me aches; 122, a). Thy (122, a) head aches (to- 
 thee aches the head, 122. a). His (122, a) head aches. 
 Peter's head aches (603, f). My (122, a) throat pains 
 me. Thy (r%2, a) throat is-sore (dude). The physician 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 249 
 
 took his (122, a) hat, and went to [the] house of the paint- 
 er. The women took their (122, a) hats. 
 
 (a.) In the remaining exercises, when the second person (you or your) 
 occurs, it is to be rendered by vmd. and its objective cases and posses- 
 sive pronouns ; thus, " You found your book," vmd. halló su libro, liter- 
 ally, " your-worship found his book." So, "John gave the book to 
 you," Juan le dio el libro, or Juan le dio á vmd. el libro, literally, " John 
 gave the book to him," i. e., " to your-worship." 
 
 The painter has your (123) book. You have your (123) 
 money. You wrote letters to your (123) friends. You 
 gave a book to your father. You (plur.) gave to your 
 male-servants two silver spoons (97, a). The physician 
 gave you (to-him gave to your-worship; 123, a) many 
 books. Your* (123, a) son is very amiable. Your (123, 
 a) daughters are very beautiful. The houses are yours 
 {suyas de vmd. ; 120, a). The horses are yours (120, a). 
 The oxen are yours. The painter gave you (123, a) three 
 hats. Your (123, a) sons are proud. Your (123, a) sis- 
 ters are most amiable (108). You have not your money. 
 The woman has not your book. You wrote not letters to 
 your friends. Your father is rich. 
 
 SECTION SEVENTH. 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 606. Vocabulary. 
 
 Cuidado, care, anxiety. 
 
 Juan, John. 
 
 Cuarto, room. 
 
 Ciudad, city. 
 
 Agradable, agreeable, pleasant. 
 
 Posible, possible. 
 
 Sabe, (he) knows. 
 
 Hacer, to make, to do. 
 
 Leer, to read. 
 
 Dios, God. 
 
 Maria, Mary. 
 
 Nombre, name. 
 
 Sabiduría, wisdom. 
 
 Desgraciado, unfortunate, unhappy. 
 
 Imposible, impossible. 
 
 Saben (they) know. 
 
 Decir, to say. 
 
 Tomar, to take. 
 
 : That is, "his son of your worship," su hijo de vmd. (See 123, a). 
 
250 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 607. Model sentences. 
 
 My brothers are {they) who saw 
 
 them. 
 The painters whom you saw, and 
 
 of whom John spoke, are very 
 
 rich. 
 The man whose brother is general 
 
 of the army, found a treasure in 
 
 the city. 
 She knows what is good. 
 
 She who has money, has care. 
 
 (a.) Mis hermanos son quienes 
 (124, a) los vio. 
 
 (b.) Los pintores á quienes (124, b) 
 vmd. vio, y de los cuales (124, c) 
 Juan habló, son muy ricos. 
 
 (c) El hombre cuyo (124, d) her- 
 mano es general del ejército, 
 halló un tesoro en la ciudad. 
 
 (d.) Ella sabe lo que (125, b) es 
 . bueno. 
 
 (e.) La que (125, c) tiene dinero, 
 tiene cuidado. 
 
 608. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 El juez es quien (124, a) vio las cartas que (124, c) 
 vmd. escribió. Las Francesas son quienes (124, a) dieron 
 los libros á Pedro. El hombre á quien (125, a) el Ale- 
 mán dio los sombreros, es muy rico é ignorante. Las 
 mugeres á quienes (125, a) el médico escribió las cartas, 
 son muy pobres é ignorantes. El juez dio los libros á un 
 pintor 2 ingles 1 (100, c) en quien (125, a) el médico tiene 
 mucha confianza. Los mugeres para quienes (125, a) Pe- 
 dro escribió las cartas, son muy hermosas y ricos. La 
 Española á quien (124, b) Pedro ama, es muy hermosa. 
 Las Francesas á quienes (124, b) vmd. vio, me (113; 114) 
 escribieron muchas cartas. Las cucharas que (124, c) 
 María tiene, y las cuales (124, c) el Frances halló, son 
 mias. El caballo que (124, c) Juan vio, y del cual (124, 
 c) Pedro habló, es robusto y fuerte. Las calles cuyas 
 (124, d) casas son hermosas, son agradables. 
 
 El criado cuyo (124, d) nombre es Pedro, vino á mi 
 casa. Las casas cuyos (124, d) cuartos son espaciosos, son 
 muy agradables. Juan dio el libro á una muger cuyo 
 nombre es María. El pintor y el impresor vinieron á 
 Madrid, en cuya (124, d) ciudad el pintor halló un tesoro. 
 El hombre que (125) tiene prudencia, es muy sabio. El 
 hombre que tiene dinero, tiene cuidado. La muger que 
 (125) es soberbia é ignorante, es desgraciada. Los hom- 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 251 
 
 bres que (125) tienen dinero, tienen cuidados. Lo que 
 (125, b) es imposible para los (230) hombres, es posible 
 para Dios. Lo que (125, b) es nuevo, no es viejo. El 
 pintor tiene el tesoro que el médico halló en la calle. 
 Pedro ama lo que (125, b) es bueno. Ella sabe que (125, 
 b) hacer. El hombre no sabe que (125, b) hacer. Pedro 
 sabe lo que es bueno. La Francesa no sabe que decir. 
 Las hijas del juez no saben que comprar. El pintor no 
 sabe que (125, b) libro leer. Los Alemanes no saben cual 
 (125, b) sombrero tomar. Mi hermana no sabe cuales 
 libros leer. 
 
 La que (125, c) es soberbia, no es amable. Los que 
 (125, c) aman la verdad, son sabios. El que (125, c) tiene 
 sabiduría, tiene prudencia. Mi hermano tiene un tesoro, 
 que (124, c) su criado halló en la ciudad. El que tiene 
 prudencia, es sabio. Los que nos dieron los libros, son 
 amigos nuestros (121, b). La que no es agradable, es des- 
 graciada. La ciudad en que (126) Juan halló el tesoro, 
 es grande y hermosa. La muger á quien María habló, es 
 muy amable. El que tiene oro, tiene mucho cuidado. El 
 Alemán dio dos libros al hombre á quien (124, b) Juan 
 vio. El médico dio tres libros á la Francesa en quien mi 
 madre tiene mucha confianza. El pintor fué á Madrid, en 
 cuya (124, d) ciudad las calles son agradables y las casas 
 hermosas. Las criadas no saben ^ue hacer. 
 
 609. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The physician is [he] who (124, a) wrote the letter 
 which (124, c) you (vmd.) saw. The judge is [he] who 
 (124, a) saw the letters which (124, c) you (vmd) wrote. 
 The Spanish-women are [they] who (124, a) gave the books 
 to Peter. The man to whom ( 1 25, a) John gave the hats, 
 is very rich and (587) ignorant. The women to whom 
 (125, a) the judge wrote the letters are very poor and 
 ignorant. The women for whom (125, a) Mary wrote the 
 letters, are very amiable and beautiful. The physician 
 
252 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 gave the spoons to an English 2 painter 1 (100, c), in whom 
 (125, a) the judge has much confidence. The French- 
 woman whom (124, b) Peter loyes, is very beautiful. The 
 German-woman whom (124, b) you (vmd.) saw, wrote me 
 many letters. The spoons which (124, c) Mary has, and 
 which (124, c) the Frenchman found, are mine. The male- 
 servant who (125) came with me (115, c), is strong and 
 robust. The horse which (124, c) John saw, and of which 
 (del cual ; 124, c) Peter spoke, is strong. The streets 
 whose (124, d) houses are beautiful, are agreeable. 
 
 The man whose (124. d) name is John came to my 
 house. The woman whose name is Mary gave me three 
 books. The houses whose (124, d) rooms are spacious, are 
 very pleasant. John gave three silver spoons to a woman 
 whose name is Mary. The painter and the printer came 
 to Madrid, in which (124, d) city the painter found a trea- 
 sure. The man who (125) has prudence, is wise. The 
 woman who (125) is proud and ignorant, is unhappy. The 
 men who have money, have cares. That which (125, b) is 
 possible for Peter, is possible for John. What (125, b) is 
 possible for the painter, is not possible for the carpenter. 
 The Frenchman has the treasure that (124, c) the physi- 
 cian found in the street of the city. Peter loves what 
 (125, b) is good. Mary knows what (125, b) is good. The 
 German knows what (125, b) to-do. The painter knows 
 not what (125, b) to-do. The French-woman knows not 
 what to-say. The physician's sister knows not what to- 
 buy. The male-servants know not what to-say. My 
 father knows not what (125, b) book to-read. My brothers 
 know not which (125, b) books to-buy. The Germans 
 know not which (125. b) hat to-take. She knows not what 
 spoon to-take. 
 
 He that (125, c) has much gold, has much care. She 
 that (125, c) is proud, is not amiable. They who (125, c) 
 love the truth, are wise. He who has wisdom, has pru- 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 253 
 
 dence. He who has prudence, is wise. My father has a 
 treasure which (124, c) his male-servant found in the city. 
 They who gave us the books, are friends [of J ours (121, b). 
 She who is not agreeable, is unfortunate. Those who are 
 ignorant and impious, are unhappy. The city in which 
 (126) Peter found the books, is large and beautiful. The 
 woman to whom Mary spoke, is very agreeable. The 
 painter went to Madrid, in which (124, d) city the streets 
 are pleasant and the houses handsome. 
 
 SECTION EIGHTH. 
 
 610. In Spanish, all that is necessary to form an interrogatory sen- 
 tence, is to place the interrogation mark before (inverted) and after the 
 sentence. Thus, Juan tiene dinero, means, "John has money," and 
 ¿Juan tiene dinero? means, " has John money?" It is, however, com- 
 mon (though not necessary) in Spanish, to place the nominative after the 
 verb in interrogations ; as, ¿ tiene Pedro dinero ? ¿ tienen los pintores 
 libros? " has Peter money?" "have the painters books?" 
 
 611. The auxiliary verb do is unknown in Spanish (as also in all the 
 languages of Europe except the English), and all such expressions as, 
 "docs John speak?"— "do they love?" — "how much do you ask a 
 week ?" — "did it not snow during my absence ?" — " did they see her?" 
 — "Peter did speak," must be rendered in Spanish by the simple form 
 of the verb; as, ¿habla Juan? — ¿aman ellos? — ¿cuánto pide vd. por 
 semana? — ¿no nevó durante mi ausencia? — ¿la vieron ellos? — Pedro 
 habló; that is, "speaks John ?"— " love they?"— "how much ask you 
 per week ?"— " snowed it not during my absence ?"—" her saw they?" 
 (or, "saw they her?") " Peter spoke." 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 612. Vocabulary. 
 Azúcar, sugai 
 
 Manteca, butter. 
 
 Especie (fern.) species, sort. 
 
 Señor, sir. 
 
 Si, yes. 
 
 Toma, (he) takes. 
 
 Dice (he) says. 
 
 Habla (he) speaks. 
 
 Quiere (he) icishes, (he) wants. 
 
 Pan, bread. 
 
 A'gua, water. 
 
 Boton, button. 
 
 Señora, madam, lady. 
 
 No, no. 
 
 Dicen, (they) say. 
 
 Dijo, (he) said. 
 
 Entiende, (he) understands. 
 
 Quieren, (they) wish, (they) want. 
 
254 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 613. Model sentences. 
 
 Who has sugar ? 
 
 Who speaks English 1 
 
 Which of the two painters has 
 
 money 1 
 What said the judge's daughter? 
 What book have you ? 
 Whose is the treasure 1 
 Does your son want bread, sir 1 
 No, sir, my son has bread. 
 
 (a.) i Quién tiene azúcar ? 
 (6.) i Quién habla Ingles 1 
 (c) i Cual de los dos pintores tiene 
 
 dinero í 
 (d.) i Qué dijo la hija del juez? 
 (e.) i Qué libro tiene vm. 1 
 {/.) i De quién es el tesoro 1 
 (g\) i Quiere su hijo pan, señor? 
 (h.) No, señor, mi hijo tiene pan. 
 
 614. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 ¿Quién (127) es bueno? ¿Quiénes (127) son ricos? 
 I De quién (127) son las casas ? ¿ Cuyos (127) libros tiene 
 Vmd. ? ¿ Cual (127) de los dos hijos del juez halló un 
 tesoro? ¿Qué (127) dijo Vmd.? ¿ Qué (127) sombrero 
 tiene vmd. ? ¿ Qué tesoros halló Pedro ? ¿ Qué quiere 
 Vm. ? ¿ Qué lengua habla el general ? ¿ Para quién (127, 
 a) escribió María las cartas? Para el muger (127, a). 
 ¿A quiénes (127, a) dio Juan los libros 2 españoles 1 ? A 
 los Alemanes (127, a). ¡Qué (127, b) hombre es Vm. ! 
 j Qué (127, b) hermosa muger! ¿Quién quiere pan? 
 ¿ Quién quiere azúcar ? ¿ Quién habla Español ? ¿ Quién 
 entiende el Ingles? ¿Quién ama la verdad? ¿Quién 
 habla el Frances? ¿ Quién entiende lo que (125, b) Juan 
 dice ? ¿ Qué especie de botones quiere Vm. ? ¿ Qué 
 especie de azúcar tiene Pedro ? ¿ Qué quieren Vms. ? 
 ¿ Qué libros quieren los pintores l ¿ Qué dicen los jueces ? 
 
 ¿ Toma Vmd. agua ? ¿ Qué dijo el hermano del médi- 
 co? Señora, ¿ quiere Ymd. manteca? ¿Habla su (123) 
 hijo Español, señor? Sí, señor, mi hijo habla Español. 
 ¿Entiende su hija de Ymd. (123, a) el Ingles, señora? 
 No, señor, ella no entiende el Ingles. ¿ Cuyas cucharas 
 tiene la Francesa ? ¿ Cuyos botones tienen los criados ? 
 ¿ Cuyo sombrero tiene Juan? ¿Qué libros tiene Pedro? 
 ¿Quién tiene hambre? ¿Quiénes tienen sed? ¿Qué 
 especie de cucharas tienen las hermanas del Americano ? 
 ¿ Qué dicen los Españoles ? ¿ Qué quieren Pedro y Juan ? 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 255 
 
 l Toma el pintor agua ? ¿ Quién entiende lo que Vms. 
 dicen ? ¿ Qué dijo el padre del médico ? ¿ Quién tiene 
 pan ? ¿De quién son los libros ? ¿ Cual de los dos Fran- 
 ceses habla Español? ¿A quién habla Vni. ? 
 
 ¿ Tiene Vm. dinero'? ¿Tienen los carpinteros muchos 
 amigos ? ¿ Tiene V. muchos libros ? ¿ Tiene el libro 
 hojas de oro % ¿ Tienen los jueces hambre ? ¿ Es Y. Es- 
 pañol ? ¿ Son las casas nuevas ? ¿ No son sus amigos 
 ricos? ¿ Sus hermanas 610 no son tan 104 ricas como 
 él? ¿Mis hermanos no son mas 106 ricos que 106 
 los carpinteros de navio? ¿Escribió el criado de juez 
 cartas á las criadas de la Francesa ? ¿ Es la muger ama- 
 ble ? ¿ Son los Ingleses mas soberbios que (106) los Ale- 
 manes ? ¿ Halló el pintor dos libros en la calle de la ciu- 
 dad ? ¿ Tienen los criados hambre ? Sí, señor, los 
 criadas tienen hambre. ¿ Tienen las Españolas sed ? No, 
 señor, las Españolas no tienen sed. 
 
 615. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 Who (127) is wise? Who is rich? Who (127) are 
 good ? Who are culpable ? Who is strong ? Who are 
 robust? Of whom (127, a) speaks John? Of the phy- 
 sician (127, a). Whose (of whom ; 127, a) are the houses ? 
 Peter's (127, a). AVhose (127) books has Mary ? Whose 
 (127) buttons have the male-servants? Whose spoons 
 have my sisters ? Which ( 127) of the two sons of the phy- 
 sician found a treasure in the road ? Which of the two 
 men is culpable? What (127) say you ?* (what says your 
 worship ?) What (127) said you ? What does (611) John 
 wish ? (what wishes John ?) What does (611) Peter say? 
 What do (611) the judges say? What (127) hat have 
 you? What (127) treasures did Peter find ? (what trea- 
 sures found Peter?) What wish you? What language 
 speaks the general ? For whom (127, a) wrote John the 
 
 * The learner can use rm., rmd., V., Vm., Vd., or Vmd. in the singu- 
 lar for you. (Ses remark at the bottom of p. 245.) 
 
256 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 letters? "For the French-woman (127, a). To whom 
 (plur.) gave John the French 2 books 1 ? To the daughters 
 of the judge. What a (127, b) woman ! What a (127, b) 
 beautiful city! Who (127) wishes bread? Who wishes 
 sugar ? Who speaks English ? Who understands the 
 Spanish ? Who speaks the French ? Who understands 
 what (125, b) Mary says? Who understands what the 
 Americans say? What sort of buttons do (611) you 
 want ? What sort of sugar has John ? What sort of 
 spoons do (611) my friends want? What do (611) the 
 women say ? 
 
 Do (611) you take water ? Bo you take sugar ? What 
 said the sister of John ? What said the brother of the 
 physician ? Sir, do you want butter ? (sir, wishes your- 
 worship butter?) Does (611) your (123)«son speak Span- 
 ish, sir ? (speaks his son Spanish, sir ?) Yes, madam, my 
 son speaks Spanish. Does (611) your (123, a) daughter 
 understand the English, madam ? No, sir, my daughter 
 does (611) not understand the English. Whose spoons 
 has the female-servant ? Whose hat has Peter ? Whose 
 buttons have the painters ? What books has Mary ? 
 What bread have you ? Who is thirsty ? (who has thirst?) 
 Who are hungry? What do (611) the Spaniards say? 
 What wish Peter and John ? What sort of spoons has 
 the daughter of the carpenter ? Does the German take 
 water? Who understands what (125, b) you (plur.) say? 
 What says the father of the painter ? Who has butter ? 
 Whose (of whom) are the books ? Which of the two 
 Spaniards speaks English? To whom do (611) you 
 speak ? 
 
 Have you money? Have the Frenchmen many friends ? 
 Have you many books ? Has the book leaves of gold ? 
 Are the women hungry ? Are you [a] Spaniard ? (is 
 your worship Spanish ?) Are you [a] Frenchman ? Are 
 you [a] German ? Are the houses new ? Are not his 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 257 
 
 friends rich? Are not his brothers as (104) rich as (104) 
 he? My brothers are-they (son) not richer (106) than 
 (106) the judge's sons? Wrote the son of the painter 
 letters to the French-woman ? Is the woman amiable ? 
 Are the Spaniards more proud than the English ? Did 
 the painter find (found the painter) two books in the road ? 
 Are the Germans hungry ? Yes, sir. the Germans are 
 hungry. Are the Spanish-women thirsty ? No, madam, 
 the Spanish-women are not thirsty. Is John [a] carpen- 
 ter ? Yes, sir, John is [a] carpenter. 
 
 SECTION NINTH. 
 
 616. The English demonstrative pronoun " that" is rendered in Span- 
 ish by the definite article when it refers to something having preceded 
 it and is followed by the preposition "of;" as, "my house and that of 
 my servant," mi casa y la. de mi criado ;" "his only desire was that of 
 freeing his country from the Saracen yoke ;" su único deseo era el de 
 libertar á su patria del yugo sarraceno; "the repose of the poor-man is 
 not a cheerless leisure like that of the rich-man," el descanso del pobre no 
 es un ocio insípido, como el del rico ; " Saguntum endured a siege equal 
 to-that of Numantin," Sagunto sufrió un sitio iqual al de Numáncia; 
 " the soldiers of General Taylor are as brave as those of General 
 Scott," los soldados del general Taylor son tan valientes como los del gen- 
 eral Scott. 
 
 617. When in cases like those referred to in the preceding rule, the 
 possessive case in English is employed instead of the demonstrative 
 pronoun " that," the definite article is used in Spanish ; as, " my house 
 and my servant's" mi casa y la de mi criado ; " I-have my book and my 
 father's" tengo mi libro y el de mi padre; "my wine is better than 
 John's," mi vino es mejor que el de Juan ;" that is, " my house and that 
 of my servant," — "my book and that of my father," — "my wine is bet- 
 ter than that of John." 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 618. Vocabulary. 
 
 Pronunciación, pronunciation. 1 Caballero, gentleman. 
 Lámpara, lamp Espejo, looking-glass. 
 
 Cuchillo, hvfe. \ Tenedor, fork. 
 
 Brisa, breeze. \ Pluma, pen, feather. 
 
 Diego, James. i Lucía, Lucy. 
 22* 
 
258 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 Panadero, baker. 
 Sombrerero, halter. 
 Librero, bookseller. 
 Posadero, innkeeper. 
 Londres, London. 
 Fácil, easy. 
 Pero, but. 
 
 619. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) Aquellas (128) mugeres tienen 
 prudencia. 
 
 (p.) Aquellos á quienes (129) mi 
 padre habló, no tienen dinero. 
 
 (c.) Pedro dio una lámpara á 
 aquella (129, b) que halló su 
 sombrero. 
 
 (d.) Juan habló á aquella á quien 
 (129, a) Vm. vio ; or, Juan ha- 
 bló á la que (129, a) Vm. vio. 
 
 (e.) La pronunciación del* Espa- 
 ñol es mucho mas fácil que la 
 del Ingles. 
 
 (/■) i Tiene Vm. mi espejo ó el 
 (617) de María 1 
 
 Zapatero, shoemaker. 
 Zapato, shoe. 
 Cerveza, beer. 
 Vino, wine. 
 
 Nueva-York, New York. 
 Ancho, wide. 
 O', or. 
 
 Those women have prudence. 
 
 Those (or they) to whom my fa- 
 ther spoke, have not money. 
 
 Peter gave a lamp to her who 
 found his hat. 
 
 John spoke to her whom you saw. 
 
 The pronunciation of the Spanish 
 is much more easy than that of 
 the English. 
 
 Have you my looking-glass, or 
 Mary's ? 
 
 620. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 Este (128) hombre es rico. Aquella (128) muger es 
 soberbia. Esos (128) libros son nuevos. Estas (128) 
 cucharas son de oro. Aquellos (128) pintores son pobres. 
 Estas casas son nuestras. Esos sombreros son mios. Este 
 vino és bueno. Esa cerveza no es bueno. ¿ De quiénes 
 son aquellas casas ? ¿ De quién es esta casa ? ¿ Quién es 
 ese caballero ? ¿ Habla este caballero la léngua2 española 1 ? 
 I Habla esa señora la lengua 2 inglesa 1 ? Esta lámpara es 
 nueva. Ese espejo es viejo. Aquel hombre habla Fran- 
 ces, i Son estos mis zapatos ? ¿ Cuyo es este cuchillo ? 
 ¿ Cuyos son esos tenedores ? La Francesa y la Española 
 tienen prudencia ; esa (128, c) es mas amable que (106) 
 esta. Aquel (129) á quién (129) mi padre escribiólas 
 
 * The masculine article is here used before Español and Ingles, be- 
 cause these agree with idioma (idiom, or language) understood. Idioma 
 is masculine (see 424). 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 259 
 
 cartas, tiene - mucho dinero. Aquellos á quienes (129) 
 Pedro dio los libros, son pobres é ignorantes. Aquella 
 (129) á quién (129) Juan dio un espejo, es muy hermosa. 
 
 Diego dio los libros á los (129, a) que Vm. vio. Lucía 
 dio vino á aquella (129, b) que tiene sed. El librero dio 
 dos libros á la (129, b) que le (113) escribió las cartas. 
 Esta casa y la que vmd. vio, son mias. ¿ No es este el 
 hijo del panadero ? ¿ No es esta la hija del zapatero ? 
 I No son estas las hermanas del posadero ? El sombrerero 
 escribió estas cartas. Esos tenedores son suyos de ella 
 (120, a). Estos cuchillos son suyos de él (120, a). Este 
 espejo es mió. Este hombre es mi amigo. ¿ Quién es esa 
 muger ? ¿ Quién es este caballero ? ¿Es este el libro de 
 su (123, a) hermana de Vm. ? No, señor, este es el libro 
 de mi padre. Esta brisa es agradable. ¿ No es esta brisa 
 agradable ? ¿ Cuya es esta pluma ? 
 
 Diego halló mi sombrero y el (129, c) del médico. Las 
 cucharas de Lucía y las (616) de María, son de oro. La 
 pronunciación del Alemán no es tan fácil como la (616) 
 del Español. Juan no tiene mi libro, pero él tiene el 
 (617) de mi hermana. Las calles de Londres son mas 
 anchas que (106) las (616) de Madrid. La ciudad de 
 Nueva- York no es tan grande como la (616) de Londres. 
 Mi cerveza no es tan bueno como la (617) de Diego. Mi 
 casa es alta, pero la (617) de mi hermano es mas alta. 
 ¿ Tiene Vm. mis plumas ó las (617) de mi padre? ¿ Tiene 
 el sombrerero mi sombrero ó el (617) de mi amigo? El 
 sombrerero no tiene su sombrero de Vm. (123, a), pero 
 tiene (he-has) el de su amigo de Vm. ¿ Tiene el panadero 
 mi pan ó el del posadero ? ¿ Tienen los libreros tus espe- 
 jos ó los de tu madre ? Los libreros no tienen mis espe- 
 jos, pero tienen (they-have) los de mi madre. La cerveza 
 del posadero es tan bueno como la del zapetero. Los za- 
 patos del librero son tan viejos como los del panadero. El 
 vino de Diego es tan bueno como el de Pedro. Las calles 
 
260 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 de Nueva- York son mas anchas que (106) las de Lon- 
 dres. 
 
 62 1 . English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 This (128) gentleman is good. This (128) woman is 
 rich. That (128) man is rich. That (128) woman is 
 proud. Those (128) spoons are new. Those (128) books 
 are old. Those painters are poor. These spoons are of 
 gold. These houses are lofty. Those hats are ours. This 
 "beer is good. That wine is not good. Of whom are 
 those houses? Whose (of whom) is this house? Who 
 is that gentlemen? Who (plur.) are those gentlemen ? 
 Does (611) that lady [señora) speak the Spanish 2 lan- 
 guage 1 ? Does this gentleman speak the French 2 lan- 
 guage 1 ? This lamp is not new. That looking-glass is 
 not old. That man speaks English. Are these my 
 shoes ? Whose is this hat ? Whose are these knives ? 
 Whose is this fork ? The Spanish-woman and the Eng- 
 lish-woman have prudence; the former (128, c) is more 
 amiable (106) than the latter (128, c). He (129) to whom 
 (129) my mother wrote the letters, has much money. 
 Those to whom (129) James gave the pens, are poor and 
 ignorant. She (129) to whom (129) the hatter gave a 
 looking-glass, is poor and proud. 
 
 Lucy gave the spoons to them (129, a) whom you saw. 
 James gave the knives to him (129, a) whom John saw. 
 John gave wine to him (129, b) who is thirsty. Mary 
 gave bread to her (129, b) who is hungry. The bookseller 
 gave three books to her (129, b) who wrote him (113) the 
 letters. This house and that (la) which you saw, are 
 mine. Is not this the brother of the hatter ? Is not this 
 the daughter of the baker ? Are not these the sons of 
 the shoemaker ? Are not these the sisters of the inn- 
 keeper? Is not this the mother of the bookseller ? The 
 carpenter wrote these letters. Those knives are hers 
 (12), a). These forks are his (120, a). This looking- 
 
EXERCISES FOIL TRANSLATION. 261 
 
 glass is ours. This man is my friend. Who is this lady 1 
 Who is that woman ? Who is this gentleman ? Is this 
 the book of your (123, a) brother. No, sir, this is my 
 father's book. Whose' is this pen ? Whose are those 
 pens? This breeze is agreeable. Is not this breeze 
 agreeable I 
 
 Peter found my hat and that (129, c) of the physician. 
 The spoons of Lucy and those (616) of Mary are of gold. 
 Mary's spoons and Lucy's (617) are of silver. James has 
 not my book, but he has my sister's (617). The streets 
 of New-York are wider than (106) those (616) of Lon- 
 don. The pronunciation of the French is not so easy as 
 that (616) of the Spanish. The city of Madrid is not so 
 large as that of London. My beer is not as good as 
 John's (617). My wine is notas good as James' (617). 
 My house is lofty, but my father's (617) is more lofty. 
 Have you ( I'm.) my pens or my father's (617) ? Has the 
 hatter nry hat, or my friend's (617) ? The hatter has not 
 your (123, a) hat, but he-has your (123, a) friend's (617). 
 Has the baker my bread, or the inn-keeper's (617) ? Have 
 the shoemakers my shoes, or those (617) of my brother? 
 The shoemakers have not my shoes, but they-have (tienen) 
 my mother's (617). The inn-keeper's wine is not as good 
 as the shoemaker's. Peter's shoes are as old as John's. 
 The streets of New York are wider than those of Madrid. 
 
 SECTION TENTH. 
 
 622. In Spanish, two negatives serve to strengthen a negation. Thus, 
 este autor no vé nada de honroso en el carácter de los Españoles, "this 
 author not sees nothing of honorable in the character of the Spaniards," 
 or, as it would be expressed in good English, " this author sees nothing 
 honorable in the character of the Spaniards." If in a negative sentence only 
 one negative word is used, it must always come before the verb ; if two ne- 
 gative words are used, the adverb of negation must come before the verb, 
 and the other negative word after it ; thus we can say, Diego nada tiene, 
 or. Die go no tiene nada, "James nothing has," or, "James not has no- 
 
252 
 
 EXERCISES FOE. TRANSLATION. 
 
 thing," the meaning in English being, " James has nothing." The for- 
 mer mode of expression in Spanish is generally considered more elegant. 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 623. Vocabulary. 
 
 Obra, word, deed. 
 
 Mérito, merit. 
 
 Peso, dollar. 
 
 Aldeano, villager. 
 
 Falta, fault, defect. 
 
 Rosa, rose. 
 
 Diferente, different. 
 
 Doce, twelve. 
 
 Segun, according-to. 
 
 Serán, (they) shall be, or, will be. 
 
 Tendrá, (lie) shall-have, or, w\ 
 
 have. 
 Dará, (he) will-give. 
 Aborrece, (he) hates. 
 Hay, there-is; there-are. 
 
 624. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) El juez no dijo mal de na- 
 die (131). 
 
 (6.) De nadie el juez dijo mal. 
 
 (c.) Hay una casa en el camino. 
 
 (d.) Hay muchas casas en el cami- 
 no. 
 
 (e.) i Q,ué hay en ese sombrero 1 
 
 (f.) i No hay médico en la cuidad ? 
 
 (g.) i Hay en Madrid doce pin- 
 tores 1 
 
 Idioma, (mase.) idiom, language. 
 
 Mal, evil, ill. 
 
 Cosa, thing. 
 
 El Señor, the Lord. 
 
 Sexo, sex. 
 
 Espina, thorn. 
 
 Premiado, rewarded. 
 
 Diez, ten. 
 
 Sin, without. 
 
 Sea, (he) may-be. 
 
 Dé, (he) may-give. 
 
 Diga, (he) may-say. 
 
 Brilla, (it) shines, (il) glitters. 
 
 Comer, to-eat. 
 
 The judge said evil of nobody. 
 
 There-is a house on the road. 
 
 There-are many houses on the 
 road. 
 
 What is-there in that hat ? 
 
 Is-there not a physician in the 
 city? 
 
 Are-there in Madrid twelve paint- 
 ers ? 
 
 £5^* For other model sentences, the learner is referred to the examples 
 under the indefinite pronouns, on pages 52, 53, and 54. 
 
 625. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 Las tres mugeres cada uno (131) de ellas, tiene dos 
 espejos. Estos hombres serán premiados, cada cual (131) 
 segun sus obras. Pedro tiene doce libros, cada uno en un 
 idioma 2 diferente 1 . Todas (133) las mugeres serán premi- 
 adas, cada cual según sus méritos. Ella y todas (133) sus 
 hijas son robustísimas (108, a). María dio libros á cada 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 263 
 
 ■uno de ellos. Uno y otro (131) saben loque es bueno. 
 ¿Hay algo (131) de (134, b) nuevo? No (622) hay nada 
 (622) de (134, b) nuevo. Juan no quiere (622) nada. 
 Los libreros no quieren nada. Todo loque (131) brilla, 
 no es oro. Todo lo que (131) Diego tiene, es mió. Todo 
 (133) libro tiene hojas (577). Nadie (131; 622) habla 
 mal de él. A nadie (622) habla el librero (575). El po- 
 sadero no (622) habla á nadie (622). A ninguno (133 ; 
 622) dio María los cuchillos y tenedores. El zapatero no 
 dio los zapatos á ninguno (622). Nada* es bueno para él. 
 Pedro no tiene nada (622). El juez no me dijo nada. 
 Ninguna (134) de estas señoras es rica. No 3 sabe 2 uno 1 
 (133) que decir (606). No sabe uno que comprar (596). 
 
 ¿ Tiene vmd. otro (133) hermano? ¿ Vio alguien (131) 
 mi sombrero? ¿Habla alguien (131) Español? El juez 
 tiene dos criados ; y dio al uno (131) doce pesos, y al otro 
 (131) diez, á cada uno según su mérito. El librero tiene 
 dos hijas el nombre de la una es María, y el nombre de la 
 otra es Lucía. Diego halló algo (131) en el camino. Las 
 mugeres tienen algo (131) que comer. Todo lo que (131) 
 brilla, no es plata. Pedro dio algo á los pobres. La Fran- 
 cesa tiene algo que comer. Una de las señoras vino (596) 
 conmigo (115, c). Mi hermano tiene todo lo que mi 
 padre le dio. El que es rico, quienquiera que (131) él sea, 
 tendrá cuidados. A cualquiera que (131) Vmd. dé pan, 
 Diego dará dinero. A cualquiera que (131) María dé 
 libros, Lucía dará zapatos. Cualquier (132) cosa que 
 Juan diga, sus casas no son hermosas. Todos los que son 
 buenos, aman la verdad. Dios aborrece todos los caminos 
 de los impíos. El Señor aborrece todo (133) camino malo. 
 ¿ Dio Juan libros á algunos (134) de estos Alemanes ? Sí, 
 señor, Juan dio libros á unos (133). ¿ Tiene alguno (133) 
 mi sombrero ? Ninguno tiene tu sombrero. Tiene al- 
 
 * Nada requires the adjective which agrees with it to be in the mas- 
 culine. 
 
284 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 guien (131) mi espojo? Nadie tiene tu espojo. Todo eso 
 (128, a) es muy cierto. 
 
 ¿Tienen algunas (134) de estas mugeres cucharas de 
 plata? Cada uno (131) de nosotros tiene algún (101) 
 mérito. Pedro dio dinero á uno de las hermanas de 
 María. A ninguno (133) escribió (575) María cartas. 
 La criada no halló tesoros algunos (134, a) en la ciudad. 
 Unos (133) hombres tienen 'dinero, otros (133) no lo (117) 
 tienen. Muchos aldeanos de ambos (133) sexos vinieron 
 (596) á la ciudad. El pintor dio un sombrero al Alemán, 
 y un libro al Español ; ambos son pobres. María no habla 
 de las faltas agenas (134, c). 
 
 626. Instead of ninguno, the adverb no is often used in the sense of 
 "noi a," " not any," or " no," especially with verbs denoting possession ; 
 as, ella no tiene marido,* " she has not a husband," or " she has no hus- 
 band;" estas señoras no tienen libros," these ladies have no books," or, 
 " not any books." 
 
 Mi madre no (626) tiene cuchara. Mi padre no (626) 
 tiene hermano. Ella no tiene tenedor. Mis hermanas no 
 tienen cuchillos. María no tiene padre. Mis hijos no 
 tienen sombreros. Mi hermano no tiene casa. El librero 
 no tiene espejo. Diego no tiene dinero. Juan no tiene 
 oro. Ella no tiene hijas. Pedro no es Americano. María 
 no es Francesa. ¿ No (626) tiene Juan libros ? Los pin- 
 tores no tienen botones. Mi sobrino (602) no tiene plu- 
 mas. Este caballero no tiene manteca. El pandero tiene 
 pan, manteca, azúcar, vino y cerveza. ¿ Hay (624, g) cartas 
 para mí ? No, señor, no hay (624, d) cartas para vmd. 
 i Qué hay en el camino ? Hay casas y ciudades. ¿ Qué 
 hay en esa cuchara? Hay agua en esta cuchara. ¿ Hay 
 rosas sin espinas ? No, señora, no hay rosas sin espinas. 
 ¿ Hay hombres sin faltas ? No, señor, no hay hombres sin 
 faltas. ¿Hay una rosa sin espinas? No hay rosa sin 
 espinas. No hay nada. No hay casas en el camino. ¿ No 
 
 * Literally, "she has not husband." (See 242.) 
 
EXEFwCTSES FOR TRANSLATION, 265 
 
 hay zapatero en esta ciudad í Sí, señor, hay uno. ¿ Hay 
 en esa casa muchos cuartos ? Hay diez cuartos (606). 
 
 627. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The ten male-servants, every one (131) of .them has 
 three roses. The three women, every one of them has 
 twelve looking-glasses. These carpenters shall be reward- 
 ed (plur., premiados\ each (131) accorcling-to his works. 
 Lucy has ten books, each one in a different 2 language 1 . 
 All (133) the female-servants shall-be rewarded (plur., 
 fern.), each according-to her merits. She and all (133) her 
 daughters are very handsome (108, a). Mary gave knives 
 to each one of them. Both (131) are amiable. Is-there 
 (624, f) anything (131) new (134, b)? There-is nothing 
 (622; 131) new (134, b). Peter wants nothing (622). 
 The gentlemen want nothing. Every thing which* (131) 
 glitters is not gold. Every thing which (131) my brother 
 has is mine. Every (133) book has leaves (577). No- 
 body (131 ; 622) speaks evil of him. To nobody speaks 
 the bookseller (575). The innkeeper speaks to nobody 
 (622). To no-one (133; 622) gave John the pens and 
 spoons. The bookseller gave the books to no-one (622). 
 Peter has nothing. The French-woman said nothing to- 
 me (113). Nothing is good (mase.) for her. No-one (134) 
 of these ladies is rich. One 3 (133) knows 2 not 1 what to- 
 say (606). One 3 knows 2 not 1 what to-buy (596). 
 
 No-one (134) of those "painters shall-be rewarded. Have 
 you (vmd.) another (133) sister ? Did (611) any-one 2 (131) 
 see 1 my hat? Does (611) any-one 2 (131) speak 1 Spanish? 
 That gentleman has two male-servants ; and [he] gave to- 
 the one (131) ten dollars and to-the other (131) twelve; 
 to each one according-to his merit. The shoemaker has 
 two daughters ; the name of the one is Lucy, and the 
 name of the other is Mary. The baker found something 
 
 * "Every thing that," or, " every thing which" is rendered "todo lo 
 que." 
 
 23 
 
268 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 (131) in the road. The booksellers have something (13 Í) 
 which to-eat. Every thing that (131) shines is not silver. 
 Peter said something to the poor-men. She has some- 
 thing [algo que) to eat. One of the ladies came with-me 
 (115, c). My sister has every thing thai (131) my father 
 gave her. He who is rich, whoever that (131) he may-be, 
 will have cares. To whomsoever that (131) you (vmd.) 
 may-give bread, my father will-give money. Tq whomso- 
 ever that Mary may-give knives, Lucy will-give forks. 
 Whatever (132) thing that John may-say, his houses are 
 not handsome. All those who are good, love the truth. 
 The Lord hates all the ways (caminos) of the impious. Grod 
 hates every wicked 2 way 1 . All this (128, a) is very true 
 (571). Nobody (131) has thy looking-glass. No-one (133) 
 has thy hat. Has anybody (131) my books ? Has any- 
 one (133) my pens? Gave Peter shoes to any (134) of 
 these poor-women ? # Yes, sir, Peter gave shoes to some 
 (133). Each (132) painter found a treasure. 
 
 Have any (134) of those women silver (97, a) forks'? 
 Have any of these ladies gold spoons? Each one of us 
 (115) has some (101) merit. The shoemaker gave money 
 to one of (130) the sisters of Lucy. Mary wrote letters 
 to no-one (622). The physician found not any (134, a) 
 treasures in the city. Some (unos ; 133) men have money, 
 others (133) have it not. Many villagers of both (133) 
 sexes came to London. The judge gave a hat to the 
 Frenchman and a book to the Englishman ; both are poor. 
 She speaks not of another's (134, c) faults. 
 
 She has no (626) daughters. Peter is no (626) Span- 
 iard. My father has no (626) brother. John has no (626) 
 hat. James has no money. Mary has no father. You 
 (vmd.) have no looking-glass. John has not-any (626) 
 books. These ladies have not-any (626) roses. My 
 
 * " These poor women" is tobe rendered "estas pobres." "These 
 poor men " would be " estos pobres" 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 267 
 
 nephew lias not-any (626) pens. My mother has not a 
 (626) spoon. My sister has not-a (626) fork. The (87) 
 housekeeper (571) has no (626) butter. Are-there* (624, 
 g) letters for me (115)? No, sir, there-are (624, d) no 
 (626) letters for you (vmd.). What is-there (624, e) on 
 the road ? There-are houses and cities. What is-there in 
 that spoon ? There is sugar in it (ella). Are-there roses 
 without thorns ? There-are no (626) roses without thorns. 
 Are-there women without faults ? No, sir, there are no 
 (626) women without faults. There-is nothing (622). 
 There-are no (626) houses on the road. Is-there no (626) 
 physician in that city 1 Yes, sir, there-is one. There-are 
 no books without leaves. 
 
 fj^g*** We would recommend to the learner to review carefully all the 
 preceding sections, especially the last six ; and then, after having atten- 
 tively studied the following rules, to translate the sentences of the re- 
 maining exercise of this section. 
 
 628. In Spanish, the definite article is to be used before all common 
 nouns taken in a general sense, or which denote a whole class or species 
 of things ; as, la paciencia y la actividad remueven montañas, "patience 
 and diligence remove mountains ;" le prohiben el uso del vino, " they- 
 forbid him the use of wine ; jamas la soberbia ni la ira podrán acordarse 
 con la amabilidad y la mansedumbre, " never pride nor anger can agree 
 with amiability and meekness; todas las cosas tienen su tiempo, "all 
 things have their season." Here patience, diligence, wine, pride, anger, 
 amiability, meekness, and things, are taken in an absolute or general 
 sense, and each requires the definite article in Spanish, though not in 
 English, to precede it.t (See 230.) 
 
 629. The definite article is not to be used in Spanish before nouns not 
 taken in a general or determinate sense, or which do not refer to the 
 whole class or species of things, or the whole of any object ; as, ella tiene 
 azúcar, "she has sugar;" Juan bebe vino al almuerzo, "John drinks 
 wine at breakfast." Here sugar and wine are to be taken in a partitive 
 sense, meaning " some sugar," " some wine." 
 
 *" There is" and "there are" are each rendered by " hay." "Is- 
 there?" and "are-there ?" are each rendered "¿hay?" 
 
 t This is an important rule of Spanish syntax, and it should be well 
 studied by the learner. 
 
268 
 
 EXERCISES FOE, TRANSLATION. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 630. Vocabulary. 
 
 Caridad, charity. 
 
 Beneficencia, beneficence. 
 
 Ignorancia, ignorance. 
 
 Error, error. 
 
 Vida, life. 
 
 Sueno, dream, sleej). 
 
 Tiempo, time. 
 
 Virtud, virtue. 
 
 Vicio, vice. 
 
 Paz, peace. 
 
 Sociedad, society. 
 
 Muerte (fem.), death. 
 
 Paciente, patient. 
 
 Precioso, precious. 
 
 Mejor, better. 
 
 Mortal, mortal. 
 
 Odioso, odious. 
 
 Terrible, terrible. 
 
 Juan hace, John makes. 
 
 Pedro prefiere, Peter prefers. 
 
 631. Model sentences, 
 (a.) El (628) hombre es polvo (629). 
 (6.) La (628) hermosura es despojo 
 
 (629) del (628) tiempo. 
 
 (c.) El (628) despotismo los embru- 
 tece, la (628) severa disciplina 2 
 militar 1 los degrada, la (628) su- 
 perstición los condena al (628) 
 error y á la (628) ignorancia. 
 
 (d.) El (S7) alma de la (628) muger 
 es naturalmente mas sensible 
 que la del (628) hombre. 
 
 (e.) El hambre (87) es la (265, a) 
 mejor salsa. 
 
 632. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 El (628) tiempo* es mas precioso que el (628) oro. 
 
 Año, year. 
 
 Harina, flour. 
 
 Yelo, ice. 
 
 Religion, religion. 
 
 Gratitud, gratitude. 
 
 Hermosura, beauty. 
 
 Juicio, judgment. 
 
 Historia, history. 
 
 Maestra, mistress, instructress. 
 
 Justicia, justice. 
 
 Riqueza, wealth, riches. 
 
 Leche (fem.), milk. 
 
 U'til, useful. 
 
 Caro, dear. 
 
 Frio, cold. 
 
 Blanco, white. 
 
 Dulce, sweet. 
 
 Necesario, necessary. 
 
 Ella teme, she fears. 
 
 E'l depende, he depends. 
 
 Man is dust. 
 
 Beauty is the spoil of time. 
 
 Despotism stupefies them, severe 
 military discipline degrades them, 
 superstition condemns them to 
 error and ignorance. 
 
 The soul of woman is naturally 
 more sensitive than that of man. 
 
 Hunger is the best sauce. 
 
 * The learner must not in these cases translate the article in English ; 
 thus, he must not render el tiempo, by "the time," but by "time." So, 
 el yelo es frío, by " ice is cold," and not by " the ice is cold." Los vinos 
 son buenos este año, "wines are good this year;" la guerra hace mucho 
 daño al comercio, " war does much injury to trade." 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 269 
 
 (628) caridad es paciente. La (628) beneficencia nos (11 3) 
 hace amables. La (628) vida no es un sueno. El tiempo 
 es precioso. La ignorancia es madre del (628) error. El 
 (87) agua es tan bueno como el vino. La sabiduría (606) 
 es mas preciosa que todas las (628) riquezas. La pruden- 
 cia es mas preciosa que la plata. Mejor es la sabiduría 
 que (106, a) la hermosura. El (628) hombre teme la (628) 
 muerte. El hombre no teme la vida. La virtud es ama- 
 ble. El vicio es odioso. Los (628) hombres son mortales. 
 El oro es precioso. La prudencia es útil. Ella tiene pru- 
 dencia (629). Juan tiene oro (629). El (628) dinero es 
 útil. Pedro tiene dinero (629). Los (628) libros son 
 útiles. María no halló libros (629). Este año la (628) 
 harina es muy cara. Los vinos serán buenos este año. 
 El vino es muy caro este año. La manteca es muy cara. 
 La cerveza es buena. El yelo es frío. La muerte es ter- 
 rible. La leche es blanca. El azúcar es dulce. La gra- 
 titud es el (87) alma de la religion. Juan prefiere el vicio 
 á la virtud. María no prefiere el error á la verdad. Pe- 
 dro prefiere las (628) riquezas á la sabiduría. El médico 
 prefiere la cerveza al vino. La prudencia y el juicio son 
 necesarios (260, d) á todo (591) hombre. La historia es 
 maestra de la vida. La paz de la (628) sociedad depende 
 de (o?i) la justicia. La plata es preciosa. Los tenedores 
 son útiles. Este año la harina no es cara. La religion es 
 amable. El oro es mas precioso que la plata. Mejor es la 
 prudencia que el dinero. 
 
 633. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 Time (628) is precious. Prudence (628) is useful. 
 Vice (628) is odious. Money (628) is useful. Ice (628) 
 is cold. Sugar (628) is sweet. Religion (628) is lovely 
 {amable). Virtue (628) is lovely. Books (628) are useful. 
 Time (628) is more precious than gold (628). Ignorance 
 (628) is [the] mother of (628) error. Prudence is more 
 precious than silver (628). Water (87) is as good as wine 
 23* 
 
270 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 (628). Charity is patient. Life is not a dream. Wis- 
 dom is more precious than all (628) riches. Beneficence 
 makes us (113) amiable. Wisdom 3 is 2 better 1 than beauty. 
 Men (628) are mortal. Man (628) fears death (628). 
 Man fears not life. Gold is precious. She has prudence 
 (629). Peter has money (629). Lucy found no (626) 
 books (629). John has gold (629). Butter (628) is very 
 dear. Milk is white. Beer is good. This year flour 
 (628) is very dear. Wine is very dear this year. Death 
 (628) is terrible. Gratitude is the (87) soul of religion 
 (628). Prudence and judgment are necessary to every 
 (591) man. Wines will-be good this year. Peter pre- 
 fers vice to virtue. The shoemaker prefers beer to wine. 
 Forks are useful. This year flour is not dear. Gold is 
 more precious than silver. History (628) is [the] instruc- 
 tress of life (628). John prefers riches (628) to wisdom. 
 This gentleman prefers truth to error. The peace of so- 
 ciety (628) depends on (ale) justice (628). Prudence is 
 better than money. 
 
 SECTION ELEVENTH. 
 
 Remark. — To commit to memory the conjugations of the Spanish 
 verbs may seem a difficult task, yet if the learner will faithfully follow 
 the directions as contained in the remaining sections of this Part (IV.), 
 we think he will be enabled to learn the variations of person and num- 
 ber in all the moods and tenses of the different verbs, without any very 
 laborious effort on his part. The irregular auxiliary verb, haber, should 
 be copied and re-copied, each tense at a time, till it is thoroughly learn- 
 ed, that is, till the pupil can readily write all the persons of each tense 
 without referring to the conjugated form, pronouncing and accenting all 
 properly as he copies. After having committed this verb to memory, he 
 will be prepared to conjugate the compound tenses of any other verb. 
 
 g^p* This section contains exercises on the verb ser, to be. (See 
 158.) 
 
 • EXERCISE XII. 
 
 634. Vocabulary. 
 Abogado, lawyer^ barrister. I Soldado, soldier. 
 
 Joven, young. | Criado, created. 
 
271 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 Castigado, punished. 
 
 Escrito, written. 
 
 Engañado, deceived. 
 
 Imprudente, imprudent. 
 
 Económico, economical. 
 
 Probable, probable. 
 
 Diligente, diligent. 
 
 Q,uiero, I-wish. 
 
 Puede, (he) can, (he) is-able. 
 
 Preciso es, ) ., . 
 
 . ' > it-is necessary. 
 Es preciso, ) 
 
 Ahora, now. 
 
 Pequeño, little, small 
 
 Fiel, faithful 
 
 Feliz, fortunate, happy. 
 
 Prudente, prudent. 
 
 Barato, cheap. 
 
 Puntual, punctual 
 
 Negligente, negligent. 
 
 Frugal, frugal 
 
 Creo, I-believe. 
 
 Pretende, (he) pretends. 
 
 ¡ Ojalá i O that! would to God that! 
 
 Nunca, never. 
 
 635. Model sentences 
 (a.) Somos (15S) Alemanas. 
 (b.) Madrid era pequeña, pero 
 
 ahora es grande. 
 
 (c.) Pedro será abogado. 
 
 (d.) Es posible que V. no sea pre- 
 miado. 
 
 (e.) Si yo fuese rico, no sería so- 
 berbio. 
 
 (/.) No creo que tú seas mas dili- 
 gente que yo. 
 
 (g.) ¡Ojalá hubiese yo sido fiel á 
 él. 
 
 (h.) Siendo, como V. es, tan negli- 
 gente, i quién le dará á V. libros ? 
 
 636. Spanish lo be translated into English. 
 
 Soy (158) hijo del juez. Tú eres joven. ¿ Soy yo rico? 
 Vms. son jóvenes. La cuchara no es de oro. Pedro es 
 robusto. El azúcar (628) es dulce. Este libro es de (97) 
 María. Estos tendores son de plata. Estas señoras son 
 Francesas. V. es (243) Español. Yms. son Alemanes. 
 Somos Españoles. Sois Inglesas. Son Ingleses. Somos 
 Inglesas. Yms. son Ingleses. Soy (243) Alemán. Es 
 Española.* Eres Inglesa. Somos carpinteros. Sois pin- 
 tores. Eres zapatero. Es (243) médico. Soy librero. 
 Somos jueces. 
 
 * Es Española, " she-is a Spanish-woman." Es Español, " he- 
 ís a Spanish-man," or " Spaniard." 
 
 We-are German-women. 
 
 Madrid was small, but now is 
 
 large. 
 Peter will-be a lawyer. 
 It-is possible that you may not be 
 
 rewarded. 
 If I were rich, I-should not be 
 
 proud. 
 I do not believe that thou mayest- 
 
 be more diligent than I. 
 O-that I had been faithful to him ! 
 
 Being as you are so negligent, who 
 will give you books 1 
 
272 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 Pedro era (158) posadero. Mis hermanos eran somber- 
 eros, pero ahora son carpinteros. Tu padre era (243) pan- 
 adero, y ahora es librero. Eras médico. Yo era abogado. 
 Eran soldados. E'ramos zapateros. Erais abogados. 
 Vm. era juez. Yms. eran libreros. Eran impresores, 
 pero ahora son carpinteros. Ella no era una hermosura. 
 I No era yo mas robusto que él ? ¿ Eran abogados ? ¿ Mis 
 hermanas no eran tan culpables como ella ? Erais impre- 
 sores. Yo era general. Estas ciudades eran pequeñas, 
 pero ahora son grandes. 
 
 El (628) hombre fué (158) criado. Fui castigado. 
 Esta carta fué escrita para mi madre. Fuimos castigados. 
 Las cartas fueron escritas para las Francesas. Fuiste 
 castigado. Vmd. fué premiado. Vms. fueron premiados. 
 Fuisteis castigados. ¿ Fui premiado ? La Española fué 
 premiada. Fui joven. 
 
 Mi madre ha sido (158) desgraciada. He sido desgra- 
 ciado. Has sido premiado. Han sido fieles. Hemos sido 
 castigados. He sido castigado. Habéis sido fieles. Ella 
 ha sido hermosa. El abogado ha sido desgraciado. Yms. 
 han sido premiados. He sido feliz. Vm. ha sido fiel. 
 Mi hermana había sido (158) imprudente. Habíamos 
 sido imprudentes. Yo había sido castigado. Y. había 
 sido premiado. Yms. habian sido imprudentes. Habíais 
 sido castigados. 
 
 Serán (158) premiados. Juan será soldado. Mis her- 
 manos serán abogados. María será una hermosura. Seré 
 médico. Seréis soldados. Yms. serán premiados. Serás 
 castigado. Seré rico. Pedro será mas rico que Juan, pero 
 Juan será menos ignorante que Pedro. El vino (628) 
 será barato este año. La harina (628) será barata. El 
 azúcar será caro. Nunca serás juez. No serán premiados 
 según (623) sus obras. ¿Los criados serán castigados? 
 Nunca seréis abogados. Los buenos serán premiados. 
 
 Sé (158) fiel. Sé bueno. Sed fieles. Sed puntuales. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 273 
 
 Sé puntual. Seamos buenos y sabios. ■ Sea (309, f ) el 
 criado premiado. Sean (309, f) las criadas castigadas. 
 Sea (309, f ) Juan tan fiel como Pedro. Sean (309, f ) 
 Vms. felices. Sea V. muy feliz. Sean los impíos castiga- 
 dos. Que (309, e) las cartas sean escritas. Sea el impre- 
 sor premiado. 
 
 Quiero que* (552, h) Juan sea (158) rico. Quiero que 
 mis amigos sean buenos. Quiero que V. sea económico. 
 Quiero que seas feliz. Quiero que seáis económicos. Es 
 posible que no seas pobre. Muy probable esf que nunca 
 seáis ricos. Esf posible que Juan no sea castigado. Muy 
 probable es que estas señoras nunca sean premiadas. 
 
 Preciso eraj que ella fuese (158) castigada. Preciso 
 era que fuesen puntuales. Era:}; preciso que no fuésemos 
 negligentes. Era preciso que los pintores fuesen económi- 
 cos. ¿No sería (158) este librero el mejor de los dos? 
 Si (635, e) yo fuese vmd., yo sería puntual. Si yo fuera 
 rico, yo sería económico. Si fueran ricos, serían sober- 
 bios. 
 
 No creo (635, f) que vuestra madre haya jamás (ever) 
 sido (158) linda (585). No creo que Vms. hayan jamás 
 {ever) sido prudentes. ¡Ojalá hubiese yo sido (158) fru- 
 gal ! ¡ Ojalá hubiesen sido prudentes ! ¡ Ojalá hubieseis 
 sido frugales ! Serás (158) premiado, si fueres (158) dili- 
 gente. Quiero ser (158) prudentes. Quiero ser diligente. 
 El que es mal (101) hijo no puede ser buen (101) padre. 
 El que es impío, no puede ser amable. Pretende no haber 
 sido (158) engañado. Pretende no haber sido castigado. 
 Siendo (158) como (635, h) eres, tan (63.5, h) imprudente 
 ¿quién te dará (623) dinero? Habiendo sido (158) en- 
 gañado por sus amigos, les escribió muchas cartas. 
 
 * Que, before the subjunctive mood, is generally a conjunction, mean- 
 ing " that ;" as, quiero que María sea buena, " I wish that Mary may-be 
 good." 
 
 t "Es" is here used as an impersonal verb, and means "it is." 
 
 I Era, used impersonally, meaning " it was." 
 
274 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 637. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 I (139, a) am (158) a (243) soldier. Thou (139, a) art 
 (158),a (243) lawyer. They are young. He (J 39, a) is 
 diligent. I am frugal. Ye are negligent. You (Vmd.) 
 are (161) punctual. They are fortunate. I am small. 
 She is small* and pretty. You ( Vms.) are (161) prudent. 
 I am a (243) son of the judge. Am I imprudent? The 
 spoon is of gold. These forks are of silver. The ladies 
 are French-women. You ( Vmd.) are a (243) Spaniard. 
 Ye are English-women. We are Germans I am an (243) 
 Englishman. She is a Spanish-woman. Thou art a phy- 
 sician. He is a bookseller. Ye are painters. They are 
 shoemakers. 
 
 [In the following paragraph, the imperfect tense in English is to be 
 rendered in Spanish by the imperfect of the indicative.] 
 
 Peter was (158) an (243) innkeeper. My brothers were 
 hatters, but now are carpenters. Thy father was a baker, 
 and now is a bookseller. Thou wast a physician. I was 
 a lawyer. They were soldiers. We were shoemakers. 
 Ye were lawyers. You (Vmd.) were (161) a judge. 
 You ( Vms.) were (161) booksellers. They were printers, 
 but now are carpenters. She was not a (una) beauty. 
 Was I not more robust than he ? Were they lawyers 1 
 Were 4 not 3 my 1 sisters 2 as culpable as she % Ye were 
 printers. I was general. These cities were small, but 
 now they are large (grandes). 
 
 [In the following paragraph, the Spanish perfect-definite of the indi- 
 cative is to be used.] 
 
 Man (628) was (158) created. I was punished. This 
 letter was writtenf for my mother. We were punished, f 
 The letters were writtenf for the French-women. Thou 
 
 * There is no necessity for employing the pronoun " ella'''' here, as the 
 gender of the adjective terminations indicates the gender of the nomina- 
 tive of the verb, thus, " es pequeñay linda." 
 
 t The participle after neuter verbs must agree in gender and number 
 with the word to which it belongs. (See 300, a.) 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 275 
 
 wast punished. You (Vmd.) was rewarded. You (Vms.) 
 were rewarded. Ye were punished. I was rewarded. I 
 was young. The Spanish-woman was rewarded. 
 
 My mother has been (158) unfortunate. I have been 
 unfortunate. Thou hast been rewarded. They have been 
 faithful. "We have been punished. I have been punished. 
 Ye have been faithful. She has been beautiful. The 
 lawyer has been unfortunate. You ( Vms.) have been re- 
 warded. I have been fortunate. You (Vm.) have been 
 faithful. My brother had been (158) imprudent. We 
 had been imprudent. I had been punished. You ( V.) 
 had been rewarded. You ( Vms.) had been imprudent. 
 Ye had been punished. 
 
 They shall-be (158) rewarded. John will be a (243) 
 soldier. My brothers will be lawyers. You (Vms.) will 
 be rewarded. Thou wilt be punished. I will be rich. 
 'Peter will be richer than John, but John will be less ig- 
 norant than Peter. Wine (628) will be cheap this year. 
 Flour (628) will be cheap. Sugar (628) will be dear. Never 
 wilt-thou-be a (243) judge. They will not be rewarded 
 according-to (623) their works. Will 3 the 1 male-servants' 2 
 be 3 rewarded? Never will-ye-be lawyers. The good 
 shall-be rewarded. 
 
 Be-thou (158) faithful. Be-thou good. Be-ye faithful. 
 Be-ye punctual. Be-thou punctual. Let-us-be good and 
 wise. May (309, f) the male-servant be rewarded. Let 
 (309, f ) -the female-servants be rewarded. May John be 
 as faithful as Peter. May (309, f ) you ( Vms.) be happy. 
 May you ( Vm.) be very fortunate. Let the impious be 
 punished. Let (309, e) the letters be written. Let the 
 printer be rewarded. 
 
 I-wish that (que; 552, h) John may-be (158) rewarded. 
 I-wish that my friends may be good. I-wish that you ( V.) 
 may be economical. I-wish that thou mayest-be happy. 
 I-wish that ye may be economical. It-is (es) possible that 
 
276 EXERCISES FOE, TRANSLATION. 
 
 thou mayest-not be poor. Very probable it-is that ye may 
 never (622) be rich. It-is possible that John may not be 
 punished. Very probable it-is that these ladies never may 
 be rewarded. 
 
 It-was [era) necessary that she should-be (314) punish- 
 ed. It-was necessary that they should-be (314) punctual. 
 It-was necessary that we should not be (314) negligent. 
 It-was necessary that the painters should-be (314) econom- 
 ical. Would not this bookseller be (315) the better of the 
 two? If (si) I were (should-be: 314) you (Vmd.) I 
 would-be (315) punctual. If I should-be (314) rich. I 
 would be (315) economical. If they should-be (316) 
 rich, they would be (315) proud. 
 
 I do (611) not believe that the physician's mother may 
 have ever (jamás) been (158) pretty (585). I do not be- 
 lieve that you ( V?ns.) may-have ever (jamás) been prudent. 
 O-that I had (should-have) been (318; 314) prudent! 
 O-thatI had (314) been (318) frugal! O-that ye had 
 been frugal ! Thou shalt-be rewarded if thou shouldst-be 
 (319) diligent. I-wish to-be (158) prudent, I-wish to-be 
 diligent. He who is a (243) bad (101) son, can not be 
 (ser) a (243) good (101) father. He who is impious can 
 not be amiable. He-pretends not to-have been deceived. 
 He-pretends not to have been punished. Being (158) as 
 thou art so (tan) imprudent, who will-giye (628) thee 
 money? Having been (158) deceived by his friends, he 
 wrote them many letters. 
 
 fljff": The learner should now write out, for practice, the different per- 
 sons of all the tenses of the various moods of the verb ser (omitting 
 the nominative personal pronouns), as directed in the Remark at the be- 
 ginning of this section. The distinctions between the tenses will be 
 found in a proper place. 
 
 SECTION TWELFTH. 
 
 638. The different persons of the verb estar are generally rendered 
 in English the same as those of the verb ser ; but in Spanish these 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 277 
 
 verbs are not employed indiscriminately, the one for the other. Ser is 
 used to affirm what a person or thing is naturally (or by nature), as well 
 as habitual qualities, or permanent or characteristic properties of an ob- 
 ject. Estar is used to affirm how any thing exists at any period of 
 time, or where any thing exists. Thus the sentences, la doncella es 
 amable, and la doncella está amable, would each be rendered in English 
 by "the maid is amiable ;" but in Spanish the former means "the maid 
 is amiable " naturally or permanently, i. e., of an amiable disposition ; 
 the latter means " the maid is amiable " for the time being, though her 
 disposition may be far from being amiable. " Mary is beautiful," is ren- 
 dered María es hermosa, since it is intended to affirm a natural quality 
 of Mary, or what she is; and "Mary is sad," is rendered María está 
 triste," since it is intended to affirm a merely accidental or transient 
 quality, or how she is: "Mary is in the country," is rendered Maria 
 está en el campo, since estar (and not ser) is used to affirm where a thing 
 is. Juan es bueno, means " John is good," affirming what John is ; 
 Juan está bueno, means " John ¿9 well," i. e., in good health, affirming 
 how John is. (For a more complete illustration of this subject, see 
 333—336.) 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 639. Vocabulary. 
 
 Fonda, hotel. 
 Inglaterra, England. 
 Campo, country, field. 
 La señora T— , Mrs. T-. 
 Triste, sad, sorrowful. 
 Enfadado, angry. 
 Ocupado, busy, occupied. 
 Caliente, warm. 
 Bueno, well. 
 Aquí, here. 
 I Cómo 1 how ? 
 Siempre, always. 
 i Cuanto 1 how much? 
 Mesa, table. 
 
 640. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) i Cómo está vmd. 1 Estoy 
 
 muy bueno. 
 (&.) Los pintores están en el campo, 
 (c.) La señorita T — siempre está 
 
 ocupada. 
 (d.) i Dónde está mi libro? Aquí 
 
 está. 
 
 Los Estados Unidos, the United 
 
 States. 
 El señor T— , Mr. T— . 
 La señorita T— , Miss T-. 
 Contento, contented, pleased. 
 Enfermo, sick, ill. 
 Cansado, weary, tired. 
 Presente, present. 
 Sobre, upon. 
 Allí, there. 
 I Dónde 1 where ? 
 Luego, soon, immediately. 
 En casa, at home. 
 Con, with. 
 
 How are you ? I-am very well. 
 
 The painters are in the country. 
 Miss T — is always busy. 
 
 Where is my book 1 Here it-is. 
 
 24 
 
278 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 641. Spa?iish to be translated into English. 
 
 El Frances está (159) en la ciudad. Estoy en la calle. 
 Estamos tristes. Están contentos. Estáis enfadados. 
 Estás enfermo. Está ocupado. Estoy cansado. El (87) 
 agua está caliente. Estás en tu casa. Los abogados están 
 en la fonda. Mi padre está en la ciudad. ¿ Estáis cansa- 
 dos? No estamos causados. El impresor siempre está 
 ocupado. Siempre estás ocupado. 
 Aquí está. 
 
 ¿ Dónde están mis cucharas, cuchillos y tenedores 1 Aquí 
 están, i Dónde está mi sombrero ? Está sobre la mesa. 
 ¿ Cómo está V. 1 Estoy bueno (335, e). ¿ Cómo está la 
 señora B — ? Está buena. ¿ Cómo está la señorita B — ? 
 No está muy buena. ¿ Está el señor B — '- en casa ? Está 
 en casa. ¿ Están Vms. buenos ? Estamos buenos. ¿ Está 
 Ymd. cansado ? No estoy cansado. ¿ Está Pedro en los 
 Estados Unidos? No, señor, está en Inglaterra. Diego 
 está en el campo. El libro está sobre la mesa. 
 
 Estaba (159) enfermo. Yo estaba contento. Estába- 
 mos presentes. Estaban cansados. La señora B — esta- 
 ba ocupada. Vms. estaban presentes. Estabas enfermo. 
 Estabais presentes. ¿ No estaba V. en el campo ? ¿ No 
 estaba mi padre en la calle ? ¿ Estábamos en la ciudad ? 
 Estabas con tu amigo. 
 
 Estuve (159) triste dos años, 
 años ? ¿ Estuviste allí ? ¿ Estuvo allí ? 
 tristes? ¿Estuvo vmd. mucho* tiempo con el juez? 
 Nunca he estado (159) en Inglaterra. Nunca han estado 
 en los Estados Unidos. \ Cuanto tiempof ha estado Vmd. 
 en los Estados Unidos? ¿Cuanto tiempo has estado en 
 Inglaterra ? Nunca hemos estado en Inglaterra. He esta- 
 do muy enfermo. Habíamos estado (159) muy enfermos. 
 
 * Mucho tiempo, "much time," equivalent to "long time," or, "a 
 great while," in English. 
 t Cuanto tiempo, "how much time," meaning "how long." 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 279 
 
 Juan estará (159) en su casa. Estaré ocupado. Esta- 
 rán con Vmd. luego. Estarás presente. Estaremos en 
 nuestras casas. Estaréis presentes. Estaré con Vms. 
 luego. Pedro estará con nosotros luego. Estaré en 
 Londres luego. 
 
 Estad (159) contentos. Estemos (309, f) contentos. 
 Estén (309, f ) presentes. Está contento. Esté (309, f) 
 el agua caliente. Es posible que Pedro esté (311) en su 
 casa. Es posible que estéis presentes. Probable es que 
 los abogados estén cansados. Sí Juan estuviese (314) 
 presente, María estuviera (316) contento. No creo que 
 la señora B — haya estado (159) jamás (ever) contento. 
 ¡ Ojalá no hubiese yo estado enfermo. ¡ Ojalá Y. hubiese 
 estado presente ! Estado enfermo (299) el juez dio su 
 dinero á sus hijos. 
 
 642. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The Spaniard is (159 ; 638) in the city. I-am (638) in 
 the street. We-are sad. They-are contented. Ye are 
 angry. Thou art ill He-is busy. I am tired. The (87) 
 water is hot. Thou art in thy house. The lawyers are in 
 the hotel. My father is in the city. Are-ye tired ? We- 
 are not tired. The printer always is occupied. Thou-art 2 
 always 1 busy. Where is the hotel ? Here it-is. Where 
 is John's book ? Here it-is. Where are my spoons, 
 knives, and forks ? Here they-are. Where is my hat ? 
 [t-is upon the table. How are you? (how is your-wor- 
 ship?) I-am well (335, e). How is Mrs. (233) B— ? 
 She-is well. How is Miss B — ? She-is not very well. 
 Is Mr. B — at home? He-is at home. Are you (Vms.) 
 well? We-are well. Are you ( Vmd.) tired? I-am not 
 tired. Is Peter in the United States ? No, sir, he is in 
 England. James is in the country. The book is upon 
 the table. The buttons are in the hat. The printer is in 
 the hotel. The painter is busy. My brothers are in the 
 country. How are my friends ? They are not very well. 
 
280 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 [The verb in the following paragraph is to be rendered by the imper- 
 fect tense in Spanish.] 
 
 lie was ( 1 59) ill. I was contented. We-were present. 
 They -were tired. Mrs. B — was busy. You ( Vms.) were 
 present. Thou-wast ill. Ye-were present. Were you 
 (V.) not in the country? Was not my father in the 
 city Í Were we-not in the street ? Thou-wast with thy 
 friend. 
 
 I-was (perf. def.) sad two years. Were-ye (303) there 
 many years ? Wast-thou there 1 Was-he there ? Were- 
 they sad 1 Were you ( Vmd.) [a] long (mucho) time with 
 the judge ? Never have-I been in England. Never have- 
 they been in the United States. How long (how much 
 time) have you ( Vmd.) been in the United States? How 
 long hast-thou been in England Í We-have never (622) 
 been in England. I-have been ill. We-had been (159) 
 very sick. 
 
 John will-be (159) in his house. I-shall-be busy. They- 
 will-be with you ( Vmd.) soon. Thou-wilt-be present. We- 
 shall-be in our houses. Ye-will-be present. I-shall-be 
 with you ( Vms.) soon. Peter will-be with us immediately. 
 I-shall-be in London soon. 
 
 Be-ye (159) contented. Let-us-be (309, f ) contented. 
 May-they-be (309, f ) present. May-he-be contented. Let 
 the water be warm. It-is possible that Peter may-be 
 (159) in his house. It-is possible that ye-may-be present. 
 It-is probable that the lawyers may-be tired. If John 
 should-be (314) present, Mary would-be pleased. I do not 
 believe that Mrs. B — may-have ever (jamás) been content- 
 ed. O-that I had (314) not been sick ! O-that you ( V.) 
 might-have (314) been present ! The 3 judge 4 being 1 (299) 
 ill 2 , gave his money to his sons. 
 
 $ií¿§r The learner can proceed to write and re-write all the parts of 
 this verb (estar), continuing the practice till he has committed it to 
 memory and afterward translate the following exercises on ser and 
 estar. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 281 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 643. Vocabulary. 
 
 Plomo, lead. Miel (fern.), honey. 
 
 Media, stocking. Seda, silk. 
 
 Candelero, candlestick. A'grio, sour. 
 
 Ciego, blind. Enfermizo, sickly. 
 
 Pesado, heavy. Escribiendo, writing. 
 
 644. Model sentences, 
 (a.) Mi padre es ciego. 
 (6.) Mi hermana está ciega de ira, 
 (c.) Juan es enfermizo. 
 (d.) Pedro está escribiendo. 
 
 My father is blind. 
 
 My sister is blind with passion. 
 
 John is sickly. 
 
 Peter is writing. 
 
 13?" The following promiscuous examples on the use of ser and 
 estar can be readily translated by means of the references. 
 
 645. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 Thou art (334) proud. Thou art (335) angry. Death 
 (628) is (334) terrible. \Ye are (335. b) in the street. 
 My father is (334) very rich. My mother is (335) very 
 sorrowful. Lead (628) is heavy. The milk is (335) sour. 
 Honey (628) is sweet. The honey is (335) warm. I am 
 a (243) German. I am angry. We are (334) imprudent. 
 We are ill. She-is (334) old. She-is (335) contented. 
 My mother is (334) blind. My daughter is (335) blind 
 with (de) anger (ira). Mary is beautiful. Lucy is (335) 
 busy. John is good. John is well (335. e). The spoon 
 is (334, b) of gold. The spoon is (335, b) upon the table. 
 The fork is (334, b) mine. The fork is (335, b) in the 
 house. The stockings are (334, b) of silk. The stockings 
 are (335, b) in the street. The book is for (334, b) Mary. 
 The book is (335, b) in the hotel. The stockings are for 
 Lucy. Here are (335, b) the stockings. I-am (334) 
 young. I-am (335, c) writing. My mother is sickly. My 
 mother is sick. The candlesticks are (334) of gold. The 
 button's are of silver. The looking-glass is (334) new. 
 The candlestick is of silver. They-are (335, c) writing. 
 Sugar (628) is (334) sweet. This hat is for John. 
 24* 
 
282 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 They-are wise. They-are sorrowful. Where is (335, b) 
 my hat ? Here it-is (335, b). My shoes are of silk. 
 
 SECTION THIRTEENTH. 
 
 646. The phrases, " to be hungry," " to be thirsty," " to be afraid," " to 
 be cold" "to be hot," are rendered in Spanish by the verb tener (to have), 
 and the corresponding noun ; as, " to have hunger," " to have thirst" u to 
 have fear" " to have shame" " to have cold" "to have heat." 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 647. Vocabulary. 
 
 Manzana, apple. 
 Nuez, nut. 
 Sopa, soup. 
 Calentura, fever. 
 Marmol, marble. 
 Paciencia, patience. 
 Calor, heat. 
 Vergüenza, shame. 
 Silla, chair. 
 Es estraño, it-is strange. 
 
 648. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) Esa muger no tiene vergüen- 
 
 Pera, pear. 
 Bota, boot. 
 Aceite, oil. 
 Memoria, memory. 
 Hierro, iron. 
 Suceso, success. 
 Frio, cold, coldness. 
 Temor, fear. 
 Ayer, yesterday. 
 Con, with. 
 
 That woman has not shame (i. e. } 
 
 is not ashamed). 
 John has heat (i. e., John is hot). 
 Let Peter have money. 
 
 (6.) Juan tiene calor, 
 (c.) Tenga Pedro dinero. 
 
 649. Spanish to be translated into 
 
 ¿Tiene (160) Vmd. manzanas? Tengo (160) manzanas 
 Tenemos plumas. Tienen peras. Vms. tienen sillas. 
 Ella tiene hambre. Tengo sed (646). Tenemos calor 
 (646). Tienen vergüenza (646). Tengo temor (646), 
 Tenemos frío (646). ¿ Tengo yo vergüenza? Tienes ver 
 güenza. Tenéis una lámpara. ¿ Quién tiene nueces 
 l Quienes tienen peras ? Mis hermanos tienen hierro. 
 Tengo manteca. Tenéis espejos. Tenemos tenedore: 
 Tienes cuchillos. ¿ Qué especie de botones tiene V. 
 ¿ Tenemos marmol ? ¿ Qué especie de azúcar tiene el 
 
EXERCISES FOE, TRANSLATION. 283 
 
 aldeano ? Ella no tiene (626) marido. Tengo tres hijos 
 y dos hijas. Tenéis tres hermanos. Tenemos una casa. 
 I Tenemos medias 1 ¿ Tienes candeleros ? No tengo hari- 
 na (626). No tenéis leche (626). La rosa tiene espinas. 
 Vmd. tiene memoria (242). María tiene mucha confianza 
 en el juez. ¿ Tienen Yms. sopa ? Tenemos suceso. 
 ¿ Tenéis paciencia ? El médico tenía (160) confianza en 
 la Española. Ella no tenía lámpara. Teníamos hambre. 
 Yo tenía una rosa. Tenían dinero. Ymd. tenía una 
 media. Teníais plata. Yms. tenían confianza en mi her- 
 mano. Tenías oro. Ella tenía prudencia. ¿ Tenía yo 
 zapatos ? i Teníamos botas ? ¿ No tenían mesas 
 
 Tuvo (160) azúcar ayer. Tuvieron manteca ayer. Tuve 
 botones ayer. Ella tuvo harina ayer. Tuvisteis dinero. 
 Tuvimos lámparas. Tuviste candeleros. No tuvieron 
 espejos. ¿Tuviste una pluma? Tuve una casa. Tuvi- 
 mos inedias de seda ayer. Tuvo sillas ayer. 
 
 El zapatero ha tenido (160) mucho cuidado. He tenido 
 mucho hierro. Has tenido tres hijas. Hemos tenido dos 
 hijos. María ha tenido calentura (242). Ella has tenido 
 dos maridos. Han tenido muchos cuidados. Habéis ten- 
 ido mucho dinero. Yo no había tenido (160) sopa. 
 
 Tendré (160) una candelero. Ella tendrá un tenedor. 
 Tendrán aceite. Ymd. tendrá hambre. Tendrás calor 
 (646). Tendremos sed. Tendrán vergüenza (646). Ten- 
 dréis temor (646). Tendré frío (646). Habré tenido 
 (160) dinero. 
 
 Tened (160) paz con todos los hombres. Ten paz con 
 todos los hijos del médico. Tenga (309, f ) plumas. Ten- 
 gan (309, f ) miel. Tengamos (309, f ) espejos. Tenga 
 (309, f ) Ymd. confianza en él. 
 
 Quiero que mi madre tenga (160) harina. Es posible 
 que tengas aceite. Probable es que tengan lámparas. 
 Quiero que María tenga dinero. Quiero que yo tenga 
 medias de seda. Probable es que tengamos algún (101) 
 
284 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 mérito. Es posible que tengáis hambre. Quiero que 
 Vms. tengan candeleros. 
 
 No era estraño que tuviesen (314) peras. No era estra- 
 ño que yo tuviese (314) dinero. No era estraño que Ymd. 
 tuviese aceite. Era preciso que no tuviésemos azúcar. 
 Si tuvieses (314) botas, yo tendría (315) zapatos. Juan 
 tendría (315) un tenedor. No creo que Pedro haya tenido 
 (160) manteca. ¡ Ojalá yo no hubiera tenido (160) estas 
 lámparas ! ¡ Ojalá no hubieran tenido esos libros ! Si yo 
 tuviere paciencia, tendré suceso. Si mis hijos tuvieren 
 paciencia, tendrán suceso. 
 
 650. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 They-have (160) pears. Have you ( Vmd.) apples? I- 
 have apples. We-have pens. They-have pears. You 
 ( Vms.) have chairs. She is hungry (646). I am thirsty 
 (646). We are hot (646). They are ashamed (646). 
 I am afraid (646). We are cold (646). I am ashamed. 
 Thou art ashamed (646). Ye have a lamp. Who has 
 nuts % Who have pears ? My brothers have iron. I 
 have butter. Ye have looking-glasses. We have forks. 
 Thou hast knives. What sort of buttons have you ( Ymd.) 1 
 Have-we marble ? What sort of sugar has the villager 1 
 She has no (626) husband. I have three sons and two 
 daughters. Ye have three brothers. We have a house. 
 Have we stockings 1 Hast thou candlesticks ? I have no 
 (626) flour. Ye have no (626) milk. The rose has 
 thorns. You ( Vmd.) have a (242) memory. Mary has 
 much confidence in the judge. Have you ( Vms.) soup ? 
 We have success. Have ye patience % 
 
 The physician had (imperf.) confidence in the Spanish- 
 woman. She had (imperf.) no (626) lamp. We were (im- 
 perf.) hungry. You ( Vms.) had (imperf.) confidence in my 
 brother. Had (imperf.) we boots ? 
 
 He had (303) sugar yesterday. They had (303) butter 
 
EXERCISES FOE. TRANSLATION. 285 
 
 yesterday. I tad (303) buttons yesterday. We had a 
 (242) fever yesterday. Ye had chairs yesterday. 
 
 The shoemaker has had (160) much care. I have had 
 much iron. Thou hast had three daughters. We have 
 had two sons. Mary has had a (242) ferer. She has had 
 two husbands. They have had many cares. Ye have had 
 much money. I had not had (305) soup. 
 
 I shall have (160) a candlestick. She will have a fork. 
 They-will have oil. You ( Vmd.) will be hungry (646). 
 Thou-wilt-be (646) hot. We shall-be (646) thirsty. 
 They will be (646) ashamed. Ye will be (646) afraid. I 
 shall be (646) cold. I will have had (160) money. 
 
 Have-ye (160) peace with all men (628). Have-thou 
 peace with all the sons of the physician. Let-him-have 
 (309, f) pens. Let-them-have (309, f) honey. Let-us- 
 have looking-glasses. May you ( Vmd.) have confidence in 
 him. 
 
 I wish that my mother may-have (160) flour. It-is pos- 
 sible that thou-mayest-have oil. Probable it-is that they- 
 may-have lamps. I-wish that Mary may-have money. I- 
 wish that I may-have silk stockings (97, a). Probable it-is 
 that we-may have some (101) merit. It-is possible that 
 ye-may be (646) hungry. I wish that you ( Vms.) may- 
 have candlesticks. 
 
 It-was (era) not strange that they-should-have (314) 
 pears. It-was not strange that I should have (314) 
 money. It- was not strange that you ( Vmd.) should have 
 oil. It was necessary that we should not have (314) 
 sugar. If thou shouldst have (314) boots, I would-have 
 (315) shoes. John would (315) have a fork. I do not 
 believe that Peter may-have had (160) butter. O-that I 
 had not had (318) these lamps ! O-that they-had not had 
 (318) those books! If I shall have (319) patience, I 
 shall have (307) success. If my sons shall have (319) 
 patience, they will have success. 
 
286 
 
 EXERCISES FOE. TRANSLATION. 
 
 §3F* The learner can now write all the persons of the tenses of the 
 verb tener, as directed at the close of the last two sections. 
 
 SECTION FOURTEENTH. 
 
 Remark. — The exercises in this section are designed for practice in 
 the conjugations of regular verbs of the three terminations, ar, er, and 
 ir. Of course, all verbs whose present infinitive ends with ar, are of 
 the first conjugation, and are to be conjugated like amar (168, a) ; those 
 ending with er, are of the second, and to be conjugated like comer (163, 
 b) ; and those ending with ir, of the third, and to be conjugated like 
 vivir (168, c). 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 651. Vocabulary. 
 
 Hablar, to speak. 
 
 Buscar, to seek. 
 
 Quedar, to remain. 
 
 Llevar, to carry. 
 
 Rehusar, to refuse. 
 
 Comer, to eat, to dine. 
 
 Leer, toread. 
 
 Vivir, to live. 
 
 Cumplir, to fulfil. 
 
 Terminar, to terminate, to close. 
 
 Reposo, repose. 
 
 Correo, post, mail. 
 
 Deber, duty. 
 
 Mañana, to-morrow, morning. 
 
 Cuando, when. 
 
 A' las dos, at two o'clock. 
 
 652. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) El Señor nos (113) ama. 
 
 (b.) No hemos bedido vino. 
 
 (c.) i Me permitirá V. escribir dos 
 
 cartas 1 
 (d.) Cumplid vuestros deberes, 
 (e.) Hable V. alto. 
 (/.) Viva, Vmd., señora, muchos 
 
 años. 
 
 Amar, to love. 
 
 Hallar, to find. 
 
 Llorar, to weep. 
 
 Viajar, to travel. 
 
 Llegar, to arrive. 
 
 Beber, to drink. 
 
 Responder, to reply, to answer. 
 
 Escribir,* to write. 
 
 Permitir, to permit. 
 
 Asunto, business, matter. 
 
 Palabra, word. 
 
 España, Spain. 
 
 Favor, favor. 
 
 Hasta entonces, till then. 
 
 Ya, already. 
 
 A' las tres, at three o'clock. 
 
 The Lord loves us. 
 
 We have not drunk any wine. 
 
 Will you permit me to-write two 
 
 letters ? 
 Fulfil-ye your duties. 
 Speak loud. 
 May you live, madam, many years. 
 
 * Escribir is irregular in its past participle, having escrito and not 
 escribido. (See 222, a.) 
 
EXERCISES POP. TRANSLATION. 287 
 
 653. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 Dios nos (113) ama. Los pintores la (113) aman. Mi 
 madre busca reposo. Ella no halla reposo. El Alemán 
 ama la verdad. Hablan. Hablas. Lloran. Quedan 
 contentos. Vmd. busca reposo. ¿ Hablan Vms. Español ? 
 Hablamos Español. Quedas triste. Habláis el Ingles. 
 No hallo reposo. Bebes (168, b) vino. Bebo agua. El 
 "Frances no come pan. Mis hermanos no beben vino. 
 Como pan. Juan lee libros. Leen libros. No come Y. 
 nada (622). No beben Vms. nada. ¿ No respondes na- 
 da? Bebemos vino. Bebéis agua. El medico vive (168, 
 c) en Londres. Mis hijas viven en los Estados Unidos. 
 María escribe cartas. Escribís muchas cartas. Cumples 
 tu palabra. Cumplo mis deberes. Vmd. vive en la ciu- 
 dad, i Cómo halla V. este pan ? 
 
 Llevábamos (168, a) mucho dinero con nosotros. María 
 lloraba. Pedro hablaba. Las mugeres lloraban. Las 
 señoras buscaban reposo. Yo lloraba. Yo bebía (168, b) 
 vino. Diego bebía agua. Comíamos pan. Vivían (168, 
 c) en Londres. Vivíais en la ciudad. Yo escribía una 
 carta. Vivías en Madrid. Escribíamos cartas. Yo bus- 
 caba reposo. 
 
 La Francesa no halló (168, a) reposo. Viajó por Es- 
 paña. Viajé por los Estados Unidos. Viajamos por In- 
 glaterra. Hallaron un tesoro en el camino. Juan lloró. 
 Leí (168, b) estos libros. Comió pan y manteca. Comi- 
 eron azúcar. Bebimos vino y leche. Escribí (168, c) dos 
 cartas. Escribieron doce cartas. Juan no respondió 
 nada. Vmd. vivió en Madrid. 
 
 Le (113) han rehusado (168, a) ese favor. Juan me ha 
 rehusado ese favor. He hallado mis tesoros. ¿ Ha llega- 
 do el correo ? Hemos hallado las cucharas. ¿ Has viaja- 
 do por España ? ¿Le habéis rehusado ese favor ? ¿ No 
 ha comido (168, b) V. pan? He comido mucho pan. He 
 cumplido mi palabra. 
 
288 EXERCISES FOE, TRANSLATION. 
 
 llegado el jues ? ¿ Han hallado Vms. mis lámparas ? 
 I Has comido mucha miel ? ¿ Ha viajado V. por los Esta- 
 dos Unidos ? 
 
 Hasta entonces habíais hablado (168, a) Español. 
 Hasta entonces no habíamos terminado nuestros asuntos. 
 Ya habían comido (168, b) cuando llegamos. ¿ No habías 
 vivido (168, c) ja en Londres? Hasta entonces habían 
 vivido en paz. 
 
 Cuando hube hallado (168, a) el tesoro, escribí cartas á 
 mis amigos. Cuando hubiste comido (168, b), tu padre 
 llegó. Cuando hubimos hablado, nuestras hermanas llora- 
 ron. 
 
 Viajaré (168, a) por España. Vijaremos por Ingla- 
 terra. Hallará un tesoro. Comeré (168, b) este pan. 
 Comerán manzanas. Leerás esos libros. Cumpliremos 
 (168, c) nuestras palabras. Escribirán cartas. Mi criado 
 llevará las cartas al correo. Habré comido (168, b) á las 
 dos.* Habrán llegado á las tres. El correo habrá llegado 
 á las dos. 
 
 Llorad (168, a) con los que lloran. Comed (168, b) este 
 pan. Cumplid (168, c) vuestras palabras. Bebed agua. 
 Vivid en paz con todos los hombres. Habla alto. Llora 
 tú con los que lloran. Come tú conmigo. Come tú con 
 Pedro. Cumple tus deberes. Hable (309, f ) Juan alto. 
 Xéa (309, f ) María mis cartas. Lean (309, f) las señoras 
 esos libros. Cumplan (309, f ) los hombres sus deberes. 
 Lea Vm. (309, f ) esa carta. Hable Vmd. (309, f ) Espa- 
 ñol. Coma V. manzanas y peras. Lean Vms. esa carta. 
 No hable (309, a) V. de eso (128, a). No lea (309, a) 
 Vmd. ese libro. No bebas (309, a) vino. No lloréis 
 (309, a). Respondedme (116). Escribidles (116). Es- 
 críbenos (116). 
 
 Es posible que halles (168, a) un tesoro. Es posible 
 que lean (168, b) esos libros. Es probable que no cum- 
 
 * See 280. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 289 
 
 plan (168, c) sus deberes. Probable es que ella no le 
 responda. ¡ Ojalá halléis reposo ! 
 
 Si yo hallase (314) libros, yo los leería (315). Si 
 María llorara (316), Juan lloraría (315). ¡Ojalá no be- 
 biesen (314) fino! j Ojalá no llorase ! ¡ Ojalá los hom- 
 bres (628) cumpliesen (314) sus deberes ! Preciso era 
 que María no hablase alto. 
 
 ¿Es posible que no hayan hallado (168, a; 317) un 
 tesoro ? Es posible que no haya llegado. ¡ Ojalá yo no 
 hubiese hablado (318)! Era estraño que no hubiesen 
 hallado esos libros. Si Juan no hubiese hablado (318, a) 
 María no habría llorado (318, a). Si mañana llegare (319) 
 Pedro, te escribiré. Si mañana hallaren (319) un tesoro, 
 nos escribirán. Si Diego no hubiere llegado (320) maña- 
 na á las tres, le escribiremos una carta. 
 
 Permítame (116) Y. leer (298) eso libro. ¿Me permi- 
 tirá V. leer esa carta? Era preciso hablarles (116). 
 Juan pretende (634) no haber hablado. Estaban comien- 
 do (299) y bebiendo (299). Habiendo hallado (299) un 
 libro, le leí. Habiendo hallado un tesoro en el camino, le 
 llevamos en la casa del abogado. 
 
 654. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 I-weep (168, a). God loves us (113). The painters 
 love her. My mother seeks repose. She finds not repose. 
 The German loves the truth. They speak. Thou speak- 
 est. They weep. They remain contented (300, a). You 
 ( Ymd.) seek repose. Do you ( Vms.) speak Spanish ? TVe 
 speak Spanish. Thou remainest sad. Ye speak the En- 
 glish. I find not repose. Thou drinkest (168, b) wine. I 
 drink water. The Frenchman eats not bread. My bro- 
 thers drink not wine. I eat bread. John reads books. 
 They read books. You (vmd.) eat nothing (622). You 
 ( Vms.) drink nothing. Repliest-thou nothing ? We 
 drink wine. Ye drink water. The physician lives (168, 
 c) in London. My daughters live in the United States. 
 25 
 
290 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 Mary writes letters, Ye write many letters. Thou ful- 
 fillest thy word. I fulfil my duties. You ( Vmd.) live in 
 the city. How do you ( V.) find this bread ? 
 
 We-were-carrying (168, a) much money with us. Mary 
 was-weeping. Peter was-speaking. The women were- 
 weeping. The ladies were-seeking repose. I was-weep- 
 ing. I was-drinking (168, b) wine. James was-drinking 
 water. "We were-eating bread. They were-living (168, c) 
 in London. Ye were-living in the city. I was-writing a 
 letter. Thou wast-living in Madrid. We were-writing 
 letters. 
 
 The French-woman found (perf. def.) no (626) repose. 
 He travelled through Spain (España). I travelled through 
 the United States. We travelled through England. 
 They found a treasure in the road. John wept, I read 
 (168, b) these books. I-ate bread and butter. They ate 
 sugar. We drank wine and milk. I wrote (168, c) two 
 letters. They wrote twelve letters. John answered 
 nothing (622). You ( Vmd.) lived in Madrid. 
 
 They have refused (168, a) him (113) that favor. John 
 has refused me that favor. I have found my treasures. 
 Has the 2 post 3 arrived 1 1 We have found the spoons. 
 Hast-thou travelled through Spain ? Have-ye refused him 
 (113) that favor ? Have you ( Vmd.) not eaten bread ? I 
 have eaten much bread. I have kept (cumplido) my word. 
 They have fulfilled their word. Has the 2 judge 3 arrived 1 ? 
 Have you 2 ( Vms. ) found 1 my lamps ? Hast thou eaten 
 much honey? Have you 2 (Vmd.) travelled 1 through the 
 United States ? 
 
 Till then ye-had spoken (168, a; 305) Spanish. Till 
 then we-had not terminated (305) our business (plur.). 
 They-had 2 already 1 eaten 3 (168, b; 305) when we arrived. 
 Hadst-thou not already 2 lived 1 (305) in London? Till 
 then they had lived (305) in peace. 
 
 When I-had found (306) the treasure, I wrote letters 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 291 
 
 to my friends. When thou-hadst (306) dined (306) thy 
 father arrived. When we-had spoken (306) our sisters 
 wept. 
 
 I-shall-travel (168, a; 307) through Spain. We-shall- 
 travel through England. He-will-find a treasure. I- 
 shall-eat bread. They-will-eat apples. Thou-wilt-read 
 those books. We-shall-fulfil our words. They-will-write 
 letters. My male-servant will-carry the letters to the 
 post. I-shall-have dined (308) at two o'clock (280). 
 They-will-have arrived (308) at three o'clock (280). The 
 post will-have arrived (308) at two o'clock. 
 
 Weep-ye (309) with those who (125, c) weep. Eat-ye 
 this bread. *Fulfil-ye your promises {palabras). Drink-ye 
 water. Live-ye in peace with all men (628). Speak-thou 
 loud {alto). Weep thou with those who weep. Eat thou 
 with me (115, c). Eat thou with Peter. Fulfil thy duties. 
 Let John speak (309, f) loud. Let Mary read (309, f ) 
 my letters. Let the ladies read (309, f) those books. 
 Let men (628) fulfil (309, f ) their duties. Bead (309, f ) 
 you ( Vmd.) this letter. Speak (309, f ) Spanish (let your- 
 worship speak Spanish). Eat you ( Vmd.) some (254, c) 
 'apples and pears. Read you {Vms.) that letter. Speak 
 not* (309, a) of this (128, a). Read not (309, a) this 
 book. Drink-thou not (309, a) wine. Weep-ye not (309, 
 a). Answer-ye me (116). Write-ye to them (116). Write- 
 thou to-us (116). 
 
 It-is possible that thou-mayest-find (168, a; 311) a trea- 
 sure. It-is possible that they-may-read (168, b) those 
 books. It-is probable that they-may not fulfil their duties. 
 It-is probable that she may not answer him (113). O-that 
 ye-may-find repose ! 
 
 If I should-find (314) books, I would-read (315) them. 
 If Mary should-weep (316), John would-weep (315). 
 O-that they-would not drink (314) wine! O-that he- 
 
 * Literally, no hable V. de eso. " not let-speak your- worship of this." 
 
292 
 
 EXERCISES FOP,. TRANSLATION. 
 
 would not weep (314)! O-that men (628) would-fulfil 
 (3 1 4) their duties ! It-was (era) necessary that Mary 
 should not speak (314) loud (alto). 
 
 Is-it possible that they-may not have found (317) a trea- 
 sure ? It-is possible that he-may not have arrived (317). 
 O-that I had not (might not have) spoken (318; 318, a) ! 
 It-was- (era) strange that they-should not have found (318, 
 a) those books. If John had not (should not have) spoken 
 (318, a), Mary would not have wept (318, a). If Petera 
 should-arrive 2 (319) to-morrow, 1 I-will-write to-thee (1 13). 
 If they-shall-find 2 (319) a 3 treasure 4 to-morrow, 1 they-will- 
 write to-us. If James shall not have arrived (320) to- 
 morrow at three o'clock, we will write him a letter. 
 
 Permit me (116) to-read (298) that book. Will you 
 ( Vmd.) permit me (113) to read that letter? It-was ne- 
 cessary to-speak to-them (116; 114). John pretends 
 (634) not to-have spoken. They-were (estaban) eating 
 (299) and drinking (299). Having found (299) a book, I- 
 readit (113). 
 
 Remark. — In order to become thoroughly familiar with the conjugation 
 of the regular verbs, the learner should write and re- write all the per- 
 sons of the various moods and tenses (as before directed), until he finds 
 himself able to write them without referring to the model-verbs. He 
 must be careful to remember the changes in orthography sometimes 
 required. (See 165 ; 165, a; and 166: 166, a; 166, b; 166, c.) 
 
 ^^° The following verbs, together with those already given in the 
 vocabulary of this section, will serve as examples for practice : 
 
 Pagar, to pay. 
 
 Llamar, to call. 
 
 Comprar, to buy. 
 
 Pender, to hang. 
 
 Temer, to fear. 
 
 Aprender, to learn. 
 
 Unir, to unite. 
 
 Abrir, to open. (See 222, a). 
 
 Asistir, to assist. 
 
 Tomar, to take. 
 Omar, to adorn. 
 Juzgar, to judge. 
 Creer, to believe. 
 Escoger, to choose. 
 Veneer, to conquer. 
 Sufrir, to suffer. 
 Añadir, to add. 
 Admitir, to admit. 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 293 
 
 SECTION FIFTEENTH. 
 
 Remark. — The exercises in this section are designed for practice in 
 reflective verbs and passive verbs. (See 169 ; 167, a, b ; 170 ; 171 ; 172.) 
 
 655. Se and the other personal pronouns of the first-objective case, 
 are often used in Spanish with neuter or active-intransitive verbs, and in 
 such cases seem redundant in English; as V. se burla, "you jest;" 
 mucho me alegro, " I rejoice much ;" se caerá Vmd,, " you will-fall ;" 
 retírese Vmd., "retire;" no se enoje Vmd., "do not be angry." Those 
 verbs designated with a (*) in the vocabulary, are thus used. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 656. Vocabulary. 
 
 Levantar, to raise, to rise. 
 Portarse,* to behave, to conduct ones 
 
 self. 
 Quejarse,* to complain. 
 Acercarse,* to. approach, to draw 
 
 near. 
 Salvar, to save. 
 Alabar, to praise. 
 Armar, to arm. 
 Invierno, winter. 
 A' las seis, at six o'clock. 
 
 Bien, well, properly. 
 
 Meterse,* to meddle, to interfere. 
 
 Retirarse,* to retire, to withdraw. 
 
 Burlarse,* to jest. 
 
 Alegrarse,* to rejoice. 
 
 Juntarse,* to assemble. 
 
 Escondir, to hide. 
 
 Pais (mase), country, region. 
 
 Primavera, spring. 
 
 A' las siete, at seven o'clock. 
 
 Mai, badly, improperly. 
 
 The friends assembled themselves 
 
 in London. 
 I-find myself contented. 
 Raise yourselves. 
 You jest. 
 Do not complain. 
 
 657. Model sentences, 
 (a) Los amigos se juntaron (169, 
 
 a) en Londres. 
 (b.) Me hallo (169, a) contento, 
 (c.) Levantaos (116; 116, b). 
 (d.) V. se burla (655). 
 (e.) No se (655) queje V. 
 
 658. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 ¿Cómo se halla (169, a) Vmd.? Juan se porta bien. 
 Los abogados se portan mal. Te portas bien. Os portáis 
 mal. Ellas se juntaron en Madrid. El carpintero se 
 halla contento. Le amas. Pedro se alabó. La muger 
 se escondió. El general se armó. Se alaban mis herma- 
 nas (575). Se salvaron. Me alabo. Te armas. Me es- 
 condí. Nos armamos. Nos escondimos. Se han portado 
 mal. ¡ Ojalá me hallase con ella ! ¡ Ojalá se portasen 
 25* 
 
294 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 bien ! Tus amigos se juntarán en Londres. Escóndete 
 (116). Alabaos (116, b). Salvaos (116, b). Armémo- 
 nos (116, b). Alábese (116) Ymd. (309, f). A'rmese 
 (116) Vmd. 
 
 Te (655) burlas. Me (655) alegro mucho. Se (655) 
 acerca la primavera (575). Se (655) acerca el invierno. 
 Se (655) quejan. Y. se (655) burla. Te (655) alegras. 
 Pedro se (655) queja. Se ha levantado Y. (575). ¿De 
 quién se (655) quejan 1 ¿ Me (655) he metido nunca 
 (ever) en sus (123, a) asuntos (affairs) de Ymd. 1 Siempre 
 me (655) levanto á las seis. Me (655) retiraré. ¿ No se 
 (655) retiraría (315) Y. del pais? ¿No se (655) retirarían 
 (315) del pais? Siempre nos (655) levantamos á las 
 siete. Se (655) alegran. Alégrate (116). Alegraos 
 (116, b). Alegrémonos (116, b). Alégrense (116). Le- 
 vántese Y. (309, f). No se (309, d) queje Y. (309, f). 
 No nos (309, d) quejemos (309, f ). No nos (309, d) me- 
 tamos (309, f ) en los asuntos del juez. 
 
 659. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 How do you (Vmd.) find (169, a) yourself (how finds 
 your-worship himself ) ? Peter behaves himself well. 
 The lawyers conduct themselves badly. Thou behavest 
 thyself well. Ye-behave yourselves badly. They assem- 
 bled themselves in Madrid. The carpenter finds himself 
 contented. Thou-lovest thyself. John praises himself. 
 The woman hid herself. The general armed himself. 
 My 3 brothers 4 praise 2 themselves 1 (575). They-saved 
 themselves. I-praise myself. Thou-armest thyself. I- 
 hid myself. We-arm ourselves. We-hid ourselves. They- 
 have behaved themselves badly. O-that I-might-find (314) 
 myself with her ! O-that they-would-conduct (314) them- 
 selves well ! Thy friends will-assemble themselves in 
 London. Hide (1 16) thyself. Praise-ye yourselves (116, 
 b). Save (116, b) yourselves. Let-us-arm ourselves (116, 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 295 
 
 b). Praise (116) yourself (let your-worship praise him- 
 self, 309, f ). Arm (116) yourself (309, f ). 
 
 Thou-jestest (655). I-rejoice (655) much. The 2 spring 3 
 approaches 1 (655). The 2 winter 3 draws near 1 (655). They- 
 complain (655). You ( V.) jest (655). Thou-rejoicest 
 (655). Peter complains (655). You 3 ( V.) have 1 risen 2 
 (655). Of whom complain-they (655) % Haye-I meddled 
 (655) ever (nunca) in your (de Vmd. ; 123, a) affairs (asun- 
 tos) ? I always rise (655) at six o'clock. I-will-retire (655). 
 Would (315) you ( V.) not retire (655) from-the (del) coun- 
 try ? Would-they (315) not retire (655) from-the country? 
 We always rise (655) at seven o'clock. They-rejoice (655). 
 Rejoice thou (655; 116). Rejoice-ye (116, b). Let-us- 
 rejoice (655; 116, b). Let-them-rejoice (655'; 116). 
 Rise (655 ; 309, f; let your-worship raise himself ) . Com- 
 plain not (309, d ; let not your-worship complain himself). 
 Let us not complain (309, d ; 309, f ). Let us not meddle 
 (655 ; 309, d) in the affairs (asuntos) of the judge. 
 
 Remark. — The inflections of reflective verbs should now be written 
 in all the moods and tenses of the three regular conjugations. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 Veneer, to conquer, to surpass. 
 Criar, to create. 
 Presentar, to present. 
 Tierra, the earth. 
 Presidente, president. 
 Abiertamente, openly. 
 
 660. Vocabulary. 
 Quemar, to burn. 
 Maltrata^ to abuse. 
 Calumniar, to calumniate. 
 Generosidad, generosity. 
 Embajador, embassador. 
 Aver, yesterday. 
 
 661. Model sentences. 
 
 (a.) Este libro fué escrito* para j This book was written for my 
 
 mis amigos. | friends. 
 
 (b.) Las casas han sido quemadas. ¡ The houses have been burned. 
 (c.) María es amada (170) de José, j Mary is loved by Joseph. 
 
 * Escrito is the past participle (irregularly formed) of the verb escribir. 
 
296 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 662. Spanish to be translated into English". 
 
 Lucía es amada (170; 171) de (323, b) Diego. La 
 Española es amada (170 ; 171) del Frances. Fuimos ven- 
 cidos (170; 171) en generosidad. La tierra fué criada 
 (170) por (323, b) Dios. Ella fué calumniada (170) abier- 
 tamente. Fueron vencidos en generosidad. Todas las 
 (628) cosas (623) fueron criadaspor Dios. Esta carta fué 
 escrita (170) para María. Esos libros fueron escritos por 
 (323, b) el abogado. He sido (172) maltratado. La ciu- 
 dad fué quemada. La casa fué quemada. Ayer fué 4 pre- 
 sentado 5 el 1 embajador 3 francés 2 al presidente de los Esta- 
 dos Unidos. Ayer fueron presentadas al .presidente las 
 hermanas y bijas del embajador 2 español 1 (575). Las 
 Francesas fueron calumniados abiertamente. Estos caba- 
 lleros han sido (172) maltrados. Las ciudades han sido 
 quemadas. La ciudad será quemada. No seremos venci- 
 dos en generosidad. Ayer fué presentado al presidente el 
 hijo del embajador 2 ingles. 1 Ayer fui presentado al presi- 
 dente de los Estados Unidos. 
 
 663. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 Mary is loved (170 ; 171) by {de ; 323, b) James. The 
 Spanish-woman is loved (170) by-the (323, b) Frenchman. 
 We-were (perf def.)* conquered (170) in generosity. The 
 earth was (perf. def.) created (170) by (por ; 323, b) God. 
 She was (perf. def.) calumniated openly. They-were con- 
 quered in generosity. All things (628) were created by 
 (323, b) God. This letter was written (escrita) for Mary. 
 Those books were written by (323, b) the lawyer. I-have 
 been abused (172). The city was (perf. def.) burned. The 
 house was burned. Yesterday the 3 Frenchs ambassador* 
 was 1 presented 2 to-the president of the United States. 
 Yesterday were presented to-the president the sisters and 
 daughters of the Spanish 2 ambassador. 1 The French-wo- 
 
 * See 170, a ; and 323 ; 323, a 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 297 
 
 men were calumniated openly. These gentlemen have 
 been (172) abused. The cities have-been burned. The 
 city will-be burned. We shall not be surpassed in gener- 
 osity. Yesterday was presented to the president the son 
 of the Eüglish 2 ambassador. 1 Yesterday I-was presented 
 to the president of the United States. 
 
 Remark. — The inflections of passive verbs should now be written in 
 all the moods and tenses of the three regular conjugations. 
 
 SECTION SIXTEENTH. 
 
 Remark. — The exercises in this section are designed to show the man- 
 ner in which the reflective personal pronoun se is employed in Spanish 
 to express passive action. 
 
 664. We can say in English, "the man deceives himself," or, "the 
 man is deceived," and each sentence conveys about the same idea; but 
 in Spanish this manner of expressing a passive act or emotion by means 
 of the reflective pronoun is carried to a far greater extent than in English. 
 Thus it can be said in Spanish, en la Gaceta de Filadélfia de ayer se leen 
 las siguentes líneas, " in the Gazette of Philadelphia of yesterday read 
 themselves the following lines," meaning, "in yesterday's Philadelphia 
 Gazette the following lines are (or may be) read." ¿, Cómo se entenderá 
 lo que se dice 1 "how shall-understand itself that which says itself" 
 meaning, "how shall be understood that which is said?" Las ventanas 
 se han cerrado, " the windows have shut themselves" meaning " the win- 
 dows have been shut." " It is believed," "it is said," " the book is open- 
 ed," can be rendered in Spanish by the reflective pronoun, thus, se cree; 
 se dice; se abre el libro; literally, "it-believes itself," "it says itself," 
 " the book opens itself." This peculiar manner of expressing a passive 
 act or emotion must be carefully noted. (See 173 and 173, a). 
 
 EXERCTSE XIX. 
 
 665. Vocabulary. 
 
 Llamar, to call, to name. Llenar, to Jill. 
 
 Doblar, to double, to increase. 
 
 Usar, to use. 
 
 Creer, to believe, to think. 
 
 Abrir, to open. 
 
 Clamor, noise, clamor. 
 
 Humo, smoke. 
 
 Profecía, prophecy. 
 
 Continuar, to continue. 
 Engañar, to deceive. 
 Vender, to sell. 
 Botella, bottle. 
 Escuela, school. 
 Puerta, door. 
 Sitio, siege. 
 
298 
 
 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 Here Spanish is spoken. 
 Ask-ye, and it shall be given to-you. 
 The island was called Melita. 
 The river is (has been) frozen. 
 The meadows have been mowed. 
 
 666. Model sentences. 
 (a.) Aquí se 3 habla 2 Español. 1 
 (6.) Pedid, y se 2 os 3 dará. 1 
 (c) La isla se llamaba Melita. 
 (d.) El río se ha helado, 
 (e.) Se 5 han 3 segado 4 los 1 prados. 2í 
 
 667. In many of the following sentences the nominative will be found 
 placed after the verb (see 666, e), this being a very common order of con- 
 struction in Spanish, especially in sentences in which se, with the active 
 verb, is used in place of the passive verb. 
 
 668. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 Esta muger se llama (664) María. Aquí (639) se 
 habla el Ingles. Se cree. Llamad, y se os abrirá. Este 
 vino se vende á (378) tres pesos (623) la (234) botella. 
 Se dobla el clamor. Se enagaña Y. ¿ Se usan plumas de 
 oro? ¿Qué libros se usan en esa escuela? La botella se 
 llenará de (with) vino. Las botellas se llenarán de (399) 
 agua. La casa se llenará de (399) humo. Se llenó toda 
 la cuidad de (399) humo. Se abrirán las puertas. Aquí 
 se habla el Frances. Se cumple la profecía. Se abrirá 
 la puerte. La cuidad se quemó (660). Las casas se que- 
 maron. Se abrió el libro. Aquí se venden libros. Este 
 vino se vende á (378) dos pesos la (234) botella. Se 
 cumplen las profecías. Se continuará la carta. Este 
 hombre se llama Pedro. Se abrieron todas las puertas. 
 Se continuarán esas cartas. Se doblará el clamor. Se 
 engañan los jueces. Esa profecía se ha cumplido. Se ha 
 engañado Vmd. Se habla de un sitio. Se ha levantado 
 (656) el sitio. ¿Se usan sombreros de seda? Las casas 
 se llenaron de (399) humo. 
 
 669. English to be translated into Spanish. 
 
 This woman is called (173 ; 173, a) Mary. Here the 
 
 * It must be remembered that the literal rendering of these model sen- 
 tences would be, " here speaks itself Spanish ;" " ask-ye, and to-you (os) 
 it-shall give itself;'" " the island called itself Melita ;" " the river has fro- 
 zen itself ?' " the meadows have mowed themselves." 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 299 
 
 French (667) is spoken. It is-believed (664). Knock 
 {llamad), and it shall be opened to-you. This wine is sold 
 at (a) three dollars a (la) bottle. The clamor (667) is 
 doubled. You ( V.) are deceived (667). Are gold pens 
 (97, a) used (667) ? What books are used in that school ? 
 The bottle will be filled with (de) wine. The bottles will 
 be filled with (de) water. The house will be filled with 
 (399) smoke. All the city (667) will be filled with (399) 
 smoke. The doors (667) will be opened. Here the Eng- 
 lish (667) is spoken. The prophecy (667) is fulfilled. 
 The door (667) will be opened. The city is burned (perf. 
 def.). The houses are burned. The book (667) is open- 
 ed (perf. def). Here books (667) are sold (pres.). This 
 wine is sold at (378) two dollars a (234) bottle. The pro- 
 phecies (667) are fulfilled (pres.). The letter (667) will 
 be continued. This man is called Peter. All the gates 
 (667) were opened (perf. def). Those letters (667) will 
 be continued. The clamor (667) will be doubled. The 
 judges (667) are deceived. This prophecy has been ful- 
 filled. You ( Vmd. ; 667) have been deceived. It is 
 spoken of a siege.* The siege (667) has been raised 
 (656). Are silk hats (97, a) used (667) ? The houses 
 were filled (perf. def.) with smoke. Those prophecies 
 have been fulfilled. 
 
 SECTION SEVENTEENTH. 
 
 670. One of the most important rules in Spanish syntax is that by 
 which a noun in the objective case, if it be a person, or inanimate thing 
 personified, and the direct object of a verb, is to be preceded by the pre- 
 position á. Thus, "John loves his brother" would be in Spanish, 
 Juan ama á su hermano^ and not Juan ama su hermano; " Peter slew 
 the barber " would be, Pedro mato al barbero,i and not Pedro mató el 
 
 * In English, it would be better to say, " a siege is spoken of." In 
 Spanish it can be said, hablan de un sitio, " they (i. e., people) speak of 
 a siege." , li_i.ii 
 
 t Literally, u John loves to his brother;" "Peter slew io-the barber. 
 
300 EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 barbero; " I love those who love me," would be, amo á los que me aman, 
 and not amo los que me aman. These sentences can be altered in con- 
 struction, as mentioned in paragraph 575, without any change of mean- 
 ing. Of course the preposition is not to be translated In English, but 
 must always be used in Spanish before nouns in the objective case, gov- 
 erned by an active verb, if these nouns express a rational being or per- 
 sonified object,* 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 671. Vocabulary. 
 
 Honrar, to honor. 
 Temer, to fear. 
 Robar, to rob. 
 Recompensar, to reward. 
 Deudor, debtor. 
 
 Sanar, to heal, to cure. 
 Perdonar, to forgive, to pardon, 
 Matar, to slay, to kill. 
 Visitar, to visit. 
 Noche (í em.) ¡night. 
 
 He-loves our nation. 
 
 Cain slew his brother AbeL 
 
 I-saw a woman. 
 
 He saw nobody, 
 
 I-love him like a brother. 
 
 672. Model sentences, 
 (a.) Ama a nuestra nación. 
 (&.) Cain mató á su hermano Abel, 
 (c.) Vi á una muger. 
 (d.) A nadie vio. 
 (e.) Le amo como á un hermano. 
 
 673. Spanish to be translated into English. 
 
 El padre ama á sus hijos. Honramos al juez. El mé- 
 dico sana á los enfermos. Este juez no teme á Dios. 
 Perdonamos á nuestros deudores. Yo perdono á mis deu- 
 dores. Dios ama á los que son buenos. Llamaron á los 
 pintores. Ella teme al Americano. El médico sanará á 
 muchos enfermos. El juez perdonó al hombre que robó 
 al padre de Pedro. Robaron á la muger á quien (125) 
 recompensamos. Mi criado mató á su padre. Honrad á 
 vuestros padres (parents). Perdoné á todos mis deudores. 
 Te amo como (like) á un padre. Pedro me ama como á 
 un hermano. Las señoras recompensarán á sus criadas. 
 Visitaremos al presidente esta noche (to-night). Visitare- 
 mos á algunos de mis amigos esta noche. Recompensaré 
 al que me honra. La madre ama á sus hijas. Juan mató 
 á su amigo. 
 
 * This rule applies only to rational beings or personified objects; thus 
 we can not say, amo á la verdad, but amo la verdad, " I love the truth." 
 
EXERCISES FOR TRANSLATION. 301 
 
 674. English to be translated in 
 
 The mother loves (670) her daughters. We-honor the 
 judge. The physician heals the sick (102). This judge 
 fears not God. We-pardon our debtors. I forgive my 
 debtors. God loves those who are good. They-called the 
 painters. She fears the American. The physician will- 
 heal many sick [persons.'] The judge pardoned the man 
 who robbed Peter's father. They robbed the woman 
 whom (125) we rewarded. My male-servant slew his 
 father. Honor-ye your parents ( padres). T-pardoned all 
 my debtors. I-love thee (113) like [como) a father. Peter 
 loves me like a brother. The ladies will-reward their 
 female-servants. We-will-visit the president this night. 
 We-will-visit some of my friends to-night [esta noche). I 
 will reward him who honors me. The father loves his 
 sons. John killed his friend. 
 
PART V. 
 
 SPA'NISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 FIRST SECTION. 
 
 Remark. — This section of the Reading Lessons consists of easy sen- 
 tences. The words selected are among those in general use, and should 
 be repeated by the learner till he can recall them and their signification 
 at any moment, and thus be enabled to write the exercises at the close 
 of the section. 
 
 The verbs are printed in italics. The learner should endeavor to find 
 out what verbs are irregular, and this he can easily do by referring to the 
 alphabetical list (see 221, a) of irregular, defective, and impersonal verbs 
 of the three conjugations.* Every verb not found in this list is regular. 
 
 The meaning of the words will be found in the vocabulary at the end 
 of the volume. Every word which is varied by inflection is to be sought 
 in its first form ; that is, a noun plural must be reduced to its singular 
 form ; an adjective to its masculine form, or if it be plural and feminine, 
 to its singular, or singular masculine. Thus, if the word be riquísimas, 
 it will be perceived from the termination, isimas, that it is a superlative 
 form of the feminine plural of some adjective ; reducing it then to the 
 masculine singular, it will be riquísimo, and then removing its superla- 
 tive ending, and remembering the change which takes place in adjectives 
 that end with co (see 108, b), it will be found that riquísimas is derived 
 from rico. And so with other parts of speech that are subject to inflec- 
 tion. All the persons of verbs used in this First Section will be found 
 in the Vocabulary. 
 
 Reference will frequently be made to some preceding paragraph of this 
 work, and the pupil being thus obliged to refer to the specific rules so 
 often, can hardly fail to learn them even without much seeming effort. 
 
 The learner is expected to begin to translate these Reading Lessons as 
 soon as he shall have proceeded to page 86, in Part II. He can be com- 
 mitting to memory at the same time the irregular verbs. 
 
 * In this list the learner will find a reference either to the conjugation 
 of the verb itself, or to the conjugation of one of similar irregularities. 
 Thus the verb preferir, to prefer, is irregular, and by seeking it in the list 
 (under the third conjugation, as it ends in ir) it will be seen that it is to 
 be conjugated like sentir (see 209). 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 303 
 
 I. SHORT SENTENCES. 
 
 El virtuoso 1 , ama á 2 Dios. El mundo abunda en lazos, 
 dificultades y peligros. Debemos* sufrir con paciencia las 
 incomodades de esta vida. Los males de esta vida son mo- 
 mentáneos ; los bienes de la otra eternos. La 4 ambición 
 aumenta los muchos trabajos, y disminuye 5 los pocos place- 
 res que se hallan* en el mundo. Las perezosos 1 son inútiles 
 á la 4 sociedad. Cada uno tiene sus 7 quehaceres. Una 
 ciudad que esta 8 puesta sobre un monte, no se 9 puede 10 
 esconder. Nadie es sin pecado. El conocimiento, que ten- 
 emos de Dios en esta vida, es imperfecta. La 4 sabiduría y 
 la 4 modestia son tan apreciable como la 4 locura y la 4 desfa- 
 chatez son despreciable. Lo que 11 es propio en uno, es im- 
 propio en otro. Dios recompensará á 2 los buenos 1 y casti- 
 gará á 2 los malos. 1 Los mansos 1 heredarán la tierra. 
 
 El que 12 no es agradecido, no puede 10 ser bueno. Si 
 alguna virtud puede 10 neutralizar los efectos de la 4 sober- 
 bia, es ciertamente la 4 humilidad. Cada hora es un paso 
 hacia el túmulo. Lo bueno 13 es perferible á lo 13 hermoso. 
 El hombre virtuoso 14 es amado de 15 todos. 16 Los verdade- 
 ros amigos deben* amarse y servirse unos á otros. 17 La 4 
 paciencia y la 4 diligencia remueven montañas. No es oro 
 todo lo que 1 * reluce. Nadie puede 10 dar mas de 19 lo que 
 tiene. Todo' 20 tiene fin 21 en este mundo. Ninguno puede 10 
 servir á 2 dos señores. Todo 22 árbol bueno 14 lleva buenos 
 
 I. — l See 102. — 2 See 670. — z Deber, before an infinitive, means " ought." 
 See 316, c; and 326, /.— * See 628.-^ See 165.— « Se hallen, "are 
 found" See 173. — 7 Sus here means " his own." — 8 See 335, b. — 9 See 
 116, a. Esconderse, " to hide itself" or passively, "tobe hidden." See 
 173. — 10 Puede, before an infinitive, is to be rendered " can." — n See 125, 
 6.— '2 See 125, c.—& See 263, a.—" See 264.— " See 323, 6.—" Todos, 
 "every body." See 133. — l7 Amarse y servirse unos á otros, "to love 
 themselves and serve themselves some to others," that is, " to love and 
 serve one another." — 18 See 131. — 19 See 270. — 20 Todo, "every thing.'' 
 See 133. — 21 j F^ti, "an end." See 242.— 2 2 Todo, used with a noun in 
 the singular, generally means " every." See 133. 
 
304 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 frutos, y el mal 23 árbol lleva malos frutos. El que 12 siembre 
 poco, cogerá poco. Para 24 coger, es necesario sembrar. La 4 
 ira convierte al 2 hombre en una fiera. Una burla picante 14 
 es la ponzoña de la 4 amistad. El momento actual 14 es el 
 único 25 que nos 26 pertenece. El que 12 es 27 mal hijo 6 herma- 
 no malévolo, jamás merece el nombre de amigo. Si los 
 malos 1 se unen 6 para 24 hacer mal, 28 ¿porqué no se reunirán 6 
 los buenos 29 para 24 obrar bien I 30 
 
 II. SPANISH AND ENGLISH. 
 
 I Habla} Y. Español % % Hablólo 3 un poco. ¿ Lo 4 en- 
 tie?ide l ese caballero I s No lo 4 entiende. 1 Algo 5 lo 4 entiendo 
 y hablo. Es 7 una lengua muy útil y hermosa. La pro- 
 nunciación del Español es mucho mas fácil que la 8 del In- 
 gles, i Habla Y. Ingles ? Mas entiendo de 9 lo que hablo. 
 La lengua inglesa es muy dificultosa para los Españoles, 
 l Me 10 habla Y. % Hable 11 Y. clara 12 y distintamente. 12 No 
 entiendo bien 13 el Español. No entiendo lo que 14 V. dice, 
 
 III. THE WEATHER. 
 
 i Qué tal 1 tiempo 2 hace ? 3 Hace 3 un tiempo hermosísimo. 
 I Ha cambiado el viento P El viento ha caiclo. El tiem- 
 po 2 amenaza lluvia. El cielo está 5 nublado. ¿ Oye Y. el 
 trueno? Está 6 granizando. Empieza á 7 nevar. Hace 3 
 mucho viento. El tiempo 2 se despeja. 8 La nieve se der- 
 
 23 See 101. — 24 See 326, c— 25 U'nico, u only one."— ™ Nos, " to-us." 
 See 114 and 113.— 27 See 243.— ^ Mal is here a noun.— 29 See 575.— 
 30 Bien is here a noun. 
 
 II. — 1 See 611. — 2 Español is an adjective, and agrees with idioma 
 (mase.) understood.— 3 See 113, a.— * See 113 and 117— 5 See 57 5. — 6 Algo, 
 " somewhat" "some little." — 7 Es, " it-is." See 220. — 8 See 616. — 9 See 
 270.— 10 See 114 and 113 ; also 611.— " See 309,/.— J 2 See 354, a.— « See 
 351, 6.— i* See 125, b. 
 
 III. — 1 Qué tal, " what sort of" "how." See 478, a. — ^Tiempo, "wea- 
 ther."—* See 218, c— * See 575.— s See 335.-6 See 335, c— i See 326, a. 
 8 S¿ despeja, "clears up." See 284, e. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 305 
 
 rite? La nieve que cayó 10 esta mañana, ha suavizado 
 mucho 11 el tiempo. Hace 3 buen 12 tiempo. 2 Hace 3 mal 12 
 tiempo. Relampaguea. 13 Truena} 3 Toda el día lloverá} 3 
 
 IV.- 
 
 -THE SEASONS. 
 
 La 1 primavera es la estación • mas 2 agradable. La 1 natu- 
 raleza sónrie en primavera. Toda la 1 naturaleza se anima* 
 La estación es muy adelantada. Temo que tengamos un 
 verano muy caluroso este año. La cosecha será muy 
 abundante. El otoño es la estación de los frutos. Los 
 dias se han acortado 3 mucho. 4 Las hojas amarillean y em- 
 piezan á 5 caer. Las mañanas y las tardes son ya frías. 
 Las noches son largas. Se acerca? el invierno. 7 No me 
 gusta? el invierno. 7 Este invierno es muy frío. 
 
 Y.- — THE COUNTRY. 
 
 Mañana 1 salgo para 2 ir al campo. El campo tiene para 
 mí un atractivo singular. 3 Mucho 4 sentiría 5 jo pasar en la 
 ciudad la estación mas 6 hermosa del año. ¡ Cuan 7 puro y 
 saludable es el aire del campo ! Ese paseo es muy agrada- 
 ble. Ahora vayamos por este caminito. Sentémonos 8 so- 
 bre la yerba. Entremos 9 en este bosque. Vamos 10 por 
 este sendero ; es el camino mas 6 corto para 2 volver á 
 casa. 11 Veremos una cascada y un lago. ¿ No oye V. la 
 dulce melodía de las aves 1 Estos árboles hacen bella 
 sombra. 
 
 9 See 234, e.— 10 See 165.— » See 351.— 12 See 101.— 13 See 216. 
 
 IV.— i See 628.-2 See 268.— 3 See 173.— 4 See 351.— 5 See 326, a.— 
 6 See 284, e. — 7 See 575. — 8 This means literally, "winter pleases me 
 not," and is equivalent to " I do not like winter," in English. See 344 
 and 4S5. 
 
 V.— 1 Mañana, " to-morrow:'— 2 See 326, c— 3 See 264.— 4 See 351.— ■ 
 s Sentiría yo, " I should-be sorry." See 315 and 526.— 6 See 268.— » See 
 478, a.— s See 309, 6.-9 See 309, /.— 10 See 204.— » A' casa, "at home," 
 or "home" See 240. 
 
 25* 
 
306 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 VI. A JOURNEY. 
 
 I Qué especie de camino hay 1 de aquí á Nueva- York % 
 El camino es casi impractable en esta estación. ¿ Se hal- 
 lan? buenas posadas en el camino ? Son en general muy 
 malas. ¿ Qué carruage puedo tomar de aquí á Nueva-York % 
 Puede V. 3 ir por el camino de hierro, 4 ó por el barco de 
 vapor. 5 Puede Y. 3 tomar el correo. Prefiero viajar por el 
 ferro-carril. 4 Prefiero viajar por la diligencia. ¿ Cuánto 
 se paga 6 por 7 asiento ? No llevaré mas que 8 una maleta. 
 ¿ i?5 seguro el camino ? 9 Sí, señor ; es muy frecuentado. 
 
 I Cuántos dias se necesitan 10 para 11 hacer el viaje ? ¿ JZ^y 1 
 en el camino ciudades notables ? 12 ¿ Es ancho ó angosto 
 el camino P 
 
 VIL— MISCELLANEOUS SENTENCES. 
 
 Acostumbraos 1 á 2 imitar las acciones de los virtuosos. 
 Nunca envidiéis 3 la dicha agena. 4 Siempre debes 19 aliviar 19 
 al 5 infortunado. No levantarás falso testimonio contra tu 
 prójimo. Contempla 6 á 7 esos hombres sublimes 8 cuya con- 
 ducta es la mejor 9 prueba de la grandeza moral 8 del género 
 humano, 8 y procura imitarlos. 1 Si puedes cultivar 19 tu inge- 
 nio- y no lo 10 haces, faltas á 11 un deber sagrado. 8 En todos 
 tus estudios trata de 12 unir á un discernimiento tranquilo 3 
 una grande penetración, la 13 paciencia para la 13 análisis y 
 
 VI.— 1 See 218.— 2 See 173.— 3 See 575.— * El camino de hierro, liter- 
 ally " the road of iron," that is, " the rail-road" " El ferro-carril " also 
 means "the rail-way." — 5 Barco de vapor, "boat of steam" (see 97, a), 
 that is, " steam-boat." Vapor is also often used for " steamer " or " steam- 
 boat." — 6 Sepaga, " is paid," or, "is to be paid." See 173. — 7 See 234, 
 a. — 8 Masque, "more than." No mas que, " no more than," "only." — ■ 
 9 ¿ Es el camino seguro ? is the order in which these words are to be 
 translated. See 575.— 10 See 173.— " See 326, c.—& See 264. 
 
 VII.— 1 See 116 and 116, 6.-2 See 326, a.— 3 See 309, a.— 4 See 134, 
 c. — 5 See 670. — 6 Contempla is in the imperative mood, 2d pers. sing. — ■ 
 7 See 670.— 8 See 264.-9 See 265 and 265, a.— 10 See 287 and 287, a.— 
 
 II Faltar á, " to fail in." — 12 Tratar de, "to aira at" "to manage to." 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 307 
 
 la 13 constancia en la 13 síntesis. La 13 sociedad sería 1 * menos 
 viciosa si cada cual enfrenase 15 su desarreglada ambición y 
 sus inquietudes. Sé 16 liberal en daní todo género de asis- 
 tencia al 13 que la necesita. Si quieres ser 19 justo, no aborrez- 
 cas á 7 nadie. 20 
 
 Remark. — After the learner shall have carefully translated the preced- 
 ing Lessons, and examined the rules of Syntax and construction referred 
 to in the. notes, he should again translate all the Lessons by writing each 
 sentence in good English, enclosing the references to rules in parenthe- 
 ses. Then, without looking at the Spanish Reading Lessons, he should 
 endeavor to re-translate his English written sentences into Spanish, 
 comparing and correcting only with the Reading Lessons after the whole 
 Section is thus translated and re-translated. The following exercise, 
 taken from sentences in the First Reading Lesson, will indicate the 
 manner in which he should form his English translation. 
 
 exercise. — To be translated into Spanish. 
 
 The virtuous man (102) loves God (670). The world abounds in 
 snares, difficulties, and dangers. We ought (note 3, Lesson I.) to (326, 
 f ) suffer with patience the inconveniences of this life. What (125, b) is 
 proper in one is improper in another. Nobody is without sin. The 
 idle (102) are useless to society (628). Every one has his own business 
 (quehaceres). A city that is (335, b) placed upon a mountain can (puede) 
 not be hid (116, a ; 173). God will reward (670) the good (102) and will 
 punish (670) the wicked (102). Ambition (628) augments the many 
 troubles (trabajos) ; diminishes (165) the few pleasures which are found . 
 (173) in the world. The meek (102) shall inherit the earth. Every (132) 
 hour is a step towards the tomb. The good (263, a) is preferable to the 
 beautiful (263, a). 
 
 SECOND SECTION. 
 
 Remark. — The Reading Lessons in this Section contain sentences 
 somewhat more complicated than those in the former Section. The 
 verbs are printed in italics. The persons of verbs used in this Section 
 will be found in the Vocabulary. Care has been taken to select such 
 reading matter as may be comparatively easy of translation, and at the 
 same time useful in illustrating many idiomatical expressions. 
 
 13 See 623.—» See 315. — 1 -5 See 314. — ^ Sé, "be-thou." See Remark, 
 page 44. — 17 En dar, " in-giring." See 298, a, and 327. — 18 At que, "io 
 Jdm who." See 129, b, and 291, a.— 1 » See 326,/.—^° See 352, a. 
 
308 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 VIII. GAINING AND LOSING. 
 
 Un escritor francés 1 decía? que solamente se había visto® 
 arruinado dos veces 4 en su vida ; la primera fué cuando 
 perdió un pleito, y la segunda cuando ganó otro. 
 
 IX. A GOOD REASON FOR WRITING A LONG LETTER. 
 
 Escribió un amigo 1 á otro una carta muy estensa, y al 
 concluir 12 le 3 decía : " No estrañes 4 que te escriba 5 una carta 
 tan larga, porque no he tenido 6 tiempo para hacerla, 7 mas 
 corta." 
 
 X. REWARDING A DULL WRITER. 
 
 Una rica señora que ha muerto 1 recientemente en Lon- 
 dres, legó en su testamento mil 2 libras esterlines á un 
 autor ingles, 3 para recompensar las horas de sueño que en 
 momentos de desvelo la 4 habían proporcionado 5 sus obras. 
 
 XI. EARLY RISING. 
 
 Un yanki ha hecho 1 el cálculo de lo que vale 2 levantarse? 
 temprano. " En vez 4 de dormir 5 hasta las ocho," 6 dice el 
 calculista, levántese 7 un hombre á las seis 6 de la mañana, y 
 si durante cuarenta años hace 8 esto mismo, 9 ganará viente 
 mil horas, lo cual 10 será equivalente á un aumento de diez 
 años de vida, que podría emplear un hombre 11 en estudios 
 muy importantes. 
 
 VIII.— i See 264.-2 See 302.— 3 Se había visto, "he had seen himself." 
 See 284 and 305. — 4 Dos veces, "two times" i. e., "twice." Veces is the 
 plural of vez. See 95, a. 
 
 IX. — x See 575.— 2 Al concluir, "on closing;" see 298, b.— 3 Le, "to- 
 him." See 114, 6.-4 See 309 a.s See 311.— 6 See 160.— 7 Hacerla, " to 
 make it." La refers to carta. See 116. 
 
 X. — l Ha muerto, "has died," or in better English, "died." — 2 See 
 248.-3 See 264.-4 La, "her." See 114, a.— 5 See 305.— * See 575. 
 
 XI. — 1 Ha hecho, "has made." — 2 Vale, "it avails." — 3 s ee 665.— 4 En 
 vez, "instead." — 5 See 327. — 6 See 280. — 7 Levántese un hombre, "let a 
 man rise." See 665j and 309,/. — 8 Hace, " does." — 9 Esto mismo, " this 
 same," "the same."— 10 See 124, and 117.— " See 575. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 309 
 
 XII. A SINGULAR EDICT. 
 
 El emperador de todas las Rusias ha mandado publicar 
 recientemente un edicto en el cual 1 se exige 1 de todos los 
 funcionarios públicos 3 que posean* una fortuna, manifiestan? 
 esplicitamente de que manera 6 la 7 han obtenido. Si esto 8 se 
 hiciera 9 en todas partes — ¡ Dios nos asista ! w 
 
 XIII. PERIODICALS IN THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 En ningún 1 pais del mundo se publican 2 tantos periódicos 
 ni en tantos idiomas distintos 3 como en los Estados Uni- 
 dos. Esto es el efecto de la ilimitada libertad que goza la 
 imprenta. 4 En esta República se han publicado 2 periódicos 
 nacionales, 3 ingleses, 3 franceses, 3 españoles, 3 italianos, 3 ale- 
 manes ; 3 y en la actualidad se ha establecido 2 un noruego. 4 
 
 XIV.- 
 
 -SAGACITY OF A DOG. 
 
 El perro de un mercader en las inmediaciones de Vera- 
 Cruz, recibió dias pasados 1 una herida en una oreja. Su 
 dueño le llevó inmediatamente á casa 2 de un químico que 
 le aplicó un remedio, vendándola en seguida. 4 Tres dias 5 
 se repitió 6 la misma operación, pero el cuarto, viendo el 
 perro 7 que su amo tardaba algo mas de lo regular 8 en ir 9 á 
 llevarle, se fué solo á la botica, saltó sobre el mostrador y 
 allí estuvo hasta que se le hizo 6 la operación necesaria, y 
 sin aguardar 9 mas á 10 que su amo le acompañase^- continuó 
 
 XII.— 1 See 124.— 2 See 173.— 3 See 264.-4 See 311, 6.-5 See 314, 
 a. — 6 De que manera, " in what manner.'" — 7 La, " it" referring to for- 
 tuna.— - 8 See 128, a.— 9 See 173 and 316.— 10 See 309, / 
 ^XIII.— * See 101.— 2 See 173.— 3 See 264.-4 See 575. 
 
 XIV. — l Dias pasados, " in days past," i. e., "some days ago." — 2 See 
 240. — 3 La refers to oreja. See 116. — * En seguida, "in the sequel;" 
 " afterward." — 5 Tres dias "for three days." The preposition is not 
 generally used in such cases, in Spanish. — 6 See 173. — 7 In translating, 
 the construction would be el perro viendo. — 8 Algo mas de lo regular, 
 "somewhat more (longer) than what is proper." See 263, a, and 270. — 
 9 See 327.— 10 See 554.— " See 314. 
 
310 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 repitiendo sus visitas al boticario hasta que 12 quedó comple- 
 tamente curado. 
 
 XV. THALES' SAGE ANSWERS. 
 
 Tháles Milésio 1 uno de los siete sabios 2 de Grecia, pre- 
 guntado 3 cual era la cosa mas antigua, 4 respondió que era 5 
 Dios, porque Dios ha siempre sido ; 6 — cual era la mas bella, 7 
 respondió que el mundo, 8 porque era la obra de Dios ; — cual 
 la mas grande, respondió, que el espacio, 8 que comprende 
 todo ; 9 — cual la mejor ; 10 la virtud, dijo él, porque sin ella 
 nada se puede decir 11 ni hacer de bueno ; 12 — cual la mas 
 fácil ; la 13 de dar u consejos á otro ; — cual la mas difícil, 
 la 13 de conocerse 15 á sí mismo, 16 dijo él. 
 
 XVI. SIMPLICITY OF A CHILD. 
 
 " Mamá, dame 1 un cuarto," dijo una niña que entro pre- 
 cipidamente en la sala de una casa donde nos hallábamos' 2 
 dias pasados. 3 — " ¿ Para qué ?" preguntó la madre. 4 — " Para 
 dárselo 5 á un niño que está bailando 6 allí en la calle mien- 
 tras su padre toca 7 la música en un cajón." — "¿ Cómo sabes 
 que es su padre el que toca 1 ? " — " Lo sé, 8 porque los dos se 
 parecen 9 mucho. 10 Ven mamá, ven al balcón y lo verásP 
 
 12 See 553. 
 
 XV. — 1 Milésio, "the Milesian." See 237. — 2 Sabios, "wise men.'" 
 "sages." See 102. — 3 Preguntado, "being asked." See 3U0, c. — 4 See 
 268. — 5 Era, "it was." — 6 Ha sido, "has been," "has existed." — 7 Bella 
 agrees with cosa understood. — 8 Era is understood. — 9 Todo, " every 
 thing." — 10 See 265, a. — n Nada se puede decir ni hacer de bueno, 
 " nothing good can be said nor done." See 116, a; and 173. — 12 See 134, 
 b. — 13 La, "that" referring to cosa. See 616. — 14 De dar, " of giving." 
 See 327. — 15 De conocerse, " of knowing one's self." See 327. — ,6 S^ 
 285, 6j and 286. Literally, " of knowing one's self to himself;" á sí mis- 
 mo being redundant in English. 
 
 XVI.— i Dame, "give me." See 116.— 2 See 284, a.— 3 See XIV., 
 note 1. — 4 See 575. — 5 Dárselo, "to give him it." See 116, and 284, f 
 Se would be considered redundant in English, as the object (á un niño) 
 follows the verb. See 285, c— « See 335, c.—i See 512.— 8 ho sé, "1 
 know it" See 192.— 9 See 464, and 284. — 1° See 351. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 311 
 
 ; Salimos á ver al 11 hombre con su hijo, y era nada menos 
 que un Italiano con su órgano y su mono ! 
 
 XVII. THE KINGS OF FORMER TIMES. 
 
 Todo 1 muda con el tiempo : 2 unas cosas para bien y otras 
 para mal. Los Reyes eran en siglos pasados 3 muy distin- 
 tos de lo que son ahora. En Aragón, cuando regía el 
 fuero de Sobrarve, al tiempo de investirse? un monarca con 
 la autoridad real, 3 y jurado la observancia de la constitu- 
 ción á 3 nombre del pueblo, se le decía 6 : " Nos, 7 que somos 
 mas y valemos mas que vos, 8 os hacemos Rey, si observaredes 9 
 nuestras leyes, y si non, non." Ahora es muy distinto, y 
 sin ser 10 rey, ni 11 principe, un simple gobernador de Colo- 
 nias, grita al pueblo desde su coche : " Canalla vil, 3 quitá- 
 os 12 el sombrero cuando yo paso, que 13 soy mejor que todos 
 vosotros y debéis obedecerme y besar al polvo que pisan mis 
 
 XVIII. — an irishman's conjecture. 
 
 Dias pasados 1 examinaba un comerciante 2 los efectos que 
 acaba de 3 recibir, y halló todo 4 en orden y corriente escepto 
 un martillo que faltaba en un casco que estaba bien cerrado. 
 Un criado irlandés 5 que no sabía á que atribuir la falta, 
 dijo rascándose la cabeza 6 : " Vamos, ya sé yo lo que puede 
 ser." ¿ Que es V replicó el comerciante — u Que en la aduana 
 
 u See 325. 
 
 XVII.— i See XV., note 9.-2 See 628.-3 See 264. Also, XIV., 
 note 1. — 4 De investirse un monarca, " of a monarch's being invested." 
 See 327 and 173. — 5 A' nombre de, "in the name of." — 6 Sele decía, "it 
 was said to him." See 173, and 284, d.— 1 See 110, a.— 8 See 110, b.— 
 § Observaredes, an obsolete form, for observaréis. See 224. — 10 See 
 327. — u See 401, d. — l ' 2 Quitaos el sombrero, "take-off to-you the hat." 
 i. e., " take-off your hats." See 116, b, and 122, a.— 13 See 552, b.— » See 
 575. 
 
 XVIII.— i See XIV., note 1.— 2 See 575.-3 Acaba de recibir, "had 
 just received." See 337.— 4 Todo, " every thing." — 5 See 264.— B See 
 122, a.— 7 Es, " is-ü." 
 
Si2 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 no 8 tendrían martillo para 9 abrir el casco y examinarlo, y 
 ¿acarón uno para desclavar la tapa." 
 
 XIX.— THE FOP.CE OF SHAME. 
 
 Una joven irlandesa escribió á su amante pidiéndole una 
 cantidad de dinero, y al pié de la carta añadió la siguiente 
 posdata : " Me dá l tanta vergüenza de pedirte 2 este favor, 
 que mandé 3 al momento 4 en busca del criado que llevó la 
 carta al correo, pero mi hermanito 5 no pudo alcanzarlo* 
 para evitar que la echara 7 en la posta." 
 
 XX. AN ACCOMMODATING WIFE. 
 
 Los papeles de Baltimore han hecho graciosos comenta- 
 rios sobre una escena que llamó la atención general 1 en 
 aquella ciudad á principios del presente mes. Un holan- 
 dés compró un barril de harina, y su muger lo 2 llevó á cues- 
 tas 3 desde el almacén hasta su casa, mientras que 4 el marido 
 iba " muy fresco " detras de ella, fumando su pipa. 
 
 XXI. AN INVENTION OF QUESTIONABLE UTILITY. 
 
 Un yanki acaba de inventar 1 un jabón para afeitar 2 con 
 el uso del cual es innecesaria la navaja, 3 pues asegura que 
 con aplicarlo* á las barbas caen estas 3 al momento. 5 La 
 única dificultad que encuentra un amigo 3 del inventor en 
 adoptw* para su uso el tal 7 jabón es, que juntamente con 
 las barbas arranca 8 el pellejo. 
 
 8 See 626.-9 See 326, c. 
 
 XIX. — x Me dá, "it gives me." — 2 De pedirte, " to ask thee." See 
 326, 6. — 3 Mandé, (í I gave orders." — 4 Al momento, "immediately." — 
 s See 256.-6 l 0; see 287, b, and 116.— ' See 316. 
 
 XX.— 1 See 264.-2 See 287, b, and 113. — 3 A' cuestas, "on her back" 
 or "shoulders." — 4 See 553. 
 
 XXI. — l See 337. — 2 Un jabón para afeitar, " a soap for shaving," i. e., 
 " shaving-soap." See 327.— 3 See 575.-4 See 327, and 287, b — 5 See 
 XIX., note 4. — 6 See 327. — 7 El tal jabón, " the said soap." — 8 Arranca, 
 "it tears off"." 
 
SPANISH READING- LESSONS. 3J3 
 
 Remark.— The Reading Lessons in this Section should now be care- 
 fully translated into English, as directed at the close of the former Sec- 
 tion ; and then afterward re-transiated into Spanish. By this method 
 the "words and their meaning, as well as the phrases, idioms, and forms 
 of construction used in Spanish, will become impressed on the memory 
 of the learner. He should not attempt to translate any of the succeed- 
 ing Reading Lessons till he can readily translate the preceding Lessons 
 from Spanish into English, and then from English into Spanish. 
 
 THIRD SECTION. 
 
 Remark.— -If the learner has carefully read and re-read the preceding 
 Lessons, and examined the rules referred to in the notes, he will have 
 already learned so well many of these same rules, that farther reference 
 to them will seldom be necessary in his future reading. Thus, for in- 
 stance, he must now know that in Spanish an adjective more frequently 
 is placed after, than before, the noun which it qualifies ;— that pronouns 
 of the first-objective easy are placed after, and joined to, infinitives, im- 
 peratives (when not negative) and gerunds; that nouns used in a general 
 or absolute sense take the definite article before them;— that active 
 verbs govern the noun which is the object of the action, with the prepo- 
 sition á, if this noun expresses a rational being, or personified object, etc. 
 
 As the learner is expected, by the time he shall have proceeded thus 
 far, to be able to conjugate the regular, and many of the irregular verbs 
 without difficulty, only the present infinitive of such verbs as may be 
 used hereafter will be given in the Vocabulary at the end of the work. 
 Reference will be made in the notes to such irregularities of verbs as 
 might occasion any difficulty on the part of the pupil. 
 
 All the Lessons of this Section are taken from " Deberes de los 
 Hombhes," a work originally written in Italian, by Silvio Pellico, and 
 translated into Spanish by Manuel Galo de Cuéndias. 
 
 XXII. FILIAL AFFECTION. 
 
 Nuestros primeros y mas 1 naturales amigos son nuestros 
 padres 2 ; ellos 3 son los seres 4 á quien más 5 debemos 5 ; para 
 
 XXII. — l Mas here means " most." The superlative is formed with- 
 out the definite article, when a possessive pronoun precedes mas; thus, 
 es mi mejor amigo, " he is my best friend ;" es nuestro mas cruel enemi- 
 go" he is our most cruel, enemy." — 2 Padres in the plural means "pa- 
 rents."—* See 283, a, latter clause.— 4 Seres is the plural of the noun 
 scr. — 5 Mas, "most." — 6 Debemos, " ?r s oxee." 
 
 27 
 
314 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 con 7 ellos estamos obligados* del 9 modo mas 10 sagrado, 
 á 11 gratitud, respeto, amor, é indulgencia, y á las mas 
 amorosas demostraciones de estos sentimentos. 
 
 Nuestra grande 12 intimidad con las personas que nos 
 tocan de mas cerca, 13 puede acostumbramos fácilmente á 
 tratarlas con indiferencia y sin procurar 14 ' hacer su existen- 
 cia agradable : guárdate 15 de 16 adquirir 14 tamaño defecto. 
 Si quieres ennoblecerte, con precision 17 has de 18 ornar tus 
 acciones y afectos con aquella elegancia y exactitud de que 
 son susceptibles. 
 
 ¡ Triste de aquel 19 que censura la conducta de sus pa- 
 dres 2 ! ¿ Quién compadecerá á 20 un hombre que no es cari- 
 tativo, y falta de indulgencia para con 7 su padre y madre? 
 Sea 21 siempre tu conducta para con 7 ellos un modelo de 
 amenidad, un ejemplo de dulzura : sirva 22 tu vista para 
 consolarles y reanimar su alegría. No lo dudes ; cada 
 acto de indulgencia ó bondad de tu parte, 23 cada palabra 
 de amor salida de 16 tu boca, es una flor que siembras 24 en 
 su camino hacia la tumba, una bendición para tí, pues te 
 bendecirán, y siempre sanciona Dios las bendiciones que 
 un padre ó una madre derraman sobre un hijo recon- 
 ocido. 
 
 7 See 402.— 8 See 322, a.— 9 Del modo, " in a manner."—™ See 263.— 
 11 The meaning of this passage is, " with regard to them we are obligated 
 in a manner most sacred, to gratitude," etc., that is, " under obligations 
 to show gratitude," etc.— 12 See 101, a.— Í3 Tocar de cerca, means " to 
 concern nearly," " to be nearly related," and this clause is to be rendered 
 "with the persons who are most nearly related to-us " (nos). — 14 See 327. — 
 15 When any person of the imperative mood is spelled in the same man- 
 ner as some person of a tense in another mood, care must be taken to 
 judge from the context which mood is meant. Guarda may be found 
 in the 2d pers. of the imperative, or in the 3d pers. of the present indica- 
 tive. Here it is in the imperative. Guárdate, "keep thyself." See 
 284, a. — 16 De, " from."— n Con precision, "with necessity," " necessa- 
 rüy."—K See 339.— w See 407.— 20 See 670.— 21 Sea siempre tu conducta, 
 " let thy conduct always be." See 309, /.— 22 Sirva tu vista, " let thy pres- 
 ence serve." See 309,/.— 23 De tu parte, "on thy part."—^ Siembras 
 irregular from sembrar. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 315 
 
 XXIII. RESPECT FOR OLD AGE. AN ANECDOTE. 
 
 Una de las leyes de la antigua Sparta exigía, que los 
 jóvenes cediesen 1 el paso á los ancianos, se levantasen* cuan- 
 do una persona de edad se acercaba, 3 y que callasen 1 cuando 
 hablaba un mayor. 4 Lo que la ley mandaba en Sparta, 
 mándelo 5 entre nosotros la decencia. 
 
 Tal es la bellaza moral 6 de este obsequio, que aun los 
 que no le practican, sienten 7 dentro de sí gran 8 respeto por 
 los que acostumbran & practicarle, y se hallan como forzados 
 á aplaudirlos. 
 
 Un Ateniense, cubierto de 9 canas y cargado de 9 años, 
 buscaba puesto 10 en los juegos olímpicos 6 ; pero las gradas 
 del anfiteatro estaban llenas y no le 11 hallaba. Unos joven- 
 zuelos 12 de Atenas le hicieron señas de acercarse, 3 y, el 
 anciano cediendo á su invitación, llegó con gran 3 dificultad 
 hasta ellos; mas 13 estos, en vez de 14 acogerle cual debie- 
 ran, 15 se burlaron™ de 17 él. Empujado de una parte á 
 otra, llegó casualmente al 13 sitio ocupado por los Spártanos ; 
 y estos, fieles á las sagradas costumbres de su patria, se 
 levantan™ respetuosamente y le colocan entre sí. Un vivo 
 aplauso se oyó 19 en todo el anfiteatro ; y los mismos 20 
 Atenienses que poco antes 21 habían escarnecido 22 la vejez, 23 
 se hallaron impelidos á estimar á 24 sus generosos 23 émulos. 
 El anciano esclamó : " Los Atenienses conocen las 23 buenas 
 acciones ; los Spártanos las practican." 
 
 XXIII.— 1 See 314.— 2 See 284, e, and 314.— 3 See 234, e.— ■» See 
 575, — 5 Mándelo, etc., " let propriety demand it among us y See 309,/". 
 Lo (it) would be redundant in English. — 6 See 264. — 7 Sienten, irregular 
 from sentir.— 8 See 101, a.— 9 De, " vnffu" See 399.— 10 Puesto, "a 
 place," "a seat." — u he, "it," referring to puesto. — 12 See 256, last 
 clause. — 13 Mas here is a conjunction, meaning " but." See 359. — ■ 
 14 En vez de, "instead of." — 13 Cual debieran, "as they ought." See 
 104, 6, and 316.—" See 2S8, e.— 1 ' See 330.— 1S Al, " at the." See 378.— 
 19 See 173.— 2° See 286, a.— ^ Poco antes, " a little ichile before."— & See 
 305.— 23 See 628.— a* See 670.— ^ See 264, a. 
 
316 SPANISH HEADING LESSONS. 
 XXIV. FRIENDSHIP. 
 
 ¡Bien 1 aventurado el hombre feliz 2 que halla* un digno 
 amigo ! Abandonado á sus propias fuerzas, su virtud /la- 
 queaba, pero el ejemplo y la aprobación del amigo le fortifi- 
 can ; solo, desanimado é 4 inclinado á mil 5 defectos, ignoraba* 
 su fuerza desconociendo su mérito ; pero el aprecio del amigo 
 le realza á sus propios ojos. Mil 5 veces, avergonzado se- 
 cretamente de no poseer el mérito que la indulgencia del 
 amigo le supone, lucha, se vence y llega á 7 conseguirla ; el 
 amigo conoce sus buenas prendas, y su corazón se halla 
 satisfecho; y he aquí, 8 que, gracias 9 á la amistad, avanza 
 á pasos 10 de gigante hacia la perfección 11 un hombre 12 
 que, sin ella, estaba y hubiera estado 13 siempre lejos de 14 
 ser 15 virtuoso. 
 
 XXV. READING AND STUDY. 
 
 Si puedes 1 cultivar tu ingenio, y no lo haces, faltas á 2 un 
 deber sagrado. 3 La instrucción 4 te hará mas capaz, mas 
 digno de honrar 5 á s Dios y de servir 5 á 6 tu patria, mas 
 apto á ser útil á tus amigos y parientes. Aplícate á apren- 
 der cuanto 7 estudies* lo mas 9 profundamente que te 10 sea 
 posible y no pierdas 11 de vista que los estudios superficiales 
 no producen mas que 12 hombres de poco mérito, que, con- 
 
 XXIV.— i See 351, 6.-2 See 264.-3 See 325, a.— 4 See 226, a.—* See 
 248. — 6 Ignoraba, " he-was-ignorant of." — 7 See 341. — 8 He aquí, "be- 
 hold." See 406, a. — 9 Gracias á la amistad, " thanks to friendship ." — 
 
 10 A pasos, "with the steps," or, "at the speed" of a giant. See 331. — 
 
 11 See 628. — 12 Hombre is nominative to avanza. See 575. — 13 See 318, 
 and 318, a.— « Lejos de, "far from."— -« See 327. 
 
 XXV.— 1 Puedes, irregular from poder. See 189. — 2 Faltar 6, means 
 "to fail in."- -3 See 264.— * See 628.-5 See 327.-6 See 325.-7 Cuanto, 
 "as much as," "wtiatever." — 8 See 321, a. — 9 Lo mas, " the most." Lo 
 mas is generally used as the superlative before adverbs. — 10 Te, etc., " to- 
 thee may-be possible." — u No pierdas de vista, "do not lose sight." See 
 309, a. Pierdas is from the irregular verb perder. — 12 Mas que, pre- 
 ceded by no, means " nn more, than" "only." 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 317 
 
 vencidos 1 * interiormente de su nulidad, se reúnen con otros 
 tan 14 despreciables como ellos, para aturdir al 15 mundo 
 gritando que son grandes y que los verdaderamente sabios 
 son pequeños ; de aquí 16 nacen las perpetuas guerras del 
 pedante contra el hombre instruido, y del charlatan sofista 
 contra el verdadero filósofo. 
 
 Si quieres 17 que la lectura te deje 15 impresiones durade- 
 ras, dice 19 Séneca, limítate? á pocos autores que, llenos de 
 sano juicio, nutran tu inteligencia : estar en todas partes es 
 como 21 no estar en ninguna, 22 y el hombre que pasa su 
 vida viajando conocerá muchos posaderos, pero pocos ami- 
 gos. Tal es el caso de 23 ios que leen precipitadamente : 
 leen muchos libros, pero no comprenden ninguno. 22 
 
 Cualquiera que 24 sea la ciencia ó arte á que te aficiones 
 guárdate de 25 un vicio demasiado 26 común, esto es, de ser 5 
 tan 27 esclusivo que desprecies las 28 que no conoces. Las 
 preocupaciones de ciertos poetas contra la prosa, 4 las 29 de 
 los prosadores contra la poesía, 4 las 29 del naturalista contra 
 el metafísico, las 29 del matemático contra el filósofo, no son 
 mas que 12 puerilidades. 
 
 XXVI. SELECTING A PROFESSION. 
 
 Todos los estados, desde el 1 mas sublime hasta el 1 del 
 mas humilde artesano, tienen en sí 2 cierta 3 dulzura y digni- 
 dad ; y basta querer ejercerlos con integridad y practicar las 
 virtudes que cada uno de ellos exige para ser feliz. 
 
 Cuando hayas escogido* prudamente una carrera, no te 
 
 !3 See 300, c— » See 104.— l5 See 325.— 16 De aquí, "henee."—}? Qui- 
 eres, irregular from querer. — 1S Te deje, " may-leave to-thee." — 19 Dice, 
 irregular from decir. — 20 See XXII., note 15. — 21 Es como no estar, etc., 
 "is as (tlte same as) not to be in any" — 22 See 622. — 23 De, "with." — 
 21 See 131, and 311, c. — 25 De, "from." — 26 Demasiado before an adjec- 
 tive means " too." — ~~ See 104, b. — 2S Las, "those" referring to ciencias 
 6 artes. — ~ 9 See 616. 
 
 XXVI.— 1 See 616.— 2 En si, "in themselves."—* See 264, e.— * See 
 317. 
 
 27* 
 
318 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 dejes 5 dominar* por un vano arrepentimiento ni tengas 7 la 
 debilidad de 8 cambiarla,. Todos los caminos de la vida 
 tienen espinas: cuando hayas puesto** el 10 pié en uno 11 
 prosigúele 12 con valor; el 13 mudar es flaqueza. Siempre es 
 bueno persistir escepto en el crimen. 14 Solo el que sigue 15 
 su carrera con constancia puede esperar 15 llegar 1 * algún 17 
 dia á señalarse entre los demás 18 hombres. 
 
 XXVII. OUR AMBITION SHOULD BE RESTRAINED. 
 
 La sociedad 1 sería 2 menos viciosa si cada Gual enfrenase* 
 su desarreglada ambición y sus inquietudes. Empero no 
 por eso 4 debemos ser perezosos ni apáticos, no : la ambición 1 
 puede sernos 5 útil; pero la única 6 que le 7 es permitido al 
 hombre 7 sensato, 8 es la que le hace aspirar á cosas nobles, 
 y esta no es interesada ni envidiosa, y se contenta con lo 9 
 necesario. Consuélate 10 con pensar, 11 que, si no llegas á 
 aquel alto grado que creías merecer]} 2 aun en el que 13 te 
 hallas, eres el mismo 14 hombre y tienes el mismo 14 mérito. 
 Lo 9 esencial no es que nuestro mérito sea recompensado ; lo 
 mas esencial 15 es tener mérito. 
 
 XXVIII. REPENTING OF AND ACKNOWLEDGING OUR FAULTS. 
 
 El hombre que dice ; " mi educación moral 1 ya esta 
 
 5 No te dejes, "do not suffer thyself." See 309, a.— 6 See 327, d. " Suf- 
 fer not thyself to be mastered." — 7 Ni tengas, " nor do-thou have." See 
 309, a. Tengas, irregular from tener. — 8 De, " to." — 9 Puesto, irregular 
 participle, from poner. See 317.-— 10 See 122.— n Uno refers to camino. — 
 12 Prosigue, irregular from proseguir. See 116. — 13 See 251, and 293, b. — 
 w See 628. — ^ Sigue, irreg. from seguir'.—™ See 326,/.— " See 101.— 
 18 Los demas, " the rest of." 
 
 XXVII.— i See 628.-2 See 315.— 3 See 314.— 4 No por eso, "not on 
 this account." — 5 Sernos, "be to-us." — 6 La única; here ambición is un- 
 derstood. — 7 Le, " to-him." Le would be here redundant in English. 
 See 285, b; 285, c— 8 See 264.-9 See 263, a.— w Consuélate, "console 
 thyself" See XXII., note 15. Consuele, irregular from consolar. — n See 
 327. — 12 See 327, c. — 13 Aun en el que, " yet in that in ti'hich." — 14 See 
 286, a. — l5 Lo mas esencial, " that which is most essential." 
 
 XXVIII.- i See 264. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 319 
 
 hecha, 2 mis obras la han corroborado" se engaña. Siempre 
 debemos aprender, siempre regularizar nuestras obras ; tan- 
 to 3 en lo presente como 3 para lo futuro, nuestra virtud 
 debe ser activa y crear cada dia nuevos actos meritorios. 1 
 Continuamente debemos tener presentes 4 nuestros faltas y 
 arrepentimos 5 de ellas. 
 
 Cuando conozcas 6 haber cometido 7 una falta, repárala in- 
 mediatemente y sin rubor ; solamente así se 8 tranquilizará 
 tu conciencia. 9 Sé 10 pronto en reparar 11 tus culpas si no 
 quieres 12 encadenar tu alma al mal 13 con vínculos mas y mas 
 fuertes cada dia y acostumbrarlo, á despreciarse. 111 ¡Des- 
 graciado el hombre que llega á 15 despreciarse interior- 
 mente ! j Desgraciado de 16 él cuando finge que se estima, 
 y al 17 mismo tiempo siente 19 en el fondo de su conciencia 
 el gusano roedor que le acusa ! 
 
 XXIX. — GRATITUDE. 
 
 Si nuestro deber es ser corteses 1 y benéficos 1 con todo el 
 mundo ; si nuestra benevolencia debo ser general ; con 
 cuanta mas razón debemos ?nanifestar estos sentimientos con 
 los que nos 2 han dado 3 pruebas de compasión, amistad ó in- 
 dulgencia. 
 
 Muchos se irritan al ver 4 que el que los favoreció se 5 
 enorgullece, y creen que el envanecimiento del bienhechor 
 basta para dispensarles de 6 ser agradecidos. Si tu bien- 
 hechor se 5 envanece ; si se alaba de 7 haberte hecho favor ; 
 
 2 See 322, a. Hecha, irregular participle from hacer. — 3 See 368, b. — 
 4 Tener presentes, " to have present," " to hare before' us." — 5 See 284, e. — 
 
 6 Conozcas, irreg. from conocer. — - 7 See 327, c- 8 See 173. — 9 See 575. — 
 10 Sé, "be-thou." See Remark after 117.— » See 293, a.— 12 Quieres, 
 irreg. from querer. — ,3 See 629. — ,4 Despreciarse, "to despise itself," re- 
 ferring to alma.— 15 See 341. — ls See 407. — 1 ~ Al mismo tiempo, " at the 
 same time." — 1S Siente, irreg. from sentir. 
 
 XXIX. — l Corteses is in the plural, because it refers to vosotros under- 
 stood. — 2 Nos, "to us."— 3 Han dudo, from dar. See 304. — 4 Al ver, 
 "on seeing," "at seeing." See 293, 6. — s See 284. e. — 6 De, "from." — 
 
 7 De haberle, etc., "Jar having done thee a favor." 
 
320 SPANISH READING LESSONS, 
 
 si no tiene contigo 8 la delicadeza que debiera 9 ; si solo fué 
 generoso por interés, no por eso & te 1& es • permitido á tí 10 el 13 
 condenarle. No, amigo ; al contrario, 13 cubre 13 siis defec- 
 tos con el velo de tu agradecimiento. Acuérdate 14 del 15 
 "beneficio que de G él recibiste y considera que jamas te 18 
 será permitido 17 olvidarle, 13 aun cuando para pagarle, 18 le 
 hayas hecha 19 mil. 20, 
 
 XXX. FAEDON TO ENEM2ES. 
 
 Si te sucediere 1 tener 12 enemigos no te 3 turbes. Nadie 4 
 hay, 5 por 6 humilde, sincero, é 7 inofensivo que- sea 8 que esté 
 libre de envidiosos. Tal es la envidiosa naturaleza de 
 algunos desgraciados, 9 que no pueden vivir sin escarnecer 10 
 degradar y acusar 1 * falsamente á 11 cualquiera que 12 goze 13 
 de 14 alguna reputación. 
 
 Perdona 13 franca 16 " y sinceramente 16 á 11 los infelices 9 
 que te hacen ó quieren 17 hacerte mal : " perdónales 15 no 
 siete veces," dice 13 el Salvador, ;í sino setenta veces siete/ 5 
 esto es 7 sin fin. 
 
 Perdonando una ofensa, se puede cambiar 19 en 20 amigo 
 un enemigo, un perverso en 2(> hombre de bien. 21 \ Cuan 22 
 bello, cuan consolador es tamaño triunfo ! ¡ Cuan 22 supe- 
 rior en grandeza á todas las horribles victorias de la ven- 
 ganza 23 ! Y ¿qué perderás aun cuando tu enemigo 
 
 «See 115, c— 3 Debiera, " he-ought." See 318. See XXVII., note 
 4.— 10 See 285, b.— u See 293, b.— 12 Al contrario, "orí the contrary."— 
 13 Cubre, " cover -thou" " conceal-thou." — 14 Acuérdate, " remember." 
 See 284, e.—^ See 330.— 16 Te, «to-thee."—W See 322.— 1S Le, "it," re- 
 ferring to beneficio. — 10 IJecho, irreg. participle from hacer. See 317.— 20 See 
 248. This clause means, " thou mayestliave donehim a thousand {favors)." 
 
 XXX. — l Si te sucediere, "if it should happen to thee." See 319, and 
 220.— 2 See 325, a.— 3 See 309, a, and 284, a.— 4 See 622.-5 See 213, 
 and 218, a.— 6 See 478.-7 See 226, a.— s See 311, c— 3 See 102.— "> See 
 327.— ii See 325.— ™ See Í3L— " See 311, c— " See 330.-15 See XXII., 
 note 15. — i6 See 354, a. — 1 7 Quieren, irreg. from querer. — 18 Dice, irreg. 
 from decir:— & See 116, a.—" En, "into." See 387.— 2i Horn b re do 
 bien, " a man of worth" " an honest man." — 22 See 473, a. — 23 See 628. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 321 
 
 fu-cse 2i irreconciliable 1 ¿ Puedes perder algo siendo bueno ? 
 ¿ No gozaste 25 la major alegría ? ¿ No te 26 conservaste 23 
 magnánimo, digno de tí y 27 del aprecio de los hombres de 
 bien? 21 
 
 FOURTH SECTION. 
 
 Remark. — None of the words contained in the Lessons of this Sec- 
 tion will have the marked accent placed over the accented vowel, except 
 such as are usually to be found thus marked in Spanish reading-matter. 
 If the learner should meet with any difficulty about the accentuation, he 
 can turn to the Vocabulary, in which he will find every word with the 
 proper syllable accented. 
 
 XXXI. NO HEREDITARY TITLES IX THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 En los Estados Unidos no hay distinción de gerarquías 
 ni noblezas que se hacen tan 1 chocantes en los paises mo- 
 nárquicos. 2 En los Estados Unidos es noble todo 3 hom- 
 bre 4 honrado, laborioso y recto en sus principios, aunque 
 sea el hijo de un zapatero ó de un labrador. Un hombre 
 de honradez, de probidad, y de sentimientos nobles, 2 puede 
 aspirar al primer puesto de la nación lo mismo 5 que á la 
 mano de la primera dama; mientras que un príncipe ó un 
 rey que venga 6 á esta República, aunque sea el primero 
 del 7 mundo, con tal que 8 no se porte noblemente, seria 
 despreciado por todos y no podria 9 obtener ni el aprecio de 
 lo que se llama 10 una persona de la medianía en un pais 
 monárquico. 2 En fin, 11 en pocas partes del mundo se 12 
 aprecian tan 1 justamente las buenas cualidades de un hom- 
 
 21 Fuese, irreg. from ser. See 314, and 321, a.— & See 303.— 25 Te, 
 " thyself." See 284, a.— 27 Digno de tí, " worthy of thysdf." 
 
 XXXI.— 1 See 104, 6.-2 See 264.-3 See I., note 22.— < Hombre is 
 nominative to es.— 5 See 335, and 335, d. — 6 Venga, irreg. from venir. — 
 7 Del mundo, "in the world." See 387, and 337^ c. — 8 Con tal que, " pro- 
 vided that." See 321, c. — 9 Podría, irreg. from poder. Por todos, "by 
 every body." — 10 De lo que se llama, "with which is regarded." Persona 
 is nominative to llama. See 675, and 173. — n En fin, " in fine;" "final- 
 ly."— l* See 173. 
 
322 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 bre como en los Estados Unidos ; pero también en los Es- 
 tados Unidos es 13 donde se señalan 14 mas 15 pronto en púb- 
 lico las faltas 16 ó las bajezas 16 de una persona, .sea 17 quien 
 fuere 18 ; desde el Presidente hasta el último jornalero : 
 todos son iguales en ese caso. 
 
 XXXII. INCREASE OF POPULATION IN THE UNITED STATES. 
 
 Las diferentes estadísticas de la población de esta Re- 
 pública desde 1800 hasta 1848, presentan curiosos datos, 
 que merecen consignarse, 1 á la posteridad. Parecerá 2 incre- 
 dible que en menos de 3 cincuenta anos se 1 haya aumentado 4 
 la población 5 casi cinco 6 tantos mas de 3 lo que era al empe- 
 zar 7 el presente siglo. En 1800 contaban los Estados 
 Unidos 5 con solos 5,305,900. Los que temen no llegar á 
 ver el fin del presente siglo se han ocupado en hacer 8 cálcu- 
 los de proporción para averiguar cual podrá 9 ser el guaris- 
 mo que señalará en 1900 la población de los Estados Uni- 
 dos, y juzgando que haya 10 un aumento semejante, en pro- 
 porción, al que ha habido 11 desde 1790 hasta 1840, se cree 12 
 que dentro de cincuenta y dos años contará esta Repúbli- 
 ca 5 con 96,000,000 de habitantes. El numero es bastante 
 crecido, y tal vez 13 no sería difícil llegase 14 á completarse 1 
 pero nadie sabe como 15 estarcen arreglados las cosas 1 del 
 mundo dentro de cincuenta años, y cuantas revoluciones y 
 guerras ocurrirán que trastornen todos los planes y dividan 
 la Union Americana en muchos pedazos. Por nuestra 
 
 13 Es, " it is." Es should here be translated immediately after pero. — 
 14 See 173.— ls Mas, " ntost"-+™ See 575.— W Sea, "let him be." See 
 309,,/". — 18 Quien fuere, " who he may be." Fuere, irreg. from ser. See 
 319,'and 311, a. 
 
 XXXII.— i See. 173.— 2 Parecerá, "it will-appear."— $ See 270.— 
 4 See 317. — 5 See 575. — 6 Casi cinco tantos mas, " almost five times more" 
 —7 See 293, b.— 8 En hacer, " in making." See 298, a.— 9 Podrá, irreg. 
 from pooler. — w Haya, "there-may-be." See 218, a. — n Ha habido, 
 " there has been." See 218, and 167. — 12 Se cree, "it is believed." See 
 173.— 13 Tal vez, "perhaps."— M See 314, a.— ^ Como, "how." See 
 478, a. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 323 
 
 parte solamente deseamos que pueda 16 conservarse 1 largos 
 años en harmonía, para que nuestros nietos logren ver tiem- 
 pos mas venturosos de 3 los que alcanzaremos nosotros. 5 
 
 XXXIII. THE MAGNETIC TELEGRAPH. 
 
 Hace 1 mucho tiempo 2 que 3 habíamos oído* la especie de 
 que la aplicación de la electricidad á la telegrafía era in- 
 vención de un Español, pero no habíamos podido 5 obtener 
 los datos indispensables, y por este motivo hemos guardado 6 
 silencio hasta ahora que se 7 nos 8 han facilitado los porme- 
 nores 9 de mas 10 importancia. Por ellos vemos pues que 
 Don Francisco Sabrá leyó 11 á fines 12 del siglo pasado en 
 la Academia de Ciencias de Barcelona una memoria sobre 
 la aplicación de la electricidad al telégrafo, y presentó ai 
 mismo tiempo 13 un telégrafo eléctrico de su propia 14 in- 
 vención, el cual 15 /we ensayado, con gran éxito, por Carlos 
 IV. y Fernando VIL en presencia del Príncipe de la Paz, 
 quien trató de 16 ponerlo en planta, y se anunció en la Ga- 
 ceta de Madrid 18 el dia 29 de Noviembre de 1796. Poco 
 tiempo después se propuso 19 el Infante Don Antonio hacer 
 otro mas 20 completo para ponerle en operación, pero las 
 convulsiones políticas 21 le impidieron atender™ debidamente 
 á ello, y así quedó el proyecto, hasta que 23 treinta años 
 después ha venido 24 el Señor Morse 9 á tratar el asunto, 
 hacer algunas mejoras, y poner al fin 25 en prática el invento 
 ensayado en España hace 1 mas de 26 cincuenta años. 
 
 lf s Pueda, u it-may;" from poder; " it," referring to la Union. 
 
 XXXIII.—' See 218, c, and 522.-2 See 522.-3 See 304, b.— * See 
 305. Oído, from oír.— 5 See 305.— 6 Hemos guardado, " we have kept."— 
 7 See 115, 6, and 173.— 8 Nos, " to us." See 114.— 9 See 575.— 10 Mas, 
 «most^—n Leyó, from leer. See 165.— 12 A' fines, "at the end."— 13 Al 
 mismo tiempo, "at the same time."— n Su propia, "his own."—^ See 
 124, c— 16 Tratar de means "to aim to," "to attempt."— 17 See 173 — 
 13 See 391,/.— 19 Propuso, irreg. from proponer. Se propuso, "proposed 
 to-himselfy—w Mas, " more."—* 1 See 264.-22 See 326,/.— 23 See 553.— 
 24 See 304. — 25 Alfin, "at length"—** Hace mas de cincuenta años, "more 
 than fifty years ago." See 436 ; also 270. 
 
324 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 XXXIY. THE FIRST STEAMBOAT. 
 
 No sabernos por qué motivo debe dársele 1 á Fulton toda 
 la gloria y el honor de haber sido 2 el primero que puso 3 en 
 movimiento un buque impelido por el vapor. 4 En los 
 archivos públicos 5 de Barcelona consta 6 por documentos 
 fidedignos 5 que " el día 17 de Junio de 1543, Don Bla;co 
 de Garay ensayó por 7 primera vez en presencia 7 del Empe- 
 rador Carlos V. en Barcelona, y en la corte de Felipe se- 
 gundo, la aplicación del vapor 4 á un pequeño barco constru- 
 ido 3 al efecto." Por los documentos que existen en Barce- 
 lona se vé 9 pues que hace mas de 10 trecientos años que 11 
 Blasco de Garay hizo 12 el ensayo de mover un buque por 
 vapor, logrando su objeto ; y Fulton que mucho tiempo 13 
 después puso 3 en planta el invento se lleva 14, toda la gloria 
 y todo el renombre. Desgraciadamente la España ha per- 
 dido el honor de ser la primera en dos grandes invenciones — ■ 
 la aplicación de la electricidad 4 al telégrafo, y la 15 del 
 vapor 4 á la navegación 4 — por la poca protección que daban 
 los reyes 13 á las ciencias en tiempos que 17 las demás poten- 
 cias Europeas, envidiosas del brillo y engrandecimiento de 
 España, no perdonaban medio alguno 18 para inquietarla, y 
 tener 19 siempre distroÁdos 19 á sus gobernantes. 20 
 
 XXXV.— Washington. [Written Feb. 22, 1847.] 
 
 El dia de hoy 1 es nao de los que jamás deberán borrarse 
 
 XXXIV.— 1 Dársele, "to give itself ¿o- kirn," that is, u to be given to 
 him:' See 116, 115, b, and 173; also 285, c .—^De haber sido, "of 
 having been." See 327.— 3 Puso, irrég. from poner.— ^ See 628.— 5 See 
 264.-6 Consta, "it is evident:'— 7 See 240.— 8 Construido al efecto, 
 "built for the purpose:''— $ Se vé, " it is seen:'' See 173.— 10 Hace mas 
 de, "it-is more than:'' See 522, and 270.— n Que, "since." See 304, 
 c -— 12 Hizo, irreg. from hacer.— ■" Mucho, " long." See 486.— « Se lleva, 
 " gains for himself"— is See 616.— « See 575.—^ Q ue ¡s here used in 
 the sense g£ " when."— l3 See 527, and 134, a.— 1 » See 300, b.— 2° See 
 
 XXXV.- 
 
 1 El dia de hoy, " this very day ;" "io-day" 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 325 
 
 de 2 la memoria de los Norte- Americanos : el 22 de Febre- 
 ro, dia 3 memorable por los recuerdos que nos trae; día 3 
 de ventura y de regocijo, porque en él vio la primera luz 
 el héroe 4 de la libertad Americana ; el padre 5 de su patria : 
 el inmortal Washington. 
 
 Envanézcanse 6 en buen hora 7 las antiguas naciones 8 con 
 sus héroes y sus guerreros, convertidos en 9 crueles tiranos. 
 Ensalce 10 la orgullosa Francia 8 á su ambicioso Napoleón ; 
 pero ¿ hay 11 una sola nación del 12 mundo que haya produ- 
 cido 1 * un héroe como 14 Jorge Washington? 15 Dia de 
 bendición y de ventura fué 16 para los Norte- Americanos 
 aquel 16 en que nació el gran 17 hombre cuyo aniversario 
 recordamos hoy. ¡ Raro portendo de fidelidad patriótica 18 
 fué Washington ! A'ngel salvador 18 que destinó el cielo 19 
 á libertar del 2 yugo opresor 18 de la esclavitud 20 á 21 unos 
 hombres que gemían bajo el rigor de los mismos 22 que de- 
 bieran protejerlos. Nació Washington, y con su nacimiento 
 dio 23 Dios 8 á los oprimidos subditos de la Gran Bretaña 
 un hermano que les indicase** el medio de quebrantar las 
 fuertes cadenas de bárbara opresión. Nació Washington, 
 y ocultándose para siempre el sol sangriento 18 de la esclavi- 
 tud, apareció dulce y apacible la brillante aurora de glori- 
 osa libertad. 
 
 Washington, que desde la edad de veinte años manifes- 
 taba ya su firmeza y lealtad ; Washington, que durante su 
 vida no cesó de 25 afanarse por lograr la felicidad eterna de 
 su amada patria, mudó 23 hoxe ya medio siglo 27 ; pero no 
 
 2 De, "from."— ? See 237.— * See 575.-5 See 237, a.—& See 309,/— 
 7 En buen hora, "at a proper time." — 8 See 575. — 9 En, "into." See 
 3S7.— 10 See 309,/.—" Hay, " is-there?" See 218, and 213, a.— « Del 
 mundo, "in the world." — 13 See 317, and 311, b. — u Como, "like." — 15 Dia, 
 " a day." — 16 Aquel, which follows, is nominative to fuc. — l7 See 101. 
 a.— 13 See 264.—" See 575 ; also 628.-2° See 628.— 2 * See 670.— ^ Los 
 mismos que, "the very ones who." — 23 r)ify irreg. from dar. — 24 See 314, 
 and 314, b. — a De, "from." — 2S Murió, irreg. from morir. — 27 Hace ya 
 medio siglo, " a half a century ago." See 522 ; also 248. 
 23 
 
326 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 ha muerto 26 ni morirá jamás 28 en la memoria de sus hijos 
 y de sus hermanos. En cada corazón amante 29 de la ver- 
 dadera libertad tiene erijido 30 un altar donde se 31 venera el 
 nombre glorioso de Jorge Washington. — E. J. G-omez. 
 
 XXXVI. PEDRO LÓPEZ DE AYALA. 
 
 Este escritor nació en noble cuna, fué señor de Salva- 
 tierra en la provincia de Álava, y descendiente de la nobil- 
 ísima casa de Alaro. Ayala fué canciller mayor de Castilla, 
 y vivió en los reinados de don Pedro el justiciero, llamado 
 el Cruel, de Enrique II., Juan I., y Enrique III. Los 
 cuatro reyes que acabo de nombrar, 1 apreciaron sus talentos 
 como escritor y como político, y su valor como soldado. 
 Sus talentos se mostraron en la dirección y arreglo de los 
 muchos y difíciles negocios que sus soberanos le confiaron, 
 y en sus crónicas de Pedro el Cruel, y otros escritos cuya 
 pureza y elegancia prueban 2 su mucho y sano gusto en la 
 cultura de las letras. Y harto probó su valor en las batallas 
 de Najera y Aljubarrota, en donde fué hecho prisionero. 
 Ayala murió 3 en 1407, de edad de setenta y cinco años, en 
 Calahorra. Los apologistas del rey don Pedro dicen 4, falsa 
 la crónica de Ayala, y que este fué apasionado de 5 don En- 
 rique II. Zurita y otros dicen al contrario, que Ayala fué 
 verdadero, desapasionado y sincero historiador. — M. Galo 
 
 DE CüENDAS. 
 
 XXXVII. MIGUEL DE CERVANTES. 
 
 Nada diré de los escritos ni del mérito literario 1 de Cer- 
 vantes. Dos siglos y todas las naciones de Europa le han 
 
 23 See 352, a , and 352, 6.-29 See 470.-3° See 300, 6. — si s ee 173. 
 
 XXXVI. — í Acabo de nombrar, "I have just, named." See 337. — 
 2 Prueban, irreg. from probar. — 3 Murió, irreg. from morir, — 4 Dicen, 
 irreg. from decir; " call false the chronicles." — 5 See 323, b. 
 
 XXXVII.— i See 264. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 327 
 
 juzgado ya. Solo diré cuatro palabras 2 de su vida, sus 
 desgracias y su miseria. 
 
 Miguel de Cervantes Saavedra nació en Alcalá de He- 
 nares 3 el 9 de Octubre de 1547, de padres nobles, aunque 
 mal 4 acomodados en bienes. Fué discípulo 5 en letras hu- 
 manas 1 del maestro Juan Lopez de Hoyos. Su primera 
 inclinacion/wé por la poesía, 6 en que jamas pudo 7 sobresalir. 
 Casi muerto de 8 hambre en 1563 pasó á Italia, y se acomodó 
 por 9 camarero del cardenal de Aguaviva, y en 1570 se 
 alistó en las banderas del duque de Palliamo, que Pió V. 
 había nombrado general de sus tropas. Cervantes se halló 
 en la desgraciada espedicion de Chipre, y en la batalla de 
 Lepanto que tuvo 10 lugar en 1597 ; en esta última perdió 
 la 11 mano izquierda. Después de haber dejado el ejército 
 papal, 1 se alistó en las tropas de Ñapóles, y sirvió 12 con 
 valor en ellas hasta el año 1575, época 13 en que pasando de 
 Ñapóles á España, fué hecho cautivo por el famoso corsario 
 argelino 1 Arnuante Mami. 
 
 Mientras cautivo en Argel, dio Cervantes 14 innumerables 
 y nada equívocas 15 pruebas de su indómito valor, de su 
 heroica paciencia y aun de su inconcevible osadía. Fué 
 en fin 16 rescatado en 1580 y 1581, volvió á España, en 
 donde 17 de nuevo se obstinó en escribir versos, aunque vio 
 el poco ó ningún suceso de sus tentativas. Casóse en Es- 
 quivia con doña Catalina Palacios de Salazar en 1584, y 
 las dificultades de su posición se aumentaron con este matri- 
 monio. Entonces fué cuando escribió hasta treinta come- 
 
 2 Cuatro palabras, literally "four words" meaning "a word or two;" 
 " a few words." — 3 Alcalá de Henares, the name of a town in Spain. — 
 * Mat, adverb, "badly;" " poorly."— 5 See 243.— 6 See 623.— ~ Pudo, 
 irreg. from poder. — 3 Casi muerto de, "almost dead with." See 330, c. — 
 9 Por, "for a;" "as a." See 385, and 385,/.— 10 Tuvo lugar, "took 
 place." Turo, irreg. from tener. — u See 122. — 12 Sirria, irreg. from ser- 
 vir. — 13 See 24-1. — li See 575. — 15 Nada equívocas, " in no degree equivo- 
 cal." Nada is here an adverb. — 16 En fin, " at length. — 17 En donde, 
 " wherein ;" " where." 
 
328 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 dias que pudieran llamarse malísimas, si el respeto que se 
 debe* 3 al grande ingenio del autor de don Quijote no lo 
 impidiese. 1 * Pocos años después, escribió sus novelas, Per- 
 siles y Sigismunda, y el nunca bastante alabado, leído y 
 admirado don Quijote de la Mancha. El ilustre autor de 
 don Quijote, hoy tan estimado del 20 mundo entero, arras- 
 tró casi hambrienta vida, hasta el 23 de Abril de 1616 en 
 que murióf 1 por Sevilla, Yalladolid, y Madrid en donde 17 
 falleció. Acaso hubiera muerto* 1 de 20 miseria sin los socor- 
 ros del conde de Lemos y de algunos otros, aunque pocos, 
 protectores. Cervantes fué á la vez 23 la gloria de España 
 y el oprobio de su siglo, puesto que 24 este le desconoció y 
 aun le insultó. — M. Galo de Cüendas. 
 
 XXXVIII. EPITOME OF THE HISTOP.Y OF SPAIN. 
 
 La peninsula, llamada España, sola esta contigua al con- 
 tinente de Europa por el lado de Francia, de 1 que la sepa- 
 ran los montes 2 Pirineos. Es abundante en oro, plata, 
 azogue, hierro, piedras, aguas minerales, ganados de esce- 
 lentes calidades, y pescas tan abundantes como deliciosas. 
 Esta feliz situación la hizo 3 objeto 4 de la codicia de los 
 Fenicios y otros pueblos. Los Cartagineses, parte 5 por 
 dolo, parte 5 por fuerza, se establecieron en ella ; y los Ro- 
 manos quisieron** completar su poder y gloria con la conquista 
 de España; pero encontraro?i una resistencia, que pareció tan 
 estraña como terrible á los soberbios dueños de lo restante 7 
 del mundo. Numancia, una sola ciudad, les cosió catorce 
 años de sitio, la pérdida de tres ejércitos, y el desdoro de 
 los famosos generales, hasta que reducidos los Numanti- 
 
 13 Se debe, "owes itself;" " is due." — 19 See 314. Impidiese, irregular 
 from impedir. — 20 See 323, b. — 21 Murió, irreg. from morir. — 22 See 318, 
 and 318. a. — 23 A la vez, " at times." — 24 Puesto que, "since." 
 
 XXXVllI.-^-i De, "from."— 3 See 575.— 3 Hizo, irreg. from hacer.— 
 4 Objeto, "an object." — 5 Parle, "partly." — 6 Quisieron, irreg. from 
 querer. — 7 See 263, a. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 329 
 
 nos 3 a la precision de capitular 9 6 morir 9 por la total ruina 
 de la patria, corto número de vivos, 10 y abundancia de 
 cadáveres en las calles (sin contar 9 los que habían servido 
 de pasto 11 á sus conciudadanos después de 12 concluidos todos 
 sus víveres 12 ) incendiaron sus casas, arrojaron sus mujeres, 
 niños, y ancianos en las llamas, y salieron á morir en el 
 campo raso con las armas en la 13 mano. El grande Esci- 
 pion/«é testigo de la ruina de Numancia; pues no puede 
 llamarse propiamente conquistador déla ciudad: siendo H 
 de notar, que Luculo, encargado de 15 levantar 9 un ejército 
 para aquella espedicion, no halló en la juventud romana 
 reclutas que 16 llevar, hasta que el mismo 17 Escipion se alistó 
 para animaila. 13 
 
 Si los Romanos conocieron el valor de los Españoles como 
 enemigos, también cspcrimc ataron su virtud como aliados. 
 Sagunto sufrió por ellos un sitio igual al de 19 Numancia 
 contra los Cartagineses, y desde entonces formaron los Ro- 
 manos de los Españoles el alto concepto que se ré 20 en sus 
 autores, oradores, historiadores, y poetas. Pero la fortuna 
 de Roma, superior al valor humano, la hizo 3 señora de Es- 
 paña, como de lo restante 7 del mundo, menos 21 algunos 
 montes de Cantabria, cuya total conquista no consta de la 
 historia, 22 Largas revoluciones, inútiles de contarse 23 en 
 este paraje, trajeron :A del 1 norte enjambres de naciones 
 feroces, codiciosas y guerreras, que se establecieron en Es- 
 paña : pero, con las delicias de este clima, tan diferente 
 del 25 que habían dejado, cayeron' 6 en tal grado de afemina- 
 
 8 Reducidos los ~Samantinos, "the Numantians being reduced." See 
 300, c— 9 See 327.— 10 De vivos, " of those alire."— n De pasto, "for 
 food." — 12 The meaning is, "after all their provisions being exhausted." - 
 13 See 122. — 14 Siendo de notar, " it being proper to note." — 15 Z?e, " iviih." 
 See 399.— 1S See 326, e.— x ~ See 2S6, a.— 13 La, " it," referring to espedi- 
 cion.— l * Al de, "to that of" See 129, c— * Se vé, " is seen." See 
 173.— 2i See 360.— 22. See 628.— 23 De contarse, "of being narrated." See 
 327, and 173.— ^ See 194.— 25 Del, "from that." See 291, a.— ™ See 
 165. 
 
 28* 
 
330 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 clon y flojedad, que á su tiempo 27 fueron esclavos de otros 
 conquistadores, venidos 13 del 1 - mediodía. Huyeron 29 los 
 Godos-Españoles 30 hasta los montes de una provincia, hoy 
 llamada Asturias ;■ y apenas tuvieron 31 tiempo de 32 desechar 9 
 el susto, llorar la pérdida de sus casas, y ruina de su reino, 
 cuando salieron mandados por Pelayo, uno de los mayores 
 hombres que la naturaleza 22 ha producido. 
 
 Desde aquí se abre 33 un teatro 2 de guerras que duraron 
 cerca de ocho siglos. Yarios reinos se levantaron 33 sobre 
 la ruina de la monarquía Goda-Española, destruyendo 34 el 
 que querían edificar los Moros 35 en el mismo terreno, 
 regado con mas sangre española, romana, cartaginesa, goda 
 y mora de 36 cuanto se puede ponderar 37 con horror de la 
 pluma que lo escriba, y de los ojos que lo vean escrito. 3 * 
 Pero la población de esta península era tal, que después de 
 tan largas guerras y tan sangrientas, aun se contaban 33 
 veinte millones 2 de habitantes en ella. Incorporáronse 
 tantas provincias, 2 y tan diferentes en dos coronas, la 39 de 
 Castilla y la 39 de Aragón ; y ambas en el matrimonio de 
 Don Fernando y Doña Isabel, príncipes que serán inmor- 
 tales entre cuantos sepan 40 lo que es gobierno. 41 La refor- 
 ma de abusos, aumento de ciencias, humillación de los 
 soberbios, amparo de la agricultura y otras operaciones 
 semejantes, formaron esta monarquía. Ayudóles la natu- 
 raleza 2 con un número increíble de vasallos insignes en 
 letras y armas, y se pudieron 42 haber lisonjeado de dejar 9 á 
 sus sucesores un imperio mayor y mas duradero, que el 
 de 43 Roma antigua, (contando las Americas nuevamente 
 
 27 A su tiempo, "in their turn." — 2S Venidos, "arrived." — 29 See 165. — 
 30 See 575. — 3l See 160. — 32 De desechar, "for driving away." — 33 See 
 173. — 34 See 165. — 35 See 575.— s 3S The meaning is, " than what can be 
 dwelt upon." See 270.— 37 See 173, 327, d, and 116, a.— 33 Que lo vean 
 escrito, "which may see it written." See 300, a. — 39 See 129, c— 40 Cuan- 
 tos sepan, " as many as may know ;" "whoever may know." See 321, a, 
 and 192. — 41 Lo que es gobierno, " what government is." — 42 See 189. — 
 « See 616. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 331 
 
 descubiertas), si hubieran logrado 44 dejar su corona á un here- 
 dero varón. JYególes 45 el cielo este gozo á trueque de 46 
 tantos como les había concedido, y su cetro pasó á la casa 
 de Austria, la cual gasló los tesoros, talentos y sangre de 
 los Españoles en cosas agenas de España, por las continuas 
 guerras, que así 47 en Alemania, como 47 en Italia, tuvo 
 que 48 sostener Carlos Primero 2 de España, hasta que can- 
 sado de sus mismas 49 prosperidades, ó tal vez 50 conociendo 
 con prudencia las vicisitudes de las cosas humanas, no 
 guiso 51 espo?ierse á sus reveses, y dejó el trono á su hijo Don 
 Felipe II 
 
 Este príncipe, acusado por la emulación, por ambicioso 52 
 y político como su padre, pero menos afortunado, siguiendo 
 los proyectos de Carlos, no pudo 53 hallar los mismos suce- 
 sos aun á costa de 54 ejércitos, de armadas, y de caudales. 
 Murió dejando á 55 su pueblo estenuado con las guerras ; 
 afeminado con el oro y plata de América ; disminuido con 
 la población de un mundo nuevo ; disgustado con tantas 
 desgracias, y deseoso de descanso. Pasó el cetro 2 por las 
 manos de tres príncipes menos activos para manejar tan 
 grande monarquía ; y en la muerte de Carlos Segundo no 
 era España 2 sino el esqueleto de un gigante. — José Ca- 
 dalso. 
 
 XXXIX — CRITICS. 
 
 Hay una secta de sabios en la república literaria, 1 que lo 2 
 
 son á 3 poca costa : estos son los críticos. Años enteros, y 
 
 muchos, necesita el hombre 4 para saber algo de las ciencias 
 
 humanas, pero en la crítica 5 (cual 6 se usa) desde el pri- 
 
 « See 318, and 318, a.— 45 See 113, a.— 46 A trueque de tantos como, 
 " in exchange for as many as." — 47 See 368. — 4S See 340, and 160. — 
 49 See 2S6, a.— 5° 7b/ vez, "perhaps."— $ l See 191.— 52 The meaning is, 
 "accused by emidation (by the emulous) as ambitious." See 385, f — 
 53 See 1S9. — 54 Acosta de, " at the expense of." — 55 See 325. 
 
 XXXIX. — ' See 264. — • Que to son, "who are it;" " iclio are so." See 
 287, a.— 3 See 373,/.— 4 See 575.— 5 La crítica, "criticism." See 623.— 
 6 Cual se usa, " as it is employed. See 104, 6, and 173. 
 
OÓ2 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 mer 7 dia es uno 4 consumado. Sujetarse* á los lentos pro- 
 gresos del entendimiento en las especulaciones matemáti- 
 cas, en las esperiencias de la física, en Jas confusiones de 
 la jurisprudencia, es no acordarse de la cortedad de nuestra 
 vida, que por lo regular 9 no pasa de 10 sesenta años, rebajan- 
 do de" estos los que ocupa la debilidad 4 de la niñez, el de- 
 senfreno de la juventud, y las enfermedades de la vejez. 
 Se humilla mucho nuestro orgullo 4 con esta reflexion : el 
 tiempo que he de 12 vivir, comparado con el que necesito para 
 sábete es tal que apenas puede llamarse™ tiempo. ¡ Cuanto 
 mas nos lisougea esta otra determinación 4 ! Si no puedo 
 por el motivo dicho, 14 aprender facultad alguna, persuado 
 al 1 ' mundajv á 15 sí mismo 16 que las poseo todas, y pronuncio 
 u ex trípode 17 " sobre cuanto 18 oigo™ veo, y leo. 
 
 Pero no creas 20 que en esta clase se 13 comprchenden los 
 verdaderos críticos. 4 Los' 21 hay dignísimos de todo respe- 
 to. ¿Pues en qué se diferencian, y en qué se 13 han de 12 
 distinguir 2 ' 1 ? La regla fija para no confundirlos es esta : 
 los buenos habían poco sobre asuntos determinados y con 
 moderación ; los otros son como toros, que forman la inten- 
 ción, cierran 23 los 24 ojos, y arremeten á cuanto' 2,5 encuentran 
 por delante, 26 hombre, caballo, perro, aunque se claven la 
 espada hasta el corazón. Si la comparación te pareciere? 
 baja, por ser 8 de un ente racional con un bruto, créeme que 
 no lo es tanto, 29 pues apenas pueden llamarse n hombres los 
 que no cultivan su razón, y solo se valen de una especie de 
 instinto que les queda para hacer daño á todo cuanto se 
 
 7 See 101. — s Sujetarse, "to subject one's s_elf." — 9 Por lo regular, 
 "commonly;" "usually." — lu Pasar de, "to exceed." — u De, "from." — 
 ^ Haber de. See 339.— 13 See 173. — 14 Dicho, "said;" "aforesaid." 
 See 200.— ^ See 670.— 16 See 286.— 17 Ex trípode, a Latin phrase, mean- 
 ing "authoritatively." — 13 Cuanto, "as much as;" "whatever." — 19 See 
 206.— so See 309, a.— & Los, " those." See 616.— 22 See 116, a.— 23 Cier- 
 ran, irreg. from cerrar. — 24 See 122. — 25 Cuanto encuentran, "whomso- 
 ever they may meet ;" or, " any body that they may meet."' — ^Por delante, 
 "in front;" " ahead,"— ^ See 319.— 2S Por ser, "for being."— 23 No lo cs 
 tanto, " it is not so." 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS/ 333 
 
 les presente^ aniigo ó enemigo, débil ó fuerte, inocente ó 
 culpado. — Jóse Cadalso. 
 
 XL. — American independence. [Written July 4th, 1847.] 
 
 Han transcurrido ya setenta y un anos desde que 1 los 
 Norte- Americanos lograron sacudir el yugo de la monar- 
 quía inglesa para hacerse verdaderamente independientes. 
 Una guerra de siete años, que costó millares de vidas, esta- 
 bleció al fin 2 la libertad de un pais que ha tenido la buena 
 suerte de no abusar de 3 la gloriosa condición á que se rió 
 al fin 2 elevado. Los patrióticos y denodados héroes de 
 1 776 juraron ser libres ó morir, y así lo cumplieron. Muchos 
 murieron 4 en la lucha desigual, pero al espirar 5 vagaba por 
 sus labios una consoladora sonrisa que clecia al opresor tira- 
 no : tí muero 4 por 6 libertar éJ mi patria, y muero contento ! : ' 
 
 La primera sangre derramada en la guerra de la inde- 
 pendencia, enrojeció las arenas de Lexington el 19 de Abril 
 de 1775, pero no fué vertida inútilmente. Los ingleses 
 quemaron y destruyeron pueblos y ciudades ; se ligaron 
 con los indios salvages para que 8 les ayudaran 9 á asesinar 
 á 7 los hijos de las colonias que resist ian la opresión, y la 
 justicia de Dios dio el castigo merecido á la infamia y al 
 despotismo. En medio de 10 los conflictos y reveses, el 
 Congreso americano publicó el 4 de Julio de 1776 su De- 
 claración de Independencia. 
 
 En aquella época la Union Americana era una pequeña 
 nación, compuesta 11 de solos trece Estados; y terminada la 
 guerra, 12 establecida su independencia 13 fué elejido 14 primer 
 
 so See 321, a. 
 
 XL. — l Desde que, " since." Años is nominative to han transcurrido. 
 See 575.— 3 Al Jin, "'at length." — 3 See 330. — 4 Irreg. from morir. — 
 s See 298, fe.— 6 See 326, d.— * See 325.— 3 Para que, "in order that."— 
 9 See 316. — 10 En medio de, " in the midst of." — u Compuesta, irreg. par- 
 ticiple from componer. — 12 See 300, c. — 13 Construct su independencia es- 
 tablecida, "its independence being established." See 300 c. — 14 Eljeneral 
 Jo-ore Washington is nominative to fué elejido. See 575. 
 
334 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 Presidente de los Estados Unidos, en Abril de 1789, el 
 jeneral 15 Jorge Washington. Espirado el término 16 de 
 cuatro Sinos, volvió á 17 ser elejido casi unánimemente por 
 todos los americanos hasta quo 18 en 1796 pidió 19 permiso 
 para retirarse á la vida privada j fué electo segundo Presi- 
 dente John Adams. En aquella época contaba la Union 
 con una población compuesta 11 de cinco millones de habi- 
 tantes. 
 
 El motivo de esta guerra fué indudablemente la mas in- 
 justa agresión, y lo que dio origen á ella es lo único que 
 puede justificar una guerra desastrosa en la presente edad : 
 la independencia nacional. Todo individuo debe odiarla, 
 matanza 20 y el esterminio, 20 pero al tratarse' 11 de la inde- 
 pendencia de una nación, de la libertad de sus hijos, de los 
 derechos de la patria ; todo el que 22 tenga 23 sangre en las 
 venas debe correr presuroso á tomar las armas para repeler 
 y esterminar al 7 enemigo que atenta á destruir la nacionali- 
 dad ó* á usurpar los derechos mas sagrados. Los héroes 
 americanos de 1776 serán inmortalizados, y en los siglos 
 venideros el nombre glorioso de Jorge Washington será 
 acatado por las nacionas mas poderosas y bendecido por 
 todo aquel que 22 sepa 24 apreciar- la verdadera independen- 
 cia. Washington no fué ambicioso como otros héroes de 
 su siglo ó de siglos anteriores : su único deseo era el 25 de 
 libertar á su patria del yugo opresor que se iba haciendo 26 
 cada dia mas insufrible con su tiranía. Rompiéronse las 
 cadenas de hierro con que pretendía la Gran Bretaña sojuz- 
 gar á 7 un pueblo noble y generoso, y lució para la América 
 un dia de gloria y de felicidad. 
 
 Setenta y un años hace boy que 27 se firmó la declaración 
 
 13 See 233. — ls See 300 c. — 17 Volvió á ser elejido, " iras again elected." 
 See 336.— 1S See 553.— « Pidió, irreg. from pedir.— ■» See 623.— ^ Al 
 tratarse de, í¡ on attempting." — 22 Todo el que, or. todo aquel que. .See 
 2S8, a.— 23 Tenga. See 160, and 310, &.— ^ Sepa. See 192, and 310, 
 6. — 25 See 616. — 2S <$ e i oa haciendo, " went maláng itself" " was becom- 
 ing."— -27 See 304, b. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 335 
 
 de la independencia, y véase 28 el efecto que ha producido 
 la libertad conquistada. En cincuenta años se ha cstendido 
 el dominio de la nación independiente á cinco veces mas 
 de 29 lo que era á fines 30 del siglo pasado : en cincuenta 
 años se ha cuadruplicado su población, y por todas partes 
 se manifiestan* 1 los beneficios de las instituciones que con 
 su independencia plantearon los que lograran romper el 
 yugo de la tiranía. — E. J. Gómez. 
 
 XLI. A VISIT TO THE TOMB OF WASHINGTON. 
 
 La mañana del 23 de Junio de 1845 amaneció 1 clara y 
 serena. Mansas y tranquilas corrían las aguas del Poto- 
 mac y el vapor Jorge Washington se separaba lentamente 
 del estremo del ferro-carril de Petersburg. La vista del 
 rio era pintoresca y variada : por do quiera 2 veíanse 3 cru- 
 zar las pequeñas embarcaciones de los pescadores, y sobre 
 ambas riberas se divisaban los estensos saladeros donde 
 centenares de hombres se ocupaban en sus faenas, prepar- 
 ando para embarrilar la pesca de sus compañeros. 
 
 Mas todo esto no era suficiente para distraerme por un 
 minuto entero de 4 la idea principal que ocupaba mi mente. 
 Desde 5 mis primeros años había leido 6 la vida de Jorge 
 Washington, y ya que 7 no podía 9 conocerle, al menos 9 ansi- 
 aba ver el lugar donde él había nacido, y donde reposaban 
 sus restos mortales. Impaciente dirijía á cada instante mi 
 anteojo de larga vista 10 hacia la margen izquierda del rio, 
 buscando ansiosamente un objeto que debía distinguirse á 
 algunas leguas de distancia. Mis ojos buscaban á Mount- 
 Vernon, el punto donde vivió, y donde yace sepultado el 
 
 . 2S Véase ti efecto, "the result may be seen." See 173.— 29 See 270 — 
 3C Ajines, "at the end." — 31 Manifiestan, irreg. from manifestar. 
 
 XLI. — x Amaneció, "dawned." — ~ Por do quiera, "every where." — 
 3 Veíanse, " were seen." See 173. — * De, "from." — 5 See 336. — 6 Habla 
 leido, "I had read." — 7 Ya que, "since that;" "seeing that."— 8 No po- 
 dia, "J could not." — 9 Al menos, "at least." — 10 Anteojo de larga vista, 
 1 ' spy-glass, " " telescope.' ' 
 
336 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 hombre mas digno de admiración que ha producido la 
 América. 1 1 
 
 Tal era mi impaciencia que á cada instante preguntaba 
 á un anciano residente sobre la margen del rio que navega- 
 ba/nos, si tardaría mucho 12 en verse:: con algún 13 descon- 
 suelo supe 14 que debíamos aun tardar 15 algunas horas. De 
 pronto 16 divisamos una ciudad coronada de 17 torres y ele- 
 vades cúpulas ; era Alexandria. La detención del vapor en 
 ese punto me impacientó de tal manera 18 que ni siquiera 19 
 tuve 20 la curiosidad de ecsaminar el frente de la población : 
 al fin continuamos nuestro viage. 
 
 El sol iba indinándose 21 pausadamente hacia el ocaso, 
 cuando el anciano me advirtió 22 que podría distinguir los 
 árboles que cubren al Mount- Vernon. Desde este momento 
 no separé de allí mi vista, y cuando la procsimidad me 
 'permitía distinguir aquel lugar sin necesidad del anteojo, 
 
 10 contemplé eslasiado, sumido en un estraño estupor. De 
 pronto 16 se fijaron mis ojos sobre las elevadas copas de los 
 verdes árboles, y me parecía distinguir entre sus ramas 
 delineada Ja figura de Washington con los brazos cruzadas 
 y la cabeza descubierta. La semejanza de esta idea con 
 una representación de Napoleon en Santa Elena, me causó 
 algún disgusto, y bajé la vista hacia la habitación que se 
 distinguía al través de 23 los árboles. Allí! esclamé, allí 
 vivió ese hombre que dio ser 2i á esta nación : allí yacen 25 
 sepultados también sus restos mortales ! . . . 
 
 Al dia siguiente me hallaba al lado de un sepulcro hu- 
 
 11 See 575, and 231. — 12 Si tardaría mucho en verse, "if it would delay 
 long in seeing itself," that is, ll if it would be long before it could be seen." 
 See 525, 327, and 173.— « See 101.— " See 19%— w Debíamos aun tar- 
 dar algunas horas, " we must wait yet some hours." Deber, before an 
 infinitive, often is used in the sense of " to have to." — ls De pronto, 
 
 11 suddenly." — 17 See 272. — 13 De tal vianera, " to such a degree." — l9 A 7 £ 
 siquiera, " not even." — 20 See 160. — 21 El sol iba inclinándose, "the sun 
 was-going declining itself," that is, " the sun was declining." — 22 Advirtió, 
 irreg. from advertir. — 23 Al través de, "amidst;" "through." — 24 ¡¡¡ &r [ 3 
 here a noun. — 25 See 214. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 337 
 
 mude, de ladrillos. Una verja de madera, medio derriba- 
 da, circundaba aquella tumba sencilla. Todo en derredor 26 
 respiraba tristeza y desconsuelo, pero el aire me parecía 
 animado por un eco débil que murmuraba en tonos apaga- 
 dos. " j Este es el último recinto del inmortal Washing- 
 ton I" Y en efecto : allí, junto á mis plantas, bajo aquel 
 montón de ladrillos colocados sin artificio ; destituidos de 
 lujosos mármoles y doradas inscripciones, .... allí yacía 
 lo que quedaba en la tierra del héroe ilustre. 
 
 Pero su memoria vive, y vivirá por largos siglos. Allí, 
 al lado de su sepulcro, hay mil nombres de distinguidos 
 viajeros que han ido á pagar el último tributo — á consagrar 
 al pie de su propia tumba, un pensamiento, y á dedicarle 
 un recuerdo de admiración. 
 
 Por un instante me había olvidado 27 que ecsistía, y al 
 volver en mí 28 sentí que la fresca brisa bañaba suavemente 
 mi encendida frente, y una lágrima de pesar y de venera- 
 ción se había desprendido de mis ojos cayendo sobre la 
 humilde tumba de Jorge Washington. — E. J. Gomez. 
 
 FIFTH SECTION. 
 
 Remark. — In this Section the verbs will not be distinguished from 
 the other parts of speech by being printed in italics, as the learner is 
 supposed to be able to conjugate the regular and irregular verbs readily. 
 With many rules heretofore referred to in the notes, the learner must 
 now be somewhat familiar, and there will be less need of referring to 
 them hereafter. 
 
 XLIL THE MAIDEN OF NARNI. 
 
 Viajando de Locasto á Spoleto, en el año de 1826, nos 
 detuvimos 1 en la ciudad de Narni para mandar caballos y 
 
 2S En derredor, "around;" "round about." — 27 Me había olvidado, "I 
 had forgotten." See 284, e.—& Al volver en mí, " on returning to my- 
 self;" "on coming to my senses." See 293, b. 
 
 XLII. — l Detuvimos, irreg. from detener. 
 29 
 
338 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 tomar algún alimento. Confiados en el gran influjo que 
 tenian los estranjeros en aquella época en Italia, creimos 
 que no se presentarla dificultad alguna 2 ; pero esta vez 
 tuvimos que 3 esperar algunas horas antes de que fuesen 
 satisfechos nuestros deseos. Mientras que comíamos, 
 llamó mi atención un sacerdote que entró silenciosamente 
 en la salle y reconoeia cuidadosamente la reunion. Difer- 
 ente á la generalidad de aquella tribu de viajeros, sus mo- 
 dales eran altivos y su aspecto desagradable. Habiéndo- 
 nos 4 observado por algunos minutos, habló con el posadero 
 en voz baja, y en seguida 5 salió prontamente de la habita- 
 ción. Sentía un temor secreto por los muchos robos y 
 asesinatos que últimamente habian cometido los bandidos, 6 
 particularmente en aquellos alrededores, y me parecía por 
 los modales del sacerdote que nos amenazaba algún peli- 
 gro. 6 Comuniqué 7 estas sospechas á mis compañeros que 
 estaban de acuerdo 8 conmigo, y empezamos á mirar á nues- 
 tro posadero con temor y desconfianza. Al fin, después de 
 muchas opiniones sobre el partido que debíamos adoptar, 
 se resolvió que le interrogásemos, y si encontrábamos 
 algún doblez en sus respuestas, no saldríamos 9 hasta la 
 mañana siguiente, en que podíamos contar con 10 la protec- 
 ción de una escolta respetable que habíamos dejado en el 
 camino, y que debia 11 detenerse en el mismo punto que 
 nosotros. Según los deseos de la reunion me eligieron 
 para tal 12 comisión, ofreciendo referirles lo que indagara, 
 tan exactamente 13 como me lo 14 permitiera mi memoria. 6 
 
 — ¿ Puedo 15 preguntaros, señor, quién es ese sacerdote 
 con quien os vi 16 conversar durante la comida ? le dije. 
 
 — i Un sacerdote, señor ! me contestó con un tono que 
 
 2 See 134, a.— 3 See 160, and 340.— 4 See 116.— 5 En seguida, "after- 
 ward." — 6 See 575. — 7 See 166, a. — 8 De acuerdo, " of one mind." — 9 See 
 .208.— 10 See 391, e, latter clause.— 11 Debia, "was to."—™ Para tal comi- 
 sión" for the said commission." — ' 3 See 32, a. — 14 Lo would be redundant 
 here in English.— w ¿Puedo? "may I?" See 189.— W See 196. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 339 
 
 apesar de 17 demostrar sorpresa, manifestaba sin embargo 18 
 haberle 19 confundido mi pregunta. 
 
 — Si, señor le añadí fuertemente y con una mirada que 
 le dio á entender sospechaba de 20 él; un sacerdote, ¿se 
 acuerda 21 V. de 20 él? 
 
 — Oh! si, ciertamente, me acuerdo, él — es un buen 
 hombre — y amigo mió antiguo y de gran valor, que vá 22 á 
 Spoleto para hallarse en la fiesta de San Jerónimo, y que 
 se creeria feliz 23 en viajar en vuestra compañía. 
 
 — I Es natural de esta ciudad? le pregunté. 
 
 — No ; es de las montañas, señor ; fué su respuesta 
 acompañada de una guiñada sardónica. 
 
 — I Y su nombre ? 
 
 ■ — Borasco. 
 
 — No me agrada ese hombre, 6 le dije. 
 
 — I Y porqué no ? preguntó prontamente, mirándome 
 como si sus ojos hubieran penetrado mi alma. 
 
 — Porque los hombres honrados jamás hablan así al 
 oido cuando están en presencia de otras personas. 
 
 — ¿ Y con quién hablaba de esa manera ? dijo él con 
 fiereza. 
 
 — Con vos, señor ! le contesté tomándole fuertemente 
 el brazo 24 : he oido 25 hablar de vos antes ; ¡ cuidado 26 
 como os burláis 27 de nosotros ! Sabed que no saldremos 9 
 esta noche de Narni. 
 
 Quedó como muerto al sentir mi apretón, y salió de la 
 habitación sin responderme. A poco 28 apareció por una 
 galería una joven, 29 y por una señal que me hizo me dio á 
 
 17 A pesar de, " in spite of '." — * 3 Sin embargo, "nevertheless;" "notwith- 
 standing." — 19 This means, " to have confounded him my question," that 
 is, " that my question had confounded him." — 20 See 330. — 21 ¿ Se acuerda 
 V. de el? "do you remember him?" Acuerda, from acordar. — 22 Va, 
 from ir. See 204. — 23 <¡¡ e creería feliz, " would deem himself happy." — 
 24 See 122, a. — 25 This means, " I have heard you spoken of before." — 
 26 The meaning is, " be careful how you make sport of us." — 27 See 655. — 
 23 A poco, "in a short time." — 29 Una joven, "a young woman." See 102. 
 
340 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 entender que deseaba hablar conmigo. Salí del cuarto 
 con precipitación, y entrando en una larga viña, la vi allí 
 muy ocupada arrancando racimos de uvas. 
 
 — ¿ Qué queréis ? iba yo á preguntarle ; pero me inter- 
 rumpió diciéndome en voz baja y continuando su ocupa- 
 ción : 
 
 — Silencio, señor, no me habléis ; corréis peligro — se- 
 guid, y á la vuelta 30 pasad cerca de 31 mí. 
 
 Lo hice según ella deseaba, y me dijo entonces en voz 
 muy baja : 
 
 Ármate ; Borasco no es sacerdote, 32 es el afamado Gas- 
 parde. En aquel momento oí 33 cerca de mí 31 el disparo 
 de una carabina seguido de un grito agudo : la pobre joven 
 cayó muerta y ensangrentada á mis pies. Dirij í mi vista 
 en dirección de donde vino 34 el ruido, y entro los matorra- 
 les vi la figura de un hombre que se deslizaba rápidamente 
 por el campo como una serpiente. El ruido alarmó á los 
 huéspedes, quienes arrojándose al jardín, quedaron sor- 
 prendidos de aquella escena. Entre ellos estaba el per- 
 verso posadero que en lugar de correr hacia el cuerpo de 
 su hija, me señalaba y exclamaba: ¡ Prendedle ; él es el 
 asesino ! 
 
 Por un momento permanecí inmóvil pero recobrándome 
 prontamente, me arrojé sobre él con la ferocidad de un 
 tigre. 
 
 — ¡ Embustero ! exclamé. Tu eres cómplice del asesino 
 de tu misma hija. ¡ Mirad ! no tengo cerca de mí armas 
 de fuego. ¡ Fué Gaspardo el bandido ! ¡ Este villano es 
 su camarada ! ¡ Prondedle ! y echándolo á tierra, en un 
 momento todos cayeron sobre él. 
 
 — ¿ Donde esta ? exclamaron todos, ¿ donde está Gas- 
 pardo 1 
 
 — En esa espesura, esclamé ; todos se horrorizaron con 
 
 30 A la vuelta, " on your return." — 31 Cerca de, " near to." — 32 See 243. 
 — 3S Oí, « I heard." See 206.— ^ See 211. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 341 
 
 solo el pensamiento de 33 que ese sanguinaria bandido estu- 
 viera tan cerca; al momento resonó un grito agudo, y 
 ¡ Allí ! j allí ! exclamaron todos. 
 
 Miré al lugar donde señalaban y sobre la cima de un 
 collado vecino, estaba Gaspardo, agitando su sombrero, re- 
 gocijándose en su triunfo y sin manifestar desconfianza. 
 Estaba fuera del alcance de 36 las armas de fuego 37 y toda 
 persecución hubiera sido inútil y peligrosa. Guilletto (que 
 era el nombre del posadero) no demostraba sentimiento 
 por la pérdida de su hija, al contrario parecía recocijarse 
 de 35 que por su buena intención hubiera perdido la vida y 
 alegrándose de 35 que el bandido se hubiera escapado. Sin 
 embargo, 13 Guilletto fué conducido ante el tribunal y 
 hallándole criminal sufrió la pena de muerte. En la 
 causa se probó que habia existido por muchos años una 
 comunicación secreta entre él y Gaspardo, dándole aquel 
 noticias cuando por casualidad se detenia en su posada 
 algún viajero rico. De aquí provenían tantos asesinatos 
 que se cometían en aquellos alrededores y que por la trági- 
 ca ocurrencia que acabamos de referir 38 se consiguió feliz- 
 mente la estirpacion de Gaspardo y de su bando. 
 
 XLIII. EXTRACTS FROM A " MANIFESTO " OF GENERAL 
 
 SANTA ANNA. 
 
 ¡ Conciudadanos ! Con el pesar mas amargo y prufundo 
 os anuncio, que después de 1 continuos y estraordinarios 
 esfuerzos y al cabo de quince horas de continuo combate, 
 me vi obligado á abandonar la Capital cuando nuestras 
 filas se habían disminuido tan notablemente, para salvar 
 á ese digno pueblo de los estragos que los proyectiles del 
 enemigo que habia penetrado á nuestros líneas mas cerca- 
 nas, regando el paso con sus cadáveres y con los 2 de los 
 
 35 See 554.-36 Fuera del alcance de, " out of the reach o/."— 37 See 97, 
 a.— 38 See 337. 
 XLIII.— i See 375.-2 See 616. 
 
 29* 
 
342 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 dignos mejicanos que defendían heroicamente palmo á 
 palmo, el honor y derechos de su patria. 
 
 Testigos habéis sido, de 3 que creando recursos donde no 
 los había, trabajando dia y noche, preparé las defensas á la 
 ciudad de Méjico, de que formé y reuní un poderoso ejér- 
 cito, á fin de arrancar algún favor á 4 la fortuna, tan esqui- 
 va para nosotros. La insubordinación de un general tras- 
 tornó todo mi plan de operaciones como ya lo 5 sabéis. En 
 el convento y puente de Churubusco, recibió entonces el 
 enemigo duras lecciones, reproducidas dos veces en el fuerte 
 de Chapultepec, también en las garitas de Belén y de San 
 Cosme, y últimamente, en la Ciudadela. Mas el valor de 
 muchos de nuestros soldados de la Guardia y del ejército 
 no siempre fué secundado ; y si bien 6 á fuego y sangre, el 
 enemigo en dia funestísimo para la nación, se hizo dueño 
 de su capital. 
 
 Yo he buscado ansioso la muerte 7 por todas partes, por- 
 que pérdida tan grande escitaba mi mas justo despecho. 
 En Chapultepec recibí una contusion, en Belén, traspasa- 
 ron mi vestido las balas enemigas, y á mi derredor desapa- 
 recieron los mejores soldados de la república. ¿ Qué me 
 puede restar en medio de este duelo y angustia universal ? 
 La estéril satisfacción de la conciencia, la 2 de haber sos- 
 tenido personalmente el combate hasta el último estremo, 
 la 2 de haber vendido cara al enemigo su sorprendente vic- 
 toria. El me vio de frente 8 en la Angostura, en Cerro 
 Gordo, en Churubusco, en Chapultepec, en Belén, en San 
 Cosme y en la Ciudadela : y me encontraré, yo os lo juro, 9 
 do quiera 10 fuese 11 útil y glorioso combatir 
 
 Dije antes solemnemente, y repito ahora, que no descon- 
 
 3 See 554. — 4 See 329, a.s Lo is here redundant in English. — 6 Si 
 bien, "although." — 7 See 628. — 8 De frente, "in front." La Angostura 
 is the name of the same battle-ground that is usually in the United 
 States known as Buena- Vista. — 9 See 115, a. — 10 Do quiera, " wherever." 
 — u Fuese, from ser. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 343 
 
 fio jamas de la suerte de mi patria. Si callan las facciones 
 alguna vez para escuchar su voz soberana, si reunimos 
 nuestros votos y nuestros afanes, aun es tiempo de arrojar 
 al enemigo del suelo que mancha con su presencia. Os 
 consta que yo resistí una paz deshonrosa que reducía á la 
 república á la nulidad mas absurda y mas completa. La 
 nación ha apetecido y aun apetece la guerra ; continúe- 
 nnosla pues, con gran denuedo, y mi ejemplo será el mas 
 fervoroso. Las facciones no me disputarán ya el poder 
 que gustoso abandono ; si me disputaren el campo de ba- 
 talla, allí me encontrarán sereno y firme consagrado como 
 siempre á la mas generosa y santa de las causas. ¿ Qué 
 importan las desgracias? 7 El infortunio es el crisol de 
 las naciones; y nunca es mas grande la mejicana 12 que 
 cuando lucha con el destino para arrancarle la victoria que 
 Dios y la justicia le prometen. ¡ Mejicanos ! treinta y 
 siete años ha que 13 proclamasteis vuestra independencia 
 entre escarmientos y peligros : sostenedla para siempre. 
 Ciudad de Guadalupe Hidalgo, Set. 16 de 1847. 
 
 Antonio Lopez de Santa-Anna. 
 
 xliv. extracts from another " manifesto " of 
 
 santa-anna. 
 
 ¡ Mejicanos ! Desde mi regreso á la patria, y en oca- 
 siones diversas, os he dirigido la palabra para daros cuenta 
 de mis operaciones como gefe del ejército, y como primer 
 magistrado ejerciendo el poder ; mas separado de aquellos 
 destinos, ahora lo hago con el mas profundo pesar para 
 quejarme 1 ante vosotros de la ingratitud cruel de algunos, 
 y de la perfidia de otros, que no contentos con la conducta 
 indiferente y criminal que han observado en los dias del 
 
 12 Mejicana refers to nación. — 13 Treinta y siete años ha que, "it is 
 thirty-seven years smce." See 304, b, and 304, c. 
 XLIV.— i See 655. 
 
S44 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 gran conflicto, intentan nacer recaer sobre mí solo, la cansa 
 de los males públicos á que tanto han contribuido. 
 
 Proceder semejante* no me sorprende, porque un año 
 Lace 3 comencé á observar en la prensa de la capital, que 
 jo era otra vez 4 el blanco 5 de las facciones que desgraciada- 
 mente han desgarrado las entrañas de la patria ; llegando 
 su audacia hasta presentarme con el carácter de traidor 
 contra una sociedad, testigo 6 de mis repetidos servicios por 
 su independencia y libertad, y de los sacrificios que he 
 impendido para librarla del yugo que la amenaza 
 
 Como la injuria, que con fin perverso se me infiere, 7 es 
 tan atroz, yo la rechazo con toda la energía de mi caráetar 7 
 y con el valor de la inocencia indignamente ultrajada : 
 reto y eonvoco á todos mis acusadores á a que se presenten 
 con sus pruebas, ahora que me hallo sin poder y sin influ- 
 encia : y si así no lo hicieren 9 los denuncio como viles 
 calumniadores y enemigos de la nación. 
 
 A los generales Taylor y Scott y á todos los individuos 
 de sus ejércitos, yo los 10 conjuro á 8 que por su honor ma- 
 nifiesten : si el general mejicano, que los ha combatido en 
 el Norte y en el Oriente, y en el centro mismo de la repúb- 
 lica hasta el dia 10 del mes de la fecha, 11 ha llenado todos 
 sus deberes para con su patria. 
 
 i Conciudadanos 1 La desgracia me ha privado de la 
 incomparable satisfacción de presentaros una espléndida 
 victoria ; pero nunca la desdicha ha sido traición : os in- 
 sultan los que tratan de 12 persuadiros, que puede caber tal 
 infamia en un antiguo veterano de la independencia, con 
 honrosas cicatrices adquiridas en defensa de vuestros 
 
 2 Proceder semejante " such a ■proceeding." — 3 Un año hace, " a year 
 ago.'" See 436. — 4 Otra vez, "again." — 5 El blanco, " the target ;" "the 
 mark."— 6 See 244. — 7 Se me infiere, "infers itself to-me" that is, "must 
 by inference be charged upon me." See 173. Infiere is from inferir. — 
 8 See 554. — 9 See 185. — 10 Los is here redundant in English. — n Fecha, 
 "date;" "the present date." — I2 Tratar de, " to aim to," "to attempts 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 345 
 
 derechos, y que ha encanecido sirviendo con amor y lealtad 
 á su patria 
 
 Si mi conducta merece reproche en los meses citados : 
 si ella debe sujetarse á un examen porque los resultados 
 no han sido felices, yo estoy muy dispuesto á responder á 
 cualesquiera cargos que por los medios legales é imparcial- 
 mente intenten hacérseme 13 ; pero entre tanto 14 creo 15 
 merecer las consideraciones que el pacto fundamental me 
 otorga, mis servicios demandan y la justicia exige. 
 
 Bien 16 sabéis, que no soy yo el único caudillo á quien se 
 ha presentado esquiva la victoria. 17 Respondan por mí 
 Palo Alto, la Resaca, Matamoros, Monterey, Nuevo Méji- 
 co, Chihuahua, Californias, Veracruz, Tabasco y Padierna. 
 Los soldados mejicanos habremos sido desgraciados, mas 
 ninguno traidor. Habrá 18 también algunos cobardes : 
 pero esto jamas podrá decirse 19 del que ha buscado al 
 enemigo en todas partes, del primero en el peligro, y del 
 único que ha presentado á la nación en esta guerra, tro- 
 feos arrancados á 20 los batallones enemigos 
 
 ¡ Mejicanos ! Soy hombre, y tendré defectos ; pero 
 nunca he pecado contra la patria, porque en mi pecho 
 jamas se han podido abrigar sentimientos anti-nacionales. 
 Un buen nombre para después de 21 mis dias, es cuanto he 
 ambicionado : he anhelado, pues, todo lo que es grande y 
 glorioso para Méjico, y no he escusado para su logro ni mi 
 propia sangre : vosotros lo sabéis, y me haréis justicia. 
 Tehuacán, Octubre 22 de 1847. 
 Antonio Lopez de Santa-Anna. 
 
 13 Hacérseme, " to make themselves to-me ;" "to be made against me." 
 See 173, and 116. — }* Entre tanto, " in the mean time.'" — 15 See 327, c. — 
 ™ Bien, " very well."—^ See 575.— 1S Habrá, " there will be." See 218, 
 and 218, a. — 19 Podrá decirse, " will be able to say itself;" " can be said." 
 See 173, and 116.-2° See 329, a.— 21 Para después de mis dias, "after 
 my days," that is, " after lam dead and gone." 
 
346 SPANISH READING LESSONS. 
 
 XLV. INGRATITUDE. 
 
 Los mismos que declaman con mayor horror contra este 
 monstruoso vicio, lo adoptan muchas veces como á 1 su hijo 
 querido, por cuanto 2 es 3 solo feo por el aspecto que mira 
 al 1 bienhechor ; así como 4 es agradable por él que mira á l 
 los ingratos, y la razón es, porque dispensa á 1 los favore- 
 cidos de 5 la obligación del reconocimiento que les oprime ; 
 pues, cuanto 6 mayor as el beneficio que se recibe, tanto 6 
 mayor es la esclavitud en que el beneficiado queda consti- 
 tuido ; y como muy pocos gustan arrastrar estas cadenas, 
 se libran de su pesadez con solo un simple olvido. Quien 
 no quisiere vivir con ingratos, ha de 7 tener mucho trabajo, 
 si ha de 7 vivir en el mundo. Infeliz será el hombre que 
 no esperimente ingratitudes, porque habrá hecho muy poco 
 bien á los demás. Por el contrario, 8 cuantos 6 mas ingra- 
 tos hiciéremos, 9 tanto 6 mas noble es el fin que nos mueve 10 
 á obrar bien. Esta es la condición del corazón humano. 
 El que hace bien solamente á los agradecidos, comercia ; 
 mas el que lo hace á los ingratos, obra por pura liberalidad. 
 El uno siembra 11 los beneficios, el otro los derrama; uno 
 procede como hombre, el otro como Dios ; y este siempre 
 tiene el delicado y agradable consuelo de haber obrado 
 bien, que es el gusto mas deleitable que puede lisongear 
 el paladar de una alma bien formada. 
 
 Teodoro de Almeyda. 
 
 XLV. — l See 670. — 2 Por cuanto, "inasmuch as."— 3 Es, "it is." — 
 4 Así como, "just as." — 5 De, "from." — 6 Cuanto thus before the first 
 comparative and tanto before the second, may be rendered in English by 
 the definite article with the comparative ; thus, cuanto mas estudia, tanto 
 mas aprende, " the more he-studies, the more he-learns ; cuanto mayor es 
 el beneficio, tanto mayor es la obligación del reconocimiento, " the greater 
 the benefit is, the greater is the obligation of acknowledgment." — 7 See 
 339. -8 Por el contrario, " on the contrary." — 9 See 185. — 10 See 186. — 
 11 Siembra from sembrar. See 181. 
 
SPANISH READING LESSONS. 347 
 
 XLVI. THE BEAR, THE MONKEY, AND THE HOG. A FABLE. 
 
 Un oso eon que la vida 
 Ganaba 1 un Piamontes, 2 
 La 3 no muy bien aprendida 
 Danza 3 ensayaba en dos pies. 
 
 ii. 
 Queriendo hacer de 4 persona, 
 Dijo á una mona: ¿ Qué tal? 5 
 Era perita la mona, 
 
 Y respondióle : Muy mal. 
 
 ni. 
 Yo creo, replicó el oso, 
 Que me haces poco favor. 
 I Pues qué ? 6 ¿ mi aire no es garboso ? 
 No hayo 7 el paso con primor ? 
 
 IV. 
 
 Estaba el cerdo presente, 
 
 Y ¿lijo : ¡ Bravo, bien va ! 8 
 Baiarin mas escelente 
 
 No se ha visto, 9 ni verá. 
 
 v. 
 Echó el oso, al oir esto, 
 Sus cuentas allá entre sí, 
 
 Y con ademan modesto 
 Hubo de 10 esclamar así: 
 
 XL VI. — l Ganaba la vida, " was-gaining a livelihood." — 2 See 575. — 
 3 The not very well learnt dance." — 4 See 434. — 5 ¿ Qué tal? "what sort?" 
 " how is it ?" or, " how do you like it ?" — 6 ¿ Pues que ? " and why ?" — 
 * See 185. — 8 Bien va, " it goes well ; " it is well." Va from ir. — 9 No se 
 ha visto, " ¿as not been seen." See 173. Visto from ver. — l0 See 339. 
 
348 SPANISH READING LESSONS-, 
 
 VI. 
 
 Cuando me desaprobaba 
 La mona, llegué á 11 dudar : 
 Mas ya que 12 el cerdo me alaba. 
 Muy mal debo de 13 bailar. 
 
 VII. 
 
 Guarde para su regalo 
 Esta sentencia un autor : 2 
 Si el sabio no aprueba, 14 ¡ malo ! 
 Si el necio aplaude, ¡ peor ! 
 
 T. de Ie.iar.te. 
 
 11 See 341. — 12 Ya que, " seeing that ;" "since." — n Debo de bailar, "I 
 must dance." Deber before an infinitive is often used in the sense of 
 "to have to" " to be to" — 14 Aprueba } from aprobar. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 USED IN THE VOCABULARY. 
 
 def. art. definite article. 
 
 indef. art. indefinite article. 
 
 rim. noun masculine. 
 
 rtf. noun feminine. 
 
 sing, singular. 
 
 pL plural. 
 
 m. masculine. 
 
 f. feminine. 
 
 prop, proper noun or name. 
 
 aug. augmentative. 
 
 dim. diminutive. 
 
 adj. adjective. 
 
 part, participle. 
 
 pron. pronoun. 
 
 ptrs. pron. personal pronoun. 
 
 poss. possessive. 
 
 rel. relative. 
 
 indef. indefinite. 
 
 dem. demonstrative. 
 
 V-. verb. 
 
 ta. verb active. 
 
 vtu verb neuter. 
 
 vr. verb reflective. 
 
 irr. v. irregular verb. 
 impers. v. impersonal verb. 
 aux. v. auxiliary verb. 
 inf. infinitive mood. 
 ind. indicative " 
 imp. imperative " 
 subj. subjunctive " 
 ger. gerund. 
 
 pres. present tense. 
 
 impf. imperfect ■* 
 
 per/, def. perfect-definite " 
 Ifut. first-future " 
 
 defec. v. defective verb. 
 
 1 s. or 1 p. first person sing., or pi. 
 
 2 s. or 2 p. second " " " 
 
 3 s. or 3 p. third " " " 
 adv. adverb. 
 
 prep, preposition. 
 conj. conjunction. 
 interj. interjection. 
 interrog. interrogative. 
 num. numeral. 
 F. from. 
 
 |2F~ Adjectives have their feminine termination separated from the 
 masculine by a hyphen ; thus, bueno-a; Español-a. 
 
PART VI. 
 
 VOCABULARY OF WORDS IN THE READING LESSONS, 
 
 ACA 
 
 A', prep., to, at, on, for, in. 
 
 Abandonádo-a, part, and adj., aban- 
 doned, left. 
 
 Abandonar, inf. va., to abandon, to 
 leave. 
 
 Aborrecer, inf. va , to hate, to de- 
 spise, to abhor. 
 
 Aborrezcas, P. Aborrecer, sub. pres. 
 2 s., thou mayest hate. 
 
 Abrigar, inf. va., to shelter, to har- 
 bor. 
 
 Abril, nm., April. 
 
 Abrir, inf. va., to open. 
 
 Abstírdo-a, adj., absurd, contrary 
 to reason. 
 
 Abunda, F. abundar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 abounds. 
 
 Abundancia, nf, abundance, plenty. 
 
 Abundante, adj., abundant. 
 
 Abundar, inf. vn., to abound, to 
 have plenty. 
 
 Abusar, inf. va., to abuse, to turn 
 to a bad purpose. 
 
 Abuso, nm., abuse, ill-use. 
 
 Acaba, P. acabar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 finishes, terminates. 
 
 Acabar, inf. va. and vn., to end, to 
 finish, to die. 
 
 Academia, ?if, academy, literary 
 society. 
 
 Acaso, adv., perhaps, perchance. 
 
 Acatádo-a, part., respected, revered. 
 
 Acatar, inf. va., to respect, to re- 
 vere. 
 
 ACT 
 
 Acción, nf, action, act. 
 
 Acerca, F. acercar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 draws near, approaches. 
 
 Acercaba, F. acercar, ind. impf. 3 s., 
 was drawing near, approached. 
 
 Acercar, inf. vn. and vr., to ap- 
 proach, to draw near. 
 
 Acoger, inf. va., to admit into the 
 house, to receive, to protect. 
 
 Acomodádo-a, adj., accommodated, 
 fit, convenient. 
 
 Acomodar, inf. va., to accommo- 
 date ; vr., to condescend. 
 
 Acompañádo-a, part., accompa- 
 nied. 
 
 Acompañar, inf. va., to accompany, 
 to attend. 
 
 Acompañase, F. acompañar, sub. 
 impf 3 s., might accompany. 
 
 Acordar, inf. vn. and vr., to remem- 
 ber, to consider maturely. « 
 
 Acortado, part., shortened. 
 
 Acortar, inf. va., to shorten. 
 
 Acostumbran, F. acostumbrar, ind. 
 pres. 3 p., are accustomed. 
 
 Acostumbraos, F. acostumbrar, 
 imp. 2 p., accustom-yourselves. 
 
 Acostumbrar, inf. va. and vn., to 
 accustom ; to be accustomed. 
 
 Activo-a, adj., active, diligent. 
 
 A'cto, nm., act, action. 
 
 Actual, adj., actual, present. 
 
 Actualidad, nf, actualness ; pres- 
 ent time, present state of things. 
 
352 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 AGE 
 
 Acuérdate, F. accordar, imp. 2 s., 
 
 remember thou. 
 Acuerdo, F. accordar, ind. pres. 1 
 s., I remember. 
 
 Acuerdo, nm., consent. De acuer- 
 do, of one mind. 
 
 Acusa, F. acusar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 accuses, charges. 
 
 Acusádo-a, part., accused, charged. 
 
 Acusador, nm., accuser, impeacher. 
 
 Acusar, inf. va., to accuse, to im- 
 peach, to charge with crime. 
 
 Adelantádo-a, adj., advanced, for- 
 ward, early. 
 
 Ademán, nm., gesture, look, atti- 
 tude. 
 
 Admiración, nf, admiration. 
 
 Admirádo-a, part., admired. 
 
 Admirar, inf. va., to admire; to 
 wonder at. 
 
 Adoptar, inf. va., to adopt. 
 
 Adquirido, part., acquired, gained. 
 
 Adquirir, inf. va., to acquire, to 
 gain. 
 
 Aduana, nf, custom-house. 
 
 Advertir, inf. va., to advise, to in- 
 form. 
 
 Afamádo-a, adj., famed, notorious. 
 
 Afán, nm., solicitude, labor. 
 
 Afanar, inf. va. and vr., to toil, to 
 labor, to be very solicitous. 
 
 Afecto, nm., affection. 
 
 Afeitar, inf. va., to shave. 
 
 Afeminación, nf, effemination, ef- 
 feminateness. 
 
 Afeminádo-a, part, and adj., effem- 
 inated, effeminate. 
 
 Afeminar, inf. va., to effeminate, 
 to enervate. 
 
 Aficiones, F. aficionar, sub. pres. 2 
 s., thou mayest affect, thou may- 
 est fancy. 
 
 Afortunádo-a,ac(;., fortunate, lucky. 
 
 Agéno-a, adj. or indef. pron., for- 
 
 ALE 
 
 eign, another's, of another, of 
 others. 
 
 Agitando, ger., agitating, waving, 
 shaking. 
 
 Agradable, adj., agreeable, pleasant. 
 
 Agradar, inf. va., to please, to grat- 
 ify, to render acceptable. 
 
 Agradecido-a, adj., thankful, grate- 
 ful. 
 
 Agradecimiento, nm., gratitude, 
 gratefulness. 
 
 Agresión, nf, aggression, attack, 
 assault. 
 
 Agricultura, nf, agriculture, hus- 
 bandry. 
 
 A'gua, nf, water. 
 
 Aguardar, inf. va., to wait for, to 
 expect, to grant time. 
 
 Aguaviva, n. prop., Aguaviva. 
 
 Agúdo-a, adj., acute, sharp. 
 
 Ahora, adv., now, the present. 
 
 Aire, nm., air; grace, manner. 
 
 Al, contraction of á el or á él, to 
 the, at the, in the, for the ; or, to 
 him, at him. 
 
 Alaba, F. alabar, ind. pres. 3 s. t 
 praises, commends. 
 
 Alabádo-a, part, and adj., praised, 
 applauded. 
 
 Alarmar, inf. va., to alarm. 
 
 Aláro, n. prop., Alaro. 
 
 A lava, n. prop., Alava. 
 
 Alcalá, n. prop., Alcalá. 
 
 Alcance, nm., arm's length, reach. 
 
 Alcanzar, inf. va., to overtake, to 
 reach, to gain, to obtain. 
 
 Alegrar, inf. va. and vr., to rejoice, 
 to be merry, to gladden, to be 
 glad. 
 
 Alegría, nf., mirth, joy, hilarity, 
 
 Alemán, n. prop., a German. 
 Alemán-a, adj., German. 
 Alemania, n. prop., Germany. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 353 
 
 ANT 
 
 Ambicioso-a, adj., ambitious, aspi- 
 ring. 
 
 A'mbos-as, indef. pron. pi., both. 
 
 Amenaza, F. amenazar, ind. pres. 
 3 .<?., threatens. 
 
 Amenazar, inf. va., to threaten, to 
 menace. 
 
 Amenidad, nf., amenity, pleasant- 
 ness, agreeableness. 
 
 América, n. prop., America. 
 
 Americáno-a, adj., American. 
 
 Amigo, rim., friend. 
 
 Amistad, nf., friendship, amity. 
 
 A'mo, nm., master, owner. 
 
 Amor, nm., love, affection, esteem. 
 
 AmorCso-a, adj*, affectionate, lov- 
 ing. 
 
 Amparo, nm., protection, favor. 
 
 Análisis, nf, analysis. 
 
 A'ncho-a, adj., broad, wide. 
 
 Anciáno-a, adj. and n., old; old 
 man ; old woman. 
 
 Anfiteatro, nm., amphitheatre. 
 
 A'ngel, nm., angel. 
 
 Angosto-a, adj., narrow, close. 
 
 Angostura, nf, narrowness ; a nar- 
 row pass. 
 
 Angustia, nf, anguish, affliction. 
 
 Anhelar, inf. va., to desire anxious- 
 ly, to covet, to wish eagerly. 
 
 Anima, F. animar, ind. pres. 3 s„ 
 animates, revives, revivifies. 
 
 Animado, part., animated. 
 
 Animar, inf. va., to animate, to re- 
 vivify, to revive. 
 
 Aniversario, nm., anniversary. 
 
 Ansiar, inf. va., to be anxious for, 
 to desire anxiously, to long for. 
 
 Ansiosamente, adv., anxiously, ear- 
 nestly. 
 
 Ansidso-a, adj., anxious, eager, un- 
 easy, 
 pursue with anxious desire, to | A'nte, prep., before, in the presence 
 covet. I of. 
 
 , 30* 
 
 AMB 
 
 Algo, indef pron., something, a 
 little, anything, aught. 
 
 A'lgo, adv., somewhat, a little. 
 
 A'lgun, indef pron., some, some 
 one. 
 
 Alguno-a, indef. pron., some, some- 
 body, any, anybody. 
 
 Aliado, nm., ally. 
 
 Alimento, nm., nourishment, food, 
 aliment. 
 
 Alistar, inf. va., to enlist, to enrol. 
 
 Aliviar, inf. va., to succor, to alle- 
 viate, to solace. 
 
 Aljubarróta, n. prop., Aljubarrota. 
 
 Allá, adv., there. 
 
 Allí, adv., there, at that place. 
 
 A'lma, nf, soul, courage, spirit. 
 
 Almacén, nm., storehouse, maga- 
 zine. 
 
 Alrededor, nm., environ, neighbor- 
 hood. 
 
 Altar, nm., altar. 
 
 Altivo-a, adj., haughty, proud, lof- 
 ty. 
 
 A'lto-a, adj., high, tall, lofty. 
 
 A'ma, F. amar, ind. pres. 3 s., loves. 
 
 A'ma, F. amar, imp. 2 s., love 
 thou. 
 
 Amádo-a, part, and adj., loved ; be- 
 loved. 
 
 Amanecer, inf. impers. v., to dawn, 
 to grow light. 
 
 Amante, nm., lover, sweetheart. 
 
 Amante, adj., loving, fond. 
 
 Amar, inf. va., to love, to regard 
 with affection, to like. 
 
 Amárgo-a, adj., bitter, acrid; pain- 
 ful. 
 
 Amarrilléan, F. amarrillear, ind. 
 pres. 3 p., to grow yellow. 
 
 Ambición, nf, ambition. 
 
 Ambicionar, inf. va., to crave, to 
 
354 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 APR 
 
 Anteojo, nm., spy-glass ; eye-glass. 
 Anterior, adj., anterior, former. 
 A'ntes, prep, and adv., before. 
 A'ntes de, and A'ntes que, same as 
 
 antes. 
 Antiguo-a, adj., ancient, old, anti- 
 quated. 
 Anti-nacionál, adj., antinational. 
 Antonio, n. prop., Anthony. 
 Anunciar, inf. va., to announce. 
 Añadió, F. añadir, ind. per/, def. 
 
 3 s., added. 
 Añadir, inf. va., to add. 
 Año, nm., year. 
 
 Apagádo-a, part, and adj., extin- 
 guished, quenched, softened. 
 Aparecer, inf. va., to appear, to come 
 
 forth. 
 Apasionádo-a, adj., very fond. 
 Apático-a, adj., apathetic, indiffer- 
 ent. 
 Apenas, adv., scarcely, as soon as, 
 
 no sooner than. 
 Apetecer, inf. va., to long for, to de- 
 sire earnestly. 
 Aplaudir, inf. va., to applaud. 
 Aplauso, nm., applause, praise, clap- 
 ping. 
 Aplicación, application, direction. 
 Aplicar, inf. va., to apply, to attri- 
 bute. 
 Aplícate, F. aplicar, imp. 2 s., ap- 
 ply thyself. 
 Aplicó, F. aplicar, ind. perf. def. 
 
 3 s., applied. 
 Apologista, nm., apologist, excuser 
 Apreciáble, adj., appreciable, valua- 
 ble. 
 Apreciar, inf. va., to appreciate, to 
 
 value. 
 Aprecio, nm., value, esteem, esti- 
 mation. 
 Aprender, inf. va., to learn, to ac- 
 quire knowledge. 
 
 ARR 
 
 Aprendido-a, part., learnt, under- 
 stood. 
 
 Apretón, nm., pressure ; earnest- 
 ness, energetic action. 
 
 Aprobación, nf., approbation. 
 
 Aprobar, inf. va., to approve. 
 
 Aprueba, F. aprobar, ind. pres.ds., 
 approves. 
 
 A'pto-a, adj., apt, fit. 
 
 Aquél, aquélla, dem.pron., that, that 
 one, the former ; he, she j him, 
 her. 
 
 Aquello, pron. dem., that, that 
 thing. 
 
 Aquí, adv., here, in this place. 
 
 Aragón, n. prop., Arragon. 
 
 A'rbol, nm., tree. 
 
 Archivos, nm. pi, archives, the 
 place where records are preserv- 
 ed ; records* 
 
 Arena, nf, sand. 
 
 Argel, n. prop., Algiers. 
 
 Argelino-a, adj., Algerine. 
 
 A / rma, nf, arm, weapon. 
 
 Armada, nf., fleet, squadron. 
 
 A'rmate, F. armar, imp. 2 s., arm 
 thyself. 
 
 Arranca, F. arrancar, ind.pres. 3 s., 
 plucks out, extirpates, snatches. 
 
 Arrancando, ger., plucking. 
 
 Arrancar, inf. va., to pluck, to ex- 
 tirpate, to snatch, to draw out. 
 
 Arregládo-a, part, and adj., regu- 
 lated ; well organized. 
 
 Arreglar, inf. va., to regulate, to re- 
 duce to order, to organize. 
 
 Arreglo, nm., regulation, order. 
 
 Arremeter, inf. va., to attack, to as- 
 sail with fury. 
 
 Arrepentimiento, nm., repentance, 
 penitence. 
 
 Arrepentirse, inf. vr., to repent, to 
 feel sorrow for something said or 
 done. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 355 
 
 BAJ 
 
 Arrojando, ger., rushing, darting, 
 throwing. 
 
 Arrojar, inf. va., to throw, to dart, 
 to hurl. 
 
 Arruinádo-a, part., ruined. 
 
 A'rte, nm. and nf, art. (It may be 
 either masculine or feminine in 
 the singular ; but feminine only 
 in the plural.) 
 
 Artesano, nm., artisan, mechanic. 
 
 Artificio, nm., art or skill with 
 which a thing is made, work- 
 manship, craft. 
 
 Asegura, F. asegurar, ind.pres. 3 s., 
 assures. 
 
 Asesinar, inf. va. } to assassinate, to 
 murder. 
 
 Asesinato, nm., assassination, mur- 
 der. 
 
 Asesino, nm., assassin, murderer. 
 
 Así, adv., thus, so, in this manner. 
 
 Asiento, nm., seat, chair. 
 
 Asista, P. asistar, imp. 3 s., let 
 (him) assist, may (he) assist. 
 
 Asistencia, nf., assistance, help, aid. 
 
 Aspecto, nm., aspect, look, counte- 
 nance, appearance. 
 
 Aspirar, inf. vn., to aspire, to aim 
 at, to desire. 
 
 Asturias, n. prop., Asturia, a pro- 
 vince in the north of Spain. 
 
 Asunto, nm., affair, business, sub- 
 ject. 
 
 Atenas, n. prop., Athens. 
 
 Atención, nf, attention, civility. 
 
 Atender, inf. vn., to attend, to 
 await. 
 
 Ateniense, n. prop., Athenian. 
 
 BAJ 
 
 Atentar, inf. va., to attempt, to try 
 with circumspection. 
 
 Atractivo, nm., charm, attraction. 
 
 Atribuir, inf. va., to attribute, to as- 
 cribe, to impute. 
 
 Atroz, adj., atrocious, heinous. 
 
 Aturdir, inf. va., to perturb, to dis- 
 turb, to confuse. 
 
 Audacia, nf, audacity, boldness, 
 courage. 
 
 Aumenta, F. aumentar, ind.pres. 
 3 s., increases, augments, en- 
 larges. 
 
 Aumentádo-a, part., increased. 
 
 Aumentar, inf. vn., to augment, to 
 increase, to grow larger. 
 
 Aumento, nm., increase, enlarge- 
 ment, augmentation. 
 
 Aun, adv., yet, still ; conj., notwith- 
 standing. 
 
 Aunque, conj., though, although, 
 even if. 
 
 Aurora, nf, the dawn. 
 
 Austria, n. prop., Austria. 
 
 Autor, 77771., author, inventor. 
 
 Autoridad, nf, authority. 
 
 Avanza, F. avanzar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 advances, goes forward. 
 
 A've, nf., bird, fowl. 
 
 Aventurádo-a, adj., fortunate. 
 
 Avergonzádo-a, part, and adj., 
 shamed, ashamed. 
 
 Averiguar, inf. va., to investigate, 
 to ascertain, to inquire, to find out. 
 
 Ayála, 7i. prop., Ayala. 
 
 Ayudar, inf. va., to aid, to help, to 
 favor. 
 
 Azogue, Tim., quicksilver. 
 
 Bailando, ger., dancing. 
 Bailar, inf. vn., to dance. 
 Bailarín, 77771., dancer. 
 Bajar, inf. va., to lower, to let down, 
 to bend downwards. 
 
 Bajeza, nf, low or mean act, un- 
 worthy action. 
 
 Bájo-a, adj., low, mean. 
 
 Bajo, adv. and prep., under, below, 
 beneath, underneath. 
 
356 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 CAB 
 
 Bala, nf., ball, bullet, shot. 
 
 Balcón, nm., balcony. 
 
 Bandera, nf, banner, standard ; in- 
 fantry. 
 
 Bandido, nm., bandit, highwayman, 
 robber. 
 
 Bando, nm., party, band of men. 
 
 Bañar, inf. va., to bathe, to bedew. 
 
 Burba, nf., beard, chin. 
 
 Bárbaro-a, adj., barbarous. 
 
 Barco, nm., boat. Barco de vapor, 
 steamboat. 
 
 Banil, nm,, barrel. 
 
 Basta, F. bastar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 suffices, is enough; it is suffi- 
 cient. 
 
 Bastante, adv., enough, sufficiently. 
 
 Batalla, nf., battle, fight, contest. 
 
 Batallón, nm., battalion. 
 
 Belén, n. prop., Belen. 
 
 Béllo-a, adj., beautiful, fine, hand- 
 some. 
 
 Belláza, nf., beauty. 
 
 Bendecido-a, part., blessed. 
 
 Bendecirán, F. bendecir, ind. \fut. 
 3 p., they will bless. 
 
 Bendición, nf., benediction, bless- 
 ing. 
 
 Beneficiádo-a, part., benefitted. 
 
 Beneficiar, inf. va., to benefit, to do 
 good to. 
 
 Beneficio, nm., benefit, favor, bene- 
 faction. 
 
 Benétíco-a, adj., beneficent, kind. 
 
 Benevolencia, nf, benevolence, 
 gocd-will, kindness. 
 
 Besar, inf. va., to kiss. 
 
 Bien, nm., good, blessing; property. 
 Bienes, goods, property, wealth. 
 
 CAB 
 
 Bien, adv. and adj., well, good; 
 very. 
 
 Bienhechor, nm., benefactor. 
 
 Blanco, nm., end, aim, object. 
 
 Boca, nf, mouth. 
 
 Bondad, nf. goodness, kindness. 
 
 Borásco, n. prop., Borasco. 
 
 Borrar, inf. va., to efface, to blot 
 out, to expunge. 
 
 Bosque, nm., wood, forest, grove. 
 
 Botica, nf., apothecary's shop. 
 
 Boticario, nm.., apothecary. 
 
 Bravo ! inter., bravo ! bravely done ! 
 good ! 
 
 Brazo, nm., arm. 
 
 Bretaña, n. prop., Britain. 
 
 Brillante, adj., brilliant, splendid. 
 
 Brillo, nm., splendor, brilliancy. 
 
 Brisa, nf., breeze. 
 
 Bruto, nm., brute. 
 
 Buen, adj., good, fine. 
 
 Bueno-a, adj., good; well. 
 
 Buque, nm., vessel, ship. 
 
 Burla, F. burlar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 jests, jokes, laughs at, ridi- 
 cules. 
 
 Burlaron, F. burlar, ind. per/, def. 
 3 p., they ridiculed, they made 
 sport of. 
 
 Burlarse, inf. vr., to jest, to make 
 sport of, to ridicule. 
 
 Busca, nf., search, the act of search- 
 ing. 
 
 Buscaba, F. buscar, ind. impf. 3 s. t 
 was seeking. 
 
 Buscado, part., sought. 
 
 Buscando, ger., seeking. 
 
 Buscar, inf. va., to seek, to search 
 for. 
 
 Caballero, nm., cavalier, gentleman, i Caber, inf. vn., to contain, to have 
 knight, sir. room, to be contained, to find 
 
 Caballo, nm., horse. I place. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 357 
 
 CAN 
 
 Cabeza, nf, head. 
 
 Cabo, nm., end, termination, close. 
 
 Cada, indef pron., each, every. 
 
 Cada cuál, indef. pron., each one. 
 
 Cada uno, indef. pron., every one, 
 every body. 
 
 Cadáver, nm., corpse, dead body. 
 
 Cadena, nf., chain ; series. 
 
 Caen, F. caer, ind. pres. 3 p., they 
 fall. 
 
 Caer, inf. vn., to fall, to befall, to 
 decrease. 
 
 Caído, part., fallen ; decreased. 
 
 Cajún, nm., box, chest. 
 
 Cálculo, nm., calculation, compu- 
 tation. 
 
 Calculista, nm., calculist ; calcula- 
 tor. 
 
 Calahorra, n. prop., Calahorra. 
 
 Callar, inf. vn., to keep silence, to 
 conceal, to be silent. 
 
 Callasen, F. callar, sub. impf. 3 p., 
 they should be silent, should keep 
 silence. 
 
 Calle, nf, street ; road, way. 
 
 Calumniador, nm., calumniator, 
 slanderer. 
 
 Caluróso-a, adj., warm, hot. 
 
 Camaráda, nf, comrade, compan- 
 ion, partner. 
 
 Camarero, nm., steward ; head man- 
 servant in great houses. 
 
 Cambiado, part., changed, shifted. 
 
 Cambiar, inf. va., to change, to al- 
 ter, to shift ; to barter. 
 
 Camino, nm., road, way. Camino 
 de hierro, rail-road. 
 
 Caminíto, nm. dem., little road, 
 path. 
 
 Campo, nm., country ; field. 
 
 Cana, nf, grey hair. 
 
 Canalla, nf, rabble, mob ; popu- 
 lace. 
 
 Canciller, nm., chancellor. 
 
 CAS 
 
 Cansádo-a, part, and adj., fatigued, 
 wearied, tired. 
 
 Cantabria, n. prop., Cantabria. 
 
 Cantidad, nf, quantity, sum. 
 
 Capaz, adj., able, capable, skilful. 
 
 Capital, nf, metropolis, chief city 
 of a country, capital 
 
 Capitular, inf. va., to capitulate. 
 
 Cara, see caro. 
 
 Carabina, nf, carbine, a small rifle. 
 
 Carácter, nm., character, disposi- 
 tion. 
 
 Cardenal, nm., cardinal, one hold- 
 ing the ecclesiastical office of 
 Cardinal. 
 
 Cargádo-a, part., loaded, burdened. 
 
 Cargo, nm., load ; charge ; accusa- 
 tion. 
 Caritativo-a, adj., charitable, kind, 
 
 friendly, benevolent. 
 Carlos, n. prop., Charles. 
 Cáro-a, adj., dear, beloved, high- 
 priced ; costly. 
 ! Carrera, nf, career, course of life, 
 
 profession ; race. 
 ; Carruáge, nm., carriage, vehicle. 
 I Carta, nf, letter, epistle. 
 
 Cartaginés, nm. prop., Carthagin- 
 | ian. 
 
 Cartaginés-a, adj., Carthaginian. 
 i Casa, nf., house ; home. 
 ' Casar, inf. va., to marry. 
 Cascada, nf, cascade, water-fall. 
 Cáseo, nm., cask. 
 Casi, adv., almost, very nearly, just. 
 Caso, nm., case, event ; chance. 
 Castigar, inf. va., to punish, to 
 
 chastise. 
 Castigará, F. castigar, ind. Ifut. 
 
 3 s., will punish. 
 Castigo, nm., punishment, chas- 
 tisement. 
 Castilla, n. prop., Castile. 
 
358 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 CIÉ 
 
 Casualidad, nf, casualty, chance, 
 unforeseen event. 
 
 Casualmente, adv., casually, acci- 
 dentally. 
 
 Catúrce, num. adj., fourteen. 
 
 Caudal, nm., treasure, property. 
 
 Caudillo, nm., commander, chief, 
 leader. 
 
 Causar, inf. va., to cause, to occa- 
 sion, to produce. 
 
 Cautivo, nm., captive, slave. 
 
 Cayendo, ger., falling, tumbling. 
 
 Cayó, F. caer, ind. per/, def 3 s., fell. 
 
 Ceder, inf. va., to grant, to yield, to 
 cede. 
 
 Cediendo, ger., yielding. 
 
 Cediesen, F. ceder, sub. impf. 3. p., 
 they should yield. 
 
 Censura, nf, censure, blame, criti- 
 cism, reproach. 
 
 Centenar, nm., hundred. 
 
 Centro, nm., centre. 
 
 Cérea, adv., near, at hand ; con- 
 cerning. 
 
 Cérea de, prep., near, close to. 
 
 Cercáno-a, adj., near, adjoining. 
 
 Cerdo, nm., hog, pig. 
 
 Cerrádo-a, part., shut, closed. 
 
 Cerrar, inf. va., to close, to shut, to 
 lock. 
 
 Cerro Gurdo, n. prop., Cerro Gordo. 
 
 Cesar, inf. va., to cease, to termi- 
 nate, to close. 
 
 Cetro, nm., sceptre. 
 
 Charlatán, nm., charlatan, quack. 
 
 Chipre, n. prop., Cyprus (an island 
 in the Mediterranean sea). 
 
 Chocante, adj., glaring, provoking, 
 disgusting. 
 
 Cicatriz, nf, the mark remaining 
 after a wound, scar. 
 
 Cielo, nm., heaven; sky, air. 
 
 Ciencia, nf, science, learning, 
 knowledge. 
 
 COM 
 
 Ciertamente, adv., certainly, surely. 
 
 Ciérto-a, adj., certain, sure, true. 
 
 Cima, nf, summit, top. 
 
 Cinco, num. adj., five. 
 
 Cincuenta, num. adj., fifty. 
 
 Circundar, inf. va.. to surround, to 
 encircle. 
 
 Citádo-a, part., cited, mentioned. 
 
 Citar, inf. va., to cite, to mention, 
 to appoint. 
 
 Ciudad, nf, city. 
 
 Ciudadéla, nf, citadel, a small fort- 
 ress situated so as to defend a 
 city. 
 
 Claramente, adv., clearly, plainly. 
 
 Cláro-a, adj., clear, bright ; obvious, 
 manifest. 
 
 Clase, nf, class ; rank, order. 
 
 Clavar, inf. va., to nail, to stick, to 
 prick, to pierce. 
 
 Clima, nm., climate, clime. 
 
 Cobarde, nm. and adj., coward, 
 cowardly. 
 
 Cuche, nm., coach, barouche. 
 
 Codicia, nf, cupidity, desire, covet- 
 ousness. 
 
 Codiciuso-a, adj., greedy, covetous. 
 
 Coger, inf. va., to catch, to collect, 
 to gather. 
 
 Cogerá, F. coger, ind. Ifut. 3 s. t 
 will gather. 
 
 Collado, nm., hill, small eminence. 
 
 Colocan, F. colocar, ind. pres. 3 p., 
 they place. 
 
 Colocádo-a, part., placed, arranged. 
 
 Colocar, inf. va., to place, to ar- 
 range. 
 
 Colunia, nf, colony. 
 
 Combate, nm., fight, combat. 
 
 Combatir, inf. va., to fiífht, to at- 
 tack, to combat. 
 
 Comedia, nf, comedy, play. 
 
 Comencé, F. comenzar, ind. perf 
 def. 1 if., I began, I commenced. 
 
VOCABULARY, 
 
 359 
 
 COM 
 
 Comentario, nm., comment; com- 
 mentary. 
 
 Comenzar, inf. va. and vn., to com- 
 mence, to begin. 
 
 Comer, inf. va., to eat, to dine. 
 
 Comerciante, nm., trader, mer- 
 chant. 
 
 Comerciar, inf. vn., to trade, to traf- 
 fic, to exercise commerce. 
 
 Cometer, inf. va., to commit ; to 
 entrust, to charge ; to attempt. 
 
 Cometido, part., committed. 
 
 Comida, nf, meal, dinner. 
 
 Comisión, nf, commission ; trust. 
 
 Cómo, adv., as, like, in what man- 
 ner. ¿Cómo? how? why? 
 
 Compadecerse, inf. vr., to pity, to 
 commiserate, to feel for. 
 
 Compadecerá, F. compadecerse, ind. 
 I fit. 3 s., will pity, will feel com- 
 passion for. 
 
 Compañero, nm., companion, asso- 
 ciate. 
 
 Compañía, sf, company. 
 
 Comparación, nf, comparison. 
 
 Comparado, part., compared. 
 
 Compasión, nf, compassion, pity. 
 
 Completamente, adv., completely, 
 entirely. 
 
 Completar, inf. va., to complete, to 
 finish, to consummate. 
 
 Compléto-a, adj., complete, entire, 
 finished. 
 
 Cómplice, nm., accomplice, asso- 
 ciate. 
 
 Componer, inf. va., to compose ; to 
 frame. 
 
 Comprehendér, see comprender. 
 
 Comprende, or comprehénde, F. 
 comprender, or comprehendér, ind. 
 pres. 3 s., comprehends, under- 
 stands. 
 
 Comprender, inf. va., to compre- 
 hend, to understand, to comprise. 
 
 CON 
 
 Compró, F. comprar, ind.perfdef 
 3 s., bought, purchased. 
 
 Compuésto-a, part., F. componer, 
 composed, made up. 
 
 Común, adj., common ; vulgar. 
 
 Comunicación, nf, communication, 
 intercourse. 
 
 Comunicar, iif. va., to commu- 
 nicate, to inform. 
 
 Con, prep., with, by, for. Con todo, 
 yet, nevertheless. 
 
 Conceder, inf. va., to concede, to 
 grant, to allow, to give. 
 
 Concedido-a, part., conceded, grant- 
 ed, bestowed. 
 
 Concepto, nm., conception,thought. 
 idea. 
 
 Conciencia, nf, knowledge, con- 
 science. 
 
 Conciudadano, nm., fellow-citizen, 
 fellow-countrymen. 
 
 Concluir, nf. va., to conclude, to 
 close. 
 
 Conde, nm., Count (a title of rank). 
 
 Condenar, inf. va., to condemn, to 
 sentence. 
 
 Condición, nf, condition, situation; 
 disposition. 
 
 Conducir, inf. va., to conduct, to 
 convey. 
 
 Conducta, nf, conduct, behavior, 
 deportment. 
 
 Confiar, inf. va., to confide, to trust 
 in. 
 
 Conflicto, nm., conflict, struggle, 
 contest. 
 
 Confundido-a, part., confounded ; 
 confused. 
 
 Confundir, inf. va., to confound, to 
 perplex, to throw into confusion. 
 
 Confusión, nf, confusion, disorder. 
 
 Congreso, nm., congress. 
 
 Conjurar, inf. va., to conjure, to im- 
 plore. 
 
360 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 CON 
 
 Conmigo, prep, and pron., with me. 
 
 Conocen, F. conocer, ind.pres. 3 p., 
 they know. 
 
 Conocer, inf. va., to know, to un- 
 derstand. 
 
 Conociendo, ger., knowing, being 
 acquainted with. 
 
 Conocimiento, nm., knowledge, 
 learning, acquaintance. 
 
 Conquista, nf., conquest ; subjuga- 
 tion. 
 
 Conquistadór,r#m.,eonqueror,victor. 
 
 Conquistar, inf. va., to conquer, to 
 subdue. 
 
 Consagrádo-a, part., and adj., con- 
 secrated; sacred, devoted. 
 
 Consagrar, inf. va., to consecrate, to 
 devote. 
 
 Conseguir, inf. va., to succeed, to 
 obtain, to attain. 
 
 Consejo, nm., advice, counsel, judg- 
 ment. 
 
 Conservar, inf. va., to preserve, to 
 guard. 
 
 Considera, F. considerar, ind.pres. 
 3 s. and imp. 2 s., considers ; con- 
 sider thou. 
 
 Considerar, inf. va., to consider, to 
 reflect, to think. 
 
 Consignar, inf. va., to consign. 
 
 Consiguió, F. conseguir, ind. perf. 
 def. 3 s., succeeded, gained. 
 
 Consigo, prep, and pron., with him, 
 with you, with themselves. 
 
 Consolador-a, adj., consolatory, 
 tending to give comfort. 
 
 Consolar, inf. va., to console, to 
 comfort, to assuage. 
 
 Consta, F. constar, ind. pres. 3 s., it 
 is evident, it appears. 
 
 Constancia, nf, constancy, steadi- 
 ness. 
 
 Constar, inf. v. impers., to be evi- 
 dent, to appear from. 
 
 CON 
 
 Constituido-a, part., constituted ; 
 bound. 
 
 Construir, inf. va., to construct, to 
 form, to build. 
 
 Consuelo, nm., consolation, relief, 
 comfort. 
 
 Consumado-a, adj. and part., con- 
 summate, complete, accomplish- 
 ed. 
 
 Contando, ger., counting, reck- 
 oning ; relying, relating. 
 
 Contar, inf. va., to count, to num- 
 ber ; to relate ; to rely. 
 
 Contempla, F. contemplar, ind.pres. 
 3 s., contemplates ; and imp. 2 s., 
 contemplate thou. 
 
 Contemplar, inf. va., to contem- 
 plate. 
 
 Contentar, inf. va., to satisfy, to 
 please, to gratify. 
 
 Conténto-a, adj., contented, satis- 
 fied. 
 
 Contestar, inf. va., to reply, to an- 
 swer, to prove. 
 
 Contigo, prep, andpron., with thee, 
 with thyself. 
 
 Contiguo-a, adj., contiguous, ad- 
 joining. 
 
 Continente, nm., continent, main- 
 land. 
 
 Continuamente, adv., continually, 
 always. 
 
 Continuando, ger., continuing, last- 
 ing. 
 
 Continuar, inf. vn., to continue, to 
 last. 
 
 Continuó, F. continuar, ind. perf 
 def. 3 s., he continued. 
 
 Continuo-a, adj., continual ; inces- 
 sant. 
 
 Cúntra, prep., against, contrary to. 
 
 Contrário-a, adj., contrary. Al 
 contrario or por el contrario, on 
 the contrary. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 361 
 
 COS 
 
 Contribuido-a, part., contributed. 
 Contribuir, inf. va., to contribute, 
 
 to bear a part. 
 Contusión, nf, contusion 
 Convencido, part., convinced. 
 Convento, nm., convent. 
 
 Conversar, inf. vn., to talk, to con- 
 verse. 
 
 Convertir, inf. fa., to convert, to 
 changa 
 
 Convierte, F. convertir, ind. pres. 
 3 s., converts. 
 
 Convocar, inf. va., to convoke, to 
 assemble, to call together. 
 
 ConvulsiGn, nf, convulsion. 
 
 COpa, nf, cup ; meeting of the 
 branches of trees, bovver. 
 
 Corazun,n??j., heart; spirit, courage. 
 
 CorCna, nf, crown. 
 
 Coronar, inf. va., to crown, to or- 
 nament or decorate the top of any- 
 thing. 
 
 Correo, nm., mail, post. 
 
 Correr, inf. va., to run. Correr pe- 
 ligro, to be in peril or danger. 
 
 Corriente, adj., current, marketable, 
 merchantable. 
 
 Corroborádo-a, part,, confirmed, 
 corroborated. 
 
 Corroborar, inf. va., to confirm, to 
 corroborate. 
 
 Corsario, run., corsair, the com- 
 mander of a privateer. 
 
 CGrte, nf, court, capital city, royal 
 residence. 
 
 Cortedad, nf, shortness, brevity. 
 
 Cortés, adj., courteous, polite, civil, 
 genteel. 
 
 Cihto-a, adj., short; small, concise. 
 
 Cosa, ??/., thing. Cosa de, prep., 
 about, concerning. 
 
 Cosecha, nf, harvest, crops. 
 
 Costa, nf, cost, expense, charge ; 
 coast. 
 
 31 
 
 CUA 
 
 Costar, inf. vn., to cost, to be bought 
 for ; to suffer loss. 
 
 Costumbre, nf., custom, habit, man- 
 ners. 
 
 Creando, ger., creating, making. 
 
 Crear, inf. va., to create, to make, 
 to establish. 
 
 Crecer, inf. vn., to grow, to in- 
 crease, to augment. 
 
 Crecido-a, part., grown, increased. 
 
 Creer, inf. va., to believe, to think, 
 to credit. 
 
 Creías, F. creer, ind. impf 
 2 s., thou wast believing, thou 
 thoughtest. 
 
 Criado, nm., male-servant. 
 
 Crimen, nnu, crime, offence. 
 
 Criminal, adj., criminal. 
 
 Crisol, nm., crucible. 
 
 Crítica, nf, criticism. 
 
 Crítico, nm., critic, criticiser. 
 
 Crónica, nf, chronicle, register of 
 events. 
 
 Cruzádo-a, part., crossed. 
 
 Cruzar, inf. va., to cross ; to lay 
 one thing across another. 
 
 Cuadruplicar, inf. va., to quadrupli- 
 cate, to increase four times. 
 
 Cuál {el or la), pron. rel., which, 
 who, that. 
 
 Cuál ? pron. interrog., which 1 (of 
 the two.) Cada cual, each one. 
 
 Cuál; adv., as, like. 
 
 Cualesquiera, indef. pron. pi., who- 
 ever, any body who, whatever. 
 
 Cualidad, nf, quality, qualifica- 
 tion. 
 
 Cualquier, indef. pron., whoever, 
 whichever, whatever, any. 
 
 Cualquiera, indef. pron., whoever, 
 whatever, he who, any one. 
 
 Cuan, adv., how, how much. 
 
 Cuándo, adv., when ; in case that» 
 if. 
 
362 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 DEB 
 
 Cuánto-a, adj., as much as, as ma- 
 ny as, whatever, whoever,, all that 
 which, all those who. 
 
 Cuánto, adv., the more, how much. 
 
 Cuarenta, adj. num., forty. 
 
 Cuarto, rim., cuarto (a copper coin 
 of which 170 make a dollar) ; a 
 room, apartment. 
 
 Cuarto-a, adj. num., fourth. 
 
 Cuatro, adj. num., four. 
 
 Cubiérto-a, part., covered, over- 
 spread. 
 
 Cubrir, inf. va., to cover ; to cloak, 
 to mask. 
 
 Cuenta, nf, account, narration ; 
 reckoning. 
 
 Cuerpo, nm., body. 
 
 Cuidado, nm.¡ care, anxiety, atten- 
 tion. 
 
 DEC 
 
 Cuidado! inter j., have a care! be 
 careful ! 
 
 Cuidadosamente, adv., carefully,, 
 cautiously. 
 
 Culpa, nf., blame, fault. 
 
 Culpádo-a, adj., blameable, guilty. 
 
 Cultivar, inf. va., to cultivate. 
 
 Cultura, nf, culture, improvement. 
 
 Cumplir, inf. va., to fill, to fulfil, to 
 accomplish, to execute. 
 
 Cuna., nf, cradle, birth-place ; line- 
 age. 
 
 Cúpula, nf, cupola, dome. 
 
 Curádo-a, part., cured, healed. 
 
 Curiosidad, nf, curiosity, curious- 
 ness. 
 
 Curioso-a, adj., curious, strange. 
 
 Cuyo-a, pron.rel., whose, of whom, 
 of which. 
 
 Dá, F. dar, ind. pres. 3 s., gives. 
 Dá, F. dar, imp. 2 s., give thou. 
 Daban, F. dar, ind. impf. 3 p., they 
 
 gave, they were-giving. 
 Dado, part., given, granted. Dado 
 
 que, (conj.,) provided that. 
 Dando, ger., giving. 
 Danza, nf, dance. 
 Daño, nm., damage, mischief, in- 
 jury. 
 Dar, inf. va., to give, to grant, to 
 
 bestow. 
 Dato, nm., a fact or truth granted 
 
 and admitted, datum. Datos (pi.), 
 
 data. 
 De, prep., of, from, with, off, at. 
 Dé, F. dar, sub. pres. 1 or 3 s., may 
 
 give. 
 Debajo, prep., under, below. 
 Debe, F. deber, ind. pres. 3 
 
 ought, must, is to, owes. 
 Debéis, F. deber, ind. pres. 2 p., 
 
 ought, you must ; you owe. 
 
 Debemos, F. deber, ind. pres. 1 p., 
 we ought ; we owe. 
 
 Deben, F. deber, ind. pres. 3 p., 
 they ought, must ; owe. 
 
 Deber, nm., duty, obligation. 
 
 Deber, inf. aux. v., ought, should, 
 must ; va., to owe, to be indebt- 
 ed to. 
 
 Debes, F. deber, ind. pres. 2 s., 
 thou oughtest ; thou owest. 
 
 Debidamente, adv., duly, justly, ex- 
 actly. 
 
 Debiera, F. deber, sub. impf 3 s., 
 should, ought ; he should owe. 
 
 Debieran, F. deber, sub. impf 3 p., 
 should, ought ; they should owe. 
 
 Débil, adj., weak, feeble. 
 
 Debo, F. deber, ind. pres. 1 s., I 
 must, I ought, I owe. 
 
 Decencia, nf, decency, honesty, 
 
 modesty. 
 Decía, F. decir, ind. impf 1 or 3 s. } 
 said, was saying. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 363 
 
 DEM 
 
 Decir, inf. va., to say, to tell, to 
 speak, to declare. 
 
 Declaman, F. declamar, ind. pres. 
 3 p., declaim. 
 
 Declaración, nf, declaration. 
 
 Dedicar, inf. va., to dedicate, to 
 consecrate. 
 
 Defecto, nm., defect, error, fault, 
 mistake. 
 
 Defender, inf. va., to defend, to pro- 
 tect, to resist, to maintain. 
 
 Defensa, nf., defence, guard, shelter. 
 
 Degradar, inf. va., to degrade. 
 
 Dejado, part., left, relinquished ; 
 permitted. 
 
 Dejar, inf. va., to leave, to relin- 
 quish ; to permit, to let. Dejar 
 de, to fail to. 
 
 Dejes, F. dejar, sub. pres. 2 s., thou- 
 mayest permit. 
 
 Del, prep, and art., of the, from the, 
 by the, in the. 
 
 Del, prep, and pron., of him, from 
 him, by him, of that, from that, 
 by it. 
 
 Delante, adv. and prep., before, in 
 the presence of. Delante de, be- 
 fore. 
 
 Deleitable, adj., delectable, pleas- 
 ing, delightful. 
 
 Delicadeza, nf, delicacy, tender- 
 ness, refinement. 
 
 Delicádo-a, adj., delicate", pleasing, 
 nice. 
 
 Delicia, nf, delight, comfort, satis- 
 faction. 
 
 Delicioso-a, adj., delicious, delight- 
 ful. 
 
 Delineado, part., delineated, de- 
 scribed, sketched. 
 
 Demandar, inf. va., to demand, to 
 ask, to petition. 
 
 Demás, adv. and adj. (It is nearly 
 always used with an article before 
 
 DES 
 
 it,) over and above. Los demás, 
 las demás, the rest, the others. 
 
 Demasiádo-a, adj., overmuch, ex- 
 cessive, too much. 
 
 Demasiado, adv., too, enough, ex- 
 cessively. 
 
 Demostrar, inf. va., to prove, to 
 show, to demonstrate. 
 
 Denodádo-a, adj., bold, intrepid, 
 daring. 
 
 Dentro, or, dentro de, prep., in, 
 within. 
 
 Denuedo, nm., boldness, intrepidi- 
 ty, courage. 
 
 Denunciar, inf. va., to denounce. 
 
 Derecho, nm., law, equity, right. 
 
 Derécho-a, adj., rightful, straight, 
 just, lawful. 
 
 Derramádo-a, part., shed, diffused. 
 
 Derraman, F. derramar, ind. pres. 
 3 p., shed, diffuse ; bestow. 
 
 Derramar, inf. va., to shed, to dif- 
 fuse, to spread, to pour forth, to 
 bestow bountifully. 
 
 Derredur, nm., circumference, vi- 
 cinity. Al derredor, or en derre- 
 dor, around. 
 
 Derribádo-a, part., demolished, ru- 
 ined, overthrown. 
 
 Derrite, F. derretir, ind. pres. 3 s. } 
 melts, thaws. 
 
 Desagradable, adj., disagreeable, 
 unpleasant. 
 
 Desanimádo-a, part., disheartened, 
 discouraged, dispirited. 
 
 Desaparecer, inf. vn., to disappear. 
 
 Desapasionádo-a, adj., dispassion- 
 ate, impartial. 
 
 Desaprobar, inf. va., to disapprove, 
 to censure, to condemn. 
 
 Desarregládo-a, part, and adj., dis- 
 ordered, discomposed: immode- 
 rate, unrestrained. 
 
 Desastr6so-a, adj., disastrous. 
 
364 
 
 VOCABULAE.Y. 
 
 DES 
 
 Descanso, nm., rest, repose, tran- 
 quillity^ relaxation. 
 
 Descendiente, nm., descendant. 
 
 Desclavar, inf. va., to unnail, to 
 draw out nails. 
 
 Desconocer, inf. va., to disown, to 
 be ignorant of, to be unacquaint- 
 ed. 
 
 Desconociendo, ger., not knowing, 
 being ignorant of. 
 
 Desconfianza, nf., distrust, mis- 
 trust, want of confidence, jeal- 
 ousy. 
 
 Desconfiar, inf. va., to distrust, to 
 suspect, to hav« no confidence in. 
 
 Desconsuelo, nm., affliction, want 
 of consolation, trouble. 
 
 Descubiérto-a, part, and adj., un- 
 covered, discovered, unclosed, 
 open. 
 
 Desde, prep., from, since, after. 
 
 Desdicha, nf., misfortune, unhappi- 
 ness. 
 
 Desdoro, nm., dishonor, blemish, 
 stain. 
 
 Desear, inf. va., to desire, to wish, 
 to demand. 
 
 Desechar, inf. va., to expel, to drive 
 away. 
 
 Desenfreno, nm., unruliness, rash- 
 ness, licentiousness. 
 
 Deseo, nm., desire, wish. 
 
 DeseOso-a, adj., desirous, anxious. 
 
 Desfachatez, nf, impudence, ef- 
 frontery. 
 
 Desgarrado, part., torn, rent. 
 
 Desgracia, nf, misfortune, adver- 
 sity. 
 
 Desgraciademénte, adv., unfortu- 
 nately, unhappily. 
 
 Desgraciádo-a, adj., unfortunate, 
 unhappy, unlucky. 
 
 DeshonrCso-a, adj., dishonorable, 
 disgraceful, indecent. 
 
 DET 
 
 Desigual, adj., unequal ; unjust. 
 
 Deslizar, inf. va., to slip, to slide. 
 
 Despecho, nm., displeasure, dis- 
 may, despair, indignation. 
 
 Despeja, F. despejar, ind.pres. 3 s., 
 to clear away, to clear up. 
 
 Despotismo, nm., despotism, abso- 
 lute power. 
 
 Despreciable, adj., despicable, con- 
 temptible. 
 
 Despreciádo-a, part., despised, 
 scorned. 
 
 Despreciar, inf. ra., to despise, to 
 disdain, to depreciate, to con- 
 temn. 
 
 Desprecies, F. despreciar, sub. pres. 
 2 s., thou mayest despise. 
 
 Desprendido, part., loosened, sepa- 
 rated. 
 
 Después, or, después de, prep., af- 
 ter, next to. 
 
 Después que, adv., afterward, after. 
 
 Destino, nm., destiny, fate, doom, 
 lot. 
 
 Destituido-a, part., deprived, strip- 
 ped, being destitute. 
 
 Destruir, inf. va., to destroy, to 
 ruin, to lay waste. 
 
 Destruyendo, ger., destroying, lay- 
 ing waste. 
 
 Desvelo, nm., wakefulness, inabili- 
 ty to sleep. 
 
 Detención, nf, detention, delay, 
 stopping. 
 
 Detener, inf. va., to detain, to hin- 
 der, to stop, to keep, to arrest. 
 
 Determinación, nf., determination, 
 decision, resolution. 
 
 Determinádo-a, part, and adj., áe- 
 termined, resolute, bold. 
 
 Detrás, prep, and adv., behind. 
 Detras de, behind. 
 
 Detuvimos, F. detener, ind. perf 
 def 1 p., we stopped. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 365 
 
 DÍS 
 
 Di, F. dar, ind. perf. def 1 s., I 
 
 ft gave. 
 
 Di, F. decir, imp. 2s., say thou, tell 
 thou. 
 
 Día, nm., day. 
 
 Dice, F. decir, ind. pres. 3 s., says, 
 he says. 
 
 Dicha, 77/'., happiness, fortune, feli- 
 city. 
 
 Dicho-a, part., said, mentioned. 
 
 Diciendo, ger., saying, telling. 
 
 Diez, num. adj., ten. 
 
 Diferenciar, inf. va. and vr., to dif- 
 fer, to be unlike. 
 
 Diferente, adj., different, dissimilar, 
 unlike. 
 
 Difícil, adj., difficult, arduous. 
 
 Dificultad, nf., difficulty, embar- 
 rassment, obstacle. 
 
 Dificultóso-a, adj., difficult, trouble- 
 some. 
 
 Dignidad, nm., dignity, excellence, 
 rank, advancement, preferment. 
 
 Digno-a, adj., worthy, deserving. 
 
 Dijo, F. decir, ind. perf. def. 3 s., 
 said, he or she said. 
 
 Diligencia, 77/., diligence ; stage- 
 coach or diligence. 
 
 Dinero, nm., money, wealth. 
 
 Dio, F. dar, ind. perf def 3 s., 
 gave ; he or she gave. 
 
 Diús, 71. prop., God. 
 
 Diré, F. decir, ind. 1 Jut. 1 s., I shall 
 say. 
 
 Dirigir, or dirijir, inf. va., to rule, to 
 direct, to guide, to govern. 
 
 Discernimiento, nm., discernment, 
 judgment, clearsightedness. 
 
 Discordia, nf, discord, disagree- 
 ment. 
 
 Discípulo, nm., disciple, pupil, stu- 
 dent. 
 
 Disgustádo-a, part., disgusted, dis- 
 pleased. 
 
 31* 
 
 DOR 
 
 Disgvisto, nm., disgust, loathing, 
 offence. 
 
 Disminuye, F. disminuir, ind. pres. 
 3 s., diminishes, lessens, impairs. 
 
 Disminuido-a, part., diminished, 
 lessened. 
 
 Disparo, nm., discharge, explosion. 
 
 Dispensar, inf. va., to dispense, to 
 excuse, to diffuse. 
 
 Dispuésto-a, part, and adj., dis- 
 posed ; ready. 
 
 Disputar, inf. va., to dispute, to 
 contend. 
 
 Distinguir, inf. va., to distinguish, 
 to perceive, to discern. 
 
 Distinguido-a, part., distinguished, 
 noted. 
 
 Distinción, nf, distinction 
 
 Distintamente, adv., distinctly. 
 
 Distinto-a, adj., distinct, different. 
 
 Distraer, inf. va., to distract, draw 
 off the attention, to perplex. 
 
 Distraido-a, part, and adj., distract- 
 ed ; inattentive. 
 
 Divérso-a, adj., diverse, different, 
 various. 
 
 Dividir, inf. va., to divide, disjoin, 
 separate. 
 
 Divisar, ¿7?/. va., to descry, to per- 
 ceive. 
 
 Do, adv., where. See Donde. 
 
 Doblez, nm., duplicity, double-deal- 
 ing. 
 
 Documento, sm., document, writing. 
 
 D6I0, nm., fraud, wile, deceit, trick. 
 
 Dominar, inf. va., to rule, to master. 
 
 Don, nm., Don (a title of respect). 
 
 Don nm., gift, a present. 
 
 Dónde, adv., whefe, in what place. 
 
 Doña, 77/., Lady, Mistress (Mrs.), 
 Madame, (a title of respect ap- 
 pled to ladies.) 
 
 Dorádo-a, adj., gilt, golden. 
 
 Dormir, infvn., to sleep. 
 
366 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ELE 
 
 Dos, num. adj., two. 
 
 Dudar, inf. va., to doubt, to be un- 
 certain. 
 
 Dudas, F. dudar, sub. pres. 2 s., 
 thou mayest doubt. 
 
 Duelo, nm., affliction, grief; duel. 
 
 Dueño, nm., owner, proprietor, 
 master. 
 
 ENC 
 
 Dulce, adj., soft, gentle, sweet. 
 Dulzura, sf, sweetness, softne^f, 
 
 gentleness, tenderness. 
 Duque, nm., Duke. 
 Duradéro-a, adj., lasting, durable. 
 Durante, prep., during. 
 Durar, inf. vn., to last, to endure, 
 
 to continue. 
 
 JE. 
 
 E', conj., and (used instead of y, be- 
 fore a word beginning with i or 
 hi). 
 Echando, ger., throwing, casting. 
 Echar, inf. va., to throw, to cast ; 
 
 to apply, to compute. 
 Echara, F. echar, sub. impf 3 s., he 
 
 should throw. 
 E'co, nm., echo. 
 Ecsaminár, see examinar. 
 Ecsistír, see existir. 
 Edad, nf, age. 
 Edicto, nm., edict, order. 
 Edificar, inf. va., to build, to con- 
 struct, to edify, to instruct. 
 Educación, nf, education, instruc- 
 tion. 
 Efecto, nm., effect, purpose. En 
 
 efecto, in fact, indeed. 
 Ejemplo, nm., example, precedent. 
 Ejercer, inf. va., to exercise, to 
 
 practice. 
 Ejerciendo, ger., exercising. 
 Ejército, nm., army, host. 
 El, def art., the : él, pers. pron., he, 
 
 it ; dem. pron., that. 
 Elécto-a, part., elected, chosen. 
 Electricidad, nf., electricity. 
 Eléctrico-a, adj., electrical. 
 Elegancia, nf., elegance, graceful- 
 ness. 
 Elegir, inf. va., to elect, to select, to 
 
 choose. 
 Elejir, or, elijir, see elegir. 
 
 Elena, n. prop., Ellen, Helen. San' 
 ta Elena, St. Helena (an island 
 of that name). 
 Elijido-a, or elegido-a, part., elect- 
 ed, selected. 
 Eligieron, P. eligir, ind. perf. def. 
 
 3 p., they selected. 
 E'lla, pers. pron.f, she, it; her. 
 E'llo, pers. pron. neuter, it. 
 Embarcación, nf. y vessel, boat. 
 Embargo, nm., embargo, seques- 
 tration. Sin embargo, notwith- 
 standing. 
 Embarrilar, inf. va., to barrel, to 
 
 put into a barrel. 
 Embustero, nm., liar; hypocrite, 
 
 impostor. 
 Emperador, nm., emperor, monarch. 
 Empero, conj., but, however, yet. 
 Empezar, inf. va., to begin, to 
 
 commence. 
 Empieza, P. empezar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 
 begins, it begins. 
 Empiezan, F. empezar, ind. pres. 
 
 3 p., they begin. 
 Emplear, inf. va., to occupy, to em- 
 ploy. 
 Empujádo-a, part., pushed, pushed 
 
 away. 
 E'mulo, nm., rival, competitor. 
 En, prep., in, into, at, on, upon. 
 Encadenar, inf. va., to chain, to en- 
 thral, to fetter. 
 Encanecido-a, part., grown grey. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 367 
 
 ENT 
 Encargádo-a, part., charged with, 
 
 entrusted. 
 Encontrar, inf. vet-, to meet, to en- 
 counter, to find, to light upon. 
 Encuentra, F. encontrar, ind. pres. 
 
 3 s., meets, meets with. 
 Encuentran, F. encontrar, ind. pres. 
 
 3 p., meet, find, they find. 
 Enemigo, nm., enemy, opponent. 
 Enemigo-a, adj., inimical, of the 
 
 enemy. 
 Energía, nf., energy, power, force. 
 Enfermedad,™/"., infirmity, sickness. 
 Enférmo-a, adj., sick, infirm. 
 Enfrenase, F. enfrenar, sub. impf. 
 3 s., would restrain, would curb. 
 Engañar, inf. va., to deceive, to 
 
 cheat, to mislead, to hoax. 
 Engrandecimiento, nm., aggran- 
 dizement. 
 Enjambre, nf, swarm, crowd. 
 Ennoblecer, inf. va., to ennoble. 
 Enorgullecer, inf. vr., to pride one's 
 
 self, to be haughty. 
 Enrique, n. prop., Henry. 
 Enrojecer, inf. va., to tinge, to red- 
 den. 
 Ensalce, F. ensalzar, sub. pres. 3 s., 
 
 may boast, may extol. 
 Ensalzar, inf. va., to extol, to boast. 
 Ensangrentádo-a, part., stained 
 
 with blood, covered with blood. 
 Ensayádo-a, part., tried, essayed, 
 
 proved. 
 Ensayar, inf. va., to try, to make 
 trial of, to essay, to examine, to 
 prove. 
 Ensayo, nm., trial essay; proof, 
 
 experiment. 
 E'nte, nm., being, entity. 
 Entender, inf. va., to understand, to 
 
 comprehend. 
 Entendimiento, nm., understand- 
 ing, judgment, mind, knowledge. 
 
 ESC 
 
 Entero -a, adj., entire, completo, 
 
 whole. 
 Entiende, F. entender, ind. pres. 
 
 3s., understands, he understands. 
 Entiendo, F. entender, ind. pres. 
 
 1 &, I understand. 
 Entonces, adv., then, at that time. 
 Entrando, ger., entering. 
 Entrañas, nf pi., entrails, internal 
 
 parts of any thing. 
 Entrar, inf. va., to enter, to go in. 
 E'ntre, prep., among, between. 
 Entremos, F. entrar, imp. 1 p., let 
 
 us enter. 
 Entró, F. entrar, ind. perf def. 
 
 3 s., entered, he entered. 
 Envanecer, inf. vn., to make vain, 
 
 to become proud or haughty. 
 Envanecimiento, nm-, haughtiness, 
 
 vanity. 
 Envanezcan, F. envanecer, imp. 
 
 3 p., let (them) pride themselves. 
 Envidiéis, F. envidiar, sub. pres. 
 
 2 p., ye may envy ; imp., envy 
 ye, do ye envy. 
 
 Envidióso-a,ac/7'., envious, invidious. 
 
 E'poca, nf, epoch, period of time. 
 
 Equivalente, adj., equivalent, equal. 
 
 Equivoco-a, adj., equivocal, am- 
 biguous. 
 
 E'ra, F. ser, ind. impf. 3 s., was, he 
 or it was. 
 
 E'ran, F. ser, ind. impf. 3 p., were, 
 they were. 
 
 Erigido-a, part, erected, raised. 
 
 Erijido-a, part. See erigido. 
 
 Es, F. ser, ind. pres. 3 s., is, he is,. 
 it is, she is. 
 
 E'sa, see ese. 
 
 Escapado, part., escaped. 
 
 Escarmiento, nm., fine, punish- 
 ment, penalty. 
 
 Escarnecer, inf. va., to mock, to 
 ridicule, to make sport of 
 
368 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ESP 
 
 Escarnecido, part., mocked, scoffed 
 
 at. 
 Escelénte, adj., excellent. 
 Escena, nf, scene, vicissitude; 
 
 stage of a theatre. 
 Escepto, adv., except, excepting. 
 Escipión, n. prop., Scipio. 
 Escitár, inf. va., to excite, to move, 
 
 to stimulate, to instigate. 
 Esclamár, inf. vn., to exclaim, to 
 
 cry out. 
 Esclavitud, nf., slavery, servitude, 
 
 Esclavo, Jim,, slave, captive. 
 
 Esclusivo-a, adj., exclusive". 
 
 Escoger, ivf. va., to select, to choose. 
 
 Escogido-a, part., selected, chosen. 
 
 Escolta, nf, escort, convoy. 
 
 Esconder, inf. va., to hide, to con- 
 ceal ; to disguise, to include. 
 
 Escriba, P. escribir, subj.pres. 1 or 
 3 s., may write. 
 
 Escribió, P. escribir, ind. perf. def 
 3 si, wrote. 
 
 Escribir, inf. va., to write, to com- 
 pose. 
 
 Escrito, nm., writing, composition. 
 
 Escrito-a, part., written, composed. 
 
 Escritor, nm., writer, author. 
 
 Escuchar, inf. va., to listen to, to 
 heed, to hearken. 
 
 Escusár, inf. va r ., to excuse, to 
 liberate, to exempt. 
 
 F/se-a, dem. pron., that, that one. 
 
 Esencial, ad;'., essential, important. 
 
 Esfuerzo, nm., effort, courage, ex- 
 ertion. 
 
 E'so, dem. pron., that thing. 
 
 E'sos-as, dem. pron. pi., those, 
 those persons or things. 
 
 Espacio, nm., space, period, interval. 
 
 Espada, nf, sword. 
 
 España, n. prop.f, Spain. 
 
 Español, nm., a Spaniard ; the 
 
 EST 
 
 Spanish language (idioma under, 
 stood). 
 
 Españól-a, adj., Spanish. 
 
 Especie, nf, species, sort, kind, 
 specimen, subject. 
 
 Especulación, nf, speculation, ex- 
 amination. 
 
 Espedición, nf, expedition ; ac- 
 tivity. . 
 
 Esperar, inf. va.., to expect, to hope, 
 to await. 
 
 Esperiéncia, nf, experience ; know- 
 ledge. 
 
 Esperimentár, inf. va., to experi- 
 ence, to learn or know by prac- 
 tice ; to experiment. 
 
 Espesura, nf, thicket ; thickness. 
 
 Espina, nf, thorn, brier. 
 
 Espirádo-a, part., expired, being 
 finished. 
 
 Espirar, inf. va., to expire^ to come 
 to an end. 
 
 Espléndido-a, adj., splendid, mag- 
 nificent, brilliant. 
 
 Esplicitamente, adv., explicitly, 
 plainly. 
 
 Esponér, inf. va., to expose, to ex- 
 plain. 
 
 Esqueleto, nm., skeleton; carcass. 
 
 Esquivo-a, adj., fastidious, shy, re- 
 served, stubborn. 
 
 E'sta, dem. pron.f, this, this one, 
 she. 
 
 Está, P. estar, ind.pres. 3 s., is, ex- 
 ists, it is. 
 
 Estaba, P. estar, ind. imyf. 3 s., was. 
 
 Establecer, inf. va., to settle, to es- 
 tablish. 
 
 Establecido, part., established. 
 
 Estación, nf, season of the year ; 
 state. 
 
 Estadística, nf, statistics. 
 
 Estado, nm., state, rank, condition. 
 Estados Unidos, United States. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 369 
 
 FAC 
 
 Estado, part., been, existed. 
 
 Estamos, F. estar, ind.pres. 1 p., 
 we are. 
 
 Estar, inf. vn., to be, to exist. 
 
 Estasiádo-a, adj. or part., full of en- 
 thusiasm or rapture, carried away 
 with overpowering emotion. 
 
 E'ste-a, dem. pron., this, this one ; 
 the latter. 
 
 Esté, F. estar, subj. pres. 3 s., may 
 be, he may be. 
 
 Estendido. part., extended, en- 
 larged. 
 
 Esténso-a, adj., extensive, ample, 
 large. 
 
 Estenuádo-a, part., diminished, ex- 
 tenuated, weakened. 
 
 Estéril, adj., barren, sterile, un- 
 fruitful. 
 
 Esterlin, adj., sterling, lawful Eng- 
 lish money. 
 
 Esterminár, inf. va., to exterminate, 
 to banish, to root out. 
 
 Esterminio, nm., expulsion, exter- 
 mination, banishment. 
 
 Estimádo-a, part, esteemed, re- 
 spected. 
 
 Estimar, inf. va., to estimate, to 
 value, to esteem. 
 
 Estirpaciún, nf, extirpation, eradi- 
 cation, rooting out. 
 
 E'sto, dem. pron. neuter, this, this 
 thing. 
 
 Estúy, F. estar, ind.pres. 1 s., I am. 
 
 Estrago, nm., ruin, havoc, ravage. 
 
 Estrangéro, or, estranjéro, nm., 
 stranger, foreigner. 
 
 Estrañes, F. estrañar, subj. pres. 2s., 
 
 FAC 
 
 thou mayest be astonished, thou 
 mayest wonder. 
 
 Estraño-a, adj., strange, foreign. 
 
 Estraordinário-a, adj., extraordina- 
 ry- 
 
 Estrémo, nm., extremity, end, ex- 
 treme 
 
 Estudiar, inf. va., to study. 
 
 Estudio, 727/1., study ; attention. 
 
 Estupor, nm., stupor, astonishment. 
 
 Estuviera, F. estar, subj. impf. 3 s.> 
 should be. 
 
 Estuvo, F. estar, ind.perf. def 3 s. } 
 was, he, she or it was. 
 
 Etérno-a, adj., eternal, endless. 
 
 Europa, n. prop./., Europe. 
 
 Européo-a, adj., European. 
 
 Evitar, inf. va., to shun, to avoid, 
 to prevent. 
 
 Exactamente, adv., exactly, pre- 
 cisely. 
 
 Exactitud, nf., exactness, justness; 
 assiduity. 
 
 Examen, tun., examination, inves- 
 tigation, trial. 
 
 Examinaba, F. examinar, ind.impf 
 3 s., was examining, examined. 
 
 Examinar, inf. va., to examine ; to 
 investigate. 
 
 Exclamar, see esclamar 
 
 Exige, F. exigir, ind. pres. 3 s., de- 
 mands, exacts, requires. 
 
 Exigir, inf. va., to exact, to require, 
 to demand. 
 
 Existencia, nf, existence. 
 
 Existido, part., existed. 
 
 Existir, inf. vn., to exist, to be. 
 
 E'xito, nm., result, success, end. 
 
 Facción, nf, faction, turbulent.party. 
 Fácil, adj., easy, facile. 
 Facilitar, inf. va., to render easy, 
 to facilitate. 
 
 Fácilmente, adv., easily, without 
 difficulty. 
 
 Facultad, nf, faculty, power, fa- 
 cility. 
 
370 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 FID 
 
 Faena, nf, work, labor. 
 
 Fallecer, inf. vn., to die. 
 
 Falsamente, adv., falsely. 
 
 Fálso-a, adj., false, deceitful, coun- 
 terfeited. 
 
 Falta, nf, fault, mistake, defect ; 
 need. 
 
 Falta, F. faltar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 wants, needs, fails. 
 
 Faltaba, F. faltar, ind. impf 3 s., 
 was wanting. 
 
 Faltar, inf. vn., to be wanting, to 
 need, to fail. 
 
 Faltas, F. faltar, ind. pres. 2 s., 
 thou art wanting, thou failest. 
 
 Fama, nf, fame, renown, report. 
 
 FamGso-a, adj., famous, distin- 
 guished, renowned. 
 
 Favor, nvx., favor, protection, com- 
 pliment. 
 
 Favorecer, inf. va., to favor, to 
 abet, to grant favors. 
 
 Favorecido-a, part., favored, pro- 
 tected. 
 
 Febrero, nm., February. 
 
 Fecha, nf, date of a letter or other 
 writing. 
 
 Felicidad, nf, happiness, felicity, 
 prosperity. 
 
 Felipe, n. prop., Philip. 
 
 Feliz, adj., happy, fortunate, pros- 
 perous. 
 
 Felizmente, adv., happily, luckily. 
 
 Fenicio, n. prop., Phoenician. 
 
 Féo-a, adj., ugly; deformed, homely . 
 
 Fernando, n. prop., Ferdinand. 
 
 Ferocidad, nf, ferocity, cruelty. 
 
 Feroz, ferocious, fierce, cruel. 
 
 Férro-carríl, nm., rail-road. 
 
 Fervoso-a, adj., fervent, ardent. 
 
 Fidedigno-a, adj., trustworthy, 
 worthy of credit. 
 
 Fidelidad, nf., fidelity, constancy, 
 loyalty. 
 
 FRE 
 
 Fiel, adj., faithful, true, constant. 
 
 Fiera, nf, wild beast. 
 
 Fiereza, nf, fierceness, ferocity, 
 cruelty. 
 
 Fiesta, nf, feast, festival, enter- 
 tainment. 
 
 Fijar, inf. va., to fiXj to fasten, to 
 settle. 
 
 Fijo-a, adj., fixed, settled, firm, se- 
 cure. 
 
 Fila, nf., file or row of soldiers. 
 
 Filúsofo, nm., philosopher. 
 
 Fin, nm., end. En fin, or por fin, 
 at last, in fine ; alfin, at length, 
 after all. 
 
 Fingir, inf. va., to feign, to fancy, 
 to imagine. 
 
 Firmar, inf. va., to sign, to sub- 
 scribe. 
 
 Firmeza, nf, firmness, steadiness. 
 
 Física, nf, physics, the science of 
 natural objects. 
 
 Flaqueár, inf. vn., to flag, to grow 
 feeble, to become disheartened. 
 
 Flaqueza, nf, weakness, frailty. 
 
 Flojedad, nf, weakness, feebleness, 
 laxity. 
 
 Flor, nf, flower, blossom, bloom. 
 
 Fundo, nm., bottom ; depth. 
 
 Formádo-a, part., formed ; com- 
 pleted. 
 
 Formar, inf. va., to form, to shape, 
 to make. 
 
 Fortificar, inf. va., to fortify. 
 
 Fortuna, nf, fortune, luck, suc- 
 cess. 
 
 Forzádo-a, part., forced, obliged. 
 
 Francamente, adv., frankly, openly. 
 
 Francés-a, adj. and n., French ; 
 Frenchman, Frenchwoman. 
 
 Francia, n. prop.fi, France. 
 
 Fránco-a, adj., frank, free, open. 
 
 Frecuentádo-a, part., frequented, 
 visited often. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 371 
 
 GEN 
 
 Freno, nm., rein, curb, bridle. 
 Frente, nf, front, forehead. 
 Frésco-a, adj., fresh, cool, 
 Frio, nm., cold, coldness. 
 Frio-a, adj., cold. 
 Fruto, nm., fruit ; advantage. 
 Fué, F. ser, ind. perf. def. 3 s., was, 
 
 he, she or it was. 
 Fué, F. ir, ind. perf, def. 3 s., went, 
 
 he or she went. 
 Fuego, nm., fire. 
 
 Fuera de, prep., out, out of, except. 
 Fuere, F. ser, subj. fut. 1 or 3 s., 
 
 should be, would be. 
 Fuero, nm., statute-law ; charter. 
 Fueron, F. ser, ind. perf. def. 3 p., 
 
 were, they were. 
 Fuerte, nm., fortification, fort. 
 
 GRA 
 
 Fuerte, adj., strong, firm, vigorous. 
 
 Fuertemente, adv., strongly, forci- 
 bly. 
 
 Fuerza, nf, force, strength. A' 
 fuerza de, by force of, by dint 
 of. 
 
 Fuese, F. ser { subj. impf. 1 or 3 s., 
 should be. 
 
 Fuesen, F. ser, subj. impf. 3 p., 
 they should be. 
 
 Fúlton, n. prop., Fulton. 
 
 Fumando, ger., smoking. 
 
 Functionário, nm. } functionary, of- 
 ficer of trust. 
 
 Fundamental, adj., fundamental. 
 
 Funésto-a, adj., mournful, lament- 
 able, sad, dismal. 
 
 Futuro, nm., future. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gerarquia, nf, hierarchy, . estab- 
 lished ecclesiastical government. 
 
 Gigante, nm., giant. 
 
 Gloria, nf, glory, praise, fame, re- 
 nown. 
 
 Glorióse s, adj., glorious, worthy 
 of praise. 
 
 Gobernador, nm., governor, ruier. 
 
 Gobernante, nm., ruler, one who 
 assumes the management of any 
 affair. 
 
 Gobierno, nm., government. 
 
 Godo, n. prop., Goth. Gódo-Es- 
 panól, Spanish-Goth. 
 
 Gódo-a, adj., Gothic. 
 
 Goza, F. gozar, ind. pres. 3 s., en- 
 joys, he or she enjoys. 
 
 Gozar, inf. va., to enjoy, to be re- 
 joiced at. 
 
 Gozo, nm., enjoyment, delight, 
 pleasure, 
 generous, liberal, Gracia, nf, thanks, grace, elegance. 
 
 Graci6so-a, adj., graceful, facetious^ 
 
 Gaceta, nf, gazette, newspaper. 
 Galería, nf, gallery, lobby. 
 Ganado, nm., herd, flock ; sheep, 
 
 cattle. 
 Ganar, inf. re. to gain, to win, to 
 
 obtain. 
 Ganará, F. ganar, ind. 1 fut. 3 s., 
 
 he will gain. 
 Ganó, F. ganar, ind. perf. def 3 s., 
 
 he gained. 
 Garbóso-a, adj., genteei, graceful, 
 
 comely. 
 Gaspárdo, n. prop., Gaspardo. 
 Gastar, inf. va., to spend, to waste. 
 Gasto, run., expense. 
 Géfe, or. jefe, mn., chief; leader. 
 Gemér, inf. vn., to groan. 
 General, or, jenerál, nm., general, 
 
 chief, commander. 
 General, adj., general, universal. 
 Generalidad, nf, generality. 
 Generoso-a, adj. 
 
 kind. 
 Género, nm., kind, sort, genus,race. : witty, merry. 
 
372 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 HAB 
 
 Grada, nf, step ; gradas, seats 
 which rise one above another. 
 
 Grado, nm., degree, grade, step. 
 
 Gran, adj., great, large (contracted 
 from grande). Gran Bretaña, 
 Great Britain. 
 
 Grande, adj., great, large, emi- 
 nent. 
 
 Grandeza, nf. , greatness, grandeur. 
 
 Granizando, ger., hailing, raining 
 hail-stones. 
 
 Gratitud, nf., gratitude, thankful- 
 ness. 
 
 Grecia, n. prop.f, Greece. 
 
 Grita, F. gritar, ind. pres. 3 «.-, 
 shouts, he cries out. 
 
 Gritando, ger., shouting, crying 
 out. 
 
 Gritar, inf. vn., to cry out, to shout, 
 to make a noise. 
 
 Grito, nm., shout, loud cry. 
 
 Guardado, part., kept, guarded, 
 preserved. 
 
 HAG 
 
 Guardar, inf. va., to keep, to guard, 
 to preserve. 
 
 Guardia, nf., guard, watch, a body 
 of armed soldiers to watch by 
 way of defence. 
 
 Guarismo, nm., figure, arithmetical 
 number. 
 
 Guerra, nf., war. 
 
 Guerrero, nm., warrior. 
 
 Guerrero-a, adj., warlike ; mar- 
 tial. 
 
 Guillétto, ti. prop. } Guilletto. 
 
 Guiñada, nf, wink of the eye. 
 
 Gusano, nm., worm. Gusano roe- 
 dor, gnawing worm, remorse. 
 
 Gusta, F. gustar, ind. pres. 3 s. f 
 pleases; tastes. 
 
 i Gustar,, inf. vn., to please, to taste, 
 to enjoy, to like. 
 
 Gusto, nm., taste ; pleasure, enjoy- 
 ment. 
 
 Gustoso-a, adj., pleasant, cheerful, 
 contented. 
 
 H. 
 
 Ha, F. haber, ind. pres. 3 s., has, is, 
 there is. 
 
 Ha, F. haber, ind. pres, 3 s., has ; 
 it is. 
 
 Haber, inf. v. aux., to have. 
 
 Había, F. haber, ind. impf 1 or 3 s., 
 had ; there was, there were. 
 
 Habían, F. haber, ind. ir/rpf. 3 p., 
 they had. 
 
 Habido, part., had. 
 
 Habiendo, ger., having. 
 
 Habitación, nf, habitation, dwell- 
 ing, abode, mansion. 
 
 Habitante, nm. T inhabitant, resi- 
 dent. ' 
 
 Habitar, inf. va., to inhabit. 
 
 Habla, F. hablar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 speaks. 
 
 Hablar, inf. va., to speak ; to say. 
 
 Hable,. F. hablar, imp. 3 a., let him 
 
 speak. 
 Hablo, F. hablar, ind, pre». I &, I 
 
 Hace, F. hacer, ind. pres. 3 s., does, 
 
 makes ; it is, it makes. 
 Hacemos, F. hacer, ind. pres. Í p., 
 
 we make, we do. 
 Hacer, inf. va., to make, to do ; to 
 
 cause, to order. 
 Haces, F. hacer, ind. pres. 2 $., 
 
 thou doest, thou makest. 
 Hacía, F. hacer, ind. impf 1 or 3 s., 
 
 made, did. 
 Hacia, prep., towards, to. 
 Haciendo, ger., making, doing, ren- 
 dering. 
 Hago, F. hacer, ind. pres. 1 s., I 
 
 make, I do. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 373 
 
 HER 
 
 Hallábamos, F. hallar, ind. impf. 
 
 1 p., we found. 
 Hallan, F. hallar, ind. pres. dp., 
 
 they find. 
 Hallando, ger., finding. 
 Hallar, inf. va., to find, to meet, to 
 
 discover. 
 Hallo, F. hallar, ind. perf def 3 s., 
 
 found, he found. 
 Hambre, nf., hunger; famine. 
 Hambriénto-a, adj., hungry, starv- 
 ed. 
 Han, F. haber, ind. pres. 3 p., they 
 
 have. 
 Hará, F. hacer, ind. \fut. 3 s., shall 
 or will make, will do ; there will be. 
 Haréis, F. hacer, ind. \fut. 1 p., 
 
 ye will make, ye will do. 
 Harina, nf., flour. 
 Harmonía, nf, harmony, concord. 
 Hárto-a, full, satiated, enough. 
 Has,F. haber,ind.pres. 2s., thou hast. 
 Hasta, prep., to, till, as far as. 
 
 Hasta que, until, as far as. 
 Hay, F. haber, ind. pres. 3 s. or p., 
 
 there is, or, there are. 
 Haya, F. haber, subj. pres. 1 or 3 s., 
 
 may have. 
 Háyas,F. haber, subj. pres. 2 s., thou 
 
 mayest have. 
 He, F. haber, ind. pres. 1 s., I have. 
 Hécho-a, part., made, done. 
 Hemos, F. haber, ind. pres. 1 p., 
 
 we have. 
 Henrique, same as Enrique. 
 Heredarán, F. heredar, ind. 1 fit. 
 
 3 p., shall inherit. 
 Heredero, nm., heir, inheritor. 
 Herida, nf, wound, sore. 
 Hermana, nf, sister. 
 Hermanito, nm. dim., little brother. 
 Hermano, nm., brother. 
 Herm6so-a, adj., beautiful, hand- 
 some, fine. 
 
 32 
 
 HUM 
 
 Héroe, nm., hero. 
 
 Heroicamente, adv., heroically, 
 bravely. 
 
 Heroico -a, adj., heroical. 
 
 Hiciera, F. hacer, subj. impf 3 s., 
 should do, should make. 
 
 Hicieron, F. hacer, ind. perf. def 
 3 p., they made, they did. 
 
 Hierro, nm., iron. 
 
 Hija, nf., daughter, child. 
 
 Hijo, nm., son, child. 
 
 Historia, nf, history, narration. 
 
 Historiador, nm., historian. 
 
 Hizo, F. hacer, ind. perf def 3 s., 
 made, did. 
 
 Hoja, nf, leaf. 
 
 Holandés, nm., Dutchman. 
 
 Hombre, nm., man. 
 
 Honor, nm., honor, reputation. 
 
 Honradez, nf, honesty, honor. 
 
 Honrádo-a, adj., honorable, honest. 
 
 Honrar, inf. va., to honor, to praise, 
 to revere. 
 
 Honruso-a, adj., honorable, credit- 
 able. 
 
 Hora, nf, hour ; time. 
 
 Horrible, adj., horrible, dreadful. 
 
 Horror, nm., horror, abhorrence, 
 dread. 
 
 Horrorizar, inf. va., to cause hor- 
 ror, to terrify. 
 
 Hoy, adv., to-day, this day. 
 
 Hubiera, F. haber, subj. impf. 1 or 
 3 s., would or should have. 
 
 Hubieran, F. haber, subj. impf. 3 p., 
 they would have. 
 
 Hubo, F. haber, ind. perf. def. 3 s., 
 had ; there was, there were. 
 
 Huésped, nm., guest, lodger; host. 
 
 Huir, inf. vn., to fly, to run away, 
 to escape, to shun. 
 
 Humáno-a, adj., human, rational, 
 humane; pertaining to philolo- 
 gy 
 
374 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 IMP 
 
 Humildad, nf., humility, meekness. 
 Humilde, adj., humble, submissive, 
 
 meek. 
 Humillación, nf, humiliation. 
 Humillar, inf. va., to humble, to 
 
 lower, to subdue. 
 
 Huyeron, F. huir, ind. perf. 
 def. 3 p., they flew, fled, escap- 
 ed. 
 
 Huyó, F. huir, ind. perf. def. 3 s., 
 fled, flew. 
 
 I'ba, F. ir, ind. imp/. 1 or 3 s., went, 
 was going, was. 
 
 Idea, nf, idea, notion, intention. 
 
 Idioma, nm., language, idiom. 
 
 I'do, F. ir, part., gone. 
 
 Ignorar, inf. va., to be ignorant of, 
 not tok;now. 
 
 Igual, adj., equal, similar. 
 
 Ilimitádo-a, adj., unlimited, unre- 
 strained. 
 
 Ilustre, adj., illustrious, celebrated, 
 noble. 
 
 Imitar, inf. va,, to imitate. 
 
 Impaciencia, nf., impatience. 
 
 Impacientar, inf. va., to vex, to lose 
 patience, to become impatient. 
 
 Impaciente, adj., impatient. 
 
 Imparcialménte, adv., impartially. 
 
 Impedir, inf. va., to hinder, to im- 
 pede, to prevent. 
 
 Impeler, inf. va., to impel, to excite. 
 
 Impelido-a, part., impelled, urged, 
 propelled. 
 
 Impendido-a, part., undergone. 
 
 Imperfécto-a, adj., imperfect. 
 
 Imperio, nm., empire, command. 
 
 Importancia, nf., importance, im- 
 port. 
 
 Importante, adj., important ; useful. 
 
 Importar, inf. va., to import, to be 
 important, to concern, to matter. 
 
 Impracticable, adj., impracticable, 
 impassable. 
 
 Imprenta, nf, printing, printing- 
 press. 
 
 impresión, nf, impression ; image. 
 
 Imprópio-a, adj., improper, unbe- 
 coming. 
 
 Incendiar, inf. va., to inflame, to 
 enkindle. 
 
 Inclinación, nf, inclination, ten- 
 dency. 
 
 Inclinádo-a, part., inclined, dis- 
 posed. 
 
 Inclinando, ger., inclining. 
 
 Incomodidad, nf., inconvenience, 
 trouble, pains. 
 
 Incomparable, adj., incomparable, 
 matchless. 
 
 Inconcevible, adj., inconceivable, 
 incomprehensible. 
 
 Incorporar, inf. va., to incorporate, 
 to unite. 
 
 Increíble, adj., incredible. 
 
 Indagar, inf. va., to investigate, to 
 search into. 
 
 Independencia, nf, independence. 
 
 Independiente, adj., independent, 
 free. 
 
 Indicar, inf. va., to point out, to in- 
 dicate. 
 
 Indiferencia, nf., indifference, un- 
 concern. 
 
 Indiferente, adj., indifferent, uncon- 
 cerned. 
 
 Indignamente, adv., unworthily, 
 unjustly. 
 
 I'ndio, nm., Indian. 
 
 Indispensable, adj., indispensable. 
 
 Individuo, nm., individual. 
 
 Indómito-a, adj., unconquerable, in- 
 domitable. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 375 
 
 INS 
 
 Indudablemente, adv., undoubtedly, 
 without doubt. 
 
 Indulgencia, nf, indulgence, ten- 
 derness. 
 
 Infamia, nf, infamy, dishonor, 
 meanness. 
 
 Infeliz, adj., unhappy, unfortunate. 
 
 Inferir, inf. va., to infer, to deduce. 
 
 Influencia, nf, influence. 
 
 Influjo, nm., influx, a flowing in. 
 
 Infortunádo-a, adj., unfortunate, 
 unhappy. 
 
 Infortunio, nm., misfortune, ill luck. 
 
 Ingenio, nm., genius, mental pow- 
 er, mind. 
 
 Inglés, n. prop., Englishman, the 
 English language. 
 
 Inglés-a, adj., English. 
 
 Ingratitud, nf, ingratitude. 
 
 Ingráto-a, adj., ungrateful, unkind. 
 
 Injuria, nf., injury, affront, wrong. 
 
 Injusto-a, adj., unjust, wrong, 
 harmful. 
 
 Inmediación, nf, neighborhood, 
 confine. 
 
 Inmediatamente, 'adv., immediate- 
 ly, directly. 
 
 Inmortal, adj., immortal. 
 
 Inmortalizar, inf. va., to immortal- 
 ize. 
 
 Inmóvil, adj., immovable, motion- 
 less. 
 
 Innecesário-a, adj., unnecessary. 
 
 Innumerable, adj., innumerable. 
 
 Inocencia, nf, innocence, purity. 
 
 Inocente, adj., innocent, pure, mod- 
 est. 
 
 Inofensivo-a, adj., inoffensive, harm- 
 less. 
 
 Inquietar, inf. va., to disquiet, to 
 harass, to molest, to vex. 
 
 Inquietud, nf, inquietude, anxi- 
 ety. 
 
 Inscripción, nf,, inscription. 
 
 IRL 
 
 Insigne, adj., renowned, illustrious, 
 remarkable. 
 
 Instante, nm,, instant, moment. 
 
 Instinto, nm., instinct, instigation. 
 
 Institución, nf, institution. 
 
 Instrucción, nf, instruction, infor- 
 mation. 
 
 Instruido-a, part., instructed, edu- 
 cated. 
 
 Insubordinación, nf, insubordina- 
 tion, disobedience of orders. 
 
 Insufrible, adj., insufferable, intole- 
 rable. 
 
 Insultar, inf. va., to insult. 
 
 Integridad, nf, integrity, purity, 
 honesty. 
 
 Inteligencia, nf, intelligence, un- 
 derstanding, knowledge. 
 
 Intención, nf, intention, purpose, 
 design. 
 
 Intentar, inf. va., to intend, to at- 
 tempt, to endeavor. 
 
 Interés, nm., interest. 
 
 Interesádo-a, adj., interested, self- 
 ish, mercenary. 
 
 Interiormente, adv., internally, in- 
 wardly. 
 
 Interrogar, inf. va., to interrogate, 
 to question. 
 
 Interumpir, inf. va., to interrupt, to 
 hinder. 
 
 Intimidad, nf, intimacy, familiari- 
 ty. 
 
 Inútil, adj., useless, unprofitable. 
 
 Inútilmente, adv., uselessly, in vain. 
 
 Invención, nf, invention, discovery. 
 
 Invento, nm., same as invención, 
 
 Inventor, nm., inventor; contriver. 
 
 Invierno, nm., winter. 
 
 Invitación, nf, invitation. 
 
 Ir, inf. vn., to go ; to be. 
 
 I'ra, nf, anger, ire. 
 
 Irlandés, nm., Irishman. 
 
 Irlandesa, nf, Irishwoman, 
 
376 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 LAS 
 
 Irreconciliable, adj., irreconcilable 
 Irritar, inf. va., to irritate, to exas- 
 perate. 
 Isabel, n.prop.f, Isabella, or Eliza- 
 beth. 
 
 LEN 
 
 Italia, n. prop./., Italy. 
 Italiáno-a, adj., Italian. 
 Izquiérdo-a, adj., left ; left-hand- 
 ed. 
 
 Jabón, nm., soap. 
 
 Jamás, adv., never; ever. 
 
 Jardín, nm., garden. 
 
 Jenerál, nm., same as general. 
 
 Jerónimo, n. prop, m., Jerome. 
 
 Jorge, n.prop. m., George. 
 
 Jornalero, nm., day-laborer, jour- 
 neyman. 
 
 Joven, nm. orf. youth, young man 
 or young woman. 
 
 Joven, adj., young. 
 
 Jovenzuelo, nm. dim., youngster. 
 
 Juan, n. prop, m., John. 
 
 Juego, nm., play, game. 
 
 Juicio, nm., judgment, opinion. 
 
 Julio, nm., July. 
 
 Junio, nm., June 
 
 Juntamente, adv., together, jointly. 
 
 Júnto-a, adj., joined, near, united, 
 together with. 
 
 Jurádo-a, part., sworn to. 
 
 Jurar, inf. vn., to swear, to make 
 
 oath. 
 Jurisprudencia, nf, jurisprudence, 
 
 the science of law. 
 Justamente, adv., justly, just, fair- 
 
 iy. 
 
 Justicia, nf., justice. 
 
 Justiciero, nm., one who rigorously 
 observes justice, one who punish- 
 es crimes with severe justice. 
 
 Justificar, inf. va., to justify. 
 
 Justo-a, adj., just, upright, faith- 
 ful. 
 
 Juventud, nf., youth, youthfulness. 
 
 Juzgádo-a, part., judged, passed 
 sentence. 
 
 Juzgando, ger., judging. 
 
 Juzgar, inf. va., to judge, to pass 
 sentence^ 
 
 La, def. art.f, the. 
 
 La, pron. per. and dem., her, it, she, 
 that. 
 
 Labio, nm., lip. 
 
 Laborióso-a, adj., laborious, indus- 
 trious. 
 
 Labrador, nm., farmer, laborer. 
 
 Lado, nm., side. 
 
 Ladrillo, nm., brick, tile. 
 
 Lago, nm., lake. 
 
 Lágrima, nf, tear, tear-drop. 
 
 Lárgo-a, adj., long, large. 
 
 "Las, def art.f pi., the. 
 
 Las, pron. fres, and dem., those, 
 them, they. 
 
 Lazo, nm., snare. 
 
 Le, pron. per., him, it, you ; to him, 
 
 to her, to you. 
 Lealtad, nf, loyalty, fidelity. 
 Lección, nf, lesson. 
 Lectura, nf, reading, the act of 
 
 reading. 
 Leer, inf. va., to read, to peruse. 
 Legal, adj., legal, according to law. 
 Legó, P. legar, ind. perf def 3 s., 
 
 bequeathed. 
 Legua, nf, league. 
 Leido-a, part., read. 
 Lejos, adv., far, far off. 
 Lengua, nf, language; tongue. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 377 
 
 LLE 
 
 Lentamente, adv., slowly, tardily. 
 Lénto-a, adj., slow, lingering, tardy. 
 Lepante-, n. prop., Lepanto. 
 Les, pron. pers. pi., them, those, to 
 
 them, to you. 
 Letra, nf, letter. 
 Levantar, inf. va., to raise, to rise, 
 
 to elevate, to bear. 
 Levantarás, F. levantar, ind. 1 fut. 
 
 2 s., thou shalt bear. 
 Levante, F. levantar, subj. pres. 
 
 3 s., may rise. 
 Ley, nf., law. 
 
 Leyó, F. leer, ind.perf. def 3 s., he 
 read, perused. 
 
 Liberal, adj., liberal, generous. 
 
 Liberalidad, nf., liberality, generosi- 
 ty. 
 
 Libertad, nf, liberty, freedom. 
 
 Libertar, va., to free, to set at liberty. 
 
 Libra, nf, found. 
 
 Librar, inf. va., to free, to deliver. 
 
 Libre, adj., free ; exempt. 
 
 Libro, mh., book. 
 
 Ligar, inf. va., to league, to ally, to 
 bind. 
 
 Limitar, inf. va., to limit, to bound, 
 to confine. 
 
 Línea, nf, line ; rank or file of sol- 
 diers. 
 
 Lisongeár, inf. va., to flatter, to 
 praise. 
 
 LLE 
 
 Lisongeádo-a,par/., flattered, friend. 
 
 Literário-a, adj., literary, pertain- 
 ing to letters or literature. 
 
 Lo, def. art. neuter, the, that which 
 is, what is. 
 
 Lo, pron. pers. neuter, it, so j lo que, 
 that which, what. 
 
 Locásto, n. prop., Locasto. 
 
 Locura, nf, folly, absurdity, rash- 
 ness. 
 
 Lográdo-a, part., obtained, enjoy- 
 ed, acquired. 
 
 Logrando, ger., obtaining, enjoy- 
 ing. 
 
 Lograr, inf. va., to obtain, to en- 
 joy, to acquire, to succeed in. 
 
 Logro, nm., accomplishment, at- 
 tainment. 
 
 Londres, n. prop., London. 
 
 Los, art. def. m., the 
 
 Los, pron. pers. and dem., them, 
 those, they. 
 
 Luctílo, n.prop. rn., Lucullus. 
 
 Lucha, nf, struggle, strife, contest. 
 
 Luchar, inf. va., to struggle, to 
 strive. 
 
 Lugar, nm., spot, place, village. 
 En lugar de, in place of, instead 
 of. 
 
 Lujoso-a, adj., fond of show, pro- 
 fuse, showy, luxurious. 
 
 Luz, nf, light. 
 
 Llama, nf, flams. 
 
 Llamádo-a, part., called, named. 
 
 Llamar, inf. va., to call, to name. 
 
 Llamó, F. llamar, ind. perf def 
 3 s., he or she called. 
 
 Llegando, ger., arriving, reaching. 
 
 Llegar, inf. vn., to arrive, to ap- 
 proach, to attain. 
 
 Llego, F. llegar, ind. perf. def. 3 s., 
 he or she arrived. 
 
 32* 
 
 LL. 
 
 Llenar, inf. va., to fill, to occupy, 
 to fulfil, to perform. 
 
 Lléno-a, adj., full, filled, com- 
 plete. 
 
 Lleva, F. llevar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 bears, brings, produces, carries. 
 
 Llevar, inf. va., to carry, to bear, to 
 produce, to bring, to wear. 
 
 Llevaré, F. llevar, ind. I fut. 1 s., I 
 shall bring, I shall carry. 
 
378 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 9 
 
 MAN 
 
 Llevo, F. llevar, ind. per/, def 3 s., 
 
 carried, brought, took. 
 Llorar, inf. vn., to weep, to mourn, 
 
 to deplore. 
 
 MER 
 
 Lloverá, F. llover, ind. 1 fut. 3 s. y 
 
 it will rain. 
 Lluvia, nf., rain, shower. 
 
 M. 
 
 Madera, nf, wood, timber. 
 
 Madre, nf, mother. 
 
 Madrid, n. prop./., Madrid. 
 
 Maestro, nm., master, teacher, in- 
 structor. 
 
 Magistrado, nm., magistrate, ma- 
 gistracy. 
 
 Magnánimo-a, adj., magnanimous, 
 generous. 
 
 Mai, nm., evil, harm, disease. 
 
 Mai, adj., see Malo. 
 
 Maleta, nf., portmanteau, valise. 
 
 Malévo!o-a, adj., malevolent, ma- 
 lignant. 
 
 Málo-a, adj., wicked, evil, bad ; sick, 
 sore, diseased. 
 
 Mamá, nf, mamma, mother. 
 
 Manchar, inf. va., to spot, to stain, 
 to pollute, to corrupt. 
 
 Mandádo-a, part., commanded, or- 
 dered. 
 
 Mandar, inf. va., to command, to 
 order, to send. 
 
 Mandé, F. mandar, ind. perf. def. 
 1 s., I gave orders. 
 
 Manejar, inf. va., to manage, to 
 carry on, to transact. 
 
 Manera, nf, manner, custom. De 
 manera, in such a manner. 
 
 Manifestar, inf. va., to manifest, to 
 show, to discover. 
 
 Manifiestan, F. manifestar, ind. 
 pres. 3 p., they manifest, they 
 evince. 
 
 Mano, nf, hand. 
 
 Mánso-a, adj., meek, gentle, tame. 
 
 Mañana, nf, morning, morrow. 
 
 Mañana, adv., to-morrow. 
 
 Margen, ran., margin, border, edge. 
 
 Mármol, nm., marble. 
 
 Martillo, nm., hammer. 
 
 Mas, adv., more ; el mas, la mas, 
 lo mas, the most; mas que, or 
 mas de, more than. 
 
 Mas, conj., but, except. 
 
 Matanza, nf., slaughter, butchery. 
 
 Matemático, nm., mathematician. 
 
 Matemático-a, adj., mathematical. 
 
 Matorral, nm., a place full of bush- 
 es, brambles or briers. 
 
 Matrimonio, nm., matrimony, mar- 
 riage. 
 
 Mayor, adj., greater, larger. El 
 mayor, la mayor, the greatest. 
 
 Me, pron.pers., me, to me, for me. 
 
 Medianía, nf, mediocrity, middle 
 state. 
 
 Medio, nm., means, way, midst. 
 
 Médio-a, adj., half. 
 
 Mediodía, nm., noon, south. 
 
 Mejicáno-a, n. and adj., Mexican. 
 
 Méjico, n. prop., Mexico. 
 
 Mejor, adj., better. El mejor, the 
 best. 
 
 Mejora, nf., improvement, melio- 
 ration. 
 
 Melodía, nf, melody, sweet music. 
 
 Memorable, adj., memorable. 
 
 Memúria, nf, memory, remem- 
 brance ; memorial, memoir. 
 
 Menos, adv., less ; except. El 
 menos, the least. 
 
 Mente, nf, mind. 
 
 Mercader, nm., trader, shop-keeper. 
 
 Merece, F. merecer, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 merits, deserves. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 379 
 
 MON 
 
 Merecer, inf. va., to deserve, to 
 merit. 
 
 Merecido-a, adj., meritorious, mer- 
 ited, deserving. 
 
 Mérito, nm., merit, desert. 
 
 Meritório-a, adj., meritorious. 
 
 Mes, nm., mouth. 
 
 Metaf isico, nm., metaphysician. 
 
 Mi, pron. pers., me. 
 
 Mi, pron. poss., my. 
 
 Mientras, adv., whilst, in the mean 
 time. 
 
 Miguel, n. prop., Michael. 
 
 Mil, adj. num., a thousand. 
 
 Millar, nm., thousand. 
 
 Millón, nm., million. 
 
 Mineral, n. and adj., mineral. 
 
 Minuto, nm., minute. 
 
 Mio-a, pron. poss., my, mine. 
 
 Mirada, nf., glance, look. 
 
 Mirando, ger., seeing, looking at, 
 beholding. 
 
 Mirar, inf. va., to look, to behold, 
 to observe, to admire, to esteem. 
 
 Mis, pron. poss. pi., my. 
 
 Miseria, nf, misery, calamity, mis- 
 fortune, distress. 
 
 Mismo-a, adj., the same, self, self- 
 same. 
 
 Modales, nm. pi., manners. 
 
 Modelo, nm., model, copy, exam- 
 ple, pattern. 
 
 Moderación, nf, moderation, tem- 
 perance. 
 
 Modestia, nf, modesty, decency, 
 decorum. 
 
 Modésto-a, adj., modest, unassum- 
 ing. 
 
 Mudo, nm., manner, mode. 
 
 Momentáneo-a, adj., momentary. 
 
 Momento, nm., moment ; import- 
 ance. 
 
 Mona, nf, female monkey or ape. 
 
 Monarca, nm., monarch. 
 
 MUY 
 
 Monarquía, nf., monarchy, king- 
 dom. 
 
 Monárquico-a, adj., monarchical. 
 
 Mono, nm., monkey, ape. 
 
 Monstruóso-a, adj., monstrous, 
 enormous, shocking. 
 
 Montaña, nf, mountain. 
 
 Monte, nm., mount, hill. 
 
 Montón, nm., pile, heap. 
 
 Moral, nm., morality, ethics. 
 | Moral, adj., moral. 
 
 Morir, inf. vn., to die, to perish. 
 
 Moro-a, n. and adj., Moor, Moorish. 
 
 Mortal, adj., mortal, subject to 
 death. 
 
 Mostrador, nm., counter of a shop 
 or store. 
 
 Mostrar, inf. va., to show, to ex- 
 plain, to exhibit. 
 
 Motivo, nm., motive, cause, mov- 
 ing power. 
 
 Mover, inf. va., to move, to put in 
 motion, to excite. 
 
 Movimiento, nm., movement, mo- 
 tion ; revolt. 
 
 Miicho-a, adj., much ; múchos-as, 
 many, several. 
 
 Mucho, adv., much, very much. 
 
 Muda, F. mudar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 changes. 
 
 Mudar, inf. va., to change, to alter. 
 
 Muerte, nf, death. 
 
 Muérto-a, adj. and part., dead, 
 died. 
 
 Mugér, nf, woman, wife. 
 
 Mujer, same as muger. 
 
 Mundo, nm., world. 
 
 Murió, F. morir, ind. perf def 3 s., 
 died, he died. 
 
 Murmurar, inf. va , to murmur ; to 
 complain of, to censure. 
 
 Muro, nm., wall. 
 
 Música, nf, music. 
 
 Muy, adv., very, very much. 
 
380 
 
 TOCABULARY. 
 
 NIN 
 
 Nacer, inf. vn., to be born, to rise, 
 to bud, to spring. 
 
 Nacido-a, pari., born, been born, 
 risen. 
 
 Nacimiento, nm., birth, nativity, 
 origin. 
 
 Nación, nf, nation. 
 
 Nacional, adj., national. 
 
 Nacionalidad, nf, nationality, na- 
 tional manners and customs. 
 
 Nada, nf, nothing, nonentity, 
 naught. 
 
 Nada, adv., in no degree, by no 
 means. 
 
 Nadie, pron* indef, nobody, no 
 one. 
 
 Ñapóles, n. prop., Naples. 
 
 Natural, n. and adj., native ; natu- 
 ral. 
 
 Naturaleza, nf., nature, disposition. 
 
 Naturalista, nm., naturalist. 
 
 Navaja, nf, razor. 
 
 Navegación, nf., navigation,voyage. 
 
 Necesario-a, adj., necessary, requi- 
 site. 
 
 Necesidad, nf, necessity, need. 
 
 Necesitan, P. necesitar, ind. pres. 
 3 pi., need, require. 
 
 Necesitar, inf. va., to want, to need, 
 to require. 
 
 Nécio-a, adj., foolish, ignorant, stu- 
 pid. 
 
 Negar, inf. va., to deny, to refuse. 
 
 Negocio, nm., affair, business, mat- 
 ter. 
 
 Neutralizar, inf. va., to neutralize, 
 to render null. 
 
 Nevar, inf. v. impers., to snow. 
 
 Ni, conj., neither, nor. 
 
 Nieto, nm., grandson. 
 
 Nieve, nf., snow. 
 
 Ningún, pron. indef, no, nobody, 
 
 NUE 
 
 Ninguno-a, pron. indef, no, no- 
 body, not any. 
 
 Niña, nf, female child. 
 
 Niñez, nf, childhood. 
 
 Niño, nm., child. 
 
 No, adv., not, no; nomas, nothing 
 else. 
 
 Noble, adj., noble, illustrious, hon- 
 orable. 
 
 Noblemente, adv., nobly, generous- 
 ly. 
 
 Nobleza, nf, nobility. 
 
 Noche, nf, night ; darkness. 
 
 Nombrádo-a, part., called, appoint- 
 ed, nominated. 
 
 Nombrar, inf. va., to name, to ap- 
 point, to nominate. 
 
 Nombre, nm., name; noun. 
 
 Non, adv., not (antiquated). 
 
 Norte, nm., north. 
 
 Norte- Americano, nm., North A- 
 merican. 
 
 Noruégo-a, adj., Norwegian. 
 
 Nos, pron. pers. pi., us, to us, for 
 us; we. 
 
 Nosótros-as, pron. pers. pi., we; us. 
 
 Notable, adj., notable, remarkable. 
 
 Notablemente, adv., notably, in a 
 manner worthy of note. 
 
 Notar, inf. va., to note, to remark, 
 to observe. 
 
 Noticia, nf, news, intelligence, in- 
 formation. 
 
 Novela, nf, novel, fiction. 
 
 Noviembre, nm., November. 
 
 Nubládo-a, adj., cloudy. 
 
 Nuéstro-a, pron. poss., our, ours. 
 
 Nuevamente, adv., newly, recently. 
 
 Nuéva-Yórk, n. prop., New York. 
 
 Nuévo-a, adj., new ; de nuevo, 
 anew, again. 
 
 Nuévo-Méjico, n. prop., New Mex- 
 ico. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 381 
 
 ocu 
 
 Nulidad, nf, nullity, nothing- 
 
 Numáncia, n. prop., Numantia. 
 Numantino-a, adj., Numantine. 
 
 ORD 
 
 Número, nm., number. 
 Nunca, adv., never. 
 Nutrir, inf. va., to nourish, to cul- 
 tivate. 
 
 O. 
 
 O', conj., or, either. 
 
 Obedecer, inf. va., to obey, to yield 
 to. 
 
 Objeto, nm., object, end, design. 
 
 Obligación, nf., obligation, duty, 
 contract. 
 
 Obligádo-a, part., bound, indebted. 
 
 Obligar, inf. va., to oblige, to bind, 
 to compel. 
 
 O'bra, nf, work, deed, labor. 
 
 Obrar, inf. va., to work, to act, to 
 do. 
 
 Obsequio, nm., complaisance, civili- 
 
 ^ty. 
 
 Observádo-a, part., observed, look- 
 ed at. 
 
 Observancia, nf, observance. 
 
 Observar, inf. va., to observe, to at- 
 tend to, to look at, to main- 
 tain. 
 
 Observáredes, F. observar, subj. 1 
 fat. 2 p., ye shall observe. (It is 
 an obsolete form for observaries.) 
 
 Obstinarse, inf. vr., to be obstinate, 
 to persist. 
 
 Obtener, inf. va., to obtain, to gain, 
 to preserve, to maintain. 
 
 Obtenido, part., obtained. 
 
 Ocasión, nf, occasion, opportunity, 
 motive. 
 
 Ocaso, nm., the west. 
 
 O'cho, adj. num., eight. 
 
 Ocultando, ger.< hiding, concealing. 
 
 Octubre, nm., October. 
 
 Ocupación, nf, occupation, profes- 
 sion, employment. 
 
 Ocupádo-a, part, and adj., occupied, 
 employed, busy. 
 
 Ocupar, inf. va., to occupy, to em- 
 ploy, to engage. 
 
 Ocurrencia, nf, occurrence, inci- 
 dent, event. 
 
 Ocurrir, inf. va., to occur, to hap- 
 pen. 
 
 Odiar, inf. va., to hate, to abhor, to 
 detest. 
 
 Ofreciendo, ger., offering, present- 
 ing. 
 
 Oí, F. oir, ind. perf. def 1 s., I 
 heard. 
 
 Oído, nm., ear, the sense of hearing. 
 
 Oído, part., heard. 
 
 Oír, inf. va., to hear; to listen to, 
 to heed. 
 
 O'jo, nm., eye ; sight. 
 
 Olimpico-a, adj., Olympic. 
 
 Olvidar, inf. va., to forget, to neg- 
 lect. 
 
 Olvido, nm., oblivion, forgetfulness. 
 
 Operación, nf, operation, process, 
 agency. 
 
 Opinión, nf, opinion, judgment, 
 mental view. 
 
 Opresión, nf, oppression, coercion, 
 tyranny. 
 
 Opresor, nm., oppressor. 
 
 Opresór-a, adj., oppressive, onerous. 
 
 Oprimido-a, part., oppressed. 
 
 Oprimir, inf. va., to oppress, to 
 crush, to bear down upon, to af- 
 flict. 
 
 Oprobio, nm., opprobrium, infamy, 
 ignominy. 
 
 Orador, nm., orator ; panegyrist. 
 
 O'rden, nf, order, command, pre- 
 cept. 
 
382 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 PAR 
 
 Oreja, nf., ear. 
 
 O'rgano, nm., organ, a musical in- 
 strument. 
 
 Orgullo, nm. , pride, haughtiness, 
 arrogance. 
 
 Orgullúso-a, adj., proud, haughty, 
 arrogant. 
 
 Oriente, nm., east. 
 
 Origen, nm., origin, source, mo- 
 tive. 
 
 Ornar, inf. va., to adorn, to orna- 
 ment. 
 
 O'ro, nm., gold ; riches. 
 
 PEC 
 
 Os, pron. pers., you, yourselves, to 
 you. 
 
 Osadía, nf., courage, boldness, in- 
 trepidity. 
 
 O'so, nm., bear. 
 
 Otoño, nm., Autumn. 
 
 Otorgar, inf. va., to consent, to 
 agree to. 
 
 O'tro-a, indef.pron., other, another. 
 
 O'ye, F. oir, ind. pres. 3 s., hears, 
 he or she hears. 
 
 Oyo, F. oir, ind. perf. def 3 s., 
 heard, he, she, or it heard. 
 
 Paciencia, nf., patience. 
 
 Pacto, nm., compact, covenant. 
 
 Padecer, inf. va., to suffer, to be li- 
 able to. 
 
 Padre, nm., father : padres, parents. 
 
 Paga, F. pagar, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 pays, he pays. 
 
 Pagar, inf. va., to pay, to reward, 
 to atone. 
 
 Pais, nm., country, nation. 
 
 Palabra, nf, word, promise. 
 
 Paladar, nm., palate, taste. 
 
 Palmo, nm., palm, inch ; palmo á 
 palmo, inch by inch. 
 
 Palo A'lto, n.prop., Palo Alto (high 
 timber) 
 
 Papal, adj., Papal, belonging to the 
 Pope. 
 
 Papel, nm., paper ; newspaper. 
 
 Para, prep., for, to, towards. Para 
 con, in regard to, as to, concern- 
 ing. 
 
 Paraje, nm., place ; disposition. 
 
 Parecen, F. parecer, ind. pres. 3p., 
 they appear, they resemble, look 
 alike. 
 
 Parecer, inf. vn. and vr., to appear, 
 to resemble. 
 
 Pariente, nm., relation, kindred. 
 
 Parte, nf, part, share. Parte, adv. } 
 partly. 
 
 Particularmente, adv., particularly, 
 especially. 
 
 Partido, nm., party, part, means, 
 measure. 
 
 Pasádo-a, part., past, passed. 
 
 Pasando, ger., passing. 
 
 Pasar, inf. va., to pass, to walk 
 along, to cross, to exceed, to go, 
 to spend. 
 
 Paseo, nm., walk, walking-place. 
 
 Paso, nm., step, pass, passage. 
 
 Paso, F. pasar, ind. pres. 1 s., I 
 pass. 
 
 Pasto, nm., food, nourishment, pas- 
 ture. 
 
 Patria, nf., native country, coun- 
 try. 
 
 Patri6tico-a, adj., patriotic. 
 
 Pausadamente, adv., slowly, by de- 
 grees. 
 
 Paz, nf., peace. 
 
 Pecado, nm., sin, transgression. 
 
 Pecado, part., sinned, done injus- 
 tice. 
 
 Pecar, to sin, to offend against 
 right. 
 
 Pecho, nm., breast, bosom, heart. 
 
VOCABULARY, 
 
 383 
 
 PER 
 
 Pedante, nm., pedant, a man vain 
 
 of little knowledge. 
 Pedazo, nm., piece, bit, fragment. 
 Pedir, inf. va., to ask, to petition, 
 
 to beg, to demand. 
 Pedro, n. prop., Peter. 
 Peláyo, n. prop., Pelayo. 
 Peligro, nm., danger, risk, hazard. 
 Peligróso-a, adj., dangerous, hazard- 
 ous. 
 Pellejo, nm., skin, hide. 
 Pena, nf., punishment, penalty, 
 
 pain. 
 Penetración, nf., penetration, dis- 
 cernment. 
 Penetrar, inf. va., to penetrate, to 
 
 pierce, to force through. 
 Peninsula, nf, peninsula. 
 Pensamiento, nm., thought, idea, 
 
 design. 
 Pensar, inf. v a ., to think, to be- 
 lieve, to imagine, to intend. 
 Pequéño-a, adj., small, little, unim- 
 portant. 
 Peor, adj. and adv., worse. 
 Perder, inf. va., to lose, to miss, to 
 
 misspend. 
 Pérdida, nf, loss, damage, detri- 
 ment. 
 Perdido-a, part., lost, been deprived 
 
 of. 
 Perdió, F. perder, ind.perf def 3 s., 
 
 lost, he lost. 
 Perdonando, ger., pardoning, ex- 
 cusing. 
 Perdonar, inf. va., to pardon, to for- 
 give, to excuse. 
 Perezóso-a, adj., lazy, indolent, 
 
 slothful. 
 Perfección, nf, perfection, excel- 
 lence. 
 Perfidia, nf, perfidy, treachery. 
 Periódico, nm., periodical, newspa- 
 per. 
 
 PIR 
 
 Perito-a, adj., skilful, experienced. 
 Permanecer, inf. vn., to persist, to 
 
 remain, to endure. 
 Permiso, nm., permission, leave. 
 Permitido-a, part., permitted, al- 
 lowed. 
 Permitir, inf. va., to permit, to 
 
 grant. 
 Pero, conj., but, except, yet. 
 Perpétuo-a, adj., perpetual, continu- 
 al. 
 Perro, nm., dog. 
 
 Persecución, nf, pursuit, persecu- 
 tion. 
 Persistir, inf.vn., to persist, to per- 
 severe, to insist. 
 Persona, nf, person, individual. 
 Personalmente, adv., personally, in 
 
 person. 
 Persuadir, inf. va., to persuade, to 
 
 induce. 
 Pertenece, F. pertenecer, ind. pres. 
 
 3 s., belongs. 
 Pervérso-a, adj., perverse, wicked, 
 
 stubborn. 
 Pesadez, nf, weight, heaviness ; 
 
 burden. 
 Pesar, nm.., sorrow, grief. A' pesar 
 
 de, in defiance of, in spite of. 
 Pesca, nm., fish, fishery. 
 Pescador, nm., fisherman, fish- 
 monger. 
 Piamontés, n. prop., Piedmont- 
 
 ese. 
 Picante, adj., stinging, cutting, sar- 
 castic. 
 Pidiendo, ger., asking, begging. 
 Pié, nm., foot ; bottom. 
 Piedra, nf, stone. 
 Pierdas, F. perder, subj. pres. 2 s., 
 
 thou mayest lose. 
 Pintorésco-a, adj., picturesque. 
 Pío, n. prop., Pius. 
 Pirineos, n. prop, pi, Pyrenees. 
 
384 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 POR 
 
 Pisan, F. pisar, ind. pres. 3 pl., 
 tread, trample, step upon. 
 
 Pisar, inf. va., to tread, to step upon. 
 
 Placer, nm., pleasure, gratification, 
 enjoyment. 
 
 Plan, nm., plan, design. 
 
 Planta, nf, sole of the foot. 
 
 Plantear, inf. va., to plan, to scheme. 
 
 Plata, nf., silver ; wealth, money. 
 
 Pleito, nm., law-suit ; contest. 
 
 Pluma, nf., pen, feather, quill. 
 
 Población, nf, population ; town. 
 
 Pobre, adj., poor, indigent ; unfor- 
 tunate. 
 
 Poco, nm., little. 
 
 Poco-a, adj. and adv., little. Pocos, 
 few. 
 
 Poder, nm., power, might, authori- 
 ty. 
 
 Poder, inf. vn., to be able, to have 
 power. 
 
 Poder6so-a, adj., powerful, mighty. 
 
 Podido, parí., being able, been 
 able. 
 
 Podrá, F. poder, ind. Ifut. 3 *., will 
 be able. 
 
 Podría, F. poder, subj. impf. I or 
 3 .?., he might be able, he might. 
 
 Poesía, nf, poetry. 
 
 Poeta, nm,, poet. 
 
 Politico-a, adj., politic, political. 
 
 Polvo, nm., dust. 
 
 Ponderar, inf. va., to ponder, to 
 weigh, to examine. 
 
 Poner, inf. va., to place, to put, to 
 impose. 
 
 Ponzoña, nf, poison. 
 
 Por, prep., by, for, through, on ac- 
 count of, in behalf of, as. 
 
 Pormenor, nm., detail, particular ac- 
 count. 
 
 P urque, conj., because, for the rea- 
 son that. 
 
 Porqué, adj., why, for what reason. 
 
 PRE 
 
 Portarse, inf. vr., to conduct, to 
 
 comport, to behave. 
 Porténdo, see portento. 
 Portento, nm., prodigy, wonder. 
 Posada, nf., inn, tavern, hotel. 
 Posadero, nm., inn-keeper. 
 Posdata, nf., postscript. 
 Posean, F. poseer, subj. pres. 3 p., 
 
 may possess. 
 Poseer, inf. va., to possess, to 
 
 have. 
 Posible, adj., possible. 
 Posición, nf, position, situation. 
 Posta, nf, mail, post-office. 
 Posteridad, nf, posterity. 
 Potencia, nf, power; kingdom, 
 
 state. 
 Práctica, nf, practice. 
 Practicar, inf. va., to practice, to 
 
 perform. 
 Precipidamcnte, precipitately, has- 
 tily. 
 Precision, nf, precision, necessity, 
 
 obligation. 
 Preferible, adj., preferable. 
 Prefiero, F. preferir, ind. pres. 1 s., 
 
 I prefer. 
 Pregunta, nf., question, inquiry. 
 Preguntádo-a, part., being asked, 
 
 questioned. 
 Preguntar, inf. va., to ask, to ques- 
 tion. 
 Pregunto, F. preguntar, ind. perf 
 
 def 3 s., asked, he inquired. 
 Prenda, nf, accomplishment, tal- 
 ent, quality. 
 Prender, inf. va., to take, to seize, 
 
 to catch. 
 Prensa, nf, printing-press, press. 
 Preocupación, nf, prejudice. 
 Preparando, ger., preparing. 
 Preparar, inf. va., to prepare, to 
 
 make ready. 
 Presencia, nf., presence. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 385 
 
 PRO 
 
 Presentar, inf. ra., to present, to 
 offer, to make a donation to. 
 
 Presente, adj., present. 
 
 Presidente, nm., president. 
 
 PresurCso-a, adj., hasty, quick. 
 
 Pretender, inf. va., to pretend, to 
 claim, to attempt. 
 
 Primavera, nf, spring. 
 
 Primer, adj., first. 
 
 Primé ro-a, adj., first ; chief. 
 
 PrimGr, nm., dexterity, nicety. 
 
 Principal, adj., principal, noble. 
 
 Principe, nm., prince; king. 
 
 Principio, 7im., principle, begin- 
 ning, motive. 
 
 Prisionero, nm., prisoner, captive. 
 
 Privádo-a, part., deprived. 
 
 Privar, inf. va., to deprive, to de- 
 spoil. 
 
 Probar, inf. va., to try, to prove, to 
 examine. 
 
 Probidad, nf., probity, integrity. 
 
 Proceder, nm., proceeding, manner 
 of proceeding, conduct. 
 
 Proceder, inf. va., to proceed, to 
 act. 
 
 Proclamar, inf. va., to proclaim, to 
 give notice publicly. 
 
 Procsimidúd, nf., proximity, conti- 
 guity. 
 
 Procura, F. procurar, imp. 2 s., en- 
 deavor thou. 
 
 Procurar, inf. va., to endeavor, to 
 manage, to solicit. 
 
 Producen, F. producir, ind. pres. 
 3 p., they produce. 
 
 Producido-a, part., produced. 
 
 Producir, inf. va., to produce, to 
 bring forth. 
 
 Profundamente, adv., profoundly. 
 
 Profúndo-a, adj., profound, deep. 
 
 Progreso, nm., progress, advance- 
 ment. 
 
 Prójimo, nm., neighbor. 
 
 33 
 
 PUB 
 
 Prometer, inf. va., to promise. 
 Prontamente, adv,, quickly, prompt- 
 
 iy- 
 
 Prúnto, adv., soon, immediately. 
 
 Pronunciar, inf. va., to pronounce, 
 to deliver (a speech). 
 
 Pronunciación, nf, pronunciation. 
 
 Propiamente, adv., properly, appro- 
 priately, regularly. 
 
 PrOpio-a, adj., proper, own, pecu- 
 liar. 
 
 Proporción, nf., proportion ; simi- 
 larity. 
 
 Proporcionado, part., proportioned, 
 adapted, procured. 
 
 Propuso, F. proponer, ind.perf def. 
 3 s., he or she proposed. 
 
 Prosa, nf, prose, prose- writings. 
 
 Prosador, iim., a prose writer, a 
 prosy writer or speaker. 
 
 Proseguir, inf. va., to continue, to 
 pursue, to follow. 
 
 Prosperidad, nf, prosperity, suc- 
 cess. 
 
 Protección, nf, protection, favor, 
 shelter. 
 
 Protector, nm., protector, patron, 
 supporter. 
 
 Protejér, inf. va., to protect, to fa- 
 vor, to patronize. 
 
 Provenir, inf. va., to arise, to origi- 
 nate. 
 
 Provincia, nf, province, territory. 
 
 Proyectil, nm., projectile. 
 
 Proyecto, nm., project, plan, 
 scheme. 
 
 Prudaménte, adv., prudently. 
 
 Prudencia, nf, prudence, wisdom. 
 
 Prueba, nf, proof, evidence. 
 
 Publicádo-a, part., published. 
 
 Publican, F. publicar, ind. pres. 3 
 pi., they publish. 
 
 Publicando, ger., publishing, pro- 
 claiming. 
 
386 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 REA 
 
 Publicar, inf. va., to publish, to pro- 
 claim, to manifest. 
 
 Publico-a, adj., public ; common. 
 
 Pudieran, F. poder, subj. imp/. 3p., 
 they might be able, could. 
 
 Piído, F. poder, ind. per/, def. 3 s., 
 was able, could. 
 
 Pueblo, nm., town, people. 
 
 Puede, F. poder, ind. pres. 3 s., is 
 able, can, may, he or she can. 
 
 Pueden, F. poder, ind. pres. 3 p., 
 they are able, they can, may. 
 
 Puedes, F. poder, ind. pres. 2 s., 
 thou art a ble, thou canst or may est. 
 
 REC 
 
 Puedo, F. poder, ind. pres. 1 s., I 
 am able, I can or may. 
 
 Puente, nm. and nf., bridge. 
 
 Puerilidad, nf., puerility, childish- 
 ness, trine. 
 
 Pues, or, pues que, conj., then, 
 since, because. 
 
 Puesto, nm., place, post. 
 
 Pucsto-a, part., placed, put. 
 
 Punto, nm., point, spot. 
 
 Pureza, nf, purity. 
 
 Puro-a, adj., pure, unmixed, clear, 
 genuine. 
 
 Q,. 
 
 Que, pron. ret, that, which, who, 
 whom, what. 
 
 Que, conj., than ; as, since, because, 
 that. 
 
 Quebrantar, inf. va., to break, to vi- 
 olate. 
 
 Quedar, inf. vn., to stay, to remain, 
 to exist. 
 
 Quedó, F. quedar, ind. perf def 
 3 s., he remained. 
 
 Quehacer, nm., business, occupa- 
 tion. 
 
 Quejarse, inf. vr., to complain, to 
 lament. 
 
 Quemar, inf. va., to burn. 
 
 Querer, inf. va., to wish, to be 
 
 willing, to be fond of, to 
 
 will. 
 Querido-a, adj.. dear, beloved. 
 Queriendo, ger., wishing, desiring, 
 
 loving. 
 Quién, pron. rel., who, that, whom, 
 
 he who. 
 Quieres, F. querer, ind. pres. 2 s., 
 
 thou art willing, thou wishest. 
 QuijOte, n. prop., Quixote. 
 Químico, nm., chemist. 
 Quince, adj. num., fifteen. 
 Quisiere, F. querer, subj. lfut. 3 s., 
 
 shall be willing. 
 Quita, F. quitarse, imp. 2 s., take 
 
 them off. 
 
 R. 
 
 Racimo, nm., cluster, bunch. 
 Racional, adj., rational. 
 Ramo, nm., branch, shoot. 
 Rápidamente, adv., rapidly. 
 Ráro-a, adj., rare, uncommon. 
 Rascando, ger., scratching. 
 Ráso-a, adj., plain, bare, open. 
 Razun, nf, reason, right. 
 Real, adj., royal ; real. 
 
 Realzar, inf. va., to heighten, to 
 elevate. 
 
 Reanimar, inf. va., to reanimate, to 
 cheer. 
 
 Pcebajándo, ger., lessening, dimin- 
 ishing. 
 
 Recaer, inf. va., to fall back. 
 
 Rechazar, inf. va., to repel, to con- 
 tradict. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 387 
 
 REG 
 
 Recibió, F. recibir, ind. perf. def 
 3 s., received, he received. 
 
 Recibir, inf. va., to receive, to ac- 
 cept. 
 
 Recientemente, adv., recently, late- 
 
 iy- 
 
 Recinto, nm., precinct. 
 
 Recluta, nm., recruit. 
 
 Recobrando, ger., recovering. 
 
 Recompensádo-a, part., recom- 
 pensed, rewarded. 
 
 Recompensar, inf. va., to reward, 
 to recompense. 
 
 Recompensará, F. recompensar, 
 ind. Ifut. 3 s., will reward. 
 
 Reconocido-a, part, and adj., ac- 
 knowledged ; grateful. 
 
 Reconocimiento, nm., recognition, 
 acknowledgment, gratitude. 
 
 Recordar, inf. va., to remind, to re- 
 call. 
 
 Récto-a, adj., right, just, straight. 
 
 Recuerdo, nm., remembrance, me- 
 mento, recollection. 
 
 Recurso, nm., resouroe, means, re- 
 course. 
 
 Reducido-a, part., reduced. 
 
 Reducir, inf. va., to reduce, to les- 
 sen. 
 
 Referir, inf. va., to relate, to re- 
 port. 
 
 Reflexión, nf, reflection, consider- 
 tion. 
 
 Reforma, nf, reformation, amend- 
 ment. 
 
 Regado, part., watered. 
 
 Regalo, nm., convenience, benefit, 
 regalement, pleasure. 
 
 Regando, ger., moistening, flood- 
 ing, wetting. 
 
 Regía, F. regir, ind. impf. 3 s., 
 ruled, governed. 
 
 Regla, nf., rule, regulation. 
 
 Regocijando, ger., rejoicing. 
 
 RES 
 
 Regocijar, inf. va., to rejoice, to 
 gladden. 
 
 Regocijo, nm., joy, rejoicing, de- 
 light. 
 
 Regreso, nm., return. 
 
 Regular, adj., regular, common, 
 proper. 
 
 Regularizar, inf. va., to methodize, 
 to regulate, to have or keep regu- 
 lar. 
 
 Reinado, nm., reign. 
 
 Reino, nm., kingdom. 
 
 Relampaguea, F. relampaguear, 
 ind. prcs. 3 s., it lightens, it 
 flashes. 
 
 Reluce, F. relucir, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 shines, glitters. 
 
 Remedio, nm., remedy, resource, 
 reparation. 
 
 Remueven, F. remover, ind. pres. 
 3 p., remove. 
 
 Reparar, inf. va., to repair, to make 
 amends for ; to notice. 
 
 Repeler, inf. va., to repel, to reject. 
 
 Repito, F. repetir, ind. pres. 1 s., 1 
 repeat. 
 
 Repitiendo, ger., repeating. 
 
 Repitió, F. repetir, ind. perf. def. 
 3 s., repeated. 
 
 Replicar, inf. va., to reply, to an- 
 swer. 
 
 Replicó, F. replicar, ind. perf. def. 
 3 s., replied. 
 
 Reposar, inf. vn., to repose, to rest. 
 
 Representación, nf, representation, 
 figure, image. 
 
 Reproche, nm., reproach, reproof. 
 
 Reproducido-a, part., reproduced 
 
 República, nf, republic. 
 
 Reputación, nf, reputation, fame, 
 credit. 
 
 Resaca, n. prop., Resaca (surge, 
 rolling land). 
 
 Rescatádo-a, part., ransomed. 
 
388 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SAC 
 
 Rescatar, inf. va., to ransom. 
 
 Residente, nm., resident. 
 
 Resistencia, nf, resistance, opposi- 
 tion. 
 
 Resistor, inf. va., to resist, to op- 
 pose. 
 
 Resolver, inf. va., to resolve, to de- 
 termine. 
 
 Resonar, inf. vn., to resound, to re- 
 echo. 
 
 Respetable, adj., respectable. 
 
 Respeto, nm., respect, regard, vene- 
 ration. 
 
 Respetuosamente, adv., respectful- 
 
 iy- 
 
 Respirar, inf. vn., to respire, to 
 breathe. 
 
 Responder, inf. va., to respond, to 
 answer. 
 
 Respondió, F. responder, ind. perf. 
 def 3 s., he responded, repli- 
 ed. 
 
 Respuesta, nf, reply, answer. 
 
 Restante, adj., remaining, rest. 
 
 Restar, inf. va., to remain, to be 
 left. 
 
 Resto, nm., rest, remaining part. 
 Restos, remains. 
 
 Resultado, nm., result, issue. 
 
 SAL 
 
 Retar, inf. va., to impeach, to chal- 
 lenge. 
 
 Retirar, inf. va., to retire, to with- 
 draw. 
 
 Reunion, nf, meeting, congrega- 
 tion, party. 
 
 Reunir, inf. va., to join, tojinite, to 
 assemble. 
 
 Reunirán, F. reunir, ind. 1 fut. 
 3 p., will join, will unite. 
 
 Revés, nm., back part, reverse, ill 
 success. 
 
 RevoluciGn, nf, revolution, change, 
 sedition. 
 
 Rey, nm., king. 
 
 Ribera, nf, bank, shore. 
 
 Rico-a, adj., rich, wealthy. 
 
 Rigúr, nm., severity, rigor. 
 
 Rio, nm., river. 
 
 Robo, nm., robbeiy, theft. 
 
 Roedor, nm., gnawer ; gusano roe- 
 dor, gnawing worm, remorse. 
 
 Románo-a, n. and adj., Roman. 
 
 Romper, inf. va., to break, to break 
 through, to transgress. 
 
 Rubor, nm., blush, shame. 
 
 Ruido, nm., noise. 
 
 Ruina, nf, ruin, downfall. 
 
 Rusia, n. prop., Russia. 
 
 Saber, inf. va., to know, to under- 
 stand. 
 
 Sabes, F. saber, ind.pres. 2 s., thou 
 knowest. 
 
 Sabía, F. saber, ind. impf. 3 s., he 
 knew, was knowing. 
 
 Sabiduría, nf, wisdom, knowledge. 
 
 Sábio-a, adj., wise, learned. 
 
 Sacaron, F. sacar, ind. perf. def. 
 3 p., they drew out, took out. 
 
 Sacerdote, nm., clergyman, priest. 
 
 Sacrificio, nm., sacrifice, compli- 
 ance. 
 
 Sacudir, inf. va., to shake, to shake 
 
 off. 
 Sagrádo-a, adj., sacred, consecrated, 
 
 holy. 
 Sagunto, 7i. prop., Saguntum (now 
 
 Murviedro). 
 Sala, nf, hall. 
 
 Saladero, nm., salting-place. 
 Salgo, F. salir, ind. pres. 1 s., I set 
 
 out, I start. 
 Salido-a, part., gone out, issued. 
 Salimos, F. salir, ind. perf def 
 
 I p., we went out. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 389 
 
 SEG 
 
 Salir, inf. vn., to set out, to go out, 
 to start, to depart. 
 
 Salle, nf., hall. 
 
 Saltó, F. saltar, ind. per/, def 3 s., 
 leaped, he jumped. 
 
 Saludable, adj., healthful, salubri- 
 ous. 
 
 Salvador, nm., Saviour, redeemer. 
 
 Salvage, nm., savage. 
 
 Salvar, inf. va., to save, to spare. 
 
 San, adj., an abbreviation for 
 santo. 
 
 Sancionar, inf. va., to sanction. 
 
 Sangre, nf, blood. 
 
 Sangriénto-a, adj., bloody, sangui- 
 nary. 
 
 Sanguinário-a, adj., sanguinary, 
 bloody. 
 
 Sáno-a, adj., sound, wholesome, 
 healthy. 
 
 Sánto-a, adj., sacred, holy. 
 
 Sardúnico-a, adj., sardonic. 
 
 Satisfacciún, nf, satisfaction, re- 
 compense, gratification. 
 
 Satisfécho-a, part., satisfied, con- 
 tented. 
 
 Se, vron. reflec, one's self, himself, 
 herself, itself, themselves ; each 
 other ; to him, to her, to you, to 
 it, to them. 
 
 Sé, F. saber, ind.pres. 1 s., I know. 
 
 Sé, F. ser, imp. 2 s., be thou. 
 
 Sea, F. ser, subj. pres. 3 s., may be, 
 it may be. 
 
 Secretamente, adv., secretly, pri- 
 vately. 
 
 Secrétp-a, adj., secret, hidden, con- 
 cealed. 
 
 Secundádo-a, part., seconded, sup- 
 ported. 
 
 Sed, nf, thirst. 
 
 Seguida, nf, following, succession. 
 De seguida, successively, after- 
 ward. 
 
 33* 
 
 SER 
 
 Seguído-a, part., followed, continu- 
 ed. 
 
 Seguir, inf. va., to follow, to pursue, 
 to prosecute. 
 
 Según, prep., according to, accord- 
 ing as. 
 
 Segiindo-a, adj., second. 
 
 Seguro-a, adj., secure, sure, con- 
 stant. 
 
 Seis, adj. num., six. 
 
 Sembrar, inf. va., to sow, to plant. 
 
 Semejante, adj., such, similar, like; 
 equal. 
 
 Semejanza, nf, similitude, resem- 
 blance. 
 
 Sencillo-a, adj., simple, neat, plain. 
 
 Sendero, nm., path. 
 
 Séneca, n. prop., Seneca. 
 
 Sensáto-a, adj., sensible, judicious, 
 prudent. 
 
 Sentemos, F. sentar, imp. 1 p., let 
 us seat, let us sit. 
 
 Sentencia, nf, sentence, opinion, 
 judgment. 
 
 Sentimiento, nm., sentiment, feel- 
 ing. 
 
 Sentir, inf. va., to feel, to be sorry 
 for, to perceive, to be moved. 
 
 Seña, nf, sign, mark. 
 
 Señal, nm., sign, signal, symptom 
 
 Señalar, inf. va., to mark, to indi' 
 cate, to point out, to stamp. 
 
 Señúr, nm., Lord, gentleman, mas- 
 ter, sir, Mr. 
 
 Señora, nf, lady, madam, mistress¡ 
 Mrs. 
 
 Separádo-a, fart., separated. 
 
 Separar, inf. va., to separate, to di- 
 vide, to part, to withdraw. 
 
 Sepulcro, nm., sepulchre, tomb, 
 grave. 
 
 Sepultado-a, part., buried, interred. 
 
 Ser, nm., being, existence. 
 
 Ser, inf. vn., to be, to exist. 
 
390 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 SIN 
 
 Será,"F. ser, ind. \fut. 3s., shall or 
 will be. 
 
 Seréno-a, adj., serene, quiet, calm, 
 peaceful. 
 
 Sería, F. ser, subj. impf. 3 s., would 
 or should be. 
 
 Serpiente, nf, serpent. 
 
 Servicio, nm., service, use, favor, 
 benefit. 
 
 Servido-a, part., served; pleased. 
 
 Servir, inf. va. and vr., to serve, to 
 suit, to do a favor, to be pleased, 
 to vouchsafe. 
 
 Sesenta, adj. num., sixty. 
 
 Setenta, adj. num., seventy. 
 
 Set., nm., abbreviation for Setiem- 
 bre. September. 
 
 Si, pron. pers., himself, herself, it- 
 self, themselves, each other. 
 
 Si, conj., if, though, whether. 
 
 Si, adv., yes, yea, truly. 
 
 Sido, part., been. 
 
 Siembre, F. sembrar, subj.pres. 3 s., 
 may sow, may plant. 
 
 Siempre, adv., always, ever. Para 
 siempre, for ever. 
 
 Siendo, ger., being. 
 
 Siete, adj. num., seven. 
 
 Siglo, nm., age, century. 
 
 Siguiendo, ger., following, prose- 
 cuting. 
 
 Siguiente, adj., following, succeed- 
 ing. 
 
 Silencio, nm., silence. 
 
 Silenciosamente, adv., silently. 
 
 Simple, adj., simple, plain, pure. 
 
 Sin, prep., without. 
 
 Sinceramente, adv., sincerely. 
 
 Sincero, adj., sincere, real, honest. 
 
 Singular, adj., singular, extraordi- 
 nary. 
 
 Sino, conj. and prep., but, only, ex- 
 cept, unless. 
 
 Síntesis, nf., synthesis. 
 
 SOS 
 
 Sirva, F. servir, subj. pres. 3 s^ 
 may serve. 
 
 Sirviendo, ger., serving. 
 
 Sitio, nm., site, spot, siege, situa- 
 tion. 
 
 Situación, nf., situation, state. 
 
 Soberano, nm., sovereign. 
 
 Soberbia, nf, pride, haughtiness, 
 vanity. 
 
 Sobérbio-a, adj., proud, haughty, 
 vain. 
 
 Sobre, prep., on, upon, over; be- 
 sides. 
 
 Sobresalir, inf. va., to surpass, to 
 excel. 
 
 Sociedad, nf, society; friendship. 
 
 Socorro, nm., succor, aid. 
 
 Sofista, nm., sophist. 
 
 Sojuzgar, inf. va., to subjugate, to 
 subdue, to conquer. 
 
 Sol, nm., sun. 
 
 Solamente, adv., only, solely. 
 
 Soldado, nm., soldier. 
 
 Solemnemente, adv., solemnly. 
 
 Súlo-a, adj., only, alone. 
 
 Sombra, nf, shade, shelter. 
 
 Sombrero, nm., hat. 
 
 Somos, F. ser, ind. pres. 1 p., we 
 are. 
 
 Son, F. ser, ind. pres. 3 p., are, 
 they are. 
 
 Sonríe, F. sonreir, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 smiles. 
 
 Sonrisa, if., smile. 
 
 Sorprendente, adj., surprising, won- 
 derful. 
 
 Sorprender, inf. va., to surprise, to 
 astonish. 
 
 Sorprendido-a, part., surprised. 
 
 Sorpresa, nf, surprise, astonish- 
 ment. 
 
 Sospecha, nf, suspicion, mistrust. 
 
 Sospechar, inf. va., to suspect, to 
 mistrust. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 391 
 
 TEM 
 
 Sostener, inf. va., to sustain, to 
 support, to maintain. 
 
 Sostenido-a, pari., sustained, main- 
 tained. 
 
 Súy, F. ser, ind. pres. 1 s., I am. 
 
 Spartano, n.prop., Spartan. 
 
 Su, pron. poss., its, his, her, their, 
 your. 
 
 Suavemente, adv., gently, sweetly, 
 softly, mildly. 
 
 Subdito, nm., subject. 
 
 Sullime, adj., sublime, grand. 
 
 Suceder, inf. vn., to succeed, to hap- 
 pen. 
 
 Suceso, nm., success, event. 
 
 Sucesor, nm., successor. 
 
 Suelo, nm., soil, ground, floor. 
 
 Sueño, nm., sleep, dream. 
 
 Suerte, nf, lot, fate. 
 
 TES 
 
 Suficiente, adj., sufficient, enough, 
 able. 
 
 Sufrir, inf. va., to suffer, to bear. 
 
 Sujetar, inf. va., to subject, to re- 
 duce. 
 
 Sumidc-a, part., plunged, swallow- 
 ed up, absorbed. 
 
 Sumir, inf. va., to be swallowed up. 
 
 Superficial, adj., superficial, shal- 
 low. 
 
 Superior, adj., superior, higher. 
 
 Suponer, inf. va., to suppose, to 
 imagine. 
 
 Sus, pron. poss., his, her, its, their, 
 your. 
 
 Susceptible, adj., susceptible. 
 
 Susto, nm., fright, terror. 
 
 Suyo -a, pron. poss., his, hers, theirs, 
 yours. 
 
 Tal, adj., such, similar, equal. Tal 
 vez, perhaps. ¿Qué tal? how do 
 you like it ? what sort ? 
 
 Talento, nm., talents, genius, abili- 
 ty- 
 Tarn año-a, adj., sizable, so great, 
 such a kind of. 
 
 También, adv., also, likewise. 
 
 Tan, adv., as, so, as much. 
 
 Tanto-a, adj., so much, as much, 
 so ; tant-os-as, so many, as many. 
 
 Tapa, nf, lid, cover. 
 
 Tardaba, F. tardar, ind. impf. 3 s., 
 delayed, was tardy. 
 
 Tardar, inf. vn., to delay, to put off, 
 to tarry, to be long (in time). 
 
 Tarde, nf, afternoon, evening; late. 
 
 Te, pron. poss., thee, to thee. 
 
 Teatro, nm., theatre. 
 
 Telegrafía, nf, art of telegraphing. 
 
 Telégrafo, nm., telegraph. 
 
 Temer, inf. va., to fear, to dread, to 
 reverence. 
 
 Temo, F. temer, ind. pres. 1 s., I 
 
 fear. 
 TemOr, nm., fear, terror, reverence. 
 Temprano, adj., early. 
 Tendré, F. tener, ind. \fut. 1 s., I 
 
 shall have. 
 Tendrían, F. tener, subj. impf. 3 p., 
 
 they might have, they would 
 
 have. 
 Tenemos, F. tener, ind. pres. 1 p., 
 
 we have. 
 Tener, inf. va., to have, to possess, 
 
 to keep, to hold. 
 Tengamos, F. tener, subj. pres. 1 p., 
 
 we may have. 
 Tenido, part., had, held. 
 Tentativa, nf, attempt, trial, essay. 
 Terminádo-a, part., terminated, 
 
 closed. 
 Término, nm., termination, limit, 
 
 term. 
 Terreno, nm., ground, land. 
 Tesoro, nm., treasure. 
 
392 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ULT 
 
 Testamento, nm., will, testament. 
 
 Testigo, nm., witness, evidence, 
 proof. 
 
 Testimonio,, nm., testim.ony s wit- 
 ness. 
 
 Tí, pron. pers., thee. 
 
 Tiempo, nm., time, weather. 
 
 Tiene, F. tener, ind. pres. 3 &., has. 
 
 Tienen, F. tener, md. pre». 3 p., 
 have, they have. 
 
 Tienes, F. tener] md. pres. 2 s., 
 thou hast. 
 
 Tierra, nf, the earth 7 land, soil, 
 country» 
 
 Tiranía, nf., tyranny, despotism. 
 
 Tirano, nm.., tyrant. 
 
 Tiráno-a, adj., tyrannical. 
 
 Tuca. F. tocar, ind. pres. 3 s. y touch- 
 es, plays, he plays. 
 
 Tocar, inf. va., to touch, to feel, to 
 belong to, to play (on a musical 
 instrument). 
 
 Todo-a, pron. indef, all, every ; ev- 
 ery thing. 
 
 Tomando, ger., taking, assuming. 
 
 Tomar, inf. va., to take, to assume, 
 to occupy. 
 
 Tono, nm., tone, voice; tune. 
 
 Turo, nm., bull. 
 
 Turre, nf, tower, steeple, spire. 
 
 Total, adj., totah universal. 
 
 Trabajando, ger., laboring^ tailing. 
 
 Trabajo, nm., work, trouble, toil. 
 
 Traer, inf. va., to bring, to carry, to 
 
 bear ; to wear. 
 Trágico-a, adj., tragical. 
 Traición, nf, treason, treachery. 
 Traidor, mn. and adj., traitor; trai- 
 torous. 
 
 ULT 
 
 Tranquilizar, inf. va., to cattB, i& 
 
 tranqudize. 
 Tranquilo-a, adj,. y tranquil, calm, 
 
 quiet, 
 Transcurrido, part n passed over. 
 Traspasar, inf va., to pierce. 
 Trastormar, inf. va., to overthrow,, 
 
 to derange. 
 Trata, F. tratar, ind. pres. 3 s~¡, 
 
 treats; aims at. 
 Tratar, inf va., to treat, to intend,, 
 
 to have intercourse. 
 Través, nm., bia% traverse. Al 
 
 través de, a cress, through. 
 Trecientos, adj.num., three hundred. 
 : Treinta, adj. num., thirty. 
 | Tres, adj. num.., three. 
 Tribu, nm. orf, tribe, class. 
 1 Tribunal, nm., tribunal, court, 
 Triste, adj., sad, melancholy. 
 Tristeza, nf,. sadness, grief, sorrow. 
 Triunfo,, nm., triumph. 
 Trofeo, nm., trophy. 
 Truno, nm., throne. 
 Tropa, nf., troop, band. 
 Truena, F. tronar, ind. pres. 3 s. } 
 
 it thunders. 
 Trueque, nm., exchange. 
 Tú, pron. pers., thou (used by pa- 
 rents in addressing children ; 
 masters, their servants; and inti- 
 mate friends, each other). 
 Tu, pron. poss., thy. 
 Tumba, nf, tomb, sepulchre. 
 Túmulo, nm., tomb. 
 Turbar, inf va., to disturb, to 
 
 trouble. 
 Tus, pron. poss., thy, your. 
 Tuyo-a, pron. poss., thy, thine. 
 
 U. 
 
 U / , conj., or, either (used before ¡ U'ltimo-a, adj., last, final. 
 
 words beginning with o or /¡o). Ultrajádo-a, part., outraged, abus- 
 U'ltimamente, adj., lastly^ lately. 1 ed, offended. 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 393 
 
 VEN 
 
 Un, art. or adj., a, an, one. 
 
 U'na, see uno. 
 
 Unánimemente, adv., unanimously. 
 
 U'nen, F. unir, ind. pres. 3 p., 
 unite, they join, 
 
 U'nico-a, adj., only, alone, sole, sin- 
 gular. 
 
 Unido-a, part., united, joined to- 
 gether. 
 
 Union, nf., union. 
 
 VES 
 
 Unir, inf. va., to unite, to join. 
 Universal, adj., universal, general. 
 U'no-a, art., adj. and pron. indef., 
 
 a, an. one, any one. Unos-as, 
 
 some. 
 Usar, inf. va., to use, to employ. 
 U'so, nm., employment, usage. 
 Usurpar, inf. va., to usurp. 
 U'til, adj., useful. 
 U'va, nf, grape. 
 
 V. 
 
 V. (contracted for usted), your wor- 
 ship, you. VV. (ustedes) your 
 
 worships, you. 
 Va, F. ir, ind. pres. 3 s., goes. 
 Vagar, inf. va., to rove, to loiter, to 
 
 play, to linger. 
 Vale, F. valer, ind. pres. 3 s., is 
 
 worth, avails. 
 Valemos, F. valer, ind. pres. 3 s., we 
 
 have power. 
 Valer, inf. vn., to be worth, to 
 
 avail, to have power. 
 Valor, nm., valor, courage, value. 
 Vamos, F. ir, imp. 1 p., let us go, 
 
 come, come on. 
 Váno-a, adj., vain, arrogant, empty. 
 Vapor, nm., steam, steamer. 
 Variádo-a, adj., variegated. 
 Vário-a, adj., various, several, 
 
 changeable. 
 Varón, nm., man, male. 
 Vasallo, 7????., vassal, subject. 
 Vayamos, see vamos. 
 Veces, see vez. 
 
 Vecíno-a, adj., neighboring, near. 
 Vejez, nf, old age. 
 Veinte, adj. num., twenty. 
 Velo, nf, veil, pretence, curtain. 
 Vemos, F. ver, ind. pres. 1 p., we 
 
 see. 
 Ven, F. venir, ind. pres. 2 s., come 
 
 thou, come. 
 
 Vena, nf, vein, artery. 
 
 Vence, F. veneer, ind. pres. 3 s., 
 
 conquers. 
 Vendando, ger., bandaging, tying a 
 
 bandage around. 
 Vendido, part., sold. 
 Veneración, nf, veneration, respect. 
 Venerar, inf. va., to venerate, to re- 
 spect. 
 Venganza, nf, revenge, vengeance. 
 Venidéro-a, adj., coming, future. 
 Venido, part., come, arrived. 
 Venir, inf. vn., to come, to arrive ; 
 
 to happen. 
 Ventura, nf, fortune, success, good 
 
 luck. 
 Venturóso-a, adj., fortunate, happy, 
 
 successful. 
 Veo, F. ver, ind. pres. 1 s., I see. 
 Verano, nm., summer. 
 Verás, F. ver, ind. Ifut. 2 s., thou 
 
 wilt see. 
 Verdaderamente, adv., truly, really. 
 Verdadéro-a, adj., true, real, sincere. 
 Verde, adj., green. 
 Veremos, F. ver, ind. Ifut. 1 p., we 
 
 shall see. 
 Vergüenza, nf, shame; bashfulness. 
 ! Verja, nf, a grate, a grated window. 
 j Verso, nm., verse. 
 | Vertido-a, part., spilled, shed. 
 ' Vestido, nm., dress, coat, suit. 
 
394 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ZAP 
 
 Veterano, nm., veteran. 
 
 Vez, nf, time. Tal vez, perhaps. 
 
 En vez de, instead of. 
 Viáge, nm., journey, voyage. 
 Viajando, ger., travelling. 
 Viajar, inf. va., to travel, to journey. 
 Viaje, see viage. 
 
 Viajero, nm., traveller; passenger. 
 Vicio, nm., vice, wickedness. 
 Viciuso-a, adj., vicious. 
 Vicisitud, nf., vicissitude, change. 
 Victoria, nf., victory, triumph. 
 Vida, nf., life, livelihood. 
 Viendo, ger., seeing. 
 Viento, nm., wind. 
 Vil, adj., vile, mean, base. 
 Villano, nm., a rustic, villain. 
 Vinculo, nm., chain, link. 
 Viña, nf., vineyard ; vine. 
 
 Y, conj., and. 
 
 Ya, adv., already, now. 
 
 Yacer, inf. vn., to lie, to repose. 
 
 Yánki, nm., Yankee. 
 
 ZUR 
 
 Vio, F. ver, ind. perf def. 3 s., saw, 
 he or she saw. 
 
 Virtud, nf, virtue ; rectitude. 
 
 Virtu6so-a, adj., virtuous. 
 
 Visita, nf, visit. 
 
 Vista, nf, sight, appearance, pres- 
 ence. 
 
 Visto-a, part., seen. 
 
 Víveres, nm. pi, provisions, sup- 
 plies. 
 
 Vivir, inf. vn., to live. 
 
 Vivo-a, adj., alive, lively, living. 
 
 Volver, inf. va., to return, to turn. 
 
 Vos, pron. pers., ye, you. 
 
 VosGtroSj pron. pers., ye, you. 
 
 Vuto, nm., vote, vow. 
 
 Voz, nf, voice, word. 
 
 Vuelta, nf., turn, return. 
 
 Vuéstro-a, pron. poss., your, yours. 
 
 Y. 
 
 Yerba, nf, grass, herb. 
 Yo, pron. pers., I. 
 Yiigo, nm., yoke. 
 
 Zapatero, nm., shoemaker. 
 Zapato, nm., shoe. 
 
 I Zurita, n. prop., Zurita. 
 
A FEW MODELS OF ORDINARY CORRESPONDENCE. 
 
 Esquelas de convite. 
 El señor y la señora Rayner pre- 
 sentan sus respetos al señor yála 
 señora Quesada, y los suplican que 
 les hagan el honor de ir á comer con 
 ellos el jueves á las seis. 
 Martes, Mayo 10 de 1848. 
 
 Respuesta. 
 El señor y la señora Quesada se 
 apresurarán á acudir al amable con- 
 vite del señor y la señora Rayner y 
 les presantan sus respetuosos com- 
 plidos. 
 
 El señor Gomez ruega al señor 
 Barte que le haga el honor de favor- 
 ecerle con su presencia, el lunes por 
 la noche, 25 de enero. 
 
 Rehusar un convite. 
 El señor Blanco está comprome- 
 tido hace muchos dias para el 
 miércoles, y suplica al señor Panza 
 que le dispense, y no dude de que lo 
 siente mucho. 
 
 Propuesta para una correspon- 
 dencia. 
 Nueva- York, 31 de Mayo de 1848. 
 Señor Don José Campo, ) 
 Vera-Cruz. i 
 
 Muy señor mió ; deseando esta- 
 blecer en esa ciudad una correspon- 
 dencia segura con un sujeto de 
 probidad para las varias comisiones 
 y encargos, que puedan ocurrirme 
 en los asuntos de mi comercio, é 
 informado de las circumstancias y 
 calidades que concurren en V., me 
 tomo la libertad de suplicarle se sir- 
 va aceptar el encargo de correspon- 
 
 Cards of invitation. 
 
 Mr. and Mrs. Rayner present 
 their compliments to Mr. and Mrs. 
 Quesada, and request the honor of 
 their company to dinner on Thurs- 
 day, at six o'clock. 
 
 Tuesday, May 10th, 1848. 
 
 Reply. 
 Mr. and Mrs. Q.uesada present 
 their respects to Mr. and Mrs. Ray- 
 ner, and will not fail to accept their 
 kind invitation. 
 
 Mr. Gomez requests the favor of 
 Mr. Barte's company on Monday 
 evening, the 25th of January. 
 
 Declining an invitation. 
 Mr. Blanco's compliments to Mr. 
 Panza, and is very sorry that a pre- 
 vious engagement for Wednesday 
 will prevent his having the honor 
 of waiting upon him that day. 
 
 Proposal for a correspondence. 
 New York, May 31st, 1848. 
 Sir: 
 
 Being desirous of establishing in 
 your city a regular correspondence 
 with a person of probity, for the 
 various commissions which may 
 occur in the transaction of my 
 \ business, and having heard of your 
 respectable standing and qualifica- 
 tions, I take the liberty of request- 
 ing you to please accept the offer of 
 being my correspondent, and advise 
 me of your determination, that I 
 may proceed accordingly. 
 
396 
 
 MODELS OF ORDINARY CORRESPONDENCE. 
 
 sal mió, y de avisarme de su reso- 
 lución para mi gobierno. 
 
 El buen nombre que la persona y 
 casa de V. tienen en esta, me indu- 
 ce igualamente á ofrecerle mis 
 servicios para cuanto fuere de su 
 agrado , y ora sea que acepte V. 6 
 no, mi proposición, apreciaré mucho 
 se digne honrarme con sus pre- 
 ceptos. 
 
 Dios guarde la vida de V". muchos 
 años, le desea su muy atento y se- 
 guro servidor, 
 
 Q. S. M. B. 
 
 Ca'rlos Borda. 
 
 Letra de Cambio. 
 
 Valga por 300 libras. 
 
 Londres, I o de enero de 1848. 
 
 Muy señor mió : á la vista, man- 
 dará V. pagar, por esta primera de 
 cambio, al señor R., la suma de 
 trescientas libras esterlinas, valor 
 recibido al contado (ó en géneros), 
 que anotará V. en nuestra cuenta 
 corriente, según aviso de su, &c. 
 
 Al señor P., del comercio de Paris. 
 
 Pagaré. 
 Valga por 350 libras esterl. 
 A cuatro meses de la fecha prom- 
 eto pagar, al señor S., ú á su Orden, 
 ¡a suma de trescientas cincuenta li- 
 bras esterlinas, valor recibido en 
 mercancias. 
 Londres, í° de junio de 1848. 
 
 Recibo. 
 
 Yo, el infrascrito, reconozco ha- 
 ber recibido del señor Hill la suma 
 de dos mil francos que le habia pres- 
 tado, según su promesa del 6 de ju- 
 nio último, que por lo tanto he en- 
 tregado al presente en manos del 
 señor Hill, como desempeñado. 
 
 Rúan, 15 de setiembre de 1847. 
 
 Your personal and mercantile 
 reputation in this city, induces me 
 also to offer you my services for 
 attending to any trust with which 
 you may encharge me ; and wheth- 
 er you are pleased to accept my 
 proposal or not, I shall consider 
 myself happy to be honored with 
 your commands. 
 
 Your obedient servant, 
 
 Charles Borda. 
 
 Bill of exchange. 
 
 For £300. 
 London, January 1st, 1848. 
 Sir, At sight, please to pay by 
 this first bill of exchange to Mr. R., 
 the sum of three hundred pounds 
 for value received of him in cash (or 
 in goods), and place it to account 
 as per advice. 
 
 From your, etc. 
 To Mr. P., merchant, Paris. 
 
 Promissory Note. 
 
 For £350. 
 Four months after date, I promise 
 to pay Mr. S., or order, the sum of 
 three hundred and fifty pounds for 
 value received in goods of the said 
 gentleman. 
 London, June 1st, 1848. 
 
 Receipt. 
 
 I, the underwritten, declare to 
 
 have received of Mr. Hill the sum 
 
 of two thousand francs which I had 
 
 1 lent him according to his promis- 
 
 | ^ory note of the sixth of last June ; 
 which on this account I now return 
 
 j into the hands of the said Mr, Hill 
 
 \ as discharged. 
 
 i Rouen, September 15th, 1847. 
 
Valuable Ncru publications, 
 
 ADAPTED FOR USE IN 
 
 COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SGHOOLS, 
 
 RECENTLY PUBLISHED BY 
 
 HARPER & BROTHERS, NEW YORK. 
 
 2LOfteii atiti «Scott's Mzto <&vttk zvft astifllfah 
 SLepcon* 
 
 Based on the German Work of Francis Passow ; with Corrections 
 and Additions, and the insertion in Alphabetical Order of the 
 Proper Names occurring in the principal Greek Authors. By 
 Henry Drisler, M.A., under the Supervision of Prof. Anthon. 
 Royal 8vo, Sheep extra. $5 00. 
 
 An Abridgment of the above, by the Authors, for the Use of Schools, revised 
 and enlarged by the Addition of a Second Part, viz., English and Greek. (In press.) 
 This is, indeed, a great book. It is vastly superior to any Greek-English Lexicon 
 hitherto published, either in this country or in England. No high school or college 
 can maintain its caste that does not introduce the book. — N. Y. Courier and Enquirer 
 A work of authority, which, for real utility and general accuracy, now stands, and 
 will be likely long to be, without a rival in the English language. It has been hon- 
 ored with the most unqualified commendation of the London Quarterly, and many 
 other high critical authorities of Great Britain. — N. Y. Commercial Advertiser. 
 
 This Greek Dictionary must inevitably take the place of all others in the classical 
 Bchools of the country. — Knickerbocker. 
 
 ^nthou's (Classical Dictionary 
 
 Containing an Account of the principal Proper Names mentioned in 
 Ancient Authors, and intended to elucidate all the important 
 Points connected with the Geography, History, Biography, My- 
 thology, and Fine Arts of the Greeks and Romans, together with 
 an Account of the Coins, Weights, and Measures of the Ancients, 
 with Tabular Values of the same. Royal 8vo, Sheep extra. ÜH 75. 
 
 The scope of this groat work is very extensive, and comprises information respect- 
 ing some of the most important branches of classical knowledge. Here may be found 
 a complete encyclopedia of Ancient Geography, History, Biography, and Mythology 
 The department of the. Fine Arts forms an entirely new feature ; embracing biogra- 
 phies of ancient artists, and criticisms upon their productions. In fine, this noble 
 work is not only indispensable to the classical teacher and student, but eminently 
 useful to the professional gentleman, and forms a necessary part of every library that 
 aims to be complete. It has been pronounced by Professor Boeckh of Berlin, one of 
 the leading scholars in Germany, " a most excellent work." 
 
 &nthou'u 3lattn SLcssohs* 
 
 Latin Grammar, Part I. Containing the most important Parts of 
 the Grammar of the Latin Language, together with appropriate 
 Exercises in the translating and writing of Latin. 12mo, Sheep 
 extra. 90 cents. 
 
 The object of this work is to make the young student practically acquainted, a'J 
 each step of his progress, with those portions of the grammar which he may from time 
 to time commit to memory, and which relate principally to the declension of noun9 
 and conjugation of verbs. As soon as the beginner has mastered some principle rel- 
 ativo to the inflections of the language, his attention is directed to exercises in trans- 
 lating and writing Latin, which call for a practical application uf the knowledge he 
 may have thus far acquired ; and in this way he is led on by easy stages, until he is 
 made thoroughly acquainted with all the important rules that regulate the inflection! 
 of the Latin tongue. 
 
2 WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 
 
 ñntíxmVn Satín ^vmz üZmpmümx. 
 
 Latin Grammar, Part II. An Introduction to Latin Prose Composi- 
 tion, with a complete Course of Exercises, illustrative of all the im 
 portant Principles of Latin Syntax. 12mo, Sheep extra. 90 cents. 
 
 The present work forms the second part of the Latin Lessons, and is intended to 
 elucidate practically all the important principles and rules of the Latin Syntax. The 
 plan pursued is the same with that which was followed in preparing the first part, 
 and the utility of which has been so fully proved by the favorabie reception extended 
 to that volume. A rule is laid down and principles are stated, and then exercise» 
 are given illustrative of the same. These two parts, therefore, will form a Grammar 
 of the Latin Language, possessing this decided advantage over other grammars, in 
 its containing a Complete Course of Exercises, which have a direct bearing on each 
 step of the student's progress. 
 
 WLntlíüxC» Htcttouarg of €£reeft autr Homan 
 &nttqtutteg, 
 
 From the best Authorities, and embodying all the recent Discoveries 
 of the most eminent German Philologists and Jurists. Edited by 
 William Smith, Ph.D. Illustrated by a large number of Engrav- 
 ings. Corrected and enlarged, and containing, also, numerous Ar- 
 ticles relative to the Botany, Mineralogy, and Zoology of the An- 
 cients, by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 8vo, Sheep extra. $4 75. 
 An Abridgment of the above, by the Authors, for the Use of Schools. 12mo, 
 half Sheep. $125. 
 
 As a Dictionary, it >s the best aid to the study of Classical Antiquity which we pos- 
 sess in our language. Valuable as this Dictionary must be to the students of ancient 
 literature, it will be of scarcely less service to the students of ancient art ; for the il 
 lustrations have been selected with care and judgment. — Athenceum. 
 
 The articles which we have consulted appear to us admirably done : they are terse 
 in style, and pregnant, yet not. cumbrously so, with accura-te knowledge — the best 
 and latest authorities are constantly cited. A work much wanted, invaluable to the 
 young student, and, as a book of reference, will be most acceptable on the library ta 
 ble of every scholar. — Quarterly Review. 
 
 ^ntfton's ZtxmpVB %utin (Grammar, 
 
 From the Ninth Edition of the Original, adapted to the Use of En- 
 glish Students, by Leonhard Schmitz, Ph.D. Corrected and en- 
 larged, by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra. 90 
 cents. (Third Edition, revised.) 
 
 An Abridgment of the above, by the Authors, for the Use of Schools. 12mo 
 
 (Just ready.) 
 
 The student who uses Zumpt's Latin Grammar will obtain from it such a complete 
 thefawis of golden rules and principles that he will never be willing to spare it a 
 moment from his table. — Professor Frost. 
 
 ^iutlion's 3Lattn 2Fermftcattou, 
 
 In a Series of Progressive Exercises, including Specimens of Trans, 
 lation from English and German Poetry into Latin Verse. 12mo, 
 Sheep extra. 90 cents. 
 
 A Key is published, which may be obtained by Teachers. 12mo, half Sheep. 50 
 
 cents. 
 
 This work contains a full series of rules for the structure of Latin Verse, accom 
 panied by a complete course of exercises for their practical application, and render» 
 this hitherto difficult branch of study comparatively easy and pleasant of ttaintnent 
 It forms the fourth and concluding part of the Latin Lessons 
 
WORKS FCR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 3 
 
 ^utiiou's Hattu ISrosotrg nvft $%tztvt. 
 
 í rom the best Authorities, Ancient and Modern. 12mo, Sheep ex- 
 tra. 90 cents. 
 
 In this volume, which may not unaptly be regarded as the third part of the Latlu 
 Lessons, the young- scholar will find every thing that may be needed by him, not only 
 at the commencement, but also throughout the several stages of his academic career 
 
 ñnthotfn <&&zmv'B Commentaries on the 
 halite Wat; 
 
 And the First Book of the Greek Paraphrase ; with English Notes ; 
 critical and explanatory, Plans of Battles, Sieges, &c, and His- 
 torical, Geographical, and Archaeological Indexes, by Charles 
 Anthon, LL.D. Map, Portrait, &c. 12mo, Sheep extra. $L 40. 
 
 The present edition of Ctesar is on the same plan with the Sallust and Cicero oí 
 (he editor. The explanatory nates have been specially prepared for the use of begin- 
 ners, and nothing has been omitted that may tend to facilitate the perusal of the work. 
 The Greek paraphrase is given partly as a literary novelty, and partly as an easy in- 
 troduction to Greek studies; and the plans of battles, sieges, &c, must prove emi- 
 nently useful to the learner. 
 
 glntiiou's Senear oi Wívqü, 
 
 With English Notes, critical and Explanatory, a Metrical Clavis, 
 and an Historical, Geographical, and Mythological Index, by 
 Charles Anthon, LL.D. Portrait and many Illustrations. 12mo, 
 Sheep extra. $2 00. 
 
 The notes accompanying the text have been made purposely copious, since Virgil 
 is an author in the perusal of whom the young scholar stands in need of very frequent 
 assistance. The illustrations that accompany the notes form a very attractive feature 
 in the volume, and are extremely useful in exemplifying the allusions of the author 
 
 gluthon's Seleet orations of (Eteero, 
 
 With English Notes, critical and explanatory, and Historical, Geo- 
 graphical, and Legal Indexes, by Charles Anthon, LL.D. An 
 improved Edition. Portrait. 12mo, Sheep extra. $1 20. 
 
 The text of this edition is based upon that of Ernesti, and the notes are compre- 
 hensive and copious, laying open to the young scholar the train of thought contained 
 in the Orations, so as to enable him to appreciate, in their full force and beauty, these 
 brilliant memorials of other days, and carefully and fully explaining the allusions in 
 which the orator is fond of indulging. 
 
 ^ntitou's Sclocjues autt CKeorstcs of WirgtL 
 
 With English Notes, critical and explanatory, by Charles Anthon, 
 LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra. $1 50. 
 
 Dr. Anthon's classical works are well known, not only throughout the Union, hut 
 ir. Great Britain. In this edition of Virgil's pastoral poems, that elegant ancient au- 
 thor is more fully and clearly annotated and explained, than he has ever yet been in 
 any language. To masters of seminaries and school-teachers in general, the work 
 w'll prove invaluable, from the mass of information which the learned compiler has 
 thrown together in his remarks. — Neu> Orleans Advertiser. 
 
 In this volume Dr. Anthon has done for Virgil's Pastorals what he had previously 
 done for the JEneid — put it in such a form before the classical student that he can 
 not fail to read it, not only with ease, but with a thorough appreciation and admira 
 tion of its beauties. The critical and explanatory notes are very copious and very 
 satisfactory, and make perfectly clear the sense of every passage. — N. Y. Courier 
 
4 WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 
 
 glntftofi** MsMubVb Sugurtlüixe 3mar antí 
 
 Conspiracy of CatCltnr, 
 
 With an English Commentary, and Geographical and Historical In 
 dexes, by Charles Anthon, LL.D. New Edition, corrected and 
 enlarged. Portrait. 12mo, Sheep extra. 87¿ cents. 
 
 The commentary includes every thing requisite for accurate preparation on the par 1 
 <k the student and a correct understanding of the author. The plan adopted by Pro 
 essor Anti.oii has received the unqualified approbation of the great majority of teach 
 rs in the United States, and has been commended in the highest terms by some oí 
 the finest scholars in the country. 
 
 ^ntlion's OToríts of Horace, 
 
 With English Notes, critical and explanatory, by Charles Anthon, 
 LL.D. New Edition, with Corrections and Improvements. 12mo, 
 Sheep extra. $1 75. 
 
 This work has enjoyed a widely favorable reception both in Europe and our own 
 country, and has tended, more than any other edition, to render the young students 
 of the time familiar with the beauties of the poet. The classical student, in his earlier 
 progress, requires a great deal of assistance ; and the plan pursued by Professor An- 
 thon in his Horace and other works affords just the aid required to make his studies 
 easy and agreeable, and to attract him still further on in the path of scholarship 
 
 ^ntlion's jFírst €£reeit Jítumun, 
 
 Containing the most important Parts of the Grammar of the Greek 
 Language, together with appropriate Exercises in the translating 
 and writing of Greek, for the Use of Beginners. 12mo, Sheep 
 extra. 90 cents. 
 
 The plan of this work is very simple. It is intended to render the study of the 
 Greek inflections more inviting to beginners, and better calculated, at the same time, 
 to produce an abiding impression. With this view, there is appended to the several 
 divisions of the Grammar a collection of exercises, consisting of short sentences, in 
 which the rules of inflection just laid down are fully exemplified, and which the stu- 
 dent is required to translate and parse, or else to convert from ungrammatical to gram- 
 matical Greek. 
 
 ^ntlion's (&reefe ¡Prose Composition. 
 
 Greek Lessons, Part II. An Introduction to Greek Prose Composi- 
 tion, with a complete Course of Exercises illustrative of all the 
 important Principles of Greek Syntax. 12mo, Sheep extra. 90 
 cents. 
 
 The present work forms the second part of the Greek Lessons. The object of the 
 editor has been to make the student more fully acquainted than could be done in an 
 ordinary grammar with all the important principles of the Greek Syntax. And in 
 order to impress these principles more fully upon the mhrd of the pupil, they are ac- 
 companied by exercises explanatory of the same ; in other words, the theory is first 
 given, and its practical application follows immediately after. This is the only mode 
 of familiarizing the student with the niceties of Greek construction, and has never 
 been carried out to so full an extent in any similar work. 
 
 Ethan's (Grammar of tfie <&reefc Slanguage, 
 
 Foi the Use of Schools and Colleges. 12mo, Sheep extra. 90 cents. 
 
 The author's object in preparing the present work was to furnish the student with 
 such a view of the leading features in the Grammar of the Greek language as might 
 Drove useful to him, not only at the commencement of his career, but also during its 
 whole continuance. Nothing has, therefore, been omitted the want of which might in 
 any degree retard his progress ; and yet, at the same time, the work has been brought 
 within such limits as will render it easy of reference and not deter from perusal 
 Every effort has been made to exhibit a concise outline of all the leading principle» 
 of Greek philology. 
 
WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 5 
 
 &utñoiTs üefo €&reeít Grammar 
 
 From the German of Kühner, Matthiae, Buttmann, Rost, and Thiersh-, 
 to which are appended, Remarks on the Pronunciation of the 
 Greek Language, and Chronological Tables explanatory of tk_? 
 same. 12mo, Sheep extra. 90 cents. 
 
 In order to render this grammar more useful to the student, recourse has been ha* 
 to the writings of the Infest and best of the German grammarians, and especially to 
 those of Kühner, which are now justly regarded as the ablest of their kind ; and the 
 present work will be found to contain all the information on the subject necessary to 
 be known by the student of Greek. It contains more numerous and complete exem- 
 plification of declension and conjugation than any that has preceded it. 
 
 ^utlum's e&rccit íPvosotíg an* JHetre, 
 
 For the Use of Schools and Colleges ; together with the Choral 
 Scanning of the Prometheus Vinctus of JEschylus, and CEdipus 
 Tyrannus of Sophocles ; to which are appended, Remarks on the 
 Indo-Germanic Analogies. l2mo, Sheep extra. 90 cents. 
 
 An accurate acquaintance wnh the Prosody and .Metres of the Greek language is a 
 necessary accompaniment of true scholarship; but one great want is felt in its suc- 
 cessful cultivation. The present work supplies this want. It omits the intricate 
 questions on which the learned delight to exercise themselves, and aims only to give 
 what is immediately and permanently useful, in a simple and inviting style. The 
 Appendix, containing Remarks on the Analogies of Language, will be found interest- 
 ing to every scholar. This work, like the others of the series, has been republished 
 in England, and forms the text-book at King's College School, London, as well as in 
 other quarters. 
 
 ^nthou's ©outer's KUatr. 
 
 The first Six Books of Homer's Iliad, te which are appended En- 
 glish Notes, critical and explanatory, a Metrical Index, and Ho- 
 meric Glossary, by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra. 
 SI 50. 
 
 The commentary contained in this volume is a full one, on the principle that, if a 
 good foundation be laid in the beginning, the perusal of the Homeric poems becomes 
 a matter of positive enjoyment ; whereas, if the pupil be hurried over book after book 
 of these noble productions, with a kind of rail-road celerity, he remains a total stranger 
 to all the beauties of the scenery through which he has sped his way, and at the end 
 of his journey is as wise as when he commenced it. The present work contains what 
 is useful to the young student in furthering his acquaintance with the classic language 
 and noble poetry of Homer. The Glossary renders any other Homeric dictionary 
 useless. 
 
 ginthou's <&rccft Scatter, 
 
 Principally from the German of Jacobs. With English Notes, crit- 
 ical and explanatory, a Metrical Index to Homer and Anacreon, 
 and a copious Lexicon. 12mo, Sheep extra. §1 75. 
 
 This Reader is edited on the same plan as the author's other editions of the classics, 
 and hxs given universal satisfaction to all teachers who have adopted it into use. 
 That plan supposes an ignorance in the pupil of all but the very first principles of th» 
 language, and a need on his part of guidance through its intricacies. It aims to en- 
 lighten that ignorance and supply that guidance in such a way as to Tender his prog- 
 ress sure and agreeable, and to invite him to cultivate the fair fields of classic litera» 
 ture more thoroughly. 
 
 &ntfiott'8 ^nafcaste of Xcnojrtum, 
 
 With English Notes, critical and explanatory, by Charles Antho», 
 LL.D 12mo, Sheep extra. 
 
 Zumbís 2Latm TBvtttium. 
 
 (In press.) 
 
b WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 
 
 giutliou's C&ermama antí agrícola of Eatttun. 
 
 "With English Notes, critical and explanatory, from the hest and 
 latest Authorities ; the Remarks of Bótticher on the Style of 
 Tacitus ; and a copious Geographical Index. 12mo, Sheep ex- 
 tra. 90 cents. 
 
 ®nthon y 8 <&kn&8 He Srnectutr, etc. 
 
 The De Senectute, De Amicitia, Paradoxa, and Somnium Scipionis 
 of Cicero, and the Life of Atticus, hy Cornelius Nepos, with En- 
 glish Notes, critical and explanatory. 12mo, Sheep extra. 
 
 &ntüQti'* Xenophou^ Wemora&tlta tf 
 ^ocratni* 
 
 From the Text of Kühner. With explanatory Notes, &c, by D. 
 B. Hickie, LL.D. First American Edition, corrected and enlarged 
 by Charles Anthon, LL.D. 12mo, Sheep extra. 
 
 aWCEUutocfc nxús (Eroofts's jFtrst Eoofe in SLattu, 
 
 Containing Grammar, Exercises, and Vocabularies, on the Method 
 of constant Imitation and Repetition. 12mo, Sheep extra. 75 
 cents. (Second Edition, revised.) 
 
 I am satisfied that it is the best book for beginners in Latin that is published in this 
 country.— Prof. J. P. Durbin, Philadelphia. 
 
 I am confident that no teacher who studies the success of his pupils will adopt any 
 other text-book than this in the beginning of a course in Latin. — Prof. W. H. Gil- 
 der, Belleville, New Jersey. 
 
 I cheerfully bear iestimony to the excellence of the " First Book in Latin;" it is 
 a work of prodigious labor and wonderful skill. — Rev. J. H. Dashiell, Baltimore 
 Institute. 
 
 M'CLINTOCK AND CROOKS'S SECOND BOOK IN LATIN, con- 
 taining a complete Latin Syntax, with copious Exercises for Imitation and Repeti- 
 tion, and Loci Memoriales selected from Cicero. (In press.) 
 
 M'CLINTOCK AND CROOKS'S PRACTICAL INTRODUCTION 
 
 TO LATIN stvle. principally translated from the German of Grysar, with Exer- 
 cises in writing Latin, on Ciceronian Models. (In press.) 
 
 M'CLINTOCK AND CROOKS'S ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAM- 
 MAR, containing full Vocabularies, Lessons on the Forms of Words, and Exercises 
 for Imitation and Repetition, with a Summary of Etymology and Syntax. (In press.) 
 
 M'CLINTOCK AND CROOKS'S SECOND BOOK IN GREEK, con- 
 taining a complete Greek Syntax, on the Basis of Kühner, with Exercises for Imi- 
 tation on Models drawn from Xénophon's Anabasis. (In press.) 
 
 WLtfxum'n ®utlinzn of Xmjjrrfcxt an* IBmv- 
 treretf í&eutai Jetton. 
 
 18mo, Muslin. 45 cents. 
 
 As a text- book in Mental Philosophy, I am assured it has no equal ; and any thing 
 ■which may be made to contribute to the wider circulation of such a work, and which 
 may thus either extend a taste for such studies, or lend to satisfy the taste already 
 ■widely diffused, can not but be hailed with pleasure by all who feel an interest in 
 the progress of general science, and especially by those who, with me, recognize the 
 pre-eminently practical character of that knowledge which pertains to the human 
 mind.— Prof. Caldwell, Dickinson College. 
 
WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 7 
 
 Wbfliám** ISlnnzntn of S&eutal iiMltsisojphi); 
 
 Embracing the two Departments of the Intellect and the Sensibili- 
 ties. 2 vols. 12mo, Sheep extra. $2 50. 
 
 An Abridgment of the above, by the Author, designed as a Text-book in Acad* 
 
 emies. 12mo, Sheep extra. $1 25. 
 
 Professor Upham has brought together the leading views of the best writers on the 
 most important topics of mental science, and exhibited them with great good judg- 
 ment, candor, clearness, and method. Out of all the systematic t.-eatises in use, we 
 consider the volumes of Mr. Upham by far the best that we have. — New York Review 
 
 &jrfism'0 ®vwUbz on the ©2£tiL 
 
 A Philosophical and Practical Treatise on the Will. 12mo, Sheep 
 extra. $1 25. 
 
 This work is one of great value to the literary and religious community. It indi 
 cates throughout not only deep and varied research, but profound and laborious 
 thought, and is a full, lucid, and able discussion of an involved and embarrassing sub- 
 ject. The style, though generally diffuse, is always perspicuous, and often elegant ; 
 and the work, as a whole, will add much to the reputation of its author, and entitle 
 him to rank among the ablest metaphysicians of our country. — Christian Advocate. 
 
 ©artwer's jFavmer's IMcttonarg; 
 
 A Vocabulary of the Technical Terms recently introduced into Ag- 
 riculture and Horticulture from various Sciences, and also a Com- 
 pendium of Practical Farming : the latter chiefly from the Works 
 of the Rev. W. L. Rham, Loudon, Low, and Youatt, and the 
 most eminent American Authors. With numerous Illustrations. 
 12mo, Sheep extra, $1 75 ; Muslin gilt, $1 50. 
 
 An invaluable treatise for the agriculturist, whose suggestions and information 
 would probably save him ten times its cost every year of his labor. — Evangelist. 
 
 In the Farmers Dictionary we find what has never before been drawn up for the 
 farmer: nowhere else is so much important information on subjects of interest to the 
 practical agriculturist to be found. — Cultivator. 
 
 ISxizVz Jfarmcr's Companion; 
 
 Or, Essays on the Principles and Practice of American Husbandry. 
 With the Address prepared to be delivered before the Agricultural 
 and Horticultural Societies of New Haven County, Connecticut. 
 And an Appendix, containing Tables, and other Matter useful to 
 the Farmer. To which is prefixed a Eulogy on the Life and 
 Character of Judge Buel, by Amos Dean, Esq. 12mo, Muslin. 
 75 cents. 
 
 "This is decidedly one of the best elementary treatises on agriculture that has 
 ever been written. It contains a lucid description or" every branch of the subject, 
 and is in itself a complete manual of Husbandry, which no farmer, who would un- 
 derstand his own interest, should be without. It is sufficient to say that this is the 
 last production of the late Judge Buel, and contains his matured experience and opin- 
 ions on a subject which he did more, perhaps, to elevate and promote than any other 
 man of his time. Judge Buel was a strong advocate for what is termed the New 
 Husbandry, the many advantages of which over the old system he illustrated by his 
 own practice, and the claims of which to the consideration of the farmer are ably set 
 forth in this volume. The work is written with great perspicuity, and the manner 
 in which the subject is treated shows the hand of a master. The clearness and sim 
 plicity of the style adapt it to all classes of readers ; and containing as it does a co 
 ¡»ious Index, Glossary, &c, it is eminently suited as a text-book for country schools, 
 into which we hope it will be speedily introduced, and its principles thoroughly studied 
 and practically carried oul It is also a very suitable book to be given as a premium, 
 and we therefore recommend it to the notice of our Agricultural Societies." 
 
8 WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 
 
 IBvuptv'n EzvUbook of OTfumtstrg, 
 
 For the Use of Schools and Colleges. With nearly 300 Illustrations. 
 12mo, Sheep. 75 cents. (Fourth Edition, revised.) 
 
 Terse, lucid, and philosophical, and well adapted to the object for which it is pub- 
 lished. It is a vast improvement upon all the chemical text-books with which we are 
 acquainted. It can not fail of superseding the many compends now used in our col- 
 leges. — St. Louis Gazette. 
 
 draper's Etvt^ooU of natural ^iulosoirfig, 
 
 For the Use of Schools and Colleges. Containing the most recent 
 Discoveries and Facts, compiled from the best Authorities. With 
 nearly 400 Illustrations. 12mo, Sheep. 75 cents. 
 
 An admirable manual for students of almost any age, containing nearly four hundred 
 illustrations. A clear and general view of the great features of the science is here 
 given in the smallest possible compass; and by way of making the studymore at- 
 tractive to the beginner, the physical properties of air and water are treated of before 
 the laws and phenomena of motion, a novelty of arrangement which appears to us 
 highly judicious. — Christian Inquirer. 
 
 Draper's Chemical <$rgatumttou of plants* 
 
 A Treatise on the Forces which produce the Organization of Plants. 
 With an Appendix, containing several Memoirs on Capillary At- 
 traction, Electricity, and the Chemical Action of Light. Engrav- 
 ings. 4to. $2 50. 
 Dr. Draper's researches in the Chemistry of Plants and on the Chemical Action of 
 
 Light here given, render this work exceedingly valuable to all lovers of science. The 
 
 author is well known as a most able and indefatigable experimenter and theorist in. 
 
 philosophy. — Commercial Advertiser. 
 
 SMnvBfu Jieto ^ptem of <2£eoijrajjft2>, 
 
 For the Use of Schools. Illustrated by more than 50 Cerographic 
 Maps, and numerous Engravings on Wood. 4to. 50 cents. (A 
 thoroughly revised Edition, corrected to the present time.) 
 
 The Public School Society of the City of New York have unanimously adopted 
 Morse's School Geography into their extensive schools, and it has been generally in- 
 troduced into those of Philadelphia. 
 
 A valuable acquisition to all engaged either in imparting or receiving instruction. 
 Its conciseness and simplicity of arrangement, and its numerous and beautiful em- 
 bellishments, can not fail to render it deservedly popular. — W. H. Pile, Principal 
 of the N. E. Grammar School, Philadelphia. 
 
 $Uovnz'8 Movth ^mertcau ^tlas; 
 
 Comprising a complete Series of accurate and legibly-engraved 
 Maps of North America, printed by the cerographic process, and 
 colored. Folio, half Roan. $2 75. 
 
 This much-needed atlas will be welcomed by all engaged in teaching in colleges, 
 schools, &c. ; it is an admirable help in geographical studies; and thousands who 
 are constantly requiring the help of a competent and reliable atlas will find this just 
 to their purpose, and excessively cheap in the bargain. 
 
 meufotcfc's JFtrst J^rttictíJÍes of (Efiemtstrg ; 
 
 Being a familiar Introduction to the Study of that Science. With 
 Questions. Engravings. 18mo, half Sheep. 75 cents. 
 
 The principle by which the author has been governed was to admit few, if any, 
 hard terms in the text, supplying their place with as plain language and intelligible 
 explanations as possible. In a word, more information or instruction will be found 
 in this little work than can be collected from many publications of greater pretensions 
 and of four times its bulk. 
 
WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 9 
 
 Henfotcft's practical fechantes. 
 
 Applications of the Science of Mechanics to Practical Purposes. 
 Engravings. 18mo, half Roan. 90 cents. 
 
 This volume is alike creditable to the writer, and to the state of science in this 
 country. — American Quarterly Review. 
 
 ttentofcfe'3 JFtrsi principie» o£ Statural Prf= 
 logophg ; 
 
 Being a familiar Introduction to the Study of that Science. With 
 Questions. Engravings. 18mo, half Roan. 75 cents. 
 
 This work contains treatises on the sciences of statics and hydrostatics, comprising 1 
 the whole theory of equilibrium. It is intended for the use of those who have no 
 knowledge of mathematics, or who have made but little progress in their mathemat- 
 ical reading. Throughout the whole, an attempt has been made to bring the princi- 
 ples of exact science to bear upon questions of practical application in the arts, and to 
 place the discussion of them within the reach of those connected with manufactures. 
 
 iiotter'a ¡Political economy: 
 
 Its Objects, Uses, and Principles ; considered with reference to the 
 Condition of the American People. With a Summary for the Use 
 of Students. ISmo, half Roan, 50 cents ; Muslin, 45 cents. 
 
 Two objects have been kept in view in preparing this work; first, to provide a 
 treatise for general readers adapted to the times, and especially to the wants of our 
 country, which should not be encumbered unnecessarily with controversial matters, 
 or with abstract discussions ; secondly, to furnish a cheap and convenient manual for 
 seminaries, in which larger and more expensive text-books could not well be used. 
 
 JJarfccr's Sifts to SSufiUsk (Eomposttton, 
 
 Prepared for the Student of ail Grades, embracing Specimens and 
 Examples of School and College Exercises, and most of the higher 
 Departments of English Composition, both in Prose and Verse. 
 12mo, Sheep, 90 cents ; Muslin, 80 cents. (A new Edition, with 
 Additions and Improvements.) 
 
 We have been long familiar with this excellent volume, and do not conceive it pos- 
 sible (ox any improvement to be made on it. To those who have never had an oppor- 
 tunity of judging of its merits, we would say, by all means [procure a copy, for there 
 is nothing like it in the whole range of elementary school-books. — Commercial Adv. 
 
 Harfeer's (geographical Questions, 
 
 Adapted for the Use of Morse's, Woodbridge's, Worcester's, Mitch- 
 ell's, Field's, Malte Brim's, Smith's, Ólney's, Goodrich's, and 
 other Collections of Maps. To which is added, a concise De- 
 scription of the Terrestrial Globe. 12mo, Muslin. 25 cents. 
 
 These Questions are designed to simplify the study of this important science, by 
 means of the useful and important process of classification. They maybe used with- 
 out subjecting a class of pupils to the expense frequently attendant on a required 
 uniformity of maps. These Questions are already used in some of the leading schools 
 in New England. 
 
 barker's outlines of (general f^istors. 
 
 12mo, Sheep. Si 00. 
 
 The object of this work is to present the rudiments of history, ancient and modem, 
 together with aids for the study of the philosophy of history. It is novel in plan, and 
 well deserves the attention of students and teachers generally. As a common-place 
 book of history, or book of reference, it can not fail of being well received. The au- 
 thor has earned already considerable literary fame by his very useful volume, "Aids 
 to English Composition." — Commercial Advertiser. 
 
10 WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 
 
 Or, Elements of a new System of Mental Philosophy, on the Basis 
 of Consciousness and Common Sense. Designed for Colleges 
 and Academies. 12mo, Muslin. SI 00. 
 
 This production, the fruit of some 20 years' scholastic experience, avowedly owe» 
 its existence to the desire of the author to promote the cause of truth and science 
 U exhibits in a lucid manner the analysis of mental philosophy as the basis of meta- 
 physical science and religious belief. 
 
 «^aiíteltí's (tompsvftium of tornan antr <&vt* 
 cían ^nttqutttes, 
 
 Including a Sketch of Ancient Mythology. With Maps, &c. 12mo, 
 Muslin. 37£ cents. 
 
 Mu£t of the works in use which treat of the antiquities of Greece and Rome are 
 so copiojs and so intermingled with Greek or Latin quotations, that, though they may 
 be highly valuable to the classical scholar as works of reference, they are rendered 
 less useful to the classical pupil as common text-books. On this account, the study 
 of classical antiquities has been mostly confined to the higher classes. The present 
 volume is designed for general use in our common schools, but it is believed to be so 
 comprehensive and elevated in its character, as to be acceptable iu academies and 
 high schools as well as private use. 
 
 SalíteUTiS JFtnst Mook in Spanish; 
 
 Or, a Practical Introduction to the Study of the Spanish Language. 
 Adapted to every Class of Learners, containing full Instructions 
 in Pronunciation ; a Grammar ; Reading Lessons and a Vocabu- 
 lary. 
 
 I have never met witn a work professing to teach any foreign language which com- 
 bines so many excellent qualities, and is so well adapted for all classes of learners. 
 It is the precise manner in which I have been giving instruction to classes of pupils 
 in English, French, and Spanish for many years in the cities of Paris, London, and 
 Madrid, teaching what is most important to know. — Don Julio Cirilo de Molina, 
 Professor of Languages in the Cities of Madrid, Paris, and London. 
 
 Mo$Wn SEiements of lUittortc anil Utterarg 
 (Ertttctsm, 
 
 With copious Practical Exercises and Examples. Including, also, 
 a Succinct History of the English Language, and of British and 
 American Literature, from the earliest to the present Times. 
 On the Basis of the recent Works of Alexander Reid and Robert 
 Connell ; with large Additions from other Sources. Compiled 
 and arranged by J. R. Boyd, A.M. 12mo, half Bound. 50 cents. 
 
 It is very happily adapted to aid teachers in training the minds of the young to act 
 with clearness, and to give a perspicuous and elegant expression to their thoughts in 
 written language. — Philadelphia Christian Observer. 
 
 My decided conviction of its merits prompts meto recommend it to the examination 
 of teachers, parents, and all who feel an interest in promoting the noble and blessed 
 career of popular education. — S. N. Sweet, Author of " Elocution." 
 
 Eogtí'js SSclecttc í&orai Puiosopfig. 
 
 Prepared for Literary Institutions and General Use. 12mo, Muslin 
 gilt. 75 cents. 
 
 The book before us is exceedingly valuable, both for private use and academies and 
 high schools generally. Though not so able a work as Wayland's " Moral Science," 
 "it exhibits in detail the greater and the lesser moralities of life," and is therefore 
 oetter adapted for union district schools. It can not be studied too much, by youth 
 especially. — Western Literary Messenger 
 
WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 11 
 
 JprottWt'ja JJiautuifa "m\z Capture." 
 
 A Comedy. With English Notes, for the Use of Students. By 
 John Procdkit, D.D. 18mo, Muslin. 37^ cents. 
 
 Plautus possessed very happy talents for a comic writer, a rich flow of excellent 
 wit, happy invention, and all the force uf comic expression.— Eschb. 
 
 Motl antr (EhaysaFa Mzto JFrrndi Grammar, 
 
 With Questions, and a Key in English. To which are added, Les- 
 sons in Reading, &c. 12mo, Muslin. 75 cents. 
 
 The Grammar of Noel and Chapsal is universally considered to be the best, and is 
 the one most generally used in our academies. The form of question and answer 
 adopted by Mrs. Seaman, with the translated key at the end, are evident improve- 
 ments. 1 do not hesitate to recommend the work.— C. Le Febvke. 
 
 I have so high an opinion of the judgment of M. Le Febvre, that any work which 
 meets with his approbation will command mine. — Charles Anthon. 
 
 3UÍIV8 ILoQky l&attoctnatitoc autr KnTmctt&e; 
 
 Being a connected View of the Principles of Evidence and Methods 
 of Scientific Investigation. 8vo, Sheep, $2 25; Muslin, $2 00. 
 
 A production, we predict, which will distinguish the age ; which no scholar should 
 be without ; but which, above all, should be the maMftal of every lawyer. The style 
 is, in our judgment, a model ; in thought as in method, clear as crystal ; in expres- 
 sion, prcise as the symbolical language of algebra. — Democratic Review. 
 
 faaurg's Jlríncíples of eloquence* 
 
 With an Introduction, hy the Rev. Dr. Potte-r. l8mo, half Roan, 
 50 cents ; Muslin, 45 cents. 
 
 This manual is decidedly the best which has yet appeared upon the subject, and 
 , as it were, an excellent emblem of the oratory on which it chiefly dwells: admi- 
 ible in its arrangement, full of good sense in much of its detail, with a felicitous and 
 dicious application of the principles of Cicero and Quintilian to his subject. — Quar- 
 rly Review. 
 
 fÉjacfelrg's ^Treatise on &lscfcra, 
 
 Containing the latest Improvements. 8vo, Sheep. Si 50. 
 
 I regard it as a very valuable accession to mathematical science. It is remarkably 
 full and complete.— É. S. Snell, Professor of Mathematics, Amherst College, Mas 
 
 I deem it a work of great value to the mathematical student, and better suited to 
 the wants of private learners, and all others who wish to obtain a thorough knowl- 
 edge of the science, than any other work with which I am acquainted. — Elijah A. 
 Smith, Corresponding ¡Secretary of Queen's County Common School Association. 
 
 fgacfcltg's School Sllgcijra, 
 
 Containing the latest Improvements. 8vo, Muslin. 75 cents. 
 
 fgacfcleg's 3Hlcmcutari> (bourse of dKeomctrg- 
 
 For the Use of Schools and Colleges. 12mo, Sheep. 75 cents. 
 
 Like the previous works by the same author, the materials are the best, the in- 
 struction intelligible, and the work as a whole such as will prove well adapted to the 
 use of students. His treatises on Algebra have received high commendation by dis- 
 tinguished teachers. — Observer. 
 
 2Loomís'¿s ^romctrg ant* Conic Sections. 
 
 8vo, Sheep. 81 00. 
 
 Prof. Loomis has endeavored to combine the excellences of Euclid and Legendre, 
 following the arrangement of the latter and the more logical method of demonstration 
 of the former. The enunciations are conciss and clear, and the processes neither too 
 brief nor too diffuse. The part treating of solid geometry is undoubtedly superior, 
 in clearness and arrangement, to any other elementary treatise among us. The 
 •whole work is neatly printed, brief, compact, and, we should suppose, well adapted 
 to the purposes of elementary study. — Evangelist. 
 
12 WORKS FOR COLLEGES AND DISTRICT SCHOOLS. 
 
 aLoomfe's 8Treatt.se on ^Irjefcra. 
 
 8vo, Sheep. $1 25. 
 
 Prof. Looniis's Treatise on Algebra is an excellent elementary worit. It is sufli 
 ciently extensive for ordinary purposes, and is characterized throughout by a happy 
 combination of brevity and clearness.— Alexis Caswell, D.D., Professor of Math- 
 ematics and Natural Philosophy in Brown University. 
 
 I have carefully examined Prof. Looniis's Algebra, and think it better adapted for 
 a text-book for college students than any other I have seen. — C. Gill, Professor of 
 Mathematics in. St. Paul's College. 
 
 <£larfe's elements of ^Igcisra: 
 
 Embracing also the Theory and Application of Logarithms ; together 
 with an Appendix, containing Infinite Series, the General Theory 
 of Equations, and the most approved Methods of resolving the 
 higher Equations. 8vo, Sheep extra. $1 00. 
 
 The object of this treatise is to present to the student a full and systematic text 
 book of practical and theoretical elementary algebra. Within a brief compass the au- 
 thor has embraced a more comprehensive view of the science than is to be found iu 
 any similar work. These features can not fail to commend the book to the notice of 
 teachers ; the work, indeed, has already been extensively adopted in numerous acad- 
 emies and schools in different áífctions of the country. 
 
 %£'mtgn ¡Platonic ^lirologg* 
 
 Plato contra Atheos. Plato against the Atheists ; or, the Tenth 
 Book of the Dialogue on Laws, accompanied with Critical Notes, 
 and followed by extended Dissertations on some of the main 
 Points of the Platonic Philosophy and Theology, especially as 
 compared with the Holy Scriptures. 12mo, Muslin gilt. $1 50. 
 
 No more acceptable or timely contribution to the cause of sound classical education 
 could possibly have been made than this. The leading object of the work, even par- 
 amount to its relation to education, seems to have been to furnish an antidote to the 
 progressive atheism of the present age. — Courier and Enquirer. 
 
 Professor Lewis has, in this work, provided a rich feast both for the student and 
 the Christian. — New York Evangelist. 
 
 %tt'8 elements of ^colocig for Jugular Q&nz ; 
 
 Containing a Description of the Geological Formations and Mineral 
 Resources of the United States. Engravings. 18mo, half Sheep. 
 50 cents. 
 
 This work has received the approbation of the ablest geologists in the country, and 
 is now the standard text-book on this subject in many of the first academies and high 
 schools in the United Stales. It was prepared expressly for the use of schools, but 
 is no less adapted to the wants of the general reader. Beginning with the simplest 
 elements of the science, it proceeds to give a clear and systematic account of the 
 changes which have taken place upon the earth's surface, and the causes by which 
 they have been brought about. It is, moreover, the only work which gives within a 
 reasorible compass a fall account of the geological structure and mineral resources 
 of the United States. It is no less comprehensive in its scope than accurate in detail : 
 che scientific reputation of the author is sufficient guarantee for the general excellence 
 und superiority of the work. 
 
 Burfte's l&m&v on the ^uftlime autr Beautiful. 
 
 A. Philosophical Inquiry into the Origin of our Ideas of the Sublim6 
 and Beautiful. With an Introductory Discourse concerning Taste. 
 Edited by Abraham Mills. 12mo, Muslin. 75 cents. 
 
 As a writer, whether we consider the splendor of his diction, the richness and va- 
 riety of his ; magery, or the boundless store of knowledge which he displays, it mui 
 •e acknowledged that there are few who equal, and none who transcend him. 
 
Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111